JP2024071681A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: There is provided displacement means displaceable to a first position in which game balls can enter second ball entry means and a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition in a specific game state occurring on the basis that a result of determination by determination means is a specific determination result, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position on the basis of satisfaction of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is positioned in the first position by first displacement control. When game balls enter first ball entry means, a predetermined game value is granted to a player. A first mode based on execution of determination, a second mode based on occurrence of a specific game state, and a third mode based on predetermined entry of game balls into the second ball entry means may at least occur. Accordingly, an interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines, such as pachinko machines.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the player's interest in the game by suggesting to the player that they have won a lottery depending on the content of the variable presentation that is being executed.

JP 2006-345901 A

In gaming machines like the one above, there is a demand for further improvements in the entertainment value of the game.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention has a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is established, and a specific discrimination means is provided based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. The ball-entry device has a means capable of generating a game state, a second ball-entry means that is different from the first ball-entry means and into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, a displacement means that can be displaced to a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball-entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the second ball-entry means than the first position, and a displacement control means that can at least perform a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position, and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position.

The displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position due to the first displacement control.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that a predetermined value is awarded to the player when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, and is configured so that at least a first mode based on the determination being made by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entry into the second ball entry means can occur.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, there is provided a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball into a gaming area, a first ball entry means into which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, an acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be established based on the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means is established, a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means, and a discrimination means capable of executing a discrimination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is established, and a specific gaming state is determined based on the result of the discrimination by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. a means for generating a ball that can enter the ball; a second ball entry means that is different from the first ball entry means and into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter; a displacement means that can displace the ball to a first position where the game ball can enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first position; and a displacement control means that can perform at least a first displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the second position to the first position and a second displacement control that displaces the displacement means located at the first position to the second position.

The displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position due to the first displacement control.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that when a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, a predetermined value is awarded to the player, and is configured so that at least a first mode based on the determination made by the determination means can occur.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that at least a second mode can occur based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured so that at least a third mode can occur based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.

This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. 6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6(a). 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A. 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as seen in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6 . 8 is a front perspective view of the operating device as seen in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7 . FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 14(a) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device along line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. 14(a). FIG. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. 17A is a front view of the drive device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the drive device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A. FIG. FIG. 18A is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and FIG. 18B is a side view of the left disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb in FIG. 4A and 4B are front views of the release member and the rotating claw member. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). A partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in Figure 38. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 13A is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, FIG. 13B is a side view of a rotating plate member, and FIG. 13C is a side view of a release member. 4A and 4B are side views of the release member, the rotating plate member, and the slide claw member. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). FIG. 13 is a side view of the tilting device according to the third embodiment. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. FIG. 13 is a side view of the tilting device according to the fourth embodiment. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. 1A and 1B are side views of the operation device. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of an operating device according to a fifth embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the lower frame member and the vibration device. 59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and (c) is a partial top view of the lower frame member taken in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). 59(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of a transmission device 5410 and a housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a). FIG. 4A is a front perspective view of a right disc cam, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. FIG. 65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. 65(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam as seen in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66(a). 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and FIG. 67(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67(a). 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68(a). FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device according to a sixth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a second transmission member of the left disk cam. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6( a ). 13A is a front view of a right disc cam in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74(a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74(a), and FIG. 74(b) is a partial side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74(a). 76(a) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a). 77(a) is a front view of the engaging member, and (b) is a side view of the engaging member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77(a). 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam, (b) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in Figure 78(a), (c) is a front view of the right disc cam, (d) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in Figure 78(c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in Figure 78(e). 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an eighth embodiment. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame opened (deployed) relative to the outer frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the state (deployed) in which the inner frame is open relative to the outer frame and the back pack is open relative to the inner frame. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the inner frame closed against the outer frame and the front frame open (deployed). This is a front view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. 1 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, showing components arranged below the window portion of the front frame in exploded view; FIG. 1 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame, showing the components arranged below the window portion of the front frame in an exploded view; FIG. 1A is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame, and FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the binding movable member, showing the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member side by side. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94(a). 95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95(a). 96(a) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of Figure 96(a), (c) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member and the harness, and (d) is a schematic top view of Figure 96(c). 13A and 13B are schematic top views of the front frame, inner frame, binding movable member and harness, which diagrammatically illustrate the binding movable member and harness. FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region. FIG. This is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112(a). 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113(a). 1A is a side view of the right panel unit, FIG. 1B is a rear view of the right panel unit, and FIG. 1C is a side view of the right panel unit. 115(a) is a schematic side view of the light-guiding member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light-guiding member taken along line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115(a). FIG. 4 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. 1A is a rear view of the front assembly, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the rear assembly. (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in Figure 124(a), (c) is a top view of the speaker assembly taken along the direction of arrow CXXIVc in Figure 124(a), and (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly taken along the direction of arrow CXXIVd in Figure 124(a). 124(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame and upper edge plate member taken along line CXXVa-CXXVa in Figure 124(a), and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, rear assembly, upper frame member, main body frame and upper edge plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb in Figure 124(a). FIG. 2 is an exploded front oblique view of the game board and inner frame. (a) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. 127(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127(b). 1A and 1B are side views of a board support device and a game board, each of which is a schematic diagram showing the board support device and the game board. 4A is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. 4A is a front perspective view of the board surface support device, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device. FIG. FIG. 4A and 4B are side views of the board surface support device. 4A and 4B are side views of the board surface support device. A partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 86. A partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 86. A partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 86. A partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in Figure 86. FIG. FIG. 1A is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. 1A and 1B are exploded front perspective views of a ball launching unit. 1A to 1C are front views of the ball launching unit showing the state of balls being sent out by the ball sending device in chronological order. FIG. (a) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in Figure 146 (a). 147(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member, showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state shown in FIG. 147(a). A partial front view of the ball launching unit, inner rail and outer rail after the ball is launched. FIG. This is an exploded front oblique view of the performance operation unit. This is an exploded front oblique view of the performance operation unit. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the performance operation unit. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the petal movement device taken along line CLIV-CLIV in Figure 153. FIG. FIG. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member, and the slide member, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the petals, the flat plate member, and the slide member. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. 4A and 4B are rear perspective views of a slide member and a drive motor. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a central shaft rotation device and a loose fitting device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotation device and the loose fitting device. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device, the driving arm member, and the driven arm member. FIG. An exploded front oblique view of the back panel, side base material, and second performance member. An exploded front oblique view of the drive side arm member, slide plate, and second performance member. 1 is a front view of the petal movement device, the forward and backward movement unit, and the back panel. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the petal operating device and the forward/backward operating unit. FIG. 1 is a front view of the petal movement device, the forward and backward movement unit, and the back panel. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the petal operating device and the forward/backward operating unit. FIG. 1 is a front view of the petal movement device, the forward and backward movement unit, and the back panel. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the petal operating device and the forward/backward operating unit. FIG. (a) is a front oblique view of the petal movement device, (b) is a front view of the petal movement device, (c) is a front view showing the petal movement device in a transparent manner with the central shaft rotation device omitted, and (d) is a front view of the slit member and rotating plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal movement device, (c) is a rear view of the petals and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear oblique view of the petal movement device. (a) is a front oblique view of the petal movement device, (b) is a front view of the petal movement device, (c) is a front view showing the petal movement device in a transparent manner with the central shaft rotation device omitted, and (d) is a front view of the slit member and rotating plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal movement device, (c) is a rear view of the petals and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear oblique view of the petal movement device. (a) is a front oblique view of the petal movement device, (b) is a front view of the petal movement device, (c) is a front view showing the petal movement device in a transparent manner with the central shaft rotation device omitted, and (d) is a front view of the slit member and rotating plate. (a) is a front view of the rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of the petal movement device, (c) is a rear view of the petals and flat plate member, and (d) is a rear oblique view of the petal movement device. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a ninth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit. FIG. 2 is a front view of the ball launching unit. FIG. 23 is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit according to a tenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit. A front view of the inner frame and dish passage forming member in the 11th embodiment. FIG. FIG. 13A and 13B are partial enlarged front views of the foul ball passage. A partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage. FIG. 23 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device according to the twelfth embodiment. 1A and 1B are front views of a petal movement device. 5A and 5B are partially enlarged front views of a slit member and a slide member. FIG. 1A and 1B are front views of a petal movement device. FIG. FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in a modification of the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. FIG. 23 is a front oblique view of the operating device according to the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. 1A and 1B are front perspective views of an operating device. (a) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in Figure 203(a), (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, (d) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device along line CCIIId-CCIIId in Figure 203(a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in Figure 203(a). 87(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. 15A is a partial rear view of the front frame in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 15B and 15C are rear views of the fraud detection device. 206(a) is a partial rear view of a right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, (b) is a partial enlarged oblique view of a light-guiding member that typically represents an upwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in region CCVIb of Figure 206(a), (c) is a partial enlarged oblique view of a light-guiding member that typically represents a downwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in region CCVIc of Figure 206(a), (d) is a partial enlarged oblique view of a light-guiding member that typically represents a downwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in region CCVId of Figure 206(a), and (e) is a partial enlarged oblique view of a light-guiding member that typically represents an upwardly facing concave portion recessed in the light-guiding member in region CCVIe of Figure 206(a). FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the seventeenth embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 207(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. 207(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device taken along line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG. 207. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device. FIG. 4A is a front perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover, and FIG. 4B is a rear perspective view of the left front cover and the right front cover. An exploded front oblique view of the lower tray unit. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the lower tray unit. An exploded front oblique view of the lower tray unit. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the lower tray unit. 4A is a schematic cross-sectional view of a right-side reinforcing rib, and FIG. 4B is a schematic cross-sectional view of a left-side reinforcing rib. (a) is a top view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a front view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a right side view of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (b) is a left side view of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow R. A rear view of the lower tray unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in Figure 229(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in Figure 229(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit taken along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in Figure 229(a). This is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in Figure 229 (a). FIG. FIG. This is an exploded front oblique view of the upper performance device. This is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper performance device. This is an exploded front oblique view of the upper performance device. This is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper performance device. 1A is a front view of the rear unit, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the illumination board. FIG. FIG. 241A is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated board, the rear support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG. 241, and FIG. 241B is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated board, the rear support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb in FIG. 241. 241, (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated board, the rear support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in Figure 241, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated board, the rear support member, and the acoustic device taken along the line CCXLVb-CCXLVb in Figure 241. 241, (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated board, the rear support member, and the acoustic device taken along line CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa in FIG. 241, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member, the illuminated board, the rear support member, and the acoustic device taken along line CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb in FIG. FIG. 2 is a schematic side view of the upper performance device. A cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in Figure 241 (a). FIG. FIG. 4A is a front view of a partition unit and a guided unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the partition unit and the guided unit. 1A is a front view of a partition unit, and FIG. 1B is a rear view of the partition unit. 4A is a front view of the board guide unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the board guide unit. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit and the guided unit taken along line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in Figure 251(b), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit and the guided unit taken along line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in Figure 251(b), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit and the guided unit taken along line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in Figure 251(b). FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a partition unit and a guided unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of a partition unit and a guided unit. 4A is a front view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member, and FIG. 4B is a rear view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of an optical transmission unit and an outer frame member, and FIG. 1B is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit and the outer frame member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit. (a) is a front view of a transparent cylindrical member, (b) is a top view of the transparent cylindrical member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent cylindrical member, (d) is a right side view of the transparent cylindrical member as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member. (a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit, (d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and (e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit. A partial cross-sectional view of the rear unit, acoustic device, and optical transmission unit taken along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in Figure 241. 1A is a schematic front view showing the arrangement of a first illumination section, and FIG. 1B is a schematic front view showing the arrangement of light visible through an optical transmission unit. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. (a) is a front view of the base member and the illuminated board, (b) is a left side view of the base member, (c) is a right side view of the base member, (d) is a top view of the base member, (e) is a bottom view of the base member, and (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member and the illuminated board taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in Figure 269(a). FIG. FIG. 1A is a front perspective view of a light receiving member, FIG. 1B is a front view of the light receiving member, and FIG. 1C is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. 272(a) is a partial enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a), and FIG. 272(b) is a partial enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b). 1A is a rear perspective view of a light receiving member, FIG. 1B is a rear view of the light receiving member, and FIG. 1C is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. 274(b), (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal presentation device taken along line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member taken along line CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb in FIG. 274(b). FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member, the curved plate member, and the cover member. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member, the curved plate member, and the cover member. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, illuminated board, and light-receiving member taken along line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in Figure 272(b), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, illuminated board, and light-receiving member taken along line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb in Figure 272(b), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the base member, illuminated board, and light-receiving member taken along line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc in Figure 272(b). A schematic diagram of a base member, an illumination board, and a light receiving member, showing a cross section of Figure 280(a). FIG. 23 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an 18th embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. 284(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance device taken along line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in Figure 282, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination board of the performance device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCLXXXIVb in Figure 284(a). A side view of the cover in the 19th embodiment. This is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit in the 20th embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in Figure 229. An exploded front oblique view of the front frame, operating device and lower tray unit in the 21st embodiment. An exploded front oblique view of the lower tray unit. This is an exploded rear oblique view of the lower tray unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor and the covering member. FIG. FIG. (a) is a top view of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in Figure 296 (a). A rear view of the lower tray unit. This is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit along line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII in Figure 296 (a). (a) is a partial top view schematic diagram of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial side view schematic diagram of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in Figure 299 (a). (a) is a partial top view schematic diagram of the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial side view schematic diagram of the lower tray unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CCCb in Figure 300 (a). A partial top view schematic diagram of the lower tray unit, showing the lower tray unit. A front view of the game board of a pachinko machine in the 22nd embodiment. This is a front oblique view of a pachinko machine showing the front frame opened (deployed) relative to the inner frame. This is a front oblique view of the pachinko machine with the front frame removed. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board, the center frame, the lottery unit, and the operation unit. FIG. 1 is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. FIG. 307(a) is an enlarged front view of the game board in range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307(a). 1 is an exploded front oblique view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. 1 is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-shaped member. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit. 312(a) is a side view of the engaging member viewed from the rotation axis direction, (b) is a front view of the engaging member viewed in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in Figure 312(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the engaging member taken along line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in Figure 312(b). FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member, the engagement member and the drive unit. 1A and 1B are side views of an electric accessory, an engagement member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. 312(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the lottery unit taken along a line corresponding to line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312(b). 302A is a top view of the operational unit, and FIG. 302B is a side view of the operational unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. A rear view of the game board and the operating unit. A partial cross-sectional view of the game board and operating unit taken along line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in Figure 302. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a first operating unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit; FIG. FIG. 331(a) is a front view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate taken along line CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb in FIG. 331(a). 332(a) is a front view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the illuminated board and the board fixing plate taken along line CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb in FIG. 332(a). FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit and the rear unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit of the first operating unit; FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of a front unit and a rear unit of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a first displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member; 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. 319. (a) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, and (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc in FIG. FIG. 344(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. 344(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 344(a). 13A and 13B are front views of a first operating unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit. 13A and 13B are front views of a first operating unit. 13A and 13B are front views of a first operating unit. 13A and 13B are front views of a first operating unit. 13A and 13B are front views of a first operating unit. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the pin gear and the same phase member, FIG. 1B is a front perspective view of the pin gear and the same phase member on the left side, and a rear perspective view of the pin gear and the same phase member on the right side. FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of a second displacement member; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member; 13A and 13B are rear views of the rear unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the rear unit. FIG. This is a cross-sectional view of the rear unit taken along line CCCLIX-CCCLIX in Figure 356(a). FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of a pin gear and a same phase member based on an initial angle. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of a second operating unit and a rear case. FIG. 2 is a front exploded perspective view of a second operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit; A front exploded oblique view of the performance unit. A rear exploded oblique view of the performance unit. An exploded front oblique view of the rotating body of the performance unit. An exploded rear oblique view of the rotating body of the performance unit. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the first rotating member. 1A is an exploded front perspective view of a support portion, and FIG. 1B is an exploded front perspective view of a second support portion. 1A is an exploded perspective rear view of a support portion, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective rear view of a second support portion. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper cover and the box-shaped portion. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper cover and the box-shaped portion. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped portion, the upper transmission mechanism, and the lower transmission mechanism. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the box-shaped portion, the upper transmission mechanism, and the lower transmission mechanism. 1A is a top view of the upper cover portion, the box-shaped portion, the upper transmission mechanism, and the lower transmission mechanism, and FIG. 1B is a front view of the upper cover portion, the box-shaped portion, the upper transmission mechanism, and the lower transmission mechanism. (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 376 (a), (c) is a front view of the first rotating member, and (d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 376 (c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 377(a), (c) is a front view of the first rotating member, and (d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 377(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 378(a), (c) is a front view of the first rotating member, and (d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 378(c). (a) is a front view of the first rotating member, (b) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 379(a), (c) is a front view of the first rotating member, and (d) is a top view of the first rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 379(c). (a) is a front view of the performance unit, (b) is a top view of the performance unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 380 (a), (c) is a front view of the performance unit, and (d) is a top view of the performance unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 380 (c). (a) is a front view of the performance unit, (b) is a top view of the performance unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 381 (a), (c) is a front view of the performance unit, and (d) is a top view of the performance unit as viewed in the direction of arrow D in Figure 381 (c). FIG. 4 is a front view of the annular front cover and the rotating body. FIG. 23 is a schematic top view showing a first rotating member in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 24 is a rear view of the front unit in the twenty-fourth embodiment. 339(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit in the 25th embodiment taken along a line corresponding to line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along a line corresponding to line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 344(a). 26(a) and 26(b) are front views of a displacement device according to a twenty-sixth embodiment. 27(a) and 27(b) are rear views of the rear unit in the twenty-seventh embodiment. FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the display area of the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode displayed by the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a back mode with a low expectation of a special probability state among the back modes displayed by the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a back mode with a high expectation of a special probability state among the back modes displayed by the third pattern display device in the first control example. This figure shows an example of the display mode of the rear mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, in which the continuation of the special state is confirmed at least until all reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation are consumed. A figure showing an example of a display mode at the start of a special probability continuation suggestion effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of an attack pattern with a low expectation in the special probability continuation suggestion effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of an attack pattern with a high expectation in the special probability continuation suggestion effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a schematic diagram of the transition of the state after the end of a special jackpot in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode during execution of the press-to-stop effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the player performs the first operation (press) on the PUSH button during execution of the press-to-stop effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of a chance charge prompting effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during execution of a chance charge effect executed after the chance charge pattern stops on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the end of the chance charge presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode when the spirit gauge is consumed displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing schematic changes in the presentation pattern over time during execution of a variable display presentation in which a press-to-stop presentation is set in the first control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode during execution of an interrupt rapid-fire effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the sound output mode while a rapid tap operation is being performed on the PUSH button during execution of an interrupt rapid tap performance in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the correspondence between the timing of the rapid tap operation and the subtraction number of the monster during execution of an interrupt rapid tap performance in the first control example. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing schematic changes over time in the presentation form of a variable display presentation in which an interrupt rapid-hit presentation is set in the first control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of the display mode of the pending batch change presentation displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode when a player presses the PUSH button during execution of the pending batch change effect displayed on the third pattern display device in the first control example. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters in the first control example. 4A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and FIG. 4B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the rules for the special pattern jackpot random number table in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the rules for the normal jackpot random number table in the first control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the rules for the fall-down lottery table in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the first control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the first control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the normal table that constitutes the variation pattern selection table in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the table for special rate change and time reduction that constitutes the fluctuation pattern selection table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a state transition method in a first control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A diagram showing the specified contents of the rear mode lottery table in the first control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the reserved change lottery table in the first control example, and (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the change point calculation table in the first control example. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the batch change lottery table in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the chance charge lottery table in the first control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the contents of the continuation suggestion performance selection table in the first control example. A diagram showing the prescribed contents of the interrupt rapid-hit lottery table in the first control example. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. FIG. 13A to 13C are diagrams illustrating images displayed when the power is turned on in a first control example. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rear surface A in the first control example, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram illustrating rear surfaces B to D in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display data table in the first control example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a transfer data table in the first control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a drawing list in a first control example. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the audio output device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern change process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the start winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal pattern change processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a through-gate passing process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in a main control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an abnormality process executed by an MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing the start-up process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the performance update processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the press stop performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the interrupt rapid-fire performance processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing a batch change performance process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a charge consumption process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a press detection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a stop operation detection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a repeated operation detection process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a change operation detection process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a first control example. A flowchart showing the winning information command processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a pending notice lottery process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a hit-related command processing executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the continuation suggestion performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a rear mode lottery process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. A flowchart showing the performance mode selection process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 1A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example, and FIG. 1B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in the first control example. 10 is a flowchart showing an interrupt command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in a display control device in a first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example. (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in an audio output device in the first control example, and (b) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by an MPU in an audio output device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing a repeated hit sound command process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an interrupt command process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in the first control example. 11 is a flowchart showing an audio setting process executed by an MPU in the audio output device in a first control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in temple search mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode when small prize A is won during temple search displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example when a large jackpot during the special probability mode is won, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example when a small jackpot during the special probability mode A is won. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a lost mode at a specified timing (99th spin after a jackpot) displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a pattern in which a fall-down win occurs during the lost mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode during dialogue mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example. 13A and 13B are figures showing an example of a display mode during dialogue mode displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of a push-down effect among the variable operation effects displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of the display mode of a push-up effect among the variable operation effects displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example. A figure showing an example of the display mode of a touch effect, one of the variable operation effects displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example. (a) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during the pending change waiting performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example, and (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode during the pending change waiting performance displayed on the third pattern display device in the second control example. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing schematic diagrams illustrating the change over time in the presentation pattern of the variable presentation (special winning pattern during the first period) in the second control example. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing schematic diagrams illustrating the change over time in the presentation pattern of the variable presentation (special winning pattern during the second period) in the second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a state transition method in a second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a schematic configuration of various counters in a second control example. 13A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and FIG. 13B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the 2 table for the special chart 1 jackpot in the second control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the 2 table for the special chart 2 jackpot in the second control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the small prize random number 2 table in the second control example, (b) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the small prize type selection 2 table in the second control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic representation of the contents of the time-saving end condition selection table in the second control example. 1A is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example. (a) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the corresponding relationship between each pattern in the second control example, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the dialogue mode related table set in the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (c) is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the dialogue state setting table in the second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the character selection table in the second control example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the prescribed contents of the line selection table in the second control example. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the specified contents of the operation performance switching table in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern variation start processing 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the off-time variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the jackpot end process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the performance update process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the variable operation presentation processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a second period setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a press detection process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable operation detection process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing a variable performance management process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable operating means management process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing the pending notice lottery process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing an execution timing setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing the variable performance setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. A flowchart showing the normal performance setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in the second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing a dialogue mode setting process executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. 13 is a flowchart showing rear mode lottery process 2 executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example. A flowchart showing a rear mode setting process after time reduction is completed, which is executed by an MPU in a voice lamp control device in a second control example.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, FIG. 1 to FIG.
4, as a first embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "pachinko machine").
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in Fig. 1, the pachinko machine 10 comprises an outer frame 11, an outer shell of which is formed by combining wooden frames into a substantially rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side as viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be able to be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side on which the opening and closing is provided as an axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a number of nails and winning holes 63, 64, etc., is detachably attached from the back side to the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is equipped with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls to the front area of the game board 13, a launching rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13, and the like.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided.
(See Figure 1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the top and bottom of the left side, and the front frame 14 and lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are installed as the axis of opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and has a window 14c formed in a substantially elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top that protrudes to the front side, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward incline to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and this incline guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is, for example, connected to a third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
It is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the screen (see page 13) or changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with various light-emitting means such as lamps around its periphery (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means change and control the light-emitting state by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as a big win or a predetermined reach, and play a role in enhancing the presentation effect during the game. The periphery of the window portion 14c is provided with illumination units 29-3 with built-in light-emitting means such as LEDs.
In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as big win lamps, and when a big win or reach performance is reached, each of the illumination units 29 to 33 lights up or flashes by lighting or flashing the built-in LEDs, thereby notifying the player that a big win is occurring or that the player is in a reach just before the big win.
(See reference) At the upper left, there is provided an indicator lamp 34 which incorporates a light-emitting means such as an LED and can indicate when prize balls are being paid out and when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination unit 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see FIG. 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination units 29 to 33 to create a more brilliant appearance.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is disposed below the window portion 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43.
When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of ball lending unit 40, balls are lent out in accordance with the operation. Specifically, the degree display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and an internal LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loaned balls based on the information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and loaned balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 4
3 is operated when requesting the return of a card inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., a so-called cash machine, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to commonize a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a lower tray 50 formed in a generally box-like shape with an open top on the left side thereof for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17.
On the right side of the ball 10, there are provided an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 which are operated by a player to hit a ball into the front of the game board 13. The operating device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launching unit 112a, and a launch stop switch 51 for stopping the launch of the ball while the touch sensor 51a is being pressed.
The handle 51 is fitted with a touch sensor 51a and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by a change in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") that receives the balls discharged from the lower tray 50 placed below the lower tray 50. As described above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is provided with a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to numerous nails (not shown) and windmills (not shown) for guiding the ball, rails 61, 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67,
The display unit 80 is assembled to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can see the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.
0 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 is connected to the inner frame 12 through a window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
The structure of the game board 13 will be described below with reference mainly to FIG.

On the front of the game board 13, there is an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arcuate shape.
is installed in the front of the game board 13, and an arc-shaped inner rail 61 made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is installed inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played according to the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where winning slots and the like are located,
The area into which the launched ball flows.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13.
A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the top of the outer rail 62 (upper left of FIG. 2 ) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right of FIG. 2 ) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a force greater than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 69 and is bounced back toward the center while its force is reduced.

At the lower left side of the game area as viewed from the front (lower left side of Fig. 2), first symbol display devices 37A, 37B equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a seven-segment display are disposed. The first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information according to the various controls performed by the main control device 110 (see Fig. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B display information whether a ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 65.
The system is configured to be used depending on whether a prize is won at the prize slot 640.
When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated.
When the ball enters the second winning port 640, the first pattern display device 37B is configured to be activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls. The seven-segment display device also displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors.
The ED is configured so that each LED has a different light emission color (e.g., red, green, blue), and by combining these light emission colors, it is possible to indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 using a small number of LEDs.

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first prize slot 64 and the second prize slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 judges whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it judges there is a jackpot, it also judges the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be judged here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B have
Not only will the stopping pattern after the change indicate whether the lottery result is a jackpot or not,
In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is displayed.

Here, a "15R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and a "4R chance jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. Also, a "15R normal jackpot" refers to a chance jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15,
This is a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state and also results in a time-saving state for a specified number of fluctuations (e.g., 100 fluctuations).

Moreover, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during the so-called probability fluctuation (during the probability change), in other words, a game state in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. The high probability state (during the probability change) in this embodiment includes a game state in which the probability of a hit of the second symbol described later is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability change is not in progress, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than in the probability change. Furthermore, the time-saving state (during the time-saving state) in the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, only the probability of a hit of the second symbol is increased, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640. On the other hand, the normal state of the pachinko machine 10 refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability change state nor a time-saving state (
Neither the probability of winning the jackpot nor the probability of winning the second symbol has increased.

During the probability of winning or the time limit, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the second winning slot 64
The time for which the electric role 640a associated with 0 is opened is also changed, and is set to a longer time than during normal play. When the electric role 640a is in an open state (open state), the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 than when the electric role 640a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the probability change or time reduction, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big win lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability variation or time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second winning port 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times that the electric role 640a opens per win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability variation or time reduction, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the second winning port 640
At least one of the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 640a is opened per one win may be changed. Also, during the probability variation or the time reduction, the time when the electric role 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is opened and the number of times when the electric role 640a is opened per one win may not be changed, and only the probability of winning the second pattern may be changed to be higher than during the normal period.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, into which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by winning the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 (initial winning), and displays the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B.
The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 made up of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs a variable display of the third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the through gate 67, and a second pattern display device (not shown) made up of an LED that displays a variable display of the second pattern using the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 as a trigger. In addition, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbol rows, upper, middle, and lower, are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, while the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that, instead of a display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device performs a variable display in which a "circle" symbol and an "x" symbol as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is held. If the winning lottery results in a winning, the second symbol display device displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. If the winning lottery results in a losing, the second symbol display device displays a static "x" symbol after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

When the variable display in the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of "○"), the pachinko machine 10 activates the electric device 640a attached to the second winning hole 640.
is configured to be in an activated state (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability variable or time-saving mode than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability variable or time-saving mode, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during the normal game state.
Therefore, the chances of winning in the winning lottery are increased, and the player is given more chances to open the electric device 640a of the second winning port 640. Therefore, during the probability variation and the time reduction, the ball can be easily entered into the second winning port 640.

In addition, if the state is made such that the ball is likely to enter the second winning slot 640 during the probability variation or time reduction by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 640a for one win, etc., the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to be displayed is set shorter during the probability variation or time reduction than during normal play, the probability of winning may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of openings of the electric device 640a for one win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The through gates 67 are attached to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display unit 80, and are configured to allow a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gates 67, a lottery for a second symbol is held. After the lottery for a second symbol is held, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a win, a "○" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display, and if the lottery for a second symbol is a miss, a "×" symbol is displayed as the stopping symbol of the variable display.

The number of times that the balls pass through the through gate 67 is reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and is also displayed by turning on the second symbol reserved lamp (not shown). Four second symbol reserved lamps are provided, the maximum number of reserved balls, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, or by the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used.
The lighting of the symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Also, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).
The number of the first pattern display device 37A is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. The position where the through gate 67 is attached is not limited to the left or right of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example.
Since the number of reserved balls is indicated by 37B, the second symbol reserved lamp does not need to be lit.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can win is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball wins into this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and when the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, a second winning hole 640 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the first winning hole 64 as viewed from the front. When a ball enters the second winning hole 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on. When the second winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery for a big win is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). A display according to the lottery result is displayed on the first winning hole 640.
Shown by the pattern display device 37B.

In addition, each of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640 is also one of the winning holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole.
The number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640; however, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 640 may be five.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. This electric device 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and is usually in a closed state (reduced state) so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second symbol display device displays a "○" symbol as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 640a is in an open state (expanded state) so that the ball cannot enter the second winning opening 640.
This makes it easier to get into the 40.

As mentioned above, during the special and time-limited modes, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal modes.
In addition, the time it takes for the second pattern to change is short, so the second pattern will change to "○".
The pattern becomes easier to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric role 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation and time reduction, the time that the electric role 640a is open becomes longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability variation and time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 than during normal times.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can win a jackpot.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric device associated with the second winning port 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the first winning port 64, which does not have an electric device, so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot").
) It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by winning through the first winning slot 64, thereby gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery.

On the other hand, during the probability variation or time reduction, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the second winning port 64
Since the electric device 640a associated with number 0 is likely to be in an open state and it is easy to win at the second winning port 640, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the second winning port 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (the so-called "right hit"), pass through the through gate 67 to open the electric device, and aim for the ball to win at the second winning port 640, resulting in a 15R guaranteed jackpot.

In addition, since the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment is symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "hitting from the right" and for the second winning hole 640 by "hitting from the left". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment does not require the player to change the way of shooting the ball between "hitting from the left" and "hitting from the right" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way of shooting the ball.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in its approximate center. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery held due to a winning entry into the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is lit up to show the jackpot stopping pattern, and the stopping pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, indicating the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which it is easier for the ball to win. In this special game state,
The specific winning hole 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning hole 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning hole 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is being performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a may be provided in the game area, and when an LED corresponding to a big win is lit in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. Also, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the lower left side of the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, to the left of the variable display unit 80.

An attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the stamps, etc. affixed to the attachment space K1 can be viewed through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the outlet 71. The outlets 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

A large number of nails are set on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills are also provided.

As shown in Fig. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is a unit equipped with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is a unit equipped with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is a unit formed by the back pack 92 forming the protective cover and the payout unit 93. In addition, each control board is equipped with an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lotteries, a clock pulse generating circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. as necessary.

In addition, the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, the card unit connection board 116
are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively.
The box base 4 includes a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house the control devices and the boards.

Furthermore, the box base and box cover of the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected (connected by a crimping structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened. A sealing seal (not shown) is affixed to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and it is difficult to peel off the sealing seal in order to open the substrate boxes 100 and 102,
If an attempt is made to forcibly open the board box 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover side will be cut. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 appropriately pays out the required number of balls. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, and the launch control device 11
A variable resistor control knob 121 is provided on the power supply unit 115, and a RAM erase switch 122 is provided on the power supply unit 115. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to clear ball jams (return to normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball jams in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The control knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control programs stored in the ROM 202 are executed.
In addition, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 controls the big win lottery and the first symbol display device 3.
It executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting the display on 7A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing various areas, counters, flags, and the like, as well as the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, and a work area (
In addition, even after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 and retains data (backup).
All data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the time of the power outage, the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power supply is turned on (including the time of the power supply being turned on due to the power outage being resolved, the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power supply was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed in the start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, an NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a processing during a power outage.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus.
The payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern hold lamp, a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close to the front side using the lower edge of the opening and closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric gimmick are connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and the power supply device 1.
15, a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described later) is connected, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and the R
Various processes are executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives a payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is the same as the RAM 203 of the main control device 110.
The RAM 213 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored.
Even after the power supply to the main control device 110 is cut off, the power supply device 115 supplies a backup voltage to the main control device 110 so that data can be retained (backed up), and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up.
When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a process to be performed in the event of a power failure.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, etc. Also, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111.
11 but is not connected to main controller 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112 so that the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball.
The ball launching unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to operate when a predetermined condition is met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is turned off (
Under the condition that the control handle 51 is not being operated (i.e., the control handle 51 is not being operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the control handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the control handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the display control device 114, which controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the output of variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance.
The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 that is composed of an address bus and a data bus.
The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the other devices 2.
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352 .

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and notifies the display control device 114 of the determined display mode by a command (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
The display control device 114 is instructed to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 can display a back image corresponding to the changed stage. Here, the back image refers to an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command sent from this voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114. In the voice lamp control device 113,
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, sound corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 is output from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice and lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the third pattern display device 81 based on a command received from the voice and lamp control device 113.
The display control device 11 controls the display of the third symbol variation effect in the game.
4 transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display command, thereby
1 can be coordinated with the audio output from the audio output device 226.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown).
A voltage of 4 volts is input to the various switches 208 and the solenoid 20
The inverter generates a 12-volt voltage for driving solenoids such as 9, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110 to 114, etc., with these 12-volt voltage, 5-volt voltage, and backup voltage.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 detects the power failure of the MPU of the main control device 110 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like.
The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 and the power failure monitoring circuit 252. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts of DC stabilization, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts,
The power supply unit 251 determines that a power outage (power failure, power interruption) has occurred and outputs a power outage signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage for the control system, at a normal value for a period of time sufficient to execute NMI interrupt processing, even after the stable 24 volt DC voltage falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 detect the occurrence of an NMI
Interrupt processing (not shown) can be executed and completed normally.

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and transmits a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG.
00 is positioned in the left-right center of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (i.e., the left-right center of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed in by a player, and is disposed in an area defined by a storage recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper tray 17. When the player tilts (rotates) the tilting device 310, a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

Between the tilting device 310 and the storage recess 17a, a gap is provided that is at least large enough for the player's fingers to comfortably fit in. This allows the player to prepare to operate the tilting device 310 by positioning his/her fingertips on the inner side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

In addition, since the player holds the operating handle 51 with his/her right hand, the tilt device 310 is often operated with his/her left hand. Therefore, the following explanation will be given on the assumption that the player operates the tilt device 310 with his/her left hand.

FIG. 6(a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6(b) is a partial front view of the VI of FIG.
7A is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along the line VIb-VIb.
7(b) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7(a). FIG.

6 and 7 partially illustrate the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10. Note that Fig. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilt device 310 is disposed in a first state (initial state in this embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces the up-down direction, and Fig. 7 illustrates a state in which the tilt device 310 is disposed in a second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and backward by rising from the first state around the shaft portion 314. Note that Fig. 7 illustrates an example of a player's hand operating the tilt device 310 with an imaginary line.

The tilt device 310 is configured to be automatically operable between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, when a specific display (for example, a display of "press the button") is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 2).
This is what the player does when appears.

Here, for example, when the tilt device 310 is pressed by dropping the hand forcefully downward, as in the case of pressing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 shifts toward the front depending on the degree of tilt, and the palm of the hand and the operation surface 312a1 are likely to rub against each other. This gives the player a sense of discomfort, and makes it possible to inhibit the player from performing the pressing operation by dropping the hand forcefully downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertips near the axis 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm of the hand downward using the fingertips as a fulcrum, the user can comfortably press and operate the tilting device 310 while keeping the palm integrated with the operating surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to operate the device by lowering the palm downward using the fingertips as a fulcrum, rather than dropping the hand forcefully downward. This reduces the degree of impact applied to the tilt device 310 by the player's operation, and reduces the possibility of damaging the tilt device 310.

The difference in appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's viewpoint will be described with reference to Fig. 8 and Fig. 9. Fig. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in Fig. 6, and Fig. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in Fig. 7. Note that in Fig. 8 and Fig. 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. Also, in Fig. 9, an example of a player's hand pushing in the tilting device 310 to operate it is illustrated by imaginary lines.

8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilt device 310 is visible from the player's viewpoint in the first state, but is reduced in area to the extent that it is not visible in the second state (the operation surface 312a1 is directed outward from the player's viewpoint).
This allows the tilting device 310 to look significantly different between the first and second states.

In this embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31
1i is configured in such a manner that the area of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) arranged inside the operation device 300 gradually increases, and accordingly, the amount of light of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) arranged inside the operation device 300 is visually recognized as gradually increasing.
The difference in the amount of light (degree of brightness) visible to the player becomes greater between the first and second states, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first and second states.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the axis 314 of the tilting device 310 (see Figure 7) and lowering the palm of the hand downward using the outer side of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist around the axis), the tilting device 310 can be comfortably pressed and operated while keeping the palm integrated with the operating surface 312a1.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm downward using the outer side part of the little finger as a fulcrum, rather than dropping the hand downward with force.
This reduces the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the player's operation, and reduces the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Fig. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and Fig. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in Fig. 10, the operation device 300 is supported so as to be rotatable about a shaft portion 314 on which a tilting device 310 is disposed at a rear end portion.

As shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that applies a straight impact to the tilting device 310 and detection sensors 324L and 324L that detect a push-in operation from the first state are provided.
4R is disposed outside the lower frame member 320 that surrounds the tilting device 310 from below.

In this way, by arranging the sensor that detects the position of the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor that provides the driving force, etc., on the outside of the lower frame member 320, it is possible to use a large area inside the lower frame member 320 and accommodate the tilting device 310 in the lower frame member 320.
A large amount of movement of the tilting device 310 can be ensured.

FIG. 12 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG.
12 and 13, the operating device 300 includes a tilting device 310 having ring members BR1 disposed at the left and right ends at the rear end (the end at the back side of the paper in FIG. 12), a lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from below and that determines the pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a member having a recessed portion that supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above and that is disposed opposite the lower frame member 320 and has a large opening in the center, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in a manner that the tilting member 310 is disposed between the lower frame member 320 and the tilting device 310.
The tilting device 310 includes an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, a drive unit 340 that is fastened to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and transmits a drive force to the tilting device 310 via an arm member 345 that constitutes a link mechanism with the tilting device 310, and a protective cover device 340 that is fastened to the drive unit 340 and protects the drive unit 340 by covering it from three sides, i.e., the left and right directions and the rear.
50 and mainly.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined downward toward the front side, and the horizontal portion 322 is configured from a plate-shaped member that is horizontally disposed at the upper end of the back side of the bottom plate portion 321.
22, a lower bearing portion 323 which is a semicircular receiving portion that is open upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322 and receives the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from below, and a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R which are arranged in a pair on the left and right sides below the bottom plate portion 321.
and an opening 325 which is an opening formed by removing a portion of the bottom plate portion 321 located below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position in the left-right direction of the bottom plate portion 321 .

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the movement end of the tilting device 310 by abutting against the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the tilting device 310 is inserted into the bottom plate portion 321.
21 can pass therethrough.

The bottom plate portion 321 has a transmission hole 321a formed in the center of the front side, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325.
and insertion holes 321c formed symmetrically on the left and right sides of the support 321.

The transmission hole 321a is disposed in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed with a size that allows the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass through. By driving the voice coil motor 352 with the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 protruding below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear direction can be applied to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321b is provided with detection pieces 311gL and 311gL projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
gR can be inserted through the detection hole 321b.
The position of the tilt device 310 can be detected by arranging the detection sensors 324L and 324R in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 311gL and 311gR.

The insertion hole 321c is configured to be large enough to insert the shaft portion 311c arranged on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the drive unit 340, and a through hole is formed to a position where interference with the arm member 345 can be avoided when the drive unit 340 is operated.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive unit 340, and is provided with a locking portion 322a extending upward from its upper surface and having a U-shaped cross section with an open portion on the front side.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move rearward. By locking the torsion spring 315 with the locking portion 322a, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction that moves the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310.
1 so that the distance (position of the detection groove) from the left and right is equal.

In addition, a photocoupler type sensor refers to a sensor that has a light-projecting section that projects light and a light-receiving section that receives light from the light-projecting section, and is arranged in an approximately U-shape with a gap (slit, detection groove) into which the part to be detected can be inserted.

The opening 325 is a through hole that allows the LED device 341f of the drive device 340, the rotating claw members 347, and the like to enter into the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width of the opening 325 is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotating claw members 347.

On the other hand, in terms of the vertical width, since the driving device 340 is configured to dispose the LED device 341f so as to protrude upward and forward (see FIG. 17B), the LED device 341f is located in the opening 325.
3, the driving device 340 is pushed upward after passing through the LED device 341.
f can be disposed above the opening 325, and the LED device 341 f can be rotated from the rotating claw member 34
The vertical width of the opening 325 can be made shorter than the vertical width including the first and second openings 11 to 7.

The upper frame member 330 mainly comprises an opening 331 which is an opening large enough to catch the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 toward the front side, and an upper bearing portion 332 which is arranged opposite the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320, is configured in a semicircular shape with an open bottom, and supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 mainly comprises a main body cover 351 which is configured to be separable in the vertical direction so as to cover three directions except the front side and which is fastened and fixed to the lower end of the drive device 340, a voice coil motor 352 which is supported on the bottom plate of the main body cover 351 and is arranged on the front side with its vibration surface facing diagonally upward toward the front, and a left side detection sensor 353L and a right side detection sensor 353R which are detection sensors having a detection groove on the upper side of the bottom plate of the main body cover 351.

FIG. 12 shows a state in which the body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make visible the right detection sensor 353R, which is disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the center.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 10), the voice coil motor 352 has a vibration surface that faces the lower frame member 3.
20. In this way, when the tilting device 310 extends downward through the transmission hole 321 a, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, so that the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340.
44R is disposed inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R.
The detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are connected to the detection sensors 353L, 353R.
It is possible to detect whether the disc cams 344L and 344R are disposed in a specific phase by detecting whether the disc cams 344L and 344R are disposed in the detection grooves of the detection grooves 53R or not.

In this embodiment, the left and right disc cams 344L, 344R of the drive unit 340 have the detection holes 344eL, 344eR at different phases.
There are two types of specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS.
14(b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIVb in FIG. 14(a), and FIG. 14(c) is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XIVc in FIG.
15 is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along line -XIVc. Fig. 15 is an exploded front perspective view of the tilting device 310, and Fig. 16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 , tilting device 310 comprises case body 311 configured as a box-like body with a sector-shaped side and openings at the top and bottom, lid 312 fastened and fixed to case body 311 in a manner that covers the upper opening of case body 311, spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of lid 312 and hanging down, shaft portion 314 disposed in a manner that it is sandwiched between rear end portions of case body 311 and lid 312, torsion spring 315 wound around shaft portion 314, and case body 312 fastened and fixed to the rear end portions of case body 311 and lid 312.
11 and the lid 312 inseparably fixed to each other, and a ring member BR1 having a ring shape.

The case body 311 includes a bottom plate portion 311a that is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b that is opened in the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, a cylindrical shaft portion 311c that is extended toward the center in the left-right direction from flanges that protrude downward along the left and right edges of the opening 311b, a recessed portion 311d that is a recess with a semicircular cross section that supports the shaft portion 314 at the rear end, insertion grooves 311e that are grooves that are positioned so that both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-shaped groove 311f that supports the torsion spring 315. 15), a pair of left and right detection pieces 311gL and 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a, an extension portion 311h extending a predetermined amount forward from the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, a protective lens member 311i disposed above the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a, shaped along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and made of a light-transmitting material, and a protruding protrusion portion 311j protruding downward from the left-right center of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a.

When the tilting device 310 is pushed downward by a player, the bottom plate portion 311a is pushed by the lower frame member 3
This is the portion that comes into surface contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the housing 20 .

The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311c is inserted into a guide hole 3 of an arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340.
45b and serves as a part for transmitting driving force between the drive unit 340 and the drive unit 340.

The left side detection piece 311gL and the right side detection piece 311gR are respectively inserted into the detection grooves of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R (see Figure 15) of the lower frame member 320, and the left side detection piece 311gL has a longer protruding length than the right side detection piece 311gR.

In this embodiment, the left detection piece 311gL protrudes compared to the right detection piece 311gR so that the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL, centered on the shaft 314, is approximately 3° (the rotation angle by which the tilting device 310 rotates from the first state (see Figure 22) to the end of push-in (see Figure 23)).

The extension portion 311h is a portion that protrudes from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i toward the front side, and is configured to protrude to a position where it is engaged with the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).

The protective lens member 311i is configured to have a curved shape when viewed from above (FIG. 14(a)).
14(c) ) and is configured in a curved shape when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 14(c) ). This configuration makes it easy for the load generated when the player presses the tilting device 310 to escape (flow easily).
This can improve the durability of the tilting device 310.

The protruding portion 311j is provided at a right angle protruding from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
When it is pushed in (see FIG. 29 ), it is inserted into the transmission hole 321 a and its tip projects downward from the lower frame member 320 .

As shown in FIG. 16, the cover 312 is made up of a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b.
2b is fixed to the top plate member 312a and the LED device 34 is fixed to the top plate member 312a in the first state (see FIG. 6).
and a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape large enough to surround the nozzle 1f.

The cylindrical member 312c improves the strength of the lid 312 through its axial rigidity, and is arranged in such a manner that in the first state (see Figure 6), due to its positional relationship, the light irradiated from the LED device 341f toward the tilting device 310 is confined inside the cylindrical member 312c, while in the second state (see Figure 7), such limitation is lifted and light from the LED device 341f can be irradiated over a wide area.

The lens member 313 is formed from a light-transmitting material, with the upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange-like shape, the extended ends being configured in a shape that matches the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i, and having a spherical shell portion 313a formed in the center in a spherical shell shape.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft 314 with a pair of left and right torsional portions, and includes two arms 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsional portions, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of torsional portions.

Next, the drive unit 340 will be described with reference to Figures 17 and 18. Figure 17(a) is a front view of the drive unit 340, Figure 17(b) is a side view of the drive unit 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in Figure 17(a), and Figure 18 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 340.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 , the drive device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a framework by bending a plate-shaped metal member, a drive motor 342 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a drive force, a transmission shaft rod 343 that transmits the drive force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (
A left disc cam 344L, a right disc cam 344R, and a connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344
a release member 346 that is supported on the shaft 341c of the main body member 341 and that abuts against the first protruding portion 344c1 and the second protruding portion 344c3 of the disk cam 344 in the rotational direction; a rotating claw member 347 that is supported on the same axis as the release member 346 and moves relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates; a first spring SP1 that is a coil spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction that causes the rotating claw member 347 to fall downward;
and a second spring SP2 which is a torsion spring member that generates a biasing force between the rotary claw member 347 and the rotary claw member 347 in a direction in which the rotary claw member 347 moves away from the first spring SP2.

The main body member 341 is bent backwards at the left and right sides to form a motor housing portion 3 having a U-shape when viewed from above.
41a, a shaft support hole 341b that is drilled at the same position of the plate portion that is arranged opposite to the motor housing portion 341a and that supports the disk cam 344, a shaft portion 341c that is protruding in the left-right direction at a position shifted toward the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in a manner that the shaft portion 341c has an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b, an extension portion 341d that is extended from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, and a lighting support portion 341 that is extended in the front upper direction from the motor housing portion 341a.
and an LED device 341f that is disposed on the upper end of the illumination support portion 341e and has an LED light source disposed therein.

The LED device 341f has a triangular member on its upper surface that refracts light (
This allows the light from the LED device 341f to be emitted evenly both upward and forward.

The drive motor 342 is disposed inside the motor housing portion 341 a in the U-shape.
1a。 1a is fastened to a fixing member 342a.

The fixed member 342a axially supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342, and also supports the transmission shaft rod 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 mainly comprises a support hole 345a which is bored in a circular shape at one end and is supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344, and a guide hole 345b which is bored in a rectangular shape at the other end and through which the shaft portion 311c (see Figure 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end opposite the shaft support hole 345a abuts against the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end is formed at a position sufficient to allow the disc cam 344 to rotate one or more revolutions.

The transmission shaft rod 343 will be described with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft rod 343. The transmission shaft rod 343 comprises a cylindrical member 343a to which disc cams 344 (see Fig. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a drive motor 342 which is supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
The cylindrical member 343a is provided with a transmission gear 343b that meshes with the rotating gear, a movable clutch 343c that can switch whether or not to transmit driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement, and a coil spring 343d that presses the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b.

The cylindrical member 343a has fixing portions 3 having a D-shaped cross section, which fix the disk cam 344 to both ends.
The right fixed portion 343a2 is formed longer toward the center than the left fixed portion 343a1.
The length of the spring 43c is such that it can move to a position where it does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when it moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

The transmission gear 343b has a circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted,
and a clutch portion 343b2 in which unevenness is formed along the axial direction at circumferential positions about the axial center from a surface arranged opposite the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (freely rotate) relative to the cylindrical member 343a.

The movable clutch 343c is provided with an angle fixing hole 3 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
and a clutch portion 343c2 that is configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2 and that has projections and recesses along the axial direction at circumferential positions about the axial center from a surface that is disposed opposite the transmission gear 343b.

In this embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have a top angle of about 100.
It is composed of a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion of 90°.

Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 is D-shaped in cross section, the movable clutch 343c cannot rotate relative to the cylindrical member 343a.
2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 34 via the movable clutch 343c.
3a. By rotating the drive motor 342, the disc cam 3
44 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

The movable clutch 343c is normally biased by the force of the coil spring 343d.
On the other hand, when an axial load is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed part 343b is engaged with the movable clutch 343b2.
43a2 and is configured to be movable away from the transmission gear 343b along the axis 43a2.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to Fig. 20. The left disk cam 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror images of each other, and the only difference is that the detection hole 344L and the right disk cam 344R are substantially mirror images of each other.
Since only the positions 44eL and 344eR are shown, only the left disc cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

Fig. 20(a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa in Fig. 18, and Fig. 20(b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb in Fig. 18. Note that Figs. 20(a) and 20(b) show a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in Fig. 18.

As shown in FIG. 20(a) and FIG. 20(b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions projecting from both sides of a circular disk. The left disk cam 344L has a central shaft portion 344a projecting inward in a cylindrical shape at the center position of the disk, a circular rib 344b projecting inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a rib projecting inward from the outside of the circular rib 344b as a rib having a lower height than the circular rib 344b.
The engagement rib 344c has a portion that protrudes radially outward at a certain point, and the circular rib 344b
and the engaging rib 344c, and is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding outwardly between the arm member 3
18, and a detection hole 344eL formed near the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at a position that forms an angle of 60° with the detection hole 344eL, and otherwise has a shape that is a mirror image of the left disc cam 344L.

The central shaft portion 344a has an inner periphery that engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
The disk cam 344 is configured in a U-shape and its outer periphery is configured to be fitted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported in the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is provided in a protruding manner to a position where it can come into contact with the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) when the disk cam 344 is journaled in the journal hole 341b. This makes it possible to prevent the disk cam 344 from being misaligned.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c includes a first protruding portion 344c1 that protrudes outward in the radial direction at a position shifted by 80° in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A ) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed, a first retracted portion 344c2 that retracts inward in the radial direction at a position shifted by an angle θ1 (angle θ1=50° in this embodiment) from the first protruding portion 344c1, a second protruding portion 344c3 that protrudes outward in the radial direction again at a position shifted by an angle θ2 (angle θ2=150° in this embodiment) from the first protruding portion 344c1, and the second protruding portion 344c3.
and a second recessed portion 344c4 recessed radially inward at a position shifted from the recessed portion 344 by an angle θ3 (in this embodiment, the angle θ3=20°).

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connecting pin 344d is disposed at a position with the longest separation distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the central shaft portion 344a to the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state.

The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 will be described with reference to Fig. 21. The release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 are disposed in a left-right pair and have the same configuration on the left and right, so only one will be described.

21(a) and 21(b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. Note that Fig. 21(a) illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the terminal position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 346, and Fig. 21(b) illustrates a small angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the terminal position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 346.

The state in which the release member 346 rotates upon contact with the disc cam 344 is between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is positioned at the middle position of the long guide hole 347b) (see Figure 35).

As shown in Figures 21(a) and 21(b), the release member 346 is formed from a roughly rectangular plate member, and mainly comprises an axle support hole 346a supported on the axle portion 341c (see Figure 18), a protruding pin 346b that is protruding in the plate thickness direction in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the axle support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and an engagement portion 346d that is configured as a portion that protrudes with the maximum diameter from the axle support hole 346a.

The engaging portion 346d is engaged with the engaging rib 34 of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
4c (see FIG. 20).
By forming the outer periphery of d to be curved, it is possible to smoothly abut against the engaging rib 344.

The rotary claw member 347 is formed of a plate member having a generally rectangular shape, and includes a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), a guide elongated hole 347b that is drilled so as to be able to guide the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 along an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a (drilled with a size that includes the movement path of the protruding pin 346b on the inside), and a second spring SP2.
The shaft support hole 347a mainly comprises an insertion hole 347c through which the end of the shaft support hole 347a is inserted, a hook-shaped portion 347d that protrudes downward in a hook-like shape at the end opposite the shaft support hole 347a, and a pull-down hole 347e that is drilled so that the end of the first spring (see Figure 18) can be inserted.

In this embodiment, in the large angle state shown in Fig. 21(a), the release member 346 is disposed at an end position in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Fig. 21(a)) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, in the large angle state, when a load is applied in the pushing down direction to the engaging portion 346d, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate together in the rearward rotation direction, whereas in the large angle state, when a load is applied in the pushing up direction to the engaging portion 346d, only the release member 346 rotates, and the attitude of the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained until the small angle state shown in Fig. 21(b) is reached.

Next, an example of the operation of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to Fig. 22 to Fig. 24, an example of the operation when a player performs a pushing operation with the tilting device 310 in the first state will be described. In the following explanation of the example of the operation, the illustration of the lid 312 will be simplified to facilitate understanding.

22 to 24 are diagrams showing the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a).
22 shows a state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state, FIG. 23 shows a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 22 to the end position, and FIG. 24 shows a state where the tilting device 310 returns from the state shown in FIG. 23 to the first state. Also, in FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an example of the player's hand repeatedly tapping the tilting device 310 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 is biased in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is rotated in such a manner that the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22).
As a result, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, a biasing force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 32
It is disposed in front of the detection groove of 4R (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player pushes in the tilt device 310, the tilt device 31
23. In this state, the left detection piece 3
The detection piece 11gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, by determining a change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed in from the first state by the player.

Here, when the tilting device 310 is operated by repeatedly hitting the button, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. Depending on the time interval of the player's successive hits, the torsion spring 31
If the tilting device 310 is not returned to its original position by the tilting mechanism 5 in time, the player may end up performing the pushing operation at an incomplete position, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315, but in this embodiment, increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 requires increasing the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18 ) that presses down the tilting device 310 against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, which requires increasing the size of the drive motor 342. This causes problems such as increased product costs and failure to save space.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is pressed in, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing effects through vibration motion is disposed in a position facing the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the expanding direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 31 can be expanded without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315.
The return operation to 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, if the voice coil motor 352 were to always be driven when the tilting device 310 was pressed, for example, when a player pressed and held down the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 would be driven, placing an unnecessary burden on the player, which could make the player feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times that the right detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated, and when that number is equal to or greater than a threshold value, the voice coil motor 352 is driven, thereby improving the load for returning the tilt device 310 only when the player performs a continuous tap operation.
The player can operate the tilt device 310 comfortably.

Next, a case where the tilting device 310 starts a vertical reciprocating motion (tilting motion) from the first state (first operation mode) will be described with reference to Figs. 25 to 30.
XXII-XXII is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG.

In addition, FIG. 25 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG.
FIG. 25 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25, and the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 has changed. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26, and the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 has returned to its original state. FIG. 28 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 26, and the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 has returned to its original state.
The tilt device 310 is shown rotating back and forth. FIG. 29 shows the state where the player pushes the tilt device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end position. FIG. 30 shows the state where the disc cam 344 rotates forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 29, and the engagement rib 34
27. In FIG. 28, the tilting device 344 is in the state shown in FIG. 27. The second protruding portion 344c3 of the tilting device 344 is in contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
29, an example of a player's hand pressing in and manipulating the tilt device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312
The upper end (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is housed inside the cylindrical member 312c. Therefore, while the amount of light irradiated in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is restricted by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light irradiated in the axial direction can be secured to be large. This allows the cylindrical member 312c to have the effect of improving the strength as a rib of the cover 312 and to adjust the irradiation intensity of the light of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in Figure 26, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in Figure 26) from the state shown in Figure 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the drive device 340 is in the first initial state, the first protrusion 344c1 of the disc cam 344 presses down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, causing the release member 346 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Figure 26), and accordingly the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction to a position where it is disengaged from the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310.

The change in the position of the release member 346 is caused by the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34
6d. During this time, the tilting device 310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotating clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state shown in Figures 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is positioned at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (the end position farther from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344), and the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is regulated by the arm member 345, so that the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is an operating mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27).
When the first retraction portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the biasing force of the first spring SP1 causes the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 to rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotating claw member 347 returns to a state (the state shown in FIG. 25) in which it can engage with the tilting device 310. At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), so that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG. 26.

In this state, the cover 312 is retracted above the LED device 341f, and the area in which the protective lens member 311i is visible from the player's viewpoint is reduced to the area in which the tilting device 311 is in the first state.
Since this value is increased compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (toward the player).
Therefore, by changing the position of the tilt device 310, the LED device 3
The traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f can be changed, thereby improving the light presentation effect.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, making it possible to detect the starting point of the up and down reciprocating movement.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by the same amount.
8 clockwise) is repeated until the angle D1 shown in FIG.
The tilt device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within a range of 100 mm to 150 mm. This makes it possible to change how the tilt device 310 appears to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300.

Also, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that protrudes above the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the repeated up and down movement of the tilting device 310 within the range of angle D1. Therefore, the amount of light that can be seen through the protective lens member 313 out of the light irradiated from the LED device 341f can be changed in response to the movement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since the LED device 341f is disposed on the front side (left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the range of light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-back and up-down directions, but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface in FIG. 28).

According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is placed in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c (see FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is widened by the lens member 313.

That is, according to this embodiment, not only the direction of light irradiation but also the range of light irradiation can be changed simultaneously in accordance with the change in the posture of the tilting device 310. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the tilting device 310.

As shown in Fig. 29, in the state in which the tilting device 310 moves up and down in Fig. 28, a player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state in Fig. 28, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction in which the tilting device 310 is lowered (even if the arm member 345 moves in the direction in which the arm member 345 moves up, the shaft portion 311c simply moves through the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of Fig. 28, it is possible to prevent the load caused by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see Fig. 18) from being applied to the player. At this time, the player is only subjected to the load caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. This prevents a large load from being applied to the player when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the end of the pushing, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, so that the rotating claw member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29). Then, by pushing the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a pushes the hook portion 347d.
, the rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted by the rotating claw member 347 from moving upward.

Therefore, when the player moves the tilt device 310 up and down as shown in FIG.
If the player releases the button after pressing down 0, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state.

29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (repeats movement in the extension direction and movement in the contraction direction). This allows an effect of transmitting vibration to the player who keeps his/her hand on the tilt device 310 after pushing the tilt device 310 to the end.

In other words, the voice coil motor 352 can be used to generate a driving force that assists in lifting the tilting device 310 (see Figure 24) and to create a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 that is positioned at the end of the push-in position.

As shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the protruding protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 contacts the lower frame member 320.
3, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is only effective when the player has pushed the tilt device 310 to the end.

Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilt device 310 is pressed, whether or not vibration is generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pressing is determined.
Only the player who pressed the tilt device 310 can be made aware of this.

Here, whether or not the lottery results in a big win does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, in which case the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means is reduced.

In contrast to this, this embodiment is configured in such a way that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only by pushing in the tilting device 310 .

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to vibrate when a jackpot is confirmed, the sense of anticipation when the player presses the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the value of the tilting device 310 as a means of reading ahead can be improved.
This makes it easier for the player to operate the tilt device 310, thereby increasing the value of the tilt device 310 as an operating means.

As shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 is moved from the state shown in FIG.
The drive unit 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating the disk cam 344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) a predetermined amount until the disk cam 344 abuts against the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346.

The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 abut in the rotational direction, similarly to the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first protrusion 344c1 abuts against the engagement rib 344c, whereas in the second initial state, the second protrusion 344c3 abuts against the engagement rib 344c.

29, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 29) so that the first protruding portion 344c1 of the engaging rib 344c passes the engaging portion 346d, and then rotated in the reverse direction. In this case, a load is applied to the releasing member 346 in a direction pushing up the releasing member 346, and only the releasing member 346 is rotated forward (clockwise in FIG. 29) while maintaining the position of the rotating claw member 347.
The rotation can be done in a clockwise direction (counterclockwise).

31 to 34, a case where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (tilting operation) from a state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state (second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts a reciprocating operation (tilting operation) up and down via the second state.

31 to 34 are diagrams showing the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
In FIG. 31, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG.
31, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 31) to rotate the release member 346 and the rotary claw member 347 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 31).
33 shows a state where the tilting device 310 has rotated a predetermined amount and reached the second state.
34 shows the state in which the disk cam 344 rotates back and forth from the state shown in FIG.
3 shows a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position.
33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is shown by imaginary lines.
In FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand pushing in the tilt device 310 is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in Figure 31, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in Figure 31) from the state shown in Figure 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 is not pulled by the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345, and the tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short period of time.

As shown in FIG. 32 , by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a state in which the tilting device 310 and the rotary claw member 347 are disengaged), the attitude of the disc cam 344 is changed to a position in which the tilting device 310 can be placed in the second state (the disc cam 344 is rotated 180° from the first initial state).
Therefore, when the tilting device 310 rises at a high speed and attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, it is possible to prevent the disc cam 344 from interfering with the state change (the disc cam 344 rotates slowly through the specified angle, and it takes a long time for the tilting device 310 to reach the second state).

As shown in FIG. 33, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 32, and then the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) by the same amount.
2 clockwise) is repeated to obtain an angle D2 shown in FIG.
The tilt device 310 can be repeatedly moved up and down within a range of 100 mm to 150 mm. This makes it possible to change how the tilt device 310 appears to the player, and to increase the player's attention to the operation device 300.

Furthermore, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 that protrudes above the upper frame member 331 changes in response to the repeated up and down movement of the tilting device 310 within the range of angle D2. Therefore, the amount of light that can be seen through the protective lens member 313 out of the light irradiated from the LED device 341f can be changed in response to the movement of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313a of the lens member 313 is
Since the LED device 341f is disposed on the front side (left side of Figure 33) of the LED device 341f, the range of light emitted from the LED device 341f can be expanded not only in the front-back and up-down directions, but also in the left-right direction (perpendicular to the paper surface of Figure 33).

That is, according to this embodiment, not only the direction of light irradiation but also the range of light irradiation can be changed simultaneously in accordance with the change in the posture of the tilting device 310. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the tilting device 310.

The range of the angle D2 shown in Fig. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in Fig. 28. That is, in this embodiment, the up-down movement of the tilting device 310 is performed in the up-down movement shown in Fig. 28 and
33 can be performed immediately after the restriction on the upward movement of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be created.

This allows the operating member 310 to have a different meaning (for example, a different sense of expectation of a big win) in its operating mode compared to when the operating member 310 performs the same operation every time, and the tilting device 310
This can increase the player's attention to the game.

As shown in Fig. 33, in the state in which the tilting device 310 moves up and down in Fig. 32, a player can push in and operate the tilting device 310. In the state in Fig. 33, the load applied to the tilting device 310 from the arm member 345 is only the load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311
c only moves through guide hole 345 b of arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift shaft portion 311 c from arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of Fig. 33, it is possible to prevent the load caused by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see Fig. 18) from being applied to the player. At this time, the player is only subjected to the load caused by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. This prevents a large load from being applied to the player when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, allowing the player to comfortably operate the operation device 300.

As shown in Figure 34, in the process of pushing the tilting device 310 to the pushed-in state, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347, causing the rotating claw member 347 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in Figure 34), and then the tilting device 310 is pushed in so that the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook portion 347d. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can engage with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rotation direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving upward by the rotating claw member 347.

Therefore, when the player moves the tilt device 310 up and down as shown in FIG.
After pressing down the number 0 (see FIG. 34), if the player releases his/her hand, the tilt device 310
can be maintained in the first state.

Next, referring to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, after the player performs the pushing operation, the rotating claw member 3
The following describes an operation of setting the disk cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the tilting device 310 control lever 47. This method makes it possible to alternate between two types of up and down movements (tilting movements) of the tilting device 310 or to perform one of them continuously.

35 to 37 are diagrams showing the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
In FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG.
35 )。 FIG. 36 shows a state in which the rotating cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 35 ) beyond the state shown in FIG. 35 , and then rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 35 ) to a position where the disc cam 344 abuts against the engagement portion 346 d of the release member 346. FIG. 37 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36 ) from the state shown in FIG. 36 , and the protective cover device 3
35 shows a state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of the tilt device 310 is turned on. In addition, in Figures 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging from above over the tilt device 310 is shown by imaginary lines.

35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retraction portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c comes into contact with the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346. In this case, the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346, changing the position of the release member 346, but the protruding pin 346b of the release member 346 only moves through the space of the long guide hole 347b of the rotary claw member 347, and the rotary claw member 347 moves in the same direction as shown in FIG.
The position shown in FIG.

In other words, by further rotating the disc cam 344 in the rearward direction (clockwise in Figure 35) from the state shown in Figure 35 and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the restriction of the ascent of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained.

From the state shown in Figure 35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in Figure 35) and then the rotating cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in Figure 35), thereby bringing the drive unit 340 into the second initial state as shown in Figure 36.

In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in Fig. 36, but it is possible to pass through the second initial state shown in Fig. 36. Therefore, by operating the disc cam 344 from the state shown in Fig. 36, it is possible to perform up and down movement (tilting movement) from the second initial state within the range of angle D2, as described above.

Here, a player who presses the tilting device 310 may keep his/her hand on the tilting device 310 after performing the pressing operation, even if there is no special display such as "long press."

This is an action that occurs, for example, when a person is so focused on the performance that they forget to release the hand that has been pressing down on the tilting device 310. In this case, the tilting device 310 will not rise even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) to move the tilting device 310 up and down (tilt motion) within the range of angle D2,
It is not possible to change the attitude of the tilting device 310. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if this rotation could be eliminated, the life of the drive motor 342 could be extended.

In this embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated forward (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left detection sensor 324L (FIG. 1) of the lower frame member 320
5) is maintained in the ON state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted to the first state or below), the disc cam 344 is not rotated in reverse, and is controlled in a manner such that the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped) in the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) of the protective cover device 350 is set to the ON state, as shown in FIG. 37.

In the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, the tilt device 310 does not move upward because the player's hand is placed above the tilt device 310. In this case, the tilt device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG.
The change to the state shown in FIG. 7 is caused by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in Figures 35 to 37, it is possible to avoid having the drive motor 342 perform reciprocating motion (forward/reverse switching motion) even when the player's hand remains placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up or down, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 342 and extending the motor's lifespan.

If the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state when the disc cam 344 is rotated a predetermined amount (to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the disc cam 344 may not be rotated as it is, but may be controlled to immediately rotate in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. This allows the drive unit 340 to be quickly returned to the second initial state, and unnecessary load is not applied to the drive unit 340, thereby extending the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18).

With reference to Figures 38 and 39, a method for preventing damage to the driving device 340 will be described. Figure 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in Figure 6(a), and Figure 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in Figure 38. Note that Figure 38 shows the tilting device 310 in the second state.
The player's hands grabbing and holding the device are shown in imaginary lines, and in Figure 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 38, when a player grasps and fixes the tilt device 310, the arm member 34
38. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, the drive motor 342
If a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left unattended, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may break down.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely relative to the transmission shaft rod 343a that fixes the disk cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from breaking down.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, when the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disk cam 344 fixed, the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotational direction, so that the clutch portion 343b
The power is transmitted via the drive motor 343c2 and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. This disengages the transmission gear 343b from the movable clutch 343c, allowing the transmission gear 343b to rotate freely.
This can prevent the sensor 42 from breaking down.

In addition, when the player is not holding the tilt device 310, the tilt device 310 passes through the first state when the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower frame member 3
If the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 does not become ON (if the tilting device 310 does not become the first state), it is determined that the player is intentionally performing the unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while a message is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to notify the player to stop the gripping action, for example.

This makes it possible to select the case where the player is intentionally performing an erroneous operation, and only at that time, to notify the player to stop the erroneous operation, and to stop the drive motor 342 early,
Failures can be prevented.

In addition, when the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disk cam 344, which has the same phase as the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (by the number of steps, etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurred, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is ON.
By detecting this state, it is possible to identify that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state, and by resuming control of the drive motor 352 with that state as the initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342), control can be performed in a state in which the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are once again aligned, even after a phase shift has occurred between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c.

In this way, when the tilt device 310 is operated to perform a performance, the drive motor 342
This prevents a discrepancy between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 through the rotation control and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be operated appropriately to perform a performance.

39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to have a shape that allows it to rotate freely relative to the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity for this will be explained below.

40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.
41 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (in the CCW direction of the arrow) from the state shown in FIG. 40. Also, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the CCW direction from the state shown in FIG.
42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees, and FIG. 43 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been further rotated in the direction of the arrow CW from the state shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the CCW direction, the tilting device 31
40, and moves to the second state.
As shown in FIG. 3, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured in a manner to maintain the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only because the engaging rib 344c moves away from the releasing member 346 as the state shown in FIG. 42 moves to the state shown in FIG. 43, but also because the disc cam 344
This is because, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, even if the engaging rib 344c abuts against the release member 346, the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c abuts against the release member 346 from below. In this case, the release member 346 is lifted up by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotary claw member 347 is not released.
Therefore, the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, FIG.
Up to the first state shown in FIG. 41, the two appear to operate in the same way, but once the first state is reached, the behavior differs between FIG. 41 and FIG.

For example, the difference in the operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state is
(see FIG. 39), but the player may notice the type of control being performed due to the difference in the change in the drive sound caused by the change in the rotation speed of the drive motor 342, and may understand the performance that is about to be performed, which may reduce the player's interest.
If the operation of suddenly stopping the drive motor 342 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, the load placed on the drive motor 342 will be large, and there is a risk that the durability of the drive motor 342 will decrease.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the subsequent operation of the tilting device 310 is changed, the driving motor 342
Since the rotation of the tilt device 310 differs only in its direction, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation by the driving manner (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the expectation of the performance changes depending on whether the tilt device 310 rises from the first state or the tilt device 310 is maintained in the first state, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in expectation while the tilt device 310 is moving toward the first state. This makes it possible to improve the attention to the movement of the tilt device 310.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 rises up or maintains the first state.
Since the player can grasp the change in the expectation level of the presentation, the player can be encouraged to watch the movement of the tilting device 310 as it enters the second state (see Figure 38) and is moved by the drive motor 342 toward the first state.

In other words, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, the player can be prevented from gripping the tilting device 310, thereby preventing the tilting device 310 and the drive device 340 from being overloaded due to the player operating the drive motor 342 incorrectly when the drive motor 342 is being driven.

In addition, since it is not necessary to suddenly stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to perform the effect of suddenly stopping the tilt device 310, when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped,
This can eliminate the burden on the drive motor 342 and improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, referring to Figure 44, we will explain a case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player presses down on the tilting device 310 (third operating mode).

44 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 300 taken along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A. In FIG. 44, the driving device 340 is in the first initial state (see FIG. 25) and the disk cam 3
44 is shown rotated a predetermined amount in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44), and the first
The disc cam 344 is rotated at an angle such that the protruding portion 344c1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346.
The outline of the tilting device 310 after it has been rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is shown in phantom lines.

As shown in Figure 44, when the release member 346 is pushed down by the first protrusion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the disc cam 344 can be rotated back and forth while maintaining a positional relationship in which the first protrusion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2 do not pass through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, thereby causing the tilting device 310 to reciprocate up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the attitude of the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward (
44) clockwise, the tilting device 31 is maintained in the state shown in FIG.
When the tilt device 310 moves up and down, even if the player pushes in the tilt device 310, the tilt device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilt device 310 moves up and down when the player releases his/her hand.
can implement an operating mode in which the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state (a position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotating claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310) and continues to move up and down.

Therefore, for example, by providing a difference in presentation between the first and second operation modes described above and the third operation mode shown in Fig. 44 as the operation modes of the tilting device 310, it is possible to give a different meaning to the operation of the operating device 300 than in the past. That is, according to this embodiment, the player presses in the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310, and only then can the player know whether the tilting device 310 has moved up and down in the first or second operation mode, or in the third operation mode.

As a difference in presentation, if a difference is provided in which the expectation of a big win is higher when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state when the tilting device 310 is released after the tilting device 310 is pushed in) than when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even after the tilting device 310 is released after the tilting device 310 is pushed in), the player can have an opportunity to recognize the expectation of whether or not a big win will occur not only when pushing the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the hand from the tilting device 310, so that more timing can be provided for the player to pay attention to the operation device 300. This can improve the attention to the operation device 300.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 45 to Fig. 49. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the state of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up. However, in the operating device 2300 in the second embodiment, a driving device 2340 includes a sliding claw member 2348, and when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the sliding claw member 23
The second embodiment is configured such that the second member 48 slides. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 45 and 46.

FIG. 45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment.
45(b) is a side view of the rotating plate member 2347, and FIG. 45(c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

46(a) and 46(b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the sliding claw member 2348, showing the interlocking of the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the sliding claw member 2348. FIG.

In FIG. 46A, the rotating plate member 2347 is connected to the second spring S
46(b) shows a large angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 has rotated to the end position of the biasing direction of P2 against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 2346, and FIG. 46(c) shows a small angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 has rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 relative to the release member 2346. Note that the state in which the release member 2346 rotates by contacting the disk cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 3
46b is disposed at the center position of the elongated guide hole 347b (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a shaft portion 341c (
The tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47) mainly comprises a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a sliding claw member 2348 which is disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the rotating plate member 2347 in between and is configured to be slidable along an arcuate track centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47) as functional members pivotally supported on the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47). Note that in the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the sliding claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 45 (a), the sliding claw member 2348 mainly comprises a curved portion 2348a formed from a curved shape in a manner to be slidably fitted into the rail portion 2347f, a hook-shaped portion 2348b that is hook-shaped and protrudes forward (to the left in Figure 45) from the upper end of the curved portion 2348a, a reinforcing portion 2348c that is arranged in a stacked manner in the thickness direction of the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b (perpendicular to the paper surface of Figure 47 (a)) and is formed from a curved plate shape that is wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d that is cylindrically protruded toward the release member 2346 from the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c.

The width of the curved portion 2348a is set to be slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f.
When fitted inside 347f, it is configured to be slidable relative to the rotating plate member 2347.

The hook portion 2348b has a shape similar to that of the hook portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower surface thereof.
a is a magnetic material that generates a magnetic force that attracts

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion that faces the surface opposite to the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 that faces the sliding claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see Figure 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a, thereby reinforcing the sliding claw member 2348.

The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the functional elongated hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is configured by a metal rod that is inserted into and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e.
6 rotates relative to the rotating plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is inserted into the functional slot 23
The slide claw member 2348 slides when pressed by the side surface of 46e.

The rotating plate member 2347 has a shaft support hole 347a, a guide elongated hole 347b, and an insertion hole 347c.
In addition to the pulling down hole 347e, it is provided with a rail portion 2347f that guides the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348, and a support elongated hole 2347g through which the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the opposing side surfaces of the pair of plate-shaped portions are in contact with the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) when the rotating plate member 2347 is disposed at the end position in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 46).
It is formed from a curved shape along a circular arc centered at .

The support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along a circular arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) in the same manner as the rail portion 2347f.
When the sliding claw member 2348 is slid with d inserted, the sliding claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support long hole 2347g, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from wobbling.

The release member 2346 includes a shaft support hole 346a, a protruding pin 346b, an insertion hole 346c, an engagement portion 346d, and in addition, a functional elongated hole 2346e which is an elongated hole drilled in the thickness direction.

The functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole that is slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and includes a first long hole portion 2346e1 configured in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a, and a second long hole portion 2346e2 extending in a direction inclined from one end of the first long hole portion 2346e toward the opposite direction of the shaft support hole 346a,
Provide for the Lord.

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347 and changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 slides against the rail portion 234.
It slides along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the functional elongated hole 2346e is configured as an elongated hole having a width slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, there is no time delay with respect to the movement of the release member 2346, and the moving speed of the release member 2346 is directly reflected in the moving speed of the protruding pin 2348d.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the sliding claw member 2348 will slide quickly, whereas if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is slowed down, the operating speed of the sliding claw member 2348 will also be slowed down.

46(a), in the large angle state, even if the sliding claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 is shaped along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a, so that the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional elongated hole 2346e is directed in a linear direction passing through the pivot hole 346a. Therefore, no force is generated to rotate the release member 2346, and the sliding claw member 2348 can be prevented from sliding.

That is, in this embodiment, the release member 2346 rotates to slide the slide claw member 2
Even if the sliding claw member 2347 slides, the sliding claw member 2347 is not pulled in the large angle state, causing the sliding claw member 2347 to not slide. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is placed in the first state, the lifting of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted by engaging the sliding claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating the change in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operating device 2300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG.
48 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 47 and the engagement portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up, and FIG. 49 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the rearward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG. 48 and the release member 2346 is pressed up against the second spring SP
2 shows the state in which the spring 1 is returned to its original position by the biasing force of 2.

In this embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 is provided with a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge portion of the opening 311b and is made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilt device 2310 from this state, the tilt device 23
As a result of the change in the posture of the tilting device 2310, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook portion 2348b is released, and therefore no large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348.

48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the sliding claw member 2348 slides upward in conjunction with the movement of the release member 2346. At this time, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook portion 2348b are attracted to each other by magnetic force, so that when the release member 2346 moves quickly, the tilting device 2310 also moves quickly.

Therefore, by sliding the sliding claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the sliding claw member 2348 can be rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 48 ) to move the tilting device 2310 upward at a speed different from the upward movement when the restriction on the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released (fourth operating mode). In other words, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates rearward (clockwise in FIG. 48) due to the biasing force of the second spring SP2. This causes the slide claw member 2348 to return to the first state.

47 to 49 are possible, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes, including the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. As the number of operation modes increases, by associating the operation mode with the expectation of a big win, the player can more easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of predicting the next big win, and the attention of the operation device 2300 to the player can be improved.

According to this embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by the lifting of the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 234 of the slide claw member 2348 is pulled upward as shown in FIG.
8b and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310.
Therefore, by ensuring a large magnetic force, the load applied to the tilting device 2310 can be increased compared to when the tilting device 2310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when a player places his/her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310, when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the weight of the hand prevents the tilting device 2310 from rising (even if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), but if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, then as shown in FIG.
In the state shown in FIG. 2, the tilt device 2310 can be raised by lifting the player's hand.

This makes it possible to provide a difference in the load in the upward direction (the force that tries to maintain the position of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load) when lifting the tilting device 2310. Therefore, a player who plays the game by placing his/her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by correlating the difference in load with the expectation of a jackpot, the player can more easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of predicting the next move, thereby increasing the attention that the operation device 2300 attracts from the player.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 50 to Fig. 52. In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is capable of detecting whether it is in the first state or in a state pressed by the player by the detection sensors 324L, 324R has been described, but the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L, 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and a state pressed by the player or in a state pressed by the player. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Fig. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in Fig. 50, the tilting device 3310 includes a right detection piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case body 3311, and a left detection piece 3311gL extending at the same position as the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment (a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 3310 and located at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension length than the right detection piece 311gR,
The extension length is shorter than that of the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

51(a) and 51(b) are side views of the operation device 3300.
In FIG. 51(a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG.
51(a) and 51(b) show a state in which the number 0 is being pressed.
In order to facilitate understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown with imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown with solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are shown diagrammatically.

As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3
The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51B, when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is in contact with the left detection sensor 324L.
while the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).
.

By detecting the change in the state of each of these detection sensors 324L, 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in a state halfway between the first state and a state where it is pushed to the end of its pushing, it can be detected whether it is in the middle of being pushed in or in the middle of returning.

That is, if the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing.
By detecting that R has changed from the OFF state, it is possible to determine that the tilt device 3310 is in the middle of a pressing operation.

52(a) and 52(b) are side views of the operation device 3300.
2(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing motion, and FIG.
2(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is moving from the push-in end to the first state. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in Fig. 51(a) and Fig. 51(b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L, 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL, 311gR are shown diagrammatically.

As shown in FIG. 52A, when the tilting device 3310 is pushed in to the end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L.
11gR is inserted through the right-side detection sensor 324R (the left-side detection sensor 324L is ON and the right-side detection sensor 324R is ON).

As shown in Figure 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state where it is positioned at the end of the push-in, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, while the right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

If the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF, the tilting device 3310 is in an intermediate state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing.
By detecting that the state has changed from the previous state, it can be determined that the tilt device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to
When applying an auxiliary load to raise the tilting device 3310, it is possible to apply a load to raise the tilting device 3310 more effectively by colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is ascending, rather than colliding the voice coil motor 352 with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is descending.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52(b), the operating direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each detection sensor 324L, 324R, and the voice coil motor 352 is driven when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of ascending and has not yet reached the first state, so that the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, thereby improving the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3310 after being pushed in from the first state is
In this case, even if the player operates the tilting device 3310 repeatedly, the rising action of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the player cannot comfortably perform the repeated operation.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the speed at which the tilt device 3310 rises can be improved compared to when the tilt device 3310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.
This allows for comfortable rapid-fire operations.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 53 to Fig. 55. In the first embodiment, the case where the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilt device 310 is in the first state or in a state where it is pushed in by the player has been described, but the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment detects the operating speed of the tilt device 4310 during the change from the second state to the first state, and changes the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 according to the detection result. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is provided in a plate-like protrusion shape from the front side of the protruding protruding portion 311j of the case main body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see Figure 54) arranged on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320, and is a part for determining the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of each detection sensor 4321d, 4321e.

54(a) and 54(b) are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating the time series of the pressing operation of the operation device 4300. Note that in FIG. 54(a), the tilting device 431
54(b), the tilting device 4310 is in the second state from the state shown in FIG.
54(a) and 54(b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are shown by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e, and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

54(a) and 54(b), the lower frame member 4320 is provided with an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e on the front side of the bottom plate portion 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are photocoupler type sensors, and are disposed in a position in which the detection groove faces a direction in which the front detection piece 4311k can pass through. In this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are disposed at 20° intervals on an arcuate orbit centered on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player pushes in the tilt device 4310 from the state shown in FIG. 54(a) to the state shown in FIG. 54(b), the front detection piece 4311k is in contact with the upper detection sensor 4
The tilt device 4310 passes through the lower detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e in that order. By detecting the interval between the timing of the passing of the tilt device 4310, it is possible to determine whether the operating speed of the tilt device 4310 is large or small, and based on this determination, it is determined whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352.

Here, when the tilting device 4310 is pressed from the second position, the pressing length becomes longer (the period during which acceleration can be applied is longer), and therefore the upper limit of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 becomes higher compared to an operation button with a short pressing length. Therefore, if there is no means of deceleration, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 sturdy as a safety measure for when the player presses it with all his strength, which creates the problem that the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy.

Also, an elastic spring may be built in to apply a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is positioned near the end of the push-in period, and the biasing force of the elastic spring may be used to decelerate the tilting device 4310. However, in this case, for players with weak strength or players who choose to perform the push-in operation gently, the reaction force that is always large near the push-in position places a burden on the push-in operation, making them more likely to feel tired, and there is a risk that they will not be able to comfortably push in the tilting device 4310.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e
By determining whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 based on the timing interval at which the ON and OFF states are switched between, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 when it is not necessary.

That is, for example, if the timing interval between when the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (e.g., 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is not driven, whereas if the timing interval is shorter than the predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is driven.

As a result, when the operating speed of pushing the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily pushed in and operated even with a weak force.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the tilt device 4310 is fast, the tilt device 4310
As a reaction force against the tilt device 4310, not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied at the end of the pushing. Therefore, the operating speed of the tilt device 4310 can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the protruding protrusion 3 of the tilting device 4310
Before 11j protrudes downward from the lower frame member 4320, the voice coil motor 352 is driven and controlled in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed in advance toward the side adjacent to the tilting device 4310.

As a result, the tilting device 4310
In comparison with the case where the tilting device 4310 collides with the voice coil motor 352 , the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

55(a) and 55(b) are side views of the operation device 4300.
FIG. 55(a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55(b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end.

In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 55(a) and FIG. 55(b), the lower frame member 4
320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are shown in phantom lines.
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 35
2 is shown in solid lines.

As shown in Figure 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 4310 is in the middle of reaching the end of the push-in period from the first state.

By pushing the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the protruding protruding portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the force of the pushing operation can be consumed in moving the voice coil motor 352 in the contraction direction. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 is not structured to apply a load by friction like a disc brake, but is structured to apply a load by electromagnetic force, so damage to components is suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in Figure 55 (a), the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact, so by gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the state shown in Figure 55 (a) (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state), the reaction force applied to the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, the reaction force felt by the player at the time when the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 comes into contact with the voice coil motor 352 can be suppressed, while the deceleration effect of the tilting device 4310 as it moves from the first state toward the end of the push-in can be improved.

55B, when the tilting device 4310 is placed at the push-in end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts against the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction and stops descending. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In this embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (repeats movement in the expansion direction and movement in the contraction direction).
After the tilting device 4310 is pushed all the way in, a vibration can be transmitted to the player who has his/her hand still on the tilting device 4310.

In other words, the voice coil motor 352 can be used to reduce the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and to create a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 located at the end of the pushing operation.

Next, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 31 is driven by vibrating the voice coil motor 352.
In the above description, a case has been described in which vibration is transmitted to a player who operates the device by pressing the button 0. However, in the fifth embodiment, the operation device 5300 has a weight member 5320 arranged at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric to the lower frame member 5320.
The present embodiment is equipped with a drive motor 5411 that rotates the lower frame member 5320, and is configured in such a manner that vibrations are transmitted to a player who touches the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted. First, the differences in the configuration from the first embodiment will be explained with reference to Figs. 56 and 57.

FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of an operating device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating device 5300.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57 , the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320 and the driving device 340 is a
The voice coil motor 35 is connected to the protective cover member 350.
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

A vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411 is disposed on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 that is fixed to a transmission shaft rod 5343 with one touch is disposed on the drive device 5340. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to Figures 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 includes a transmission device 5412 that rotates a fan-shaped weight member 5412.
410, a transmission device 5410, a flexible member 5420 that houses a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and a bottomed dish-shaped member that is open at the top and houses the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 in separate compartments and is a lower frame member 53.
and a storage member 5430 fastened to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the storage unit 20.

The transmission device 5410 mainly comprises a drive motor 5411 formed from a rotary-driven electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and a portion corresponding to the axis of the fan supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 .

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of fixing parts 5411a arranged on the left and right sides on the side from which the shaft projects and formed from a metal material in a flange shape.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is driven to rotate, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 fluctuates, and the weight member 5412 is configured in such a manner that the entire drive motor 5411 can vibrate.

The flexible member 5420 includes a main body 5421 into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and which is formed in the shape of a cylindrical container having a bottom on the side opposite to the side into which the drive motor 5411 is inserted, rib-like leg portions 5422 which, in an assembled state, are provided on the left and right radially outward and downward sides of the main body 5421 in a pair of rib-like protruding configurations, and a posture maintaining portion 5423 which connects between the rib-like leg portions 5422 which are provided on the left and right radially outward and on the open side of the main body 5421 and into which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded.
and a pair of columnar protruding leg portions 5424 protruding upward from the top surface of the main body portion 5421.

The depth of the container shape of the main body 5421 is configured to be the same as the axial length of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is fully inserted into the main body 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

The rib-like legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body 5421, but since the posture maintaining portions 5423 are arranged on the left and right sides, the rib-like legs 5422 on the left and right sides have a greater resistance to deformation than the rib-like legs 5422 on the lower side.

Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is provided in a protruding column shape, it is possible to easily concentrate the load at one point when the flexible member 5420 comes into contact with the tilting device 310 described later.
The resolution of the deformation degree 20 can be finer.

The housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a second housing portion 5432 adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and which houses the weight member 5434.
The second storage section 5432 in which the first storage section 5431 and the second storage section 5432 are stored.
and a groove 5433 recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the connector 432.

The depth of the first storage section 5431 is set so that the lower rib-like leg section 5422 touches the bottom of the flexible member 54
20 is inserted and the load applied during insertion is released (assembly load released state), the depth at which the protruding leg portion 5424 projects from the top surface is determined.

The depth of the second storage section 5432 is such that it is recessed further outward than the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load-released state, while it is deep enough to interfere with the rotational trajectory of the weight member 5412 when the player applies load to the protruding leg section 5424 and the flexible member 5420 is deformed (assembly load state).

The groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly wider than the diameter of the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension extending slightly downward beyond the rotating shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled loaded state.

59(a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, FIG. 59(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a), and FIG.
FIG. 59( a ) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. 59( a ). In FIG. 59( a ), a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section.
In Figure 59 (a), a first area S51 which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and a terminal area S52 which is the area occupied by the tilting device 310 when it is pushed three degrees by the player from the first state and placed at the terminal position of the push are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 59A, the protruding leg portion 5424 is provided in a protruding direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis.
This allows the amount of deformation of the protruding leg portion 5424 in response to a change in angle (see Figure 56) to be maximized.

As shown in FIG. 59( b ), in an assembled load-released state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424 , the weight member 5412 is separated from the second receiving portion 5432 .

As shown in Fig. 59(c), when viewed in the extension direction, the protruding legs 5424 are disposed symmetrically with respect to the left-right center line of the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in evenly on the left and right sides by the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right when pushed in (tilting left and right on the paper surface of Fig. 59(b)), and the protruding legs 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of Fig. 59(b).

As shown in FIG. 59C, the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 is provided with a protruding leg portion 5424.
The through holes 5321d have a width dimension in the left-right direction that is slightly larger than the diameter dimension of the protruding leg portions 5424. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed in by a player and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is pressed against the protruding leg portions 5424, deformation of the protruding leg portions 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the protruding leg portion 5424 is suppressed, and the protruding leg portion 5424 and the main body portion 5421 are
can be easily translated downward (downward in FIG. 59(b)).

60(a) and 60(b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along the line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59(a). Note that FIG. 60(a) illustrates an assembled load-released state, and FIG.
59B shows an assembled load state after the protruding leg portion 5424 is pushed into the first housing portion 5431 with the tilting device 310 occupying the terminal region S52 (see FIG. 59A). The outlines of the second housing portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are shown by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 60(a) and FIG. 60(b), from the assembled load-released state, the vibration device 540
When a load is applied to the lower rib-shaped leg 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg 5425, the load is applied to the lower rib-shaped leg 5425.
As the spring 422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in Fig. 60(b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see Fig. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force to push back the tilting device 310, and the force becomes larger as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420, so that it is possible to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see Fig. 57) when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position.
In addition, since the load is generated by elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without any time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

Here, if the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the rising speed of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is pushed in from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the upper end, see FIG. 38) becomes slow. In this case, even if the player performs a continuous tap operation on the tilting device 310, the rising operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the player cannot perform the continuous tap operation comfortably.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the speed at which the tilting device 310 rises can be improved compared to when the tilting device 310 is raised only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, thereby making it possible to perform repeated tapping operations of the tilting device 310 more comfortably.

60A, in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not come into contact with the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if the driving motor 5411 starts to drive in the assembly load released state, vibration due to the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 coming into contact with each other does not occur.

In addition, vibrations of the driving motor 5411 itself and minute vibrations caused in the driving motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and are absorbed by the housing member 543.
This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the timing at which the drive motor 5411 starts to drive.

As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the assembled load state, the main body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420
1 is configured in such a manner that deformation of the upper protruding leg portion 5424 and the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 allows for vertical displacement.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the ribbed legs 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body 5421 changes to a state in which it is more compressed vertically, and the ribbed legs 5422 become slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the ribbed legs 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

The main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portion 54
Since the flexible member 5420 extends along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421 and is arranged in a pair on the left and right at uniform intervals from the central axis, when the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the radially outer end of the rib-like leg 5422 deforms in such a manner that it moves outward to the left or right (to the side with less resistance at the connection point between the main body 5421 and the rib-like leg 5422) (see Figure 60 (b)).
In this case, the protruding direction of the rib-like leg 5422 arranged on the lower side of the main body 5421 has a left-right component, so that the elastic force of the rib-like leg 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. Therefore, in the assembled load state, the left-right load that may be generated when the weight member 5421 and the second housing portion 5432 collide can be borne by the rib-like leg 5422 on the lower side of the main body 5421.
The elastic force of the drive motor 5411 can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of the drive motor 5411. This makes it possible to suppress the positional deviation in the left-right direction of the drive motor 5411.

61(a) and 61(b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the accommodating member 5430 taken along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59(a).

61(a) and 61(b) show an assembled load state, in which FIG. 61(a) shows a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation shaft, and FIG. 61(b) shows a state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation shaft.
In FIG. 61(a) and FIG. 61(b), the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player and reaches the terminal area S52.
5 shows the vibration device 5400 in an occupying state.

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in this embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located on the upper side in an assembled loaded state, the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 is located at a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second housing portion 5432 is a distance Q1. Note that in this embodiment, the distance Q1 is set to a distance equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1=Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface of the weight member 5412 comes into contact with the second receiving portion 543.
2. Therefore, compared to the assembled load-released state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and a different type of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

When the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 come into contact with each other, a repulsive force is generated between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432.
Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432 approach and move away from each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force can be easily directed in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward). This repulsive force moves the flexible member 5412 together with the driving motor 5411 that supports the weight member 5412.
420 moves upward, and the force of the flexible member 5420 pushing the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 57) back upward (in the direction along the movement direction of the tilt device 310) can be reinforced.

In this way, the force pushing the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is generated by the flexible member 542.
By combining separately generated forces, that is, the force generated as an elastic recovery force of 0 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432, the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be adjusted.

That is, the tilting device 310 starts to come into contact with the protruding leg portion 5424 and then the end region S52 (FIG. 59
5A), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 acts as a force pushing back the tilt device 310. After the tilt device 310 reaches the terminal region S52, the weight member 5412
and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force pushing back the tilting device 310. This makes it possible to particularly increase the force pushing back the tilting device 310 near the terminal region S52, thereby making it possible to satisfactorily achieve ease of operation of the tilting device 310 and mitigation of impact during pushing operation. This adjustment can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor 5411. This makes it possible to eliminate the need for complex control.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see Figure 57), and the difference in detection timing is used to determine whether the operating speed of the tilting device 310 (see Figure 57) is greater than a specific speed (e.g., 40 km/h), and the position of the weight member 5412 is changed based on this determined operating speed.

For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is greater than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 is moved in a direction away from the tilting device 310 in order to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
It is desirable to increase the load applied to the tilting device 310. Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance to assume a downward posture (see FIG. 61(b)).

As a result, the end of the downward movement of the drive motor 5411 is reached when its rotation shaft reaches the second storage section 543.
61(a) ) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61(a) )), the movable area of the flexible member 5420 above the drive motor 5411 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, it is possible to increase the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 that is above the drive motor 5411 when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to increase the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310, and to increase the load for braking the tilting device 310.

Although not explained in this embodiment, by leaving the drive motor 5411 stopped facing upward (see Figure 61 (a)), the force pushing back the tilting device 310 can be generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, and no force is generated due to contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage section 5432.

Here, the contact of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, it is possible to change the vibration transmitted to the player's hand who presses the tilting device 310, and to widen the transmission range of the vibration. In other words, it is possible to transmit the vibration to a part other than the part touching the tilting device 310, for example, a part touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the vibrations can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, and the vibrations can be transmitted to the player via the palm of the hand or a part of the side of the hand that is placed as a fulcrum for pushing on the lower frame member 5320. This makes it possible to avoid a situation where the vibrations are not transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIG. 61(a) and FIG. 61(b), a player tilts the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 56)
Only when the vibration device 5400 forms an assembly load state by pressing the weight member 5
412 comes into contact with the housing member 5430, generating vibration.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in, making it easier to transmit the vibration to the player compared to when vibration is generated after the player's pushing operation is detected.

That is, when a player pushes the tilting device 310 in such a manner that the player releases the hand immediately after pushing the tilting device 310 (pulse-like pushing), if vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 has been pushed in, it is possible that vibration cannot be generated by the time the player releases the hand (vibration does not start in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effects of vibration. In contrast, in this embodiment, the drive motor 5411 rotates in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and preparations for vibration generation are complete, so that vibration can be transmitted at the same time as the tilting device 310 is pushed in. This allows the player to experience the effects of vibration.

In addition, due to the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the main body of the driving motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431.
Even if the tilting device 310 is driven, it is possible to prevent vibrations from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Therefore, the state in which vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be achieved by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

Next, a description will be given of the driving device 5340. The driving device 5340 differs from the driving device 340 in the first embodiment in a disk cam 5344 and a transmission shaft rod 5343. As the rest are the same as the driving device 340 in the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are used and the description will be omitted.

Figure 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 5340. As shown in Figure 62, an elongated recess C1 is formed in the center of a pair of disc cams 5344 composed of a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

63(a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63(b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R.
Since the right disc cam 5344R and the left disc cam 5344L are configured in a symmetrical shape, only the right disc cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disc cam 5344L will be omitted.

The right disc cam 5344R differs from the right disc cam 344R in the first embodiment in that a pair of clamping arms A1 that clamp the transmission shaft rod 5343 are disposed at the connection portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is provided with a circular rib 344 extending from the disk portion at its center position.
The support tube portion P1 mainly comprises a support tube portion P1 extending cylindrically toward the side where b is arranged, a long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion in an axially symmetrical long hole shape along the axial direction of the support tube portion P1 to a position approximately half the extension distance, and a pair of clamping arms A1 extending from the axial end of the support tube portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1 along the axial direction toward the disk portion.

The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the cylindrical member 5343a by having an inner diameter that is equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft rod 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that has the same axial arrangement as the region recessed into the elongated hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a that remains without being recessed into the elongated hole recess C1.

The deformation portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged on either side of the long hole recess C1, and is configured as a portion that elastically deforms when the right disc cam 5344R undergoes axial tilt deformation relative to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see Figure 62).

The elongated recess C1 is formed such that the cross-sectional shape of the recess is slightly longer than the width of the clamping arm A1. Therefore, the clamping arm A1 is axially inclined in the direction perpendicular to the width direction of the cross-sectional shape of the elongated recess C1 (
The movable member is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction).

In addition, the opposing surface of the long hole recess C1 is configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape that follows the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a.
343 a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344 .

The clamping arm A1 is formed in a pair of arms, and the arms are arranged such that, from the surface facing the other arm,
The engaging protrusion A1a is provided so as to protrude in a direction approaching the arm of the other side.
When connected to the transmission shaft rod 5343 , this engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343 a and prevents the cylindrical member 5343 a from coming off the disc cam 5344 .

The shape of the tip of the engaging protrusion A1a is the same as that of the engaging groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
4. This makes it possible to ensure a longer radial overlap length (left-right length in FIG. 65(b)) when the engaging protrusion A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4, compared to when the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface.

The engaging protrusion A1a is positioned in the axial direction at a position where the side surface adjacent to the connecting pin 344d is flush with the side surface of the right disc cam 5344R and the recessed surface portion C2 (the side surface on the opening side of the long hole recess C1) which is recessed along the axis near the axis.

This allows the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engagement protrusion A1a to be completed on the support cylinder P1 side (lower side in FIG. 63(b)) rather than the recessed surface C2 (see FIG. 65(b)). Therefore, the length of the cylindrical member 5343a that protrudes from the recessed surface C2 on the outside (upper side in FIG. 63(b)) of the recessed surface C2 is set to be longer than the length of the e-ring that is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a.
It can be shortened by the thickness of the e-ring (see FIG. 65(b)).

In addition, since there is no need to secure space for fitting the e-ring (space required to place the e-ring against a surface and slide it) in the extension direction of the right disc cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface), the recessed width (radial width) of the recessed surface portion C2 can be reduced.
This improves the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disc cam 5344R.

The transmission shaft rod 5343 will be described with reference to FIG.
The transmission shaft rod 5343 differs from the transmission shaft rod 353 in the first embodiment in that it has a cylindrical member 5343a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has fixing portions 5343a1 formed at both ends and having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 5344. The fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side as viewed from the front forms a fitting groove 5343a3.
The clutch operating portion 5343a2 has a D-shaped cross section and is formed with the same cross section as the fixed portion 5343a1. The clutch operating portion 5343a2 has a groove for fitting an e-ring and is connected to the disk cam 534
The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1. The fitting groove 5343a3 is arranged to position the cam 5344 in the axial direction of the pinching arm A1.

The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and in the assembled state, causes the movable clutch 343c to slide due to the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

A mechanism is adopted in which an e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a portion of the cylindrical member 5343a where the diameter is partially larger, so that the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a can be made uniform before the e-ring is fitted.

With this diameter being uniform, a specified amount of cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into pivot hole 341b (see Figure 62) and then the E-ring is fitted into it, whereby the E-ring prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from shifting axially relative to pivot hole 341b, and furthermore, the E-ring prevents the disc cam 5344 from shifting axially.

Due to the above-mentioned configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343, the disc cam 5344
That is, when assembling the disk cam 5344 to the transmission shaft rod 5343, the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the engagement groove 5343 from the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disk cam 5344 opposite to the side where the engagement protrusion A1a is disposed.
343a4 until the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4.
Before the engaging protrusions A1a are inserted into the disc cam 5344, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engaging protrusions A1a, and the clamping arm A1 elastically deforms in such a manner that the pair of engaging protrusions A1a are pushed apart from each other. After that, when the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a passes the engaging protrusions A1a, the engaging protrusions A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are disposed opposite each other, and as the engaging protrusions A1a fit into the engaging groove 5343a4, the clamping arm A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65(b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft rod 5343 not only allows for one-touch assembly, but also functions as a structure for preventing breakage in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to Figures 65 and 66.

65(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVb-LXVb in FIG.
65(c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a). Also, FIG. 66(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62. FIG. 66(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65(a).
13 is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 5344R taken along line XVIb-LXVIb.

FIG. 66 shows the right disc cam 5344R after deformation when the player applies an overload to the right disc cam 5344R in the no-load state shown in FIG.

65 and 66, in this embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip side portion of the support cylinder portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R, and the engaging protrusion A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4 near the disk portion. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is in a state in which it can be tilted about the extended tip portion of the support cylinder portion P1.

As shown in Fig. 65(b) , since the space of the long hole recess C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of clamping arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance to the axial tilt displacement of the columnar member 5343a is reduced.
As shown in FIG. 65C, in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connecting pin 344d are connected,
Since the cylindrical member 5343a and the right disc cam 5344R are in contact with each other throughout the axial direction of the right disc cam 5344R, the resistance to the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a becomes large.

Therefore, if an excessive load is applied to the right disc cam 5344R (if a load that regulates the displacement of the connecting pin 344d is applied via the arm member 345 (see Figure 62)) by, for example, forcibly holding down (pulling up) the tilting device 310, the direction in which the right disc cam 5344R deforms relative to the cylindrical member 5343a can be restricted.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of smaller resistance, as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 66(a) and FIG. 66(b), when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R,
The disk portion is deformed by axial inclination around the support axis r1 that connects the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 on a plane parallel to the surface of the disk portion. As a result, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R in comparison with the position shown in FIG.
Displacement.

Fig. 67(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Fig. 6(a), and Fig. 67(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in Fig. 67(a). In Fig. 67(b), the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are shown. In Fig. 67(a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state where it is inserted and fixed perpendicularly to the transmission shaft rod 5343 is shown in solid lines, and the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R in a state where it is overloaded and the shaft is tilted is shown in imaginary lines.

FIG. 67(a) illustrates the second state of the tilt device 310, illustrates the player's hand holding the tilt device 310, and also illustrates an enlarged view of the area around the connecting pin 344d.

In the state shown in Figure 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see Figure 62) starts to operate, the left disc cam 5344L is about to start rotating, but since the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310, a load is generated between the arm member 345, which tries to stay in place, and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L, which tries to rotate. When this load is generated, the right disc cam 5344R can undergo the above-mentioned axial tilt deformation, so the load can be alleviated.

67(a), the outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R after the axial tilt deformation is shown by imaginary lines. The change in the connection state with the arm member 345 due to the axial tilt deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

In FIG. 67(a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to operate and the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by a dimension Rd,
The shaft support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connecting pin 344d are misaligned,
In order to absorb this, the right disc cam 5344R is deformed by axial inclination.

Due to the shaft inclination deformation, the connecting pin 344d is inclined with respect to the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67(a), so that the center Pb of the base side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt of the protruding tip side are misaligned along the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R.
Since the positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 caused by the rotation of the dimension Rd of 4R can be partially absorbed, the driving motor 342 (
62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

67(b), the disk cam 5344 is deformed by axial inclination, so that the disk cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other on their faces. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disk cam 5344, so that when the player drives the drive motor 342 while holding and fixing the tilt device 310, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disk cam 5344 and the tilt device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in Figure 67 (a), when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but the elastic force of the second spring SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 in a repulsive direction. In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is prevented from moving by the bottom plate portion 5321 and stops.
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 acts in a repulsive direction to push the disc cam 5344 downward via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347.
In this case, the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, so the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344 come into contact with each other and the release member 346 moves in the direction of movement of the disc cam 5344, the first
The elastic force of either the spring SP1 or the second spring SP2, the disk cam 5344
This increases the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344.
This allows the load applied by the release member 346 to the disk cam 5344 to be increased.
Since the consumption of the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
The load applied to the disk cam 5344 can be reduced regardless of the direction of rotation of the disk cam 5344.

In this embodiment, the right disc cam 5344R is formed in a shape that is linearly symmetrical with respect to a line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the long hole recess C1 extends in a direction perpendicular to the line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point), so regardless of the rotation direction of the right disc cam 5344R (regardless of the direction of positional deviation of the connecting pin 344d relative to the arm member 345), the right disc cam 5344R can be deformed in an axial tilt direction with similar deformation resistance.

Fig. 68(a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Fig. 6(a), and Fig. 68(b) is a partial rear view of the operating device 5300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in Fig. 68(a). Note that the protective cover device 350 is omitted from Fig. 68(b). Also, in Fig. 68(a), in order to facilitate understanding,
The outer shape of the right disc cam 5344R when it is inserted perpendicularly into the transmission shaft rod 5343 and fixed thereto is shown by a solid line, and the outer shape when an overload is applied and the shaft is tilted is shown by an imaginary line.

Figure 68 (a) shows the tilting device 310 being driven by the drive motor 342 (see Figure 62) from the second state and tilted downward by an angle D2, and also shows the player's hand holding the tilting device 310 while the drive motor 342 is operating.

As shown in FIG. 68(a), when a player holds the tilt device 310 during the operation of the tilt device 310, the right disk cam 5344 is rotated regardless of whether the tilt device 310 is in the second state or not.
By tilting the axis of R, the tip of the connecting pin 344d can be shifted circumferentially around the right disc cam 5344R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R, and therefore the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

It should be noted that the matters described with respect to the right disc cam 5344R also apply to the left disc cam 5344L.

As shown in FIG. 67(b) and FIG. 68(b), according to this embodiment, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the player is holding the tilt device 310, and an overload occurs,
The right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting in the axial direction, the occurrence of an overload can be noticed at an early stage.
2 is driven for a period during which the right disc cam 344R rotates once, the detection hole 3
Although 44eR passes through the right detection sensor 353R, when the player is holding the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated.
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right-side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right-side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

In this case, the right disc cam 3 is rotated in a state where no overload occurs until the occurrence of the overload is detected.
However, since a period of time is required for rotating 44R by a predetermined angle, there is a problem in that the detection of an overload is delayed.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when an overload occurs in the right disc cam 5344R and the right disc cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction (see FIG. 66(b)), the occurrence of the overload can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of the overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, the engagement rib 344c is engaged with the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c.
4c (shown in phantom lines in FIG. 66(a)).
.

The alarm device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with an input portion, and is disposed in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting a pair of clamping arms A1 and an engagement rib 344c intersect, and is disposed in a manner in which the input portion protrudes toward the support tube portion P1. In a no-load state, the alarm device E1 and the support tube portion P1 are separated (see FIG. 65(b)), and in an overload state, the alarm device E1 and the support tube portion P1 are formed in a contacting relationship (see FIG. 66(b)). This makes it possible to quickly determine whether an overload is occurring in the disc cam 5344 by determining the output from the alarm device E1.

Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the disk cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed, but in the operating device 6300 in the sixth embodiment, the disk cam 344 and the engagement rib 344c are separate members and are configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 69 and 70.

Fig. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive unit 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and Fig. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. Note that the right disc cam 6344R also differs from the configuration in the first embodiment, but since the right disc cam 6344R is configured in a mirror image shape with respect to the left disc cam 6344L, only the left disc cam 6344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 6344R will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of a left disc cam 6344L and the shape of a fixed member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disc cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b, a connecting pin 344d, and
A detection hole 344eL is provided in the disk member 6344L1, which is supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
and a ring member 6344L2 that is supported coaxially with the disk member 6344L1 and rotates relatively to the disk member 6344L1.

The disc member 6344L1 has a central shaft portion 344a in the first embodiment that is arranged at the center position of the disc portion, and is provided with a circular ring rib 6344f that is protruded in the axial direction and has a circular ring shape at a position spaced radially outward from the outer periphery of the circular rib 344b.

The ring member 6344L2 comprises a circular ring body 6344g having an outer circumferential diameter equal to that of the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner circumferential diameter slightly larger than that of the circular rib 344b, a cover plate portion 6344h disposed at the axial end of the circular ring body 6344g and covering the ring-shaped opening of the circular ring body 6344g, and a receiving gear tooth 6344i formed with an increased thickness from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the circular ring body 6344g and disposed radially outward in the thickened portion.

The inner diameter of the circular ring body 6344g is formed larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b, so that in the assembled state, the circular ring body 6344g is fitted onto the circular rib 344b, thereby supporting the ring member 6344L2 so as to be capable of relative rotation around the central shaft portion 344a.

In addition, the end surface of the annular body 6344g on the side of the disk member 6344L1 in the axial direction is the annular rib 63
As a result, the annular rib 6344f is not formed, and the surface of the disk member 634
In comparison with the case where the disk member 6344L1 comes into contact with the ring member 6344L2, the contact area can be reduced, and the frictional resistance can be reduced, so that the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be performed smoothly.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. Note that, in this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is equal to the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1.
(The number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is three times that of the disk member 63
The numbers of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i are set so that the rotor 44L1 rotates once.

The second transmission device 6348 is a device that is rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a in parallel with the transmission shaft rod 343, and is an auxiliary column member 6348 that is arranged in a position parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
a, and a second gear 6348 fixed to the auxiliary column member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348b is fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and is a ring member 63
and a reduction transmission gear 6348c that meshes with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of 44L2.

71 to 73, there will be described a plurality of types of lifting operations of the tilting device 310 after the tilting device 310 is released from the first state by the rotation claw member 347.

71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6(a). Note that FIG. 71 illustrates a state similar to that shown in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344R2 is rotated once in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (more precisely, a state in which the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the reverse direction by the amount of rotation after rotating more than one rotation), and the disk member 6344R1 is rotated 1/3 times in the backward rotation direction (arrow CW direction). Also, FIG. 73 illustrates a state similar to that shown in FIG. 72.
13 shows a state in which the ring member 6344L2 has rotated in the forward rotation direction (the CCW direction of the arrow) by a predetermined angle from the state shown in FIG. 13, and the tilting device 310 has ascended.

Here, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (in the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state shown in Figure 71 to release the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 instantly rises due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 and reaches the second state (see Figure 34).

In the first embodiment of the operating device 300, when the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is released and the tilting device 310 instantly (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) moves upward, the reached position is limited to the position in the second state (see Figure 34).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relative to each other, so that the relative relationship between the connecting pin 344d, which is the support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engagement rib 344c can be changed.
It is possible to increase the number of types of positions where 0 can be reached.

That is, when the fixing by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG.
10 is instantly raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state in which it is tilted downward by an angle D6 from the second state (see FIG. 73). In this way, when the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 71 and when the fixation by the rotary claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantly (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344)
The position it reaches can be changed.

This makes it possible to improve the attention-grabbing power of the tilting device 310, for example, when a gaming machine is configured in such a manner that the degree of expectation of the presentation is changed depending on the difference in the height to which the tilting device 310 instantly rises from the first state. In this case, it is not limited whether the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 rises higher or when the degree of expectation is increased when the tilting device 310 reaches a lower rising position.

However, by keeping the elevated position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see Figure 73) and making it reach the second state (see Figure 34) when the degree of expectation is at its maximum, it is possible to correlate the degree of expectation with the amount of displacement by which the player pushes in the tilting device 310, making it easier for the player to understand the difference in degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, the player can be motivated to check to what position the tilt device 310 will rise, and the player can be made to watch the movement of the tilt device 310 until the timing of operating the tilt device 310.
Regardless of the presentation mode of 10, a gaming method in which the tilting device 310 is operated in a disorderly manner can be prevented.

Next, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described, but in the seventh embodiment, the operating device 7300 is configured such that the disc cam 7344 is configured such that the disc member 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are disposed as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other, and a sliding state in which they are relatively rotatable. Note that the same reference numerals are used to designate the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and
First, the features of a disk cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disk cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 74 and 75.

FIG. 74(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 75(b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75(a) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R.
FIG. 75(b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along line XVa-LXXVa.
74(a) in the direction of the arrow LXXVb. Note that the right disc cam 7344L is configured to have a mirror symmetrical shape to the right disc cam 7344R, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a through which the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state.
1 and a ring member 73 inserted in the axial direction from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1.
and an engaging member 7344R2, which is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and has an engaging portion 7630 which fits into the equally divided recessed portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2.
344R3 and mainly.

The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center.
A detection hole 344eR is provided in a portion extending radially outward from the edge of the cup in a flange shape.
and the engaging rib 344c is partially omitted (the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first
The portion between the retracted portion 344c1 and the retracted portion 344c2 is omitted.

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 with a surface thereof when assembled, and has a first circular recess 7344R which is a circular recess having a center on the central shaft portion 344a.
410, a second circular recess 7420 which is a circular recess smaller in diameter and deeper in the axial direction than the first circular recess 7410, an L-shaped insertion hole 7430 drilled radially between the first protrusion 344c1 and the first retraction 344c2, and a fixing protrusion 7440 protruding radially outward from the back side of the second circular recess 7420 (the outer circumferential side of the disc member 7344R1) near the insertion hole 7430.

The insertion hole 7430 is formed from a middle position between the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first recessed portion 344c2.
A first long hole 7431 is a rectangular long hole portion that is elongated along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a shifted position, and a second long hole 7432 is a rectangular long hole portion that extends from the end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1 along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and the second long hole 7432 is supported by the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
and a return portion 7433 extending out toward the side 32.

The dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the second elongated hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the first elongated hole 7431, and the dimension in the width direction (
The dimension in the short direction is made smaller than that.

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75B ) of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum.
2 so as to be movable outwardly.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3 and is configured with a protruding height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 76(b) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.
76(c) is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76(a).

As shown in FIG. 76(a) to FIG. 76(c), the ring member 7344R2 is connected to the connecting pin 3
44d is provided in a protruding manner, and the ring-shaped plate portion 7510
and a thick-walled portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the inner circumferential surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equivalent to the recess depth of the first circular recess portion 7410, and an outer diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the first circular recess portion 7410. This makes it possible to prevent the resistance to relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 has an extension length from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 that reaches (does not interfere with) the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75(a)), and has an outer circumferential diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the second circular recessed portion 7420. This makes it possible to prevent the resistance to the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from becoming excessive, while allowing the engaging member 7344R3 to move in the radial direction (the up-down direction in FIG. 75(a)) in the assembled state.

The thick portion 7520 mainly comprises an irregular through hole 7521 drilled along the axial direction, and equal recess portions 7522 recessed radially outwardly into the irregular through hole 7521 at equal circumferential intervals (in this embodiment, five equal parts).

The irregular through hole 7521 has an inner circumferential shape that is positioned radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3, which will be described later, is pressed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1.

FIG. 77(a) is a front view of the engagement member 7344R3, and FIG.
7 is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG.

As shown in Figures 77(a) and 77(b), in the assembled state (see Figure 74(b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is made up of an arc-shaped plate portion 7610 disposed radially outward of the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracted portion 344c2, and a rear end portion (see Figure 77(a) and Figure 77(b)) of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610.
77(b) right end portion), an engaging portion 7630 extending from the extended tip of the extending portion 7620 along the front-to-rear direction (left-to-right direction in FIG. 77(b)), and a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring arranged on the side of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 opposite the engaging portion 7630.

The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 has a spring fixing protrusion 7611, which is a protrusion into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted, at a position facing the tip of the engagement portion 7630 on the inner circumferential side surface.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in an assembled state,
When pressed radially inward against the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip is configured with an extension length that protrudes inward beyond the inner circumferential surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engagement portion 7630 has a width dimension that is slightly shorter than the width dimension of the first long hole 7431, and extends to a length that passes through the irregular through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state (see Figure 75 (a)).

As described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function of being displaced by receiving a load from the releasing member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 relative to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced.

With reference to Figure 78, a method of assembling the right disc cam 7344R will be described.
FIG. 78(b) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 78(a) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R.
FIG. 78(c) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78(c), FIG. 78(d) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG.
FIG. 78( e ) is a side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the d direction.
FIG. 78( f ) is a front view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78( e ).

In addition, in Figs. 78(a), 78(b), 78(c) and 78(d), the disk member 7
78(e) and 78(f) show a state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1.
In order to facilitate understanding, FIG. 78(b) shows a state in which R1 and R2 are inserted.
78(d) and 78(f), the arcuate plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are omitted.

The right disc cam 7344R is assembled as follows: first, insert the engaging member 734 into the first long hole 7431.
4R3 engaging portion 7630 is inserted (see FIG. 78(a) and FIG. 78(b)). As described above, the width dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the width dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so it is possible to prevent the engaging portion 7630 from being erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Therefore, it is possible to prevent assembly errors.

Next, the engaging portion 7 is inserted in the depth direction of FIG. 78( d ) along the extending direction of the second long hole 7432 .
The engaging member 7344R3 is slid to a position where the position of the fixing protrusion 7440 coincides with that of the fixing protrusion 7440.

At this position after movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, preventing the engaging member 7344R3 from shifting in the circumferential direction (left-right direction in Figure 78 (d)) of the disc member 7344R1, and also preventing the engaging member 7344R3 from moving in the radial direction of the disc member 7344R1.

Moreover, the circumferential movement of the engaging member 7344R3 is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be explained. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first elongated hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is pushed outward of the second elongated hole 7432 (see FIG. 78(b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extension direction of the second elongated hole 7432, the abutment between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 in the up-down direction is released, and the return portion 7433 moves inward of the second elongated hole 7432 due to elastic recovery force (see FIG. 78(d)).

When inserted into the second elongated hole 7432, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts against the extension portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, but since the abutment direction is configured to be along the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the direction in which the deformation resistance becomes large) (see FIG. 78(d)), the movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78(f)) is suppressed.
Since the circumferential movement of 44R3 can be limited, the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734
4R3 is pushed radially inward of the disk member 7344R1,
The ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1. By releasing the load from the engaging member 7344R3, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 causes the engaging portion 7630 to move in the radially outward direction D7. This movement causes the engaging portion 7630 to be accommodated in the equally divided recessed portions 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, thereby fixing the ring member 7344R2 to the disk member 7344R1.

By the above-mentioned steps, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled.
The right disc cam 7344L has a mirror symmetrical shape to the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to Figures 79 to 81, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward rotation direction will be described. Figures 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Figure 6. Note that in Figures 79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347
The disk cam 7344 is illustrated as the center, and other unnecessary parts are omitted from the illustration.

The length of the guide slot 7347b of the rotary claw member 7347 in this embodiment is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in Fig. 80(a) , the protruding pin 346b is configured to be the movement end point at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts against and passes from below.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the upper rear portion of the main body (upper right portion in FIG. 80(a)) is cut obliquely to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

79(a), 79(b), 80(a), 80(b) and 81 chronologically show the rotation of the disc cam 7344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79(a)).

In FIG. 79(a), the release member 7346 is engaged with the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R.
FIG. 79(b) shows a state in which the right disc cam 7344R has further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79(a). FIG.
80(a) shows a state in which the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 to the end, and in M6-2(b) shows a state in which the disk member 73
80(b), the right disc cam 7344R rotates in the rearward direction, and the engagement member 7344R3 is engaged with the release member 7344R1.
79(a), 79(b), and 80 show the state after the nozzle 346 is separated from the nozzle 346.
80A and 80B show a state in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relatively to the rotatable claw member 7347 (small angle state).

As shown in FIG. 79(a), immediately after the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 start to come into contact with each other, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be greater than the elastic force of the second spring SP2, so that the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward.
The outward protruding state is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79B, the release member 734 is attached to the outermost side surface of the engagement member 7344R3.
When the sixth engaging portion 346d is in contact with the rotating claw member 7347, the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in a small angle state.

In this embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotary claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320 to form a small angle state, the inner circumferential surface of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the first protruding portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c are in contact with each other.
The disc cam 7344 is disposed in a positional relationship such that the outer circumferential surface of the engaging member 7344R3 rubs against the releasing member 346 in a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 346 abut against each other (see FIG. 80(a)).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the rotation of the disc cam 7344 causes the release member 7346 to rotate toward the small angle state and reach a state where it cannot rotate any further (small angle state), a load is applied from the release member 7346 to the engagement member 7344R3, pushing the engagement member 7344R3 radially inward of the disc cam 7344.

79(b), since the engaging member 7344R3 cannot continue to rotate in the reverse direction while it is protruding radially outward, the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward based on the rotation of the disc cam 7344 (see FIG. 80(a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is disposed radially inward from the minimum diameter portion of the irregular through-hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is no longer transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engagement portion 7630, and as shown in FIG. 80(b), the state of the disk member 734
Even if ring member 734R1 is rotated, ring member 734R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains its position.

Due to this difference in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 is moved to the original equally divided recessed portion 75
22 to another different equally divided recessed portion 7522, the phase between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotates relatively by the amount of one recessed portion (72 degrees).

After that, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disc cam 7344R rotates further, the engagement member 73
Since the abutment between 44R3 and the release member 7346 is released, the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, and the engaging portion 7630 is once again accommodated in the equally divided recessed portion 7522. In this process, the equally divided recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted by one.

In other words, by going through the process shown in Figure 79 (a) to Figure 81, the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connecting pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively shifted by an amount equivalent to the arrangement spacing of the recesses of the equal recesses 7522 (72 degrees).

Referring to FIG. 82, when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward direction, the engaging member 73
The operation of 44R3 will be described with reference to Figs. 82(a), 82(b), 83(a) and 8
3(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in Fig. 6. In Fig. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are illustrated as the center, and other unnecessary parts are omitted from the illustration.

82(a) to 83(b) chronologically show the rotation of the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)).
82(b) shows the state immediately before the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disc cam 7344R comes into contact with the release member 7346, and FIG. 82(b) shows the state in which the engaging member 7344R3 has begun to descend as a result of being brought into contact with the release member 7346 from above. FIG. 83(a) shows the state in which the disc cam 7344 has further rotated in the forward direction from the state shown in FIG. 82(b). FIG. 83(b) shows the state after the release member 7346 and the engaging member 7344R have separated from each other.

As shown in FIG. 82(a) to FIG. 83(b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction, causing the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 to rotate in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 82(a)), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are moved by the elastic force of the first spring SP1.
7 is only subjected to a load in the forward rotation direction.

Therefore, no load is generated that pushes the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward, and the engaging member 7344R3 is in a state in which ...
R3 maintains its radially outward protruding state. Therefore, when the disc cam 7344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented from rotating relative to each other.

With this configuration, by switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344, the disk member 7
Therefore, in a rotation direction in which relative rotation does not occur (see Figs. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the performance of tilting the tilt device 310 with the same tilt width as in the first embodiment, while in a rotation direction in which relative rotation occurs (see Figs. 79, 80, and 81), it is possible to change the tilt width of the tilt device 310, unlike the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 that rotates the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 relative to each other coincides with the opposite direction (the direction in which the fixation by the rotating claw member 7347 is not released) to the direction in which the fixation is released, so that the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84
While the rotational position of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is maintained constant (i.e., the attitude of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is maintained constant), the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can rotate relative to each other.

This allows the state where the player does not notice (the state where the tilting device 310 is stopped) to be
This can be utilized as a state for changing the relative position between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 without being seen by the player.

84 and 85, it will be described how, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of modes for lifting the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. FIGS. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 can be instantly moved (disc cam 7344) from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7(b) by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347.
85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship in which the ring member 7344R2 can be displaced (without rotating the disk member 7344R1).
79, the ring member 7344R2 is shown rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by the amount of one of the equally-divided recesses 7522.
In both cases, the second protruding portion 344c3 is shown in contact with the engaging portion 346d.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the rotary claw member 347
By releasing the lock, the range of movement of the tilting device 310 can be instantly changed (without rotating the disc cam 7344R2).

That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in Figure 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of its moving range).

On the other hand, when the fixation is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in Figure 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and downward from the position shown in Figure 84, and therefore moves to a state where it is sunk lower than the second state.

Therefore, by releasing the fixation by the rotary claw member 347, the tilting device 3 can be moved from the first state to the second state.
It is possible to change the position that the tilt device 310 reaches instantly (without rotation of the disk cam 7344) by the upward movement. This makes it possible to increase the variety of effects that can be produced by the operation of the tilt device 310, and to improve the attention-grabbing effect of the operation device 7300 as an effect device.

Next, with reference to Figures 86 to 179, a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described, but the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment is provided with a covering cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

In the following description, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (back) side with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in Fig. 86. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in Fig. 86, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see Fig. 86, for example) indicate the directions of the pachinko machine 8010.
The vertical, horizontal, and front-rear directions are shown in FIG.
The same applies to the explanations referring to drawings 6 and earlier.

First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to Fig. 86 to Fig. 90. Fig. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment, and Fig. 87 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (deployed) relative to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 shows a state in which the back pack 92 is inserted into the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened relative to the outer frame 11.
FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing an open (deployed) state with respect to the front side of the pachinko machine 8010.
Fig. 90 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 with the front frame 14 removed. For convenience, the reference numerals of the internal structure of the game board 13 are omitted in Fig. 90.

The outer frame 11 is formed into a frame shape with four fixed sides, with wooden boards at the top and bottom and aluminum boards at the left and right. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the amusement center by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. Note that the outer frame 11 is not a required component of the pachinko machine 8010, and the outer frame 11 or a component having the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 and having a support structure (hinges 18, etc.) and locking structure for the inner frame 12 of the outer frame 11 may be installed in the amusement center.

As shown in Figure 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side (opening/closing tip side) so that it can be rotated forward.

In addition, as shown in Figure 88, the rear pack unit 94 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening/closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation tip side (opening/closing tip side), so that it can be rotated rearward.

As shown in Fig. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, which has the function of locking the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened, and the function of locking the front frame 14 to the inner frame 12 so that they cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK, which is exposed on the front of the pachinko machine 8010 as shown in Fig. 86, and performing an unlocking operation.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. Front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 as shown in Figure 86, and these front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (bracket 57 is a cylindrical portion, and bracket 58 is a metal plate with an axial hole) engage with the inner frame 12, thereby supporting the front frame 14 rotatably relative to the inner frame 12.

In detail, the front door mounting bracket 57 is journaled on a journal plate 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) that extends from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side below the upper hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 and is recessed from the tip to the rear side with a size that allows the front door mounting bracket 57 to be inserted therein. Also, the front door mounting bracket 58 is journaled by being externally fitted onto a support pin 19a that protrudes upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 and has a stepped cylindrical shape (a shape in which cylinders of different diameters are connected vertically and the upper cylinder has a smaller diameter).

As shown in Fig. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape with an outer shape almost identical to that of the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 is provided with a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. Various members (illumination parts 8029 to 8033, etc.) are provided on the front and back sides of the main body frame 14a.
The front frame 14 is formed by fastening and fixing the operation unit (operation device 300, operation handle 51, etc.).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c formed to be smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed when viewed from the front (see FIG. 86).
4c is covered from the rear side by the glass unit 16, so that the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12.
The front central portion of 3 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see Figure 89).

As shown in Fig. 89, the glass unit 16 includes a pair of transparent glass panels 16a and 16b, which are larger in outer shape than the window portion 14c and have transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) that integrates the transparent glass panels 16a and 16b.
The transparent glass units 16a, 16b are formed in an annular shape that is one size larger than the transparent glass units 16a, 16b, and the outer peripheries of the transparent glass units 16a, 16b are bonded to a fixed frame, thereby forming the glass unit 16 into an integrated double-glazed unit.

The glass unit 16 is formed colorless and transparent using transparent glass 16a, 16b, but is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent using synthetic resin, and may be formed colored and transparent rather than colorless and transparent as long as the playing area can be seen through the glass unit 16 from the front of the pachinko machine 8010.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illumination units 8029 to 8033 each having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided around the window portion 14c of the front frame 14.
In the case of 033, lighting or blinking is performed according to changes in the game state when a jackpot is hit, when a predetermined reach is reached, etc. Also, the illumination unit 8030 above the window 14c has built-in light emitting means that lights up when a predetermined error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and light emitting means that lights up while prize balls are being paid out.

In addition, on the upper right and upper left sides of the window portion 14c, there are provided speaker covers 27 (thin plate members formed from punching metal) that cover the speaker assembly 450 that outputs sound effects according to the game state. Below the window portion 14c, as shown in Fig. 86, the upper tray 17 and the lower tray 50 are arranged side by side, bulging out towards the front.

The upper tray 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls dispensed by the dispenser 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball launching unit 112a while arranging them in a line.
has the function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 17. A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides balls to the lower tray 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower tray 50.

Furthermore, there is no need to provide multiple locations on the upper tray 17 and lower tray 50 for storing game balls; it is also possible to eliminate the lower tray 50 and have only one storage area consisting of the upper tray 17.

An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the player is provided in front of the upper tray 17 (the storage area for game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device that is used when a performance corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. This operation device 300 may be provided in another location, such as around the lower tray 50, other than the upper tray 17, or
The input device may be provided in a plurality of locations, and the operation method may be a push button switch, or the information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

As shown in Fig. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is molded from synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper tray passage section 141 that leads to the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage section 142 that leads to the lower tray 50, and a foul ball passage section 145 (see Fig. 92).

A ball receiving portion 143 that protrudes rearward and opens upward is formed in the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner toward the base end of the rotation of the front frame 14), and this ball receiving portion 143 is divided into left and right parts by a partition wall 144 to form a passage entrance to the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 and a passage entrance to the front door side lower tray passage portion 142, respectively.

The foul ball passage section 145 (see Figure 92) is a section that forms a passage through which game balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a that do not reach the playing area are discharged as foul balls into the lower tray 50.

As shown in Fig. 89, the foul ball passage 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving port 146 that is open upward. A foul ball received in this foul ball receiving port 146 flows down the internal passage of the foul ball passage 145 (see Fig. 92) and is then discharged into the lower tray 50. Note that the foul ball passage 145 may be connected to the upper tray 17 instead of the lower tray 50, and the foul ball may be discharged into the upper tray 17.

In addition, the foul ball passage section 145 is formed to merge with a ball removal passage 147 (see Figure 92), which is a passage through which unfired balls that flow down from the upper tray 17 to the lower tray 50 are guided when the player performs the ball removal operation.

Multifunctional cover members 171, 172, which are resin cover members fastened to the upper left and right corners and bulge out toward the rear side, are attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171, 172, connectors for wiring that conduct electricity to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and electronic boards to which one end of a connector that is connected to the internal board of the illumination units 8031, 8032 along the front frame 14 is connected are arranged, and these electronic boards and connectors are covered by the multifunctional cover members 171, 172.

The areas covered by the multi-function cover members 171, 172 of the front frame 14 are formed with wiring grooves 14h that communicate with the left and right illuminated sections 8031, 8032, and an electronic board 14i to which the wiring that passes through the wiring grooves 14h and is pulled out from the illuminated sections 8031, 8032 is connected (see Figure 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out to the rear through these wiring grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side.

Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171, 172 are removed (see Figure 103), the connectors of the wiring that conducts electricity to the illuminated section 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the connectors whose one ends are connected to the internal boards of the illuminated sections 8031, 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic board 14i from the rear side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of the paper in Figure 89).

The multi-function cover member 171 attached to the rotating tip side of the front frame 14 is arranged in a pair above and below the rotating tip side of the inner frame 12, and is a board surface support device 60 that grips the base plate 60 of the game board 13.
126 (see FIG. 126), and they can come into contact with each other depending on the situation, but details will be described later.

A long cover member 173 is attached from the rear side to the rear side of the front frame 14. The long cover member 173 is a container-shaped member made of a resin material with an open front side, and is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at a lower corner and accommodates wiring in a space formed between the front frame 14 and the long cover member 173. The long cover member 173 is configured so that its cross-sectional area decreases as it moves from the rotation tip side of the front frame 14 to the rotation base end side, and a lower wall portion 173a that constitutes the lower side of the space that accommodates the wiring is disposed parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14, and an upper wall portion 173b that is disposed opposite the upper part of the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space that accommodates the wiring is configured in a shape that matches the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 in surface agreement.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion that is arranged in contact with the front frame 14, similar to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and has an upwardly extending wall portion 173c that extends upwardly from the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14.

The upward extension wall portion 173c has an end portion connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b that is curved in a semicircular shape protruding toward the pivot base end side of the front frame 14, and is configured so that space is secured from the upper end of the curved portion to be further bent into a semicircular shape in the opposite direction, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end portion.

That is, the wiring housed in the upwardly extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wavy shape (a wavy shape corresponding to one period of a sine wave) and projects from the upper end position of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the position change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load, and to reduce the risk of the wiring being broken.

The front frame 14 has an upper extended wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (
An inverted cup portion 178, which is a portion made of a resin material and has an inverted cup shape that opens downward, is disposed between the front frame 14 (the portion closest to the base end of the rotation of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14a that is a long plate portion extending vertically on the base end side of the rotation of the front frame 14.

The inverted cup portion 178 is a portion that acts as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts, such as, for example, illegally pushing apart the base end side of the rotation of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire near the lower hinge 18, and letting it enter the play area. That is, even if a piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 near the lower hinge 18, if the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below, the progress of the piano wire can be impeded, and therefore the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the play area.

In addition, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are made of a resin material,
This can be used as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when a piano wire with a heated tip is inserted and pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat of the wire causes the inverted cup portion 178 to break.
The long cover member 173 can be melted and pass through the inverted cup portion 178.
In addition, when the heated end of the piano wire passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring housed in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned off, and by detecting that the wiring has been broken, it becomes easier to discover fraudulent activity.

In particular, in this embodiment, wall 178a of inverted cup portion 178 on the long cover 173 side is configured to have a shape that matches the shape of long cover member 173, and they abut (are close to each other) with their faces. Also, since the normal line of the lower surface of inverted cup portion 178 at wall 178a is shaped to face downward, when a piano wire enters inverted cup portion 178 from below, it is possible to increase the possibility that it will be pressed against the lower surface of wall 178a, and if inverted cup portion 178 is melted, there is a high probability that long cover 173 will also be melted, making it easier to discover fraudulent activity.

When the tip of the piano wire is not heated, the wall 178a has the effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction. In other words, when the piano wire is inserted through a gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 and reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is inserted further, its tip will be pressed against the wall 178a.

Since the wall portion 178a is shaped to match the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a and is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Even if the piano wire is inserted further, the tip of the piano wire advances in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotating tip of the front frame 14 (
This prevents the piano wire from reaching the play area.

Furthermore, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the play area while preventing the reaction force applied to a cheater via the piano wire from becoming too large, for example, by placing a detection device that detects the entry of the piano wire in the space below lower wall portion 173a, it is possible to discover the cheating before the cheater escapes, making it easier to apprehend the cheater.

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person committing the fraudulent act cannot tell this, and will assume that the piano wire is on its way to the play area.
This allows the cheater to naturally (without making the cheater suspect that the wire was not inserted properly) insert the wire deeper (until the tip of the wire is visible from the front side through the wire) and thus increases the time it takes for the cheater to realize that his cheating has been discovered and to try to escape.

The detection device may be a device formed of a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. The location of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various locations are allowed. For example, the detection device may be disposed in the locking mechanism 20RK or on the rear side of the operating handle 51. If the detection device is disposed in the operating handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed in the operating handle 51 may also be used to determine the entry of a piano wire.

As shown in Fig. 89, the ball launching unit 112a is a device that is exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided in the lower right part of the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in Fig. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a launching rail 730 that guides the game ball so that the game ball shot out by the launching solenoid 701 is launched toward the area between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62.
and a ball feeding device 720.

The ball delivery device 720 delivers game balls stored in the upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) to a launch rail 730.
In this case, the game balls are placed on the projection path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching part in the launch solenoid 701. Then, by inputting an electrical signal to the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 is caused to contact the launch rail 7
30, and the game ball is shot into the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launching unit 112a is not limited to the launching solenoid 701, and a launching motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launching unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12, to the left of the launch rail 730, there is disposed a board 167 having a plurality of connectors CN1-CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1-HN3 are connected, as shown in Fig. 90. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that passes through the area where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided in the front-rear direction, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side.

As shown in Figure 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and a main body side lower dish passage portion 162. The main body side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body side lower dish passage portion 162 are
One end of the passage is open toward the rear side so as to be able to communicate with the through hole that penetrates the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end of the passage is open toward the bottom, forming a curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changing from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction).
The balls dispensed from the dispensing device 133 pass through the through holes in the inner frame 12, enter the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and are discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame 14 is attached to the lower part of the plate passage forming member 160.
The ball receiving port 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided on the machine 10 is inserted into the upper tray passage 161 on the main body side. The upper tray passage 141 on the front door side is disposed below the upper tray passage 161 on the main body side, and the lower tray passage 142 on the front door side is disposed below the lower tray passage 162 on the main body side.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower portion of the plate passage forming member 160 is provided with a main body side upper plate passage portion 161.
A shutter 163 is provided to restrict the outflow of game balls from the lower tray passage 162 on the main body side. The shutter 163 has a blocking position where it narrows the outlet portions of both passages to prevent the outflow of game balls, and
It is provided so as to be switchable between an allowable position which allows the game balls to flow out and an allowable position which allows the game balls to flow out.

In addition, a biasing member (such as a coil spring) that biases the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and the shutter 163 remains in the blocking position due to the biasing force of the biasing member when the front frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 12. This prevents the stored balls from spilling out when the front frame 14 is opened while game balls are stored in the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 or the main body side lower tray passage portion 162.

In contrast, when the front frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 is pushed back to the allowable position against the above-mentioned biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving port 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper tray passage portion 161 and the front door side upper tray passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower tray passage portion 162 and the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicate with each other, allowing the game balls to flow down.

The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. Note that the board 167 includes a portion where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and a portion where the connector CN3 is provided, which are separate boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided on the main control device 1.
10, while connector CN3 is used for transmission with voice lamp control device 113. Since the transmission targets are different, the purpose of using separate boards is to prevent malfunctions in advance.

The portion below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 will be described with reference to Figures 91 and 92. Figure 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded, and Figure 92 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the components disposed below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded.

As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14,
On the front side of the front frame 14, the operation device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper tray 17, diagonally above the right of the lower tray 50, and at the center in the left-right direction of the front frame 14.
A covering cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the.

The covering cover 370 is a member that is fastened to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship that covers the lower portion of the operating device 300 from the front side, and is configured with a left-right width that is approximately the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. In other words, the left and right ends of the covering cover 370 are disposed vertically below the illumination parts 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least on the left and right ends, and is configured in a curved shape with the left and right central portion projecting toward the front side, hanging portions 372 that extend downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at a midpoint between the left and right central portion and the left and right ends of the main body curved portion 371 toward the sides that are close to each other in the width direction and join at the extended lower ends to form a V shape when viewed from the front, and hanging portions 372 that are fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at at least the left and right ends.
72, a light-transmitting portion 373 which is formed from a light-transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body curved portion 371 or the hanging portion 372, a left side planar support portion 374 which is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the left end portion of the main body curved portion 371, a right side planar support portion 375 which is formed as a flat surface on the upper surface of the right end portion of the main body curved portion 371, and a support groove 376 which is recessed from the rear side in the right side planar support portion 375 and has a width which increases as it approaches the rear side (tapered).

The curved portion 371 of the main body is configured with a rounded curved shape at the front edge and a curved shape at the back edge that matches the front edge of the upper tray 17.
a rear left edge 371a that abuts against the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300 in the front-rear direction; a rear middle edge 371b that is connected to the rear left edge 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300 and abuts against the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction in an assembled state;
1b, and a rear right edge portion 371c which is connected to the opposite side of the rear left edge portion 371a and has a shape that matches the front side edge of the ball lending operation unit 40 and abuts the ball lending operation unit 40 in the front-to-back direction when assembled.

The hanging portion 372, together with the curved main body portion 371, covers the operating device 300 from the front side, and is a plate portion on which the operating handle 51 is supported, and is disposed at the right corner of the front frame 14.
The hanging portion 372 is shaped so as not to create a gap between the right corner cover 380 and the operating device 300 (so that the contact position with the right corner cover 380 coincides with each other), thereby preventing access to the operating device 300 from the front side.
A screw is inserted from below into the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed, whereby the bottom plate is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed.

The light-transmitting section 373 is a part that allows light irradiated from the operating device 300 to pass through to the front side, enabling the creation of optical effects. The light-transmitting section 373 is formed in a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operating device 300, and is positioned in close proximity to the lower frame member 320 when in the assembled state (see Figure 86).

In the first embodiment, the LED device 341f is disposed so as to irradiate light at least upward (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED device is an item that can be determined arbitrarily, and in this embodiment, the LED device 341f is disposed so as to irradiate light at least upward and downward. Specifically, it irradiates light upward (is disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e).
Six LEDs that emit light downward (arranged on the underside of the lighting support portion 341e)
Two of them are placed on each side.

Of the LED devices 341f, the light emitted from the LEDs that emit light downward passes through a different number of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilt device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LEDs that emit light downward passes through the tilt device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light-transmitting portion 373.
When the lamp 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32 ), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward does not pass through the tilting device 310 but passes through the lower frame member 320 and then through the light-transmitting portion 373 .

Therefore, for example, when the amount of light irradiated from the LED that irradiates light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the light-transmitting portion 373 is stronger when the tilting device 310 is in the second state than when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the amount of light visible through the light-transmitting portion 373 is changed in accordance with the change in the state of the tilting device 310, while eliminating the need to change the amount of light irradiated from the LED that irradiates light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting the control for changing the amount of light).

As another performance control method, it is also possible to control the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in accordance with the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, by controlling the amount of light to be changed stronger (in stages) as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), and the amount of light to be changed weaker (in stages) as the tilting device 310 changes from the first state to the second state, the degree of change in the amount of light visible through the light-transmitting portion 373 accompanying the change in the state of the tilting device 310 can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the settings).

In the assembled state ( FIG. 86 ), the left side flat support portion 374 abuts against the lower end of the decorative illumination portion 8031 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the decorative illumination portion 8031 and the decorative illumination portion 8031 shifts downward in position, an upward reaction force is generated from the left side flat support portion 374 toward the decorative illumination portion 8031. This makes it possible to suppress the decorative illumination portion 8031 from shifting downward in position.

In the assembled state ( FIG. 86 ), the right side flat support portion 375 abuts against the lower end of the decorative illumination portion 8032 at the top and bottom. That is, when a downward load is applied to the decorative illumination portion 8032 and the decorative illumination portion 8032 shifts downward in position, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side flat support portion 375 toward the decorative illumination portion 8032. This makes it possible to suppress the decorative illumination portion 8032 from shifting downward in position.

Although details will be described later, the illumination unit 8031 and the illumination unit 8032 are provided on the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illumination unit 803
An upward reaction force is generated from the 1,8032 toward the upper panel unit 400.
According to this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide area by the illuminated parts 8031, 8032 and covering cover 370 which are fastened and fixed to the main frame 14a, so that the force required to support the upper panel unit 400 can be distributed over a wide area.

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove that receives the lower end of the illumination part 8032 entering from the back side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86 ), the illumination part 8032 is inserted to the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the position of the front lower corner end of the illumination part 8032 and the front side end of the right flat support part 375 coincide with each other.

The details of the engagement between the support groove 376 and the illumination part 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 can be fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a to form an assembled state, and a separate fastening part for fastening the covering cover 370 and the illumination part 8032 to each other can be eliminated.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (or by sandwiching the main body frame 14a between a separate member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17)) on the back side of the main body frame 14a, and the passage forming unit 140 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or plate member 14d on the back side of the plate member 14d (or by sandwiching the main body frame 14a between a separate member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17)), and a metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a or plate member 14d (or by sandwiching the main body frame 14a between a separate member arranged on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17)) in a manner covering the passage forming unit 140 from the back side.

The sheet metal member 150 functions as an intrusion prevention member that makes it impossible to intrude into the inner frame 12 from the front side of the front frame 14, even if the passage forming unit 140 made of synthetic resin is penetrated (for example, if a wire with a heated tip or a piano wire is pressed against it and melts), In other words, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal will not be penetrated even if a wire with a heated tip is pressed against it, and can prevent the exemplified wire from intruding into the back side of the front frame 14.

The sheet metal member 150 is formed in a manner that covers the top, bottom, left and right of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage section 145 on the left side when viewed from the front, and mainly comprises a fitting box section 151 whose open front side is fitted into the passage forming unit 140, and a flat plate-like section 152 which covers the back surface of the lower part of the foul ball passage section 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

The fitting box portion 151 covers the top, bottom, left and right of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145, and therefore is not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-to-rear direction at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145.
Even if the wire is penetrated in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the wire shown in the example is a passage forming unit 1
It is possible to prevent entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the rear surface of the foul ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, even if a wire as exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed against the right side of the lower tray 50 to open a through hole, it is possible to prevent an illegal member from entering the rear side of the passage forming unit 140. An example of a case in which such a situation occurs is when the operating device 300 is removed and the exemplified wire is pressed against a portion where the front and rear thickness has become thinner as a result (a portion diagonally above and behind the recessed portion 15a) to open a through hole through which the exemplified wire can enter.

Furthermore, the front frame 14 is provided with an operating unit back member 155 that is fastened from the back side to the left end of the passage forming unit 140, and the operating unit back member 155 is fastened and fixed to the main frame 14a at the upper or lower position where the cylinder lock 20 is positioned in the assembled state (see Figure 86).

As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of a left-right long plate member.
56, and through holes 157 through which screws are inserted to fasten the operating unit rear member 155 to the main body frame 14a, a pair of connecting through holes 158 drilled side by side above and below in the portion (left end) that is overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140, and an opening/closing regulating portion 159 that protrudes toward the rear side on the rotation base end side of the through hole 156.

The connecting insertion hole 158 is formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140.
Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is inserted into the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
58 and a screw-in portion 148b that is drilled at a position that coincides with the lower connecting insertion hole 158 in the fore-and-aft direction as a hole into which a screw can be screwed in.

With this configuration, when the operation unit rear member 155 is stacked on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit rear member 155 are aligned by passing the protruding portion 148a through the upper connecting insertion hole 158, and then the screw that has passed through the lower connecting insertion hole 158 is screwed into the screw-in portion 148b, so that the operation unit rear member 155 can be easily assembled.
55 can be fastened to the passage forming unit 140.

The left edge of the left end of the operation unit back surface member 155, in which the connecting insertion hole 158 is formed, and the lower edge are formed at a right angle to form an L-shaped wall portion 158a. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 has an extension wall portion 148c that extends from the plate that forms the framework of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the area, and the extension wall portion 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed into an L-shape that can come into surface contact with the wall portion 158a in all directions.

Therefore, in order to align the operating unit back member 155 when assembling it to the passage formation unit 140, in addition to passing the protrusion portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is brought into surface contact with the extended wall portion 148c from above, below, left and right, thereby enabling the position and attitude of the operating unit back member 155 relative to the passage formation unit 140 to be quickly and easily adjusted.

The opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is disposed in front and rear facing relation to the panel surface supporting device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed in the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). The details will be described later.
Under certain conditions, the front frame 1 comes into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.
4 from being closed.

In this embodiment, the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is extended toward the rear side of the operation unit rear member 155 and is formed from synthetic resin, and is formed with a U-shaped cross section as viewed in the extending direction in order to ensure rigidity. Therefore, it is less likely to bend than when it is formed in a flat plate shape with the same plate thickness, and the amount of material required can be reduced while ensuring rigidity compared to when it is extended in a block shape that fills the U-shaped open portion. Therefore, by being formed with the same plate thickness as the thickness of other portions of the operation unit rear member 155 (for example, the plate thickness of a portion that does not matter if its strength is low because the strength can be relied on the main body frame 14a and is formed as thin as possible), the strength of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving moldability.

The cross-sectional shape of the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is not limited to a U-shape as long as it can secure rigidity and maintain the shape. For example, compared to a flat plate-like cross section, the cross section may be curved (wave-shaped), stepped, rectangular wave-shaped, or cylindrical.

In addition, the opening/closing restriction portion 159 is not a part of the operation portion back member 155 but is a part of the main body frame 14.
Alternatively, the cover 14 may be formed of a metal part that is bent and extended from the cover 14a to the rear side, or that is extended from a separate member that is fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a to the rear side.
Forming the opening/closing restricting portion 159 from synthetic resin can prevent the board surface support device 600 from chipping or denting when it comes into contact with the board surface support device 600 (see FIG. 90) made of a metal member. This reduces the risk of injury to an operator who changes the state of the board surface support device 600 to attach or detach the game board 13 by touching a chip or dent in the board surface support device 600.

Here, since the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is disposed closer to the base end of the rotation of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, it is possible to ensure a longer distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the location of the cylinder lock 20 disposed on the tip end side of the rotation. Therefore, when the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 or the locking mechanism 20RK disposed on the tip end side of the rotation will be erroneously locked.

A possible route for a foreign object such as a wire to enter is, for example, a route passing through a gap in the operation device 300. In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely detachable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, even if a foreign object follows a gap in the operation device 300, it is difficult for the foreign object to enter the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operating device 300 is inserted through a wiring hole 14 formed in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 is inserted through the protective cover device 350 (
It is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower corner of the right outer peripheral wall of the housing (see FIG. 57).

As a result, even if a foreign object such as a wire enters the interior of the operating device 300 through a gap in the operating device 300, it is difficult for the wire to reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operating device 300, which is configured roughly in a case shape, making it easier to prevent foreign objects such as wires from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

It should be noted that a liquid may be considered as a foreign object that may enter the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels sick after playing a game may splash drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10.
The operation device 300 located in a convenient position is likely to become a victim of splashing drinking water on it. If no measures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 1) may be damaged.
(see 3) may malfunction.

Furthermore, if liquid such as drinking water penetrates to the rear of the main body frame 14a, it may cause damage to electronic boards, etc., but as described above, in this embodiment, the operating device 300 is configured to be detachable and independent on the front side of the main body frame 14a, so that liquid such as drinking water sprayed on the operating device 300 can be prevented from penetrating to the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

A recess 15a is provided in a T-shape when viewed from above on the upper surface of the bottom plate of the lower tray unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300). The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess.
It is not a perfect case, and gaps are formed here and there (see, for example, FIG. 13 ).
The transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance (passage gap) pass through the inside of the operation device 300,
The recessed portion 15 a serves to temporarily store liquid that falls below the operating device 300 .

In the operating device 300, the driving motor 342 is disposed toward the rear side of the opening 325, so that the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17(b)). Furthermore, the connection portion with the wiring is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor housing portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17(b) and 18). Therefore, liquids such as drinking water may fall on the driving motor 342.
42, thereby preventing it from breaking down.

Furthermore, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a risk that liquids such as drinking water may get on it, but since the other parts are covered by the bottom plate part 321, liquids such as drinking water only adhere to the vibration surface (upper surface) and the adhered liquid flows down the front side due to the inclination of the vibration surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see Figures 13 and 22). Therefore, breakdown of the voice coil motor 352 can be prevented.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player splashes liquid such as drinking water on the player as he or she is leaving, the next player can play as normal as long as he or she wipes the top surface of the operation device 300 that the player touches, thereby preventing the maintenance time for the operation device 300 from affecting business hours.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d at the pivot base end side of the front frame 14 on the rear side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to Figs. 93 to 96.
6, a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 have been removed from the front frame 14, similar to FIG.

Fig. 93(a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and Fig. 93(b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180, in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are illustrated side by side. Note that in Fig. 93(b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is illustrated on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is illustrated on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and is a member that binds together the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are stretched leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c.

In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
The harness HN2 connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see Figure 92) is guided to the binding movable member 180 without an intermediate board and is each bound to the binding movable member 180.

On the other hand, the illumination units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86
The harnesses connected to the respective long-length cover members 173 are first connected (gathered) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long-length cover member 173, and then are connected to a bundle of extension harnesses HN.
3 is directed toward the bundling movable member 180, and its extension harness HN3 is bundled to the bundling movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed from a synthetic resin material, and includes a main body 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side, a movable arm 182 rotatably supported by a screw fastened and fixed to the main body 181 in the vertical direction, a pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from one side surface of the movable arm 182 in the rotation direction (the side surface opposite to the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93( a )) along the lower edge of the movable arm 182, and
A pair of locking portions 184 that are U-shaped when viewed from above and can lock the binding arm portion 183 are provided on the other side surface in the rotation direction of the binding arm portion 183 (the side surface facing the main body portion 181 in FIG. 93(a)).
and a temporary fastening portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 at a position (middle position) between the pair of binding arms 183 and having an opening.

In addition, the binding movable member 180 is formed such that the binding arm portion 183 has high flexibility, while the other portions are formed to have at least lower flexibility (higher rigidity) than the binding arm portion 183 .

The main body 181 includes a fixed portion 181a having a cross section with an upper side formed in a substantially horseshoe shape and a through hole in the center for passing a screw through, a pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b respectively protruding from the left and right lower corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d, an intermediate stopper 181c extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d, and a plate-shaped support plate 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a.
(See FIG. 96(a) ), and a cylindrical fastening portion 181e that is disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d and has a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.
Provide for the Lord.

The plate member 14d has a hole group 14d1 at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, the hole group 14d1 being composed of through holes arranged in the same manner as the fixed portion 181a and the pair of anti-rotation portions 181b.

When the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of anti-rotation protrusions 181b fit into the corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1, thereby preventing the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a during fastening.
The attitude with respect to d can be determined.

The intermediate retaining portion 181c maintains each of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between itself and the plate member 14d.
In this embodiment, by narrowing the gap between the extended end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping down, and by using a shape curved along a circle whose center is located on the plate member 14d side, it is possible to suppress stress concentration due to deformation while accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 in the area (between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 18).
1c) can have a large cross-sectional area.

The support plate portion 181d forms a plane that guides the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181
The outer circumferential surface of e is fitted into the base end side portion of the movable arm 182 and supports the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm 182 mainly comprises a base end 182a which is shaped to smoothly connect to a plane OS1 offset from the support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with the base end being the portion which is externally supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, and a thin plate portion 182b having a long, thin plate shape which is connected to the opposite side of the support position of the base end 182a.

The base end 182a has side walls extending in the direction of rotation from the inner left and right ends (parts where the straight line connecting the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and the rear end (part closest to the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion fitted onto the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape with the center of the radius of curvature located on the same side, and the distance between them gradually decreases as they approach the plane OS1, and becomes equal to the thickness of the thin plate portion 182b when they reach the plane OS1.

Therefore, the base end portion 182a maintains a higher rigidity than the thin plate portion 182b. In this embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on the situation.

The pair of binding arms 183 are configured with the same shape, so one will be described and the other will be omitted. The binding arm 183 has narrow sections 183a formed with a width equal to that of the base near the tip and wide sections 183b formed wider than the narrow sections 183a, which are alternately formed at equal intervals. In the fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into a through hole formed between the locking section 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93(b)).

The large width portion 183b of the binding arm 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small width portion 183a. In this embodiment, the thickened portion is formed on the outer periphery side in the fixed state (see the lower side of FIG. 93(b)), so that space can be secured on the inner periphery side of the binding arm 183.

The locking portion 184 has a large opening 184a formed on the movable arm portion 182 side and the large opening 1
and a small opening 184b that is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 with the large opening 184a in between and has a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized to allow the binding arm 183 to pass through regardless of the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b is sized to allow the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass through, but not the large width portion 183b to pass through (become locked).

According to this embodiment, when it is desired to move the binding arm portion 183 relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm portion 183 is disposed on the large opening portion 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 is smaller).
When it is desired to engage binding arm portion 183 with engaging portion 184, by arranging binding arm portion 183 on the side of small opening 184b, the size of the inner area surrounded by binding arm portion 183 (degree of tightness) can be easily adjusted.

The temporary fastening portion 185 has a through hole in the center thereof through which a cable tie can be inserted. Even if the binding arm portion 183 breaks due to long-term use and it becomes impossible to bind the harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to bind the harnesses HN1 to HN3 by inserting a commercially available cable tie into the through hole of the temporary fastening portion 185 and fixing it.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. Fig. 94(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and Fig. 94(b ... shown in Fig. 94(a).
95(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95(b) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14 along the line XCVb in FIG.
A partial cross-sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along line b-XCVb.

94(a) and 94(b) show a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and in FIG. 95(a) and FIG. 95(b),
The figure shows the movable arm 182 rotating in a direction away from the plate member 14d and abutting a vertically long metal portion that constitutes the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range).

As shown in FIG. 94 and FIG. 95, the movable arm 182 is arranged on an axis (
This angle is sufficiently larger than the rotation angle required for the front frame 14 when opening and closing in normal use, considering the installation conditions of the pachinko machines 8010 in game parlors (the pachinko machines 8010 are installed side by side on the left and right, and if the pachinko machine 8010 is rotated by 90 degrees or more, there is a risk of it colliding with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010).

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not exceed the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body 181 without elastic deformation (the range between the state shown in Figure 94 and the state shown in Figure 95), thereby reducing the risk of the movable arm 182 deteriorating and breaking due to elastic deformation.

Next, the supporting manner of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described.
Since the position of the wire 3 is determined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, it is possible to prevent the wire 3 from being accidentally caught between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and breaking, for example.

Figure 96(a) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, Figure 96(b) is a schematic top view of Figure 96(a), Figure 96(c) is a schematic rear view showing the binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN3, and Figure 96(d) is a schematic top view of Figure 96(c).

96(a) and 96(b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 96(c) and FIG. 96(d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. That is, since the horizontal lines of the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c are the same, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 extended from the upwardly extending wall portion 173c can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c near the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, the upper extended wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stopper 181c
The shape of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the movable arm 18 of the binding movable member 180 is
2. This allows the shape of the casing 1 to be adjusted to match that of FIG. 96(b) and FIG.
), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which can prevent extreme bending deformation.

In addition, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18
The area surrounded by the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d across the movable arm portion 182. Therefore, particularly when the front frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96(b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. This makes it possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being broken due to bending.

97(a) and 97(b) are schematic diagrams of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the bundling movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
97(a) shows one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG 97(b) shows the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

97(a) and 97(b) show a rotation center point P57 indicating the central axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86), as well as showing the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 typically with imaginary lines and members fixed to the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12, respectively, and supported at the rotation center point P57 typically with solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and like the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 also rotates relative to the inner frame 12 around the rotation center point P57.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97(a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97(b),
The base end 182a of the movable arm 182 rotates around the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, thereby
Since the front frame 14 is opened and closed, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, thereby improving durability (FIG. 9
6(b), see also Figure 96(d).

As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are connected to the front frame 14 regardless of whether the front frame 14 is open or closed relative to the inner frame 12.
The vertically long metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 96(d) )
The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are routed along a path passing near the portion where the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 abuts. That is, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are routed so as to forcibly make a detour, so that the harnesses HN
This prevents the curved portions of HN1 to HN3 from moving toward the tip end of the front frame 14 when it is rotated.

This makes it possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the worker when opening and closing the front frame 14, and also makes it possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from interfering with the work of the worker when the front frame 14 is closed.
The fit of N1 to HN3 (fitting by bending only once on the rotation base end side) can be improved (see FIG. 96(b) and FIG. 97(a)).

In this embodiment, intermediate stopper 181c is disposed vertically above inverted cup portion 178 regardless of the position of movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 91). Due to the manner in which intermediate stopper 181c disposed vertically above inverted cup portion 178 supports harnesses HN1 to HN3, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as, for example, heating the tip of a wire or piano wire to a high temperature to melt and penetrate inverted cup portion 178, thereby allowing the wire to enter between front frame 14 and inner frame 12.

That is, when the wire is pressed against the underside of the inverted cup portion 178, melted to penetrate the wire, and advanced toward the play area, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the inverted cup portion 178, the tip of the wire heated to a high temperature is supported by the intermediate stopper portion 181c of the harness H.
As a result, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned off, making electrical continuity impossible.

When the electrical continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, an error signal is output and an alarm is sounded (an error screen is displayed), so that fraud can be quickly discovered. Therefore, a person committing fraud can be prevented from obtaining fraudulent benefits.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN1 burns out, it becomes impossible to launch the ball even by rotating the operating handle 51. Therefore, the period from when a cheating act is committed until the cheating act is discovered can be shortened (the cheating act can be discovered early).

In this case, it is possible to prevent a person who commits fraudulent acts of illegally obtaining a prize ball by inserting a wire into the play area, tampering with the play area (for example, bending the nails to make it easier to illegally win a prize), and then having the ball enter the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like, from being able to shoot balls, thereby preventing the person from receiving an illegal advantage. In other words, it is possible to make it impossible to perform certain fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, if the harness HN2 burns out, the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button 43 (see FIG. 89) cannot be operated. Therefore, a person who commits fraudulent acts will be
This can act as a deterrent to fraudulent behavior, as there is a risk that fraudulent behavior may result in the inability to collect the bills inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the remaining balls on the card.

Furthermore, when committing fraudulent acts to eliminate the risk of not being able to collect the bills inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) or the balls equivalent to the remaining balance on the card, the fraudulent acts are committed without leaving the seat even though the balance on the card unit (ball lending unit) is 0 yen, so the gaming machine store can easily notice the fraudulent acts.

In the first place, if the harness HN2 is disconnected, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
In the game machine store where the disconnection error (CR error) of
By checking the error code (R error), it is easy to identify the possibility of fraudulent activity.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
The outline of the ball guide opening 53 and the outline of the ball guide opening 53 are shown in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is disposed at the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 145.
The lower end of the foul ball passage 145 is arranged on the left side of the ball guide opening 53 to occupy an area of about 2/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145 is arranged on the right side of the ball guide opening 53 to occupy the remaining area (an area of about 1/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53).
It is divided by.

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 are passages that extend from the payout ball receiving port section 143 and the foul ball receiving port section 146, respectively, so that balls can flow down toward the lower tray 50. The S-shaped paths SL1 and S2 are arranged so that the extension direction faces (switches) at least once on both the left and right sides.
L2.

The S-shaped path SL1 allows the flow path length of the front door side lower tray path section 142 to be increased while maintaining the vertical dimension of the path forming unit 140 short, so that the number of balls that can be retained inside the front door side lower tray path section 142 can be increased. This allows the window section 14c (see FIG. 86)
Since it is possible to increase the number of balls that can be retained upstream of the lower tray 50 while ensuring a large vertical dimension, it is possible to configure a pachinko machine 8010 that can ensure large vertical dimensions of the game area and performance area, and by having a large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the lower tray 50 (and its upstream side), it is possible to reduce the stress caused to the player when refilling the balls (stress caused by being required to refill balls from the 1000 ryo box when 50 balls in the lower tray are used up).

The front door side lower tray passage section 142 and the foul ball passage section 145 each have bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, which are regions where the extension direction is bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction, and they have a common feature. That is, the front door side lower tray passage section 142 has a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEa2 arranged upstream of the first bending region NEa1 with the characteristic portion reversed left and right.

In addition, the foul ball passage portion 145 is formed on the downstream side of the first bending area NEb1, and the second bending area NEb2 is disposed on the upstream side of the first bending area NEb1 with the left and right of the characteristic portion reversed.
In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and descriptions of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending region NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, the first bending region NEa1 mainly includes a side wall Na arranged on the opposite side of the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower tray passage section 142, a ceiling wall Nb arranged above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extension direction of the side wall Na, and an adjacent wall Nc extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extension end.
Nb and Nc are provided to extend from the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc has a surface Nc1 on the opposite side to the ceiling wall Nb curved along an S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface for the ball. Meanwhile, the surface Nc2 on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) functions as a surface for regulating the direction of travel of an improperly inserted wire HM (a thin metal such as a wire or a piano wire), and this will be described in detail later. Note that the distance of the gap Nin between the adjacent wall Nc and the side wall Na at the extended lower end is set to be equal to or larger than the distance between the wire HM and the side wall Na.
It is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending region NEa1 prevents the wire HM from being inserted improperly.
That is, as shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that is illegally inserted can be prevented from entering the lower tray passage portion 14 on the front door side with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance.
In this case, the person committing the fraudulent act may have been able to move upstream of wire H2.
M is advanced while being pressed against the side wall of the front door side lower tray passage section 142.

When a fraudster presses the wire HM against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1, the wire HM enters the gap Nin. On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1, the wire HM advances to the right due to the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower tray passage section 142, and is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. That is, a pair of bending areas NEa1,
By arranging NEa2 in a left-right inverted manner, the wire HM can be inserted into the gap Nin without omission.

An example of the progression path of the wire HM when it enters the gap Nin is shown in Figure 99. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is shown by a black circle, and the progression direction of the wire HM at that time is shown by an arrow. As shown in Figure 99, the wire HM that enters the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. If the wire HM gets caught (pinched) here, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from progressing further, and also to prevent the wire HM from being held, so that fraudulent activity can be quickly discovered.

On the other hand, even if the wire HM is not caught and continues to move forward, when the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip of the wire HM protrudes with its tip pointing downward.
Even if the wire HM is advanced, the tip of the wire HM will advance downward.
The payout device 133 is disposed upstream of the payout ball receiving portion 143, and the foul ball receiving portion 146
This can prevent the water from reaching the play area located upstream of the water.

As a result, the wire HM may reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and cause the payout device 133 to malfunction, resulting in the player obtaining an illegal payout ball, or the wire HM may reach the game area and cause the electric device 64 to be played.
This can prevent a cheater from obtaining an illegal advantage by forcibly opening a movable device such as the reel 0a (see FIG. 2) to make it easier to win illegally and obtain illegally dispensed balls.

Returning to FIG. 98, the foul ball passage 145 is formed with a vertical width of about twice the diameter of the ball (more than twice in this embodiment) downstream from the merging area CE where it merges with the ball removal passage 147. This makes it possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the balls will be sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and interlock with each other, even if the balls flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enter the merging flow path CE (the two balls enter the merging area CE at the same time) and two balls are lined up vertically when the balls flowing down the ball removal passage 147 are placed in the merging area CE. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the balls from being impeded downstream from the merging area CE.

The foul ball passage 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage 145a that vertically connects the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2. The width of the passage 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, and the passage 145a is formed by the passage forming unit 1.
The rear bottom plate portion of the housing 40 is formed so as to protrude toward the front side as it goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage section 145a, the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the upstream end portion of the passage section 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage section 145a, the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 is flush with the downstream end portion of the passage section 145a.

That is, in the foul ball passage 145, the upstream region of the passage 145a is closer to the passage 14
In this embodiment, the front-to-rear width of the foul ball passage section 145 downstream of the passage section 145a is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the ball.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 is set so that the front-to-rear width upstream of the passage 145a is slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball.
When balls are retained in the passage 145a, multiple balls can be positioned with their positions shifted forward and backward upstream of the passage 145, which increases the number of balls that can be retained. At the same time, the centers of the balls are prevented from being lined up in the forward and backward directions (they will be slightly shifted left and right and up and down), which prevents two balls from entering the passage 145a at the same time.

In other words, the entry of balls into the passage 145a can be restricted to one at a time. This makes it possible to prevent the foul balls from reaching the junction area CE at the same time, even if two or more foul balls flow into the foul ball passage 145 in succession, thereby reducing the possibility of the balls getting caught between the upper and lower walls and interlocking in the junction area CE.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 is provided in a plate-like shape extending from the bottom plate portion on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, and has a left end portion connected to the left wall portion. The foul ball receiving portion 146 is provided with an inclined plate portion 146a whose downward slope of the ball flows downward toward the right, and a foul ball receiving portion 146b vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a.
46, and the passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate portion 146a.
and a curved guide plate portion 146c extending in a plate shape from the rear bottom plate portion of the support member 40 toward the rear side, the curved guide plate portion 146c being curved in such a manner that the extending direction becomes more upward as it approaches the rear side.

The ball is guided along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c toward the foul ball passage portion 145 (front side), while the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b act to guide the ball toward the foul ball receiving portion 145 (front side).
The position of the ball passing through the inclined plate portion 146 toward the front side can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. In other words, the ball rolling down the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can be made to flow to the right, and the blocking portion 146b can prevent the ball from passing through the left side of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

This makes it possible to lengthen the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. In other words, because the ball can finish bouncing up and down before it reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (the variation in the ball's up and down position can be reduced), the width of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the S-shaped path SL2 can be set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) while allowing the ball to flow down smoothly.

The foul ball passage 145 is formed in a range that forms the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage 145a
) the passage width is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball), so that illegal tools with a larger outer diameter can be prevented from passing through the foul ball passage portion 145.

Next, a description will be given of the structure of the front side of the front frame 14. Fig. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and Fig. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Figs. 100 and 101 show a state in which the components of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illumination section 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed long in the left-right direction, and the left and right ends are supported from below by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illumination parts 8031 and 8032. In this support structure, a tapered supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) is formed at the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400, similar to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, and is recessed from the back side to the front side. The left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 are fitted into fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500, thereby allowing the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 to be supported from below by the right panel unit 500.
0 is concatenated.

This makes it unnecessary to directly fasten the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500, and allows them to be connected and fixed to each other by fastening them to the main body frame 14a. Due to the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembly to the main body frame 14a is regulated to the order of fastening the right panel unit 500 first, and then fastening the upper panel unit 400. Details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

In addition, the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 are configured to sandwich and fit into the fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see Figures 108 and 109) provided in the overlapping plate units 500R, 500L of the right panel unit 500, which is divided into left and right parts.
Therefore, in the assembled state (fitted state, see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 can be prevented from being disassembled.

102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the front side of the main body frame 14a is
89, and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89), and the multi-function cover members 171, 172 are shown disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

The upper plate member 14e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between itself and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101).
1 and FIG. 122).

The fastening portion 14e1 has a through hole through which a screw is inserted from its rear side, and is a part for fastening and fixing the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14e by fastening the screw that passes through the through hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see Figure 101) of the upper frame member 410.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 104, the main body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500 is shown disassembled from the main frame 14a. The right panel unit 500 is fastened to the main frame 14a by screws that are inserted from the rear side into insertion holes drilled in the right panel unit 500. The upper panel unit 400, upper edge plate member 14e, and multi-function cover members 171, 172 are not shown, while the covering cover 370 is shown for reference.

In addition, in the actual assembly procedure, the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a, and then the covering cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a. Also, the right panel unit 500 has a right side wall portion that forms the right edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

FIG. 105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510.
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the weight plate units 500L and 500R. Note that Fig. 108 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front side, and Fig. 109 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109 , the right panel unit 500 includes a left stacking board unit 500L and a right stacking board unit 500R that are stacked in the left-right direction, and the stacking board units 50
and a vertically long support plate portion 510 to which the 0L and 500R are fastened and which is fastened to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The weight plate unit 500 is secured to the support plate portion 510 by a screw inserted from the rear side to the front side.
The L and R are fastened to the support plate portion 510, and in this state, the support plate portion 510 is
The plate 4 is fastened to a main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw that is inserted from the rear side to the front side of the plate 4a.

The support plate 510 is formed with an L-shaped cross section by extending an extension portion 511a from the outer edge (right edge) of the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side.
The fixing member 511 mainly comprises a fixed plate 511 whose inner wall (left side wall) of extension portion 511a abuts against the outer surface of main body frame 14a at a position corresponding to the fixing member 512 (see FIG. 1), a base member 512 which is fastened to the fixing plate 511 on the front side of the fixing plate 511, a plurality of cover side through holes 513 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the base member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the base member 512, and a pin support hole 515 drilled in the fixing plate 511 to the right of the lens side through holes 514.

The fixing plate 511 has a base portion 511b that overlaps with the base member 512 when viewed from the front, and the portion of the fixing plate 511 facing the base member 512 protrudes toward the front in a platform shape, and the base member 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511 in a state where it is in face-to-face contact with the front of the base portion 511b.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the base portion 511b is
In the width direction, the weight plate units 500L and 500B can abut against each other (see FIG. 115(b)).
In other words, the posture of the weight plate units 500L, 500R relative to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In this embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixing plate 511, the extension portion 51
1a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extension portion 511
On the front side of the a, the outer cover member 560 abuts against the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction, while the fixing plate 5
On the left side surface of 11, a surface is formed up to the rear end as a surface that is almost flush with the side surface of the base portion 511b, so that the rear end of the inner cover member 520 can be positioned in the same plane as the rear end of the support plate portion 510, and in the assembled state (see Figure 86), the inner surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 abuts against the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510.

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In this embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged in a curved row that matches the curved shape of the light-guiding member 540, with a predetermined interval (11 mm interval in this embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape of the light-guiding member 540 projected from the front, and irradiate light from directly behind the light-guiding member 540 toward the light-guiding member 540 with their optical axes parallel to each other (see FIG. 107).

The width of the end face of light-guiding member 540 facing LED 512a is made longer than the width of LED 512a (the left-right width of the light-emitting portion) (see imaginary line in Figure 107), so that the light irradiated from LED 512a enters light-guiding member 540 without any leakage and exits from either side of light-guiding member 540; the entry and exit of light and the path of that light will be described later.

The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 527 disposed on the inner cover member 520, and through which a screw to be fastened to the rear fastening portion 527 is inserted from the rear side.
Fixed to 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning a rear fastening portion 556 disposed on the outer lens member 550, and through which a screw to be fastened to the rear fastening portion 556 is inserted from the rear side.
Fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, while the vertical width is set to be approximately twice the length of the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, while strictly defining the left-right position of the outer cover member 560, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed.

That is, in a fastening preparation state in which the stacking plate units 500L, 500R abut against the support plate portion 510 from the front side, even if the plate units 500L, 500R are slightly misaligned vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (if they are misaligned vertically by approximately the diameter of the protrusion 566), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515.
After inserting the pin support hole 515, the weight plate unit 500L,
By moving 500R up and down by the amount of misalignment, the misalignment can be eliminated and fastening can be easily performed.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left stacking plate unit 500L has a window portion 14c (FIG. 86
5. An inner cover member 520 which constitutes the right edge of the inner cover 520 and is made of a light-impermeable resin material.
and an inner lens member 530 fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and made of a light-transmitting, colorless resin material.

The right stacking plate unit 500R includes a light guide member 540 disposed opposite the left stacking plate unit 500L.
An outer lens member 550 is disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and is made of a light-opaque resin material. The outer lens member 550 is disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and is made of a light-opaque resin material. The outer lens member 550 faces the light-guiding member 540 in the left-right direction and faces the light-guiding member 540 in the front-rear direction.
0 and an outer cover member 560 to which the outer lens member 550 is fastened and fixed.

Next, the details of each member will be described.
110 is an exploded front perspective view of the load plate units 500L and 500R. Note that Fig. 110 shows a perspective view with the right side facing the front, and Fig. 111 shows a perspective view with the left side facing the front, and the five plate members constituting the load plate units 500L and 500R are exploded and illustrated.

The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed at the upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and an inner lens member 5
30, and a plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws are screwed to fix the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520; and a cylindrical portion formed longer than the short fastening portions 525 and inserted into the inner lens member 530, and a cylindrical portion formed longer than the short fastening portions 525 and inserted into the inner lens member 530, and
and a plurality of rear fastening portions 527 protruding from the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 from the rear side are screwed.
And, mainly prepare.

The main body plate portion 521 has a front end portion 521a formed in a wave shape, and includes a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front end portion 521a and the rear base portion 521b at a short width portion (portion closer to the rear side) of the wave shape.

The rear base portion 521b is attached to the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
It has an inner surface 521b1 that comes into face contact with (has the same shape as) the left side surface 521b.

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion that is disposed in an attitude that inclines more leftward as it approaches the rear surface side, and an opening portion 524 is defined by this connecting plate portion 521c.

In this embodiment, the connecting plate parts 521c are not arranged at equal intervals up and down, but are arranged so that the intervals become wider from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). As a result, the opening widths of the multiple openings 524 are made different, and the lighting effect is created by the openings 524.
It can be different for each.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which screws for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 are screwed, and includes a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-to-rear direction, and an engaging groove 522b recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface.

The fitting grooves 522b are formed as grooves into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left-right direction on the left outer surface. That is, the outer cover member 560 is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 by inserting screws at two points at the upper end and one point at the lower end.

The fitting grooves 523b are formed as grooves into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are arranged in four positions above and below, and are arranged in the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
Each of the outer portions of the openings 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes to the right with the connecting plate portion 521c as its end (left end). That is, each of the openings 524 is disposed recessed to the right of the left end of the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at the boundary between the rear base portion 521b and the connecting plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110).
The surface (left side surface) of the rear base portion 52 corresponds to the portion that protrudes to the left (see FIG. 111).
The surface of 1b is curved concavely to the right between the above-mentioned boundary portions in a design manner.
That is, the surface of the rear base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates from side to side as it progresses in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is disposed on the back side of the portion that protrudes toward the front side in the design. When the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, the back side of the protruding portion in the design has a recess that is likely to become dead space. In contrast, in this embodiment, the short fastening portion 525 is disposed in the recess of the inner cover member 520, so that the dead space can be effectively utilized and the space efficiency of the back side of the inner cover member 520 (the inner lens member 530 side) can be improved.

The inner lens member 530 is formed such that the front and rear end shapes are similar to the front and rear end shapes of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed in a vertically long plate shape by the main body plate portion 5
A front end 531 a of the inner cover member 520 is formed into a wave shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end 521 a of the inner cover member 520 .

The front end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front edge of the main plate portion 531, and a support hole 531 is formed in the front-rear direction at a position where the curve constituting the wave shape changes to the front-rear direction, and a protruding portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted through the support hole 531.
b, 531c.

The support hole 531b is formed in the front part of the wave-shaped front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 is formed on the rear side thereof, through which a screw passes to fasten the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520. That is, since the screw is fastened behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 531b is
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31b, the support hole 531b can be prevented from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in a rear portion of the wave-shaped front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 is disposed on the rear side thereof, which extends to a position where the support hole 531c can come into contact with the light guide member 540. That is, the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is strengthened by the inclined rib portion 532, so that the support hole 531c can be supported by the inclined rib portion 532.
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of support hole 531c, deformation or displacement of support hole 531c can be prevented.

The main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d drilled in the left-right direction at a position between the support holes 531b and 531c in the up-down direction and large enough to insert the long fastening portion 526. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is disposed between the pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 that connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a in the vertical direction.
b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended to fill the gap between the light guide member 540 and the upper and lower plate portions 532a.
Like the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that protrudes to the left as it approaches the rear side, and therefore has a shape that becomes longer in left-right width as it approaches the rear side (a triangle shape with the front end at its tip when viewed from above).

Inner lens member 530 has protruding portion 533 formed protruding leftward from main body plate portion 531 in a manner passing through opening 524. Protruding portion 533 has light scattering portion 533a, on the side opposite to the protruding side, which is provided in a wavy convex shape and has a wavy curved surface that scatters light.

The light guide member 540 is a so-called light guide plate made of thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions formed on both left and right sides as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a lattice pattern, which redirect the traveling direction of light irradiated from the LEDs 512a arranged on the rear side to the left and right directions. That is, at least a part of the light irradiated from the LEDs 512a to the rear end of the light guide member 540 is redirected to the left and right directions via the light guide member 540, and is irradiated to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see Figures 105 and 107), and is formed into a shape in which the width dimension in the thickness direction gradually tapers from the end face on the rear side (the LEDs 512a side) to the end face on the front side.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in this embodiment, the LED 512a
The concave portion is a notched recess recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts the incident light from the LED 512a to the light guide member 5
The light is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of 40.

In this embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed by pressing (thermally pressing) a template having a pattern in which cone-shaped portions with an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of about 1 mm at the bottom circle are distributed in a lattice shape at intervals of about 3 mm against the thermoplastic resin. Of the light irradiated from the LED 512a, the light that reaches the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion and is emitted in a substantially perpendicular direction from the left and right side surfaces of the light-guiding member 540.

The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably transparent, and examples thereof include acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, amorphous polyester resins, amorphous olefin resins, polystyrene resins, and AS resins (
Among these, by using an acrylic resin in particular, the light guide member 540 has a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.
can be obtained.

In this embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness to a range from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the thermal bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see Figure 86), the light-guiding member 540 has a wave-like shape in which the front end is slightly shifted toward the rear side from the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and also has a wave-like shape that undulates left and right.

The left and right wave shapes are not strictly defined in the present invention.
There are no particular restrictions, but the radius of curvature (R) of the curved surface is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less.
By setting the radius of curvature (R) in this range, it is possible to provide a design that has little distortion after hot bending, maintains good practical mechanical properties, and allows for three-dimensional freedom.

The details of the wavy shape will be described later (see FIG. 114).
The corrugated shape is located to the left at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the connecting plate 521a and located to the right (away from the inner cover member 520) between the positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c.

The corrugated shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot bending the base material having the concave portions formed therein, as described above. The hot bending method of the present invention is to form a curved concave surface (female mold) and a curved convex surface (female mold) in a state where the base material is heated to a heating temperature of the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin of the base material + 10 to 40°C.
The substrate is pressed against a mold having a male mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be 110° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower. More specifically, the heating temperature is preferably 130° C. or higher and 150° C. or lower.

The heating temperature of the substrate at this time is set to the melting point of the thermoplastic resin or lower. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the load deflection temperature + 40°C or lower and the melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not destroyed, and the reflection angle of the light from the light source before and after the thermal bending process can be suppressed from fluctuating. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in brightness in the light guide plate and unevenness in the brightness distribution. In addition, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion of the light guide plate can be suppressed.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved main body plate portion 541 that constitutes a light guide plate, and the main body plate portion 5
and fastening portions 542 extending in the vertical direction from the upper and lower ends of the outer cover member 560 and through which screws are inserted to fasten the outer cover member 560.

The light guide member 540 has a fastening portion 542 and a recess 541a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
In other positions, light guiding member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction. That is, light guiding member 540 is composed of a single plate without holes at least inside the projection surface onto which opening 524 is projected in the left-right direction, so that the presentation effect of the light passing through opening 524 can be improved. The rear end of light guiding member 540 is positioned approximately flush with the rear end of inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 includes a main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and inner fitting portions 551 disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 and into which fastening portions 542 of the light guide member 540 are fitted and supported.
52, a plurality of insertion holes 553 configured as through holes through which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, a protrusion portion 554 that protrudes to the right in the area surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 and is visible through the outer cover member, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portions 526 of the inner cover member 520 are inserted, and a plurality of rear fastening portions 556 that protrude from the rear side of the main body plate portion 551 and into which screws that fix the support plate portion 510 from the rear side are screwed in.

The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the shapes of the front and rear end portions follow the shapes of the front and rear end portions of the light guiding member 540. That is, the outer lens member 550 has a front end portion 551a extending leftward from the front edge of the main body plate portion 551 and constituting a curved surface, which is wavy in shape substantially matching the shape of the front end portion of the light guiding member 540, and is disposed slightly shifted toward the front side with respect to the front end portion of the light guiding member 540. In this embodiment, the front end portion of the light guiding member 540 and the front end portion 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed such that they are disposed at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the up-down direction.

The front end 551a is at a transition point in the front-rear direction of the curves that form the wave shape.
The support member 551 has a plurality of protruding portions 551b which are protruding from the front side and which are fitted into the support holes 531b, 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The surface of the front end 551 a opposite to the surface facing the light guide member 540 is provided with the following:
Countless bulging portions 551a1 (see FIG. 115(a) ) that bulge out in a semicircular shape when viewed from the side are formed vertically. These bulging portions 551a1 function to scatter the light emitted from the front end face of the light-guiding member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at a predetermined interval, the light emitted from the front end face of the light-guiding member 540 can be in a vertically continuous band-like light emission mode.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a deep recess having a shape recessed inward (inner of the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the protruding portion 554. This makes it possible to firmly fasten the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560, and prevents the outer lens member 550 from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right weight plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which the screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is disposed on the outer lens member 550, but not on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be disposed as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (regardless of the screw diameter or screw arrangement). This allows the area disposed facing the player (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) to be expanded.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540.
40 and the main body plate portion 551 come into surface contact with each other (see FIG. 114(b)).

This makes it possible to prevent the light guiding member 540 from being misaligned in the direction in which it is disposed opposite the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guiding member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LED 512a is disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510,
This makes it possible to prevent misalignment with the light-guiding member 540, and allows light to be incident from the LEDs 512a to the light-guiding member 540 with high precision.

The outer cover member 560 has a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561, which has a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520, the upper fastened portion 562 having an elongated hole portion having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and having a plurality of screw receiving portions 562a through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, and a receiving surface at the lower end portion of the main body plate portion 561 which is capable of receiving the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520,
The lower fastening portion 563 has a screw receiving portion 563a formed in a long hole shape with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side.
26, and mainly comprises a plurality of screw receiving portions 564 formed in the shape of a long hole with a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526 and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, through which screws are inserted from the opposite side, an opening 565 formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the protrusion portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a plurality of protrusions 566 protruding from the main body plate portion 561 toward the back side.

The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claw portions constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed in the covering cover 3.
The left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the support member 70 (see FIG. 92) are formed as grooves into which they fit.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by fitting with the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b, 563b. Here, the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 with their surfaces in the up-down direction (see FIG. 86), so that the covering cover 370 can stably support the right panel unit 500 even if it has a shape that protrudes toward the front side, and the stably supported right panel unit 500 can support the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the protruding portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (
(The opening 565 is formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the protruding portion 554.) Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the protruding portion 554 can be narrowed, so that the fraudulent act of peeling off the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

112 and 113, the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500
We will now explain the assembly method of R. Figure 112(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, Figure 112(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in Figure 112(a), Figure 113(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and Figure 113(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in Figure 113(a).

112(a) and 112(b) show a state in which the protruding portion 551b is disposed on the rear side of the support hole 531b, and in FIG. 113(a) and 113(b) show a state in which the protruding portion 55
1b is shown inserted into the support hole 531b.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled by abutting the main body plate portion 531 of the left stacking plate unit 500L and the left end portion of the front end portion 551a of the right stacking plate unit 500R in the left-right direction (FIG. 11).
2(b)), the left stacking plate unit 500L is brought close to the front side of the right stacking plate unit 500R and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

In this manner, the protruding portions 551b, 551c are provided at the front end of the right panel unit 500.
By adopting a configuration in which the left stacking board unit 500L and the right stacking board unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c into the support hole 531b, the design freedom of the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

For example, in this embodiment, as a result of adopting the above-mentioned configuration, the front end portion of the right panel unit (
The number of screws that are located (located closer to the front side of the light-guiding member 540) and fasten the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R can be reduced, thereby reducing the area where light is blocked by the screws, making it easier to view the light emitted from the front end face of the light-guiding member 540 in a band-like shape extending in the vertical direction.

In addition, for example, in this embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) that fasten the left stacking board unit 500L and the right stacking board unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced, so that a load may be applied to the light guide member 540 by mistake during fastening.
Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be arranged can be expanded up to the vicinity of the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). This makes it possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually interrupted near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

In addition, when the left stacking plate unit 500L is brought close to the right stacking plate unit 500R from the front side and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left stacking plate unit 500L and the light guide member 540 of the right stacking plate unit 500R are
The inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 are in contact with each other. That is, the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 are in contact with each other.
This functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the right weight plate unit 500R in the forward/backward direction, making it easy to assemble the right panel unit 500.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, the right panel unit 500 is made by mounting the left stacking plate unit 5
The right and left weight plate units 500L and 500R are assembled by fastening, and there are at least two possible assembly procedures.

The first procedure is a method in which the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R are fastened to each other and then fastened to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a method in which the right stacking plate unit 500R is fastened to the support plate portion 510 alone, and then the left stacking plate unit 500L is brought closer to the right stacking plate unit 500R, and the protruding portions 551b, 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b,
These are methods for fastening and fixing the left stacking plate unit 500L to the right stacking plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510. These two procedures can also be used when disassembling the right panel unit 500.

In this way, since the right panel unit 50 can be assembled and disassembled in two different procedures, a worker performing maintenance or the like can select which procedure to use depending on the part that needs to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether to disassemble or assemble the 0, thereby shortening the work time.

Regardless of which procedure is used for disassembly, in order to disassemble the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R,
The protrusions 551b and 551c and the support hole 531b must slide relative to each other in the planar direction.
In order to slide the left stacking plate unit 500L and the right stacking plate unit 500R relative to each other in the planar direction, at least one of them needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

In this manner, the configuration in which the protrusions 551b, 551c are fitted into the support hole 531b helps to prevent fraudulent activity of prying open (disassembling) the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see Figure 86) and entering the interior of the pachinko machine 8010 by climbing inside the right panel unit 500.

That is, when the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screws, and fraudulent acts can be easily performed. On the other hand, when the left stacking board unit 5
The left and right weight plate units 500L and 500R are fastened to the support plate unit 510 with screws inserted from the rear side of the support plate unit 510, and the left and right weight plate units 500L and 500R are configured to be difficult to disassemble unless the screws are removed from the rear side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104), making it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activity of entering the interior of the pachinko machine 8010 by climbing inside the right panel unit 500.

The shape of the light-guiding member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and its effect on the presentation will be described with reference to Fig. 114. Fig. 114(a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, Fig. 114(b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and Fig. 114(c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in Figs. 114(a) to 114(c),
The support plate portion 510 is omitted in the illustration.

Light emitted from LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is irradiated onto the light-guiding member 540 from the rear side, and the light incident on the light-guiding member 540 is redirected to the left and right by the action of the light-guiding member 540. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the light-guiding member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape that undulates in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114(b)), the side that forms the concave shape focuses light, and the side that forms the convex shape diffuses light. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the multiple openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a curvature radius R1 on the opening 524 side (left side), so that the light emitted from the light guide member 540 to the opening 524 side can be focused to produce an effect. This can improve the intensity of the light visually recognized through the opening 524.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) is made convex, the light emitted from the light-guiding member 540 toward the outer lens member 550 can be diffused at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the multiple openings 524 and used for presentation purposes.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the top and bottom positions are the same, it is possible to create a difference in the manner in which the light is produced (whether the light is concentrated or diffused) on the left and right sides of the light-guiding member 540, thereby improving the production effect.

The difference in the manner of light presentation is not only caused by the curved shape of the light-guiding member 540, but various other manners are exemplified. For example, the manner of light presentation on both the left and right sides can be made different by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut into the light-guiding member 540 into different regions or by dividing the thickness of the light-guiding member 540 into different regions.

The light guide member 540 is always formed with a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the top three openings 524, the vertical width increases as the opening 524 approaches the upper side, and accordingly, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 at a position corresponding to the second opening 524 from the top is set shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
>R2), and similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at a position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is made shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1 >R2 >R3).

As a result, even if there is no change in the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512, the number of LEDs 512a that emit light to be concentrated for each opening 524 is different, so that the amount of light visually recognized through the openings 524 can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to this embodiment, the amount of light visually recognized can be made greater for the upper openings 524 than for the lower openings 524.

In addition, the radius of curvature R4 at the bottom opening 524, i.e., the position corresponding to the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4 ≒ R1), and the normal line from the center of the concave surface is shaped to face slightly diagonally upward. Therefore, the amount of light visible through the openings 524 at the top and bottom ends can be intensified, the light presentation can be made more vivid, and the light emitted through the bottom opening 524 can be emitted upward toward the player's line of sight.

114(c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are illustrated as the length connecting the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of opening 524 in a side view. The width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R1 is vertical width W1, the width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R2 is vertical width W2, the width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R3 is vertical width W3, and the width of opening 524 arranged opposite the portion with radius of curvature R4 is vertical width W4.

In this embodiment, the openings 524 are formed such that the vertical widths W1 to W4 of the openings 524 are smaller toward the bottom (W1>W2>W3>W4). That is, in the portions of the radii of curvature R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship of the radii of curvature R1 to R3 is related to the magnitude relationship of the vertical widths W1 to W3 of the openings 524. This allows the light to be focused more easily in the portions where the degree of light concentration is weak (for example, the portions of the radii of curvature R
In a portion where the degree of light concentration is high (e.g., a portion of radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent too much light from being incident on the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of this embodiment, the light emission mode of each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center points of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114(b) correspond to the focal points of the light emitted to the left of the light-guiding member 540, and are located at approximately the middle positions of the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction.

The light guide member 540 has a leftward convex shape in an area KE at the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the area KE is defined as a strip-shaped area extending in the front-rear direction, and the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent openings 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114(c), the area K
The upper end of the region E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent thereto above, and the lower end of the region KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent thereto below.
The light irradiated from a in the front-rear direction is the light irradiated from the right panel unit 500 as viewed from the left side (FIG. 114(c)
521c) proceeds while being hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is reflected by the inner cover member 520.
Since the light is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c, even if the light collecting effect is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visible to the player is small.

On the other hand, by making the region KE not flat but convex to the left, the light guide member 54
Since the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed in a curved shape without corners and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

In addition, by forming the region KE in a convex shape toward the left side, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is concentrated can be formed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. This can improve the effect of the light presentation visually recognized through the opening 565.

In other words, depending on whether or not light is incident on area KE from LED 512a, it is possible to suppress any change in the light viewed through opening 524 while causing a change in the light viewed through opening 565.

For example, the LED 512a that emits light into the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5
By turning on 12a, it is also possible to irradiate light without gaps to the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565. At this time, by making the right side of the light guide member 540 above and below the area KE have a concave shape, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the area KE intersects with the right side of the outer cover member 560, so that it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being visually perceived as dark in the area KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is concentrated and emitted in an edge shape, and the amount of light visible to the player at the edge can be increased.
This can add some contrast to the lighting pattern of the LED (see reference).

The light-guiding member 540 may be configured to have a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding area (the area corresponding to the area KE) of the protruding portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be made to emit light in a band shape.

The area KE is shorter in the front-to-rear width of the right panel unit 500 (the distance from the LED 512a is shorter) than the areas above and below it. Therefore, even if the light incident on the area KE is weak, it is likely to reach the front end. The light that reaches the front end may be used to create a visual effect.

That is, although it cannot be seen through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front end portion 5
By providing a light effect that can be seen through 31a (see FIG. 105) (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) and setting the probability of a big win for that effect high, the player's eye position can be shifted away from the game board 13 from the front end of the right panel unit 500. This reduces the degree to which the player's eyes get tired, allowing the player to play for long periods of time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, but is visible to the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Therefore, a notification can be given by light that is not visible to the player sitting to the left of the right panel unit 500 and playing the pachinko machine 8010, but is visible to the store clerk viewing the right panel unit 500 from the right side.

This allows an error notification to be executed that is not noticed by the player committing fraud but can be easily noticed by a store clerk, thereby preventing the player committing fraud from trying to escape.

Furthermore, by inverting the left-right shape of the right panel unit 500, the light effects in area KE may be visible only to the player and not to store clerks.

FIG. 115( a ) is a schematic side view of the light-guiding member 540 , and FIG. 115( b ) is a schematic side view of the light-guiding member 540 .
5A is a cross-sectional view of the light-guiding member 540 taken along line CXVb-CXVb in FIG.

The light guide member 540 is gradually tapered from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side.
The width of the inner wall ...

Therefore, the front end surface of the light guide member 540 is not formed to have the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion arranged to face the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) of the inner lens member 530 is larger than the end surface of the portion arranged to face the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111) of the LED 5
Since the distance from the end face on the 12a side becomes longer, the taper becomes even thinner and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. This makes it possible to reduce the difference between the light emission pattern seen near the support hole 531b and the light emission pattern seen near the support hole 531c.

In this embodiment, the vicinity of the support hole 531c is sandwiched between the vicinity of the support hole 531b and the upper and lower parts and disposed at a recessed position on the rear side.
Due to the shadow cast by the surrounding areas, the area near the support hole 531c tends to be visually perceived as darker than the area near the support hole 531b.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the portion of the light guide member 54 that faces the support hole 531b
Since the end face of the light-guiding member 540 located opposite the support hole 531c is formed with a larger width dimension (thickness) than the end face of the light-guiding member 540 located opposite the support hole 531c, a larger area of the surface that receives and emits light from the light irradiated from the LED 512a can be ensured.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from each of the LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c is different from the amount of light visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531c.
The amount of light that is visible in the area near the front end 531 of the inner lens member 530 can be increased, and the degree of darkness due to differences in distance in the front-rear direction and shadows can be mitigated.
With a being the foremost surface, the degree of light emission visible at the front end of the right panel unit 500 can be made uniform across the top and bottom (the difference in intensity can be made smaller).

Fig. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. Note that in Fig. 116, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guiding member 540 is visible. Also, in Fig. 116, an example of a path (traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guiding member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, light emitted from light-guiding member 540 toward inner lens member 530 is concentrated as a result of light-guiding member 540 being curved, and is slightly diffused as it passes through inner lens member 530 before proceeding to the outside.

On the other hand, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused due to the effect of the light guide member 540 being curved.
While the arrangement of the LEDs 521a is constant, the light emission pattern (denseness, brightness) can be made different on both sides of the light-guiding member 540. In other words, it is possible to allow the player to visually recognize light in a light emission pattern different from the light emission pattern expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (the player side) is
115(b) is curved, so that the light is not directed straight to the side, but is deflected toward the player (see the imaginary arrow in FIG. 115(b)). The imaginary arrow in FIG. 115(b) indicates that
(An example of the direction of travel of light passing through the light-guiding member 540 is shown.) This makes it easier for the player to see the light, and improves the effect of the light-emitting presentation.

Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the upper panel unit 400 is made of an upper side plate member 14.
e, and the right panel unit 500 is fastened to the main body frame 14a through the fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see Figures 108 and 109) disposed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 at its lower right end.
It is a unit that is fitted into and supported from below, and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

Fig. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and Fig. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in Figs. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 includes an upper frame member 410 (see Fig. 100) fastened to an upper edge plate member 14e with a speaker assembly 450 sandwiched therebetween, an illumination unit 401 disposed on the front side of the upper frame member 410 and fastened to the upper frame member 410, a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the rear side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14e,
117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The illumination unit 401 is a unit that displays the model name, etc. on the front side.
The LEDs emit light, and the LEDs emit light.
The show will be performed using light.

The illuminated unit 401 mainly comprises a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a corrugated wall portion 403 formed in a corrugated shape on the rear outer wall portion of the main body 402, a plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally elongated plate shape from the lower edge of the corrugated wall portion 403 to the rear side, a tubular portion 405 above the plate-like portion 404 which protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the corrugated wall portion 403 to the rear side and has a cylindrical inner shape formed by penetrating the corrugated wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the rear side of the main body 402 and into which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened.

The main body 402 is formed in a box shape with the open sides of the front and rear dish-shaped members overlapping each other, forming a space inside. The LEDs contained therein are mounted on an electronic board.
The electronic board is fixed to the main body 402 .

The corrugated wall portion 403 is engaged with a corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, so that the installation position in the left-right direction can be easily determined, and the illumination unit 4 is easily attached to the upper frame member 410.
This part improves the workability of assembling 01.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the corrugated wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical positional deviation of the illumination unit 401 relative to the upper frame member 410. Note that a horizontally elongated groove shape is recessed and formed in the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to sandwich the plate-like portion 404 from above and below.

The cylindrical portion 405 functions as a through hole for passing wiring from an electronic board on which the LEDs contained in the main body portion 402 are arranged to the upper frame member 410 side.

The illumination unit 401 is fastened to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the multiple fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space that contains the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14e, and is formed so that access to the inside is difficult. In other words, the upper frame member 410 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e and the main frame 14a after the illumination unit 401 is fastened.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG.
119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
The illumination unit 8033 mainly comprises a main body member 411 to which the illumination unit 401 is fastened, a lower edge plate member 420 which is formed in a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411 and which is fastened from the rear side along the lower edge of the main body member 411, a right corner support member 430R which is fastened to the main body member 411 from the rear side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411, a left corner support member 430L which is fastened to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and a lens member 440 which is fitted into the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position where it protrudes from the opening 414 to the front side and is pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R to prevent it from falling off to the rear side and which constitutes the illumination section 8033.

The main body member 411 is a long member on both sides, with openings formed on both the left and right sides to allow the vibration waves (sound) generated by the speaker assembly 450 to pass through, and with the speaker cover 27 disposed to cover the openings. On the front side, the main body member 411 has a wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, and a support through hole 413 formed in a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 that faces the cylindrical portion 405 of the illumination unit 401, the support through hole 413 having an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 405,
and an opening 414 formed in the upper right corner and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wave shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the illumination unit 401. This makes it easy to align the illumination unit 401 in the left-right direction when fitting it into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 .
This allows the wiring extending through the cylindrical portion 405 to pass through the support through-hole 413 to the rear side of the main body member 411. Therefore, one end of the wiring connected to the electronic board contained in the illumination unit 401 can be connected to the other end of the wiring with a terminal on the rear side of the main body member 411, so that the other end of the wiring can be prevented from being detached when the front frame 14 is closed.

The support through-hole 413 determines the position of the cylindrical portion 405 when the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted therethrough.
This allows the support through-holes 413 to be used for positioning the illumination unit 401 relative to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be seen in a front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) has an LED 14 at a position that coincides with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction.
The light emitted from the LED 14 e 2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414 .

The main body member 411 mainly comprises, on the rear side, a wavy edge portion 416 which is formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above, a supported groove 417 which is recessed from the rear side at the lower end face of the right corner, a supported groove 418 which is recessed from the rear side at the lower end face of the left corner, fastening portions 419 which are arranged at symmetrical positions near the upper end and are formed so that a screw can be screwed in, and second fastening portions 419b which are formed at positions closer to the top and bottom so that a screw can be screwed in.

The wavy side portion 416 is shaped to match the shape of the opposing portion of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower front end portion). This makes it easy to position the lower edge plate member 420 in the left-right direction when fastening it to the main body member 411.

The supported groove 417 is shaped so that the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500.
4, a load (weight, etc.) applied from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface in which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 is shaped so as to be able to fit into the upper end of the illumination part 8031.
86), the upper panel unit 40 is supported by the surface on which the support groove 418 is formed.
It is configured so that a load (weight, etc.) starting from 0 can be applied to the illumination section 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where screws inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and is provided with an enlarged rib 419a that protrudes in a rib-like manner from the base to a position that does not reach the tip.

As described below, the expanded rib 419a is a part that clamps the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper edge plate member 14e between the main body frame 14a and the expanded rib 419a by screws inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a being fastened to the fastening portion 419 (see Figure 125 (a)), and details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the expanded ribs 419 a are arranged in three locations around the fastening portion 419 at intervals of 120° in the direction in which the screws are fastened to the fastening portion 419 . The expanded ribs 419 a have the same shape.

The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e at a lower position of the main body member 411 and to the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450.
122) of the speaker assembly 450, and are formed at an upper position of the main body member 411 at positions that coincide with the recessed portions 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450, the details of which will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by curving a long plate, a corrugated wall portion 422 formed in a corrugated shape in a bottom view at the lower front side edge of the main body member 421, and a cross-sectional L
The main components include an L-shaped extension portion 423 formed in an L-shape, and an opening 424 arranged at an equal distance to the left and right from the left-right center position of the main body plate portion 421 (the upper end position of the curved shape) and composed of multiple small-diameter through holes that penetrate in the vertical direction.

When the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy edge portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in contact with each other at the front and rear, the lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 abuts against the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy edge portion 416 on its back surface, and a part of the L-shaped extension portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-to-rear direction.

Therefore, the effective plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the point where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut from above and below can be increased, thereby improving the strength.

The opening 424 is provided for the speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L have circular openings 430R1, 430L1 that are circular openings that pass vibrations generated toward the front side of the speaker assembly 450.

The right corner support member 430R has a horizontally elongated rectangular through hole 430R2 formed in a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction.
The light irradiated onto the lens member 440 through the opening 414 is visible to the player.

Fig. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and Fig. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. Note that in Figs. 121 and 122, speaker connection wires 453 are shown by imaginary lines for ease of understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted through connecting holes 469, and are fastened and fixed to the upper plate member 14e at the left and right ends and the lower end.
0L, so we will first explain speaker assembly 450R and then speaker assembly 4
The explanation of 50L will be omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R is formed of a speaker (cone-type speaker) 451, which is an acoustic device that converts an electrical signal into an audible sound wave and makes the sound audible, a front assembly 460 in which the speaker 451 is inserted into a through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front.
The rear assembly 48 forms a space between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).
It mainly comprises 0.

The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to cover the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460.
The speaker 451 is attached to the game machine and emits sound effects related to the game.
A speaker connection wire 453 (e.g., an electric wire consisting of a copper wire and a coating portion that coats the copper wire) having one end connected to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) is passed through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and a terminal connector of the speaker connection wire 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102).
4) to be connected to the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

The front part of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through.
The speaker 451 having the cover 54 is attached to the front assembly 460 with its front surface aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the sound reproduced from the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high quality without being muffled. In addition, the protective cover 454 can suitably protect the front part of the speaker 451 without causing a deterioration in sound quality.

The front assembly 460 is a body portion 46 formed in a cup shape that is long from side to side and open on the rear side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the center of the vertical width, and an extension plate 463 extending from the rear side edge of a recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 toward the outside of the vertical width to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 in a plate-like shape,
the rear assembly 480 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e (see FIG. 100 ); and a front recess 471 recessed from the rear end to the front side at the lower end of the tip side main body portion 461T.

The main body portion 461 is divided into regions in the left-right direction into a base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a base end side main body portion 461B disposed on the left-right central side of the base end side main body portion 461B (see FIG. 12 ).
121 ) and a tip side main body portion 461T connected to the left-right center side (left side in FIG. 121 ) of the intermediate main body portion 461M. Note that a space is continuously formed between the base end side main body portion 461B, the intermediate main body portion 461M and the tip side main body portion 461T and the rear assembly 480.

The main body 461 includes a rear wall 461H formed as a wall surrounding almost the entire periphery of the main body 461 in a front view. The rear wall 461H includes an edge portion that is not turned up on the inside (an edge portion that does not have a flange or the like formed on the inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see Figures 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with respect to the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 463 has a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the rear side.
The screw inserted into the upper plate member 14a is inserted into the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper plate member 14b from the rear side of the main body frame 14a.
4e through the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480.
It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted through the through hole 463a through the upper edge plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a and screwed into the main body member 411, and as the screw is tightened, the extension plate 463 is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to the main body frame 14a, the upper edge plate member 14e, and the main body member 411 by being tightened together.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with a resin material sandwiched therebetween), thereby improving the acoustic effect of the speaker 451.

The wire passing recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recess width of the wire passing recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outline of the covering of the speaker connection wire 453. This applies pressure to the covering of the speaker connection wire 453 passing through the wire passing recess 464, and prevents a gap from being generated between the wire passing recess 464 and the speaker connection wire 453. This prevents the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection wire 453 passes. Note that in FIGS. 121 and 122, the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wire passing recess 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

In this embodiment, since the wire passing recess 464 is formed in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is attached, rather than in the rear assembly 480, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the speaker connection wire 453 to be connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wire passing recess 464. This can improve the workability of assembling the speaker assembly 450.

The light passing through hole 465 is provided for the LED 14e disposed in the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 toward the lens member 440.

The passage forming rib 467 abuts against the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap at the front and rear, and forms a bent passage (
123 ). This curved passage is a passage through which vibration waves (audio) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass. The front end of the passage-forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from occurring on the front side of the passage-forming rib 467.

The front recess 471 is formed to a size that surrounds (protrudes slightly outward from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120).

The rear assembly 480 includes a main body 48 formed in a cup shape that is long from side to side and open on the front side.
1, a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the center of the vertical width, and an extension plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the rear side edge of a recessed portion 483b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 toward the outside of the vertical width to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481,
a wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481; a light passing through hole 485 formed in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 481; a plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib-like manner from the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body 481 toward the front side;
The front assembly 460 mainly comprises a plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes through which screws can be inserted at positions corresponding to the front-to-rear direction of the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460, and a rear recessed portion 491 recessed from the front side to the rear side at a position corresponding to the front-to-rear direction of the front recessed portion 471 of the front assembly 460.

The main body 481 is provided in a plate-like shape extending to the front side in a manner surrounding the outer periphery of the main body 481 at a position shifted inward by the plate thickness of the main body 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate, and the front side wall 48 is formed from a shape that is fitted into the inner surface of the rear side wall 461H of the front assembly 460.
Equipped with 1H.

The speaker assembly 450R has a double wall portion in which the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H are fitted together around the entire outer periphery, so that air leakage from the outer periphery can be prevented. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem in which the acoustic effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the outer periphery.

The front side wall portion 481H is provided with a pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha that protrude beyond the wire pressing protrusion 484 toward the front side at a position that sandwiches the wire pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with a gap that allows the speaker connection wire 453 to pass through.

The auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection wire 453 temporarily fixed in the wire passing recess 464 from shifting when the rear assembly 480 is attached to the front assembly 460. That is, the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha are tapered so as to widen to the left and right as they approach the front side (tip side) (see FIG. 124(c)).
Even if the wire passing recess 464 comes off from the wire passing recess 464 and begins to shift to the left or right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha.

This allows the speaker connection wire 453 to be returned to the wiring passing recess 464 during the assembly process, and in the assembled state (see Figure 100), the speaker connection wire 453 can be easily accommodated in the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484.

The recessed portion 482 is configured with an outer shape that is the same as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 when viewed from the front, and is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper edge plate member 14e (see Figures 100 and 101) is arranged on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 has a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the rear side.
The screw inserted into the upper plate member 14a is inserted into the common fastening hole 14a2 and the upper plate member 14b from the rear side of the main body frame 14a.
4e through the through hole 483a and the front assembly 46
0 through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw is inserted through the through hole 483a through the upper edge plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a and screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, and as the screw is tightened, the extension plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper edge plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wiring pressing protrusion 484 is protruding along the upper edge of the rear side panel of the main body 481, and is formed with a width that fits into the wiring passing recess 464, and is protruding with a protruding length that is shorter than the recessed depth of the wiring passing recess 464 and slightly shorter than the outer circumferential diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connection wire 453.

That is, the speaker connection wire 4 is inserted into the opening surrounded by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464.
By passing the wire 453 through the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464, the covering of the speaker connection wire 453 is compressed, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the speaker connection wire 453 and the opening formed by the wire pressing protrusion 484 and the wire passing recess 464.
This can suppress the occurrence of a problem in which sound leakage from the openings through which sound passes reduces the acoustic effect.

The light passing through hole 485 is provided for the LED 14e disposed in the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 toward the lens member 440. The light passing through hole 485 is formed as a circular opening that is large enough to surround one LED. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed as a tapered shape whose cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100 ), the light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming rib 487 is a rib that is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, abuts against each other front and rear with no gap between them, and forms a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends multiple times in the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. This curved passage is a passage through which vibration waves (audio) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side pass.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H.
That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same plane as the front and rear ends of the main body 48.
This prevents a gap from being generated on the rear side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the front end of the passage forming rib 487 abuts against the passage forming rib 467, and is designed with dimensions that generate a compressive force in the front-rear direction at that time.
67, 487 elastically deform in the front-rear direction to close the gap between them (FIG. 124(b)
reference).

At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is weak and it may bend left-right, the compression force may not work well and the gap may not be closed. In contrast, in this embodiment, the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, so the rigidity in the left-right direction can be strengthened by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (and further by the strength reinforced by the rear side wall portion 461H that is overlapped in the assembled state (see FIG. 100)). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened and the passage forming rib 487 can be prevented from bending left-right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 467 and the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well.

The rear recessed portion 491 is formed from a shape that is inverted from the front recessed portion 471, and forms an opening together with the front recessed portion 471. The opening is formed to a size that surrounds (protrudes slightly outward from) the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and is disposed at a position that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

FIG. 123(a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123(b) is a rear view of the rear assembly 48.
123(a) and 123(b), in order to facilitate understanding,
The speaker connection wire 453 is shown by an imaginary line, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are arranged opposite to each other, are shown in a state in which their opposing surfaces are unfolded toward the front side of the paper. That is, by folding Figures 123(a) and 123(b) about a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the center of the paper, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be aligned. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e can be brought into contact with the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e in the front-rear direction, respectively.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the base end side main body portion 46 of the front assembly 460 is provided inside the speaker assembly 450.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the rear side of the speaker 451. An acoustic passage as a passage for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is extended from the acoustic chamber to the tip side main body 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467, 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123A and 123B, the passage forming rib 467 is formed on the inner side (left side) of the wire passing recess 464 through which the wire passes, and has rib portions 467a, 467b arranged at a plurality of positions (five positions in this embodiment) alternately arranged up and down toward the left side.
, 467c, 467d, and 467e.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction of the wire passing recess 464 through which the wires pass.
a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, and the rib portions 487a,
It is possible to prevent the wiring from being pinched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H.
, 467e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e, in cooperation with the passage-forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480, form a curved passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, if the passage forming rib 467 is not provided and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451
While vibration waves generated from the passage forming rib 467 travel in a straight line, in this embodiment, the vibration waves Ws travel while avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as shown in Figure 123 (a) as an example of a propagation path, when a rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is positioned on the upper side and then the rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467b) located to the left of it (on the side of arrow L) and closest in the left-right direction is positioned on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws propagates in the upper left direction (in the direction of arrows L and U) between the ribs.

On the other hand, when a rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is positioned on the lower side and then the rib portion (e.g., rib portion 467c) located to the left of it (on the side of arrow L) and closest in the left-right direction is positioned on the upper side, the vibration wave Ws travels in a downward and leftward direction (in the direction of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in this embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d,
When 67e are arranged alternately up and down, the propagation path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path that curves up and down, and the propagation path length of the vibration wave Ws can be ensured to be longer than the left and right width of the space.

This makes it easy to adjust the length of the path that the vibration wave Ws takes to pass through the opening formed by the pair of recesses 471, 491, and makes it possible to suppress the generation of standing waves due to the vibration wave Ws.

In this embodiment, the recessed portions 462, 463b have the same function as the passage forming rib 467.
That is, the vibration wave Ws can be caused to travel in an upper left direction (the direction of the arrows L and U) between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately adjacent to the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and to the right (the side of the arrow R).

Therefore, the recesses 462, 463b have an effect of regulating the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect achieved during assembly.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), the passage forming rib 487 is a wire pressing protrusion 4 that presses the wire.
The rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d are formed on the inner side (left side) of the rib portion 484 in the left-right direction and are arranged in a plurality of positions (five positions in this embodiment) in a staggered manner up and down toward the left side.
87d, 487e.

The ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H.
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 481.

Here, the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are
The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e of the support 60 are formed to have shapes that match each other in the front-rear direction, and are disposed opposite each other in the front-rear direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).

The functions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are similar to the functions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and therefore will not be described.

In this embodiment, the recessed portions 482, 483b have the same function as the passage forming rib 487.
That is, the vibration wave Ws can be caused to travel in the upper left direction (the direction of the arrows L and U) between the recess 482 disposed immediately adjacent to the rear recess 491 and the recess 483b disposed above it on the right side (the side of the arrow R).
In addition to the effect achieved during assembly, 2,483b also achieves the effect of defining the propagation direction of the vibration wave Ws.

Here, the space formed inside speaker assembly 450R has a vertical width that decreases the further away from speaker 451, and is once narrowed at a position where recesses 462, 482 and recesses 463b, 483b are vertically aligned, and then the vertical width suddenly expands at a position further away from speaker 451, and then communicates with the opening formed by recesses 471, 491. This can improve the acoustic effect.

In this embodiment, the speaker 451 is
The base end side main body portion 461B side to which the speaker 451 is attached is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is
In search of an exit, the tip body 461T advances to the opposite side in the longitudinal direction.
The vibration wave Ws (sound) that reaches 61T passes through the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, and the opening 424 (see Figure 120) of the lower edge plate member 420, in that order, and is emitted outside the speaker assembly 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see Figure 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the rear part of the speaker 451 has an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, a recessed part 47
Since the pachinko machine 8010 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside through the opening formed by 1, 491 and opening 424 (see Figure 120), the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 can be reproduced and output with high sound quality without being muffled.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and can emit the sound in phase with the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 from the opening formed by the recessed portions 471, 491. In other words, the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 allows the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 and the sound output from the front side to be superimposed in phase with each other and emphasized, rather than being cancelled out due to being in opposite phase. In other words, it becomes possible to amplify deep bass sounds. This allows
The pachinko machine 8010 according to this embodiment is capable of producing realistic effects,
This can increase the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In this embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so that the low-pitched sounds output from the rear side of the speaker 451 are emitted to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (emitted downward from the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86)) using the internal space of the speaker assembly 450 as an enclosure. This makes it possible to appropriately provide a game presentation using low-pitched sounds emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side to a player playing on the front side of the front frame 14.

The sound of the vibration wave Ws (audio) is tuned by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450,
For example, in this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws can be generated by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws.
The path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path that avoids the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 46
By individually setting the arrangement and vertical extension length of each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e, 467d, 467e, the sound of the vibration wave Ws (audio) can be tuned.

In this embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d of the front assembly 460 are
67d, 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487e of the rear assembly 480.
In addition to the above-mentioned purposes, the flanges 487d and 487e are disposed in portions to which load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, thereby reinforcing the speaker assembly 450.

For example, by being positioned near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can reinforce the areas near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, thereby preventing the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being damaged due to the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when a screw is screwed into the fastening portion 468.

In addition, when the extension plates 463 and 483 are in an assembled state, they are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper plate member 14e (see FIG. 125(a)).
The extension plates 463, 483 are disposed closer to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463, 48
When a screw is screwed into the fastening portion 419 inserted into the through holes 463a, 483a of the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main frame 14a are fastened and fixed, each of the rib portions 467c, 4
87c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other, so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48
That is, the deformation of each of the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, and 48
7d allows the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 to be reinforced.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482. Here, the recessed portions 462, 482 are portions to which the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e is aligned in an assembled state.
The recessed portions 462 and 482 of the fastening portion 14e1 are placed on the fastening portion 14e1.
, 482 receive an upward load from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is thought that the recessed portions 462, 482 would be easily damaged, but in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467b, 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462, 482, so that the fastening portion 14e1 can reinforce the recessed portions 462, 482 against the load applied thereto, thereby improving the durability of the recessed portions 462, 482.

The opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, compared to the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large diameter through hole, it is easier to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting wire, piano wire, etc. into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424.

In this type of fraudulent act, wire, piano wire, etc. are illegally inserted into the play area to deform nails, etc., but in this embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is formed in a box shape that is sealed except for the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484, and the gap of the opening formed by the wiring passing recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484 is blocked by the speaker connection wire 453. Therefore, when a wire, piano wire, etc. is inserted into the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, it is difficult for the tip of the wire, piano wire, etc. to reach the play area through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453.

In addition, the through hole formed in the upper edge plate member 14e as an opening for passing the speaker connection wire 453 is positioned near the left and right ends of the upper edge plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speaker 451, thereby making it possible to increase the distance between the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, which are the points where wire, piano wire, etc. are inserted into the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, even if such a fraudulent act is committed, the success rate of the fraudulent act can be reduced, making it easier to prevent the generation of fraudulent benefits.

124(a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, FIG. 124(b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124(a), FIG. 124(c) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R taken in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124(a), and FIG. 124(d) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124(a).
124(a) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the Vd direction.
124(c), the speaker connection wire 453 is shown by an imaginary line for ease of understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124(c), the speaker connection wire 453 is omitted.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 124(b), an inner surface 461Hi (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of a rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 is tapered inwardly as it approaches the rear side, and an outer surface 481Ho (lower surface in FIG. 124(b)) of a front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 is tapered inwardly as it approaches the rear side.
The upper surface (461H) is tapered inwardly toward the rear surface side, and the inner surface (461H) is
i in an assembled state. This improves the efficiency of the operation of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460.

In Fig. 124(b), the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib portion 487c before assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives a compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. The restoring force generated by this elastic deformation causes a compressive force to act from the rib portion 487c toward the rib portion 467c, so that the gap between the rib portions 467c, 487c can be filled. Note that the position of each of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship such that a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124C, the intermediate main body portion 461M is formed to have a shorter front-rear dimension than the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T.
In comparison with 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be made smaller (narrowed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M, thereby improving the acoustic effect.

124(d), the internal space of the tip side main body 461T arranged above the opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491 is secured to be larger than the internal space of the intermediate main body 461M in a manner that bulges out in the front-rear direction. This allows the vibration waves Ws that reach the tip side main body 461T to be temporarily retained in the tip side main body 461T and released at a low speed. This allows the vibration waves Ws to make it easier to hear deep bass sounds, thereby improving the acoustic effect.

FIG. 125(a) shows the front assembly 46 taken along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124(a).
FIG. 125(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper edge plate member 14e taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 124(a).

As shown in FIG. 125(a), the expanded rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 has a through hole 463a,
The screw inserted through the fastening portion 483a is fastened to the fastening portion 419, so that the front assembly 460
This is the part that sandwiches the rear assembly 480 and the upper edge plate member 14e between the main body frame 14a.
In other words, by positioning the enlarged rib 419a at the front surface position of the extension plate 463, the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the upper edge plate member 14e can be prevented from shifting in position in the front-to-rear direction, and the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper edge plate member 14e and the metal main body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in Figure 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper edge plate member 14e at a lower position on the upper frame member 410, and is formed at an upper position on the upper frame member 410 at a position that coincides with the recessed portions 462, 482 of the speaker assembly 450.

The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (they pass through the recessed portions 462, 482 without coming into contact with them in the fastening direction).
It is configured as a part that fastens and fixes the upper frame member 410 and the upper edge plate member 14 e without using the rear assembly 480 .

In addition, the main body frame 14a and the upper edge plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b located at an upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper edge plate member 14e is fastened and fixed to the second fastening portion 419b located at a lower position of the main body member 411, while the main body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

In addition, at an upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending toward the rear side is disposed inside), while at a lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482.
482 (the portion extending to the front side is disposed on the inside).

In this embodiment, the left and right speakers 451 are disposed in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively.
This avoids interference with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 disposed in 450L, and allows the reproduced sound to be reproduced with high quality as a transparent sound without being muffled.

In this embodiment, at the top of the speaker assembly 450, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper plate member 14e abut on their faces (see FIG. 125(a)), while at the bottom of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper plate member 14e are spaced apart, and the front portion of the upper plate member 14e protrudes towards the front side at the portion positioned opposite the lower end of the rear assembly 480, and this protruding portion abuts against the lower end of the rear assembly 480 in the front-to-rear direction.
The speaker assembly 450 is not configured to abut (stick) over the entire surface of the upper plate member 14e, but rather to make line contact, particularly at the lower end.

In this case, the portion that protrudes from the upper edge plate member 14e and abuts the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, thereby improving the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451.

In this embodiment, the portion that protrudes from the upper plate member 14e and abuts against the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper plate member 14e (made of synthetic resin).
However, the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be arranged between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper edge plate member 14e, a member made of ebony may be arranged, a glass member may be arranged, a concrete member may be arranged, a soft resin material may be arranged, or other commercially available members may be arranged.

In particular, when metal members are used, it is preferable to use materials with a high specific gravity. For example, it is preferable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, etc. By using these metals, it is possible to give depth to the sound.

In addition, it is preferable that the material has high hardness, such as cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics, etc. Using these materials can improve the sound rise performance.

In addition, with regard to the shape, the upper plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 may be protruding in a long plate shape, a spike shape, or a dotted shape with rounded tips. The upper plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 may not only be fixed to each other, but may also be connected in a floating manner.

The above-mentioned portions that function as insulators are arranged in the speaker assembly 45.
For example, the rear surface of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the rear surface of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the rear surface of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
It can also be the side or front of 50.

For example, when disposed on the back surface of the upper end portion, the member functioning as an insulator may be cylindrical and disposed between the rear assembly 480 and the upper edge plate member 14e, and positioned by inserting a screw into the through hole 483a. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator is not required, and the tightness of the screw inserted into the through hole 483a allows adjustment of the contact between the rear assembly 480, the upper edge plate member 14e, and the member functioning as an insulator (the load applied to each other) and adjustment of the acoustic effect.

At this time, even if the screw inserted through the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is in a state where the screw inserted through the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123(a)) and the connecting hole 469 are loosened.
Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened to the upper edge plate member 14e by screws inserted into through holes of the same shape and arranged on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left-right direction, or through holes arranged at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left-right positions where the through holes are located, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper edge plate member 14e.

Regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e,
0 is a screw inserted through the through hole 483a, and a fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (FIG. 1
125(b)). As described above, the fastening of fastening portion 14e1 to fastening portion 419 is configured so that no load is applied to speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening fastening portion 14e1 to fastening portion 419, it is possible to prevent upper frame member 410 from coming off upper edge plate member 14e by loosely fastening the screw inserted into through hole 483a (while adjusting the degree of fastening).

The same relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper plate member 14e as described above is true for the following reasons:
The same can be said about the relationship with the main body frame 14a that is connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal main body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

Fig. 126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, Fig. 127(a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and Fig. 127(b) is a front view of the inner frame 12.
4B shows the inner frame 12 with the game board 13 removed.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a,
As shown in Figure 126, a left end front support portion 12a and a left end rear support portion 12b are disposed at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, spaced apart from each other in the front and rear direction, for the purpose of supporting the left end portion of the game board 13.

The left-end front support portion 12a has an inclined surface 12a1 that slopes backward as it goes leftward from the right end of the rear end surface that faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89), and a flat surface 12a2 that extends leftward from the left end of the inclined surface. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 come into contact with each other.

The left-end rear support portion 12b has an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a cup shape with an open center and a front end face formed on one surface so as to be able to abut against the rear surface of the game board 13. The left-end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside the left-end rear support portion 12b and a portion protruding from the front end face of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is disposed in such a manner that, in its natural length, it protrudes more toward the front side as it moves to the left. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1, together with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a,
A tapered shape is formed that expands in the left-right direction toward the side (right side) where the game board 13 is placed. This improves the workability when an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to Figures 128 and 129.

FIG. 128(a) and FIG. 128(b) show CXXVIIIa-CXXV in FIG. 127(b).
128(a) and 129(b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13, which are schematic diagrams of the board support device 600 and the game board 13. In addition, in Fig. 128 and Fig. 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order, Fig. 128(a) illustrates the game board 13 with its left end beginning to be pushed into the inner frame 12, Fig. 128(b) and Fig. 129(a) illustrates the game board 13 just before it is completely assembled to the inner frame 12, and Fig. 129(b) illustrates the game board 13 after it is completely assembled to the inner frame 12. In Fig. 128 and Fig. 129, for ease of understanding,
Some of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted in the illustration.

When an operator assembles the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the operator first temporarily places the game board 13 on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, adjusts the vertical position of the game board 13 to a certain extent, and then places the game board 13 on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160.
At this time, the game board 13 is slid in a position rotated about an axis facing up and down with respect to the inner frame 12 as shown in FIG. 128(a), so there is a possibility that the left end front support part 12b on the near side and the game board 13 may interfere with each other. However, in this embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is provided on the left end front support part 12a.
a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support portion 12b interfere with each other
This can reduce the number of steps required, thereby improving workability.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(b), the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
The game board 13 is rotated around the axis of the contact point between the rear edge of the inner frame 12 and the front surface of the game board 13 so as to approach the inner frame 12. During this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is placed opposite the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. This allows the game board 13 to be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is determined by the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
The support bottom 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with a position and length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 90 ),
A guide rib 1 supports the game board 13 from below and has a front upper end cut into an inclined surface.
A plurality of 2c1 are provided in the left-right direction.

128(a) to 128(b), the game board 13 climbs up onto the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 every time the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view, so that the game board 13 can be made to climb up onto the guide rib 12c1 starting from the left side, allowing the game board 13 to rotate smoothly. Therefore, the workability of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15°, which is an angle larger than the backward inclination (about 10°) of the pachinko machine 8010 when installed in the game parlor. This makes it possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-to-rear direction due to the backward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 when installed.
This improves workability when assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 regardless of the rear inclination of 013.

In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed to be the same as the rear inclination angle when the game board 13 is installed in the game arcade.
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be horizontal.

In the state shown in Figure 128 (b), as shown in Figure 129 (a), the game board 13 is clamped between the board support device 600 which is arranged vertically and in the released state described below, and the rear surface of the game board 13 abuts against the front surface of the claw member 640 after rotation.

Here, in the release state, the board surface support device 600 is in such a state that the front rotation claw member 620 and the front restriction claw member 630 (portions disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed) are in contact with the game board 13.
Since the game board 13 is configured to retreat from the entrance path, the workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129(b), by pushing the right end portion of the game board 13 toward the rear side, a load is applied to the rotational claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 60
0 changes to a fixed state, which will be described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12.
When the upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 are fixed, the states of the upper and lower panel surface support devices 600 change almost simultaneously.

The game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c and its vertical position is regulated.
129(b), between the release state and the fixed state of the board support device 600, the board support device 600 does not come into contact with the lower end of the game board 13 (the game board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the up-down position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, as the board support device 600 is changed between the release state and the fixed state, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably attached and detached.

Here, when the right end portion of the game board 13 is pushed toward the rear side, the game board 13 rotates with the left end portion as a fulcrum. Therefore, due to the principle of leverage, the claw member 64 is pushed toward the rear side of the game board 13 after the rotation.
The force required to apply a load to the inner frame 12 can be weakened by the long width of the game board 13, and even a worker with little strength can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by the left end front support portion 12a.
and the left end rear support portion 12b supports the upper and lower portions (see FIG. 126).
When the right end of the game board 13 is not sufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not fixed), even if the front frame 14 (see Figure 89) is closed against the inner frame 12, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134(a)), it is possible to reduce the degree to which the game board 13 tilts forward and backward due to the reaction force of pushing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) into the inner frame 12 to close it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (reduce the possibility of) the state of the board support device 600 changing due to the reaction force of pushing the front frame 14 into the inner frame 12 to close it.

When the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is supported by a support portion 12a.
, 12b, the right end portion is fixed by a panel surface support device 600, and the lower end portion has its vertical position regulated by the support bottom portion 12c.

In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129(b)),
A floating connector 13a is arranged at the lower end on the back side of the game board 13, is connected to wiring connected to various components and devices arranged on the game board 13, and is supported on the game board 13 so that its position can be changed in the surface direction of the game board 13, and a receiving connector 12d is arranged on the inner frame 12 near the lower board surface support device 600, and has wiring connected to a control board unit 91 (see Figure 3) etc. connected at its back side. These are connected in the rotational direction of the game board 13.

In order to reduce the resistance of the connection in the rotational direction of the game board 13, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are arranged in an inclined position with the connection direction facing in the rotational direction of the game board 13 (see Figure 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 is equipped with a pair of upper and lower board surface support devices 600 arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. Since the pair of upper and lower board surface support devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, only one of the board surface support devices 600 will be described and the description of the other board surface support device 600 will be omitted.

Fig. 130(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, Fig. 130(b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600, Fig. 131(a) is a front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and Fig. 131(b) is a rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600.
130(a) and 130(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and FIG. 131(a) and FIG. 131(b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13.
130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the front rotation claw member 620 and the rear rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board surface support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board surface support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133,
The rotary motion control device 60 includes a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from above, a front rotation claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610, a front restriction claw member 630 rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 arranged on the front side of the front rotation claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620, and a rear rotation claw member 630 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 arranged on the rear side of the front rotation claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the front rotation claw member 620.
40 and mainly comprise.

The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, a pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line penetrating a pair of plate portions 611a that are part of the main body plate portion 611 and are arranged opposite each other on the left and right, an arc hole 613 drilled in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612, and a circular hole 614 drilled in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612.
11a from below, and a plate portion 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
127(b) 。 In the assembled state (see FIG. 127(b)), the inner frame 12 is fastened to the pair of fixing plates 616 by screws inserted through holes 616a.

The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed.
is formed as a cylindrical metal rod member with an expanded diameter at the end on the insertion base end side, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed to form a support hole 612.
The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same as those of the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P
When the first shaft member P61 is inserted through the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted through the supported hole 622 of the front rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

The front rotation claw member 620, like the frame member 610, comprises a main body plate portion 621 formed by bending a corner of a sheet metal member at a right angle to form a T-shape in a side view, a pair of supported holes 622 formed in a straight line through plate portions 621a which are part of the main body plate portion 621 and are arranged opposite to each other on the left and right, and which are supported by the first shaft member P61, a pair of support holes 623 formed in a straight line through the upper corners of the front side of the plate portion 621a, and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and ... plate portion 621a, and which are supported by the first shaft member P61,
a and a pair of support holes 624 formed in a straight line through the rear side portion of the third shaft member P63 and into which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

When the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the front restriction claw member 63
The second shaft member P62 is also inserted through the supported hole 632 of the first shaft member P62, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted through the support hole 624 of the first shaft member P62.
At the same time, when the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 642 of the rotation claw member 640,
is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion disposed opposite to the left and right and has a long length portion 621a1 that is long in the front-rear direction.
A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view by an extension portion 621a2 extending in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1, a connecting plate portion 621b connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, a rear side extension plate 621c extending from the rear side end of the connecting plate portion 621b at an angle of about 45 degrees downward with respect to the surface of the connecting plate portion 621b, and
2. The panel 621 mainly comprises a hanging rear plate portion 621d extending perpendicularly to plate portion 621a toward plate portion 621a on the opposite side, and a front side extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of hanging rear plate portion 621d at an angle of approximately 45 degrees toward the front side with respect to the surface of hanging rear plate portion 621d.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane perpendicular to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b form a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the rear side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d form a right angle with each other.

The rear extension plate 621c is disposed so that its lower surface can come into contact with the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, in the released state, the rear extension plate 621c comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134(a)). Meanwhile, in the process of changing to the fixed state, the torsion spring NBb is retracted upward, so that the torsion spring NBb is retracted from the main plate portion 611.
and begins to come into contact.

This prevents the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated toward the worker when the worker starts to push the game board 13 into the board support device 600, while allowing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb to be generated toward the worker just before the game board 13 is completely fixed to the board support device 600. In other words, while reducing the force required when starting to push the game board 13, just before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that contacts the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front side extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back side of the hanging back plate portion 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction that brings the front restriction claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d closer to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in a direction that moves the lower end of the rear rotation claw member 640 away from the back side wall of the main plate portion 611.

The front-regulating claw member 630 mainly comprises a main body plate portion 631 formed in an L-shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner, a pair of supported holes 632 formed in a straight line through plate portions 631a which are part of the main body plate portion 631 and arranged opposite each other on the left and right and which are journaled by the second shaft member P62, an inclined extension plate 633 extending at an angle toward the front side from the lower end of a front connecting plate 631b which connects the plate portions 631a, and a curved surface 634 which is curved and formed as the upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion disposed opposite to the front frame 14, and is a part of the board surface support device 600.
When the locking member 14 is released, this is the part that is closest to the front frame 14 in the front-to-rear direction.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the restriction rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and this restricts the front restriction claw member 630 from freely changing its position.

The post-rotation claw member 640 mainly comprises a main body plate portion 641 formed into a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the side by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at the corner, a pair of supported holes 642 formed in a straight line through plate portions 641a which are part of the main body plate portion 641 and arranged opposite each other on the left and right and which are journaled by the third shaft member P63, and an inclined extension plate 643 which extends at an angle toward the rear side from the lower end of a front connecting plate 641b which connects the pair of plate portions 641a.

The front connecting plate 641b is a part that abuts against the rear side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see Figure 89) and regulates the front-to-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a part that receives load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is formed at an inclination angle that makes face contact with the back surface of the game board 13 in the released state (see Figure 129 (a)).

134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b) are side views of the board surface support device 600. In addition, in Fig. 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), the process in which the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in chronological order.
1B, the arrangement of the multi-function cover member 171 arranged adjacent to the board support device 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board support device 600 is shown by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134(a), the board surface support device 600 is in a released state, and in FIG. 135(b),
The fixed states of the board support device 600 are shown in the figures. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135(b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed directly behind the first shaft member P61 (horizontally rearward). This makes it possible to prevent the post-rotation claw member 640 from rotating too much around the first shaft member P61 (the third shaft member P63 moving upwards beyond the first shaft member P61) simply by performing the simple task of pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 toward the rearward side via the game board 13. Therefore, the post-rotation claw member 640 can be accurately moved to a position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the front restriction claw member 630 is biased by the torsion spring NBa in a direction approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d. Therefore, when no other external force is acting, the front restriction claw member 630 is disposed in proximity to the hanging back plate portion 621d.
The curved surface 634 of the front restriction claw member 630 comes into contact with the restriction rod 615, thereby restricting the change in position of the front restriction claw member 630.

That is, as shown in Figures 134(a), 134(b), 135(a) and 135(b), as the board surface support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the front rotating claw member 6
20, the front side on which the extension portion 621a2 is disposed is tilted, while the front side of the restricting front claw member 630 is raised in a manner such that it separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

In detail, the regulating rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
13A to 13C.
5(a)), the front end of the front restriction claw member 630 rises in accordance with the tilting movement of the front rotation claw member 620. In other words, the front restriction claw member 630 moves in the opposite direction to the movement direction of the front rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is connected to the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed opposite the regulation rod 615.
When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 are no longer in contact with each other in the circular direction centered on the second shaft member P62, the rising action of the regulating front claw member 630 is released, and the tip end of the regulating front claw member 630 on the side of the inclined extension plate 633 is disposed adjacent to the hanging back plate portion 621d (see FIG. 135(a) to FIG. 135(b)).
(see (b)).

The angle range in which the front restriction claw member 630 rises up (from FIG. 134(a) to FIG. 135(a)) is as follows:
) when a downward load is applied to the regulating front claw member 630 in a direction that tilts the front end of the regulating front claw member 630, the change in posture of the regulating front claw member 630 when it operates due to the downward load is a change in posture in a direction opposite to the downward load (a change in posture in the rising direction), so that the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the change in posture of the regulating front claw member 630 in response to the downward load is regulated.

In addition, since the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 unless the game board 13 is pushed inward.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the front restriction claw member 630, causing the front rotation claw member 620
Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the regulating front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting operation of the rotation front claw member 620 can be suppressed. Note that in this embodiment, the shape of the front connecting plate 631b and the length and tilt angle of the tilted extension plate 633 are set so that the multi-function cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the tilted extension plate 633 of the regulating front claw member 630 when the board surface support device 600 is in the released state.

In the state shown in FIG. 134(b), the game board 13 abuts against the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, the rear side extension plate 621c
Friction occurs between the game board 13 and the game board 13. As a result, in the state of FIG.
Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see Figures 136 to 139) applies a load to the game board 13,
As a result of this reaction, the upper end portion of the game board 13 can be prevented from moving (tilting) toward the front.

Here, when the front frame 14 (see Figure 89) is closed in the released state of the board surface support device 600, in a structure in which the rotating front claw member 620 rotates due to the load from the front frame 14, depending on the manner in which the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 abuts against the regulating front claw member 630, there is a possibility that the board surface support device 600 will reach a fixed state or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach a fixed state and will stabilize at an intermediate angle.

The board surface support device 600 is stabilized at an intermediate angle, and in this state, the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
If it were possible to close it, the distance between the back of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 86) and the front of the game board 13 would become too short, which could cause problems during play.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted that suppresses the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), thereby preventing the front frame 14 from closing when the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the restricting front claw member 630. This makes it possible to make a store clerk who is working to close the front frame 14 aware that the board surface support device 600 is not in a fixed state.

If the store clerk notices this, he or she will push the game board 13 in until the board support device 600 is fixed in place, thereby stabilizing the distance between the back of the glass unit 16 and the front of the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see Figure 89) is closed.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135(a), just before the front-rotating claw member 620 becomes fixed, depending on the manner of contact between the multi-function cover member 171 arranged on the front frame 14 and the regulating front claw member 630, it is unlikely that the board surface support device 600 will reach a fixed state or that the board surface support device 600 will not reach a fixed state and will stabilize at an intermediate angle (the board surface support device 600 will almost always reach a fixed state).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the multi-function cover member 171 is extended to a position where it can abut against the regulating front claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in Figure 135 (a), the regulating front claw member 630 is configured so that its posture is not regulated by the regulating rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in Figure 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the front rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the front restriction claw member 630 immediately before the front rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the front end of the front rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt.

As a result, when the game board 13 is placed in a position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the store clerk does not push the game board 13 with enough force, 9
In this case, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing even when the front frame 14 is stably installed. In this case, the front frame 14 is provided with a multi-function cover member 171 and a board surface support device 600.
When a load is applied to the board surface support device 600, the load can change the board surface support device 600 to a fixed state.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the workability of fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is placed on the board surface support device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board surface support device 600 abut against each other (see FIG. 1).
34(a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing it to the rear side. That is, the rear-rotation claw member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, which in turn rotates the front-rotation claw member 620, changing the board surface support device 600 to the fixed state. According to this method, since no downward load is applied to the front end of the front-regulating claw member 630, the board surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135(a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d of the board surface support device 600 that faces the game board 13 come into contact in the front-rear direction.
When the game board 13 moves (tilts) toward the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing aside the dangling back plate portion 621d, so the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb given to the front-rotation claw member 620 via the rear-rotation claw member 640 acts as a resistance against the game board 13 moving (tilting) toward the front side. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of the game board 13 moving (tilting) toward the front side in the state shown in Figure 135 (a). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see Figures 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the reaction force of the load on the game board 13 will cause the game board 13 to tilt.
This can prevent the vicinity of the upper end from moving (tilting) toward the front side.

135(a) to 135(b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed opposite the regulation rod 615 (see FIG. 135(b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 presses the hanging back plate portion 621d to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620, the non-resistance portion 634b abuts against the regulation rod 615 in the direction along the arc centered on the first shaft member P61, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 to the front side increases accordingly.

As a result, between the state shown in FIG. 135(a) and the state shown in FIG. 135(b),
This reduces the possibility that the game board 13 will move (tilt) toward the front side. Therefore, when a lower board surface support device 600 (see Figs. 136 to 139) described later applies a load to the game board 13, it is possible to suppress the upper end portion of the game board 13 from moving (tilting) toward the front side due to the reaction force.

In addition, the non-resisting portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is in the state shown in FIG.
A curved surface is formed in which the radius gradually increases from the portion that abuts against the second shaft member P62 toward the portion that abuts against the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135(b).

As a result, the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed toward the rear side by the multi-function cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135(a), and the front-rotation claw member 620 rotates, so that the second shaft member P62
When the restricting bar 615 is displaced, the non-resisting portion 634b and the restricting bar 615 momentarily separate from each other. Therefore, the resistance applied to the restricting bar 630 by the restricting bar 615 is reduced momentarily, and the restricting bar 630 approaches the hanging back plate portion 621d vigorously due to the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the state changes to the state shown in FIG.

Therefore, as in this embodiment, even if the multi-function cover member 171 is in a dimensional relationship spaced apart from the regulating front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633 when the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state shown in Figure 135 (b), by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position just before the board surface support device 600 is in the fixed state shown in Figure 135 (a), the multi-function cover member 171 can be abutted against the regulating front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633, and then the board surface support device 600 can be set to a fixed state.

In this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be placed in the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, when the rear side surface of the rear extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the rotation front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 can operate while avoiding interference with the multi-function cover member 171 (for example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134(a) to the state shown in FIG. 135(a)). Therefore, even when the game board 13 is not placed (for example, when it is desired to temporarily close the front frame 14 when replacing the board surface), it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14, thereby improving the work efficiency of the worker.

When the board surface support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633
The front end of the restricting bar 615 is pulled upward toward the front side, and the restricting bar 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the restricting bar 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the restricting bar 615 are in contact with each other in the rotation direction).
15 does not come into contact with each other), the front restriction claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force,
By continuing the rotation in this state, the board surface support device 600 can be put into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released with the game board 13 fixed, the game board 13 is pushed forward by the displaced post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134(a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved compared to when the front-rear position of the game board 13 does not change when the board support device 600 is released.

Also, as shown in FIG. 129(a) and FIG. 134(a), in the released state, the game board 1
The upper end surface of the rear end plate 621c of the board support device 600 comes into contact with the lower surface of the rear extension plate 621c of the board support device 600. This can eliminate the risk of the game board 13 falling to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are released.

The upper and lower board support devices 600 can be operated to switch between the released state and the fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth as the state of the board support devices 600 changes, as in this embodiment, if the board support devices 600 are operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 may differ between the upper and lower, and the load applied to the game board 13 may become excessive.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the operation of the restricting front claw member 630, which is operated when the board surface support device 600 is put into the release state, and the operation of the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 64
In other words, as shown in FIG. 135(a) and FIG. 135(b), the amount of displacement of the front rotation claw member 630 supporting the game board 13 is smaller than the amount of displacement of the front restriction claw member 630.
20 and the amount of displacement of the claw member 640 after rotation is smaller.

Therefore, when the restricting front claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that it does not return to the fixed state (to such an extent that its return is restricted by the restricting rod 615), the amount of displacement of the rotating front claw member 620 and the rotating rear claw member 640 can be suppressed, so that the deviation of the front-to-rear position of the game board 13 at the points supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 can be suppressed. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

The same effect is also achieved by the rear-rotation claw member 640 being rotatably supported by the front-rotation claw member 620.
4(a)), the rear rotation claw member 640 is allowed to displace in a direction widening the angle between the front rotation claw member 620 and the rear rotation claw member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb.

Therefore, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the post-rotation claw members 640 can be suppressed compared to the amount of displacement of the pre-rotation claw members 620, so that the deviation of the front-rear position of the game board 13 at the points supported by the upper and lower board surface support devices 600 can be suppressed.
The load on 3 can be reduced.

Next, the relationship between the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side and the front frame 14 will be described with reference to Figures 136 to 139.
136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along line CXXXVI.

In addition, Figure 136 shows the release state of the board support device 600, Figure 137 shows the fixed state of the board support device 600, Figure 138 shows the state in which the board support device 600 has rotated a predetermined angle (approximately 25°) from the release state towards the fixed state, and Figure 139 shows the state just before the board support device 600 is fixed, with the thickness portion of the game board 13 supported by the board support device 600 being shown by imaginary lines.

136 to 139, the relationship between the panel surface support device 600 and the opening/closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described.
The opening/closing restriction portion 159 viewed in cross section at 37 is shown by imaginary lines in FIGS.

As shown in Fig. 136, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see Fig. 136), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 does not interfere with the board support device 600, but the game board 13 interferes with the operating portion back member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159. Therefore, when the board support device 600 is in the released state, the game board 13
When the frame 14 is removed, the front frame 14 is permitted to be closed, but when the game board 13 is placed, closing of the front frame 14 is restricted.

As shown in Fig. 137, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, if the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see Fig. 137), interference between the opening/closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. In addition, since the game board 13 is placed on the rear side compared to the position when the board support device 600 is in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening/closing restricting portion 159 is avoided. Therefore, when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of whether the game board 13 is present or not.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (FIG. 1), the front frame 14 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the release state to the fixed state side of the front-rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600.
38), the opening/closing restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the panel surface supporting device 600.

In this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the front rotating claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotating claw member 620 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the restricting front claw member 630 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) are different from each other due to the action of the restricting rod 615.
As mentioned above, this is difficult to achieve with a normal load because the reaction force becomes excessive due to the rotation direction being opposite to the rotation direction (counterclockwise direction) (see Figure 134 (b)).

138, the front frame 14 is restricted from being closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, when the game board 13 is installed, there is a risk that the front lower end of the game board 13 and the rear extension plate 621c may come into contact in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138), so the effect of restricting the closure of the front frame 14 becomes stronger.

As shown in Figure 139, when the pre-rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in a state immediately before being fixed, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see Figure 139), the opening/closing regulating portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

In addition, in this state, when an attempt is made to rotate the front rotation claw member 620 by applying a load toward the rear side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front rotation claw member 620 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the restriction front claw member 630 (clockwise direction in FIG. 13) are changed by the action of the restriction rod 615.
8 counterclockwise) and can be easily pushed in with a normal load, as described above (see FIG. 135(a)).

Therefore, in the state of the board surface support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing in the front frame 14, the restriction front claw member 630 is pushed in via the opening/closing restriction portion 159, and the board surface support device 600
Since the front frame 14 can be fixed, the front frame 14 can be allowed to be closed.

Fig. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and Fig. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. Figs. 140 and 141 show a state in which the ball launching unit 112a and the cover member that closes the rear of the back pack 92 are disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launching unit 112a will be described with reference to Figures 142 to 148. Figure 142(a) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a, and Figure 142(b) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a.
is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a. Figures 143(a) and 143(b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball launching unit 112a. Note that Figure 143(a) illustrates the disassembled state after the cover member 721 has been opened, and Figure 143(b) illustrates the state after the ball receiving member 731 has been disassembled and turned over. That is, in Figure 143(b),
Only the back side of the ball receiving member 731 is shown.

As shown in Figures 142 and 143, the ball launching unit 112a is configured by a base member 710 made of metal or die casting, and a resin-made foundation member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The ball launching unit 112a can be in a closed state (see Figure 142(a)) in which the front surface of the base member 710 is partially covered around the right side of the base member 710, and in an open state (see Figure 23(b)) in which the front surface of the base member 710 is open.
A ball sending device 721 having a cover member 721 rotatably supported between the ball sending device 721 and the ball receiving device 720 (see FIG. 1)
And, mainly prepare.

The base member 710 mainly comprises a base member 711 which is a member supporting the cover member 721 and which is engaged with the base member 710 by a hook or the like which elastically deforms, which is arranged on the front side of the base member 710 and is formed from a synthetic resin or the like, a launch solenoid 701 which is arranged on the front side, a launch rail 730 which guides the ball P8 shot out by the launch solenoid 701 towards the playing area, a fastening portion 716 which is cylindrically protrudes towards the front side at the intermediate position of a bulging portion 716a which bulges in a straight line from the base member 710 towards the front side to regulate the posture of the ball receiving member 731 and into which a screw is screwed to fasten and fix the ball receiving member 731, a plurality of mounting holes 718, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 719.

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 at the right corners into which the rod-shaped portions 722 are inserted, and a locking portion 713 that is formed on the left-right opposite sides of the receiving portions 712 so as to be able to lock the hook portions 723.
13, a protruding portion 714 protruding on the front side adjacent to the right side of the engaging portion 713, and a malfunction determination protruding portion 715 protruding opposite the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see Figure 142 (a)).

The convex portion 714 is a portion which covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see Figure 142 (a)), and mainly comprises an opposing plane 714a which is arranged opposite the left inner surface 724c of the sphere passage opening 724 when the cover member 721 is in the closed state and which is formed as a plane parallel to the left inner surface 724c, and an inclined surface 714b which is the surface opposite to the opposing plane 714a on the left and right sides and which inclines to the right as it approaches the rear side.

The malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not come into contact with the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 when the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, but does come into contact when the adhesive force generating solenoid 741 is loosened (floating from the cover member 721) and is formed with a convex height that regulates the rotation of the cover member 721.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loose, and by creating a case where the cover member 721 cannot be closed, it is possible to make the store clerk aware that the fastening of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, repairs can be made (fastening the suction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) before a malfunction occurs in the ball launching unit 112a.

The ball sending device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported on the base member 711,
The cover member 721 mainly comprises a switching device 740 which is controlled to change between a restricting state in which the ball P8 which has entered inside the cover member 721 is restricted from flowing down, and an allowing state in which the ball P8 (see Figure 144) is allowed to flow down onto the launch rail 730.

The cover member 721 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed in a cup shape with an open back side (the front side of the paper in the position of FIG. 143( a )). The cover member 721 has a pair of rod-shaped parts 722 loosely fitted into receiving parts 712 of the base member 711, hook parts 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite sides of the rod-shaped parts 722, and a ball P
144) can pass through the ball passing opening 724, which is drilled in the front-rear direction, the cutting metal member 725 disposed in a positional relationship in which it protrudes slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passing opening 724, and the shaft rod portion 72
It mainly comprises 6.

The switching device 740 is a member made of synthetic resin and includes an attractive force generating solenoid 741 fastened to the cover member 721 and one end of which is loosely fitted into the shaft rod portion 726.
A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its position depending on whether magnetic force is generated by the magnetic solenoid 741 or not, a metal plate 743 that is a sheet metal member that is attached to the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741, a guide inclined portion 744 that is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and is disposed below the ball passing opening 724 and inclines downward as it moves away from the ball passing opening 724, and a guide inclined portion 744 that extends upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744 by a distance that is sufficient to accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end is connected to the shaft rod portion 72
6 and a restricting protrusion 745 that protrudes toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane perpendicular to the plane of the restricting protrusion 745.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the ball P8 (see FIG. 144 ), and is a flow-down plate portion 724 that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction.
a, and a rib portion 724b that is disposed above and opposite the flow-down plate portion 724a and extends downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 in a rib-like manner, and the extended tip surface is inclined downward as it approaches the back side;
The left inner surface 724 is connected to the left end of the flow-down plate portion 724a and has a surface extending in the vertical direction.
With these configurations, the ball P8 that flows into the ball passage opening 724 flows down toward the rear and to the right.

When the cover member 721 is in the closed state (see FIG. 142(a)), if the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b and flows down to the back side while shifting to the right along the inclination of the inclined surface 714b.
Since the metal cutting member 725 flows down in a manner of moving away from the metal cutting member 725 in the left and right directions,
Even when the cutting metal member 725 is disposed so as to protrude inward from the sphere passage opening 724, the sphere P8 and the cutting metal member 725 can be prevented from colliding with each other.

The launch rail 730 is a rail member that extends from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side so as to be inclined upward. A ball P8 (FIG. 14) is attached to the rail member near the lower end thereof.
The ball receiving members 731 are disposed at intervals shorter than the diameter of the ball bearing member 731 (see reference 4).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is fixed to the base member 710 and is regulated to a position parallel to the extension direction of the launch rail 730 and the direction of its length. The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is fastened to the base member 710 and is formed as a long hole along the length direction and has a through hole 731a for passing a fastening screw.
and a regulating groove 731b which is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and facing in the direction of the long hole of the through hole 731a) similar to the bulge portion 716a, and which has a width slightly larger than the width of the bulge portion 716a and a groove depth slightly larger than the bulge height of the bulge portion 716a.

When fastening the ball receiving member 731 to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be aligned with the fastening portion 716 for fastening, the ball receiving member 731 is aligned with the bulging portion 71
6a can be slid along the straight line along which the sphere P8 (FIG. 14) is bulged.
4) of the plunger 702. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the shooting strength of the ball P81 (see the operation handle 51
(See FIG. 86)) can be easily adjusted.
Furthermore, since the restricting groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the position of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The launch rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross section by bending a metal plate, and has a rolling plate portion 730a formed into a substantially V-shaped cross section and extending diagonally upward to the left, and attachment plate portions 730b, 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the rolling plate portion 730a.
The sensor 730 is attached to the base member 710 by screws inserted into a plurality of mounting holes 732 (two in this embodiment) formed in the sensor 730b and the sensor 730c.

In addition, a rail guard 733 made of synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b, 730c, thereby suppressing noise, vibrations, etc. caused by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and is supported by a ball P8 (see FIG. 146(b)).
) at two points on the circumferential surface of the ball P8 to guide the ball P8 upward.

144(a) to 144(c) are front views of the ball launching unit 112a showing the ball sending state by the ball sending device 720 in chronological order.
In (c), in order to facilitate understanding, the cover member 721 is omitted from the illustration.

As shown in Figure 144 (a), when the switching device 740 of the ball feeding device 720 is in the regulating state (the supply of power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity), a regulating protrusion 745 is positioned at a position corresponding to the rear open end of the ball passing opening 724, and abuts against the game ball P8 that has entered the ball passing opening 724, regulating the flow downward from the rear open end.

144(b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the permissive state (power is supplied to the adsorptive force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the restricting protrusion 745 retracts above the balls, and the restriction on the flow of ball P8 is released, allowing ball P8 to flow above the inclined guide portion 744. In this state, ball P8 abuts against the front side wall of the base member 711, restricting it from flowing further downward, and the ball remains on the upper surface of the inclined guide portion 744.

144(c), the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the restricted state again, whereby the ball P8 on the inclined guide portion 744 is lowered to a position where it does not come into contact with the front side wall of the base member 711. As a result, the ball P8 is guided to the rear side according to the inclination of the inclined guide portion 744, and is guided to the launch rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in Fig. 144(c) is the same as that shown in Fig. 144(a), the flow of balls that have entered the ball passing opening 724 is restricted even in the state shown in Fig. 144(c). Therefore, the balls can be supplied one by one to the launch rail 730. The ball P8 that enters the ball passing opening 724 is supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper tray 17 (see Fig. 86) and is a ball that has been stored in the upper tray 17.

145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, a lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially aligned with the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a, and an upper blade portion 725b extending from the same plate as the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b, and a through hole 725a through which a screw to be screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted.
5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed so that its tip is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and its lower side projects upward more than the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c inclines downward toward the base end side (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b inclines upward toward the base end side (left side). In other words, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape when viewed from the front.

The notch between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a string member such as a string fixed to the ball. Next, referring to FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, the ball P
The following describes how the yarn Y8 is treated when it is fixed to the yarn feed roller 8 and enters the yarn feed roller 8.

FIG. 146(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146(b) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a.
146(a) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit 112a as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 147(a), FIG. 147(a) is a front view of the ball launching unit 112a, FIG. 147(b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147(a), and FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit 112a after the launch of the ball P8.
12a is a partial front view of the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62.
In FIG. 7, in order to facilitate understanding, some of the components of the ball launching unit 112a are omitted from the illustration.

As shown in FIG. 146(a) and FIG. 146(b), a ball P is guided to a launch rail 730.
Ball P8 remains in contact with the lower left edge of ball receiving member 731 (see Figure 146 (a)), and from this state, when current is passed through the launch solenoid 701, the plunger 702 extends forcefully, imparting a launch force to ball P8, causing ball P8 to be launched along the launch rail 730 (see Figure 147 (a)).

Here, a known fraudulent practice is to shoot out ball P8 with one end of a thread Y8 fixed to it, and while ball P8 is in the play area, move the other end of the thread Y8 that has been left at hand, pulling and loosening the thread Y8, thereby causing ball P8 to be repeatedly detected in the winning hole.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8 can be cut by utilizing the momentum of the launch of the ball P8. In detail, when the ball P8 is placed in the launch standby position (see FIG. 146(a)), the thread Y8 is placed on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in a position shifted to the right as it approaches the back side (see FIG. 146(b)).

When the ball P8 is shot out in this state, it passes under the flow-down plate portion 724a and enters the launch rail 730.
As the thread Y8 moves, it is pulled by the rolling ball P8, and the middle portion of the thread Y8 moves along the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a, so that the thread Y8 enters the underside of the upper blade portion 725c that protrudes above the flow-down plate portion 724a, and enters the notch formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

The player holds the front end (other end) of the string Y8, and the load caused by the launch of the ball P8 is applied to the end of the string Y8 fixed to the ball P8, so that a large tensile force is applied to the string Y8. As a result, the string Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as repeatedly detecting the ball P8 in the winning hole.

If the launch strength of the ball P8 is weak, there is a risk that the string Y8 will not be pulled sufficiently and the string Y8 will not be cut, but in that case the ball P8 will not reach the play area, but will flow back between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, pass through the foul ball receiving port 146, flow down the foul ball passage 145 (see FIG. 98), and be discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the string Y8, the ball P8 will not pass through the winning hole, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected by the winning hole.

Next, the performance operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to Fig. 149 to Fig. 179. Fig. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, Fig. 150 and Fig. 151 are exploded front perspective views of the performance operation unit 1000, and Fig. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the performance operation unit 1000. The game board 13 shown in Fig. 149 is mainly different from the game board 13 shown in Fig. 2 in that the petal operation device 800 is visible from the upper frame part of the center frame 86, and the other configurations are substantially the same.

A performance operation unit 1000 shown in Figures 150 to 152 is disposed on the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. The performance operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and an advance/retreat operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

The advance/retract operation unit 900 is composed of a plurality of movable members involved in raising and lowering the petal operation device 800 up and down (advance/retract operation, i.e., operation including at least one of an operation of advancing toward the inside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 and an operation of retreating toward the outside of the display area of the third pattern display device 81) by the driving force of the drive motor 921, and the petal operation device 800 is connected to one end, and the other end is supported by the back plate 1100 and is connected to the arm gear 9
24, a driving side arm member 910 that rotates by transmitting the driving force of a driving motor 921, and a driving motor 92 that generates a driving force for driving the driving side arm member 910.
1, a transmission means 920 consisting of a plurality of gears that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910, a thin slide plate 930 that slides left and right in conjunction with the rotational movement of the drive side arm member 910, a thin plate-shaped second performance member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the sliding movement of the slide plate 930, and a long plate-shaped driven side arm member 950 that connects the back plate 1100 and the petal operation device 800 on the left and right opposite sides of the drive side arm member 910.

Next, the structure of the petal operation device 800 will be described.
153. Fig. 154 is a front view of petal operating device 800 taken along line CLIV-CLIV in Fig. 153. In Fig. 154, supporting substrate 801 is diagrammatically shown by imaginary lines.

Petal operating device 800 is configured by supporting components such as petals 802 on a supporting base material 801. As shown in Fig. 152, supporting base material 801 is disposed on the rear side of petals 802, etc., and although its overall shape is hidden by other components and not shown in the drawing, it is formed from a resin material and includes a substantially rectangular plate-shaped portion and a substrate disposed on the rear side of the plate-shaped portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side to a position toward the right of the upper end of the central main body of the supporting base 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 protrudes to the front through a small gap formed in the supporting base 801, and a first gear 804G (see Figure 156), which will be described later, is fixed to its tip.

An opening 8 is provided at a position slightly below and to the left of the central motor 804 in the central main body of the support base material 801.
01P is drilled, and disposed to the right of the opening 801P, extending rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip is integrally formed.
A doughnut-shaped recess 801D recessed from the front side to the rear side in a doughnut shape through which the 0d can pass.
(See FIG. 152) is formed.

The central motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed
An oil damper 805 is fixed to the lower part from the front side (see FIG. 156).

A decorative member 807 is disposed and fixed to the front side of the supporting base material 801 so as to cover the peripheral region from the front while leaving open a vertically long, roughly elliptical region in the center. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper part constituting the upper end region and a roughly U-shaped lower part constituting the region below the upper part.

In this embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that is somewhat elongated in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operating device 800 is arranged to be movable up and down as described later,
The operating space can be reduced when the support base material 801 is formed into a vertically elongated shape rather than a horizontally elongated shape.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively arranged concentrically with the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G so as to overlap the position of the opening 801P as described later.
Since they are linked to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, they can be positioned at any position on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G so long as they do not interfere with each other, but in this embodiment, they are positioned to the right of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G (see Figure 156).

As a result, as shown in Fig. 154, weight is concentrated on the right half of the petal operating device 800, which is supported in a slightly tilted position toward the front, and the left half on the opposite side can be prevented from sagging downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the support base material 801 and the driving side arm member 910 (see Fig. 152) connected to the left half of the support base material 801 from widening, and the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the support base material 801 via the driving side arm member 910.

Fig. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, and Fig. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800. Note that in Fig. 155 and Fig. 156, the illustration of the support base material 801 is omitted for ease of understanding.

As shown in Figures 155 and 156, the petals 802 are formed as resin members molded to resemble the shape of one of the five separate petals that as a whole make up a hibiscus flower in a bloomed state, and are provided with a plate-like flat member 803 on the back side.

157(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat member 803 and the slide member 820. FIG.

Each of the petals 802 has a front shape of a substantially circular arc extending in the radial direction when arranged, and is curved so as to bulge gently forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15).
See 4).

The surface of the petal 802 is irregularly uneven, including many wrinkles, and the periphery is also irregularly uneven when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 are not strictly identical to each other, and although there are slight differences in the unevenness, they are molded into roughly the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are nearly transparent, and the outer periphery is colored so that the specific color (red) is darker, without forming any particular boundary between it and the inner region.

Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S, which extends cylindrically rearward and has a screw hole therein, at two locations on the rear side of each petal 802: near the outer periphery and at the radial center.

The petals 802 are arranged closer to the rear side 802 a than the rear side 802 a arranged on the rounded tip side (counterclockwise in front view, right side of the paper in FIG. 157 ( a )) from the position where they are fastened to the flat plate member 803.
The front portion 802b, which is disposed on the sharp tip side (clockwise side when viewed from the front, left side of the paper in FIG. 157(a)) from the front portion 802a, is disposed on the front side. In other words, the front portion 802b is disposed closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose-fitting device 880 than the rear portion 802a.

The front portion 802b of each petal 802 is overlapped on the front side of the rear portion 802a of the adjacent petal 802, and the rear portion 802a is overlapped on the rear side of the front portion 802b of the other adjacent petal 802, thus arranging the five petals 802 so that their inner tips converge toward the same center.

The petals 802 are shaped such that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are misaligned from each other in the front-rear direction.
b can be positioned so that they overlap front to back, making the difference in shape (difference in size) of the entire petal 802 between the gathered position and the fully open position (see Figures 178 and 179) more pronounced.

When arranged, the five petals 802 as a whole have a disk-shaped (donut-shaped) rear side with a circular opening S1 in the center (see FIG. 155).

As shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, the flat plate member 803 is
02, and are separate, long, plate-like resin members fixed to the respective mounting holes 101 and 102.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape that extends from the center to the outer periphery in a generally rectangular shape when arranged, and further has an outer periphery that extends forward.

In addition, the vicinity of the opening S1 on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state (the vicinity of the inner periphery)
A pair of screw-in portions 803S extending cylindrically rearward and having screw holes therein are integrally formed at positions spaced apart in the circumferential direction (the short side direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screw-in portions 803S are formed in an arrangement that is approximately flush with both side walls in the circumferential direction (short direction) of each flat plate member 803, and further, in the portion along both side walls of the flat plate member 803, a slide rib 803a that is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of screw-in portions 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearward beyond the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the screw-in portion 803S so as to extend to both sides along a surface direction that circumscribes the peripheral surface of the screw-in portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157(b), the rear side of each flat plate member 803 has two screw insertion holes therein, each of which corresponds to the screw-in portion 802S of the petal 802.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole for positioning the screw-insertion portion 802S is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 is connected to the screw insertion portion 803H of the corresponding petal 802.
02S is abutted from the front and a screw is screwed in from the rear, thereby fixing each flat plate member 803 to the corresponding petal 802.

Fig. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and Fig. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In addition, in the explanation of Fig. 158 and Fig. 159, Fig. 155 and Fig. 156 will be referred to as appropriate. As shown in Fig. 155 and Fig. 156, the slit member 810 is disposed on the rear side of the flat plate member 803.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a plate-like resin member having a front shape in which five similarly shaped parts are connected in a circular ring shape, with a circular opening 811 formed in the center, and as shown in FIG. 159, a front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) that are roughly cylindrical extend in both the front and rear directions from the periphery of the circular opening 811.

Returning to Fig. 156, the explanation will be given. On the rear peripheral wall portion 813, two of the five equally spaced circumferential locations are provided, and one of the three remaining locations is provided in the middle. Each of these locations is provided with a screw-in portion 813S that extends cylindrically in the front-rear direction and has a screw hole therein. Furthermore, the positioning boss 81
The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge outward at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portions 813S and the positioning bosses 813a. One of the purposes of these bulging portions is to reduce sliding friction, which will be described in detail later.

158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both side slits 815. The central slit 814 is formed so as to extend linearly from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 further outward. However, the central slit 814 is formed so as to extend linearly from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811 to a position slightly outside the circular opening 811.
4 extends along a direction D12 inclined at an angle θ11 (approximately 15° in this pachinko machine 8010) in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front.

The side slits 815 are formed on both sides of the central slit 814 so as to extend parallel to each other with a slight gap therebetween.

In this way, five sets of three slits, each consisting of the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 on either side of it, are formed at equal intervals (72° apart) in the circumferential direction. Note that each end of the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 may be formed in a round (semicircular) shape when viewed from the front, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the two side slits 815 located at the outermost position in the set of three slits, i.e., the two corners on the smaller diameter side among the four corners of the three slits, are shaped to extend slightly in a generally rectangular shape (with a rectangular slit) in the extension direction of the two side slits 815. This rectangular extending portion (slit) is for fitting the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 into it.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end of a flat plate in which a central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are formed, and is provided with an arc plate 816 which is formed with an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral ends of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815, and has an outer diameter formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

As a result, the arc plate 816 enhances the rigidity of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 are formed.
It is possible to suppress deformation of the flat plate on which the groove 5 is formed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

As described above, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 are provided as shown in FIG.
The five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 extend along a direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. Therefore, the five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 are arranged closer to each other inwardly, and are more densely arranged. This also improves the slit member 81
The external shape of the No. 0 has been made compact.

In other words, if five sets of central slits 814 and two side slits 815 are arranged in a circular opening 811,
The five sets of central slits 814 and side slits 815 can be laid out more densely when they are arranged and formed to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above than when they are arranged and formed to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11, and therefore the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156 , a slide member 820 is disposed in the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810.
As shown in Figure 157, 20 is a resin member having a long, plate-like front shape, and is equipped with extension portions which are thin at both ends of the slide member 820 and have a semicircular tip when viewed from the front, a central portion which bulges out to a greater thickness than the performance portion at a position between the extension portions, a screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extension portion, a guide pin 822 which protrudes from the center of the slide member 820 toward the front side and is inserted into a central slit 814 in the assembled state, and a slide pin 823 which is fixed so as to penetrate forward and backward in a manner that protrudes from the center of the slide member 820 toward the rear side.

As shown in Figures 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is positioned so as to span the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in an orientation in which the extension direction of the three slits, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 in the slit member 820, and the longitudinal direction intersect at right angles.

On the other hand, the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 of the slit member 810 are
The screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted from the front side. When fully fitted, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes very slightly rearward from the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, washer head screws 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

As a result, the slide member 820 is moved to the flat plate member 8 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween.
At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide ribs 803a of the flat plate member 803 are inserted along the corresponding outer edges of the side slits 815 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap.

As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held in the central slit 814 and the side slits 815 of the slit member 810. At this time, the flat plate member 803 is supported by the guide pins 8
The slide rib 803a restricts the slide movement so that the slide member 803 does not rotate around the center of the slide member 803 but keeps a constant outward facing position.

FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIG.
161(a) and 161(b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. Note that in FIG. 161(a), the fourth gear 880G is omitted.
In explaining Figures 150 and 161, reference will be made to Figures 155 and 156 as appropriate.

As described above, the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached has a rotating plate 830 disposed thereon from the rear side. The rotating plate 830 is a circular plate made of resin having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center, as shown in Figures 160 and 161 .

As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 on the front side, and a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall that extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830.
The loop is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830 so as to extend in a closed manner along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 in a long and narrow loop shape when viewed from the front.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap to allow play. The corners at the extension ends of the peripheral walls of the guide rail 832 are formed to be chamfered.

The guide rail 832 extends from a position where it contacts the outer side of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.
It extends in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front along a direction approximately halfway between the tangent and normal to the pivot opening 831, and then curves in an arc further in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front than this midpoint, extending to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the end of the guide rail 832 on the pivot opening 831 side, i.e., the center side end, which circumscribes the peripheral portion of the pivot opening 831, is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831, and its front end protrudes toward the front side beyond the front end of the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831.

Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, so that in total, five guide rails 832 are spaced equally apart and extend outward in a spiral shape from around the pivot opening 831.

161, a second gear 830G having teeth on its outer periphery is integrally formed on the rear side of the rotating plate 830, extending rearward like a peripheral wall from the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The second gear 830G is disposed to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotated by the central motor 804.

As shown in Fig. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 fits externally onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 protruding rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see Fig. 174(c)).

As described above, the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 locally bulges at five points, so that it makes linear rather than planar contact with the inner surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830, whereby the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, and the rotating plate 830 is pivoted smoothly and freely.

As shown in FIG. 161(a), a second gear 830G is further provided on the rear side of the second gear 830G.
A third gear 810 G having a slightly smaller diameter but larger than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed concentrically with the oil damper 805 G and arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805 G of the oil damper 805 .

A circular pivot opening 810a is formed in the center of the third gear 810G.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 810b are drilled at positions corresponding to the three screw-in portions 813S in the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see Figure 156), and positioning holes 810c are drilled at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

The third gear 810G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830G that is fitted onto the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810.
The positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) is inserted into the positioning hole 810c to perform positioning, and a screw (not shown) is inserted into the screw-insertion hole 810b to form a screw-in portion 813S (see FIG. 157).
56) to secure the cam.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G acts as a stopper to hold the rotating plate 830 against the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as to prevent it from coming off.

155 and 156, a central shaft rotating device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 loosely fitted so as to be rotatable around the central shaft member 851.

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.
63 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

As shown in Figures 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 comprises a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape with a portion of the peripheral wall of the cylinder cut away along the axial direction, and a flange 855 formed in a circular plate shape so as to expand in diameter at the front end of the shaft portion 852, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are formed integrally.

The center of the flange 855 is circularly open in communication with the inside of the shaft portion 852, thereby forming an inner cavity 856 that penetrates the inside of the shaft portion 852 from front to back. Around the inner cavity 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, at two locations on the left and right sides of the inner cavity 856, there are integrally formed a front screw-in portion 857 having a screw hole therein, a holding portion 858 having a countersunk shape and drilled toward the back side at a position shifted from the front screw-in portion 857 toward the inner cavity 856 side, and two support protrusions 859 that extend forward in a cylindrical shape and are somewhat short. The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusions 859 have the same extension height.

A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole therein is integrally formed on the inner peripheral surface of the bore portion 856. The rear screw-in portion 853 extends cylindrically along the axial direction of the shaft portion 852 in parallel to two opposing positions, extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, and has a screw hole therein. In addition, a rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from both rear screw-in portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

As shown in FIG. 162 and FIG. 163, an LED board 861 is provided on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
The LED board 861 is a substantially disk-shaped board having a diameter slightly smaller than that of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

The LED board 861 has a screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 formed at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 to determine its position, and the screw is inserted into the central shaft member 8
The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851 by screwing it into the front screw portion 857 of the central shaft member 851 .

Furthermore, an insertion hole 864 is drilled in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 and is large enough to allow the screw-in portion 869 of the central decorative member 868 to be fitted therein.

As shown in FIG. 162, the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 is provided with forward-facing LEDs at one central location and at multiple locations arranged at equal intervals on a concentric circle that extends multiple times (double) around the central location.
D865 are fixed in place and emit light forward.

Horizontal LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at multiple locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction near the outer periphery of the front and rear side surfaces of the LED substrate 861, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED substrate 861. The horizontal LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. A connector connection portion 867 is arranged and fixed facing rearward on the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861.

A central decorative member 868 is disposed in front of the LED board 861.
is formed from a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but which is nearly transparent, extends cylindrically from a long plate-shaped base toward the rear side, and has a pair of screw-in portions 869 in the center of which is a screw hole into which a screw can be screwed.

The screw-in portion 869 is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861.
The D board 861 is sandwiched between the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 and the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861.
The screw-in portion 869 that has passed through the flange 855 comes into contact with the front side, and a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855, thereby fastening and fixing the central decorative member 868 to the flange 855. In this way, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED board 861.

The loose fitting device 880 mainly comprises a small diameter cylindrical member 881 formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner circumferential surface with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, a large diameter cylindrical member 882 arranged coaxially with the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and formed from a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer circumferential surface with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and a main cylindrical member 883 which is a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 and is loosely fitted with the small diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to be rotatable relative to each other.

The main cylindrical member 883 has four locations equally spaced circumferentially around the cylindrical portion, and at two locations every other one, a screw-in portion 883S extending cylindrically in the front-to-rear direction and having a screw hole therein is integrally formed, and a positioning boss 883a extends from the tip edge of the location at which the screw-in portion 883S is not formed among the four locations.

The main cylindrical member 8 is screwed into the screw hole 883S at four positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a.
In addition, the main cylindrical member 883 is provided with a sliding rib 88 that protrudes in the outer diameter direction and extends in the axial direction at the midpoint of the four corresponding circumferential positions and has the same protruding length as the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a.
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the main cylindrical member 883 is provided with a decorative member 884 which is formed with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED board 861 and which covers the LED board 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see Figure 149), and a rear cover 886 which is fastened and fixed to the decorative member 884 near the outer diameter, forming a bottomless cup shape with the outer periphery side rising toward the front side from the fastening part, and which abuts against the flange portion of the main cylindrical member 883 from the back side and is fastened and fixed.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in the present pachinko machine 8010) on both sides, which makes the sides mirror-like. Therefore, for example, the light from the horizontally oriented LEDs 866 arranged on the back side of the LED board 861 can be reflected near the outer periphery to produce a light-emitting effect.

The decorative member 884 is a component that creates an illumination effect when light is irradiated from LEDs 865, 866 arranged on the LED board 861, and comprises a front side panel portion that is formed in the shape of a hibiscus flower and is made of a light-transmitting resin material of a specific color (red), and a rear side panel portion that is formed in a circular plate shape on the rear side with a peripheral wall rising towards the rear side and is made of a colorless light-transmitting resin material, and an opening 885 is drilled in the central portion large enough to allow the central decorative member 868 to be inserted therethrough.

The main cylindrical member 883 configured in this manner is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fit device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed rearward of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

As shown in FIG. 161( a ), a fourth gear 880G, which has a diameter slightly smaller than that of the third gear 810G and a diameter larger than that of the pivot opening 831, is concentrically disposed and fixed to the rear side of the third gear 810G.
The support base 801 is rotatably supported by the shaft and meshes with a pair of intermediate gears 808 that mesh with each other.

One of the intermediate gears 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other of the intermediate gears meshes with the fourth gear 880G.
08, it rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G.

A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G.
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are drilled at positions corresponding to the two screw-in portions 883S of the main cylindrical member 883, and positioning holes 880c are drilled at positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G that is fitted onto the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850. The fourth gear 880G is positioned relative to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 by inserting a positioning boss 883a (see FIG. 163) into a positioning hole 880c. A screw (not shown) is inserted into a screw-in portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through a screw insertion hole 880b.
The screw is then screwed into the corresponding hole in the mounting hole (see FIG. 3).

As a result, the loose-fitting device 880 is interlockingly connected (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, while the fourth gear 880G acts as a stopper, holding the slit member 810 in place so that it does not come off the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that is provided on the outer circumferential side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c and extends toward the rear side in an arc shape centered on the rotation axis. The detection arc plate 880d is a plate of the same shape that is arranged at five positions at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

The detection arc plate 880d is in the assembled state (see FIG. 154) and is provided with a donut-shaped recess 80.
1D (see FIG. 152), and is detected by a photocoupler-type detection sensor 801C that is disposed so as to be capable of detecting a member passing through the doughnut-shaped recess 801D. That is, in this embodiment, regardless of the position from which the fourth gear 880G starts to rotate, the detection arc plate 88
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0d (central angle 72°) (minimum angle 7
2° can be detected, and rotation of 72° or more can be ensured by detection).

The assembly of the central shaft rotation device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, on which the LED board 861 is arranged and fixed, and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 are inserted from the front side into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 are fully inserted, their respective rear ends protrude slightly rearward from the pivot opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 protruding further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is attached to the support base material 801.
The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the supporting base 801 by inserting it into a positioning notch (not shown) in the supporting base 801 (see Figure 152) to position it, and then inserting the rear screw-in portion 853, which similarly protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852, into the insertion hole of the screw insertion portion 801S in the supporting base 801 and screwing it in place.

At this time, wiring is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wiring is led out rearward through the inner cavity portion 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base material 801 (not shown).

With the above-described mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 so as to protrude forward, and as shown in FIG. 154, the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose-fitting device 880 is
The rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the large-diameter cylindrical member 882, and the front peripheral wall portion 8
12 is attached so as to fit over the outside.

At this time, the outer peripheral surface of the main cylindrical member 883 has eight screw-in portions 883S,
Since it is locally bulged by the positioning boss 883a and the sliding rib 883b, it makes linear rather than planar contact with the inner surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, whereby the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is fitted onto the main cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is pivotally supported so as to rotate smoothly and freely.

FIG. 164 shows the petal operation device 800, the driving side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
164 is a rear perspective view of the rear plate 1100, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 moves up and down (moves forward and backward) by being given a load in the vertical direction from the driving side arm member 910. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 164 and subsequent figures, reference will be made to FIG. 150 to FIG.
Please refer to 2 as appropriate.

The back panel 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened to the innermost part of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88 ) which is fastened to the back of the game board 13, and includes a support pillar 1110 which protrudes cylindrically toward the front side at the lower left corner when viewed from the front, a gear accommodating section 1120 which is recessed above the support pillar 1110 so that multiple gears can be accommodated from the front side, a rail fixing section 1130 which is arranged in a straight line in the vertical direction at the center position from left to right, and
and support elongated holes 1140 that are drilled on the left and right opposite sides of the support pillar 1110 and that slope downward as they approach the rail fixing portion 1130.

The support pillar 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the driving side arm member 910.
Near the outer periphery at the front end portion, it has a pair of left and right holes 1111 that are formed to allow screws to be screwed in, and a pair of positioning bosses 1112 that extend toward the front side on the same plane as the tip edge of the screw-in portion 1111, one above the other.

As shown in Figure 164, the driving side arm member 910 is composed of a long, rod-shaped main body member bent in an L-shape when viewed from the rear, and mainly comprises a pivot hole 911 that is circularly drilled in the front-to-rear direction at one end and is rotatably supported on a support column 1110, a connecting protrusion 912 that is stepped and cylindrically protrudes on the front side at a position near one end of the long main body member, a transmission long hole 913 that is drilled in the shape of a linear long hole from the bending point of the long main body member toward the pivot hole 911, and a support portion 914 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end of the long main body member.

The driving side arm member 910 rotates around the support pillar 1110 in conjunction with the rotation of an arm gear 924 which has an internal fitting protrusion 925 which is fitted into the transmission long hole 913 and a flange portion 926 which extends radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162.

The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a recessed portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is accommodated, and is composed of three circular recesses that are connected to each other while slightly intersecting each other. The first accommodating portion 1121 is disposed on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922, and the second accommodating portion 1122 is connected to the first accommodating portion 1121.
22 and a third housing portion 1123 which is disposed opposite the first housing portion 1121 with the second housing portion 1122 therebetween and which houses an arm gear 924 which is engaged with the driving side arm member 910.
It mainly comprises 3.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a part that supports an operating rail 1000R (see Figure 150, not shown in Figure 165) which is made of multiple metal plates stacked front to back and supported so that it can slide up and down, and is equipped with insertion holes 1131 through which screws can be inserted to fasten the operating rail 1000R to the back panel 1100, and positioning bosses 1132 that fit into the operating rail 1000R and position the operating rail 1000R, and these are arranged in a straight line from top to bottom.
The rigidity of the movement rail 1000R keeps the posture of the petal movement device 800 constant.

The support long hole 1140 is a long hole that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of approximately 50° when viewed from the front, and is provided with an extension wall 1141 that extends from near the outer periphery toward the front side.

As shown in Figure 164, the driven arm member 950 is composed of a long, rod-shaped main body member that is formed in an approximately straight line when viewed from the rear, and mainly comprises a supported convex portion 951 that is cylindrically protruded toward the rear side at one end and is slidably supported in the support long hole 1140 of the rear panel 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operation device 800 at the other end.

A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported protrusion 951, and with the collar fitted inside the support elongated hole 1140, a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported protrusion 951, whereby the driven arm member 950 is supported slidably on the back plate 1100. In other words, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported protrusion 951, and the outer diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the support elongated hole 1140.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

Figure 166 is an exploded front oblique view of the back panel 1100, side base material 1000S and second performance member 940, and Figure 167 is an exploded front oblique view of the drive side arm member 910, slide plate 930 and second performance member 940.

The slide plate 930 is supported on the lateral base material 1000S so as to be able to slide left and right by multiple (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 drilled in the front-to-back direction in the shape of long holes extending left and right, and is connected to the connecting protrusion 912 of the driving side arm member 910 by a base end long hole 932 drilled in the front-to-back direction in the shape of a long hole extending up and down and arranged on the left end side, and is connected to the second performance member 940 by a tip end insertion hole 933 arranged on the right end side and drilled in the front-to-back direction.

The base end long hole 932 mainly comprises a retaining portion 932a at the upper end formed along the trajectory of the connecting protrusion 912 rotating around the support column 1110, and a displacement portion 932b extending vertically downward from the lower end of the retaining portion 932a.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a plate-like member fastened to a support column portion 1150 having a screw-in portion 1151 at the tip into which a screw can be screwed, and is disposed at a position corresponding to the support column portion 1150 and has an insertion hole into which a screw can be inserted, and the positional relationship between the fastening plate portion 1001S and the supported long hole 931 of the slide plate 930 is determined. A support protrusion 1002S is provided in a cylindrical shape protruding toward the rear side in a positional relationship (three places) corresponding to the engagement, a shaft support hole 1003S is provided in a circular shape in the front-rear direction in the right corner when viewed from the front and supports the second performance member 940 in a rotatable manner, an arc recess 1004S is provided in an arc shape concentric with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a protruding rib portion 1005S is provided in a protruding manner on the front side along an arc shape concentric with the center of the shaft support hole 1003S.
And, mainly prepare.

The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar is attached to the tip of the support protrusion 1002S.
and the supported long hole 931, and in this state a screw for preventing it from coming off is screwed into the tip of the supporting protrusion 1002S, thereby forming a part that supports the sliding plate 930 so that it can slide.

The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second performance member 940, and the arc recess 1004S and the convex rib portion 1005S are portions that are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotational movement of the second performance member 940. Note that the convex rib portion 1005S is formed with a convex height that does not come into contact when the second performance member 940 is in the normal position, but can come into contact when the second performance member 940 is displaced or bent from the normal position.

The second performance member 940 has a main body portion whose lower end is formed in two and whose upper end is formed in a circle centered on the shaft support portion 941, and the shaft support portion 941 is cylindrically protruding toward the rear side at the right corner when viewed from the front and is supported by a collar in the shaft support hole 1003S, and an auxiliary protrusion 942 is disposed adjacent to the shaft support portion 941 and protrudes toward the rear side in a cylindrical shape.
Provide for the Lord.

The shaft support portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar, which is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and has a screw-in portion 941a at its tip into which a screw is screwed (see FIG. 152).
With the cover member 945 having a disk shape and an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S disposed at the tip of the shaft support hole 1003S, a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 941a, whereby the cover member 94
5 serves as a retainer. In this way, the second performance member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is inserted into the tip end side through hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169 ), and a circular resin collar is fastened and fixed to the tip end, thereby preventing the auxiliary protrusion 942 from coming off the slide plate 930. That is, the connection between the auxiliary protrusion 942 and the tip end side through hole 933 links the slide plate 930 and the second performance member 940.

The auxiliary protrusion 942 is a protrusion that displaces the vicinity of the center of the width of the arc recess 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc recess 1004S. As a result, even if the second performance member 940 is about to bend, the auxiliary protrusion 942 abuts against the arc recess 1004S and generates resistance, thereby suppressing bending deformation.

The description will be given with reference to Fig. 165. The rear plate 1100 has three screw-in portions 1161 configured to allow screws to be screwed in when fastening the plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921,
A detection sensor 1162 detects a flange portion 926 that protrudes radially outward from the arm gear 924 within a range of a predetermined angle, a shaft support 1163 on which a collar that guides a coil spring SP8 that generates a biasing force in a direction to lift the petal operating device 800 is rotatably supported, a cover support portion 1164 that is arranged in a triangular shape in a front view at the lower right of the support long hole 1140 so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C, and a cover support portion 1164 that is arranged adjacent to the cover support portion 1164 and supports the board cover 1000C.
The main components are a wiring stopper 1165 that is hidden by the board cover 1000C in a front view, and a screw-in portion 1166 into which a screw that fastens the board cover 1000C is screwed in.

Similarly, the side base material 1000S has threaded portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the board cover 1000C are threaded. The threaded portion 1006S is disposed at a slight distance from the second performance member 940 disposed at the end of the movement in the direction of movement of the second performance member 940 (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary protrusion 942 may break due to long-term use,
Even if the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second performance member 940 in a front view is chipped,
The screw-in portion 1006S can regulate the displacement of the second performance member 940.

In this way, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fastened to each of the side substrate 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are stacked in front and behind and fastened to each other.
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. As a result, even when the petal operating device 800, which is a heavy device, is raised and lowered by rotating the driving side arm member 910, it is possible to easily suppress vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S.

Next, referring to Figs. 168 to 173, the raising and lowering operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advancing and retreating operation unit 900 will be described. Figs. 168, 170 and 172 are front views of the petal operation device 800, the advancing and retreating operation unit 900 and the back plate 1100, and Figs.
71 and 173 are rear views of the petal operating device 800 and the forward/backward operating unit 900.

168 and 169 show a state in which the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at the upper end side of the moving range, while FIGS. 170 and 171 show a state in which the connecting protrusion 912 (see FIG. 164) of the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at a connecting position between the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side long hole 932, and FIGS. 172 and 173 show a state in which the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at a connecting position between the retaining portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side long hole 932,
is shown disposed at the lower end of its range of movement.

169 and 173, when the driving arm member 910 is located at the end of its range of movement, the transmission slot 913 of the driving arm member 910 extends in the tangent direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924, with the internal fitting protrusion 925 (see FIG. 151) of the arm gear 924 as the base point.
Since only the spring 25 is displaced and the driving side arm member 910 maintains its position within a range (a range in which the driving motor 921 rotates freely), the resistance at the time of starting the driving motor 921 can be reduced.

170 and 171, the petal operation device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the state shown in Fig. 168 and 169, while the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second performance member 940 is maintained. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second performance member 940.

In the range from Figures 170 and 171 to Figures 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are linked together, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second performance member 940 can be visually perceived as being linked together.

Here, the second performance member 940 moves toward the original position of the petal movement device 800 in a protruding manner, as if the second performance member 940 were the petal movement device 800.
It can be visually recognized as operating in accordance with 00.

Next, we will explain the gathering and dispersing rotation operation of the petal operation device 800. Figure 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, Figure 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operation device 800, Figure 174 (c) is a front view showing the petal operation device 800 in a see-through manner with the central shaft rotation device 850 omitted, and Figure 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 175(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 175(b) is a front view of the petal operation device 8
175(b) is a rear view of petal 802 and flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175(c) is a rear perspective view of petal operation device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 176(a) is a front perspective view of the petal operation device 800, and FIG.
FIG. 176(b) is a front view of the petal movement device 800, FIG. 176(c) is a transparent front view of the petal movement device 800 with the central shaft rotation device 850 omitted, and FIG. 176(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 177(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 177(b) is a front view of the petal operation device 8
177(b) is a rear view of petal 802 and flat plate member 803, and FIG. 177(c) is a rear perspective view of petal operation device 800. FIG.

Similarly, FIG. 178(a) is a front perspective view of the petal movement device 800, and FIG.
FIG. 178(b) is a front view of the petal movement device 800, FIG. 178(c) is a transparent front view of the petal movement device 800 with the central shaft rotation device 850 omitted, and FIG. 178(d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

FIG. 179(a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, and FIG. 179(b) is a front view of the petal operation device 8
179(b) is a rear view of petal 802 and flat plate member 803, and FIG. 179(c) is a rear perspective view of petal operation device 800. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operation device 800 is lowered by the lifting operation to the lowest position, the petal operation device 800 moves from the initial position (assembled position) shown in FIG. 174 and FIG. 175 to the position shown in FIG. 176 and FIG. 177.
After passing through the mid-open position shown in FIG. 175, an opening operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, and then a rotation operation (second operation) is performed at the fully open position, and then a reassembly operation (third operation) is performed to return to the initial position (reassembly position).

In the initial position (assembled position), as shown in FIG. 174(d), the slide member 820
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) is inserted into the central slit 81 of the slit member 810.
174 and 175, the five petals 802 are in the most concentrated position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, and are gathered together to form a blooming hibiscus flower as a whole.

When the petals 802 are in the initial position (assembled position) as described above, the central motor 804 rotates the first
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A9 in FIG. 175(c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175(d)) is interlocked with the rotation of the rotating plate 83
0 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the rear as indicated by an arrow A10.

At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, so that it can easily rotate around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted around the large diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose-fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, since it is braked in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G as described above, it is held so that it cannot rotate with a small torque that can initially move the rotating plate 830.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, the rotating plate 8
Only the slit member 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see Figures 176 and 177).

When the rotating plate 830 is rotated as described above, as shown in FIG. 175( a ), the guide rail 832 on the front side rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A11.
Accordingly, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157 ) in a radially outward direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832 .

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is the same as that of the slit member 81 as shown in FIG.
Since the slide pin 823 is restricted by the central slit 814 of 0, the slide pin 823 is guided linearly along the central slit 814 from the inner end to the outer side.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that some torque is also applied to the slit member 810. However, the braking force of the oil damper 805 is greater than this torque. Therefore, the slide pin 823 moves in the center slit 810 as the rotating plate 830 rotates, while the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state.
14 in a linear outward motion.

As a result, as shown in Figures 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start to spread radially outward from the assembled position.
As described above, the central slit 814 of 10 extends along a direction D12 that is inclined at an angle θ11 counterclockwise when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. 177. Therefore, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward. However, due to this inclination, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 becomes relatively fast.

In other words, by tilting the central slit 814 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in this manner, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin 823 can be moved a predetermined distance with a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830, thereby making it possible to more efficiently spread out the petals 802.

Here, for example, if we assume that there was no inclination and the central slit 814 extended radially along the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 would be relatively small compared to the above-mentioned case, while the moving speed of the slide pin 823 would be relatively slow. Furthermore, if we assume that the central slit 814 was inclined clockwise when viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11, the reduction in the load on the slide pin 823 and the decrease in the moving speed would both be even more significant.

Also, at this time, as described above, the guide rails 832 extend from the center end portion in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front along a direction D15 midway between the tangent and normal to the pivot opening 831, as shown in FIG. 177, and then extend outward in an arc-like curve further in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front than the direction D15, so that the five guide rails 832 as a whole extend in a spiral shape spreading outward.

The more the guide rail 832 is inclined clockwise as viewed from the front, the more the slide pin 82
The load on the guide rail 832 becomes smaller and the moving speed becomes slower.
The more the slide pin 823 is curved in an arc shape toward the clockwise side in the front view from the direction D15, the
The reduction in load on the body and the reduction in movement speed are both more pronounced.

In other words, in the case of the above-mentioned central slit 814, by tilting it in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively fast, whereas in the case of the guide rail 832, by tilting it in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front and further curving it into an arc, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, a groove is formed by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted into it from the front side, so if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, there is a risk that the slide pin 823 will deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. For this reason, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is sacrificed and reduced, and the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, the slide pin 823 is designed to pass through, so there is little risk of deviation. For this reason, the slide pin 823 is configured to increase its movement speed while increasing the load on the slide pin 823.

In this way, the guide rail 832 reduces the load on the slide pin 823, thereby preventing problems such as deviation and ensuring the reliability of power transmission.
14 increases the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

After that, as shown in FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, the slide pin 823 is inserted into the central slit 81.
When the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement at No. 4, is reached (see FIG. 178(d)), the five sets of petals 802 spread radially to the fully open position, and the spreading operation ends.

In this fully open state, as shown in Figures 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially and discretely, so that the petals 802 are positioned so that they can be seen continuously outward from the decorative member 884 when viewed from the front. As a result, the decorative member 884 and the petals 802 are seen as a unified whole, like a slightly larger hibiscus flower (see Figure 178(b)), compared to when only the decorative member 884 is visible (see Figure 174(b)).

In this way, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, and cannot move outward any further, the slide pin 823
is engaged with the outer end of the central slit 814, so that a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805 cannot cause the rotating plate 830 to rotate any further in the same direction as before.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully open state after the widening operation is completed can be maintained.

After the above-mentioned spreading operation is completed, the central motor 804 transmits the rotational power in the same direction as before to the rotating plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking force of the oil damper 805 and starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, as shown by the arrow A12 in Fig. 178(d) . Thus, after the spreading operation, the petals 802 rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front in the fully open state, as shown by the arrow A13 in Fig. 178(b).

At this time, if the central motor 804 is not stopped after the opening operation but continues to apply rotational power to the rotating plate 830, it is possible to immediately transition from the opening operation to the rotation operation without any gap.

When the petal 802 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front in a fully open state as shown by the arrow A13,
The decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise as viewed from the front) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG.
Since the amount of movement (relative amount of movement) of one petal 802 based on a predetermined position 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

The above rotation operation is ended, and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the opposite direction to the above.
When rotated in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A15 in Figure 179(b), the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held in a stopped state, while first only the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A15 in Figure 179(b), thereby performing a gathering operation in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned spreading operation.

In other words, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner movement limit, and at the same time, the five sets of petals 802 gather from the fully open position toward the central decorative member 868 in the center, returning to the gathering position (initial position) shown in Figures 174 and 175, returning to the gathered state, and the gathering operation is completed.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without being stopped, or the central motor 804 may be stopped and then operated again, and the central motor 804 may further rotate the first gear 804.
When G is rotated in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as indicated by the arrow A15 in FIG.
However, as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174(b), in the assembled state, they rotate in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

When the petals 802 rotate in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front in the assembled state as shown by the arrow A16, the decorative member 884 rotates in the opposite direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) as shown by the arrow A17 in FIG.
Since the amount of movement (relative amount of movement) of one petal 802 based on a predetermined position 84 becomes large, the rotation speed of the petal 802 can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

The central motor 804 is controlled as described above to change from the assembly operation to the rotation operation.
It is possible to have a pause and a transition after a delay, or to have an immediate transition without a pause.

Here, in this embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected when the detection arc plate 880d passes through the detection sensor 801c (see Figure 153), so the MPU 221 (see Figure 4) can determine whether the petal operating device 800 is performing a rotational operation by judging the output of the detection sensor 801c without controlling the rotation angle of the central motor 804.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed on all four sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. However, in the ninth embodiment, a passage forming unit 9140 has a notch 9145 in the wall forming the foul ball passage 9145.
The plate member 9150 is configured to protrude along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 180 to 183.

Fig. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, Fig. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and Fig. 182 and Fig. 183 are front views of the ball launching unit 112a. As shown in Fig. 180 and Fig. 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage section 9145, the vertical positional relationship between the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 and the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142, the shape of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate section 53a.

That is, firstly, the foul ball passage portion 9145 has a notch 9145b recessed from the front end portion toward the rear side of the passage forming unit 9140 in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. Then, the sheet metal member 9150 has a thin plate-like thin plate blade portion 9153 formed by bending a portion extending from the top of the plate-like portion 152 toward the front side in a manner that covers the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145b is formed in a range including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2.
The depth of the recess is set to be approximately equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.

The upper surface of the thin blade portion 9153 abuts against the lower surface of an upper stopper protrusion (not shown) that protrudes from the plate member 14d (see Figure 91) toward the rear side, and is configured to withstand upward loads generated from inside the foul ball passage portion 9145.

This thin blade portion 9153 is a measure against fraudulent practices in which a thread Y8 is threaded through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and the thread Y8 is pulled or loosened to manipulate the balls inside the play area and obtain an unfair advantage, and is disposed for the purpose of cutting the thread Y8 threaded through the foul ball passage portion 9145. Here, possible fraudulent practices will be described.

Returning to FIG. 148, as described above, the ball launching unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
In order to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball, a cutting metal member 725 is provided. This cutting metal member 725 is a member that uses the momentum of the shot of the ball to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball, but if the momentum of the shot is weak, the ball may be shot without cutting the thread Y8.

On the other hand, this ball does not reach the play area, but flows down to the foul ball receiving port 146, passes through the foul ball passage 145, and is discharged to the lower tray 50. Therefore, there is no risk of this ball directly entering the play area.

On the other hand, if we consider a case where balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the thread Y8, a new problem arises.
8 is weakly shot, and the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146.
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the thread Y8 is guided to the launch rail 730, the thread Y8 is positioned on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (the launch solenoid 701 side), so that even if the ball P9 is shot out with force, the thread Y8 will not be cut by the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is shot out with force, the ball P9 will reach the play area without cutting the string Y8.
45, is discharged in front of the player, and is stored in the lower tray 50 (see Figure 86).

Therefore, a person committing fraud can grab ball P8 stored in lower tray 50 and move ball P8 to pull or loosen string Y8, thereby enabling ball P9 to be passed repeatedly through winning hole 63 (see Figure 2) or the like, thereby obtaining fraudulent benefits.

In contrast, in this embodiment, when a cheating act is committed using a thread Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, a thin plate blade portion 9153 is disposed in the foul ball passage portion 145 through which the thread Y8 inevitably passes, so that the thread Y8 can be cut early.

That is, when a fraudster pulls the thread Y8, the thread Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153, damaging the thread Y8 and enabling the thread Y8 to be cut early (see FIG. 180).
By forming notch 9145b closer to the front side, i.e., on the side to which thread Y8 is gathered when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side, thread Y8 can be positioned inside notch 9145b when the thread Y8 is pulled, and thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin plate blade portion 9153.

As described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase its resistance to an upward load by abutting against the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This can prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward from the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin plate blade portion 9153 when the thread Y8 is pulled.
Most of the load applied towards yarn Y3 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

In addition, in this embodiment, as described above, the recess depth of the notch 9145b is set to approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8, so that the ball P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b, and at the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This makes it possible to prevent the thin plate blade portion 9153 from cracking or chipping due to a collision with the ball P8, and therefore makes it possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153.

Secondly, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 is disposed lower than the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. In detail, it is disposed with a difference in height of about the radius Ra of the ball. This makes it easier for the dispensed ball to damage the yarn Y8. In other words, a person who commits a fraudulent act is afraid of being found out for his/her fraudulent act, so he/she may not be able to avoid the ball P
After picking up 8, the customer should hold the ball P8 close to his/her body (e.g.,
It is easy to commit fraud by keeping the string Y8 in a pocket (such as a trouser pocket) and pulling or loosening the string 8. In that case, the string Y8 is kept extending toward the player along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower tray 50 (contacting the upper surface). At this time, the string Y8 is stretched through a position approximately the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the prize ball is dispensed, the lower tray 5 is inserted from the lower end of the lower tray passage 9142 on the front door side.
When the ball discharged to the lower tray 50 hits the lower tray 50 and bounces around, it runs over or hits the string Y8 located on the front side of the ball guide opening 53, flows down the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1) to the right, and flows down through the bottom opening located behind the ball removal lever 52. In other words, by positioning the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 higher than the lower end of the foul ball passage section 9145 (by raising the upper limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower tray passage section 9142 is
This can increase the possibility that the balls discharged from 142 to the lower plate 50 will come into contact with the yarn Y8 and cause damage to the yarn Y8, thereby causing the yarn Y8 to be cut early.

And thirdly, a right inclined surface 9142a that slopes downward as it approaches the right is formed on the bottom surface of the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage section 9142. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easier to give a rightward velocity to the ball that is discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower tray 50 via the front door side lower tray passage section 9142.

As a result, the ball Y8 is discharged to the lower tray 50 before its momentum (kinetic energy) weakens.
That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly give a velocity component to the right (towards the foul ball passage portion 9145) to the ball discharged along the front-to-rear direction to the lower tray 50, so that the ratio of balls that step on or hit the string Y8 among the balls that are discharged can be increased.

In addition, fourthly, in this embodiment, the lower end of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 is a ball guide opening 5
On the left side of ball guide opening 53, the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies an area approximately 2/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53, and on the right side of the ball guide opening 53, the lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (approximately 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53), and at the boundary between the two, a riding-up regulating step portion 9053a is formed.

As shown in Figure 180, the climbing restriction step 9053a is configured as a flat portion extending vertically and connecting the right end portion (right edge) of the right inclined surface 9142a formed as the lower bottom portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142 and the left end portion (left edge) of the lower bottom portion near the outlet of the foul ball passage portion 9145 arranged to the right of that.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 is connected to the front door side lower tray passage portion 91.
42 is connected to the foul ball passage 9145. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the front door side lower tray passage 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9 before passing through the ball guide opening 53. This makes it easier for the ball to approach the string Y8.

The vertical width of the climb-up restriction step 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.
This prevents the ball that rolls in the foul ball passage 9145 and comes into contact with the climb-up prevention step 9053a from climbing up to the right inclined surface 9142a. In other words, the climb-up prevention step 9053a functions as a one-way valve that allows the ball to pass left and right in space V9 in one direction (from left to right) and prevents the ball from passing left and right in the other direction (from right to left).

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 184 to Fig. 186. In the eighth embodiment, a tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed by walls on all sides is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d. However, the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment is configured in such a manner that a notch 10145c is formed in the wall portion forming the foul ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 protrudes along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 184 to Fig. 186.

Fig. 184 to Fig. 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. Fig. 184 illustrates the passage forming unit 10140 as viewed from diagonally above right, Fig. 185 illustrates the passage forming unit 10140 as viewed from diagonally above left, and Fig. 186 illustrates the passage forming unit 10140 as viewed from diagonally below left.

As shown in Figures 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 is formed by a notch 10145 recessed from the front end of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the rear end in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 that are provided to extend toward the front side in a manner to cover the lower portion of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the recessed depth is approximately equal to twice the radius Ra (diameter) of the ball (see FIG. 180). In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d through which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted into the through hole from the back side.

In this embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is provided with an auxiliary protrusion 10145c that is disposed inside the cutout 10145c and that protrudes from the side surface on the rear side of the plate member 14d toward the rear side with the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage portion 10145 before the cutout 10145 is formed.
The auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is shown by imaginary lines in Figures 184 and 185, and is omitted in Figure 186.

The auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (approximately the radius Ra of the ball (see FIG. 180)), so that the length in the front-rear direction where the thin plate blades 10153 and 10154 are exposed is approximately the radius Ra of the ball P8.
Since it is possible to prevent the balls flowing down 45 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154 from cracking or chipping due to collision with the ball P8, and it is possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153, 10154.

The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the back side as it approaches the foul ball receiving port 146 (to the right). Therefore, the width (front-to-back width) of the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 in the cutout 10145c is
5a. As a result, the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage portion 145a is slidably guided by the thin plate blade portion 1
This makes it easier for the nozzle 14d to fit into the gap on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, which is the gap in which the nozzle 14d1 and the nozzle 14d2 are arranged.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion that protrudes from the rear side edge of the cutout 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a portion that forms a bifurcated blade portion together with the first thin plate blade portion 10153 on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153.
The first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 are provided at the front side edge of the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, and extend leftward in a slightly upwardly inclined manner.
5 is formed.

Similarly to the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment, the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members arranged for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8.

The acute-angled recess 10155 is disposed on the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear edge of the notch 10145c. In this way, when the yarn Y8 enters the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2, the yarn Y8 is caused to enter the acute-angled recess 10155, and the yarn Y8 is prevented from entering the rear side of the protruding tip 14d3.
This can make the device more susceptible to damage.

Furthermore, since the second thin plate blade portion 10154, which is arranged on the front side, is positioned higher than the first thin plate blade portion 10153, it is possible for the thread Y8, which is pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person committing fraud, to more easily penetrate deep into the acute-angled recess 10155.

The plate-shaped portion connected to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
and is configured to withstand upward loads arising from inside the foul ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end of the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end face of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 are arranged to face left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in left and right opposite directions. That is, at these two points, the string Y8 is pulled in left and right opposite directions.

For example, there may be a case in which a person committing a cheating act tries to avoid detection of the cheating act by letting go of the ball P8 that has come to his/her hand and allowing the ball P8 to flow back through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and be discharged through the playing area. However, according to this embodiment, a load is applied in opposite directions to the left and right to the thread Y8 or the ball P8 at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary protrusion portion 14d2, making it easier for the reverse flowing ball P8 to get caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary protrusion portion 14d2 and become stuck there.

As a result, the ball P8 and the thread Y8 are retained inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, and the thread Y
By prolonging the time that the 8 is exposed to the play area, fraudulent activity can be discovered more quickly.

In addition, a sticky material (glue, glue, etc.) may be provided deep in the acute-angled recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the thread Y8 attached to the ball P8 that has come into the hand of a cheater is cut, the thread is adhered to the sticky material provided in the acute-angled recess 10155, and the ball P9 is not ejected from the play area but is maintained there, so that cheating using the thread Y8 can be discovered sooner.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, a ball (foul ball) that was shot too weakly to reach the play area is discharged to the lower tray 50, but the tray passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment is provided with a foul ball receiving port 2164 for receiving the foul ball. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and Figure 188 is a partially enlarged front oblique view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIG. 187 and FIG. 188, the outer rail 2062 is disposed in the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is formed of a resin material so as to have an arc shape on the game area side similar to the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment.
2a and a guide member 2062b formed up to near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship such that there is a gap V11 between the tip member 2062a and the guide member 2062b, the gap being of a width allowing the balls to flow down.

Downstream of the gap V11, a foul ball passage 2062c is formed, which is connected to a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the upper tray passage portion 161 on the main body side.
062c is formed with a width slightly larger than the width that allows one ball to pass through, and a spare return ball prevention member 68 is placed above it.

In this embodiment, the main body side upper tray passage 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body side lower tray passage 162 is arranged in the above embodiment, and the formation of the main body side lower tray passage 162 is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) arranged on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper tray 17 exclusively via the main body side upper tray passage 161. Then, when the balls on the upper tray 17 exceed the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged to protrude inside the ball flow path downstream of the payout device 133 is turned ON by the load of balls, and the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped.

That is, in this embodiment, the ball that passed through the foul ball passage 2062c is also delivered to the payout device 133 (
87) are also supplied to the upper tray 17. Therefore, as described above, balls are attached to both ends of the string Y8, and one ball is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c to supply the string Y8
When considering the fraudulent act of letting the ball enter the play area through the foul ball passage 2062c,
The effect of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the discharged balls against the yarn Y8 can be generated regardless of the amount of balls accumulated on the upper tray 17. This makes it easier to cut the yarn Y8 early.

Figure 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In Figure 189, a spare return ball prevention member 68 disposed at the upper part of the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and arranged side by side as a rear perspective view. In addition, in the explanation of Figure 189, Figure 188 will be referred to as appropriate.

The return ball prevention member 68 is temporarily fastened to the game board 13 by a long metal screw B11 in a position in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b that supports the tilting gate member 68a is positioned on the front side.

In detail, the guide member 2062b is hollow on the back side of the ball return prevention member 68. In the hollow, a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed, which is cylindrically protrudes from the back side of the guide member 2062b toward the front side and has an inner wall formed with a screw groove into which the long screw B11 is screwed. A closing plate 2062b4 that closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is in face contact with the tip of the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
With b1 in contact, a long screw B11 is inserted through a through hole that has been pre-drilled in the base member 68b1 as an attachment hole and through a through hole 2062b5 that has been drilled in the closure plate 2062b4 so as to match the position of the through hole, and in this state the long screw B11 is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, thereby fastening and fixing the return ball prevention member 68 to the guide member 2062b.

The upper and left surfaces of the closing plate 2062b4, which are in contact with the guide member 2062b, are formed to match the shape of the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface is recessed to a degree that avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side of FIG. 189) is formed to be in contact with the guide member 2062b.
The gradient increasing portion 2062d of the groove 62b is formed as an inclined surface having a gradient similar to that of the inclined portion 2062d of the groove 62b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d is inclined downwardly toward the tip member 2062a with respect to the surface constituting the outer frame of the play area of the guide member 2062b.
A straight line L11 extended along the surface 2d toward the tip member 2062a intersects with the tip member 2062a below the upper end of the surface (top surface) that constitutes the outer frame of the play area of the tip member 2062a (in this embodiment, about 1/3 below the diameter of the ball).

By configuring in this way, when a ball is shot toward the play area, the gradient increasing unit 20
62d is withdrawn from the path of the ball, and it is possible to prevent the lower tip of the gradient increasing section 2062d from colliding with the ball. On the other hand, when a ball that did not reach the play area flows back, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling in the gradient increasing section 2062d, so that it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will pass through the gap V11 to the left and right, pass over the tip member 2062a, and return to the ball launching unit 112a side.

Between the side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d and the closing plate 2062b4,
The slit 206 has a width smaller than the diameter of the ball and allows the thread to enter (about 2 mm in this embodiment).
The notch 2062b1 is formed at a location where the path of the ball hit into the play area intersects with the foul ball passage 2062c at an acute angle.

The support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side as viewed from the front has a side surface 2062d1 on the front side.
A semicircular cutout 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the gradient increasing portion 2062d. This cutout 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

In this way, the long screw B11, which is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side when viewed from the front, is exposed at the front and rear positions where the notch 2062b1 is formed. As a result, as in the method described above in the ninth or tenth embodiment, when a foul play is committed by passing a thread Y8 having balls P8, P9 fixed to both ends through the foul ball passage 2062c, the thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11.

That is, due to the arrangement of the notches 2062b1, when the thread Y8 receives a load pulling both ends, it is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged deep in the notches 2062b1 (FIG. 190 (
In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, causing friction with the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be cut early.

In this embodiment, the notch 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position through which the center of the ball passes. This makes it possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from being disposed at a position (vertically below the center of the ball) where the launched ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062, and therefore makes it possible to prevent the notch 2062b1 from colliding with the launched ball and affecting the direction of the ball, etc.

Also, a player committing a fraudulent act by threading a thread Y8 with balls P8 and P9 attached to both ends through the foul ball passage 2062c pulls the end of the thread Y8 that projects toward the player (the end to which ball P8 is attached, see FIG. 182) toward the player to adjust the position of ball P9 within the play area, so that the thread Y8 moves closer to the front in the vicinity of gap V11 close to the player. Therefore, by positioning the cut 2062c closer to the front, it is possible to make it easier for the thread Y8 to enter the cut 2062c compared to when the cut 2062c is positioned closer to the back.

A button switch SW11 having a detector protruding downward is disposed in a hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b. The button switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load that is much weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2. This reduces the possibility that the button switch SW11 will interfere with the operation of the gate member 68a. The button switch SW11 is for detecting the position of the gate member 68a, and when the position of the gate member 68a changes, the switch SW11 is turned on.
The switch is arranged to be switchable between N and OFF.

190(a) and 190(b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190(a), the weight portion 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68 is
190(b), the weight of the ball 2 causes the weight portion 68a2 to tilt toward the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190(b), the weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the gate member 68a
In the figure, the opening/closing portion 68a1 is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c.
In Figure 190(a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the fraudulent act is shown for reference and the button switch SW11 is shown to be turned ON, and in Figure 190(b), the button switch SW11 is shown to be turned OFF.

As shown in Fig. 190(b), the return ball prevention member 68 only provides a slight resistance to the ball passing through, and does not provide enough resistance to stop the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting the opening and closing part 68a1 as shown in Fig. 190(b), once the ball flows away, it immediately returns to the state shown in Fig. 190(a).
This is because the state shown in Figure 190(a) can be restored by the time the ball is guided to 62c (0.6 seconds later at the earliest).

On the other hand, for objects that do not flow away like a ball, for example, objects that fill the passage as they move forward like an endoscope, the return ball prevention member 68 provides a large resistance. This structure is a measure against fraudulent activities.

For example, possible fraudulent acts include moving the tip of an endoscope-like device through the foul ball passage 2062c in the opposite direction to the flow of the ball, reaching the inside of the play area and attempting to interfere with the inside of the play area (for example, bending a nail (not shown) set into the play board 13, grasping the ball and putting it in a winning hole, using the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning hole, or emitting a laser from the tip to cut the nail).

Fig. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In Fig. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that may be used for illegal entry is shown by imaginary lines.

In this embodiment, when the tip of an endoscope or other device is advanced through the foul ball passage 2062c in the opposite direction to the flow direction of the ball, it is advanced while excluding the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68. Here, when moving from the state shown in Fig. 191 (where the weight portion 68a2 is circumvented by the tip of the endoscope) to the state shown in Fig. 190(a), the insertion portion (long, flexible portion) connected to the tip of the endoscope is still positioned below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
2 is maintained in the pushed-up state. Therefore, it is difficult to expel the opening/closing portion 68a1, and the distal end of the endoscope can be prevented from advancing any further.

If the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is broken to enter the inside, it is not possible to prevent unauthorized access. On the other hand, in this case, the button switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state.
By controlling the alarm to sound if switch 1 is kept OFF for a predetermined period of time, fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage.

Also, when the button switch SW11 is in the OFF state, the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) may be controlled to stop paying out balls. Even in this case, in normal use, the button switch SW11 is turned OFF only when a foul ball passes by (see FIG. 190(b)), and the button switch SW11 is immediately turned OFF.
Since the period during which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped is set to N (see Figure 190 (a)), the period during which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be made as short as possible, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.
On the other hand, if the gate member 68a is destroyed illegally, the state in which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

The member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball prevention member 68, and may be another movable member.
By disposing the return ball prevention member 68 on the side of the game board 13, if the return ball prevention member 68 is cracked or bent due to long-term use, it can be replaced early. This has the effect of preventing fraudulent acts from being played even before replacement, compared to the case where a replacement part for the return ball prevention member 68 is simply purchased as an option, and the effect of saving the trouble of searching for the return ball prevention member 68 if the user forgets where it is stored. In addition, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball prevention member 68, and for example, a configuration in which the gate member 68a is supported by a fixed shaft rod may be used (the support member 68b may not be provided).

In addition, if the return ball prevention member 68 is broken or bent and needs to be replaced, whether or not it will have the effect of preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts will depend on the extent of the damage to the return ball prevention member 68. However, it is difficult for a person committing a fraudulent act to know whether or not the member has been replaced.
Even if the item has been replaced, the extent of the damage cannot be known, thereby still serving as a deterrent to fraudulent activity.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 192 to Fig. 197. In the eighth embodiment, the petal operation device 800 rotates only at the assembled position or the fully opened position, but the petal operation device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment is configured in such a way that it can rotate even at the open position. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 14, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2882 extending radially outward from the outer edge of the rear end in comparison with the rear cover 886 of the eighth embodiment.
The loose fitting device 2880 in this embodiment is the same as the loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
The only difference between this device and the device 80 is the rear cover 2886, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position where it can come into contact with the front side portion 802b but cannot come into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In this embodiment, a case is described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single restricting portion 2888 are disposed, but these may be disposed at multiple locations on the rear cover 2886 .
Next, the functions of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS.

193(a) and 193(b) are front views of the petal movement device 2800;
193(a) and 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. In addition, in Fig. 193 and Fig. 194, an example of the operation of the petal operation device 2800 is illustrated in time series, and Fig. 193(a) and Fig. 194(a), Fig. 193(b) and Fig. 194(b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820.
) show the states at the same time.

In addition, in FIG. 194(a) and FIG. 194(b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for the sake of convenience, and in the same cross section, a pair of screw-in portions 2803 of a flat plate member 2803 are shown.
193, the petals 802 that change position due to the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194(a), a pair of screw-insertion portions 2803S arranged inside the two side slits 815 have inclined surfaces 2803T on the surfaces facing each other, which are inclined in a manner such that they incline away from the opposing screw-insertion portion 2803S with the screw insertion portion 803H as the center.

The inclined surface 2803T is inclined at an angle of about 30° with respect to the direction in which the sliding member 2820 slides.
The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will now be described.

As shown in Figures 193(a) and 193(b), when the petal 802 is slid (the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front) in a position in which the regulating portion 2888 is positioned radially outward in the direction in which the front portion 802b of the petal 802 moves, the regulating portion 2888 comes into contact with the front portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the regulating portion 2888.

When the petal 802 is receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, if the petal 802 is further slid (the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 155) is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front), the petal 802 changes its posture to deflect the load.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 is changed from the normal position shown in FIG. 194( a ) (the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and both side slits 815 ) to the normal position shown in FIG. 194( b ).
The petals 8 can be tilted toward the slits 815 on both sides.
In 02, posture changes occur whenever possible.

In this way, the sliding member 2820 and the petal 802 change their positions, and the restricting portion 28
While the load from 88 is borne, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194(a), the slide member 2820 only has the narrow slide rib 803a abutting against the slits 815 on both sides, so that frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 is capable of moving smoothly in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815 .

In contrast, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194(b), the slide member 2820 is in contact with the outer inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides, and the inclined surface 280 is in contact with the inner inner wall of the slits 815 on both sides.
3T are abutted against (pressed against) each other, the frictional resistance increases. In addition, the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed larger than that of the slide rib 803a, so the increase in frictional resistance becomes significant. Note that the inclined surface 2803T abuts against the inner walls of the both side slits 815 from both directions in the short direction of the both side slits 815, so the increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830.

Therefore, in the inclined position shown in FIG. 194(b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815 in the longitudinal direction, the resistance to the movement of the slide member 28
20 reaches the ends of the slits 814 and 815, the slide pin 823
Therefore, the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made to exceed the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal posture and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined posture).

In this case, the slit member 810 shakes off the braking force of the oil damper 805 and starts rotating together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193(b),
The petal 802 starts to rotate in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the restricting portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petal 802 from the restricting portion 2888 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800.
156B), the state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) has continued to rotate in the same direction.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the spreading position. At this time, the rear cover 2886 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front) to the rotation direction of the rotation plate 830 (see FIG. 155). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotation plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is transmitted to the oil damper 805 (
156) and therefore the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the open position.

196(a), 196(b), and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. In addition, in Fig. 196(a), 196(b), and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the spreading position to the gathered position is illustrated in time series.

In Fig. 196(a), the rotating plate 830 (see Fig. 156) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Fig. 195, and the front portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the restricting portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated in the same direction from this state, as shown in Fig. 196(b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front portion 802b, and the petals 802 and the sliding member 2820 are returned to their normal positions.

Furthermore, when the rotating plate 830 (see Figure 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see Figure 156) is greater than the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 by the slide pin 823, so the rotation of the petals 802 stops and the petals 802 slide toward the gathering position.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the petals 802 can be rotated in the expanded position and then automatically returned to the assembled position.

Although the case has been described where the petal 802 opens at a position where the front portion 802b of the petal abuts the regulating portion 2888, by rotating the petal 802 by a slight angle (by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise when viewed from the front), it is possible to avoid contact between the front portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888, and therefore it is also possible in this embodiment to move the petal 802 to the fully open position and rotate it at the fully open position.

The arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 is such that it does not come into contact with the petals 802 at the assembled position or the fully open position, or that it does not come into contact with the petals 802 rotating at the fully open position.
By slightly changing its posture, it is possible for the restricting portion 2888 to slip past the restricting portion 2888 and to be in a position where it can deflect the load, thereby preventing the restricting portion 2888 from interfering with the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

In addition, as shown in this embodiment, by disposing the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by disposing a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, the petals 802
When the petals 802 open, they can serve as guides for indicating whether they will pass through a position close to the star-shaped pattern or a position farther away, and the difference in perspective can make the difference between whether the petals 802 open to their fullest extent and perform a rotating motion, or only open halfway and perform a rotating motion.

For example, by performing an effect in which the probability of winning varies depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star pattern and the petals 802 can be increased, so that the star pattern can function as a performance part. This allows the regulating unit 2888 to be used as a part of the performance device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be disposed at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 in a front view. In this case, it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the standpoint of design, and therefore the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

In the fully open position, the petals 802 may come into contact with the restricting portion 2888 and change their position slightly, which may be used as a presentation effect (for example, a presentation suggesting the degree of expectation of a big win). In this case, the meaning conveyed to the player can be changed depending on whether the petals 802 are simply rotating or whether they come into contact with the restricting portion 2888 and rotate while changing their position slightly (fluttering).

In this embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts against the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position.
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of spreading when the petals 802 change position changes. Therefore, even if the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the rear cover 2886, the degree of spreading when the petals 802 change position can be changed in multiple ways.

Next, with reference to Figures 198 and 199, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described.
In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830 in the expanding position has been described, but the slit member 3810 of the petal operation device 3800 in another example of the twelfth embodiment is configured to be able to switch between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. Note that the same reference numerals are used for the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments, and their description will be omitted.

198(a), 198(b), 199(a) and 199(b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In Fig. 198 and Fig. 199, an example of the operation of the petal operating device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise as viewed from the front from the state shown in Fig. 198(a) is illustrated in time series. Also,
In Fig. 198(a), Fig. 198(b), Fig. 199(a) and Fig. 199(b), the rotating plate 83
The arrangement and shape of guide rails 832 of 0 are shown in phantom lines.

In addition, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in Figure 198 (a), the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 exceeds the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 by the oil damper 805, and the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 rotate together, which is the same as in the twelfth embodiment, so no explanation will be given here.

198 and 199, for the sake of convenience, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section, and in the same cross section, a pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section.

Here, when the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820, which receives a load from the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830 because the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832, is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198(a) in accordance with the displacement of the guide rail 832 (see FIG. 198(b)). In this embodiment, additional recesses 3814a, 3815a, 3815b are provided on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that, among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion on the clockwise side as viewed from the front is provided with the central slit 814.
a central recess 3814a recessed in a manner to widen the width of the central slit 814; a clockwise-side recess 3815a recessed in a manner to widen the width of the both-side slits 815 in the short direction of the central slit 814; and a clockwise-side recess 3815b recessed in a manner to widen the width of the both-side slits 815 in the short direction of the central slit 814;
and a counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b recessed in a manner to widen the width of the short side of the pin 5.

In the state shown in FIG. 198( a ), the clockwise recessed portion 3815 a is
3 and is disposed opposite to the slide rib 803a of the third embodiment.

The central recess 3814a is disposed in the state shown in FIG.
From the position where the guide pin 822 is opposed to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (FIG. 19
8(a) below).

The central recess 3814a is deeper than the clockwise recess 3815a and has a longer radial length than the clockwise recess 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198( a ), the counterclockwise recessed portion 3815 b is
From the position where the inclined surface 2803T of the slit member 3810 is opposed to the inclined surface 2803T of the
198(a) (lower side).

The counterclockwise side recess 3815b is deeper than the clockwise side recess 3815a and has a longer radial length than the central recess 3814a.

The operation of the petal operation device 3800 configured as described above when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front will be described.
starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 move in the lower right direction of Figure 198 (a) (in the direction in which the right end slide rib 803a enters the clockwise side recess 3815a) (see Figure 198 (b)).

As a result, the contact between the wall portions of the both side slits 815 on the counterclockwise side when viewed from the front and the flat plate member 2803 is released, and the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front, with the abutting portion between the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the portion that first abuts between the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810) as a fulcrum (FIG. 199(a) and FIG. 199(b)).
)reference).

In addition, since the central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise side recessed portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise side recessed portion 3815a, the above-mentioned slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 28
During rotation of the guide pin 822 and the central recessed portion 3814a, and the screw-in portion 280
Contact between 3S and the counterclockwise side recess 3815b is avoided.

Furthermore, during the above-mentioned rotation, the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 are recessed in a clockwise side recess 3815a with a recess depth sufficient to prevent the rotating tip portion (the left side portion in Figures 198 and 199) from abutting the central slit 814 and both side slits 815.

Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 falls below the resistance applied to the slit member 3810 from the oil damper 805. As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 no longer rotate together.

199(b), in the process of reaching a position where the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 is perpendicular to the direction connecting the pair of screw-in portions 2803S (the longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803), the slide rib 803a on the radial center side housed in the clockwise side slits 815 on both sides as viewed from the front abuts against the wall of the both sides slits 815, causing the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum.
However, it moves counterclockwise in a front view from the recessed base end of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194).
Therefore, by continuing to rotate the rotating plate 830 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it is possible to move the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 toward the center in the radial direction.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in Figure 198 (a) is reached, depending on the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830, it is possible to switch between a case in which the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830, and a case in which the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

This makes it possible to cause the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened to the flat plate member 2803 to perform operations that were not possible in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the spreading operation caused by rotating the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 194(b)), the flat plate member 280
195 and 196, the rotation of the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened to the plate member 2803 is interposed (the rotation of the petals 802 is accompanied by the slit member 3810).
(a) and Figure 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the spreading operation accompanying the rotation of the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 198(a)), the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned to their original positions by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 199(b)).
That is, the rotational movement (rotational movement that rotates together with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193(a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored can be omitted.

Therefore, according to the alternative example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 change during the spreading operation caused by rotating the rotating plate 830 counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 198(a)), the rotating plate 830 can be moved to any state (phase or posture).
2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be caused to start moving toward the assembled position from the position of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 that matches any given state (phase or posture).
As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (FIG. 1
93(a)) rotates (see FIG. 195) while expanding (see FIG. 198(a)) and then assembles toward the assembly position (see FIG. 197), the arrangement of the petals 802 can be diversified, thereby diversifying the operation of the petal operation device 3800.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 200 to Fig. 203. In the first embodiment, the curved surface constituting the front side of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate without an opening.
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

200, 201, 202(a) and 202(b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that in Fig. 200 and Fig. 202(a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, in Fig. 201, the first state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and in Fig. 202(b), the state in which the tilting device 310 is changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 200 and FIG. 201, the operation device 8300 in this embodiment has a lower frame member 8 in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 has not been explained, and the other configurations have been almost the same as those of the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-mentioned embodiments.
Therefore, the following describes the details of the lower frame member 8320, and only provides a brief supplementary explanation of the other configurations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion arranged opposite the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-to-rear direction, and mainly comprises a first through hole 8326a drilled in an approximately egg-shaped manner at the central position on the left and right, a pair of second through holes 8326b drilled on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, which have a horizontally elongated rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and which connect the upper surface and lower side of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes 8326c drilled at the left and right corners, which have a vertically elongated rectangular cross-sectional shape when viewed from the front.

Each of the through holes 8326a to 8326c has the purpose of facilitating the passage of liquids such as the drinking water downward and facilitating the removal of a coin-shaped foreign object inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. A coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted, for example, by a player who finds the operation of the tilting device 300 to be a nuisance in order to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or by a curious player who purposelessly inserts the coin-shaped foreign object between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 33.
0.

Here, since the operating device 8300 is equipped with a tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, slight gaps V13, V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310.
By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smoother, but the gap V13
, there is a high possibility that a foreign object will be inserted into V14.

In particular, in this embodiment, the tilting device 310 is a ring member BR1 (
14(b)), that is, since the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length in the front-rear direction of the tilting device 310 is, the more likely it is to be displaced (deformed) left and right near the front end. Note that this displacement (deformation) includes, for example, displacement that utilizes rattle caused by adding up design errors built in from the design stage between members, and displacement (deformation) caused by slightly deforming each member.

Therefore, during normal use, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides is
However, even if the gap V13 is designed not to be large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign object (e.g., a 1 yen coin), when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one side (e.g., the left side), the gap V13 that is generated on the other side (e.g., the right side) is larger than the gap V13 generated by the tilting device 310 during normal use.
The gap V1 is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 and the left and right sides of the
3, which may be large enough to allow a coin-shaped foreign object to be inserted.

In other words, if the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides during normal use is not set to less than half the thickness of a coin-shaped foreign object (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1 yen coin), a coin-shaped foreign object may be inserted if the tilting device 310 is misaligned to the left or right.

In addition, the gap V14 between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction can be reduced by utilizing the backlash near the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310.
If a load is applied to the rear side of 10, causing it to shift in position (deform), the gap V14 can be easily enlarged, and a coin-shaped foreign object can also be inserted into this gap V14.

In this embodiment, the gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is
Alternatively, if a coin-shaped foreign object is inserted in the front-to-rear gap V14 and the tilting device 310 performs a tilting operation, the coin-shaped foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in Figures 202(a) and 202(b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured in a shape that narrows inwardly to the left and right toward the top and bottom center, it fits the player's fingers more easily and creates a good feel for operation, while in the second state (see Figure 202(a)), a coin-shaped foreign object stuck in the gap V13 in the second state (see Figure 202(a)) is subjected to a downward load from the part of the case main body 311 that protrudes outward from above the narrowing, making it more likely to enter the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operating resistance becomes excessive, which may cause problems in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, friction between the coin-shaped foreign object and the protective lens member 311i may deteriorate the translucency of the protective lens member 311i, which may cause problems in the light emission performance.

In the first place, if a coin-shaped foreign object gets caught inside and restricts the operation of the tilting device 310, it becomes impossible to execute the intended performance with the operation device 8300.
If it is discovered that a coin-shaped foreign object has been inserted into V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately, but if no through hole is formed in the lower frame member 320, it was necessary to disassemble the operating device 300 to remove the coin-shaped foreign object.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, since through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign objects through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. The shapes and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described below.

FIG. 203(a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(b) is a front view of the operation device 8300 shown in FIG.
3(a) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG.
FIG. 203(c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203(d) is a bottom view of FIG.
8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG.
Figure 203(e) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 8300 taken along line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in Figure 203(a).

The first through-hole 8326a has the same left-right center as the left-right center of the vibration device 5400, and is drilled with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of (the first storage section 5431 of) the vibration device 5400, see FIG. 58. Therefore, even if liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left-right center position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through-hole 8326a before reaching the vibration device 5400, so that the liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is in contact with the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 12).
Therefore, in the case where a coin-shaped foreign object inserted in the gap V14 is placed on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h, the upper surface of the extension portion 311h is inclined (the extension portion 311h is curved toward the left and right when viewed from the up-down direction in the second state, so that the coin-shaped foreign object is placed on the upper surface of the extension portion 311h).
In the first state of FIG. 10, the tilt D81 is inclined downward toward the center of the left and right, and the tilt device 310
Since the first through-hole 8326a is inclined, a coin-shaped foreign object can be easily removed through the first through-hole 8326a along a downward inclination D82 (see FIG. 201) that slopes downward toward the front side.

This makes it easy to remove coin-shaped foreign objects while keeping the size of the first through-hole 8326a to a minimum, thereby maintaining the design freedom of the lower frame member 8320. For example, compared to a case where the first through-hole 8326a needs to be greatly expanded in both the left and right directions, it is easier to ensure the strength of the lower frame member 8320.

In this embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is set to the size of the tilting device 310 in the first state.
In other words, in this embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extension 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a size equal to or larger than the size of an object assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign object.
m].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state.
(see FIG. 25 ) is a portion that transmits light emitted from the spherical shell portion 31.
Except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 that are connected to the left and right, top and bottom of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (mirror-finished members are fixed in place), thereby reflecting light that has passed through the spherical shell portion 313.

With this arrangement, the first through hole 8326a can be used to create a difference in the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see Figure 15) and is visible to the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In particular, by using the first through hole 8326a to remove the resin member that weakens the amount of light, the central portion in the left-right direction can be made to appear brighter.

In addition, when a coin-shaped foreign object is placed in a position that partially blocks the first through-hole 8326a, the amount of light that passes through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and is visible to the player is weaker than when there is no coin-shaped foreign object (the coin-shaped foreign object casts a shadow). In other words, the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign object can be used as clues to make it easier to notice that a coin-shaped foreign object remains in the lower frame member 8320, so the coin-shaped foreign object can be easily noticed without being noticed by the player.
This effect can be achieved by reducing the possibility that the voltage Vcc remains at 0.
This is not limited to the case where the image is viewed through 6a, but also applies when viewed through the second through hole 8326b or the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326b is a hole for allowing a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen onto the bottom plate portion 321 to pass through the bottom plate portion 32
Therefore, in this embodiment, the second through hole 8326 is formed to have a width of about 30 mm in the left-right direction and a width of about 2 mm in the normal direction of the bottom plate portion 321 so that the largest possible coin-shaped foreign object (e.g., a 500 yen coin) can be discharged.

Since the second through hole 8326b is positioned near the center of the left and right sides of the bottom plate portion 321, the coin-shaped foreign object can be easily removed even after it has slid downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321.

Since the second through hole 8326b is arranged on both the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, the second through hole 8326b can be used, for example, to discharge liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or the bottom plate portion 321 to the outside before it reaches the vibration device 5400.

The third through-hole 8326c has a central axis disposed along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20
3(a)), the coin-shaped foreign object that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 is formed as a through hole through which the coin-shaped foreign object can be removed while remaining in an upright position (attitude).

In other words, the longitudinal length of the third through hole 8326c needs to be formed to a size that is capable of expelling coin-shaped foreign objects when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321.In this embodiment, the longitudinal length of the third through hole 8326c is approximately 30 mm when viewed in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the left-right width is approximately 2 mm.

When removing a coin-shaped foreign object, the cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830 is opened.
By simply exposing the through holes 8326a to 8326c in a front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can
The cover 370 can be used to access the fastening portion 3 of the main body curved portion 371.
Since only parts 70a (see FIG. 91) are fastened to front frame 14 with screws inserted in the front-rear direction and hanging part 372 is fastened to the bottom plate in which recessed part 15a is formed with screws inserted in the up-down direction, covering cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with front frame 14 open (see FIG. 89). This makes it possible to keep the work time short.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, coin-shaped foreign objects that have entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operating device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operating device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operating device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that is opened outward to the right at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203(b)).
In all of the above-described embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit and receive signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the coin-shaped foreign object cannot be removed, the operation device 8300 can be easily removed from the front frame 14 by removing the screws fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. Therefore, if a replacement operation device 8300 that is normal is prepared, the operation device 8300 with the coin-shaped foreign object caught therein can be quickly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

As a result, even if a coin-shaped foreign object becomes lodged in the operating device 8300, preventing normal operation and causing the operation of the pachinko machine 10 to be stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be quickly resumed.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
Although a case has been described in which the board surface support device 600 does not receive a load from the front frame 14 when in the fixed state, the board surface support device 600 in the 14th embodiment is disposed in such a manner that, in the fixed state, it receives a load from the front frame 14 via the front-rear displacement member 2652 that is arranged so as to be able to abut against the front frame 14. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

204(a) and 204(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG.
204(a) illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and Fig. 204(b) illustrates a state in which the front frame 14 is closed relative to the inner frame 12. In Fig. 204(a), the shape of the inner frame 12 and in Fig. 204(b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are each simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

204(a) and 204(b), the inner frame 12 in this embodiment is different from the eighth embodiment in that it includes a load transmission device 2650. The load transmission device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 that is arranged to be vertically displaceable on the front side of a plate portion (a plate portion arranged on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 that is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12, and a vertical displacement member 2651.
and a locking portion 2653 that protrudes downward from the front-rear displacement member 2652.
a support portion 2654 fixed to the plate portion 611 a, which is a portion that sandwiches the front and rear displacement member 52 from above and below so as to be displaceable at two positions, the front and rear, and a biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that abuts against the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 and applies a biasing force to the front-rear displacement member 2652 toward the front side;
Equipped with.

The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state of contact with the torsion spring NBb in the fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state of separation. That is, in the lower position shown in Fig. 204(a), it is retracted from the torsion spring NBb, and in the upper position shown in Fig. 204(b) (a position displaced upward from the lower position), it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb, deforming the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 204(a), the position of the vertical displacement member 2651 is set at a position where there is a slight gap between the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb in the lower position.

The front-to-rear displacement member 2652 is configured to be displaceable between a forward position (see FIG. 204(a)) in which it is pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655, and a rear position (see FIG. 204(b)) in which it is pushed rearward by the front frame 14.

Here, an inclined surface 2652a that is inclined downwards toward the tip side is formed on the rear tip of the front-rear displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a is inclined downwards from a vertically lower position of the up-down displacement member 2651 when the front-rear displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position.
52 is disposed at the rear position, the inclined surface is continuously connected to a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651.

The inclined surface 2652a is disposed at the front position of the front-rear displacement member 2652.
The inclination angle and the formation range are set so that at the rear position of the front-rear displacement member 2652, the up-down displacement member 2651 is in the upper position.

With the above-described configuration, in this embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the up-down displacement member 2651 is positioned in an upper position, and the torsion spring NBb can be deformed to the side where the load is increased by an amount equivalent to its front-to-rear thickness.

This allows the load applied by the rear-side rotation claw member 640 to the game board 13 from the rear side to be increased, making it easier to maintain the game board 13 in contact with the hanging rear plate portion 621d of the front-side rotation claw member 620, and making it easier to determine the distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the rear of the front frame 14 (the rear of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14).
It is possible to easily define the thickness of the play area, and to stabilize the flow of the balls.

Here, the specifications required for the board surface support device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board surface support device 600 in this embodiment are the same, that is, to fix the game board 13. When fixing the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and fixes it by pressing it against the hanging back plate portion 621d.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is further compressed by closing the front frame 14, so that a spring with a lower elastic modulus can be used for the torsion spring NBb compared to the spring used in the eighth embodiment.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the worker from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, and the force required to fix the game board 13 to the board surface support device 600 can be reduced, so that the worker's freedom of choice and
Workability can be improved.

Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
To prevent fraudulent intrusion into the inside of the inverted cup portion 178, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are laid above the inverted cup portion 178 with a heated piano wire.
In the above description, a case has been described in which the fraud detection device 2280 detects the heat caused by the heated piano wire and aims to detect fraud at an early stage. However, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment is configured to detect the heat when the inverted cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire and to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from burning.

FIG. 205(a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment.
205(b) and 205(c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280.
In b), the shape memory spring 2288 is shown in a state where it is maintained in a contracted shape, and in FIG.
205(c) shows the state where the tamper-evident shape (the memorized shape) is restored by applying heat.
281 is viewed in cross section at the midpoint between the front and rear.

The fraud detection device 2280 is configured in a box shape with an opening on the back side and the bottom side, and has an inverted cup part 2
178, and a rear cover member 2282 attached from the rear side so as to cover the rear opening of the main body box portion 2281.
A space is formed between the rear cover member 2282 and the rear cover member 2282 .

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, and an inverted cup portion 217 is provided extending from the lower right corner.
a narrowed portion 2284 extending from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner; a protruding portion 2285 protruding upward from the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284; a first conductive portion 2286 accommodated in a recess recessed from the rear side in the left wall portion of the main body box portion 2281, one end protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281;
a second conductive portion 2287 which is accommodated in a recess formed in a right side wall portion of the housing 1 from the rear side, has one end protruding to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and is formed with a length capable of contacting an upper surface of the first conductive portion 2286; and a torsion spring SP15 which generates a biasing force pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286.
The shape memory spring 2288 is disposed on the upper surface of the narrowed portion 2284 , supported by the protruding portion 2285 , and below the second conductive portion 2287 .

The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. The first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part 2287 are each connected by a method such as soldering to a part protruding outward from the main body box part 2281, with one end of the separate wiring being connected to the other end of the wiring being connected to the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, when the first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part 2287 are in contact and conducting (see FIG. 205(b)), the contact between the first conductive part 2286 and the second conductive part 2287 is released (see FIG. 205(c)), and the conduction is broken,
The circuit is controlled so that an error signal is output when the continuity is interrupted.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, a loud alarm is output from the speaker 451 (see Figure 120) and the payout device 133 (see Figure 87) is stopped from paying out balls, etc., so that it is impossible to continue playing the game.

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in Fig. 205(a) to Fig. 205(c), a main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detection device 2280 covers the left and upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment, the formation location of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left compared to the eighth embodiment, and a gap capable of accommodating the extension portion 2283 is generated between the long cover member 173 and the inverted cup portion 2178 in this embodiment.

By having the extension portion 2283 fill the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of a heated piano wire, the piano wire can be prevented from penetrating through the long cover 173.

According to this configuration, the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and continues onward, being guided to the narrowed portion 2284 and then to the shape memory spring 2288 that is arranged in the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284.

The shape memory spring 2288 is made of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has the property of maintaining a deformed shape at low temperatures and returning to a previously memorized shape when heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher.
The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (approximately 80°) that is approximately the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see Figure 205 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, pushing up the second conductive part 2287, disconnecting the first conductive part 2286 from the second conductive part 2287, and outputting an error signal. Therefore, early detection of fraudulent activity is possible.

The extension part 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a that is vertically elongated and drilled in the front-rear direction in the rear cover member 2282, and protrudes to the front side. When the shape memory spring 2288 is in a tensioned state and returns to a low temperature state, the operator can deform the shape memory spring 2288 by pushing the extension part 2288a downward, and return it to the contracted state (see FIG. 205(b)). In other words, even after fraudulent activity is discovered, it can be used repeatedly to facilitate early detection of fraudulent activity.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
Although the light guide member 540 has a uniform shape, the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted to both sides, the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes recesses having different shapes in each region. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 206( a ) is a partial rear view of a right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, FIG. 206( b ) is a partial enlarged perspective view of a light guiding member 2540, which diagrammatically illustrates an upwardly facing concave portion 2543 b concaved in the light guiding member 2540 in a region CCVIb in FIG. 206( a ), and FIG. 206( c ) is a diagrammatically illustrates a downwardly facing concave portion 2543 c concaved in the light guiding member 2540 in a region CCVIc in FIG. Fig. 206(d) is a partial enlarged perspective view of the light guiding member 2540 which is a schematic representation of a downward concave portion 2543d concavely provided in the light guiding member 2540 in the region CCVId of Fig. 206(a), and Fig. 206(e) is a partial enlarged perspective view of the light guiding member 2540 which is a schematic representation of an upward concave portion 2543e concavely provided in the light guiding member 2540 in the region CCVIe of Fig. 206(a). Note that the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted in Fig. 206(a).

206(a), the light-guiding member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) disposed on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically in a straight line in accordance with the shape of the light-guiding member 2540.

On both sides of the light guide member 2540, concave portions are formed in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment. In this embodiment, however, the concave portions 254 are arranged in each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of 3 can be changed.

That is, with the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 as a reference, there is a region CCVIb arranged above and on the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVI arranged above and on the outer lens member 550 side.
The shape of concave portion 2543 is different between region CCVId arranged below and on the inner lens member 530 side, and region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

206(b), in the region CCVIb, an upwardly facing concave portion 2543b is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The upwardly facing concave portion 2543b has flat surfaces on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged) and curved surfaces on the upper side and the back side, forming the convex portion used for hot pressing.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the light incident on the upward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction.
543b refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

206(c), in the region CCVIc, a downwardly facing concave portion 2543c is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The downwardly facing concave portion 2543c has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged) and curved surfaces on the lower side and the back side, forming the convex portion used for hot pressing.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
The light incident on the downward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position.
543c refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

206(d), in the region CCVId, a downwardly facing concave portion 2543d is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The downwardly facing concave portion 2543d is formed in such a manner that flat surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged) and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side, and the convex portion used for hot pressing is formed in this position.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
The light incident on the downward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction at this position.
543d refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the outer lens member 550, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

206(e), in the region CCVIe, an upwardly facing concave portion 2543e is formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into eighths. The upwardly facing concave portion 2543e has flat surfaces on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side where the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is arranged) and curved surfaces on the lower side and the back side, forming the convex portion used for hot pressing.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
At this position, the light incident on the upward concave portion 2 is unlikely to be reflected in the left-right direction.
543e refracts light mainly at the curved portion and emits the light toward the inner lens member 530, but the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in an upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 are formed in the same shape as in the eighth embodiment (a conical shape with an inclination angle of 45° with respect to the bottom surface and a bottom diameter of about 1 mm).
The light emitted to the lens element 30 or the outer lens member 550 is only weakly refracted vertically and travels in an almost horizontal direction.

According to this embodiment, the above-mentioned configuration allows light to travel in a direction that converges it toward the inner lens member 530 side, and in a direction that diverges it toward the outer lens member 550 side, as shown in Fig. 206(a). That is, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in a flat plate shape, it is possible to provide a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540.
The effect of the light emission can be improved while suppressing the left and right width of 0.

Next, the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 207 to 281. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 15 is formed flat, but in the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400, thereby improving the portability of the front frame 10014 equipped with the lower tray unit 6400. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG.
is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in Fig. 207. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in Fig. 207, the upper side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the lower side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R,
F-B indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction, respectively, of the pachinko machine 10010.

As shown in FIG. 207 and FIG. 208, the pachinko machine 10010 includes an operation device 1030 in which the head swing device member 10310 is disposed in an upward position in FIG.
The front frame 10014 mainly comprises a lower tray unit 6400 that is positioned below the operating device 10300 and covers the underside of the front frame 10014, a side performance device 6700 that covers the left and right portions of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs light-emitting performances, and an upper performance device 6500 that covers the upper portion of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs light-emitting performances and sound performances.

As in the above-mentioned embodiments, the above-mentioned glass unit 16 is disposed in the area surrounded by the side performance device 6700 and the top performance device 6500, and a game area in which game balls flow down is configured on the back side of the glass unit 16. In order to avoid complicating the drawings, the state of the back side of the glass unit 16 is omitted in Fig. 207, and the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see Fig. 2) are omitted in Fig. 208, and the inside of the outer frame 11 (see Fig. 3) is visible from the opening in which the glass unit 16 is disposed.

Fig. 209 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. Note that Fig. 209 illustrates a view in a direction along the longitudinal direction of a lever member (e.g., lever member 10340 (see Fig. 80)) of the operating device 10300 (a view in a radial direction of the rotation axis of the lever member of the operating device 10300).

The operation device 10300 includes a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322, which are formed in a thin plate shape and have flexibility to be deformable. As shown in Fig. 209, the storage recess 17a is formed as a recess having a substantially symmetrical shape in which the degree of depression toward the back side increases toward the left-right center, and is disposed so that the left-right center of the storage recess 17a coincides with the left-right center of the operation device 10300.

The rear end portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodation recesses 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves toward the rear side as it approaches the left-right center. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the main frame (metal main body portion 10014a) of the front frame 10014 as it approaches the left-right center.

Therefore, at the left-right center position where the load transmission amount during operation of the operating device 10300 is likely to be large, by shortening the front-rear position from the metal main body portion 10014a to the fitting position,
By suppressing the vertical displacement of the fitting position, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the operating device 10300 in the vertical direction (load direction).

On the other hand, the amount of load transmitted during operation of the operation device 10300 is likely to be small at the left and right positions (
In the case of the fitting position (positions far from the center to the left and right), even if the front-rear distance from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position is long, the effect of suppressing the vertical displacement of the operating device 10300 is not hindered,
Furthermore, by positioning the mating position in this manner, a space can be formed between the mating position and the metal main body portion 10014a, thereby ensuring a wide area for placing the upper tray 17, frame button 22, etc.

FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10010. In FIG. 210, the outer frame 1
1, the front frame 10014 is shown opened toward the front side around the left end portion pivoted on the hinge 19.

The front frame 10014 has a rod-shaped portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-shaped portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. By removing the rod-shaped portion from the hinge 19, the front frame 1
The front frame 10014 can be separated from the inner frame 12. The newly described components are each disposed on the front frame 10014, and therefore the following description will focus on the front frame 10014.

FIG. 211 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG.
211 and 212 show a state in which the lower tray unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are removed from the front frame 10014.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a skeleton, and includes a metal main body portion 10014a that is integrally formed with the front door mounting bracket 58, and the lower tray unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a.
Both the lower tray unit 6400 and the operating device 10300 are configured with a fastening portion (female screw portion) that opens to the metal body portion 10014a side (rear side), and the metal body portion 10014a is provided with a through hole at a position corresponding to the fastening portion. A fastening member (male screw) is inserted into the through hole from the rear side of the metal body portion 10014a and screwed into the fastening portion to tighten it, thereby forming a lower tray unit 6400.
The operating device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014.

As shown in FIG. 211 and FIG. 212, the operation device 10300 is held in a manner sandwiched between the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400.
The lower tray unit 6400 holds the operating device 10300 from the upper rear of the front frame 10014, and the lower tray unit 6400 holds the operating device 10300 from the lower front of the operating device 10300. The configuration in which the operating device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described below in order.

FIG. 213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG.
213 and 214, the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower tray unit 6400 are omitted.
300 is disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a and is illustrated as viewed from the rear side, and to facilitate understanding, the assembly direction lines connecting the insertion holes 6801R, 6801L and their fastening points are illustrated with imaginary lines.

When the operating device 10300 is assembled to the front frame 10014 by fitting it from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De disposed below the inner case member 10330 is in contact with the front frame 10014.
The plate-shaped protrusion T10 projects from the front side of the holder 10 so as to ride up onto the upper surface of the plate-shaped protrusion T10.

A bottom member De is disposed below the operating device 10300 and fastened from below to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) formed to open toward the front side, and a recessed portion De2 that is open toward the opposite side (lower side) of the inner case member 10330 and the rear side.

The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the rear, and the plate-shaped protruding portion T
That is, the plate-shaped protrusion T10 is formed to a size that allows it to fit into the front frame 10014, and the engagement between the plate-shaped protrusion T10 and the recess De2 allows the operation device 10300 to be aligned with the front frame 10014. In addition, since the plate-shaped protrusion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the rigidity of the plate-shaped protrusion T10 allows the vertical position of the operation device 10300 to be maintained. Note that, in this case, the engagement means
Regardless of the presence or absence of a gap, it is sufficient that the bottom member De can be aligned with the plate-shaped protrusion T10.

At the tip of the plate-shaped protrusion T10, a pair of cylindrical protrusions are formed on the left and right sides, which protrude toward the front side in the shape of a thin cylinder, and a female screw hole is formed at the intermediate position of the pair of cylindrical protrusions so that a fastening screw can be screwed in.

The pair of cylindrical protrusions are formed for the purpose of aligning the plate-shaped protrusion T10 and the bottom member De by being inserted into a recess formed in the corresponding wall portion (front side wall portion) of the recessed portion De2, and the fastening screw screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into an insertion hole drilled at the corresponding position of the recessed portion De2, and the plate-shaped protrusion T10 and the bottom member De are fastened together by tightening this fastening screw.

As described above, the recessed portion De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De is placed on the plate-shaped protruding portion T10, while the opposite front half (see FIG. 215(a)) is disposed above the flat plate-shaped portion 6426a of the plate-shaped support portion 6426. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is disposed above the resin member 6427.
The resin member 6427 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the flat plate-like portion 6426 a in the vertical direction with the resin member 6427 therebetween.

In this case, the term "contactable" does not limit the situation. For example, the operating device 10300 may be in contact with the resin member 6427 under its own weight, or the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De may be separated from each other under normal circumstances, but may come into contact with each other when the operating device 10300 is displaced downward due to a load being applied to the operating device 10300 or a vibration effect being performed.

After the operation device 10300 is fitted into the front frame 10014, the fastening screws are inserted into the front frame 10014 from the rear side and then fastened, so that the operation device 10300 is fixed to the front frame 1
It is fixed at 0014.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operating device 10300 has a plurality of fastening portions 10333 (three in this embodiment) formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in.
and a metal plate portion 10334 which is a metal plate covering one of the above-mentioned components, has an insertion hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted, and can receive a compressive force when fastened.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the edge of an insertion hole H10a that is drilled in the metal main body 10014a with a diameter that allows a fastening screw to be inserted therethrough. A hard resin intermediate plate is disposed on the front side of the metal main body 10014a, and through holes are drilled in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 can come into contact with the metal main body 10014a through the through holes.

Here, the through hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 in which the metal plate portion 10334 is arranged
The through hole of the intermediate plate is made larger around the fastening portion 10333 than the other insertion holes H10a. The shape of this through hole is designed to have a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 that covers the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

As a result, by fastening and fixing the operating device 10300 to the front frame 10014,
The metal plate portion 10334 can be brought into close contact with the metal main body portion 10014a. In other words, the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main body portion 10014a can be electrically connected to each other, so that the metal plate portion 10334 can have the same function as a so-called earth wire. This can ensure the safety of the player who operates the operation device 10300.

In addition, by disposing the metal plate portion 10334 between the metal body portion 1001 and the metal plate portion 10334, the metal plate portion 10334 can have a function as a washer.
4a.

The shape of the metal plate portion 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, and various forms are exemplified. For example, instead of forming a through hole, a pair of claws may be provided that straddle the screw hole of the fastening portion 10333. In addition, if the claws are formed with a positional shift in the front and rear, they can have the function of a spring washer, and the fastening strength can be increased.

The operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 through an insertion hole 6801R,
With the exception of the 6801L, all fastening points are concentrated on the rear side. By concentrating the points required for fastening on the rear side, the design freedom on the front side can be improved, leading to improved design.

On the other hand, simply fastening the rear side is problematic because the operating device 10300 is likely to be displaced downward when a sinking (downward) load is applied to the front side of the operating device 10300. Therefore, in this embodiment, a structure is adopted that suppresses sinking displacement of the front side of the operating device 10300 while concentrating the fastening points on the rear side. This will be described in order below.

First, the function of the fitting recess De1 will be described. The fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side of the operation device 10300 fits into the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the vertical movement of the front side of the operation device 10300 is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and sinking displacement is suppressed.

Next, the operation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in Figs. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are as follows.
The swing operation member 10310 has a plate-like protruding portion on the rear edge of its upper half, which is arranged on the rear side.

That is, the left front cover 10321 includes a plate-like protruding portion 10321c that protrudes in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half portion, and a plurality of partial protruding portions 10321c that further protrude from the plate-like protruding portion 10321c.
21d.

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-like protruding portion 10322c that protrudes in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half.
There is no portion corresponding to 1d, and the periphery of plate-like protruding portion 10322c can be designed as desired.

The plate-like protruding portions 10321c, 10322c and the partial protruding portion 10321d are disposed in the accommodation recess 17.
a. Here, the receiving recess 17 in this embodiment is configured as a part that is inserted and fitted into the receiving recess 17.
The configuration of a will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 , the accommodating recess 17a has lower edge overhanging portions 10017b whose lower edges overhang toward the front side with a substantially equal overhang width across the left and right sides of the accommodating recess 17a, and lower edge overhanging portions 10017b which overhang toward the front side at positions on both the left and right sides of the accommodating recess 17a below the lower edge overhanging portions 10017b with an interval slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c, 10322c.
A plurality of opposed overhanging portions 10017b are disposed opposite to the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and form a groove between the opposed overhanging portions 10017b.
0017c, a number of positioning holes 10017d drilled in the front-to-rear direction as long holes at the surface position of the upper edge and the lower edge protrusion 10017b, and an escape hole 10017e drilled in the front-to-rear direction at a position aligned horizontally with the opposing protrusion 10017c on the right side.

When the operating device 10300 is assembled into the accommodation recess 17a, the plate-shaped protruding portion 10321
c, 10322c are inserted into the groove between the lower edge extension portion 10017b and the opposing extension portion 10017c, and the multiple partial extension portions 10321d are inserted into the multiple positioning holes 10017d, respectively, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the accommodating recess 17a.

In this case, the plate-like protruding parts 10321c and 10322c are the lower edge protruding parts 10017b.
By fitting into the groove between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 and the opposing protrusion 10017c, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction.

In addition, by inserting (fitting) the multiple partial protrusions 10321d into the multiple positioning holes 10017d, respectively, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily aligned with the accommodating recess 17a, and displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the up, down, left and right directions can be prevented.

Furthermore, the storage recess 17a is formed in an arch shape that is open on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are stored inside the arch with their faces abutting against each other.
The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction or toward the rear side.

With this configuration, when the swing operation member 10310 of the operating device 10300 is in an upward position and a player applies a backward load to the swing operation member 10310, the positional shift of the operating device 10300 can be suppressed (restoring it to its original position quickly).

Here, when a player operates the swing operation member 10310, the player will mainly operate it with his/her left hand, and in a typical gaming posture (facing the pachinko machine 10010), when operating the operation device 10300 located in the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 10010, the left hand will be extended diagonally forward and to the right, so that the load during operation rarely does not have a left-right component.

Therefore, since a load is applied to the swing operation member 10310 in the left-right direction at the same time as a load is applied in the rearward direction, there is a risk that the operation device 10300 will shift in position backward and left-right.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the operating device 10300 is surrounded by the arch-shaped portion of the accommodation recess 17a, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are disposed therebetween. Therefore, the restoring force of the deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 that may occur when the operating device 10300 is misaligned is the same as that of the operating device 10300 in the left-right direction and the front-back direction.
This allows the operation device 10300 to quickly return to its original position even if the operation device 10300 is displaced.

From the above configurations, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 103
In other words, the displacement of the operating device 10 relative to the accommodation recess 17a can be suppressed.
The displacement of 300 can be suppressed.

The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which a fixing assembly part 6802 (described later) of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixing assembly part 6802 can be disposed at a position protruding outward from the plate-shaped protruding part 10321c.

Next, the operation device 10300 and its surroundings will be described.
The internal structure of the 0 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 215(a), FIG. 215(b), and FIG. 216(a).
) and FIG. 216(b) are the operation device 1 on the CCXVa-CCXVa line in FIG. 207.
A partial cross-sectional view of 0300.

FIG. 215(a) shows a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is disposed in an upward position (initial position in this embodiment), and FIG. 215(b), FIG. 216(a) and FIG.
In b), the swing operation member 10310 is in a downward position (a depressed position in this embodiment).
4 shows the state in which the laser beam is arranged in the laser beam position.

215(a) and 215(b), in the operating device 10300, a lever member 10340, which supports a swing operation member 10310 with a pivot support rod 10363, is pivotally supported by a lever support shaft 10331d1 fixed to an inner case member 10330. Therefore, the swing operation member 10310 operable by a player is displaceable in a manner in which a displacement accompanying the movement of the pivot support rod 10363 arranged on an arc trajectory centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1 and a displacement in the rotational direction centered on the pivot support rod 10363 are combined, and the displacement is caused by the operation of the player.

That is, by grasping the swivel operating member 10310 positioned in the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swivel operating member 10310 can be pushed in such a manner that it undergoes a rotational displacement around the pivot rod 10363 (pushing operation).

In addition, by grasping the swivel operating member 10310 which is positioned in an upward position and applying a load downward toward the front, the swivel operating member 10310 can be pushed down in a manner of rotational displacement centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1 (push-down operation).

In addition, when the swing operation member 10310 is in the downward position, the posture correction device 1
The action of θ312 (the action of applying a load to the swing operation member 10310 in a direction away from the wall member 10322b) causes the swing operation member 10310 to assume a posture in which it is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 (a backward rotation posture, a posture rotated backward by an angle θ17y from the initial position with respect to the lever member 10340). Therefore, since the angle of change in posture of the swing operation member 10310 is small compared to the rotation angle of the lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress a change in the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of the lever member 10340.

In addition, when the swing operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position,
When the lens member 10317 supported displaceably on the lens holder 310 is pushed (pushed), the swing operation member 10310 is rotated around the pivot rod 10363 by the load applied during the operation, and is displaced in a manner of falling forward, and the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 is changed to the direction Y17c.
(See FIG. 216(b)).

In this manner, in this embodiment, the swing operation member 10310 is configured to be capable of applying loads for operation from a plurality of directions.
The manner of displacement of the can also be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotated around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor. As a result, even if the swing operation member 10310 is pushed down and placed in a downward position, the swing operation member 10310 can be returned to an upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

A vibration device 10366 consisting of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibration device 10366 is configured to be transmitted to the lens member 10317 by direct or indirect contact.

The vibration device 10366 is a device that uses electromagnetic force to move a pair of members toward and away from each other in a linear direction, and is a bobbin member (
a pressing member (a member arranged on the side of the lens member 10317) in which a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than the inner circumferential surface of the bobbin member and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer circumferential surface of the bobbin member are arranged coaxially and connected by a disk-shaped plate;
The pressing member has an inner cylinder formed of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction.

The vibration device 10366 is configured to be capable of generating linear vibration along a direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the pivot rod 10363. In addition, in this embodiment, the vibration device 10366 is configured so that the direction Y17a coincides with the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

This makes it possible to make maximum use of the vibration energy of the vibration device 10366 to vibrate (displace) the lens member 10317, thereby improving the dramatic effect produced by the vibration of the vibration device 10366.

Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. Fig. 217 is a front perspective view of the operating device 10300, and Fig. 218 is a rear perspective view of the operating device 10300.

As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are disposed behind the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300.
1 and the right front cover 10322 are at the outer end (the end opposite to the swing operation member 10310)
is curved, and the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is located on the side of the swing operation member 10310. This makes it possible to secure a large space around the swing operation member 10310, thereby securing the range of motion of the swing operation member 10310 and also securing space for the player to insert his/her fingers to grip the swing operation member 10310.

In addition, the curve of the end portion is configured in a continuous manner so as to surround the swing operation member 10310,
This not only improves the design, but also allows the deformation of the curved portion to occur in parts over the entire surface, thereby increasing the allowable range of deformation of the curved portion.

As shown in FIG. 217 and FIG. 218, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322
The left and right front covers 10321 and 10322 are fixed to the inner case member 10330 by the fastening screws. ...
2.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6 disposed at both left and right ends.
The left and right ends are the farthest from the load applied to the operating device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction along the plane that passes through the center in the left-right direction and is perpendicular to the left-right direction), and the load is not easily transmitted to the left and right ends.
, 6801L and fastened to the accommodating recess 17a.

The fixing assembly part 6802 is formed on the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. 218, the fixing assembly part 6802 is formed at the boundary surface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.
321 and the center in the left-right direction of the right front cover 10322 (the plate-shaped protruding portion 10321c, 10322
c) located at the rearmost position.
The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that can be disassembled at the left-right center, and the left front cover 10321 is formed beyond the left-right center to the right, while the right front cover 10322 remains in a position to the right of the left-right center. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed over a wider area than the right front cover 10322.

In this embodiment, the rear boundary between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is offset from the center in the left-right direction, so that alignment with the accommodating recess 17a can be completed by inserting one of the components (in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321) into the center of the accommodating recess 17a (the part located closest to the rear), making assembly easier than when alignment is performed with both components.

In addition, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly part 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when the operating device 10300 is operated. Here, the rear side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is adjacent to the swing operation member 10310 that is operated by the player (especially in the upward position ( FIG. 21 )).
8) are located adjacent to each other, there is a risk that the fastening screw may loosen due to the transmission of the load during operation of the operation device 10300. In contrast, in this embodiment, the fixed assembly part 6802 is disposed shifted to the left or right from the left-right center where the load during operation is maximum, so that the transmitted load can be reduced compared to the load during operation, and as a result, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly part 6802 can be suppressed.

In this way, the fixed assembly part 6802 is shifted left and right from the left and right center, and the left front cover 1032
By similarly shifting the boundary between the right front cover 10322 and the right front cover 10323, the efficiency of assembly can be improved and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws can be made less likely.

In addition, both the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fixed to the fixed assembly part 680.
2, the fixing assembly 680 is not directly fastened to the inner case member 10330.
In No. 2, the fastening screws inserted through the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the left front cover 10321.

However, the fixing assembly part 6802 is fixed to the inner case member 10330.
220), and the upper plate portion is sandwiched between the fixing assembly portion 6802 from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330 more easily than when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330.
This allows the number of fastening points formed in the 0322 to be reduced.

This makes it possible to utilize the flexure of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. That is, if many fastening points are provided on the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the rigidity of the fastening screws may make it difficult for the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to flex, and there is a risk that they may become easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to make the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 easier to flex while maintaining the fastening points, the thickness of the plates could be reduced; however, in this case, there is a risk that durability will be reduced or that it will lead to fraudulent activity.

In contrast to this, by reducing the number of fastening points as in the present embodiment, it becomes possible to sufficiently flex the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screws. This makes it possible to utilize the flexure of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 without excessively thinning the plate thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operating device 10300, and FIG.
219 and 222 are exploded rear perspective views of the operating device 10300.
As shown in FIG. 10, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are a left cover member 103
23 and the right cover member 10324 are integrally configured so as to be disassembled into left and right portions.

As shown in FIG. 221 and FIG. 222, the left front cover 10321 is a left cover member 10
The right front cover 10322 is fastened to the right cover member 10324 at one point (adjustment elongated holes 10323a, 10324a) in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to each other, the left front cover 10321 is in contact with the left cover member 10323.
Since the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the right cover member 10324, it is possible to easily adjust the assembly positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. This will be described below.

The operating device 10300 comprises a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 which are arranged on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in a manner that hides the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 and whose rear sides are formed in a shape that follows the curved surfaces of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215), and a left cover member 10323 and a right cover member 10324 which are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 from the left and right directions.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are provided at their outer upper ends with adjustment slots 10323a, 10324a, respectively, which are drilled in the front-rear direction and extend elongated in the left-right direction.

The adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively. By making them long in the left-right direction, even if the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 vary due to molding variations or the like, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted to fit the swing operation member 10310.
2 can be easily adjusted in the left-right direction.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have adjustment slots 10323a and 10323b.
4a in the front-rear direction, and also fastened in the left-right direction at end faces opposing each other in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219 , the right front cover 10322 includes a fitting recess 10322a recessed to the right from an end face of the right front cover 10322 that abuts against the left front cover 10321, and a wall member 10322b that is attached to the fitting recess 10322a in a manner that prevents it from coming off in the front-rear direction.
3, the wall member 10322b is held inside the fitting recess 10322a by its leftward movement being stopped by the end face of the left front cover 10321.

With this configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the right front cover 10322
The wall member 10322b can be replaced by simply removing the
This is a portion that is repeatedly subjected to a load from the attitude correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215). Therefore, the maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, the procedure for assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 103
22 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 (FIG. 2
21 and 222 to FIG. 219 and 220), the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, whereby the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are aligned,
Thereafter, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed.

Here, if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 cannot move relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, when correcting the positional deviation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, the fastening of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330 is loosened, and the left cover member 1032
3 or the right cover member 10324 may need to be shifted to make corrections.

In anticipation of this, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not fully fastened to the inner case member 10330, but are rather loosely fastened and fixed to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.
When determining the position of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10322, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed (downstream of the assembly procedure), and then the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed (downstream of the assembly procedure).
This would require a return to the work procedure of fastening and fixing casing 24 to inner case member 10330 (upstream of the assembly procedure), making the work itself more complicated, which is not desirable in terms of simplifying the work.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are movable relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, so that the positions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be adjusted after the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. This simplifies the assembly work.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 each include a shielding plate portion 6803L, 6803R whose front edge is disposed opposite to the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344. The shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R have the role of closing the gap between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), and are designed to have a small gap between the guide portion 10344a and the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R (in this embodiment, a clearance of 0.3 mm is designed) as a countermeasure against fraudulent acts such as inserting a piano wire into the gap to enter the inside of the pachinko machine 10010 or pranks such as pouring liquid into the gap.

On the other hand, if the positional relationship between the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R and the guide part 10344a becomes misaligned and the gap is blocked due to the influence of load (shock) during operation, the guide part 10344a and the shielding plate parts 6803L, 6803R may rub against each other during operation of the operation device 10300, causing resin shavings to be generated. The resin shavings have little effect when there is only a small amount of them, but if a large amount of them clogs the detection groove of a light-transmitting type switch, such as a so-called photocoupler type, the shavings may block light and cause false detection. Therefore, there is a concern that the freedom of selection of the switch that can be adopted may be limited.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1
Since the fixed assembly part 6802 serving as the fastening point of 0322 is positioned at a position away from the left and right center position (the position where the load during operation and the load during movement are maximum), it is possible to reduce the impact and load transmitted to the fastening point, and it is possible to make it difficult for the fastening screw to loosen.

This makes it possible to prevent the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R and the guide portion 10344a from shifting, prevents the generation of resin shavings, and suppresses erroneous detection, so in this embodiment, a photocoupler type detection switch FC is arranged on the front side of the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R.

The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting the pushing operation of the swing operation member 10310 in the backward rotation direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

When the swing operation member 10310 is pushed in the backward direction, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and blocks the detection light, so it can be determined that a push-in operation has been performed. In this embodiment, no load is applied to either the detection switch FC or the metal plate MB, so durability can be improved compared to when a load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R.
and lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R which are continuously formed as fan-shaped plate portions in a front view on the lower side of the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R.

The curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R have rear surfaces formed as curved surfaces (i.e., arc shapes with a central angle of approximately 90 degrees centered on the lever support shaft 10331d1 (see FIG. 215)) that can come into surface contact with the curved portions of the upper front sides of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324.

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are protruding interference portions 68
The protruding interference portion 6805a is provided on the left cover member 13331 in the left-right direction.
The left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 are disposed slightly inward from the inner edge portion Rm1 of the right cover member 13332, and are formed to protrude toward the rear side beyond the front surfaces of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-to-rear direction.

As a result, the protruding interference portion 6805a is disposed between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1032
When the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled together (see FIG. 220), the inner edge Rm1 restricts the left and right outward displacement of the left and right front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. This prevents the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from displacing outward in the left and right direction, thereby preventing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from disassembling in a manner such that they move away from each other.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
and connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R which connect the outer peripheries of the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R, respectively, and which extend outward when viewed from the front, and whose tips are curved toward the front side.

The left front cover 10321 is provided with a plurality of fastening parts 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L arranged vertically at the right end part thereof, and the fastening screws are formed so that the fastening screws can be screwed in.
22 is a through hole 68 that is provided vertically on the left end portion and through which a fastening screw can be inserted.
Equipped with 02R, 6807R, and 6808R.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to each other by a plurality of fastening parts and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (the direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). This makes it possible to distribute the load and impact accompanying the operation of the operation device 10300 to each fastening part, and makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screws.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress misalignment at the gap between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is possible to prevent misalignment from occurring at the gap between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.
The lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R and the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are easily visible when viewed from the front.
06R, see FIG. 207) deterioration of the performance. These fastening parts and insertion holes each have a different role. They will be explained in order below.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner that they sandwich the insertion hole H23a drilled in the left-right direction in the portion projecting from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and are fixed by fastening screws to sandwich the inner case member 10330. Note that this is not a so-called "co-fastening" manner, but is fastened and fixed in such a manner that the tip of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L abuts against the left surface of the plate portion in which the insertion hole 6802R is formed. In other words, this is a manner in which no compressive load is generated in the portion in which the insertion hole H23a is drilled by fastening.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even if the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load applied to the operating device 10300 during operation, the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be operated independently within the above-mentioned gap range. Therefore, when a minute displacement occurs in the inner case member 10330, the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be moved independently within the above-mentioned gap range.
It is possible to prevent 802 from being displaced in the same manner.

The length of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened so that a compressive load is applied to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed when fastening. In this case, the restoring force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed increases the fastening force, so that the fastening force of the fixed assembly portion 6
Loosening of the fastening screw at 802 can be avoided.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw is screwed, which is inserted into an insertion hole H23b drilled in the left-right direction in a portion that protrudes toward the front side of the inner case member 10330. By screwing in this fastening screw, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. Note that in this embodiment, the only place where only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed is the fastening point by the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw is inserted to be fastened to a fastening portion T23a formed in a portion of the inner case member 10330 that is capable of being screwed in along the left-right direction in a portion that protrudes toward the front side of the inner case member 10330.
In this embodiment, the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened to each other only at the fastening portion T23b and the insertion hole 6807.
Only the fastening points are made by R.

The fastening portions 6808L and the through holes 6808R are portions that are directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the through holes 6808R into the fastening portions 6808L. Note that, in this embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are only fastened and fixed at the fastening points by the fastening portions 6808L and the through holes 6808R.

In this manner, in this embodiment, fastening portions and insertion holes are formed at a plurality of locations along the direction in which the opposing portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are formed.
The combinations of objects to be fastened are different. This makes it unnecessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at once when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, and therefore makes the assembling work easier. The assembling procedure will be described below.

First, by attaching either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330 and fastening it at one point, it is possible to prevent either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 from coming off the inner case member 10330.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10321 is fastened by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b.
321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330, and if the right front cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330 by fastening the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330 in a manner that the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R.

Next, the other of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is attached to the inner case member 10
330 and fastened at one location in the same manner, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be configured to be independently fastened to the inner case member 10330.

After this, although there is no particular order, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are attached to the inner case member 10 by screwing in and fastening the fastening screws in the fixing assembly portion 6802.
330. In addition, the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R
By screwing in and fastening the fastening screws, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened to each other.

In this way, by forming points for fastening the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to each other, the number of fastening points can be reduced compared to when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled only by fastening them to the inner case member 10330.

In this embodiment, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from right to left when fastening the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. Therefore, the efficiency of the fastening work can be improved compared to a case where the fastening screws are inserted in both left and right directions.

The fastening screws fixed to the fastening parts 6802L, 6807L, and 6808L are screwed in in the same direction, ie, in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.
Since the operation direction of each operation part is a direction along a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the same as that of the operation device 103.
The direction perpendicular to the operation direction of each operation unit of the operation device 10300 is perpendicular to the operation direction of the operation unit of the operation device 10300. In other words, when a load or impact during operation occurs along the operation direction, a component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the fastening screw from becoming loose due to the load or impact during operation of the operation device 10300.

In this embodiment, the operating device 10300 includes a plurality of operating parts (parts that operate by operation. For example, a swing operation member 10310, a lens member 10317, a lever member 103
40, etc.), however, all of the operating parts are designed to operate in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, so the screwing direction of the fastening screws is the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, if the operating part does not operate on a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, if there is an operating part that operates by pushing diagonally to the left and right), the direction found as the balance (average) of the operating directions of each operating part (for example, an intermediate angle direction) may be set as the fastening direction, or the fastening direction may be set for operating parts that receive operation instructions frequently (ignoring operating parts that receive operation instructions only rarely).

Fig. 223(a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and Fig. 223(b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in Fig. 223(a) and Fig. 223(b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 contact each other across multiple surfaces arranged opposite to each other, except for a portion where a gap for arranging the lever member 10340 (see Fig. 220) is formed between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, and a portion where the fitting recess 10322a is formed.

At the contact portion, on the side not visible to the player, a plate-like portion extends rightward from the left front cover 10321. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending rightward along its lower surface (see FIG. 223(a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported from below by the lower overlapping portion 6803La,
68. The shielding plate portion 6803R is restricted from being displaced downward relative to the shielding plate portion 6803L. This makes it possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and to suppress the passage of liquid between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

In this embodiment, an inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 218) is disposed below the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and a lever member 10340 whose rear side portion is housed therein is disposed below the inner case member 10330.
It is also possible to prevent liquid from coming into contact with the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340, the transmission mechanism such as cams and gears that transmit the driving force of the drive motor, and the electrical system (substrate, etc.) that drives the drive motor.

In addition, while the gap between the shielding plates 6803R, 6803L is formed to the right of the left-right center of the swing operation member 10310, the gap (joining surface) between the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 is located on the same plane as the left-right center of the swing operation member 10310. Therefore, even if liquid passes between the shielding plates 6803R, 6803L, the liquid can be prevented from immediately reaching the gap between the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340 is disposed to the left of the center of the inner case member 10330 (the inner case member 10
330 to the left, see FIG. 218), shielding plate portions 6803R, 6803L
Even if the area below the inner case member 10330 gets wet, the liquid that wets that area can be absorbed by the inner case member 10330.
Since the water can flow downward along the right outer surface of the drive motor, it is possible to prevent the drive motor from getting wet.

Also, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb extending rightward along the rear surface below the fitting recess 10322a. The rear overlapping portion 6805Lb supports the lower plate portion 6805R from behind, restricting the lower plate portion 6805R from displacing rearward relative to the lower plate portion 6805L. This makes it possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and to suppress the passage of liquid between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed under the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-shaped support portion 6426 (
232 and 234), if a large amount of liquid continues to pass through, it may pass between the main body 6411 of the covering base member 6410 and the main body box portion 6421 of the lower plate forming member 6420, and flow toward the through hole 6412 or flow along the recessed shape portion 6414.
If liquid flows downward from 412, the liquid may flow downward from the underside of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, potentially splashing onto the player or wetting the treasure chest.

In this embodiment, as described below, the through hole 6412 is sandwiched between the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430, so that it is sandwiched without any gaps, making it easier to prevent liquid from passing through. However, by preventing liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R, 6805L as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the possibility of liquid splashing on a player or wetting the coin box, thereby making it possible to configure a pachinko machine 10010 that allows players to play comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 223(a) and FIG. 223(b), the shielding plate portions 6803L, 6803R,
The curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R include streak portions D23 formed in a streak-like manner in a manner that the streak portions D23 are extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. Due to the manner in which the streak portions D23 are formed, the streak portions D23 are visually recognized as recesses on the front surface and as protrusions on the back surface.

The striated portion D23 is made up of the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
It also serves as a part for adjusting the rigidity of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R.
Compared to forming the curved plate as a simple thin plate, the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the streak portion D23 is maintained (or decreased), while the rigidity in the direction along which the streak portion D23 is formed is improved (anisotropy). This will be described using the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as examples.

The curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R are disposed between the lever member 10340 and the storage recess 17a (see FIG. 213) and serve to fill the gap. Here, the operating device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be slightly displaceable downward due to load or impact during operation in order to prevent excessive reaction force from being returned to the player during operation, while the storage recess 17a is configured to be immovable in order to keep the arrangement of the upper tray 17 unchanged.

That is, there is a risk of a gap being generated between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a when the operating device 10300 is operated. In this embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R are extended (elastically deformed, bent) in the vertical direction, thereby making it possible to accommodate changes in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the accommodating recess 17a and prevent the generation of a gap.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rib-like portion D23 is formed along the vertical direction (the direction in which the load during operation is mainly directed) in which the curved plate portions 6804L, 6804R deform, and thus the resistance to deformation in the vertical direction is increased (rigidity is increased), so that vibrations and excessive deformation during shape recovery can be suppressed. Thus, the design of the rib-like portion D23 in this embodiment is performed with the objective of taking measures against problems that may occur during operation of the operating device 10300.

Since the stripe-like portion D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front,
When a downward load is applied to the center, both the left and right sides resist the upward load (pulling force is generated). In other words, even if a downward load is applied during the operation of the operating device 10300 and a displacement occurs, the displacement can be quickly returned to its original state.

On the other hand, even if a load occurs in a direction perpendicular to the striated portion D23, an allowable deformation occurs based on the flexibility of the resin, and the load transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 located downstream can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R include end streak portions D24 formed in a streak-like manner in a manner that the end streak portions D24 are pushed out from the front surface side to the back surface side. Due to the manner in which the streak portions D24 are formed, the end streak portions D24 are visually recognized as recesses on the front surface and as protrusions on the back surface.

The end muscle portion D24 mainly comprises left and right muscle portions D24a formed on the left and right sides, and a central muscle portion D24b formed on the center side, each of which is formed as a measure against loads in different directions.

The left and right muscle parts D24a are muscle parts arranged above the fastening part 6807L (the uppermost part of the fastening parts on the front side), and are formed in a shape that slopes downward toward the rear side. This downward slope corresponds to the direction of load, such as the operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). In other words, the left and right muscle parts D24a are
By increasing the rigidity of 806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a, the resistance to the operating load can be increased.

The inclination angles of the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed so that the angles of those disposed on the left and right sides with respect to the front-rear direction are gradually larger than those disposed on the left and right central sides.
The stripes extend in multiple directions, thereby improving the resistance to loads imposed when the lens member 10317 is operated, regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310.

The width of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is
The ones arranged on the left and right sides are shorter than those arranged on the left and right center sides. That is, the width is shorter on the side (left and right) where the inclination with respect to the front-rear direction corresponds to a larger force, so that the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved parts 6806L, 6806R is smaller, and the resistance force can be increased. This makes it possible to improve the resistance force against the load in the direction with a larger inclination with respect to the front-rear direction, which is the direction in which the load during operation is likely to be large (the direction in which the hand is swung down).

On the other hand, the central muscle portion D24b is a muscle portion that is arranged below the same position as the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost of the fastening points on the front side), and is formed in a shape that is inclined upward toward the rear side. This upward inclination is caused by the inner case member 10330 of the operating device 10300.
This corresponds to the direction of the load when the unit falls forward.

That is, the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R is increased by the central reinforcement portion D24b.
By improving it in the direction of 24b, it is possible to improve the resistance to forward displacement of the operating device 10300 (the inner case member 10330 thereof) caused by the load applied when tilting the lever member 10340 about the rotation axis thereof.

In addition, the central muscle portion D24b is formed with one in the center and three on each side, for a total of seven, and the left and right central muscle portions D24b are inclined toward the left and right center as they approach the rear side. As a result, when the operating device 10300 (the inner case member 10330 thereof) is displaced forward by the load generated when tilting the lever member 10340 about its rotation axis, even if a displacement in the left and right direction also occurs, the resistance force against the displacement (resistance force in the left and right direction) can be improved.

The central muscle portion D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscle portions D24a. As a result, the degree of bending in the left-right direction (deformation expanding and contracting along the left-right direction) is greater than the degree of bending in the up-down direction (deformation expanding and contracting along the up-down direction), particularly in the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower tray unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212 ) and the lower edge of the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R is pushed down by the V-shaped design member 6450 (when the position of the lower edge is displaced downward, the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are
is deformed), the upper and lower middle portions and upper edge portions of the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R bend in the left-right direction, thereby dissipating the load (stress) applied to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (avoiding stress concentration).

Even when the plate-like protruding portions 10321c, 10322c formed continuously from the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R are supported between the lower edge protruding portion 10017b and the opposing protruding portion 10017c so as to be surrounded from the rear side to the left and right front sides (see FIGS. 213 and 214). Since the plate-like protruding portions 10321c, 10322c are formed so as to be longer in the front-rear direction toward the left and right outer sides, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1032
This can make it difficult for a gap to occur between the housing 2 and the accommodating recess 17a.

In addition, by making the ease of bending of the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R different depending on the direction, the ease with which the vibration of the vibration device 10366 of the operating device 10300 or the load generated by operating the operating device 10300 is transmitted to the downstream side (V-shaped design member 6450, see Figure 232) can be changed depending on the direction of the vibration or load.

That is, while vertical vibrations and operational loads can be easily transmitted to the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and lower tray 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, horizontal vibrations and operational loads (such as the load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the oscillating operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower tray 50 to the upper tray 17) can be made difficult to transmit to the operating handle 51 and lower tray 50. This prevents the player from unintentionally hitting the oscillating operation member 10
Even when a load is applied to 310, vibrations or loads are prevented from being transmitted to the operating handle 51 or the lower tray 50, which would cause a player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, on the left and right outer sides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are provided.
6R is formed continuously, and a plate-like protruding portion 10321c is formed on the upper edge of the
10322c is inserted between the lower edge extension portion 10017b and the opposing extension portion 10017c which are elongated in the left-right direction (see FIG. 214).

Here, when comparing the shape of the plate-like protruding parts 10321c, 10322c with the shape of the lower edge protruding part 10017b and the opposing protruding part 10017c, if the vicinity of the left and right ends is misaligned in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like (for example, if the front side upper end parts of the connecting curved parts 6806L, 6806R protrude from the front side of the accommodation recess 17a), the plate-like protruding parts 10321c, 10322
It is preferable to deform the part c so that the curvature is gentler (the left and right ends are displaced toward the rear side) so that molding errors can be accommodated.

In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the streaks D23 are formed on the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R along the top and bottom, the rigidity of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R in the left-right direction is made lower than the rigidity in the up-down direction.
When the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed toward the side where the curvature becomes gentler, the deformation of the plate-like protruding portions 10321c and 10322c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
The deformation range of 0321c and 10322c can be increased, and therefore the size of the molding error that can be accommodated can be increased.

In this way, by not improving (weakening) the rigidity in the direction perpendicular to the formation direction (left-right direction), the striated portion D23 can address problems that may arise when assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

For these reasons, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are secured to each other by the rib-like portion D23.
This can address both problems that may occur when assembling 322 (the same as when assembling the operation device 10300, see FIG. 213) and problems that may occur when operating the operation device 10300.

Returning to FIG. 212 , in this embodiment, the metal main body 1001 of the front frame 10014 is
A flat plate portion (ball guide opening 5) is provided on the left lower front portion of the metal body portion 10014a.
A rear covering portion 10014b made of a resin material is provided in such a manner that it includes a plate-shaped portion having a width of 3 (see FIG. 214) formed thereon, and a plate-shaped upper plate portion extending toward the front side so as to be bent at an upper end portion configured in such a manner that it slopes downward toward the right within the upper portion of the planar plate portion. That is, the rear covering portion 10014b is formed so that its cross section in a plane perpendicular to the straight line along the arrow L-R is substantially L-shaped.

The rear covering portion 10014b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower tray 50. That is, the lower tray 50 abuts (connects) with the flat plate portion at its rear end, and abuts (connects) with the upper plate portion at its right end. The area (space) formed on the side where the lower tray 50 and the rear covering portion 10014b face each other thus formed is where balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 and so-called foul balls are stored. Next, the details of the lower tray unit 6400 that constitutes the lower tray 50 will be described.

Fig. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and Fig. 225 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400. Note that Fig. 225 illustrates each part of the lower tray unit 6400 at an angle viewed from below.

As shown in Figures 224 and 225, the lower tray unit 6400 is attached to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see Figure 211 or Figure 212) in a manner that covers the front side of the metal main body portion 10014a.
A covering base member 6410 fastened to the lower plate forming member 6420, which is fitted from above to the covering base member 6410 to form the lower plate 50, a ball discharge device 6430 which is a plate-shaped device attached to the covering base member 6410 from below and fastened to the lower plate forming member 6420, and a lower plate forming member 6420 fastened to the lower plate forming member 6420 at the left end of the covering base member 6410.
The intermediate holding member 6440 is attached to the covering base member 6410 in such a manner that the covering base member 6410 can be prevented from coming off. The intermediate holding member 6440 is fastened to the metal main body portion 10014a on the opposite side (rear side).
and a V-shaped design member 6450 arranged on the upper front side of the covering base member 6410 and formed from a resin material into a V-shape when viewed from the front.

The covering foundation member 6410 includes a main body 6411 having a substantially flat lower surface and a substantially box-shaped body with an open back and top, a through hole 6412 formed through the lower bottom of the main body 6411 leaving a small framework at the front and rear, a protruding portion 6413 protruding downward from the lower surface of the main body 6411 at the center of the left-right direction of the main body 6411 based on the through hole 6412, and a protruding portion 6414 on the back side of the protruding portion 6413.
and a recessed portion 6414 recessed so that the plate thickness at the plate end 6413 is approximately equal to that of the other portions of the main body portion 6411.

By configuring the recessed portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large near the protruding portion 6413, thereby improving the yield of resin molding and suppressing the occurrence of stress concentration in the protruding portion 6413. The protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 provide a number of advantageous effects in the portion where the operating device 10300 is held from below, which will be described in detail later.

The through hole 6412 is approximately the same size as the width of the bottom shape of the lower tray 50 described below, and is formed much larger than the size of the bottom opening 6432 that is opened by sliding the ball removal lever 52.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large in advance, the covering base member 6410
Without replacing the tray 50, the ball discharge speed from the lower tray 50 can be made to correspond to the ball discharge speed corresponding to the playability realized by the pachinko machine 10010.

That is, the discharge speed of the balls from the lower tray 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom opening 6432,
For example, if the size of the through hole 6412 is the same as the size of the bottom opening 6432, the ball discharge speed cannot be increased any more.
is formed large in advance, the ball discharge speed (discharge mode) from the lower tray 50 can be changed by changing the size of the bottom opening 6432 or changing the position of the bottom opening 6432 (by changing the design of the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430) without replacing the covering base member 6410. In other words, without changing the appearance of the lower tray unit 6400 as seen by the player (without changing the design),
The ball discharge speed (discharge mode) can be changed.

The need to change the ball discharge speed is not limited to cases where the gameplay of the pachinko machine 10010 is changed. For example, in an amusement facility, the pachinko machine 10010 may be installed in a manner that requires the paid-out balls to be transferred to a box containing 1000 balls, or in a manner that does not require the paid-out balls to be transferred to a box containing 1000 balls (so-called "personal" cases).

When it is necessary to transfer the dispensed balls to the box, there is a risk that the balls will overflow from the box if the balls are discharged at high speed, so it is desirable to design the balls to be discharged at a speed slower than a specified speed.

In this embodiment, the bottom opening 6432 is formed from a circular opening with a diameter of approximately 35 mm, and based on the comparison between the opening area and the spherical shape (spherical shape with a diameter of approximately 11 mm), the upper limit of the number of balls that can be discharged simultaneously from the opening is limited to approximately seven.

In contrast, if there is no need to transfer the dispensed balls to the box, there is no need to worry about the balls overflowing from the box, and the desired upper limit of the ball discharge speed changes significantly in the upward direction. In such an installation mode, the dispensed balls flow into the automatic counting machine provided in each pachinko machine 10010, and an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed is the operating speed of the ball flow device built into the automatic counting machine.

In this way, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the discharge speed of the balls can be changed without changing the design when viewed from the front.
In particular, since the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is a portion to which a load (mainly a load in the downward direction) when a player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, the size and arrangement of the through-holes 6412 may be limited to a level that can withstand the load during operation.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that compensates for the reduction in strength caused by the through hole 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other in a manner that sandwiches the covering base member 6410 from above and below, with the fastening direction being the line shown by the imaginary line in Figures 224 and 225. This fastening presses the edge portion of the through hole 6412 against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430. As a result, the surrounding portion of the through hole 6412 (for example, the long frame portion located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced by the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430.

In addition, the design manner in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed by the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 is not limited in any way. For example,
The design may also be such that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 abuts the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 before the ball discharge device 6430 is fastened (when placed in the fastening preparation position) (see Figure 233), or a gap is generated between them before fastening, but the gap can be filled by tightening the fastening screws and pressure can be applied.

In addition, the portion to be pressed does not need to be the entire circumference of the edge of the through hole 6412, but may be a part of the edge. In this case, the pressing force is applied to the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the protruding portion 64
13) and the rear side portion (the long plate portion located behind the through hole 6412) which may be subjected to impacts every time the cover is opened and closed, large loads are likely to be generated, so it is preferable to adopt a design that presses them down.

In this way, by sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 between the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430, the strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be sufficiently ensured.
The bottom opening 6432 can be disposed at any position without worrying about a decrease in strength due to the formation of the bottom opening 6432. In other words, the degree of freedom in arranging the bottom opening 6432 can be improved.

The lower plate forming member 6420 is a main body box portion 64 in which the lower plate 50 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open top.
21, a discharge port 6422 that opens in the vertical direction on the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, an L-shaped plate portion 6423 that protrudes in an L-shape when viewed from below from the back side of the bottom surface of the main body box portion 6421, a plurality of fastening portions 6424 that protrude downward in a cylindrical shape inside (front side) of the area surrounded by the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and into which fastening screws that fasten the ball discharge device 6430 are screwed, a pair of guide ribs 6425 that extend in a rib-like manner in the left-right direction with the edge portion of the discharge port 6422 as a base end, a plate-shaped support portion 6426 that extends rightward from the right end portion of the main body box portion 6421, and the plate-shaped support portion 642
6 and a soft resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of the

The discharge port 6422 is formed at a position that is the front end and right end of the lower tray 50. The bottom upper surface of the lower tray 50 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the discharge port 6422, and the balls that flow into the lower tray 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flow down toward the discharge port 6422, but since the discharge port 6422 is disposed on the front side close to the player, the balls can be smoothly removed from the lower tray 50 even when the number of balls stored in the lower tray 50 is small.

The outlet 6422 is a plate-shaped support portion 6426 where a load from the operating device 10300 is likely to occur.
The through hole is formed near the ball discharge device 6430, and since it is thought that the formation of the through hole may have a negative effect on strength, measures have been taken to address this by combining it with a ball discharge device 6430, but details will be described later.

225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has a different protruding length at the left and right positions, which corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, the upper surface of the lower bottom of the main body portion 6411 is formed to be approximately flat, while the lower surface of the lower bottom of the lower plate 50 is formed to be inclined downward as it goes to the right. Therefore, in order to abut against the upper surface of the lower bottom of the main body portion 6411 (the upper surface of the edge of the through hole 6412),
This corresponds to the need to shorten the protruding length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 toward the right. With this arrangement, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207 ), the protruding end portion (lower end portion) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 abuts against the edge portion of the through hole 6412 (by line contact or surface contact).

The fastening parts 6424 are located at two points on the front end where load from the player is likely to occur, and at the front frame 10
One fastening point is formed at the rear end portion where load is likely to be generated when opening and closing 014. By providing fastening points preferentially at the points where load is likely to be generated, it is possible to prevent the lower plate forming member 6420 from shifting in position due to shifting of the fastening when load is generated while limiting the fastening points.

In addition, since the fastening portion 6424 is disposed near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the through hole 641
2 (i.e., fastening is performed without forming a separate through hole for positioning the fastening screw to be passed through the main body portion 6411), it is possible to easily maintain the contact between the L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the edge of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 (it is possible to easily maintain the relative position). Therefore, it is possible to improve the positional stability of the lower plate forming member 6420 while eliminating the need to form a through hole other than the through hole 6412.

The guide rib 6425 serves both to guide the movement of the ball removal lever 52 and to reinforce the bottom surface of the lower tray 50. In particular, in this embodiment, the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is formed from a long plate shape in the left and right directions, and it is considered that reinforcement along the left and right directions is necessary.
The ball removal lever 52 slides along the left-right direction which coincides with the longitudinal direction, thereby effectively guiding the movement of the ball removal lever 52 and reinforcing the bottom portion of the lower tray 50.

As described above, the guide ribs 6425 are formed in a pair, so that the load applied can be dispersed. Even if one of them is damaged, the unit can still be used as long as the other remains, so that the service life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be designed arbitrarily. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or other flexible material with a suitable repulsive force (shape restoring force).
Materials with this property are also acceptable.

The ball ejection device 6430 includes a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 on which the ball ejection lever 52 is disposed.
A circular bottom opening 6432 is formed through the main body plate portion 6431 in the vertical direction, and a plurality of fastening holes 6433 are arranged at positions overlapping the fastening portions 6424 of the lower plate forming member 6420 in the vertical direction and are fastened by screwing fastening screws into the fastening portions 6424.
and a fitting frame portion 6434 having an outer shape that is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410.

The ball ejection lever 52 is made up of a gripping portion 52a that projects forward so that the player can operate it by sliding left and right, a closing plate portion 52b that closes the ejection port 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), and a pair of rib-shaped portions that protrude upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extend along the left and right direction. The guided rib 52 is guided by the guide rib 6425.
c), which are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom opening 6432 is disposed vertically opposite the discharge opening 6422 of the lower tray forming member 6420, with the closing plate portion 52b of the ball removal lever 52 disposed therebetween. As described above, when not in operation, the ball removal lever 52 is disposed between the discharge opening 6422 and the bottom opening 6432, so the degree to which strength is reduced due to the formation of an opening can be reduced by the rigidity of the closing plate portion 52b.

This prevents the exhaust port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming weak,
As in this embodiment, even when adopting a configuration in which the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are positioned near the bottom of the operating device 10300 (positioned close to the operating device 10300), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the durability of the lower tray unit 6400.

The details of the fastening method between the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 has a flange portion 6431a that protrudes outward from the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (flat side and both left and right sides) except for the front side. The fitting frame portion 6434 is in the assembled state ( FIG. 2
07), the cover base member 6410 is fitted into the through hole 6412 with a gap therebetween,
When the ball discharge device 6430 is inserted into the through hole 6412 as is, the flange portion 6431 a abuts against the underside of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 .

On the other hand, the inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is formed in a shape that can abut in the front-to-back and left-to-right directions from the outside of the mating frame portion 6434, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 abuts in the up-down direction against the edge portion of the through hole 6412, as described above.

In this way, the ball discharge device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharge device 6430. After aligning the positions of each component, each component can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the fastening hole 6433 and tightening it. This makes assembly work easier.

The intermediate holding member 6440 is a portion through which fastening screws for fastening to the covering base member 6410 are inserted, and has a plurality of through holes 6441 protruding from the front side, and a metal main body portion 10014a (
The covering base member 6410 mainly comprises a plurality of fastening portions 6442 protruding from the rear side where screws are fastened and fixed by being inserted into through holes formed in the covering base member 6410 (see Figure 211), and an interference portion 6443 formed in a plate shape which interferes with the upper left end portion of the covering base member 6410 in the front-to-rear direction.

226 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 6400.
The figure shows the V-shaped design member 6450 disassembled.

The V-shaped design component 6450 has a groove shape in which the back side is open and the opening width is narrowed toward the left and right center, and a V-shaped main body 6451 is disposed downward toward the left and right center,
The main body portion 6451 mainly comprises a plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed at the lower edge thereof as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, a positioning portion 6453 formed near the center of the lower edge of the main body portion 6451, a plurality of protruding fastening portions 6454 formed near the left and right ends of the main body portion 6451 and protruding toward the rear side so that fastening screws can be screwed in, a plurality of right side reinforcing ribs 6455 formed in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the right side of the main body portion 6451 and aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451, and a plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456 formed in a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body portion 6451 on the left side of the main body portion 6451 and aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 6451.

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the above-mentioned left front cover 10321 and right front cover 10322. This makes it possible to limit the locations where a through hole is likely to be formed in order for a fraudster to insert a fraudulent member into the inside of the pachinko machine 10010. In other words, compared to the case where a through hole is formed in the V-shaped design member 6450, the left front cover 10
Since it is easier to drill a through hole in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322, it is possible to induce an unauthorized through hole to be drilled in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322.

Therefore, the number of areas to be checked periodically to detect fraud can be narrowed. That is, according to this embodiment, since the through holes are likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322, it is not necessary to check the V-shaped design component 6450. This reduces the checking burden compared to the case where the V-shaped design component 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be checked equally.

The main body 6451 is formed with a thin wall and is capable of being flexibly deformed in a direction narrowing the groove width (is capable of being flexibly deformed in a manner of being crushed vertically).
Since the V-shaped design member 6450 fits into the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 of the operating device 10300, vertical displacement that may occur during operation of the operating device 10300 is transmitted via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. When this vertical displacement occurs, the V-shaped design member 6450 is flexed and deformed in a direction that narrows the groove width of the main body 6451, thereby
At least a portion of the vertical displacement of 0 can be absorbed by the deflection of the V-shaped design member 6450.

That is, at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 is transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6
After the deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450 is performed, the load can be transmitted downstream (for example, to the covering base member 6410). Therefore, the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the covering base member 6410 arranged below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, so that the displacement amount and the degree of vibration of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed by the operation.

The positioning portion 6453 mainly includes a fastening portion 6453L formed on the left side based on the center of the left and right so that a fastening screw can be screwed in, and a plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R protruding in a plate shape toward the rear side on the opposite side to the fastening portion 6453L.

The through hole 6452 is a portion that is fixed to the covering base member 6410 by screwing a fastening screw into a recess formed on the front side with the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 entering from the front side. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in a manner that approaches the covering base member 6410 from the back side (an example of the movement trajectory of the V-shaped design member 6450 is shown by an imaginary line in Figures 226 and 227).

In addition, at least a part of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (the lower right insertion hole 6
In the assembled state, the lower plate forming member 6420 is not visible when viewed from the insertion direction of the fastening screw (see FIG. 230(b)).
When the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in the covering base member 6410, the fastening screws inserted into at least some of the insertion holes 6452 cannot be loosened, and it becomes necessary to disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 as a preliminary step to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450 from the covering base member 6410, thereby increasing the labor required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 includes an insertion portion 6426c1 that is drilled in the front-rear direction in the front vertical portion 6426c described later, through which a fastening screw that is screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted and fixed to the lower right fastening portion 6453L by the screwing.
An operating device 10300 is disposed in such a manner that it covers c1 in rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, as a prerequisite for disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move it from the position that shields the insertion portion 6426c1. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, the number of steps required to remove the operation device 10300 and disassemble the lower plate forming member 6420 can be increased. This makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as fraudulently removing the V-shaped design member 6450 and entering the inside through the resulting gap.

In the assembled state, the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R is a front vertically elongated portion 6426 of the plate-shaped support portion 6426.
c (see FIG. 230(b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R is restricted by the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-shaped supporting portion 6426 is restricted by the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R.

As a result, even if the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 208) is subjected to a load from a player in a lifting direction, the fitting recess De1 (
219) is engaged with the engagement portion 6426d,
As the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction, the front portion of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in the upward direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-shaped protruding portion 6453R, the operation device 10300
The upward displacement can be suppressed.

The left and right protruding fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws are inserted into a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a of the front frame 10014, and the fastening position is on the rear side (the side closer to the metal main body portion 10014a) than the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453L.

The right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 function as ribs that reinforce the main body 6451 in the groove width direction, and also function as buffer means (displacement transmission suppressing means) that suppresses the transmission of displacement downstream by their own deformation by being made thin-walled and flexible. As shown in Fig. 227, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is arranged more densely than the right reinforcing rib 6455. The following describes each in order.

Fig. 228(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right reinforcing rib 6455, and Fig. 228(b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left reinforcing rib 6456. Fig. 228(a) and Fig. 228(b) show cross sections in a plane dividing the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 in the thickness direction. The reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 are formed to have the same thickness, but are designed to change the dimensions in the groove width direction and groove depth direction corresponding to the groove width of the main body 6451. However, since the basic configuration is the same, a representative example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 228( a ), the right reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-like portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 to the rear side, and is a connecting portion 645 that is connected to the upper plate portion of the main body 6451.
5a, and an upper opposing portion 6451 that is arranged parallel to and opposed to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap therebetween.
455b and a lower opposing portion 6455c arranged to face the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in an inclined manner such that the separation width increases toward the rear side.

The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion to which the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6455b, and to which the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted.
Since the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the upper opposing portion 6455b are arranged substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to avoid contact with the right front cover 10322 at a single point, and it is possible to distribute the load between the front and rear positions. This makes it possible to increase the load capacity of the right reinforcing rib 6455.

In this embodiment, the gap between the upper opposing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. This makes it possible to prevent the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 after fitting from separating from the upper opposing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and to prevent them from colliding with and rubbing against each other, thereby suppressing the generation of powder (dust).

The lower facing portion 6455c is disposed on the side closer to the operation device 10300 (the rear side, the right front cover 103
Since the distance between the right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the lower plate of the main body 6451 is longer toward the side where displacement of rib 6455 tends to be greater (the side where displacement of rib 6455 tends to be greater), the allowable downward displacement of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 itself can be increased and collision (contact) with the lower plate of the main body 6451 can be avoided when displacement occurs.

Therefore, the right reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a shock-absorbing member, so that the right front cover 10
It is possible to reduce the proportion of the displacement and load transmitted via 322 that is transmitted to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451.

In this embodiment, the downstream side (
The operation handle 51 is disposed on the lower right side of the control panel 10300, and the right-side reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, thereby reducing the proportion of load, displacement, and vibration caused by the operation and drive of the operation device 10300 that is transmitted to the operation handle 51. This ensures playability that allows the player to freely operate the operation handle 51 without feeling uncomfortable.

As shown in FIG. 228( b ), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the bottom of the groove of the main body 6451 to the rear side, and is a connecting portion 645 that is connected to the upper plate portion of the main body 6451.
6a, and an upper opposing portion 6451 that is arranged parallel to and opposed to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap therebetween.
456b, and a protruding portion 6456 protruding toward the rear side beyond the rear edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451.
c, and a lower facing portion 6451 that is arranged parallel to and faces the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and forms a gap.
56d.

The upper facing portion 6456b is a portion to which the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portion 6456b, and to which the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted.
Since the upper opposing portion 6456b and the left front cover 10321 are disposed substantially parallel to each other, it is possible to avoid contact with the left front cover 10321 at a single point, and the load can be distributed between the front and rear positions. This increases the load capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456.

In this embodiment, the gap between the upper opposing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. This makes it possible to prevent the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting from separating from the upper opposing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and to prevent them from colliding with and rubbing against each other, thereby suppressing the generation of powder (dust).

The protruding portion 6456c extends in a direction away from the upper surface of the main body portion 6451 as it approaches the rear side (
The protruding portion 6456c has an upper edge that is inclined downward.
The protruding portion 6456c is not a portion that always comes into contact with the lower edge of the left front cover 10321, but is formed as a portion that comes into contact with the lower edge of the left front cover 10321 only when the downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to a certain extent.
can function as a part (fail-safe) for suppressing displacement when the amount of displacement of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large.

The upper surface of the protruding portion 6456c may be flush with the upper surface of the upper opposing portion 6456b. In this case, the length of the front-rear position where the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be increased, so that the load-bearing capacity of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surface of the rear covering portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 when the rear covering portion 10014b is inserted between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower facing portion 6456d. Since the lower facing portions 6456d of the multiple left side reinforcing ribs 6456 come into contact with the rear covering portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed and the amount of downward displacement of the rear covering portion 10014b can be reduced.

This makes it easier to maintain the position of the rear covering portion 10014b, so that the space above the lower tray 50 (the space where the balls are stored and where the player may put his/her hand)
It is possible to prevent the width of the gap from being narrowed.

That is, the rear covering portion 10014b is connected to the left front cover 10321 via the V-shaped design member 6450.
However, it is possible to suppress the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side through the left front cover 10321 from displacing the rear covering portion 10014b. This makes it possible to avoid, for example, a situation in which the surface constituting the lower tray 50 is displaced and collides with the game ball, generating an abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are arranged closer together than the intervals at which the right reinforcing ribs 6455 are arranged, so that the left reinforcing ribs 6456 are configured to be able to withstand a larger load.
In this embodiment, the weight of the player's hand touching the balls stored in the upper tray 17 located on the left side is likely to be applied, which can easily result in uneven loads on the left and right sides. However, by arranging the left side reinforcing ribs 6456 closely together, it is possible to deal with uneven loads.

As described above, in this embodiment, the right reinforcing rib 6455 and the left reinforcing rib 6456 are shaped differently to accommodate different types of loads. That is, the right reinforcing rib 6455 forms a sufficient gap between the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 and the lower opposing portion 6455c to block the transmission of load, thereby preventing instantaneous load or impact via the operating device 10300 from being transmitted to the operating handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 distributes and supports the load, thereby preventing the rear covering portion 10014b from being displaced even if weight is applied for a long period of time via the upper plate 17. Thus, in this embodiment, the reinforcing ribs 6455, 64
56 shapes have been designed.

Figure 229(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 6400, Figure 229(b) is a front view of the lower tray unit 6400, Figure 230(a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit 6400, Figure 230(b) is a back view of the lower tray unit 6400, Figure 231(a) is a right side view of the lower tray unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and Figure 231(b) is a left side view of the lower tray unit 6400 as viewed in the direction of arrow R.

229(a) and 230(b), the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is disposed so as to straddle the recessed portion 6414 of the covering base member 6410 from side to side, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is placed in surface contact with the upper bottom surface of the main body portion 6411, while being disposed apart from the recessed portion 6414. Details of the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 will be described below.

The protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 are formed on the main body 641 of the covering base member 6410.
Similar to the deformation caused when a part of the main body 6411 is pressed from above, the protruding portion 6413 is a portion that constitutes the front and back of a portion that bulges (extends) downward from the bottom surface, and the shape of one of the front and back is similar to the shape of the other. In other words, the outer shape of the protruding portion 6413 as viewed from below and the inner shape of the recessed portion 6414 as viewed from above are formed as shapes whose scale is changed by an amount that allows the plate thickness of the main body 6411 to be secured. Therefore, the shape of the other can be easily imagined from the shape of one.

As shown in FIG. 230(a), the width of the protruding portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side.
Since the protrusion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 are disposed closer to the front than the center in the front-rear direction, the protrusion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 can support the plate-shaped support portion 6426 at a location where the left-right width is large. This allows the main body 6411 to be partially and sufficiently deflected when the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is displaced in a manner that sinks downward, as will be described in detail later.

In this state, when the game is ready for play, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-shaped support portion 6426, and as the player operates the operation device 10300, the plate-shaped support portion 642
In relation to this displacement, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are made of a resin material, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 can be displaced up and down.
There is a risk of shavings being generated due to load, collision, or friction between the roller 11 and the roller 11.

If shavings are generated around the operating device 10300, for example, the shavings may get into gaps, making it impossible to secure clearance and resulting in malfunction, or the shavings may get into the detection area of the detection sensor and induce a false detection, so it is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings or reduce the amount of such generation.

As described above, in this embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is not directly fastened to the main body portion 6411. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body portion 6411.

That is, a load is applied to the operation device 10300 in the downward direction, and the plate-shaped support portion 6426
When the main body 6411 is displaced downward, the displacement is received by the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414, thereby making it unnecessary to displace other portions such as the main body 6411.

On the other hand, a load in the lifting direction is applied to the operation device 10300, and the plate-shaped support portion 642
When 6 undergoes an upward displacement, the displacement is received by the plate-shaped protrusion portion 6453R (see Figure 232) and converted into deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450, thereby eliminating the need for displacement of other parts such as the main body portion 6411.

In this way, in this embodiment, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411 are not directly fastened to each other, and the load applied to the operating device 10300 is only indirectly transmitted to the main body portion 6411, thereby preventing the main body portion 6411 from deforming or being damaged.

As shown in FIG. 231( a ) and FIG. 231 ( b ), the lower surface of the protruding portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is
The front frame 10014 is formed as an inclined plane that is inclined upward as it approaches the front side. This configuration is suitable, for example, when storing the front frame 10014 by itself.

When storing the front frame 10014 by itself, it is generally considered that it is often placed on a concrete or wooden floor with the underside of the front frame 10014 abutting the floor. In this case, it is considered preferable for the entire underside to abut the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoiding concentration of load, but in this case, there is a possibility that dirt from the floor will adhere to the entire underside. The underside of the main body 6411 is in a position that is difficult for the player to see, but since it is a product, it is preferable to avoid dirt adhering to it.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower surface of the protruding portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines upward toward the front side. Therefore, when the protruding portion 6413 abuts against the floor surface, a gap is generated between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411. Therefore, the protruding portion 6413 abuts against the floor surface and the portion where dirt adheres is prevented from being adhered to by the protruding portion 6413.
Therefore, when the game facility installs the front frame 10014 in a playable state, it is only necessary to wipe off the dirt on the protruding portion 6413, and it is not necessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411.

The protruding portion 6413 also functions as a finger hook for hooking fingers when carrying the front frame 10014. Conventionally, the lower plate portion was located in the center of the front frame from left to right, so that it was easy to hook a hand on the lower plate portion, lift the front frame, and assemble it to the rear frame (outer frame 11, inner frame 12). However, in the front frame 10014 of this embodiment, the lower plate 50 is located on the left side in the left-right direction (the opening/closing axis side), so that it is easy to hook a hand on the lower plate 50, lift the front frame 10014, and
This configuration is considered to be difficult to assemble.

On the other hand, if one hooks one's hand on the operating handle 51 to lift the front frame 10014, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be placed on the base side of the operating handle 51, which may damage the operating handle 51, and is therefore not recommended.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the front frame 100 is inserted by hooking a hand on the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400.
The protruding portion 641 also functions as a finger hook so that the user can lift the 14.
An operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by hooking his/her hand on the protruding portion 6413, lifting the front frame 10014, and pivoting it to the rear frame.

And by adding a step of wiping off dirt before and after the finger placement,
The operator can be made aware of the areas that need wiping off dirt in relation to the carrying operation, and thus can prevent forgetting to wipe off dirt.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body 6411 is configured to be just the right amount in response to the magnitude of deformation expected in the protruding portion 6413. In more detail, due to the shape of the underside of the main body 6411, the gap between the floor surface becomes larger as it approaches the front side, and this corresponds to the fact that the protruding portion 6413 is formed wider as it approaches the front side, and the amount of deformation (deflection) that can occur due to a load becomes larger.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor, the protruding portion 6413
On the other hand, when the protruding portion 6413 is flexed and deformed to the limit and there is no gap between the underside of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface, the entire underside of the main body portion 6411 can be easily brought into contact with the floor surface, so that the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire underside of the main body portion 6411.

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor surface is heavier than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor surface, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one part of the main body 6411.

Also, the fact that the amount of deformation is greater on the front side of the protruding portion 6413 works favorably even during game play. For example, when replacing a 1000-ryo box, a game store employee slides the 1000-ryo box back and forth on the underside of the main body 6411 and the underside of the protruding portion 6413, and at this time, the 1000-ryo box may collide with the underside of the front frame 10014. If the impact and load from this collision accumulate in the components as fatigue, the components may be destroyed (e.g., cracked) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may become difficult to continue playing the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding portion 64 is formed closer to the front side which is more likely to collide with the box.
13 is configured to have a large amount of deformation. Therefore, it is possible to easily release the impact and load caused by the collision with the coin box by deformation (flexural deformation), and it is possible to suppress the destruction of the protruding shape portion 6413. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

Also, on the left and right sides of the protruding portion 6413, the bottom surface of the main body 6411 is formed with an incline so as to rise toward the front side (see FIG. 231(a)). This reduces the possibility of the 1000-ryo box colliding with the main body 6411 on the left and right sides of the protruding portion 6413 when replacing the 1000-ryo box. This reduces the possibility of the bottom surface of the main body 6411 being damaged, making it easier to maintain a comfortable gaming environment for the player.

Fig. 232 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. Note that Fig. 232 illustrates the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322, and does not illustrate the other parts of the operating device 1.
The external shape of 0300 is shown diagrammatically in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 232, the lower edge portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 are in contact with the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 (upper opposing portions 6455b, 6456c) of the V-shaped design member 6450.
56b (see Figures 228(a) and 228(b)).

The main body 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape when viewed from the rear, and the reinforcing rib 645
Since the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are plate-shaped and extend in the groove width direction of the main body 6451,
The reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 is directed in a direction (upward oblique direction) having a directional component that returns the left front cover 10321 and the right cover 10322 to the center in the left-right direction.
The restoring force from the flexural deformation of 456 is directed in an upward oblique direction.

This makes it possible to accommodate not only vertical displacement but also horizontal displacement of the operating device 10300. For example, even if the moving direction of the operating portion of the operating device 10300 (e.g., the swing operating member 10310) does not have a horizontal component as in this embodiment, a downward load applied by the player may have a horizontal component, and when such a load is applied, the entire operating device 10300 may be displaced downward and may be slightly displaced (vibrated) in the horizontal direction.

In contrast, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can accommodate left-right displacement of the operating device 10300 by flexing and deforming based on their own curved shapes (they can absorb the left-right displacement and return the operating device 10300 to its original position by using a restoring force), and further, the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455, 6456 faces upward and toward the center of the left and right, so that the operating device 10300 can be quickly returned to the position before the displacement. Therefore, the design of the front frame 10014 in a front view (see FIG. 207) can be easily maintained.

FIG. 233(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229(a), and FIG. 233(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG.
233(a) to 233(c) are cross-sectional views of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along line XXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb, and FIG. 233(c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229(a).
The vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in cross section is shown enlarged.

As shown in Figures 233(a) to 233(c), when the lower tray unit 6400 is in an assembled state, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower tray forming member 6420 (the protruding end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 on the rear side) and the ball discharge device 6430 (the flange portion 6431a). This allows the surrounding portion of the through hole 6412 to be reinforced by the strength of the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharge device 6430.

The inner surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is fitted to the fitting frame portion 64
34 (see FIG. 224 ) in the front-rear and left-right directions.
As described above, the lower end of 423 comes into contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 in the up-down direction (see FIG. 233(c)). This makes it possible to reinforce the edge of the through hole 6412, thereby improving the design freedom of the through hole 6412.

As described above, when the ball removal lever 52 is not operated, the ball removal lever 52 is connected to the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6
432, the degree to which the strength is reduced due to the formation of the opening can be reduced by the rigidity of the closure plate portion 52b (see FIG. 233(b)).

This prevents the exhaust port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming weak,
As in this embodiment, even when adopting a configuration in which the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are positioned near the bottom of the operating device 10300 (positioned close to the operating device 10300), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the durability of the lower tray unit 6400.

233(a) to 233(c), the shape of the recessed portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width is wider and the recess depth is deeper toward the front side. In other words, the recessed portion 6414 is formed so as to be more easily bent toward the front side.

This allows the recessed portion 6414 to have sufficient flexibility near the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 is likely to be large, and therefore it is possible to prevent the covering base member 6410 supporting the operation device 10300 from being damaged (e.g., cracked) due to the load generated when the operation device 10300 is operated. This will be described in detail.

As described above, the operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes. The operation timing and operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the operation device has a role of making the player operate the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification, thereby drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency of notification for each operation mode is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swing operation member 10310 is controlled to stop at the initial position from the start of the game until a specific reach effect is executed (see FIG. 215(a)). This state occupies the majority of the positions of the swing operation member 10310 during business hours.

In this state, a notification is given to prompt an operation in the display performance (such as "Press the button!")
The player performs a push operation on the lens member 10317 to operate the lens member 10317, switch the stage, etc. Therefore, most of the load caused by the operation is the load caused when pushing the lens member 10317, and the load is in the direction Y17a (FIG. 2).
15(a)). Since the occurrence frequency of notifications is high, the occurrence frequency of this load is high.

In contrast, when a specific reach performance is executed, the operating device 10300 is controlled to drive and displace the swivel operating member 10310 up and down, and a notification is issued to prompt operation, for example, when the swivel operating member 10310 is positioned in a downward position (see Figure 215 (b)).

In this case, the operation direction is a direction Y17b (see FIG. 215(b)) which is further inclined in the front-rear direction by an angle θ17y compared to the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is disposed in the upward position.
A load is generated along the direction Y17b. Since the generation of the notification is limited to when a specific reach effect is executed, the frequency of the notification is low.

That is, the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the frequency of occurrence of the load along the direction Y17b.
The shape of 414 is such that the width becomes wider and the recess depth increases toward the front side, so that the load-bearing performance increases toward the front side.

In other words, compared to the case where the shape is the same in the front-to-rear direction, it can be configured to respond in an appropriate manner to differences in the frequency of load occurrence, making it easier to avoid excessive deformation due to the applied load or insufficient deformation that makes it susceptible to damage.

As described above, in this embodiment, the side closer to the player and the side where the load is generated more frequently during operation are both the front side, so the recessed shape portion 6414 is formed wider and deeper toward the front side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swing operation member 10310 is set to a downward position, the frequency of load generation during operation is reversed, so in this case, by forming the recessed shape wider and deeper toward the back side, it is possible to configure it so that it can respond to the difference in the frequency of load generation in an appropriate place compared to the case where the recessed shape is a common shape in the front and rear directions, and it is easy to avoid excessive deformation due to the applied load or insufficient deformation that makes it prone to breakage.

As shown in FIG. 233( b ), which corresponds to a central cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate-like portion 64
The recessed portion 6414 has a widthwise end portion 26b which abuts against the main body portion 6411 at a position on the left and right outer side of the left and right width ends of the recessed portion 6414 .

This makes it possible to reduce the proportion of the load from the operating device 10300 that is transmitted to the recessed portion 6414, compared to when the hanging plate portion 6426b abuts against the upper edge portion of the recessed portion 6414. This makes it possible to prevent the recessed portion 6414 from being damaged by the load applied when operating the operating device 10300.

In addition, in response to the load, not only the bending of the recessed shape portion 6414 but also the bending of the recessed shape portion 6
Since the deflection of the plate portion from the upper edge of 414 to the abutment position of the hanging plate portion 6426b and the main body portion 6411 can also be utilized, the load tolerance can be increased.

234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along the line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV in FIG. 229(a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower tray forming member 6420 includes a flat plate-shaped portion 6426a on which a resin member 6427 is placed, and the flat plate-shaped portion 6426b.
234. The main components of the flat plate portion 6426 are a hanging plate portion 6426b that hangs downward from the left and right and rear edges of the flat plate portion 6426a in a plate-like manner, a front vertically elongated portion 6426c that is connected to the front edge of the flat plate portion 6426a and is formed taller than the flat plate portion 6426a and has an open lower portion, and a fitting portion 6426d that extends from the front vertically elongated portion 6426c to the rear side and fits with the operating device 10300. In the explanation of FIG. 234, reference will be made as appropriate to FIGS. 224 to 229.

The flat plate portion 6426a is formed to be wider than the left-right width of the recessed portion 6414, and is configured to cover the front half of the recessed portion 6414. Between the flat plate portion 6426a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering foundation member 6410 (between the top and bottom), a hanging plate portion 6426b is formed.
That is, the flat plate portion 6426a does not contact the main body portion 6411 and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from below (
(See FIG. 225) The extended end of the hanging plate portion 6426b abuts against the main body portion 6411, thereby determining the position of the flat plate portion 6426a relative to the covering base member 6410.

In this way, the flat plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426b are not block-shaped,
Since it is formed in a box shape with an open bottom, the flat plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426
b is configured to be easily deformed by bending. Therefore, not only the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 of the main body 6411 are deformed by bending in response to a load through the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211 ), but also the flat plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426b can be deformed by bending, and it is possible to further prevent the plate-like support portion 6426 and the covering base member 6410 (the main body 6411, the protruding portion 6413, and the recessed portion 6414) arranged below the operation device 10300 from being damaged.

While the hanging plate portion 6426b extends to the upper surface of the bottom of the main body portion 6411, it does not extend until it enters the recessed portion 6414. In other words, a space is generated between the hanging plate portion 6426b and the recessed portion 6414 (see below the rear end portion of the flat plate portion 6426a in FIG. 234). This makes it possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed portion 6414, so that the deformation of the protruding portion 6413 can be prevented from being hindered.

In addition, the space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if liquid seeps in from the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid that runs down the rear side of the plate-like support portion 6426 is configured to be able to seep in to the front part of the recessed portion 6414, so that the flow of liquid seeping in to the rear can be weakened. This makes it easier for the front frame 10014 to stop the liquid from seeping in.

The front vertically elongated portion 6426c is connected to the operating device 1 by a fitting portion 6426d that extends to the rear side.
The lower part of the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. This allows the load applied by the player to the operation device 10300 to be borne by the main body 6
By having the load supported not only by 411 but also by the V-shaped design member 6450, the load can be distributed, thereby reducing the load applied to each component.

In addition, a space is also created between the front vertically elongated portion 6426c and the recessed portion 6414. This allows the recessed portion 6414 to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside.
This makes it possible to prevent the deformation of the protruding portion 6413 from being hindered.

In addition, the space between the front vertically elongated portion 6426c and the recessed portion 6414 also serves as a drain. For example, even if liquid seeps in through the gap between the operating device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid that runs down the rear side of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is configured to be able to seep in to the front part of the recessed portion 6414, so that the flow of liquid seeping in to the rear can be weakened. This makes it easier for the front frame 10014 to stop the liquid from seeping in.

The fitting portion 6426d is formed to be elongated in the horizontal direction so as to be able to fit into the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operating device 10300. The fitting portion 6426d includes a pair of plate-shaped reinforcing ribs 6426d1 that are coupled to the lower surface and the front vertically elongated portion 6426c formed on the extended base end side.

The reinforcing rib 6426d1 can suppress vertical displacement (deformation) of the mating portion 6426d, so that even if a load is applied that displaces the operating device 10300 downward, the rigidity of the mating portion 6426d can withstand the load, preventing excessive displacement of the operating device 10300.

Here, the operating member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load caused by the operation and vibration of the operating member 10300 by the player is transmitted to the plate-shaped support portion 642 via the resin member.
6, and then to the covering foundation member 6410 arranged downstream thereof, where the plate-shaped support portion 6426 is supported by the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 (see Figure 233).

In this embodiment, the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward toward the front side (see FIG. 234), so that the front-to-rear component of the load transmitted from the operating member 10300 to the main body portion 6411 can be directed toward the front side (the load can be released toward the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid problems that may occur due to the load generated by the operation device 10300 being transmitted to the rear side (the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) may shake, affecting the flow of the shot ball, or the base box 10 may shake.
0 to 104 or an electronic board, it is possible to prevent problems such as cracking of the board due to the load being transmitted to the board.

Next, the upper performance device 6500 will be described with reference to Fig. 235 to Fig. 264. Fig. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and Fig. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. Note that Fig. 235 and Fig. 236 show the above-mentioned lower tray unit 640.
0 and the operation device 10300 are omitted from the illustration, and the upper performance device 6500 is a metal main body 10
The exploded state is shown from 014a forward.

As shown in FIG. 235, the upper stage 6500 is provided with a pair of sound devices 661 arranged on the left and right.
0, and an illumination board 657 in which light emitting means such as LEDs are disposed.
0 and various components that act as intermediaries for delivering the light emitted from the LED to the player are provided.

As shown in Figure 236, a plate-shaped metal spring member (plate spring) 6584d is arranged on the rear side of the upper performance device 6500, which generates a biasing force in the direction away from the metal main body portion 10014a.
This makes it possible to increase the fastening force of the fastening screws that secure the upper performance device 6500 to the metal main body portion 10014a (to secure it more stably).

FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper performance device 6500, and FIG.
237 and 238 are exploded rear perspective views of the upper performance device 6500.
6 shows the upper cover member 6510 disassembled upward.

The upper performance device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper cover member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 that occupy the front portion below the upper cover member 6510, and the front units 6520 to
and rear units 6560 to 6580 disposed behind 6550.

The upper cover member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper performance device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a, and includes a main body plate portion 6511 configured as a semi-elliptical plate portion obtained by dividing a left-right long ellipse into front and rear portions, a plurality of insertion holes 6512 that are drilled vertically near the front edge portion of the main body plate portion 6511 and that are configured to be able to insert fastening screws, and a plurality of fastening portions 6513 that extend downward from the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6511, have female screw holes formed from the rear surface of the extension tip, and are configured to be able to fasten fastening screws that are inserted into the metal main body portion 10014a into the female screw holes.
And, mainly prepare.

The upper cover member 6510 has a rear side portion from which the fastening portion 6513 extends, and the rear side portion is a metal main body portion 10014.
a and other components of the upper performance device 6500 are supported by fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512. In other words, the mechanical rigidity of the upper cover member 6510 can be utilized to suppress downward displacement of the front end portion of the upper performance device 6500.

The fastening portion 6513 has a plate-shaped plate portion 6513 on its front side that is connected to the main body plate portion 6511.
This makes it possible to prevent the main body plate portion 6511 from being deformed or displaced in a manner such that the main body plate portion 6511 falls forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is disposed opposite the front surface of the plate on which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With this configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125(a) described above), the fastening portion 419 is connected to the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a is connected to the expanded rib 4
19a), the top cover member 6510 can prevent the acoustic device 6610 from coming off the metal main body portion 10014a.

The upper cover member 6510 has an uneven portion 6514 formed as a decoration on the entire surface, the uneven portion 6514 being recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface and projecting downward from the lower surface.
4, the force resisting the load perpendicular to the surface can be increased (shape can be easily maintained) compared to when the top cover member 6510 of the same thickness is made of a plate-like member with a smooth surface.

FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper performance device 6500, and FIG.
239 and 240 are exploded rear perspective views of the upper performance device 6500.
The illustration of the upper cover member 6510 is omitted, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are shown in a disassembled state in front of the rear units 6560 to 6580. Note that in this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 are arranged in a front-down diagonal direction (
The upper performance device 6500 can be disassembled by moving it in the direction in which the extension plate portion 6552 is formed (the direction in which the surface runs), but details will be described later.

In this embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have a role of receiving light irradiated from light emitting means such as LEDs, refracting the light, and transmitting the light, and the rear units 6560 to
The rear units 6560 to 6580 serve as light emitting means such as LEDs and as a support for an illumination board on which light emitting means such as LEDs are disposed. First, the rear units 6560 to 6580 will be described in detail.

FIG. 241(a) is a front view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and FIG.
242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580, and FIG. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6560-6580.

As shown in Figures 241 to 243, the rear units 6560 to 6580 mainly comprise a partition member 6560 formed in a manner that divides the internal space into multiple sections when viewed from the front, an illuminated board 6570 on which multiple LEDs that irradiate light onto the partition member 6560 are arranged, and a pair of rear support members 6580 that are stacked on the rear side of the partition member 6560 and are positioned with a slight gap relative to the illuminated board 6570 in the internal region of the exterior, and provide surface support at the exterior portion.

In addition, surface support with a slight gap means that the posture of the illuminated board 6570 can be maintained and it is supported so that it can move back and forth by the amount of the gap between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580.

The partition member 6560 is disposed adjacent to and facing the front side of the illumination board 6570.
The light irradiated from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 of the illumination board 6570 is divided into sections from the vicinity of the illumination board 6570. By dividing the light irradiated from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 in this manner, the light irradiated from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each section, and even if the light emission patterns of the light irradiated from each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 are significantly different, the sense of incongruity given to the player can be reduced.

The partition member 6560 includes an opposing plate portion 6561 disposed opposite the illumination board 6570, a central light hole 6562 formed in the center of the opposing plate portion 6561, and a light receiving hole 6563 formed in the opposing plate portion 6561.
6562, a pair of large diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extending from the rear surface of the facing plate portion 6561, and a pair of rectangular cylindrical portions 6566 extending from the rear surface of the facing plate portion 6561. The pair of large diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extend from the rear surface of the facing plate portion 6561, and a rectangular cylindrical portion 6566 extending from the rear surface of the facing plate portion 6561. The pair of large diameter cylindrical portions 6565 extend from the rear surface of the facing plate portion 6561, and the pair of rectangular cylindrical portions 6566 extending from the rear surface of the facing plate portion 6561.
The opposing plate portion 6561 mainly comprises a central tube portion 6566 extending toward the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561, left and right tube portions 6567 extending toward the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561 in the form of a long tube surrounding the left and right light holes 6563, and a plate-shaped connecting portion 6568 formed from a T-shaped plate portion when viewed from the front and connecting the opposing plate portion 6561, the central tube portion 6566, and the left and right tube portions 6567 on the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561.

The opposing plate portion 6561 has a flange portion 6561 that is elongated and protrudes from its upper edge toward the rear side.
The first flange portion 6561a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portions 6561b are formed in a pair on the left and right sides.
The slits extend from the left and right ends of 561 a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564 .
The third flange portions 6561c are formed in a pair on the left and right sides and extend from a position opposite the end of the second flange portion 6561b across the fastening portion 6564 to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the plate-shaped connecting portion 6568.

Each of the flanges 6561a to 6561c functions as a shielding plate that prevents light from entering or exiting between the partition member 6560 and the illumination board 6570, and the slits are configured at locations where light irradiated from the LEDs arranged on the illumination board 6570 is unlikely to leak. In other words, these locations are locations where even if light enters from the outside, that light is unlikely to mix with the light irradiated from the LEDs.

The gap between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a location between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563.
The gap is defined as a portion where no LED is disposed in 570. Therefore, since there is no LED that can cause light leakage, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event where light leaks from the gap.

The gap between the second flange portion 6561b and the third flange portion 6561c is a fastening portion 65
The fastening portion 6564 is formed at the location where the light-blocking substitute portion is to be disposed, and the location where the light-blocking substitute portion is to be disposed is deliberately set as the slit. In other words, even if light travels to the slit, the light that attempts to pass through the slit is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from the slit.

Here, the flanges 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a continuous continuous part, but in that case, the rigidity of the flanges 6561a to 6561c cannot be sufficiently ensured, and the downward load applied to the partition member 6560 (assuming the downward load applied to the member disposed in front of the partition member 6560, the load from gravity and the player) must be countered only by the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens and fixes the fastening portion 6564. In this embodiment, the more the number of fastening portions 6564 increases, not only does the amount of work required to tighten the fastening screws increase, but the surface area of the illumination board 6570 decreases, limiting the places where LEDs can be placed, and reducing the design freedom of the illumination board 6570.

In response to this, by dividing the flange portions 6561a to 6561c into lengths that ensure the rigidity, the rigidity of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c can withstand the downward load applied to the partition member 6560. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, reducing the number of work steps and improving the design freedom of the illumination board 6570.

In this embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c.
It is formed in a semi-elliptical shape with the width in the front-to-back direction increasing toward the center of the left and right when viewed from above (
See FIG. 237.) Generally, the load applied by the player (for example, the load of hanging) is applied to the front end of the upper performance device 6500, so that the load applied by the player is maximum at the center of the upper performance device 6500 and gradually decreases toward the left and right ends.

In response to this, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are intentionally made to have different lengths. In detail, the left-right length of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the center where the load is greatest is made longer than the left-right length of the second flange portions 6561b disposed on the left and right of the first flange portion 6561a.
In addition, the third flange portions 6561c disposed on the left and right of the second flange portion 6561b are longer than the left and right length of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left and right length is shortest at the left and right central portion.
This makes it possible to generate a counter force to the load applied to the upper performance device 6500 without being excessive or insufficient.

This makes it possible to suppress deformation and displacement of the partition member 6560, and therefore to stably maintain the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the partition member 6560 and the illumination board 6570. Note that the relative relationship (positional relationship) is maintained by the illumination board 6570 due to deformation or displacement in the separation direction.
This is not limited to the case of preventing the force holding 0 from decreasing and causing the illumination board 6570 to displace, but also includes the case of preventing the illumination board 6570 from being destroyed or deformed due to a compressive load being applied to the illumination board 6570 due to deformation or displacement in the approaching direction.

The central light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are provided for LEDs arranged on the illumination board 6570.
The central light hole 6562 is a single L hole.
The left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of the ED.
It is configured as a set of through holes large enough to surround multiple LEDs.

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the rear support member 6580, and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to protrude toward the rear side beyond the fastening portion 6564. As a result, the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partition member 6560
and rear support member 6580 are aligned.

The large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 includes a front side cylindrical portion that is extended toward the front side in a cylindrical shape of the same diameter, and includes an insertion hole 6565a at the bottom of the tip thereof through which a fastening screw can be inserted.
A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 from the rear side is inserted into 5a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to the partition unit 6540 described later.
The process of inserting the fastening screw through the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear units 6560 to 6580 (see Figures 239 and 240).

The central tube portion 6566 and the left and right tube portions 6567 extend until they reach the rear end portions of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central tube portion 6566 and the left and right tube portions 6567 is incident on the front units 6520 to 6550.

The plate-like joint 6568 is a part to which a load (e.g., a hanging load) is transmitted via the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load is applied to the upper performance device 6500, and its upper surface is located at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the central cylinder portion 6566. As a result, the plate-like joint 6568 bears the load before the central cylinder portion 6566, which makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a load is applied to the central cylinder portion 6566 and makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the central cylinder portion 6566 is deformed or displaced.

The plate-shaped joint 6568 extends downward until the plate-shaped portion reaches the left and right tubular portions 6567. As a result, when a load is transmitted to the plate-shaped joint 6568 via the upper cover member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the load can also be resisted by the resistance force generated by the plate-shaped portion that reaches the left and right tubular portions 6567. In this case, since it is formed of a plate-shaped portion, a resisting force can be generated by the flexural deformation of the plate-shaped portion itself, so that the displacement and deformation of the left and right tubular portions 6567 can be suppressed.

The illumination board 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board, and includes a plate-shaped board portion 6571 and a fastening portion 656 for fastening the partition member 6560, which is a portion that is drilled or cut into the board portion 6571.
241(b))。 The first lighting section 6574 is formed of a plurality of LEDs (shown as a uniform rectangle in FIG. 241 (b)) arranged in the center of the substrate 6571. The first lighting section 6574 is formed of a plurality of LEDs (shown as a uniform rectangle in FIG. 241 (b)) arranged symmetrically with respect to the first lighting section 6574.
A second illumination unit 6575 formed from D and disposed near the vertical center of the substrate unit 6571;
It mainly comprises a third lighting unit 6576 arranged symmetrically along the lower end of the substrate unit 6571, and a connector 6577 for connecting electrical wiring (not shown).

As shown in Figures 241(a) and 241(b), each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front side along the front-rear direction, and is disposed according to a relative positional relationship with the partition member 6560. That is, the first illumination unit 6574 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second illumination unit 6575 is disposed at a position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third illumination unit 6576 is disposed at a position below the lower edge of the partition member 6560. As a result, each of the illumination units 6574 to 6576 illuminates a separate area defined by the partition member 6560. Note that the first illumination unit 6574 and the second illumination unit 6575 illuminate the area inside the partition member 6560, whereas the third illumination unit 6576 illuminates the area inside the partition member 6560.
Illuminates the outer area of the

The third illumination unit 6576 is illustrated as being partially shielded by the partition member 6560 in a front view. As described later, the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 is reflected by the light receiving member 65
58, the light proceeds obliquely downward, so that the light irradiated from the third illumination unit 6576 can be prevented from being blocked by the partition member 6560.
and the partition member 6560 can be arranged to at least partially overlap in the front-to-rear direction.

The thickness of the base plate portion 6571 is set to be equal to or smaller than the thickness of the fastening portion 65 of the partition member 6560 at the fastening insertion portion 6572.
The dimensions are designed so that no fastening force is applied when fastening the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580. That is, the illumination board 6570 is not fastened and fixed between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580.
It is supported between 80 and 90.

The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape of half an oval) when viewed from the front, which can improve assembly efficiency, as will be described in detail later.

The rear support member 6580 is a member that covers the front side of the acoustic device 6610, and is a pair of members that are configured to have approximately symmetrical shapes.
581, a flange portion 6582 extending from the upper edge of the front plate portion 6581 toward the front side, and an upper plate portion 6583 extending in a plate shape toward the rear side with the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582.
A rear box portion 6584 is connected to the left and right edge portions (edge portions on the opposite side of the side where the pair of members face each other) and the lower edge portion of the front plate portion 6581 and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear side.
A lower box portion 6585 is formed in a box shape having a smooth upper surface and opening downwards on the side close to the mating rear box portion 6584, and the lower box portion 6585 and the front plate portion 65
81 and is arranged opposite to the mating member (rear support member 6580), and a cutout portion 6587 which is a cutout that penetrates vertically between the opposing plate portion 6586 and the lower box portion 6585.

The front plate portion 6581 has a plurality of fastening support portions 6581a each consisting of a set of an oval rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted; a plurality of positioning holes 6581b which are through holes formed of a vertically elongated oval shape with a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 and are arranged at positions overlapping the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front and rear; a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c which are mainly drilled in the lower edge portion constituting the boundary with the rear box portion 6584 and through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the front units 6520 to 6550 can be inserted; and a plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c which are formed in the same manner as the screw insertion portions 6581c in the rear box portion 658
4. The front units 6520 to 6550 are provided with long holes drilled along the lower edge of the front unit 6520.
and a wiring hole 658 which is formed at a position corresponding to the connector 6577 of the illumination board 6570 and through which electrical wiring can be passed forward and backward.
1e and mainly.

The rib of the fastening support portion 6581a has an inner width in the left-right direction that constitutes the minor axis, which is equal to or larger than the width of the partition member 656
The outer diameter of the fastening portion 6564 of the electric light board 65 is slightly longer than that of the electric light board 65.
70. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted into the inside of the oval rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the illumination board 6570 is surface-supported by the tip of the oval rib (see FIG. 244(a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are holes used for assembling the rear support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550.
To 6550, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are opened in the direction of movement of the screw insertion portion 6581c to 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in a manner that they are inclined downward as they approach the front side (see FIG. 244(a) and FIG. 246(b)).

The front units 6520 to 6550 have screw insertion portions 6581c and positioning slots 6581
The rear units 6560 to 6580 are assembled along the inclined direction of downward inclination d, and the fastening screws are screwed in along the direction of the downward inclination (see FIG. 247).

This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the illumination board 6570 compared to when the opening is in the front-rear direction.
Since the position of 81d can be brought closer to the illumination board 6570, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed to have the same size, the arrangement area of the illumination board 6570 can be secured widely.
When the illumination board 6570 is formed to the same size, the area in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion that comes into contact with the upper surfaces of the flange portions 6561a to 6561c of the partition member 6560. When a downward load (load in the hanging direction) is applied to the partition member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that prevents the partition member 6560 from falling forward.

The upper plate portion 6583 is provided with a plurality of fitting recesses 6583a that are disposed at positions corresponding to the fastening portions 6513 (see FIG. 238 ) and are recessed so as to be able to fit into the fastening portions 6513.
The upper and rear ends of the fastening portion 6513 are open, and the fastening portion 653a is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed in the left-right direction (a shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513).

The rear box portion 6584 is a sound transmission portion 6584a that extends forward from the front plate portion 6581 and is made of a punched metal that covers an opening formed in the protruding portion 6584a.
584b, a light receiving portion 6584c formed from a light-transmitting member arranged at the right end of the protrusion portion 6584a of the right side member, a pair of plate-shaped metal spring members 6584d arranged at the most central position of the upper end (position closer to the front plate portion 6581) and formed so as to be able to generate a spring force in a direction repelling from the metal main body portion 10014a in the assembled state (see Figure 207), and a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws are fastened which are inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see Figure 237) of the upper cover member 6510.

The upper edge of the protruding portion 6584a is formed in a shape that conforms to the lower edge shape of the illumination board 6570 (
See FIG. 241 ), the upper surface of which constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520 to 6550.

The sound transmission part 6584b is a part through which sound waves generated from the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235) pass. The sound transmission part 6584b is disposed at a position facing the diaphragm 6611 of the acoustic device 6610 (see FIG. 235).

The light receiving section 6584c receives light emitted from an illumination section 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED disposed in the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and shows the light to the player as a light-emitting effect.
The illumination is controlled in a manner different from that of the illumination board 6570. That is, the illumination of the illumination board 6570 is performed when a high probability of occurrence of a variable performance, a normal variable performance, a reach performance, a demo performance, etc. occurs, while the illumination of the illumination unit 10014c is performed when a performance that has an extremely low probability of occurrence and is extremely advantageous for the player occurs. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the illumination unit 10014c.

The lower box portion 6585 is a portion into which the front units 6520 to 6550 enter from the lower side, and is a fastening portion 658 into which fastening screws are fastened, which are inserted into the metal main body portion 10014a from the rear side.
Equipped with 5a.

The cutout portion 6587 forms one side of a through hole through which sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 formed vertically on the lower surface of the left-right central portion (the portion farthest from the diaphragm 6611) of the acoustic device 6610 passes.
The sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the through hole whose periphery is formed by the notch portion 6587 and the nozzle hole 6616.

The sound passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as a sound directed toward the rear side in association with the vibration of the diaphragm 6611, as opposed to the sound output as a sound directed toward the front side in association with the vibration of the diaphragm 6611, and is sound that passes through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of a bass reflex speaker) and is output to the outside from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612. By providing multiple paths for outputting sound in this way, sounds with different tones can be generated simultaneously.

FIG. 244(a) is a diagram showing a partition member 6 taken along the line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa in FIG.
244(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the rear support member 6580, and the sound device 6610 taken along the line CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb in FIG. 241 , FIG. 245(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the rear support member 6580, and the sound device 6610 taken along the line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. 241 , and FIG. 245(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the rear support member 6580, and the sound device 6610 taken along the line CCXLVa-CCXLVa in FIG. 246(a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the rear support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line in FIG. 241, and FIG. 246(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partition member 6560, the illumination board 6570, the rear support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along the CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line in FIG. 241.

244(a) to 246(b) show an enlarged view of the flange portion 6582 and its surroundings. As can be seen from the enlarged view, the upper end of the illumination board 6570 and the flange portion 6582 are
A small gap is formed between the lower edge of the back support member 6580 and the lower edge of the back support member 6582. As a result, even if the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of vibrations from the acoustic device 6610, the vibrations of the back support member 6580 that cause the illumination board 6570 to vibrate (the amplitude of vibration) can be suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 244(a) and FIG. 245(a), the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 are fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a of the rear support member 6580 into the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 with the illumination board 6570 sandwiched therebetween, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the illumination board 6570.
0, the fastening insertion portion 6572 is simply aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and the fastening portion is not fixed to the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 at the fastening point.

In addition, while the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a abuts against the back surface of the illumination board 6570, the partition member 6560 is separated from the illumination board 6570 at the front and rear positions. That is, in this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is not sandwiched at the front and rear positions, so
70 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (for example, tilted).

In addition, the lower edge of the illumination board 6570 is not supported by either the rear support member 6580 or the partition member 6560. This is the same in Figures 244(b) to 246(b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large diameter insertion portion 6573 of the illumination board 6570 and the positioning hole 6581b of the rear support member 6580. Here, the large diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in an elliptical shape to such an extent that a gap can be formed below the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a is formed in an elliptical shape to such an extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (FIG. 244(a)).
)). By forming the partition member 6560 in this manner, it is possible to facilitate the assembly of the partition member 6560 to the rear surface support member 6580, as will be described below.

For example, as in the conventional art, the fastening support portion 6564 has an inner shape that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564.
When the rib 581a is formed, it becomes necessary to assemble the partition member 6560 with its top, bottom, left and right positions aligned with the rear support member 6580.

However, in this embodiment, the illuminated board 6570 is positioned in an unfixed state between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580, and therefore, when assembling the partition member 6560, it is also necessary to align the illuminated board 6570 with respect to the rear support member 6580, which may make the work difficult.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a and the positioning hole 6581b are formed in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape formed by halving an oval shape), so that assembly is possible even if the top and bottom are not aligned accurately.

As an example of the assembly order, first, the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 is attached to the illumination board 65
The illumination board 6570 is attached to the partition member 6560 so that the illumination board 6570 is inserted into the large diameter insertion portion 6573 of the partition member 6560.
It is not necessary to set the position in the longitudinal direction of 73, but any position may be used.

In this embodiment, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are formed in positions where they can abut against the illuminated board 6570, so that when the illuminated board 6570 is assembled to the partition member 6560, misalignment of the illuminated board 6570 with respect to the partition member 6560 is significantly suppressed.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partition member 6560 is fastened to the fastening support portion 65 of the rear support member 6580.
81a. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not need to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be at any position. In other words, it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning to the extent that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) passes through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242), positioning with a sufficiently large allowable width in the vertical direction), so that the efficiency of the work of inserting the fastening portion 6564 into the inner side of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a can be improved.

Next, the partition member 6560 is moved relative to the rear support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (up and down direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, the fastening portion 6564 is aligned with the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a, and the fastening screw is screwed in (see Figure 244 (a)).

In this state, even if the position of the illumination board 5670 is misaligned, it will be aligned with the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 by descending under its own weight to a position where the large diameter insertion portion 6573 is supported by the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 (see Figure 244 (b)).

Thus, according to this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is disposed between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member without being fixed, which is an assembly mode that generally makes it difficult to align the illumination board 6570, but by forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a and the positioning hole 6581b in a vertically long oval shape (or a shape that is half an oval shape), it is possible to improve assembly efficiency. In addition, even if the illumination board 5670 is misaligned, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight,
It is possible to prevent the effect of the lighting effects produced during play from decreasing over a long period of time due to misalignment of the illumination board 5670.

The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG.
The main components of the enlarged hole 6562a are arranged in an inverted T shape (four holes, see FIG. 241) in the left-right center, and direct holes 6562b (eight holes, see FIG. 241) arranged in a generally gourd shape (approximately jar shape) on the outside of the enlarged hole 6562a. The direct holes 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG. 263.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through hole which allows light emitted from the first lighting section 6574 to pass through, with the portion forming the outer edge raised toward the front side and the inner wall sloped in such a way that the spacing between the opposing walls increases as it approaches the front side (the side away from the light source).

This makes it possible to regulate the irradiation width of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574. In other words, the way the light is presented to the player can be changed by the design aspect of the enlarged hole 6562a (the inclination angle of the inner wall, the raised height, etc.).

In this embodiment, the tip of the portion raised toward the front side of the enlarged hole 6562a is raised to a position where it abuts against the blocking portion 6521c of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (see FIG. 263). This allows the light that has passed through the enlarged hole 6562a to be incident on the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

246(a) illustrates the screw insertion portion 6581c, and FIG. 246(b) illustrates the positioning long hole 6581d. The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are
As described above, the front units 6520 to 6550 are formed in a manner that gradually inclines downward as they approach the front side, and the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the inclination direction, and are fastened and fixed.

The front units 6520 to 6523 are inserted along the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning slot 6581d.
550, the degree of freedom in arranging the components can be improved compared to when they are assembled in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in Fig. 246(a), the illumination board 6570 can be positioned to cover the front area of the screw insertion portion 6581c, so that the size of the illumination board 6570 can be secured. On the other hand, the rear lower area of the front units 6520 to 6550 can also be widely used, so that the size of the rear box portion 6584 and the acoustic device 6610 to be housed can be secured.

In particular, in this embodiment, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed in such a manner that they are inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides where the diaphragm 6611 of the speaker is arranged, so that the diaphragm 6611 can be formed large (FIG. 235 and FIG. 24).
See 6).

As shown in Figures 246(a) and 246(b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning long hole 6581d slope downward toward the front side, while the upper edge is formed along the front-to-rear direction (is not sloped), because the extraction direction of the resin mold used to manufacture the rear support member 6580 is the front-to-rear direction.

In other words, in order to simply configure the resin mold (by configuring it from two resin molds that are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are provided in the rear support member 658
6581a and the fitting recess 6583a formed in the first embodiment.
Since the screw insertion portion 658 is set in the same front-rear direction as the direction in which the fitting recess 6583a is formed,
1c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed in an irregular shape (a shape that changes depending on the formation direction (depth direction) of the hole).

In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw is inserted into the rear fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240 ) and is a portion that receives a load generated during fastening. The shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c is such that the thickness of the upper edge of the portion where the load associated with fastening is applied is
Since the hole is thinner toward the center, an imbalance in load is likely to occur between the upper edge and other areas, and depending on the conditions of use and the number of years of use, the fastening screws may become loose.

To prevent the fastening screw from loosening, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be used.
This results in higher costs due to the difference in the required quality of fastening screws used in other fastening locations. In other words, if fastening screws with a large head diameter are used only in the problematic fastening location, costs will increase because the fastening screws cannot be made into common parts, while if fastening screws with a large head diameter are used in all fastening locations, the amount of material required for the fastening screws will increase, resulting in higher costs in terms of material costs.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610, which is arranged opposite the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581c, is provided with a non-slip plate portion 6621 which is part of a portion formed in a recessed shape (recessed) in the front wall 6620 and is formed as an upper plate portion parallel to the plate portion on which the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed.

The retaining plate 6621 can secure an area in which the head of the fastening screw can be positioned between the rear support member 6580 and the back surface support member 6580. In addition, since the retaining plate 6621 is positioned in a direction in which the head of the fastening screw will be displaced if the fastening screw becomes loose, it is possible to restrict further advancement of the fastening screw and prevent the fastening screw from falling out.

The retaining plate 6621 is formed with a dimension that allows a slight gap between the head of the fastening screw and the retaining plate 6621 when the fastening screw is not loosened, thereby making it possible to prevent the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted via the head of the fastening screw.

On the other hand, when the fastening screw becomes loose, the advancement of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled.
When sound is output from 10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front units 6520 to 6550 via the heads of the fastening screws.

In addition, the front wall 6620 has a fastening support portion 6581a (
The contact avoidance recesses 6622 are recessed at the rear positions of the through holes (see FIG. 242).
The contact avoidance recess 6622 is inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and is connected to the fastening portion 6564 (FIG. 243
The recess is formed to a degree that makes it possible to avoid contact with the head of the fastening screw that is screwed into the recess (refer to the reference numeral 144 of the axial bore 145 of the axial bore 146 of the axial bore 147 of the axial bore 148 of the axial bore 149 of the axial bore 150 of the axial bore 151 of the axial bore 152 of the axial bore

This makes it possible to prevent vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the fastening screw. In addition, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the same as the front-rear direction in which the resin mold is removed, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction, and sufficient fastening force can be generated.
The possibility of the fastening screw inserted through the retaining plate 6621 becoming loose is low. However, if the fastening screw becomes loose, the contact avoidance recess 6622 will have the same function as the above-mentioned retaining plate 6621.
can be generated.

That is, when the fastening screw becomes loose, the advancement of the fastening screw is restricted by contact, and the gap between the contact avoidance recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled.
When sound is output from 10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front units 6520 to 6550 via the heads of the fastening screws.

As described above, by configuring the device to be able to grasp the transmission of vibrations caused by contact between the head of the fastening screw and the anti-slip plate portion 6621 or the contact avoidance recess 6622 due to loosening of the fastening screw, it is possible to notice the loosening of the fastening screw and make it easier to avoid a situation in which the fastening screw is left loose.

For example, the device may be configured so that abnormal noise occurs due to the transmission of vibrations, or the device may be configured to detect vibrations.

As described in FIG. 244(a) to FIG. 246(b), in this embodiment, the illumination board 65
70 is disposed close to the rear support member 6580, but is disposed without being fixed to the rear support member 6580. This allows the acoustic device 6610 and the illumination board 6570 to be disposed close to each other across the rear support member 6580, while preventing the vibration of the rear support member 6580 caused by the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 from being transmitted to the illumination board 6570, causing the illumination board 6570 to crack.

Here, the partition member 6560 is a performance portion of the illumination board 6570 (i.e., the lighting portion 6574 to
Since the partition member 6560 is connected to the rear support member 6580 at a position other than the partition member 6560 (6576), the area of the connecting portion between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 tends to be narrowed in order to ensure a large proportion of the performance portion on the surface of the illumination board 6570.

Therefore, there is a tendency for the partition member 6560 to be insufficiently fixed, and without measures, the vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 may be transmitted to the partition member 6560 via the rear support member 6580, which may cause the partition member 6560 to vibrate, resulting in poor performance, loosening of fastening points, or damage to the partition member 6560 itself.

In contrast to this, in the present embodiment, the partition member 6560 is fixed from another direction to suppress vibration of the partition member 6560. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 247 is a schematic side view of the upper performance device 6500. In FIG.
247 shows the fastening points, fastening directions, and fastening orientations of each component of 00. That is, in Fig. 247, the fastening screws are shown as T-shapes, and the horizontal line of the T-shape shows the head of the fastening screw,
The vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the threaded portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, the upper stage device 6500 is configured such that the front and bottom surfaces of the rear units 6560 to 6580 are surrounded by the front units 6520 to 6550.
However, the upper cover member 6510 is only fastened to the rear support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550, and is not fastened or fixed to the partition member 6560.

This avoids reinforcing the rigidity of the top cover member 6510. In this embodiment, since the top cover member 6510 is formed in a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when vibrations of the acoustic device 6610 are transmitted via the rear support member 6580, the top cover member 6510 is likely to be displaced (deformed) in the thickness direction (vertical direction).

This displacement (deformation) shortens the front-to-rear width of the top cover member 6510. For example, when the top cover member 6510 is deformed so as to be curved with respect to the front-to-rear center, the front-to-rear distance between the insertion holes 6512 formed separately in the front and rear is shortened. This generates a load that displaces the partition unit 6540 toward the rear side, and a compressive load in the front-to-rear direction can be applied to the partition member 6560.

In other words, the partition member 6560 can be clamped between the rear support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 to apply a load, so that even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to vibrations of the acoustic device 6610, the vibrations can be suppressed.

Here, even if the width of the top cover member 6510 in the front-rear direction is shortened, the partition unit 6540
When the lower side of the partition unit 6540 is displaced toward the front side (displaced toward the side away from the partition member 6560), the load applied from the partition unit 6540 to the partition member 6560 tends to be insufficient,
There is a risk that the effect of suppressing vibration of 0 will be insufficient.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the guided unit 6550, so that the lower side of the partition unit 6540 can be prevented from displacing toward the front side.
It is possible to sufficiently secure the load applied to 0.

At this time, the fastening screws are fastened and fixed at the end of the guided unit 6550 in a direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552 (see Figure 254 (a)), so that the direction of transmission of vibrations from the acoustic device 6610 via the rear support member 6580 can be set to a direction along the plate surface of the extended plate portion 6552.

This makes it possible to suppress the bending deformation of the guided unit 6550, and to suppress the front and rear fastening points from moving in the front-rear direction.
Even if vibration is transmitted to the partition unit 6540, the function of suppressing displacement of the lower end of the partition unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

As shown in FIG. 247, by devising the fastening points, the acoustic device 66 which is likely to generate vibrations can be
The illumination board 6570 is arranged adjacent to the sound device 6610 (or the rear support member 6580) while preventing damage to the illumination board 6570 by arranging the illumination board 6570 in an unfixed state.
) to prevent the partition member 6560 from moving away from the partition member 6560 beyond the allowable distance, thereby suppressing vibration of the partition member 6560 caused by the vibration being transmitted to the partition member 6560.

In other words, the durability of the illumination board 6570 placed in close proximity to the audio device 6610 can be improved while improving the shape retention performance of the upper performance device 6500.

In addition, one of the purposes of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in this embodiment is to
That is, the upper cover member 6510 corresponds to the amount of displacement of the fastening portion 6513.
This is because the rear side is fixed to the bracket and extends in the front and rear like a thin plate, and therefore the bracket is prone to bending deformation in a manner in which the amount of deformation on the front side is greater than that on the rear side.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end of the top cover member 6510, due to the shape of the top cover member 6510, it may be curved and displaced with the rear end as the starting point, with the center of the radius of curvature located below the top cover member 6510. In this case, a tensile load in the front-rear direction is applied to the top cover member 6510 itself, while a compressive load is applied to the other members located below it.

The direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper cover member 6510, so that on the back side which is the base end, it is along the front-to-back direction, but as the amount of displacement increases (towards the front side), it begins to follow a direction that slopes downward towards the front side relative to the front-to-back direction.

In this embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is set to a direction that slopes downward toward the front side in the front-to-back direction, so that the fastening direction of the fastening screw can be made closer to the direction of the compressive load generated by the displacement of the upper cover member 6510.

This not only makes it possible to generate sufficient resistance to compressive loads at the fastening position, but also reduces the component of the compressive load applied in the direction that shears the fastening screw (the direction perpendicular to the fastening direction), thereby preventing breakage of the fastening screw.

The fastening screw, whose fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side, is
550, the board guide unit 6550 is disposed adjacent to the underside and backside of the illumination board 6570 (see the screw insertion portion 6581c in FIG. 246(a)). In this embodiment, the illumination board 6570 is arranged in a non-fixed manner and is configured to be easily displaced, and the board guide unit 6550 can limit the allowable displacement of the illumination board 6570. In other words, even if the illumination board 6570 is displaced, if the displacement amount becomes excessive, the board guide unit 6550 can be abutted against the board guide unit 6550, thereby restricting excessive displacement of the illumination board 6570.

In addition, since the board guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the rear side (the side where the acoustic device 6610 is disposed) of the illumination board 6570, it is possible to particularly suppress the displacement of the illumination board 6570 toward the rear side. This makes it possible to suppress the illumination board 6570 from approaching the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration generating source.

In this embodiment, the fastening portions (the fastening support portion 6581a, the insertion hole 6565a, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the front-rear direction are concentrated on the left-right center side (see FIG. 242 ), and the fastening portions (the screw insertion portion 6581c, the insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) whose fastening direction is along the direction that slopes downward toward the front side are concentrated on the left-right center side (see FIG. 242 ).
They are clustered on the left and right outer sides (see Figures 242 and 256), and are not arranged close to each other.

This makes it possible to suppress the effect of deformation (displacement) occurring in one fastening part on the other fastening part. In other words, even if a fastening part along the front-to-rear direction loosens and displaces in the front-to-rear direction, the affected area can be limited to the fastening part along the front-to-rear direction, so it is possible to avoid a load being applied to the fastening part along the downwardly inclined direction in a direction inclined to the fastening direction (along the front-to-rear direction). This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the screw.

In addition, by fixing the central left and right sides, which are longer in the front-to-back direction, with fastening parts whose fastening direction is along the front-to-back direction, the resistance of the upper performance device 6500 to loads in the downward direction can be improved.

On the other hand, it is thought that fastening portions whose fastening direction slopes downward toward the front side are more likely to have a lower resistance to loads in the downward direction than fastening portions whose fastening direction runs along the front-to-back direction. In this embodiment, however, by arranging the fastening portions whose fastening direction slopes downward toward the front side on the left and right outer sides that are short and formed along the front-to-back direction, it is possible to minimize the effect of the reduced resistance to loads in the downward direction while securing the placement area for the illumination board 6570 and the audio device 6610.

Figure 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580 taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in Figure 241(a), with a specific portion shown enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 248, the illumination board 6570 has a large-diameter insertion portion 6573 and a partition member 6560.
In the left-right direction, the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 abuts against the left and right sides of the partition member 6560 and the left and right sides of the rear support member 6580.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the durability of the illumination board 6570 and adjust the ease with which displacement occurs. The following will explain in order. First, the improvement of the durability of the illumination board 6570 will be explained.

Here, when the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated board 6570 abut against the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 at positions that coincide with each other at the front and rear, if for some reason (such as an error during resin molding or poor fastening) the distance between the abutting portions of the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 becomes shorter than the plate thickness of the illuminated board 6570, a compressive force will be applied to the illuminated board 6570, and if the load applied is large, there is a risk that the illuminated board 6570 will crack.

Furthermore, even if no compressive force is applied to the illuminated board 6570 during assembly, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 while in motion may cause the rear support member 6580 to vibrate, which may apply a load (e.g., a load in the compressive direction), and this load may cause the illuminated board 6570 to crack.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the positions at the front and rear surfaces of the illuminated board 6570 where they abut against the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 do not coincide at the front and rear (there are points where they abut at offset positions), so even if a load is applied to the illuminated board 6570 in the manner described above, the load does not compress the illuminated board 6570, but rather bends the illuminated board 6570.
Therefore, since the illumination board 6570 can be flexed and deformed to deal with the problem, the possibility of the illumination board 6570 cracking can be reduced.

Next, adjustment of the tendency of the illumination board 6570 to be displaced will be described.
The fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partition member 6560 are inserted through these portions to prevent misalignment, and in this embodiment, these are arranged closely together near the center on the left and right sides (see FIG. 243).

In addition, since the illumination board 6570 abuts (contacts) the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, contact resistance between the illumination board 6570 and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is ensured. Since the large diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed with a larger diameter than the fastening portion 6564, naturally, the contact area becomes larger and sufficient friction resistance can be ensured.

Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the occurrence of displacement of the illumination board 6570 near the left and right central portion of the illumination board 6570. Therefore, even if the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 causes the surrounding members to vibrate, it is possible to easily maintain the direction of the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 of the illumination board 6570.

In contrast, the left and right sides (especially the lower side) of the illuminated board 6570 do not have the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 or the fastening portion 6564 arranged thereon, and no compressive load is generated from the front or rear, making it easier for displacement to occur compared to the central left and right sides of the illuminated board 6570.

Therefore, when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 causes the surrounding members to vibrate, the illumination board 65
This makes it easier to change the direction of light emitted from the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 6576 of 70.

In this embodiment, the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged in pairs on the left and right.
The vibration mode of the illumination board 6570 changes based on the vibration mode of the illumination board 6570. That is, when sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 to vibrate the right side of the illumination board 6570 preferentially, when sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 to vibrate the left side of the illumination board 6570 preferentially, or when sound is output from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610 to vibrate the illumination board 6570 preferentially.
By vibrating both the left and right sides of the illumination board 6570, the illumination board 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes.

Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be described. Fig. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550, and Fig. 250 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520 to 6550.
249 and 250, reference numerals for detailed configurations are omitted for ease of understanding.

Figures 249 and 250 show a disassembled state of an optical transmission unit 6520 that transmits light incident from the first lighting section 6574 of the illumination board 6570 to the front side, an outer frame member 6530 that is formed to surround the optical transmission unit 6520 and form an outer frame, a partition unit 6540 that abuts the partition member 6560 at the front and rear and similarly partitions the light, and a guided unit 6550 that is guided to the upper surface of the protrusion portion 6584a of the rear support member 6580.

When performing light emission via the front units 6520 to 6550, the optical transmission unit 6520
receives light from the first illumination unit 6574, the partition unit 6540 receives light from the second illumination unit 6575, and the guided unit 6550 receives light from the third illumination unit 6576. Next, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

Figure 251(a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, Figure 251(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, Figure 252(a) is a front view of the partition unit 6540, Figure 252(b) is a rear view of the partition unit 6540, Figure 253(a) is a front view of the board guiding unit 6550, and Figure 253(b) is a rear view of the board guiding unit 6550.

FIG. 254(a) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVA-CCLIVA in FIG. 251(b), and FIG. 254(b) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVA-CCLIVA in FIG.
FIG. 254(b) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 254(c) is a cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along the line CCLIVc-CCL
A cross-sectional view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 taken along line IVc.

255 is an exploded front perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550. As shown in FIG.

The partition unit 6540 includes a milky white member 6541 formed of a milky white light-transmitting resin material and formed in a substantially inverted triangle shape in a front view, and a through hole 65 formed in the center of the milky white member 6541 in the front-rear direction so that the rear portion of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be inserted therethrough.
42, a pair of fastening portions 6543 which are portions that protrude inward from the through hole 6542 and to which the optical transmission unit 6520 is fastened, a plurality of insertion holes 6544 into which fastening screws for fastening the outer frame member 6530 can be inserted, a pair of post-guiding fastening portions 6545 which are cylindrically extended toward the rear side and into which fastening screws passing through the insertion holes 6565a of the partition member 6560 are fastened, and a pair of box-shaped light receiving portions 6541 formed in a box shape that is open toward the rear side along the left and right lower edges of the milky white member 6541.
546, a plate-like portion extending downward from the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, and a plurality of insertion plate portions 6547 formed with insertion holes 6547b through which fastening screws for fastening and fixing the partition unit 6540 to the plate guide unit 6550 can be inserted, and a milky white member 6541 formed in a shape covering the front side of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 from a colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin material.
and a transparent covering member 6548 which is fitted and supported by the transparent covering member 6548.

The partition unit 6540 has a front edge that is formed in a curved shape that bulges toward the front when viewed from above, similar to the top cover member 6510, and is formed into an approximately inverted triangle when viewed from the front, and is formed into an approximately arc shape with its center located on the rear side when viewed from the side (see Figure 254 (a)).

The milky white member 6541 has a pair of fastening portions 6541a on the upper surface thereof to which fastening screws are fastened, the fastening screws being inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper cover member 6510.
a and the upper cover member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear side in accordance with the inclination of the abutment plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) of the optical transmission unit 6520 described later. This allows the front end of the through hole 6542 and the abutment plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258(b)) to be abutted on each other, thereby preventing the attitude of the optical transmission unit 6520 from changing.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed with a fastening hole facing the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. The post-guiding fastening portion 6545 is formed with a fastening hole facing the rear side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the rear side.

The box-shaped light receiving unit 6546 is a portion disposed opposite the second illumination unit 6575 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the illumination board 6570. The box-shaped light receiving unit 6546 has a front bottom rear surface and a lower plate upper surface,
The decoration has a jagged shape with a short width from side to side. This jagged shape is formed by a concave-convex shape in which protrusions having a triangular cross section are closely aligned.

This shape makes it possible to scatter (diffuse) light incident from the rear side, so that the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering its front surface can emit light uniformly when viewed from the front.

The jagged shape is described as a process applied to the surface onto which light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a process in which dots are densely formed, or a process in which wavy stripes are formed.

The insertion plate portion 6547 mainly comprises a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape with an open upper portion when viewed from behind, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-to-rear direction, and a protruding rib 6547c that has a semi-elliptical shape surrounding the lower side of the insertion hole 6547b and protrudes toward the front side.

By aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547 a with the front fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550 , the partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550 .

The insertion plate portion 6547 is a portion formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted into the screw-in portion 6554a (see FIG. 256 ) and receives a load generated during fastening.
The shape of the insertion hole formed in 547 is such that, in relation to the direction in which the resin mold is removed (in this embodiment, the front-to-back direction), the thickness of the upper edge of the part where the load associated with fastening is applied becomes thinner toward the center of the hole (see FIG. 254(b)).

In this case, since the load is likely to be unbalanced between the upper edge and the other parts,
If small misalignments occur repeatedly between the plate guide unit 6550 and the plate guide unit 6550, the fastening screws may become loose.

To prevent the fastening screw from loosening, a fastening screw with a large head diameter may be used.
This results in higher costs due to the difference in the required quality of fastening screws used in other fastening locations. In other words, if fastening screws with a large head diameter are used only in the problematic fastening location, costs will increase because the fastening screws cannot be made into common parts, while if fastening screws with a large head diameter are used in all fastening locations, the amount of material required for the fastening screws will increase, resulting in higher costs in terms of material costs.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the plate guide unit 6550 for the partition unit 6540
The plate guide unit 6 is constructed to prevent positional deviation at multiple points.
The screw-in portion 6554a of the plate guide unit 6550 is supported from below by the protruding rib 6547c of the partition unit 6540, thereby preventing the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced downward (see Figures 247 and 254 (b)).

Secondly, the front upper end of the board guide unit 6550 is engaged with the locking protrusion 6
548b of the transparent covering member 6548. As a result, the partition unit 6550 of the board guide unit 6550 is engaged with the lower end of the transparent covering member 6548 on the rear side thereof (see FIG. 254(b)).
540, it is possible to prevent the displacement toward the front side.

Thirdly, the lower end of the insertion plate portion 6547 is inserted into the main body resin member 655 of the plate guide unit 6550.
254(b) , the plate guide unit 6550 is configured to abut against the upper surface of the partition unit 6540 at its surface. This makes it possible to prevent the plate guide unit 6550 from being displaced upward relative to the partition unit 6540.

These first to third abutment structures are mainly used to separate the partition unit 6550 of the board guide unit 6550.
Since the displacement relative to 540 can be suppressed, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screw-in portion 6554a can be suppressed.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a generally V-shape when viewed from the front, and includes a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a extending in a plate shape toward the rear side at the lower edge connecting portion of the V-shape, and a plurality of locking protrusions 6548b protruding in a plate shape from the upper edge toward the rear side. The left and right central portions of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 are cut out from the rear side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a enters to fill this gap.

The upper surface of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a is formed with a jagged decoration, similar to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546. As a result, even if the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is designed to have a cutout in the center, the cutout portion can be complemented by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a, so that the transparent covering member 65
It is possible to make the light emit evenly across the left and right direction of the light source 48 .

The jagged shape is described as a process applied to the surface onto which light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a process in which dots are densely formed, or a process in which wavy stripes are formed.

Here, in this embodiment, as described below, the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward as it approaches the rear side (see Figure 254 (c)), and in order to form the lower edge plate portion 6548a at a plane position with the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward as it approaches the rear side, just like the lower bottom surface of the guided unit 6550.

If this inclined surface is to be formed in the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546, the punching direction of the mold for forming the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546 becomes complicated. That is, while the punching direction is the front-to-rear direction near the through hole 6542, the punching direction is a direction that inclines upward toward the back side near the lower edge of the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546, which not only increases the difficulty of mold design but also may complicate the manufacturing process.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but instead by a transparent covering member 6548 (see FIG. 254(c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, a white partition member 6560 is disposed opposite to the back side of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 that constitutes the inclined surface, so that the player can visually recognize the entire transparent covering member 6548 in a uniform color (white).

As a result, the removal direction of the molding die for the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front-rear direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 that covers the front side of the milky white member 6541 is made to be inclined toward the side that interferes in the front-rear removal direction (the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in the direction that goes into the inside of the partition unit 6540 when viewed from the front), while
The light emitted by the light emitting element 8 can be visually recognized by the player in a uniform light emission manner.

In other words, the partition unit 6540 is tapered toward the rear side (the gap between the top and bottom becomes narrower), and the rear portion of the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6542 adjacent to each other are in contact with each other.
Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface of the lower edge plate portion 6548a of the light emitting element 48 (see the enlarged view of Figure 240), a light emission performance with a uniform light emission pattern can be achieved.

In this case, it becomes difficult to set the removal direction of the molding die for the transparent covering member 6548 to the front-rear direction, but in the first place, there is no part formed along the front-rear direction in the transparent covering member 6548. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a (the upward inclination direction) as the removal direction of the molding die, the transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured using a manufacturing process that is no different from a manufacturing process in which resin is molded using a die whose removal direction is the front-rear direction (one direction).

Therefore, the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and the area visible through the transparent covering member 6548 can be made to emit light uniformly.

The locking protrusion 6548b is a portion that is locked to the upper edge of the bulging portion toward the front side at a position corresponding to the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking protrusion 6548b is locked to the milky white member 6541.

The guided unit 6550 is made of a colored opaque resin material and has a generally V-shape when viewed from the front. The guided unit 6550 is a main resin member 6551 that is guided along the upper surface of the protruding portion 6584 a of the rear support member 6580.
The main body resin member 6551 includes an extension plate portion 6552 extending in a plate shape toward the rear side along the lower edge of the left and right central portion of the main body resin member 6551, a pair of left and right exhaust pressure through holes 6553 formed at the rear side end portion of the extension plate portion 6552, and a partition unit 6
A plurality of front side fastening parts 6554 are arranged opposite to the insertion plate parts 6547 of the main body resin member 6551 and fastened with fastening screws, and a rear support member 6580 is arranged along the left and right lower edges of the main body resin member 6551.
The rear side fastening parts 6555 are fastened by fastening screws passing through the screw insertion parts 6581c (see FIG. 241(a)), a plurality of insertion rib parts 6556 are protruded between the rear side fastening parts 6555 and are inserted into positioning long holes 6581d (see FIG. 241(a)) of the rear support member 6580, and a plurality of through holes 6556 are drilled in the front-rear direction in the left and right arm parts.
557 and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed from a colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin material and fitted and fixed in the multiple through holes 6557.

The guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the protruding portion 6584a of the rear support member 6580 in a direction that corresponds to the direction in which the die is removed. That is, each component is formed in a direction that is inclined upward toward the rear side, or in a direction perpendicular to the inclination direction.

The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the sound device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 and then reaches the player.

The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is, in the range facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235 ),
Instead of being formed as a single large hole, it is formed in the shape of multiple small holes (dividing the area into smaller areas). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting thin wires such as piano wires.

In addition, the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed so that the hole width becomes narrower as it approaches the end of the hole and as it approaches the back side. This allows the hole to be clogged with thin wires,
After the thin wire is inserted into the exhaust pressure through hole 6553, the resistance to the movement of the thin wire can be increased when the thin wire is advanced further or hooked onto a specific member and a load is applied thereto.
Since the time required for fraudulent conduct can be extended, fraudulent conduct can be suppressed.

The front fastening portion 6554 has a screw-in portion 6554a into which a fastening screw is fastened and a screw-in portion 65
and a pair of positioning walls 6554b formed on the left and right sides of the guide unit 654a. The positioning walls 6554b are disposed opposite each other at a distance slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall 6547a. Therefore, by inserting the U-shaped wall 6547a into the positioning walls 6554b, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned.

The light receiving member 6558 is a portion that is guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction) and has a guided portion 6558a having an L-shaped cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of rear box-shaped portions 6558 formed so as to be able to fit into the through-hole 6557 and bulging out on the front side of the guided portion 6558a and opening on the rear side.
b and the central end portion of the guided portion 6558a (the end portion on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 face each other).
and an upper edge extension portion 6558c extending in a plate-like shape toward the rear side along the upper edge of the cover 6558.

The light receiving member 6558 is a third illumination unit 6576 (see FIG. 241(b)) of the illumination board 6570.
The rear box-shaped portion 6558b is a member that receives light irradiated from the through-holes 6557. The inner surface of the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed with the decorative jagged shape described above. This allows the light to be refracted many times inside the rear box-shaped portion 6558b, so that the number of LEDs corresponding to the through-holes 6557 is small (
In Fig. 241 (b), even if there are only 1 or 2 LEDs, the light can be seen as uniform across the entire rear box-shaped portion 6558b. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice that there are only a few LEDs (the feeling of a point light source can be reduced).

As described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in a position inclined with respect to the front-rear direction (attached in a position inclined so that the light travels in the direction in which the board guide unit 6550 is assembled (attached in a position in which the light receiving surface intersects with the assembly direction of the board guide unit 6550)).
Therefore, the light emitted in the front-to-back direction from the LED arranged in the third lighting section 6576 of the illumination board 6570 on the back side of the light-receiving member 6558 can be refracted as it passes through the light-receiving member 6558 and can travel in a direction that slopes diagonally downward toward the front side of the light-receiving member 6558.

The jagged shape is described as a processing applied to the surface onto which light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a processing in which dots are densely formed, or a processing in which wavy stripes are formed.

The rear box-shaped portions 6558b are formed such that the portions arranged on the left and right outer sides have shorter bulges toward the front side than the portions arranged on the left and right inner sides.
The front surface of the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 connected thereto are
50 may be formed along the curved shape of the front side edge.

The upper edge extension 6558c is a portion for facilitating assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partition member 6560. The main body resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 arranged opposite the partition member 6560 is formed from a flat shape, particularly in the extended plate portion 6552 in the central portion, and since there is no partition, it is difficult to align it with the partition member 6560. In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper edge extension 6558c serves as a partition that partitions the area above the extended plate portion 6552, so that the partition member 6560 can be easily aligned.

Returning to FIG. 249, the second illumination units 6575 arranged on the left and right sides have been described.
Hereinafter, the optical transmission unit 6520 that receives the light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 will be described.

FIG. 257(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, FIG. 257(b) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG.
258(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed from a colored (orange in this embodiment) light-opaque resin material, and includes a main body portion 6531 formed in a generally inverted triangular shape when viewed from the front, and the main body portion 653
An opening 6532 is provided in the center of the housing 1 in a generally gourd-like (or generally jar-like) shape in the front-rear direction;
A protruding rib 6533 that is shaped to follow the lower edge of the main body 6531 and protrudes in a rib-like manner from the rear surface side;
The partition unit 6540 is provided with a plurality of fastening portions 6534 that are disposed at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the partition unit 6540 and are formed so that fastening screws can be screwed into the insertion holes 6544 .

Since the main body 6531 of the outer frame member 6530 is opaque to light, the portion inside the outer shape through which light passes is limited to the opening 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 is as follows:
This corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the illumination unit 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed in a shape similar (enlarged shape) to the shape surrounding the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241(a)).

The light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 passes through the transparent tubular member 6521, but since the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed to differ depending on the front and rear positions, a player viewing from in front of the opening 6532 can see a light pattern that differs from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574.

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that its width increases as it approaches the opening 6532 (so that both left and right edges are inclined in the width direction), so that the light viewed from in front of the opening 6532 around the position where it overlaps with the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 at the front and rear is viewed in a pattern that is wider horizontally compared to the arrangement pattern of the first lighting section 6574.

In this way, according to this embodiment, it is possible to narrow the range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind it while widening the range of light visible to the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect in which the light is visible over a wide range while suppressing the size of the first lighting unit 6574 (and the illumination board 6570). Details of the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 will be described later.

The protruding rib 6533 is cut out at a position corresponding to the locking protrusion 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and is disposed at a location where the formation of the locking protrusion 6548b is omitted. In this embodiment, the protruding rib 6533 and the locking protrusion 6548b are formed on the same curve when viewed from the front (they are formed on a curve of the same shape as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530 so as to complement each other).

FIG. 259 is an exploded front perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the optical transmission unit 6520. The optical transmission unit 6520 mainly comprises a transparent tubular member 6521 formed in a bottomed tube shape extending in the front-to-rear direction from a colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin, a flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange-like manner around the outer periphery along a plane located at a midpoint of the transparent tubular member 6521, a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup shape from colorless, light-transmitting resin to cover the transparent tubular member 6521, a shielding member 6524 formed in a tube shape from a colored (white in this embodiment) light-opaque resin material so that the opposite portion of the side where the cup-shaped member 6523 is covered can be inserted, a contact plate portion 6525 formed as a flat surface portion at the front end of the shielding member 6524 that can come into face-to-face contact with the flange portion 6522, and an outer frame extension portion 6526 extending toward the front side along the left and right edges and lower edge of the abutment plate portion 6525.

The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member that extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and has a curved shape with left and right wall portions that are constricted inward. The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 has a rear outer shape portion 6521a formed from an outer shape that overlaps with the LEDs arranged in the first lighting unit 6574 in the front-rear direction, a plurality of light receiving protrusions 6521b protruding from the rear outer shape portion 6521a to the rear side at positions where the LEDs are arranged to face each other, and a rear outer shape portion 6521b protruding from the rear outer shape portion 6521a to the rear side at positions where the LEDs are arranged to face each other.
a blocking portion 6521c that blocks the area surrounded by the LEDs 6521a in a plate-like shape; a plurality of light-passing holes 6521d that are formed in the blocking portion 6521c at a position opposite to the LEDs; a main body tube portion 6521e in which at least the left-right width of the upper wall and the distance between the left and right walls are increased toward the front side; and a frame-shaped extension portion 6521e that extends toward the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body tube portion 6521e.
521f.

The light receiving protrusion 6521b is a portion that is inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the partition member 6560. In other words, by shortening the gap between the partition member 6560 and the illumination board 6570 (FIG. 263),
), light from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 can be made incident on the light receiving protrusion 6521b without leaving a gap as large as the thickness of the opposing plate portion 6561 of the partition member 6560. This makes it easier to generate total reflection.

In this way, the light irradiated from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 is incident at a close distance and travels toward the front side through total reflection, whereas the light irradiated from the LED of the second illumination unit 6575 and the third illumination unit 657
The light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 656 travels through the air only in the area inside the recess of the box-shaped light receiving unit 6546 and the rear box-shaped unit 6558b, which are recessed in a direction away from the LED, and causes the front side wall of the box-shaped light receiving unit 6546 and the rear box-shaped unit 6558b to emit light.
Compared to the light emitted from 74, the light emitted from the second irradiating unit 6575 and the third irradiating unit 6576 has a lower intensity and can be visually recognized by the player as uniform light.

In addition, the partition unit 6540 in which the box-shaped light-receiving portion 6546 is formed is formed from a light-transmitting milky white resin material, and the light-receiving member 6558 in which the rear box-shaped portion 6558b is formed is formed from a colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin material, so that the appearance of the light irradiated from the second irradiation portion 6575 and the third irradiation portion 6576 can be gradually changed.

The frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is formed in a shape generally similar to the rear outer shape portion 6521a. However, due to the interposition of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e, the outer shape of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is smaller than that of the rear outer shape portion 6521a.
It is made larger than the outer shape of 1a.

Therefore, compared with the size of the area in which the LEDs are arranged in the first illumination unit 6574,
This can be visually recognized by the player as a light that illuminates a large area.

The shape of the extended tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is such that each point is disposed at approximately the same distance from the bottom rear surface (back surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, the shape of the extended tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is designed depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523.
This allows the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f to be illuminated in a uniform light emission mode.

The flange portion 6522 has a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a drilled with a size that allows the circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see Figure 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540 to be inserted therethrough.

The cup-shaped member 6523 has a flat back side and is formed into a bottomed cylindrical shape capable of supporting the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping with the insertion hole 6522a in the front-to-rear direction, and mainly comprises a pair of end fastening portions 6523a to which the fastening portion 6543 is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw inserted into the bottom, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusing shape (a decorative shape consisting of protrusions with a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape, and a flat surface portion 6523c formed into a flat surface in the area surrounding the decorative shape portion 6523b.

The decorative shape portion 6523b diffuses light irradiated from the back surface of the cup-shaped member 6523. This allows a player looking at the cup-shaped member 6523 from the front side to see it as if it is emitting light from its surface, thereby improving the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 when viewed from the front.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in an area facing the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light passing through the inside of the thickness of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f can pass to the front side without being diffusely reflected. This allows the player to visually recognize the light passing through the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f as a clear light.

The shielding member 6524 has a rear end formed from a shape equivalent to the central tube portion 6566 of the partition member 6560, and is provided with a pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a that are recessed in a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 (see Figure 251 (a)) of the partition unit 6540.

The abutment plate portion 6525 is fastened to the fastening portion 6543 of the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 251(a)).
The casing 6525 has a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a drilled with a size that allows the circular screw-in portion of the casing 6525 to be inserted therethrough.

The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed with an inner shape that is slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to be able to accommodate the flange portion 6522, and the extension length is determined by the thickness of the flange portion 6522 and
The length is set to be equal to or greater than the thickness of the edge of the rear plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 added thereto.

That is, in the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520, the flange portion 6522 and the plate-shaped portion of the cup-shaped member 6523 are housed inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258(a)).
Therefore, the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be stably maintained. Furthermore, the circular screw-in portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251( a )) of the partition unit 6540 is inserted into the insertion hole 6
525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the end fastening portion 6523a are inserted and fastened in that order, so that the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the optical transmission unit 6520, the light incident on the rear end surface of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main body tube portion 6521e, travels forward, and is emitted from the front end portion of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f, and can be irradiated onto the cup-shaped member 6523.
523, the distance between the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is set short, so that the cup-shaped member 6523
The light can be seen by a player viewing the light from the front side of the cup-shaped member 6523 in a line-like light emission mode (an outline line along the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523). This makes it possible to highlight the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen in the transparent covering member 6548 described above, so that a sharp light emission performance can be performed. This will be described in detail below.

Fig. 261 illustrates six views of a transparent cylindrical member 6521, and Fig. 262 illustrates six views of an optical transmission unit 6520 in an assembled state. Note that, since the optical transmission unit 6520 is configured symmetrically, the left side view is omitted.

Figure 261(a) is a front view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, Figure 261(b) is a top view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, Figure 261(c) is a bottom view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, Figure 261(d) is a right side view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and Figure 261(e) is a rear view of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.

Fig. 262(a) is a front view of the optical transmission unit 6520, Fig. 262(b) is a top view of the optical transmission unit 6520, Fig. 262(c) is a bottom view of the optical transmission unit 6520, Fig. 262(d) is a right side view of the optical transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L, and Fig. 262(e) is a rear view of the optical transmission unit 6520.
) in order to facilitate understanding, the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted from the illustration.

261(b) and 261(d), the transparent cylindrical member 6521 has a shape in which the left and right sides and the lower bottom side are inclined so that the left and right width and the up and down width gradually increase toward the front side. On the other hand, since the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-back direction, the part that interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction cannot be formed as an inclined surface.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main body tube portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere with the movement of the resin mold on the rear side in the removal direction (rearward).
If the inner surface of outer portion 6521a were to be inclined in a similar manner, it would interfere with the movement of the resin mold on the rear side, so the inner surface of outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface that follows the front-to-rear direction (a non-inclined surface) (see Figure 263).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main body tube portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when moving the front side plastic mold in the pull-out direction (forward). However, if the outer surface of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f formed on the front side thereof is similarly inclined, it would interfere when moving the plastic mold, so the outer surface of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f is formed as a surface that runs along the front-to-back direction (a non-inclined surface) (see Figure 263).

Here, in this embodiment, the boundary between the resin mold on the front side, which is punched forward, and the resin mold on the back side, which is punched backward, is formed by the blocking portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, and the above-mentioned inclined surface is formed on one of the front and rear sides, and the above-mentioned non-inclined surface is formed on the other side, and the blocking portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522 are formed on the side where the front-to-rear length of the non-inclined surface is shorter compared to the front-to-rear length of the inclined surface.

This allows the transparent cylindrical member 6521 to have a gradually increasing shape as described above, while suppressing the change in plate thickness due to the change in the front-rear position, and therefore suppresses the change in the propagation mode of light passing through the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 due to the change in the front-rear position. Therefore, when light is made to enter the inside of the wall, total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, and then the transparent cylindrical member 6
This makes it easier for total reflection to be repeated until it reaches the front end of 521, and suppresses light leakage, so that a player looking at the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side can see a sufficient amount of light.

The guide recess 6524a is formed so that the vertical width becomes smaller (tapered) toward the front side. This makes it easier to insert the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 255) into the guide recess 6524a when assembling the optical transmission unit 6520 and the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 249 and FIG. 250), thereby making the assembly less difficult, compared to when the vertical width is the same in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 263 is a rear unit 65 taken along the line CCLXIII-CCLXIII in FIG.
263 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, the acoustic device 6610, and the optical transmission unit 6520. For convenience of explanation, Fig. 263 shows a state in which the optical transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are arranged in an assembly position relative to the rear units 6560 to 6580.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light receiving protrusion 6521b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is
The diameter of the hole 6562b of the counter plate 6560 is such that a slight gap is created when the counter plate 6561 is inserted into the hole 6562b of the counter plate 6560, and the tip of the hole 6562b is inserted into the surface of the counter plate 6561.
The distance between the first illumination portion 6574 and the light receiving protrusion 6521b can be set without being affected by the plate thickness.

The light receiving protrusion 6521b is formed in a plate shape with the direction along the shape of the rear outer shape portion 6521a as the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the short direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction is set to be approximately equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 arranged opposite to it.

This allows only light traveling approximately straight from the first lighting section 6574 to the front side (light with a very small angle relative to the optical axis) to be incident in the short direction of the light receiving protrusion section 6521b, and prevents other light from being incident.

The light thus incident tends to travel toward the front side through the thick interior of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.
Even when reflected at the boundary, total reflection is likely to occur because the angle between the transparent tubular member 6521 and the direction of the light is small, so it is possible to prevent the light from weakening before reaching the front end of the transparent tubular member 6521.

The longitudinal dimension of the light-receiving protrusion 6521b is set to be approximately twice the lateral dimension. Therefore, in the direction of expansion of the surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 and having a large angle from the optical axis can also be made incident on the light-receiving protrusion 6521b, compared to the case where the direction of expansion is explained in the thickness direction of the surface.

On the other hand, the rear outer portion 6521a that is coupled to the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b does not abut on the opposing plate portion 6561, but is disposed with a slight gap therebetween.
Of the light emitted from 4, light that enters from the end face of the rear outer portion 6521a (light that has a large angle between the optical axis and the direction in which the light travels) is reflected, thereby preventing it from being seen by the player.

That is, the player can see only the light that passes through the light receiving protrusion 6521b and travels directly through the thickness of the main body tube 6521e, and other light (weak light) can be cut off. In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle based on the optical axis of the light that is incident on the main body tube 6521e.

The light emitted from the LED of the first illumination unit 6574 that is not disposed opposite the light receiving protrusion 6521b passes through the inside of the enlarged hole 6562a and enters the light passing hole 6521d of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.
(see FIG. 260) and is irradiated onto the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). This light does not pass through the thickness of the member, but travels through the air, so the player can visually recognize it as a uniform light.

The raised end of the enlarged hole 6562a abuts against the blocking portion 6521c at the front and rear, so that leakage of light from a gap between the raised end and the blocking portion 6521c can be suppressed.

Next, referring to Fig. 264, the appearance of light that has passed through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 of the optical transmission unit 6520 will be described. Fig. 264(a) is a schematic front view showing the arrangement of the first illumination section 6574, and Fig. 264(b) is a schematic front view showing the arrangement of light that is visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520. In the description of Fig. 264, Fig. 261 and Fig. 263 will be referred to as appropriate.

First, as described above, the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, and therefore the light (light irradiated from the eight edge light-emitting portions 6574a on the outer left and right sides) that passes through the thickness of the transparent tubular member 6521 (total reflection) appears to be an enlarged shape (roughly gourd-shaped) formed by the arrangement of the edge light-emitting portions 6574a.

In addition, as described above, the light in the thickness direction of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 proceeds to the front end without being weakened, so that the edge light emitting portion 6
The position corresponding to the arrangement of 574a emits strong light (light like a point light source).

Here, the distance between the light sources is longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitters 6574a in terms of the strong light emission distance L17b when viewed from the front of the optical transmission unit 6520, so that the light can only be seen as a point if left as is, and the light presentation effect is likely to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the strong light emission distance L17b of the light that is seen being longer than the actual distance L17a between the edge light emitters 6574a, and is difficult to solve even if the number of LEDs actually arranged is increased or the interval between the LEDs is narrowed.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the light from the edge light-emitting portion 6574a is caused to travel radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (the longitudinal direction of the light-receiving protrusion portion 6521b), so that the light emitted from adjacent LEDs overlaps, reinforcing the intensity of the light visually perceived at the position between the light sources.

As a result, even in a location (between LEDs) where the LEDs of the first illumination section 6574 are not arranged, a line-shaped light can be visually recognized when viewed from the front of the optical transmission unit 6520 ( FIG. 2
(See imaginary lines in 64(b)). This improves the state in which the light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two LEDs arranged on the left and right sides of the lower end of the first illumination unit 6574 are
262. The side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 of the
Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps with the light of the LED above it, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521e2 and is reflected by the frame-shaped extension portion 65
It overlaps with 21f at the center of the lower left and right.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264(a), a L
Although the ED is not provided, as shown in FIG. 264(b), the optical transmission unit 6
Through 520, a line of light can be seen in the center of the lower left and right.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the shape formed by the light visually recognized through the optical transmission unit 6520 is enlarged while the arrangement space of the first illumination unit 6574 is reduced.
This reduces the degree to which light is perceived as a point, allowing light to be perceived as a clear line.

When the optical transmission unit 6520 is viewed from the front, the interior is made difficult to see due to the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-shaped member 6523, so it is difficult to grasp the position where the light traveling inside the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 intersects. Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is uncertain, it is possible to prevent the performance effect of the light emission performance from decreasing.

In addition, if the position where the lights overlap is near the tip of the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source is arranged between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. In other words, since it is possible to create the illusion that more LED light sources are arranged than the actual number of LEDs, even with a small number of LEDs, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission presentation to the same degree as when a large number of LEDs are used.

A surface light emitting unit 6574b (first illumination unit 6574b) is disposed inside the transparent cylindrical member 6521 when viewed from the front.
The light emitted from the four LEDs on the left and right central sides of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 passes through the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. In addition ... passes through the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 due to the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a (FIG. 2) that is disposed opposite to the surface light emitting portion 6574b.
45(b)) in a radial direction.

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b is, when viewed from the front,
The light is visually recognized as a surface light spreading as an area A17 centered on the LED of the cup-shaped member 6523b. The light is also recognized as a surface light spreading as a decorative shape portion 6523b (see FIG. 2) having a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523.
When the light is irradiated onto a surface (see FIG. 60), it is diffusely reflected and is recognized as a planar light when viewed from the front.

That is, the area where the light radiated radially from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches (FIG. 264(b)
The decorative shape portion 6523 on the rear side of the cup-shaped member 6523 is not limited to the above.
523b is formed (for example, the area A17 in the front view and the frame-shaped extension portion 6521f
The area between the

In this way, according to this embodiment, the light irradiated from the first illumination unit 6574 can be visually recognized as edge-like light and planar light, which have different impressions. In addition, by configuring the light to be diffusely reflected at the boundary between the edge-like light and the planar light,
It is possible to avoid the boundary from becoming dark, and therefore it is possible to change the perceived light impression stepwise and continuously.

Here, various aspects are exemplified as the change in the impression of the light that is visually recognized. For example, it may be a change in the impression of the light emission itself, such as brightness or darkness or blinking, or it may be a change in the color of the light.

The jagged shape is described as a process applied to the surface onto which light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a process in which dots are densely formed, or a process in which wavy stripes are formed.

The partition units 6540 visible on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 in a front view have a curved shape that bulges out toward the front side in a front view and a side view, as described above.
The light that is visually recognized on the left and right sides of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in directions away from the cup-shaped member 6523 to the left and right and up and down (directions in which the light diffuses from a point on the rear side).

Furthermore, as described above, the light receiving members 6558 arranged on the left and right below the partition unit 6540 have their front side edges positioned toward the rear side as they move outward to the left and right, and due to the mounting position, light passing through the light receiving members 6558 travels in a direction away from the cup-shaped member 6523 to the left and right and up and down (in a direction diffusing based on a point on the rear side).

This gives the player the impression that the light gets larger as it gets closer to the player, compared to when the light is only directed forward and backward, improving the effect of the light presentation.

Next, the horizontal performance device 6700 will be described with reference to Fig. 265 to Fig. 281. Fig. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and Fig. 266 is a sideways performance device 6700.
FIG.

In addition, in FIG. 265, the upper performance device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower tray unit 6400 are omitted, and the view from the right diagonal front in a state in which the side performance device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body part 10014a is shown. In FIG. 266, the side performance device 6700
The view from the left diagonal front is shown.

As shown in FIG. 265 and FIG. 266, the horizontal performance device 6700 includes a metal main body 10014a
This is a performance device disposed on the front side of the left and right vertically long portions of the stage, and is formed from a vertically long oval shape cut in half when viewed from the side.

Note that the horizontal performance device 6700 is arranged in a pair on the left and right sides with devices of similar shape, but since the internal configuration is identical, we will explain the horizontal performance device 6700 on the right side in detail and omit the explanation of the horizontal performance device 6700 on the left side.

In order to visually confirm the layered relationship between the front and rear layers at the top end portion of FIG. 266, the horizontal production device 6700
is configured in such a manner that covering units 6730 to 6760 that cover the front side of a base member 6710 are disposed on the front side of the base member 6710 that is fitted into the metal main body portion 10014a.

The fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal main body 10014a will be described. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal main body 10014a, a positioning protrusion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the base member 6710 is inserted into a positioning recess 10014e formed in the metal main body 10014a to position the base member 6710, and a fastening screw inserted into a through hole of the metal main body 10014a is fastened to a fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the base member 6710.

Of the components of the horizontal performance device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened to the metal main body 10014a. In other words, of the components of the horizontal performance device 6700,
Except for the base member 6710, there are no components fastened to the metal body portion 10014a.

As shown in Fig. 266, on the side facing the play area, the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750 is formed to a position where it completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (a position where it is flush with the rear end of the base member 6710).
As shown by the left unit in FIG. 5, the unit is disposed close to and opposite to the glass unit 16 at the front and rear.

By arranging them in this manner, it is easy to create an effect in which the light emitted from near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the rear side of the glass unit 16 can be viewed as a single unit.

FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the horizontal performance device 6700, and FIG.
267 and 268 show an exploded rear perspective view of the cover unit 6730-6700.
760 is shown disassembled from the base member 6710 toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 267, an illumination board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 capable of emitting light are mounted is disposed on the front side of a base member 6710.
The covering units 6730 to 6760 are attached to the base member 6710 so as to cover the front side of the base member 6710.

That is, the horizontal performance device 6700 is a device that functions as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and is a light-emitting side unit composed of an illumination board 6720 whose illumination is controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 and a base member 6710 that supports the illumination board 6720;
A covered unit 673 that receives the light emitted from the light emitting unit and allows the player to see it.
0 to 6760, and a light receiving unit composed of the light receiving units 0 to 6760. First, the light emitting unit will be described.

FIG. 269( a ) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720 .
FIG. 269(b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(c) is a left side view of the base member 67
269(b) is a right side view of the base member 6710, and FIG.
269(e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269(f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710 and the illumination board 6720 taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf in FIG. 269(a).

As shown in FIG. 269( a ) to FIG. 269( f ), the base member 6710 is attached to the illumination board 6
A flat support plate portion 6711 is disposed on the rear side of the illumination board 6720 and faces the illumination board 6720.
A frame-shaped protrusion 6712 is provided in a frame shape along the outer shape of the illumination board 6720 and protrudes toward the front side of the support plate 6711, and a positioning protrusion 6712 is provided in a frame shape along the outer shape of the illumination board 6720 and protrudes toward the front side from the frame-shaped protrusion 6712.
13, a plurality of insertion holes 6714 into which fastening screws can be inserted at positions outside the illumination board 6720 and close to the illumination board 6720 in a front view, a pair of fastening parts 6715 into which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6736 are fastened at two positions above and below, and the support plate part 6
It mainly comprises a plurality of alignment holes 6716 which are drilled as long vertical holes in part 711 (the step portion of the outer frame plate portion 6717) to the right of the frame-shaped protrusion portion 6712 (the opposite side of the window portion surrounding the playing area, the opposite side of the glass unit 16), an outer frame plate portion 6717 which extends in the form of a stepped plate from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 toward the rear side, and an inner frame plate portion 6718 which extends in the form of a plate from the left edge of the support plate portion 6711 toward the rear side.

The frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 has a protruding tip disposed opposite the rear portion of the illumination board 6720 near the outer shape thereof, and is in surface contact with the illumination board 6720. As a result, a gap is provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the rear side of the illumination board 6720 except for the portion near the outer shape thereof (see FIG. 269(f)). Therefore, a layer of air (thermal insulation layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the illumination board 6720.

As a result, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a and heat transferred to the metal main body portion 10014a can be transferred to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transferred to the illuminated board 6720 can be suppressed (kept low), thereby suppressing the occurrence of problems such as the illuminated board 6720 becoming hot and malfunctioning.

The positioning protrusions 6713 are fitted into positioning holes 672 formed in two locations on the illumination board 6720.
2 is inserted into the base member 6710 to align the illumination board 6720 with respect to the base member 6710.
20 in an assembled state (see FIG. 269(a)), the positioning protrusion 6
A positioning hole 6722 is drilled at a position corresponding to 713 .

The insertion holes 6714 are provided for fastening portions 67 of the flat plate members 6740 of the covering units 6730 to 6760.
44, and the fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is provided with a cup-shaped portion that can be fitted from the front (
See FIG. 268 ), which is formed so that they can be aligned and is a through hole through which a fastening screw is inserted to fasten them in place.

The fastening portion 6715 is fitted into and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271 ), and is formed so as to be able to screw in a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6736. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened to the fastening portions 6715 at two locations, top and bottom.

The alignment hole 6716 is provided for the projections 6743, 676 of the covering units 6730 to 6760.
The covering units 6730 to 6760 are each formed of a pair of thin plate-like members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) arranged opposite each other on the left and right, and are formed in a roughly cup shape that opens to the rear side (see FIG. 268), and are fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear side (edge portion).

Here, the joints between the base member 6710 and the covering units 6730 to 6760 are located in the parts (external parts) that the player can touch, and can be displaced by the load applied by the player (for example, the load generated by the player colliding with the player).
Since the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 is fixed to the curved plate member 6750 at its thin rear end, when a load is applied in the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750, the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750 is deformed or
There is a risk of misalignment with respect to the base member 6710.
The number of fixing points (fastening points) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, but this may result in a problem of increased man-hours for assembly work.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, while an increase in the number of fixing points is suppressed, by inserting the protrusions 6743, 6766 into multiple alignment holes 6716, it is possible to suppress misalignment (misalignment in the left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 relative to the base member 6710.

In addition, the inner surface (left surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 is
Therefore, even if a load is applied to the left by the player on the flat plate member 6740, the flat plate member 6740 abuts against the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712, so that the movement of the flat plate member 6740 is restricted.
0 can be prevented from being deformed or displaced relative to the base member 6710.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the durability of the horizontal performance device 6700 while suppressing an increase in the number of steps in the assembly work. Note that the main body plate portion 6741 is provided with an unevenness forming portion 6741a in which a fine uneven shape is formed in the contact area with the frame-shaped protrusion portion 6712, thereby dispersing the load, which will be described in detail later.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 is disposed opposite to and in surface contact with the right side surface of the metal main body portion 10014a, and covers the right side of the metal main body portion 10014a.
This can prevent the player from seeing it.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a recessed along the front-rear direction from a part of the alignment hole 6716. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the rear side of the alignment hole 6716.

The support recess 6717a is formed with dimensions that fit with the protrusion 6743 or are arranged opposite to each other with a small gap when the horizontal performance device 6700 is in an assembled state (see FIG. 265). Therefore, compared to the case where the protrusion 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area that can support the protrusion 6743 can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a), so that the flat plate member 6740 can be prevented from shifting position relative to the base member 6710. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported relative to the base member 6710.

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion that is arranged opposite to the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750, and is formed in a surface that faces the play area (inside).

The illumination board 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and has a main plate portion 6721 formed in a plate shape.
The main body plate portion 6721 has two positioning holes 6722 formed therein.
The display device mainly comprises a display panel and a display unit. 1, a plurality of LED chips D1 are mounted in an arbitrary pattern.

The main body plate portion 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened. That is, the positioning protrusions 6713 (see FIG. 269(c)) are inserted into the positioning holes 6722 to restrict left-right and up-down movement, and the front-rear movement is restricted by being sandwiched between the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 280).

The LED chip D1 in this embodiment is implemented as a similar chip, but is divided into two types based on the relationship with the area shown by the imaginary line in Figure 269 (a) as the boundary between the areas showing the configuration of the light receiving side units 6730 to 6760.

That is, the LED chip D1 mainly comprises an edge light emitting portion D1a disposed inside the imaginary frame shown in Fig. 269(a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b disposed outside the imaginary frame. The difference between these light emitting portions D1a and D1b corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode visually recognized by the player, that is, the light emitted from the light emitting portion D1a is easily visually recognized as a line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, while the light emitted from the light emitting portion D1b is easily visually recognized as a surface-shaped light, and will be described in detail later.

Next, a description will be given of the covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) disposed on the front side of the illumination board 6720. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760.

As is clear from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268 being disassembled into FIGS. 270 and 271, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are made of a light-transmitting resin inside and capable of refracting light passing through the inside. The light-receiving member 6730 covers the illumination board 6720 from the front side.
and is configured so that the front of it is covered by other components.

FIG. 272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272(b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730.
FIG. 273(a) shows the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272(a).
273(b) is a partial enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272(b).

FIG. 274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG.
274( a ) is a rear view of the light receiving member 6730 , and FIG. 274 ( b ) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 .

FIG. 272(a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as seen from the left side, and FIG.
FIG. 274(c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right side, FIG. 274(a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right side, and FIG. 274(c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right side.
272(b) is a rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760 as viewed from the left side.

The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is connected to the illumination board 67
20 and arranged to face the illumination board 6720; an inner extension portion 6732 extending from the inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207) to the rear side so as to be bent; an outer extension portion 6733 extending from the outer edge (right edge in FIG. 274) of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state to the rear side so as to be bent; and a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) long rib-like protruding portions protruding from the rear side of the light receiving surface portion 6731. ), a plurality of fins 6735 (five in this embodiment) extending in a long fin shape from the front of a position where the base end (the side that is connected to the light-receiving surface portion 6731) of the long rib 6734 matches the front and back of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, a plurality of insertion holes 6736 that are located at the upper and lower ends and through which fastening screws that are fastened to the fastening portion 6715 (see Figure 269 (a)) are inserted, and a fitting portion 6737 formed in a shape that can fit with the decorative protrusion portion 6751a (see Figure 276) of the curved plate member 6750.

The light receiving surface 6731 is a portion that refracts the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and has a decorative pattern with complex cuts formed on the back side. The decorative pattern has long protrusions arranged along multiple concentric circles of different diameters, centered on the point that faces the surface light emitting unit D1b (see the enlarged view of FIG. 274(b)). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter protrusion at the position that faces the surface light emitting unit D1b is inclined outward (it is inclined in a manner that refracts light emitted from behind outward along the surface of the light receiving surface 6731, and the small-diameter protrusion at the position that faces the surface light emitting unit D1b is inclined outward (see FIG. 274(b)).
75(b)), and the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is similarly inclined (inclined in such a manner that light traveling along the surface of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is refracted toward the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, FIG.
See 5(b)).

Therefore, the light irradiated from the surface light-emitting portion D1b refracts near the axis of the long protrusion, travels toward the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, and then refracts further at a large diameter point away from the axis of the long protrusion and travels toward the front side, thereby allowing a wide area of the light-receiving surface portion 6731 to be illuminated.

Furthermore, on the front side of the light-receiving surface portion 6731, a basic shape which is triangular when viewed from the front and has approximately the center bulging toward the front side is formed in a regularly and densely aligned manner, and the light-receiving surface portion 6731 is provided with a decorative recessed portion 6731a which is recessed in an approximately hexagonal pyramid shape at the front side position of the surface-emitting portion D1b.

The decorative recessed portion 6731a can vary the intensity of the surface light emitted from the light receiving surface 6731 (can vary the intensity in stages). That is, the shape of the decorative recessed portion 6731a causes light to be collected toward the center of the recess, so that the decorative recessed portion 6731a can be visually recognized as emitting a stronger light than other portions.

The inner extension portion 6732 and the outer extension portion 6733 are configured so that their extended ends abut the illuminated board 6720 at the front and rear, and while the extended end of the inner extension portion 6732 abuts the illuminated board 6720 over the entire top and bottom, the extended end of the outer extension portion 6733 has a portion which does not abut.

That is, the outer extension portion 6733 has a separation end 6733a that is separated from the illumination board 6720 without abutting it by forming the extension length to be short about the plate thickness of the illumination board 6720. In this embodiment, the separation end 6733a allows air to flow in and out of the area between the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730, so that heat can be prevented from building up.

In addition, when the inner extension portion 6732 abuts against the illumination board 6720 over the entire top and bottom, the LED chip D1 arranged to protrude from the surface of the main plate portion 6721 of the illumination board 6720 cannot be arranged behind the inner extension portion 6732. Therefore, the thicker the plate thickness of the inner extension portion 6732, the more limited the area in which the LED chip D1 can be arranged.

In contrast, a gap is formed between the separated end 6733a of the outer extension portion 6733 and the illumination board 6720, so that the LED chip D1 is
Therefore, the thickness of the outer extension portion 6733 can be sufficiently ensured, and the arrangement area for the LED chip D1 can be maximized.

The left and right walls of the outer extension 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the wall on the left side (opposite the outer extension 6733) of the inner extension 6732 has an uneven shape formed by closely aligning semicircular protrusions in cross section. This causes the light emitted to the left through the inner extension 6732 to be surface-emitted (spread out radially), making it easier for the player to see the uniform light.

As described later, a part of the light emitted from the illumination board 6720 to the front side passes through the inner extension portion 6732, and the intensity of the light changes in each region.
At the peripheral positions of the end of the fin 6735, light D1m is seen which is a combination of light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a and traveling through the long rib 6734 and light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b. However, at positions away from the fin 6735, the light traveling through the long rib 6734 does not reach the fin 6735, and light D1p emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b is seen, and light D1m is the light D
It is visually recognized as a light stronger than 1p (the intensity of the light corresponds to the length of the arrow).

This allows the intensity of light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 to be changed for each of the vertically arranged regions. Note that the difference in the state of light visually recognized through the inner extension portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of light emitted from the edge light-emitting portion D1a different from the color of light emitted from the surface light-emitting portion D1b, the color of light viewed through the inner extension portion 6732 can be made to change for each of the areas lined up above and below.

The long rib 6734 is positioned on the front side of the edge light-emitting section D1a (see Figure 269 (a)) when the horizontal performance device 6700 is assembled (see Figure 265), and is formed with the same thickness without tapering at the front and back, and mainly comprises a plurality of straight ribs 6734a formed in an approximately straight line when viewed from behind, and V-shaped ribs 6734b which are bent and formed into an approximately V shape when viewed from behind.

The side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike a case where the surface of the long rib 6734 is formed with linear jagged edges, when light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734, it does not spread (does not emit light from the surface) but travels in one direction.
Since it is possible to prevent the side surface of 734 from emitting light uniformly, when the horizontal presentation device 6700 is viewed from the left or right direction, the degree to which the light irradiated from the edge light-emitting unit D1a and the light irradiated from the surface light-emitting unit D1b are perceived as being mixed together can be reduced.

In other words, the long rib 6734 is formed long in the vertical direction and is configured as a part that can be seen from the left and right directions, while light that passes through the long rib 6734 is prevented from reaching the player's eyes in the form of surface emission, making it easier for players viewing the horizontal performance device 6700 from the left and right to see the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface emission section D1b.

The jagged shape is described as a process applied to the surface onto which light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a process in which dots are densely formed, or a process in which wavy stripes are formed.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged in pairs, one above the other, and are formed to extend in a direction that inclines toward the vertical center position as it moves toward the left (the center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). The left end portion 6734a1 is connected to the inner extension portion 6732, while the right end portion 6734a2 is connected to the inner extension portion 6732.
is spaced apart from the outer extension portion 6733.

Therefore, light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can pass through the left end portion 6734a1 and directly enter the inner extension portion 6732, while the energy of light passing through the right end portion 6734a2 decreases in the gap between the right end portion 6734a1 and the outer extension portion 6733.

This results in different brightness levels being seen near the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a. That is, the area seen through the inner extension 6732 appears bright, while the area seen through the outer extension 6733 appears dark in comparison.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right directions is reduced.
The light that enters the inner extension portion 6732 through 734 a 1 is emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732 .

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is easily visible in the left and right directions only if it passes through the left end portion 6734a1 and enters the inner extension portion 6732.
Near 734a1, the color and brightness of light emitted from the edge light-emitting unit D1a is visible, and at positions away from the left end portion 6734a1 (positions in between), the color and brightness of light emitted from the surface light-emitting unit D1b is visible, so that players viewing the horizontal presentation device 6700 from the left and right can see light of different colors and brightness.

The V-shaped rib 6734b is disposed at the vertical center position and is disposed at the intermediate connecting portion 673 near the bending position.
4b1 is connected to the inner extension portion 6732, while both ends 6734b2 are connected to the outer extension portion 673
The bending position and the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted from each other because
This is because the edge light-emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269(a)) is disposed opposite the bending position.

That is, the position for receiving the light irradiated from the edge light emitting portion D1a is set to the intermediate connector 6734b1.
By shifting the V-shaped rib 6734b from the connecting position, it is possible to prevent the light (main light) emitted linearly in the front-rear direction from the edge light emitting portion D1a from entering the connecting position.
Therefore, the loss of light incident on the fins 6735 can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734b has a function similar to that of the linear rib 6734a described above. That is, light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through the intermediate connection portion 6734b1 and can be directly incident on the inner extension portion 6732, while the energy of light passing through both end portions 6734b2 decreases in the gap between the outer extension portion 6733 and the V-shaped rib 6734b.

This results in different brightness levels being seen near the left and right ends of the V-shaped rib 6734b. That is, the area seen through the inner extension 6732 appears bright, while the area seen through the outer extension 6733 appears dark in comparison.

As described above, in this embodiment, surface emission through the side surfaces of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, making it difficult to see light from the left and right directions, while light that enters the inner extension portion 6732 through the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b is surface emitted through the surface of the inner extension portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitter D1a is easily visible in the left and right directions only if it passes through the intermediate connector 6734b1 and enters the inner extension 6732. In other words, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitter D1a is visible in the vicinity of the intermediate connector 6734b1.
At positions away from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (positions between the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1), the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b can be visually recognized.
A player who sees 00 can be made to see light of a different color or brightness.

The fin 6735 is formed so that its thickness decreases from the extended base end toward the tip end.
It mainly comprises straight ribs 6734a and corresponding curved tip fins 6735a, and V-shaped ribs 6734b and corresponding bent tip fins 6735b.

The curved tip fin 6735a has curved edges on the top and bottom inner sides, and is
A light diffusing portion is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (jagged) notches on the right side (the outer surface of front frame 10014), and the right side (the outer surface of front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip of the bent tip fin 6735b has an inclined surface that slopes toward the rear side as it moves from the upper and lower ends to the upper and lower center, and intersects with the front side of the bending position of the V-shaped rib 6734b, and a light diffusion section is formed by densely forming triangular wave-shaped (jagged) notches on the left side (the inner surface of the front frame 10014), and the right side (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left side. In particular, in the distal curved fin 6735a, the end on the left side is connected to the light receiving surface 6731, so that the light with a large amount of light (main light) irradiated from the edge light emitter D1a and emitted from the front end of the distal curved fin 6735a is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface 6731. Therefore, the light is directed toward the inner extension portion 6732 side (back side, base side)
This makes it possible to make the left side of the light receiving member 6730 brighter.

In addition, the long rib 6734 and the inner extension portion 6732 are joined behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is joined to the light receiving surface portion 6731, and the inner extension portion 6732 can also be illuminated by light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734. That is, in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is joined to the light receiving surface portion 6731, a light emission effect can be produced by combining the light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 and the light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

The jagged shape is described as a process applied to the surface onto which light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a process in which dots are densely formed, or a process in which wavy stripes are formed.

The difference in the formation of the left and right sides of the fin 6735 makes it possible to change the manner in which light passes through the side surfaces. That is, the surface luminous effect of the notches allows the light passing through the left side surface to be visually recognized as uniform light, whereas the surface luminous effect does not apply to the light passing through the right side surface, so the light passing through the right side surface can be visually recognized as localized light. Furthermore, it goes without saying that the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 function as reinforcing parts that reinforce the base member 6710 due to their shapes.

In the assembled state of the horizontal performance device 6700 (FIG. 266), one of the insertion holes 6736 is exposed, and only two are disposed at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light receiving member 6730 can be displaced.

As a result, when the positional relationship between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 and the edge light emitting portion D1a of the LED chip D1 becomes misaligned (for example, due to vibration caused by the player's operation or the front frame 100
Since the maintenance work of returning the horizontal performance device 6700 to its original position (if the position shifts due to vibrations caused by opening and closing the horizontal performance device 6700) can be performed without disassembling the horizontal performance device 6700, it is possible to improve maintainability (the degree of difficulty is low and the time required is reduced).

The fitting portion 6737 is recessed in the left-right direction with an inclined shape that tapers toward the rear side, and is a part that aligns and adjusts the position and posture of the light receiving member 6730 with the components of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 by fitting it together, and is further recessed and has a single recess 6737a.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the location of the recess 6737a on the inner extension portion 6732 side (the location where the fastening portion 6753 is disposed) is limited to one location (reduced), thereby suppressing positional and posture deviations between the light receiving member 6730 and the components of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730. This will be described in detail below.

Here, when fastening the left and right side surfaces of the horizontal production device 6700, the fastening screws do not transmit light, so the more fastening points there are, the more likely shadows are to be cast.
Even if the surface area of 00 is increased, the light will be divided at the fastening points, and there is a risk that the lighting effect will be reduced. On the other hand, reducing the number of fastening points will lead to a decrease in support force,
There is a risk that the horizontal presentation device 6700 will be more likely to deform from its base due to the load applied by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the fastening point is limited to the recess 6737a, while the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protrusion 6751a (see FIG. 276) are fitted together, thereby maintaining the supporting force.

As a result, the horizontal performance device 6 on the gaming area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side
The durability of the horizontal presentation device 6700 can be improved while reducing the number of fastening points of 700 (in this embodiment, the fastening points arranged between the main body curved portion 6751 as the light presentation point and the illumination board 6720).

In this embodiment, the recess 6737a is formed so that light can travel to the rear side. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 275(a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal performance device 6700 taken along the line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274(b), and FIG. 275(b) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal performance device 6700 taken along the line CCLXXVb-
A cross-sectional view of the light receiving member 6730 taken along the line CCLXXVb.

As shown in FIG. 275A, the recess 6737a is disposed on the same cross section as the intermediate connector 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b disposed opposite the edge light emitter D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which light irradiated from the edge light emitter D1a can travel (see FIG. 2).
81), and the striped decorative portion 6751 is attached via the fastening portion 6753 that is fitted into the recess 6737a.
That is, the light is formed to be able to travel toward the rear side of the illumination board 6720 (the opposite side to the light irradiation direction).

Here, the fastening portion 6753 is the location where the fastening screw is fastened, and since the fastening screw is prone to casting a shadow, it is thought to be unsuitable for light-emitting effects. However, in this embodiment, intermediate connecting portions 6734b1 are formed on both the top and bottom of the fastening portion 6753, so that the light avoids the fastening screw above and below, allowing the player to see the light while minimizing the impact of the fastening screw casting a shadow.
In other words, by shining light from both above and below the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visible to the player can be made to disappear (diminished).

275(b) shows an enlarged view of the light receiving surface 6731. Of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, the light traveling in a direction with a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front-rear direction enters the inside of the light receiving surface 6731 while being gently refracted, and is further refracted and concentrated when passing through the decorative recessed portion 6731a. This makes it possible to increase the emission intensity of the light visually recognized through the decorative recessed portion 6731a.

In this way, the light emission pattern on the front side of the light receiving surface 6731 is such that, with the decorative recess 6731a at its center, where the light intensity is increased by concentration, the light intensity decreases as the distance from the decorative recess 6731a increases.

At this time, since the light is concentrated in the decorative recess 6731a, the light is concentrated toward the optical axis side compared to when the surface light emitting portion D1b is viewed individually.
In comparison with the case where the light irradiated from b is visually recognized without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visually recognized light can be increased.

That is, due to the action of the light receiving surface 6731, the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b is more intense than when the light is directly seen (light visible near the decorative recessed portion 6731a).
The light intensity is gradually reduced until it is lower than the intensity of light irradiated from 1b when viewed directly.
The player can see these lights of different intensities through the surface of the light receiving surface 6731.

270, a description will be given of the member covering the light receiving member 6730. A cup-shaped member with an open rear side is disposed on the front side of the light receiving member 6730. A flat plate member 6740, a curved plate member 6750, and a cover member 6760 that constitute the cup-shaped member will be described.

FIG. 276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG.
278 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is an exploded rear perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760. FIG.

The flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right directions and joined together by fastening, and then the cover member 6760 is assembled from the front side and fitted, thereby fixing each member inseparably.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed from a colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin, and includes a main plate portion 6741 formed from a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an oval shape, and a flat plate portion disposed on a plane shifted in parallel to the left side from the plane on which the main plate portion 6741 is formed.
a mating plate portion 6742 connected to the front edge of the plate portion 6741 with a step; a plurality of protruding portions 6743 protruding from the rear end of the plate portion 6741 toward the rear side; and a plurality of fastening portions 6744 arranged at positions spaced apart from the protruding portions 6743 and configured so that fastening screws can be screwed in from the rear side.
A plurality of insertion holes 6745 are formed in the main body plate portion 6741 to a size that allows the fastening screws to be inserted therethrough.
And, mainly prepare.

The main body plate portion 6741 has a decorative shape that is recessed leftward from the left side surface and protrudes rightward from the right side surface in correspondence with the recess. The right end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 is
It coincides with the right face of 1.

The uneven portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in a manner in which hexagonal pyramids arranged so as to taper to the left are packed together, and produces an effect similar to that of a reflecting plate.
Since the strength of the rear side portion (the portion that may come into contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved, it is possible to prevent cracking or chipping due to the application of an external force.
40, contact friction can be reduced when the assembly of the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760 is slid to be assembled.

Therefore, after the horizontal presentation device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is less likely to be damaged when it is subjected to impact from a player or load when the front frame 10014 is opened or closed, thereby improving durability, and also making it easier to assemble the horizontal presentation device 6700.

The fitted plate portion 6742 has a plurality of grooves 6742a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on its right surface, and front-rear direction holes 6742b drilled in the direction along the grooves 6742a in the step between the main body plate portion 6741. The grooves 6742a and the front-rear direction holes 6742b have the function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, which will be described in detail later.

The protruding portion 6743 is a portion that is inserted into an alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269( a )) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is a portion that is inserted into an insertion hole 6714 (
This part is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the casing (see Figure 269 (a)).

In addition, the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are connected to the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730.
In particular, the fastening portion 6744 is disposed at a position close to the outer side of the right edge of the illumination board 6
720 and the light receiving member 6730 are disposed in a manner to enter the recesses of the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269(a) and FIG. 2
74(b)), the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 673 are attached to the flat plate member 6740.
The positional deviation of 0 can be suppressed.

The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws are inserted to be screwed into the curved plate member 6750, and four are provided on the top and bottom.
Since the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fastened to the curved plate member 6750, the fastening portion 6
Even if the amount of 753 is small, it is possible to avoid a lack of fixing force.

The curved plate member 6750 is disposed opposite the main plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740, curved so as to bulge leftward as it approaches the rear side, and is formed so as to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730. The curved plate member 6750 is made of a colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin and has a plurality of stripes on its inner surface.
751, a curved plate portion arranged in parallel to the right side from the main body curved portion 6751, a fitted plate portion 6752 that is connected to the front side edge of the main body curved portion 6751 with a step and is arranged to face the fitted plate portion 6742, and a plurality of fastening portions 6
753, a plurality of fastening portions 6754 formed at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6745 so that fastening screws can be screwed in, a plurality of insertion holes 6755 drilled at the front edge portion of the main body curved portion 6751 so that the fastening screws can be inserted in the front-to-rear direction, and a plurality of insertion holes 6756 drilled at the front edge portion of the fitted plate portion 6752 so that the fastening screws can be inserted in the front-to-rear direction.

The main body curved portion 6751 mainly comprises a decorative protrusion 6751a protruding rightward from the right side in a triangular shape tapering towards the rear side in the area including the fastening portion 6753 at the top and bottom center, a front-to-back hole 6751b drilled in the front-to-back direction in the front-to-back direction in the front-to-back portion of the decorative protrusion 6751a, a flat partition portion 6751c that partitions the striped shape with a flat surface, a central flat portion 6751d formed from a flat surface facing the front-to-back direction at the top-to-bottom center position, and a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in the shape of thin stripes on the inner surface near the rear end portion.

The decorative protrusion 6751a is configured as a portion that fits into the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. In addition, the front-rear direction hole 6751b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 and the curved plate member 6750.

This allows the decorative protrusion 6751a to be configured as a part that has both a function as a decorative part and a function as a part that aligns with the light receiving member 6730. This allows the curved plate member 6750 to be prevented from wobbling even in a configuration in which only one (few) fastening parts 6753 are arranged in the vertical center as in this embodiment.

The flat partition 6751c is formed in an area including a position that coincides with the front edge of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272(a)) in a front-rear view and a side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207),
Since the light passes through the flat partition 6751c, it can be seen as a clear light.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a (the side surface facing the play area) is diffused by the multiple stripe-shaped sections partitioned in the flat partition section 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the side, the light emission mode of the light can be surface emission, and the light can be viewed in a blurred manner.

The central flat portion 6751d is formed in an area including a position that coincides with the front edge of the tip bent fin 6735b (see FIG. 272(a)) in a front-rear view and a side view. As a result, when the light emitted from the front edge of the tip bent fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207),
Since the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, it can be seen as a clear light.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the play area) of the tip bent fin 6735b is diffusely reflected by the multiple stripe-shaped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bent fin 6735b is viewed from the side, the light emission mode of the light can be surface emission, and the light can be viewed in a blurred manner.

The fitted plate portion 6752, like the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, has a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the left side surface, and a main body curved portion 6751.
The groove portion 6752a and the front-rear direction hole 6752b are formed in the step between the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 676.
It has a function of aligning with 0, but details will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion that is fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through an insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is disposed in a position close to the outer side of the left edge of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is disposed in a manner that fits into the recesses of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 269(a), FIG. 274(b)).
)), it is possible to suppress misalignment of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 relative to the curved plate member 6750.

The fastening portions 6754 are portions into which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6745 are screwed, and are disposed at positions (four positions) corresponding to the insertion holes 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are disposed, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed together simply by fastening in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the flat plate member 6740 is fixed to the base member 6 by the protruding portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744.
710, it is possible to suppress wobbling of the curved plate member 6750 when the number of fastening parts 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the number of fastening parts 6753 near the rear end of the curved plate member 6750, thereby reducing the number of places where light is blocked by the fastening screws, and as a result, it is possible to ensure a large area in which the light emission effect can be viewed without being blocked.

The insertion holes 6755 and 6756 are through holes into which fastening screws can be inserted from the rear side, and guide walls 6755a, 6756a that guide the fastening portion 6764 (see Figure 279) of the cover member 6760 are formed on the front side (see Figure 277).

The guide walls 6755a and 6756a are arranged such that the inner surface, which has a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, is disposed on the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side adjacent to the flat plate member 6740).
As a result, the horizontal performance device 6700 in an assembled state (FIG. 2
Since the movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the left direction in the cover member 6760 (see FIG. 65 ) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760 , it is possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from being inadvertently removed.

The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 by sliding the fastening portion 6764 back and forth along the guide walls 6755a and 6756a. The cover member 6760 is made up of a main plate portion 6761 which is a flat plate portion shaped to cover the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740 from the right side, a curved plate portion 6762 which is formed by bending the front side edge of the main plate portion 6761 and is shaped to cover the fitted plate portion 6742 of the curved plate member 6750 from the left side, and a curved plate portion 6762 which is formed by bending the front side edge of the main plate portion 6761 and is shaped to cover the fitted plate portion 6742 of the curved plate member 6750 from the left side.
a plurality of fastening portions 6764 arranged on the rear surface of the curved plate portion 6762 and formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in through holes 6755, 6756 of the curved plate member 6750; a base end fastening portion 6765 (see FIG. 279 ) arranged on the rear surface side end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762 and formed so that fastening screws can be screwed in through holes 6714 near the upper end of the base member 6710; and a plurality of protrusions 6766 protruding from the rear surface side end of the main plate portion 6761 toward the rear surface side.

The main body plate portion 6761 is provided with a plurality of protruding ribs 6761a which are slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740 and which protrude toward the left in a rib shape extending in a straight line in the front-to-rear direction.

The protruding rib 6761a is formed to protrude rearward beyond the rear edge of the main body plate portion 6761, and this protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6742b. In other words, the protruding portion is disposed opposite the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and can regulate the movement of the main body plate portion 6741.
This prevents the flat plate member 6740 from shifting to the left relative to the cover member 6760 when the horizontal performance device 6700 is in the assembled state (Figure 265).

The curved plate portion 6762 is disposed at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6752 a of the curved plate member 6750.
The groove portion 6752a is slidable inside the groove portion 6752a and has a plurality of protruding ribs 6762a protruding toward the right in a rib shape that extends along a straight line in the front-rear direction.

The protruding rib 6762a is formed to protrude rearward beyond the rear edge of the curved plate portion 6762, and this protruding portion is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6752b. In other words, the protruding portion is disposed opposite the right side surface of the main body curved portion 6751, and the movement of the main body curved portion 6751 can be restricted. As a result, when the horizontal performance device 6700 is in the assembled state (FIG. 265), the curved plate member 67
50 can be prevented from shifting to the right relative to the cover member 6760.

The connecting extension portion 6763 is provided with a protruding rib 6763a that protrudes to the right in a position corresponding to the front-rear hole 6751b and has a rib shape that extends along a straight line in the front-rear direction.

The protruding rib 6763a is formed to protrude rearward from the back edge at the connection position of the connecting extension part 6763, and this protruding part is inserted into the front-rear direction hole 6751b. That is, the protruding part is disposed opposite the right side surface of the decorative protruding part 6751a, and the movement of the main body curved part 6751 can be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the curved plate member 6750 from shifting to the right with respect to the cover member 6760 in the assembled state of the horizontal performance device 6700 (FIG. 265).

As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a part that can restrict the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left when the horizontal performance device 6700 is in the assembled state (see Figure 265), thereby preventing the curved plate member 6750 from being inadvertently removed.

In this way, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the left-right movement of the curved plate member 6750. That is, the rightward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is restricted by the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a, 6763a and the front-rear direction holes 6751b, 6752b, and the fastening portion 6764 and the guide wall portion 6766 are secured to the cover member 6760.
The leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 is restricted by the relationship between the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

The base end fastening portion 6765 is disposed at the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate portion 6762, and is formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end of the base member 6710.
The fastening screw passing through the base member 67 is screwed into the base end fastening portion 6765.
10 is fastened and fixed thereto.

The protruding portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269(a)) of the base member 6710. In addition, the protruding portion 6766 and the base end fastening portion 6765 can suppress misalignment of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the cover member 6760 that is disposed in a position close to the right edge or the outer side of the upper edge of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view.

FIG. 280(a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the illumination board 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 taken along the line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in FIG. 272(b).
) is a base member 6710 taken along the line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb in FIG.
280(c) is a cross-sectional view of the illumination board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730.
(b) A base member 6710 and an illumination board 67 along the line CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc
20 and a cross-sectional view of the light receiving member 6730.

As shown in FIG. 280( a ), the front-rear distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is
The height of the LED chip D1 is restricted to the extent that it protrudes from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is incident on the long rib 6734 without leakage.
In addition, the light can be easily guided toward the front side by total reflection inside the long rib 6734 (see FIG. 281).

Furthermore, in areas where the long ribs 6734 are not arranged, the front-to-rear distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained to be equal to or greater than the front-to-rear width (formation length) of the long rib 6734. This makes it possible to increase the area where the light irradiated from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731.

Thus, according to this embodiment, based on the premise that the light irradiated from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially, it is possible to easily distinguish and visually recognize the light irradiated from the edge light-emitting portion D1a and the light irradiated from the surface light-emitting portion D1b.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a passes through the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
As a clear line of light that travels by total reflection inside the long rib 6734
While the light emitted from the surface light-emitting unit D1b is perceived as light that brightens the small area through which the light can travel, the light emitted from the surface light-emitting unit D1b is perceived as uniform light (faint light) through the light-receiving surface portion 6731 and the light-refractive surface portion of the inner extension portion 6732.

As a result, compared to the conventional performance mode in which a lens that condenses light emitted from the illumination board 6720 is placed opposite the illumination board 6720 to visually recognize a glittering light in a small area, according to this embodiment, it is possible to visually recognize light (line-shaped light) that spreads over the area of the illumination board 6720 while also visualizing the light (planar light). And, these different lights can be easily controlled to visually recognize only one or both. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the light performance can be improved.

Therefore, for example, even if the same LED chip is used for the edge light-emitting unit D1a and the surface light-emitting unit D1b, by making the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light-emitting unit D1a different from that of the light emitted from the surface light-emitting unit D1b, it is possible to produce a light-emitting effect with a rich gradation (light-emitting effects of different colors and brightnesses).

As shown in FIG. 280(b), the side surface of the fin 6735 in the plate thickness direction is the right side surface (the front frame 1
The outer surface of the front frame 10
The inner surface of the cover 014 is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front end (toward the right side).
Therefore, the normal line of the left side surface does not face straight sideways (a direction parallel to the surface of the main plate portion 6721 of the illumination board 6720, i.e., a direction perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction), but faces a direction having a component facing the front side.
It can also be directed forward.

As shown in FIG. 280( c ), the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extension portion 6732, so that the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1 a and incident on the long rib 6734 is reflected by the inner extension portion 67
The light can travel toward the target 32. The travel of this light will be explained with reference to a schematic diagram.

FIG. 281 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a base member 6710 and an illumination board 67
281 is a schematic diagram of the light emitting element D1a and the light receiving member 6730. In Fig. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating the light emitted from the edge light emitting element D1a are diagrammatically illustrated.

Although the intensity of the light emitted from the LED decreases as the angle between the surface of the illumination board 6720 and the axis X23 perpendicular thereto increases, the light itself is emitted radially. In this embodiment, the direction of travel of the light determines the subsequent arrival position, which will be described below in order.

The arrow L23a enters the end of the long rib 6734 and the long rib 6734 and the fin 67
35 and reaches the front end of the fin 6735. Since the light that reaches the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a travels by being totally reflected, the energy loss of the light can be reduced compared to the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735. Therefore, even if the distance from the edge light emitting portion D1a is far, the player can easily see the light with sufficient brightness.

The arrow L23b indicates that the fin 6735 is in a leftward direction (the front frame 1001) before reaching the front end of the fin 6735.
6 shows the traveling direction of light emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 (the inner side of the fin 6735). As described above, the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed to have a jagged shape, so that the light is emitted in the form of surface emission.

Arrow L23c indicates the direction of travel of light that passes through the long rib 6734, travels directly to the inner extension portion 6732, and is emitted from its surface. This light is not refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734, and light energy loss is suppressed, so it can be visually recognized brightly. In addition, the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, so that the light is emitted in a surface-emitting manner.

Arrow L23d indicates the position where the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735 are joined to the light receiving surface portion 6
731 and is reflected because it cannot enter the inside of the fin 6735. That is, as described above, the fin 6735 is formed such that the length in the thickness direction is shorter toward the front side compared to the long rib 6734, and the left side surface (front frame 100) is
Since a jagged recess is formed on the inner surface of the long rib 6
734 partially protrudes from the fin 6735.

Therefore, even if the light travels in the same forward and backward directions, the light receiving surface 6
It is not possible for light to enter the fin 6735 at all of the joining positions with 731, and in some areas (particularly near the left side of the long rib 6734) entry into the fin 6735 is restricted, and light that reaches this area is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

Thereafter, the arrow L23d reaches the inner extension portion 6732 and is emitted. Note that since the outer surface of the inner extension portion 6732 (the surface opposite to the outer extension portion 6733) is processed to have a jagged shape, the light is emitted in a surface emission manner.

Here, as shown in Fig. 281, the light of the arrow L23d includes light proceeding to the rear side of the illumination board 6720. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the illumination board 6720 having the LED chip D1 on the front side that irradiates light to the front side can emit light to the rear side of the illumination board 6720 (at least, the light can proceed to the rear side of the illumination board 6720, see Fig. 281).

The inner surface of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 disposed on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed in a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are arranged vertically when viewed from behind (see FIG. 276).
As a result, the light that travels in the direction of arrow L23d and reaches the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform manner both up and down, and this light can brightly illuminate the glass unit 16.

Therefore, the light emitted from the irradiation device disposed on the rear side of the glass unit 16 is incident on the glass unit 16.
Since a light effect can be produced by combining the light irradiated toward the target with the light traveling in the direction of arrow L23d, the design freedom of the light effect can be improved.

According to this embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be reduced. That is, when the light is incident on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is brighter than the light indicated by the arrow L23c due to the difference in angle with the axis X23.
However, the light indicated by the arrow L23 loses energy equivalent to the transmitted light when it is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731, and is therefore recognized as light of approximately the same brightness when it reaches the inner extension portion 6732. In this way, the difference in brightness of the light depending on the irradiation direction can be mitigated, and the brightness of the inner extension portion 6732 can be made uniform from front to back.

Here, in this embodiment, the configuration of the horizontal performance device 6700 arranged on the left side is almost formed in a shape that is approximately symmetrical (or similar) to the configuration of the horizontal performance device 6700 on the right side, but as a special part that is not symmetrical, the formation of the long rib 6734 (protruding from the back) is omitted (the formation of the fin 6735 is maintained). This allows the aspect of the light performance to be adjusted for each range of the play area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is for ensuring the visibility of the player. That is, the intention is to maintain the presentation effect of light traveling to the fin 6735 on the left side as well, while suppressing the light traveling to the long rib 6734 from traveling toward the play area.

That is, the aim is to reduce the intensity of the light emitted from the horizontal effect device 6700 to the inside (the side of the game area) in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the left side of the game area where the launched ball enters the game area. This makes it possible to prevent in advance the situation where the light effect is too bright, making it difficult to see the launched ball, and thus making it difficult to adjust the launch intensity and to confirm the launch of the game ball.

On the other hand, the right side of the game area is where balls shot from the right (highest shooting strength) mostly flow down, so there is little need for players to visually check the balls to adjust the shooting strength. In addition, a large number of game balls flow down a narrow area in a short time, so the effect of the light-based performance can be easily improved by irradiating the area with light and reflecting it off the game balls. Therefore, there is no need to weaken the light intensity on the right side of the game area, and the performance effect can be improved by making it easier to emit light from the horizontal performance device 6700 to the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) as in this embodiment.

The arrow L23e indicates the traveling direction of light emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734 and irradiated in a direction with a large angle with the axis X23 (light that does not enter the long rib 6734). This light is reflected by the inner surfaces of the left and right extension parts 6732, 6733 or reaches the light receiving surface part 6731 and emits light from the surface.
Since the light emitting portion D23e is extended to a position very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a, the intensity of the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23e is very small to begin with, so the light can be configured to be difficult for the player to see.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light traveling along the arrow L23e from being visually mixed with the light emitted from the surface light-emitting unit D1b, thereby preventing a decrease in the light presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 280(a), the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light emission effect in the vicinity of the fitting portion 6737 will be described.
37 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, similarly to the contents described above with the arrows L23c and L23d, a part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both walls of the recess 6737a and reaches the left surface of the fitting portion 6737.

The recess 6737a is configured as a recess in which the fastening portion 6753 (see Figure 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753, so that the fastening screw will block light near the recess 6737a, which may reduce the effect of the light emission.

In contrast, in this embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of misalignment) can be achieved by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protrusion portion 6751a, so that the number of fastening screws can be reduced while preventing misalignment between the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1, and the number of areas where the effect of the light emission presentation is reduced can be reduced.

In addition, the recess 6737a is disposed near the fastening screw to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the recess 6737a is configured to be emitted from the surface of the inner extension portion 6732, thereby preventing the vicinity of the fastening screw from becoming too dark. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of deterioration of the performance effect of the light emission performance.

Next, an 18th embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 282 to Fig. 284. In the 17th embodiment described above, the illumination board 6
570 is provided, the pachinko machine 18010 in the 18th embodiment is capable of performing light emission performances even at the bottom of the front frame 18014 by providing a performance device 18800 having an illumination board 18830 at the lower right of the operation device 10300. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of a pachinko machine 18010 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 18 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 18010. The pachinko machine 18010 includes a front frame 180
The difference between pachinko machine 10010 in the 17th embodiment and pachinko machine 10014 in the 17th embodiment is that pachinko machine 10014 in the 17th embodiment is equipped with a performance device 18800 in comparison with the front frame 10014 in the 17th embodiment, but the other configurations are the same, so only the performance device 18800 will be described and a description of the other configurations will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 282 and 283, the performance device 18800 is a device for light-emitting performance, the rear side and upper side of which are connected to a covering base member 6410 on the front side of the lower tray unit 6400, and is arranged between the operating device 10300 and the operating handle 51.

This rendering device 18800 is configured, through structural innovation, such that the appearance of the light emission rendering changes depending on whether or not the operation device 10300 participates in the operation rendering. Next, in order to explain the structural innovation, the internal structure of rendering device 18800 will be explained.

FIG. 284(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance device 18800 taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG. 282, and FIG. 284(b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance device 18800 taken along the line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa in FIG.
284(b) is a schematic diagram of an illumination board 18830 of the performance device 18800 as viewed in the XIVb direction. Note that FIG. 284(b) shows a schematic diagram of a support form of the illumination board 18830.

As shown in FIG. 284( a ), the performance device 18800 includes a combined base member 18810 combined with the lower tray unit 6400, an intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-shaped member arranged on the front side of the combined base member 18810 with a planar gap therebetween and is fixed to the combined base member 18810, an illumination board 18830 arranged in the gap between the combined base member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, a light receiving member 18840 which is formed so that light irradiated from the LED chip D1 of the illumination board 18830 can travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and a covering member 18840 which is attached so as to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840.
850 and mainly.

The front wall of the connecting base member 18810, which faces the illumination board 18830, is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear side. The inclination angle of this inclined surface is formed at an inclination angle such that the inclined surface is parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 when the swing device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is placed in an upward position and is in a posture before operation.

The illumination board 18830 is disposed parallel to the wall surface on the front side of the connecting base member 18810. Therefore, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the illumination board 18830. The illumination board 18830 mainly includes an LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 that is drilled in a vertically elongated shape, and a leaf spring 18832 that generates an upward biasing force.

The long hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted to support the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the vertical length of the long hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as the length (allowable length) by which the illumination board 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

The LED chips D1 are arranged in an arbitrary pattern (the vertices of a pentagon in this embodiment) on the front side of the illumination board 18830, and emit light in the normal direction of the surface of the illumination board 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chips D1 is emitted in a direction that slopes downward as it approaches the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 that receives this light is formed so as to change the traveling direction of the light to a direction along the front-rear direction.

In other words, the player can see the light whose direction has been changed by the light receiving member 18840, so even if the direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 slopes downward toward the front (away from the player's line of sight), the effect of the light presentation can be prevented from decreasing.

The light receiving member 18840 is made of a colorless, transparent, light-transmitting resin material, and is fixed to the intermediate fixing member 1
A plate-shaped portion 18841 configured to be capable of closing the opening on the front side of the plate-shaped portion 188
The main components of the cover 188 are the extension plate portions 18842 extending from the rear surface of the cover 18841 in a plate-like shape.

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape with an open front side from a resin material with low light transmittance, and mainly comprises a plurality of fixing portions 18821 which protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the connecting base member 18810 and are fastened and fixed to the connecting base member 18810, and a plurality of insertion holes 18822 which are drilled in the bottom on the rear side at a position and size capable of accepting the extension plate portion 18842.

In this embodiment, since the drawing direction of the resin mold for the light receiving member 18840 is set in the left-right direction, the extension plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape having the same cross section in the left-right direction.
The ED chips D1 are arranged at the vertices of a pentagon, while the LED chips D1 arranged side by side at the middle and lower positions can be associated with a common extended plate portion 18842. This allows the extended plate portion 18842 to be formed as three upper and lower plate-like portions each having a different width. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also drilled in three upper and lower positions with shapes each having a different width.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, the extension plate portion 18842 starts to extend along the normal direction of the plate-shaped portion 18841, but is formed in a curved plate shape that is gently curved. The radius of curvature of the curve can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the LED chip D1 of the illumination board 18830 is
The light irradiated from the plate-shaped portion 18841 can be totally reflected until it reaches the plate-shaped portion 18841.
The extension plate portion 18842 is designed to have a curved shape with a large radius of curvature.
This makes it easier for light incident on the rear end portion to reach the plate-shaped portion 18841 while maintaining its intensity.

The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage from a portion of the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840 where light presentation is not desired, and can be realized in various forms. For example, it may be a light-shielding tape (insulating tape) formed to be able to be attached, or it may be a member formed into a cup shape from a resin material.

In this embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member that is formed to be able to fit from the front side, and the bottom of the cup that is arranged on the front side has a plurality of through holes 18851 formed at the vertices of a pentagon based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1 for the passage of light.

As described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not need to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, and they can be similar in shape but slightly different in size.
Considering the traveling mode of the light irradiated from the ED chip D1, the formation mode of the light receiving member 18840 is more important than the arrangement of the LED chip D1 when designing the arrangement of the through hole 18851. Therefore, in this embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position that coincides with the position of the base of the extension plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in a front view.

The operation of the performance device 18800 will be described. As described above, the illumination board 18830 is movable in the first shift direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is disposed, with an allowable width of the long hole 18831. The first shift direction is determined by the vibration device 1036 of the operation device 10300.
6 coincides with the vibration direction Y17a of the sensor 6.

That is, when the operation device 10300 performs a vibration effect, the illumination board 1883
When the illumination board 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extension plate portion 18842 shifts, so that the LED chip D1
This makes it difficult for light emitted from the extension plate portion 18842 to enter the extension plate portion 18842.

In this case, even when light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the light is guided to the extension plate portion 18842.
Since it is difficult for the light to travel through the through hole 18851, the through hole 18851 is visually recognized as being dark. That is, it is not possible to know whether the LED chip D1 is emitting light or not. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes to a direction different from the first deviation direction.

In this case, the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 on the illumination board 18830 is suppressed, and the illumination board 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the biasing force of the leaf spring 18832.
The rear end of the LED chip D1 is disposed opposite to the rear end of the extension plate 18.
The light is then incident on the surface 842 and is then totally reflected to travel toward the front side.

In other words, even when light is being emitted from the LED chip D1 and the operating device 10300 is performing a vibration effect (when the through hole 18851 appears dark), the through hole 18851 can be made to appear bright by pressing the swivel operating member 10310.

Therefore, when a vibration effect is being performed and the through hole 18851 is visually observed as being dark, it is possible to know whether the LED chip D1 is emitting light or not by operating the swing operation member 10310. Here, for example, by controlling the LED chip D1 to emit light when a jackpot occurs or when a game state shifts to one advantageous to the player (i.e., when a change advantageous to the player occurs), it is possible to increase the player's interest in whether the LED chip D1 is emitting light or not.

This can increase the player's motivation to operate the swing operation member 10310, so that when an effect in which the player operates the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's motivation to participate can be increased and the player can be encouraged to actually operate the swing operation member 10310.

In this embodiment, the case where the illumination board 18830 is disposed outside the covering base member 6410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example,
is disposed in such a manner that it penetrates the covering base member 6410 and enters the inside, and the operation device 103
It may be possible for it to come into contact with 00.

In this case, vibrations of the operating device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the illuminated board 18830, and the illuminated board 18830 can be configured to slide not only in response to vibrations but also in response to a pushing operation on the lens member 10317.

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing when a push instruction is generated as a notification effect.
It is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to determine whether the ED chip D1 is emitting light or not when viewed from the front.

In other words, it is possible to configure the device so that when the lens member 10317 is pressed (pushed) at a timing other than that of a notification, the notification that is advantageous to the player is likely to be overlooked. Since it is possible to easily suppress the pressing operation on the lens member 10317 at a timing other than that of a pressing instruction, it is possible to suppress early failure of the operation device 10300 and nuisance behavior such as operating the operation device unnecessarily many times and generating noise.

Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 285. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operating device 10300 are formed so as to be separable into left and right halves. However, the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment are formed so as to be separable into left and right halves.
The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 285 is a side view of covers 19321, 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 285, in this embodiment, an upper cover 19321 and a lower cover 1932
2 is disposed so as to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configuration of the covers 19321, 19322 is substantially the same shape as the above-mentioned covers 10321, 10322, and will be described mainly as an example in which the direction of division is changed.

The covers 19321, 19322 are formed so as to be separable at a dividing surface coinciding with the reference line X19 shown in FIG. 285, and are formed so as to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw that is inserted in a direction perpendicular to the dividing surface into an insertion hole 19321a formed in the upper cover 19321 and screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the lower cover 19322.

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the vibration direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration device 10366 before operation when the swing operation member 10310 is in the upward position. That is, the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is perpendicular to the vibration direction Y17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), so that it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact of the vibration.

Furthermore, since the vibration direction Y17a of the swing operation member 10310 is the same as the pushing direction of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216(a)), the pushing direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening direction of the fastening screw are perpendicular in side view (see FIG. 285), and therefore it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from loosening due to the impact generated by operating the lens member 10317.

Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 286. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 are formed in a flat dish shape in cross section.
Although the case where the plate thickness is substantially constant in the inclined portion has been described, the protruding portion 16413 and the recessed portion 16414 in the twentieth embodiment are formed with a slight inclination toward the vertical direction. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Figure 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 16400 in the 20th embodiment taken along a line corresponding to the CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb line in Figure 229. As shown in Figure 286, in this embodiment, the inclination of the left and right ends of the protruding portion 16413 and the recessed portion 16414 is set closer to the vertical direction than the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 described above in the 17th embodiment.

In addition, the lower end of the protruding portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding portion 6413 in the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end of the recessed portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed portion 6414 in the seventeenth embodiment)
The base end of the recess is disposed on the same line in the up-down direction (vertical direction).

The hanging plate-shaped portion 6426b of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 of the lower dish forming member 6420 is recessed into the recessed portion 16
The base end of the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 207 ) is abutted against and supported by the base end of the operating device 10300 (the upper surface of the main body 6411). At the support position, a sufficient support thickness in the up-down direction (vertical direction) of the main body 6411 can be secured.
It is possible to suppress deformation of the plate.

In this embodiment, the case where the inclination of the left and right ends is changed compared to the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, there may be no inclination at all, and the left and right outer surfaces of the protruding portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (the vertical direction in a cross-sectional view). Even in this case, the support thickness of the main body portion 6411 can be sufficiently ensured.

On the other hand, by forming the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 to be inclined in an inverted V shape in cross section as in this embodiment, the direction of deformation of the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 when subjected to an external force can be easily directed toward the center of the left and right. This makes it possible to reduce the degree of fatigue caused by external forces compared to a case in which the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 can be deformed in both left and right directions, and to prevent early damage to the plate portions forming the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414. In other words, the durability of the lower plate unit 6400 can be improved.

Next, the 21st embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 287 to 301. In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, a case was described in which it was not necessary to supply electricity to the lower tray unit 6400, but the lower tray unit 21400 in the 21st embodiment is equipped with a vibration device 21500 that is configured to be vibrated by electrical conduction, and it is therefore necessary to supply electricity to the lower tray unit 21400. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and
The explanation will be omitted.

Fig. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300, and the lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment.
The upper half of the tray unit 21400 and the operation device 10300 are not shown in the figure.
The figure is disassembled from the metal main body portion 10014a and viewed from the rear side.

In order to facilitate understanding, the assembly direction lines connecting the insertion holes 6801R, 6801L and their fastening points are illustrated with imaginary lines, and further, the positional relationship of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibration device 21500 so as to supply electricity to the front frame 10014, the operating device 10300, and the lower tray unit 21400 is partially illustrated.

287, a bottom member 21De, which is a modified version of the above-mentioned bottom member De, is fastened and fixed to the lower bottom side of the operating device 10300. The bottom member 21De includes a protruding portion De3 formed to protrude to the right side in addition to the configuration of the above-mentioned bottom member De.

The overhanging portion De3 has both the function of applying a load to the vibration device 21500 and the function of regulating the displacement of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibration device 21500. That is, as shown in Fig. 287, the electrical wiring 21513 is routed so as to crawl along the underside of the overhanging portion De3, thereby preventing the electrical wiring 21513 from rubbing against the right front cover 10322 when the lower tray unit 21400 is removed for maintenance.

The protruding portion De3 is formed with a back surface side inclined so that the width becomes narrower toward the protruding end,
The front side forms a plane parallel to a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction. By configuring in this way, the rigidity of the protruding portion De3 is ensured, and the metal main body portion 1001 is provided on the rear side of the protruding portion De3.
A gap can be created between the first and second electrodes 4a.

This gap is used to allow electrical wiring 21513 of a length required when removing the lower tray unit 21400 for maintenance (a length of wiring that fills the distance that the lower tray unit 21400 separates from the metal main body portion 10014a) to be inserted when the lower tray unit 21400 is not being removed (when the lower tray unit 21400 is not being removed (when the lower tray unit 21400 is not being removed (when the lower tray unit 21400 is not being removed ()).
4a) is effectively utilized as an area for slackening and arranging the electrical wiring 21513. This makes it possible to reduce the load that the electrical wiring 21513 receives from the surroundings, compared to when the electrical wiring 21513 is crampedly arranged when the lower tray unit 21400 is not removed.

As shown in Fig. 287, the operating handle 51 is fitted and supported in the handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In the assembled state (see Fig. 208), the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 are overlapped in the front and rear.
No fastening portion is formed over the entire left edge portion of 1, and connection to the lower tray unit 21400 is made by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-to-rear direction) rather than by fastening.

Therefore, the lower tray unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, but are configured to be capable of relative displacement in the forward/backward direction.

This makes it possible to suppress the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 from being displaced in the front-rear direction in association with the displacement of the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 in the front-rear direction, as compared to the case in which the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 and the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration device 21500, which will be described later, from being transmitted to the operating handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted solely from the lower tray unit 21400 to the player. For example, the transmission path of the vibration transmitted to the player holding the operating handle 51 can be limited to a path via the right side portion of the lower tray unit 21400 that comes into contact with the fingers or arm of the player holding the operating handle 51, rather than via the operating handle 51.

FIG. 288 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower tray unit 21400. In FIG. 288 and FIG. 289,
410, the parts corresponding to the fixing points of the lower dish forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450 to the vibration device 21500 are shown corresponding to each other with imaginary lines.

The covering base member 21410 has the above-mentioned configuration of the covering base member 6410, and further has a main body portion 641
The fastening portion 21415 is provided in a region on the right side of the recessed portion 6414. The fastening portion 21415 is formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the fastening portion 21415.
The fastening screws inserted into the pair of upper and lower insertion parts 21535 disposed on the right side of the cover base member 21410 are screwed in. That is, the right insertion part 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410.

The lower plate forming member 21420 has the configuration of the lower plate forming member 6420 described above, and further has a front vertically elongated portion 6
The plate-shaped portion extending upward from the upper surface of the support hole 21428 is provided with a support hole 21428 drilled in the front-rear direction. The support hole 21428 is a connecting portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibration device 21500, and the fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 is inserted into the support hole 21428.

The V-shaped design member 21450 has the above-mentioned configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450, and further has a plate-shaped protruding portion 6
As an alternative to 453R (see Figure 227), it is provided with a fastening portion 21457 that protrudes in a columnar shape toward the rear side and is formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in, and a connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 that is formed in a plate shape and connects between the fastening portion 21457 and the insertion hole 6452.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 208 ), the fastening portion 21457 is inserted into the support hole 21428, and the fastening screw inserted into the left insertion portion 21535 of the vibration device 21500 is screwed in and fastened. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened to the lower dish forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450.

Therefore, the vibration device 21500 is not fastened to a single member, but is fastened to a plurality of members (the covering base member 21410, the lower plate forming member 21420, and the V-shaped design member 21450). This allows the fastening strength of these members to be reinforced by the vibration device 21500.

Here, as described above, the V-shaped design component 21450 has the protruding fastening parts 6454 arranged at the left and right ends fastened to the metal main body part 10014a via the intermediate member.
It is configured in a roughly bag-like shape that opens to the rear side, and is structurally stronger than the covering base member 21410 which is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a mainly at the rear side edge portion.

In other words, the covering base member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a at multiple positions on the lower end and left end on the back side, while the number of fastening positions on the upper and right edge is reduced (none or limited to a small number at most), and the covering base member 21410 is formed in a thin, approximately box-like (approximately bag-like) shape, resulting in a structure with a high degree of freedom of displacement (low resistance), especially at the right edge.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the edge of the upper front side of the covering foundation member 21410, the V-shaped design member 21450 can suppress the up-down (vertical) displacement of the covering foundation member 21410, and the displacement degree of the covering foundation member 21410 can be increased in the front-back (horizontal) direction.
This can prevent the occurrence of a problem in which the lower tray 50 is displaced up and down due to the displacement of the covering base member 21410, causing the balls stored in the lower tray 50 to bounce.

According to this embodiment, the rigid V-shaped design component 21450 is used as a base (reference),
A covering base member 21410 that is more flexible (higher degree of displacement freedom) than the V-shaped design member 21450
Since the vibration device 21500 can vibrate the covering base member 214,
The right side of the sensor 10 can be subjected to concentrated vibration (strong vibration).

In addition, since the transmission of vibrations to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420 can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the operating device 10300 from vibrating due to the vibrations of the vibration device 21500 and the balls stored in the lower plate 50 from vibrating due to the vibrations of the vibration device 21500.From this, it can be said that the right side of the covering base member 21410 can be vibrated (strong vibration) in a concentrated manner by driving the vibration device 21500.

The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in a long plate shape along the longitudinal direction of the shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 described later.
58 and the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other, and a large load generating area can be secured, so that stress concentration during contact (pressing) can be avoided.

In this embodiment, in the assembled state (see Figure 208), the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 is configured with a dimensional relationship such that it abuts (is pressed against) the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 (see Figure 298).
Therefore, vibrations can be received at least through the contact position between the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458.

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibration device 21500 is fastened to a plurality of members as in the present embodiment. That is, compared to fastening to a single member, when the vibration device 21500 is fastened to a plurality of members, the deviation from the design dimensions of each member may accumulate, and the deviation in dimensions is more likely to be large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, making it difficult to stabilize the transmission strength of vibration.

In contrast to this, in this embodiment, by anticipating the possibility of dimensional deviations, the dimensions are designed so that no matter what kind of dimensional deviation occurs (no matter what the dimension is within the large and small limit values), the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 will come into contact with the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 (if the gap is short, the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 will come into contact while being deformed as if crushed), thereby enabling stable contact between the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458. Therefore,
It can withstand vibrations stably.

In this embodiment, the contact direction between the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 and the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 is set to the front-rear direction, which is the same as the screwing direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even if the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward by the operation of the operation device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 will be displaced by sliding against the shell-shaped protrusion 21541, and the transmission of the downward displacement can be avoided. Therefore, the vibration device 21
500 can be prevented from being pressed down in conjunction with the operation of the operation device 10300.

In this embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is disposed on the covering base member 21.
Since the vibration device 21500 is a soft portion of the pachinko machine A10, it is a portion that is easily broken when a fraudulent act is committed by breaking the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 and invading the inside (for example, by invading a thin metal wire). That is, in this embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is disposed in a portion that is easily selected as an intrusion route by a fraudster.

Therefore, when the covering base member 21410 is broken, there is a possibility that the vibration device 21500 may be destroyed or disconnected at the same time, in which case the electrical continuity of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibration device 21500 is cut off. By controlling the voice lamp control device 113 to detect this and output an error signal, it is possible to detect fraudulent activity early.

Also, instead of the vibration device 21500, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided, but in this embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is provided so that it can be used to produce a vibration effect when no fraudulent activity has occurred. In other words, the vibration device 21500 can be used both for producing a vibration effect and for detecting fraudulent activity (it can be configured as a multifunctional device), so that the space required for the device can be reduced.

FIG. 290 is an exploded front perspective view of vibration device 21500, and FIG.
290 and 291, the vibration device 2
The vibration motor 21510 is made of a soft resin material (such as silicone resin) and can generate vibrations by controlling the rotation of an eccentric weight 21512.
A covering member 21520 that covers the cover member 21510, a covering cover member 21530 that is made of a material (e.g., a resin material or a metal material) that is harder than the covering member 21520 and is formed in a shape that can partially cover the covering member 21520 from the back side, and a covering member 21530 that is made of a material (e.g., a resin material or a metal material) that is harder than the covering member 21520 and is formed in a shape that can partially cover the covering member 21520 from the back side.
A flat opposing plate member 2154 is disposed opposite the covering cover member 21530 with the plate 520 interposed therebetween.
0.

The covering member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround them from the front and rear, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws.
The covering cover 21530 has a plurality of (in this embodiment, two) holes through which the threaded portions of the fastening screws can be inserted.
The opposing plate member 21540 has a plurality of fastening portions 21542 formed so that the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 21532 can be screwed in. Below, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, which are objects to be held, will be described first, and then the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described in detail.

FIG. 292 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibrating motor 21510 and the covering member 21520;
FIG. 293 is an exploded rear perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520.
1 is a perspective view of the vehicle as viewed diagonally downward from above and in front.

The vibration motor 21510 comprises a main body 21511 whose shaft portion is controlled to rotate when electricity is applied, an eccentric weight 21512 which is fan-shaped when viewed from above and is fixed to the shaft portion and has its center of gravity at a position different from that of the shaft portion, and electrical wiring 21513 which extends downward from the underside of the main body 21511 (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the underside).

The covering member 21520 includes a cylindrical main body 21521 formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, a pair of protrusions 21522 formed as protrusions extending up and down along the back surface of the cylindrical main body 21521, and a pair of protrusions 21522 formed in a cylindrical shape with an inner shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510.
A plate-shaped protrusion 21523 is provided in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the cylindrical main body 21.
521 and a protruding portion 21524 that protrudes downward from the lower surface of the protruding portion 21524 in an elliptical shape when viewed from below.

The extension 21524 is connected to the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electrical wiring 21513.
The upper surface of the ellipse is formed in a shape large enough to surround the connection position of the electric wiring 21513 when viewed from below.
The recess is formed so as to be able to receive the

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the protruding portion 21524 includes a recessed portion 21524a recessed downward from the lower surface side of the cylindrical main body portion 21521, a wiring hole 21524b formed in the vertical direction in an area sandwiched between the recessed portion 21524a, and a pair of auxiliary holes 21524 formed in the vertical direction at positions opposite the wiring hole 21524b with the recessed portion 21524a sandwiched therebetween.
c.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the electric wires 21513 are guided to the wire-through hole 21524b while being held in the recessed portion 21524a, and are guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wire-through hole 21524b. That is, in this embodiment, the covering member 21520 has a function of holding the electric wires 21513 and preventing them from sagging due to their own weight, a function of bundling the electric wires 21513, and a function of connecting the electric wires 21513 to the cover member 21520.
This allows the number of cable ties required to be reduced, leading to a reduction in material costs and manufacturing steps.

In addition, when the covering member 21520 is not attached, a gap is generated between the covering cover 21530 and the opposing plate portion 21540.
This can prevent forgetting to add the 0. Therefore, compared to the case where a separate cable tie is prepared to hold the electrical wiring 21513, it is possible to prevent forgetting to assemble the member for holding the electrical wiring 21513.

In this embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice and lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).
is configured as a part of the other devices 228 and is vibration-controlled by a control signal transmitted from the voice and lamp control device 113.

The spare hole 21524c is formed at a position corresponding in the up-down direction to the connection position between the electric wiring 21513 and the main body part 21511. That is, even if the electric wiring 21513 is about to come off from the main body part 21511, it is possible to push the electric wiring 21513 into the main body part 21511 by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c and pushing in the electric wiring 21513. This makes it possible to prevent the electric wiring 21513 from falling off from the main body part 21511.

In this embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is disposed in the lower tray unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). The lower tray unit 21400 is formed so as to be detachable from the metal main body portion 10014a. Therefore, if a worker performing maintenance work accidentally moves the lower tray unit 21400 too far away from the metal main body portion 10014a when removing it, an excessive load may be placed on the electrical wiring 21513, which may result in a breakage. In addition, when the vibration device 21500 generates vibration, the electrical wiring 21513 may be damaged.
If an excessive load is applied to 13, there is a risk of it breaking.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position between the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511.
This makes it possible to prevent the connection position with 1511 from being displaced excessively.

Furthermore, since the electric wire 21513 is secured to a length that is held in the recessed portion 21524a just before the wire-through hole 21524b, this length can be used to prevent breakage of the electric wire 21513 (allowing for a margin).
Even if a load is applied to the electric wiring 21513, the load is applied not in the direction in which the electric wiring 21513 and the main body 21511 are connected, but along the length direction of the electric wiring 21513 held in the recessed portion 21524a (i.e., the longitudinal direction of the protruding portion 21524), so that the electric wiring 21513 is not connected to the main body 21511.
It is possible to prevent the wire 1511 from falling out.

In addition, as described above, even if the electrical wiring 21513 falls out of the main body 21511, the electrical wiring 21513 can be easily removed by inserting a thin rod through the auxiliary hole 21524c.
3 can be reconnected to the main body 21511. Therefore, the work efficiency of the maintenance work, including the process of removing the lower tray unit 21400, can be improved.

In addition, in the process of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the electrical wiring 21513 is disposed on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body 21511. Therefore, the electrical wiring 21513 can be inserted into the wiring hole 21524b at the same time as the operation of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, thereby improving the efficiency of the assembly operation.

FIG. 295 is a front view of the covering member 21530. In the description of FIG.
290 and 291 are referred to as appropriate. The covering member 21530 includes a main body 21531 forming a frame with the front side and the bottom side open, the above-mentioned insertion hole 21532, and the main body 21531.
A receiving recess 21533 is recessed on the front side of the vibration motor 21531 to receive the vibration motor 21510;
A plurality of protrusions 21534 are protruding inward from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533 and extending in the front-rear direction, and a covering base member 21410, a lower plate forming member 21420, and a V-shaped design member 2145 are drilled in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower positions of the insertion hole 21532.
288 and 289. The casing 215 has a plurality of insertion portions 21535 through which fastening screws can be inserted to be fastened to the casing 215.

The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a that receives the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b that receives the main body portion 21511, and a weight receiving recess 21533a and a main body receiving recess 21533b that receives the main body portion 21511. The weight receiving recess 21533a and the main body receiving recess 21533b are disposed in such a manner that the rotation axis of the main body portion 21511 is disposed at the center position in the left-right direction.
3b and a bearing receiving recess 21533c.

The right side of the body receiving recess 21533b is recessed with an extra length compared to the left side of the bearing receiving recess 21533c. Conversely, the right side of the protruding stripe 21534 is protruded with an extra length compared to the left side, so that the protruding tip of the protruding stripe 21534 is recessed with an extra length compared to the left side of the bearing receiving recess 21533c.
It is disposed at a position approximately symmetrical to 533c.

With this, the covering member 21520 is held by the protruding tip of the protruding portion 21534 when the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state).
In the excited state (vibration state) of 510, the covering member 2 is held in place by a deep recess (a recess formed between the protrusions 21534 arranged in parallel vertically) formed on the right side of the main body receiving recess 21533b.
1520. This allows the covering member 2
This can prevent overload from being applied to the covering cover member 21530, thereby improving the durability of the covering cover member 21530.

Since the protrusion portion 21534 is formed along the front-to-rear direction, displacement of the covering member 21520, which is supported by abutting against the left and right protrusion portions 21534 on the left and right, is likely to occur in the front-to-back and left-to-right (horizontal) direction due to engagement and biting into the protrusion portions 21534, but displacement in the up-down direction is suppressed.

Therefore, even in a configuration in which the eccentric weight 21512 is arranged at the upper end of the main body 21511, such that the main body 21511 tends to tilt around its lower end as a fulcrum when vibration occurs, the vertical component of the vibration is suppressed, and the displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected to the horizontal direction.

The protrusions 21534 are formed in a left-right intermediate portion of the main body 21531 in such a manner that the protruding length increases toward the intermediate portion 21531a (back side) which is formed in a flat plate shape with a vertical width half that of the left-right side portions (in a manner following the outer shape of the covering member 21520).
20 can be supported from the left, right and rear sides.

In addition, the protrusion 21534 is a lower surface 2153 that constitutes the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.
It has a rear inclined portion 21534a that rises from the nearest protrusion portion 21534 below 1b toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b.

The distance between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the protrusion 21534 directly above it narrows toward the rear side. Therefore, compared to a case where the distance between the upper and lower protrusions 21534 is not narrowed, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the rear side in an excited state of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 is deformed, the load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 that enters between the rear inclined portion 21534a and the protrusion 21534 directly above it can be increased. This makes it possible to prevent the covering member 21520 from being excessively displaced toward the rear side.

The protrusions 21534 are not arranged completely symmetrically, but are arranged partially shifted up and down. This makes it easier to avoid loads being applied to the covering member 21520 from both the left and right directions on the same horizontal plane, compared to when the protrusions 21534 are arranged in completely symmetrical positions, and therefore makes it possible to reduce the compressive load applied to the covering member 21520.

The protrusions 21534 may be arranged completely symmetrically. In this case, it is preferable to select a material that is not brittle as the material for the covering member 21520.

The rear side wall of the main body 21531 does not have a lower half formed thereon.
As a holding mode of 520, the upper half of the main body portion 21531 restricts the displacement of the covering member 21520, while the lower half of the main body portion 21531 allows the displacement of the covering member 21520.

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced toward the rear side due to the excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the protrusion portion 21522, which is restricted by the upper half of the main body portion 21531, and the lower half, which is allowed to be displaced, both advance to an area that is opened in the lower half of the main body portion 21531 (
The vibration device 21500 can be deformed to improve the vibration performance, as described in detail below.

The right side of the plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported from below by a protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530. In addition, the left side is open to the covering cover member 21530, but is supported by a support extension 21543 of the opposing plate member 21540 (see FIG. 2).
91). In this way, the weight of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 can be supported, and an opening that can be accessed from the outside can be formed on the lower side of the covering member 21520.

That is, since the underside of the covering member 21520 is supported in such a manner that the covering cover member 21530 covers the lower part from the rear right side and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the front left side, the rear left part of the lower part of the covering member 21520 can be opened as an opening. This opening functions as a portion that ensures the contact between the overhanging portion De3 and the covering member 21520.

The opposing plate member 21540 is attached to the covering cover member 21530 from the opening side of the covering cover member 21530.
1530, and is provided with a shell-shaped protrusion 21541 formed by protruding toward the front side, the above-mentioned fastening portion 21542, and a support extension portion 21543 extending from the lower left end toward the rear side.

The shell-shaped protruding portion 21541 is formed to be thin like the opposing plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the protruding tip portion and the covering member 21520, so that the shell-shaped protruding portion 21541
Even if a load is applied in a direction in which the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 is pushed in (towards the rear) and the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 is deformed, it is possible to prevent a large load from being transmitted to the covering member 21520.

FIG. 296(a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 296(b) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400.
296(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 taken along the line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG. 296(a), FIG. 297 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 298 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 taken along the line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in FIG.
(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 taken along line CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII.

As shown in FIG. 296(b), the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the bottom member 21D
The protrusion portion De3 of e is configured in a dimensional relationship such that it abuts in the front-to-back direction, and when the vibration motor 21510 is in a non-excited state (stopped state), the protrusion portion De3 slightly bites into the protrusion portion 21522 (the protrusion portion 21522 is slightly deformed).

A load is applied from the overhanging portion De3 to the protruding portion 21522, so that the vibration device 2150
In this case, the arrangement of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 can be shifted toward the front side within the housing 2150. This makes it possible to prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position closer to the rear side.

FIG. 299(a) is a schematic diagram of the lower tray unit 21400.
FIG. 299(b) is a partial schematic top view of the lower tray unit 21400 as viewed in the direction of the arrows CCXCIXb in FIG. 299(a). FIG. 300(a) is a partial schematic top view of the lower tray unit 21400 as viewed in the direction of the arrows CCCb in FIG. 300(a). FIG.
00 is a partial side schematic view.

299(a) and 299(b) show a state in which the vibration device 21500 is disposed at the front limit position of the vibration displacement, similar to the non-excitation state of the vibration motor 21510.
In FIG. 300(a) and FIG. 300(b), the vibration motor 21510 is in an excited state, and the vibration device 2
In other words, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited, the eccentric weight 21512 rotates and vibration occurs, the vibration device 21500
is repeatedly displaced between the state shown in Fig. 299 and the state shown in Fig. 300. In the state shown in Fig. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 abuts against the main body 21531 in the front-rear direction, and vibration is also directly transmitted.

299 and 300, a description will be given of a mode of transmission of vibration of the vibration device 21500. As described above, the vibration device 21500 is intentionally fastened and fixed at a plurality of portions to members having different rigidity. This is for the purpose of effectively generating vibration of the vibration device 21500 at specific portions.

In detail, if the member to which the entire vibration device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibration may be suppressed too much, whereas if it is too soft, the vibration may be attenuated too much. Therefore, a part of the vibration device 21500 is fixed to a hard member, and the vibration device 21500 is rotated around the fixed position.
The vibration device 21500 is configured to vibrate the softer member fixed to the other part of the vibration device 21500. This allows the portion fixed to the other part of the vibration device 21500 to be sufficiently displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibration device 21500 is a V-shaped design member 214
50 (hard side) and the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 abuts against the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458, while the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the vibration device 21500 is fastened and fixed to the covering foundation member 21410 (soft side).

Therefore, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is transmitted to the covering base member 21410 in a manner such that the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotationally displaced) with the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side as a fixed reference (axis of vibration), thereby vibrating a position close to the fingers of the player holding the operating handle 51.

When the vibration device 21500 is displaced toward the rear side due to vibration of the vibration device 21500, the protrusion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the protrusion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, the protrusion 21522 receives a load from the protrusion De3 toward the front side, so that the momentum with which the vibration device 21500 returns to the front side can be increased compared to when the protrusion De3 is not formed.

In addition, when the vibration device 21500 is displaced in a manner of rotating backward around the left end portion as an axis due to vibration, the plate-like protrusion 21523 on the left side is pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De (see FIG. 300(a)).
This causes the vibration device 21500 to receive a load toward the right side, thereby increasing the momentum of the vibration device 21500 returning forward in the rotational direction around the left end portion as an axis.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced toward the rear side, the volume of the covering member 21520 restricted from displacement by the middle part 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 is allowed to flow below the middle lower surface 21531b, so that the resin material constituting the covering member 21520 can be concentrated between the overhanging part De3 to partially harden the covering member 21520, thereby increasing the reaction force received from the overhanging part De3. Note that the bottom member 21De having the overhanging part De3 is not a member that is expected to be displaced in the front-rear direction, so it is difficult to imagine a situation in which the covering member 21520 is deformed due to the displacement of the overhanging part De3.

As a result, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the protruding portion De3 is borne by the vibration motor 2
In this case, the magnetic field can be increased in a limited manner when the operating device 10300 is operated or when the vibration device 10366 of the operating device 10300 (see FIG. 216 )
During the vibration effect, when the vibration device 21500 is in a non-excited state, the vibration device 215
By keeping the load generated between the vibration motor 21510 and the overhanging portion De3 small, it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the vibration device 21500 side, while in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhanging portion De3 is increased to suppress the transmission of vibration to the vibration device 21500 side.
The effect of assisting the vibration of 1500 can be increased.

Therefore, in the non-excited state of the vibration device 21500, the load transmitted to the vibration device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be sufficiently suppressed (covering member 215
20) while compressive deformation (strain) occurs in the protrusion portion 21522 when the vibration device 21500 is in an excited state, making it possible to increase the load (reaction force) transmitted to the vibration device 21500 via the covering member 21520.

On the other hand, since the protrusions 21522 are protrusions formed from a flexible resin material, the protrusions 2
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of displacement in the protruding portion De3 by pressing the vibration device 21500 against the protruding portion De3. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the transmission of vibration to the protruding portion De3, and therefore it is possible to prevent the occurrence of vibration in the operation device 10300 due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500.

When the vibration device 21500 is displaced toward the rear side due to vibration of the vibration device 21500, and then displaces back toward the front side, the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458. As a result, the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 receives a load from the connecting plate-shaped portion 21458 toward the rear side, so that the momentum with which the vibration device 21500 returns to the rear side can be increased compared to when the shell-shaped protrusion 21541 is not formed.

In this way, in this embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is configured to assist in displacement in both the forward and backward directions, so that the period from when the vibration device 21500 is excited to when the vibration becomes strong enough to be felt by the player can be shortened.

In the above description, when the operation device 10300 is operated or when the operation device 10300 is
In the above description, the vibration device 21500 is in a non-excited state during vibration performance of the vibration device 10366, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
During the vibration, an operation of the operation device 10300 may be performed.

In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the protruding portion De3 increases, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the protruding portion De3 accompanying the operation of the operating device 10300 and
Since the direction of the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the protruding portion De3 crosses,
It is possible to suppress the interaction between the load generated by the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operation device 10300. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation (adverse effect) in which the vibration device 21500 or the operation device 10300 breaks down due to loads being generated simultaneously from the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300.

Fig. 301 is a partial top view of the lower tray unit 21400, which illustrates the lower tray unit 21400. Fig. 301 illustrates a state in which the main body 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted to the right end of the bearing recess 21533c of the covering cover member 21530, that is, the state in which the vibration motor 21510 is disposed at the right limit position of the displacement range.

In this embodiment, the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering member 21530 via the covering member 21520. Therefore, the vibration motor 21510 may be damaged by deformation of the covering member 21520.
1510 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the covering cover 21530. Furthermore, as described above, in the vibration device 21500, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotationally displaced) with the left insertion portion 21535 (see FIG. 290) as the reference (axis of vibration), and the centrifugal force of the displacement is applied in the right direction.

That is, when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 becomes intense, the centrifugal force generated in the vibration device 21500 displaces the vibration motor 21510 to the right (see FIG. 301).
The protrusion 21534 formed on the right side of the motor 30 is formed in a curved shape leaning leftward at the rear end (see FIG. 295), so that the resistance received from the covering cover 21530 when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the rear side increases as the vibration motor 21510 is displaced toward the right. This makes it possible to suppress the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, even if the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 becomes excessive, the vibration is suppressed by displacing the vibration motor 21510 in a direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-rear direction), so that the vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the vibration motor 21510 is stopped by control). This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510.

Furthermore, by configuring the vibration to be suppressed by the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, it is possible to eliminate the need for a detection sensor to detect the displacement due to excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510. This reduces the production cost of the lower tray unit 21400 in this embodiment, and the area freed up by omitting the placement of the detection sensor can be effectively used as a space for wiring to pass through or for dissipating heat generated by the vibration motor 21510.

Next, a 22nd embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 302 to Fig. 381. In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the gaming machine frame has been mainly described, but in the 22nd embodiment, an operating unit A300 that is visually recognized through the window portion 14c will be described.

FIG. 302 is a front view of the game board A13 of the pachinko machine A10 in the 22nd embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 is a base plate A cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front.
In addition to a number of nails (not shown) and a windmill (not shown) for guiding the ball, rails 61, 62,
It is constructed by assembling a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit A80, etc., and its peripheral portion is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate A60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side.
3. The first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display device unit A80 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, and are fixed from the front side of the game board A13 by tapping screws or the like.

The front central portion of the game board A13 is connected to the inner frame 1 through a window 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
The game board A13 can be seen from the front side of the game board A13.
The configuration will be described.

On the front of the game board A13, there is an outer rail 6 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape.
A circular arc-shaped inner rail 61, which is made of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62, is installed inside the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board A13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), forming a game area in front of the game board A13 where games are played according to the behavior of the ball. The game area is located in front of the game board A13 and is bounded by the two rails 61, 6
2 and a resin outer edge member A73 that connects the rails (the area where the winning holes and the like are located and where the shot balls flow down).

In this embodiment, the outer edge member A73 is made of a metal plate-like member 75 (see FIG. 308).
The incorporation of this structure increases the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73, but this will be described in more detail below.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning holes 63 are arranged, into which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the general winning hole 63. In this embodiment, the purpose of arranging the general winning holes 63 varies depending on the arrangement. This will be described below.

In this embodiment, in a normal game, the first symbol is displayed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81.
The ball is shot with the aim of making the ball enter the winning hole 64.
Some of the balls that flow down the area to the left of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the first winning opening 64 will win in the general winning opening 63 located on the left side of the play area. That is, the general winning opening 63 located on the left side of the play area is located with the aim of affecting the normal play. For example, the higher the possibility of winning in the general winning opening 63, the easier it is to generate a large number of winnings in the first winning opening 64 with a small number of balls during normal play.

On the other hand, in a game during the time-saving or special probability mode, the ball is shot with the aim of winning the second winning hole 640 through a route that passes through the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but some of the balls that flow down the area to the right of the second winning hole 640 without reaching the second winning hole 640 win the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the game area. In other words, the general winning hole 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of affecting the game during the special probability mode or the time-saving mode. For example, the higher the possibility of winning the general winning hole 63, the more the ball loss during the special probability mode or the time-saving mode can be suppressed.

By suppressing the loss of balls, it becomes easier to win the next big win before the balls held in the upper tray 17 run out, even if the player does not play in a shooting mode that stops the shooting of balls at the right time during the probability change (even if the player keeps shooting), so the stress (fatigue) experienced by the player during the game can be reduced. Therefore, the number of rotations until the next big win frequently increases during the probability change (for example, 10
Even if the number of rotations is more than 0, the player can play the game comfortably.

In the special game state, the ball is shot with the aim of making the ball enter the specific winning hole 65a along a route passing through the right side of the third symbol display device 81.
Some of the balls flowing down the area to the right of the flowing down to the general winning port 63 (right side) instead of the specific winning port 65a (left side), and win at the general winning port 63a. The prize balls resulting from winning at this general winning port 63 are paid out as prize balls separate from the prize balls to the specific winning port 65a, so that the player can obtain prize balls based on the number of winning at the general winning port 63, in addition to the prize balls based on the number of winning at the specific winning port 65a expected by the special game state, by the end of the special game state.

That is, the general winning opening 63 arranged on the right side of the game area is arranged with the aim of increasing the number of prize balls that can be paid out to the player in the special game state. Here, the more the number of winning balls in the general winning opening 63, the lower the time efficiency of winning in the specific winning opening 65a, so the elapsed time until the special game state ends tends to be longer. In other words, even if the number of rounds and counts (the number of prizes per round) in the special game state are the same in terms of control, the time (longer or shorter) required until the special game state ends and the number of prize balls (more or less) paid out to the player can be made different by the arrangement location and number of the general winning openings 63 and the design of the upstream flow path.

In addition, the display manner in which the number corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the special game state is not limited in any way. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning the specific winning port 65a and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning the general winning port 63 may be displayed separately, or the total number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning the specific winning port 65a and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning the general winning port 63 may be displayed, or a combination of these may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during the special and time-limited modes, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal modes.
In addition, the time it takes for the second pattern to change is short, so the second pattern will change to "○".
The pattern becomes easier to be displayed, and the number of times that the electric role 640a is in the open state (expanded state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability variation and time reduction, the time that the electric role 640a is open becomes longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability variation and time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 than during normal times.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a 15R variable jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot when a jackpot occurs is set higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 640, and the ball is always in a state where it can win a jackpot.

Therefore, during normal times, the electric device 640a associated with the second winning port 640 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, the first winning port 640, which does not have an electric device, is often in a closed state.
It is advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward No. 4 so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit A80 (so-called "left shot") and aim for the ball to enter the first winning port 64, thereby obtaining more opportunities for the big win lottery and winning the big win.

On the other hand, during the probability variation or time reduction, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the second winning port 64
Since the electric device 640a associated with the number 0 is likely to be in an open state and it is likely to win the second winning port 640, the ball is shot toward the second winning port 640 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right shot"). The ball passes through the through gate 67 and the electric device 640a
It is more advantageous for the player to open the second winning port 640 and aim for a 15R guaranteed jackpot.

In the pachinko machine A10 in this embodiment, the game board A13 is asymmetrical and the balls are required to be hit on the left and right depending on the game state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game board A13 may be symmetrical (see FIG. 302).
In this case, you can aim for the first winning slot 64 by "hitting to the right" or the second winning slot 640 by "hitting to the left".
Therefore, it is not necessary for the player to change the way of shooting the ball between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state (whether it is in a probability change, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). Therefore, the hassle of changing the way of shooting the ball can be eliminated.

In this embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, a voice output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc. (see FIG. 4). The other devices 228 include the drive motor AMT1, the drive motor AM2, etc.
This includes T2 and a drive motor for raising and lowering the performance unit A710.

FIG. 303 shows a pachinko machine A with the front frame 14 opened (deployed) relative to the inner frame 12.
303 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed, and Fig. 304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. Note that Fig. 304 illustrates a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12, and for the sake of convenience, reference numerals for the internal configuration of the game board A13 are omitted in Figs. 303 and 304.

Next, the structure of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 will be described with reference to Fig. 305 to Fig. 323. Fig. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300. Fig. 306 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600 and the operation unit A300.
305 and 306 are exploded rear perspective views of the center frame A86, the lottery unit A600, and the operation unit A300. Note that in Figs. 305 and 306, a part of the right side surface of the game board A13 is enlarged. In addition, in the explanation of Figs. 305 and 306, Fig. 302 will be referred to as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member formed from a light-transmitting resin material, fitted from the front side into the through hole 13a drilled in the game board A13, and fastened and fixed near the periphery.
A covered portion 86h that is covered on the game board A13 and a covered portion 86h that can distribute balls on the left side
A distribution extension portion 86a extends from the upper end to the front side, a left inclined portion 86b extends from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape that slopes downward from the upper end to the left, a right inclined portion 86c extends from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape that slopes downward from the upper end to the right, and the right inclined portion 86b extends from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a shape that slopes downward from the upper end to the right.
a right flow passage forming wall portion 86d extending downward from a position where the return rubber 69 is arranged opposite to the lower end portion of the cover portion 86h and the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d extends from the cover portion 86h to the front side;
the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 in a staggered positional relationship with the horizontal protrusion portions 86e. The right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 in a staggered positional relationship with the horizontal protrusion portions 86e are provided with a plurality of protrusion portions 86f protruding from the covering portion 86h to the flow passage side (front side) as protrusion portions extending across the flow passage width of the area between the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. The right flow passage forming wall portion 86d mainly comprises a separation wall portion 86g which extends downward from the lower end portion of the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d and is configured to be able to separate the lower right corner of the through hole 13a from the rest of the wall portion 86g.

FIG. 307(a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302;
Figure 307(b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb in Figure 307(a).

When the player strongly rotates the operating handle 51 to the right and plays a right-hand shot, the ball flows down between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73. As shown in FIG. 307(a), the distance between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73 is a distance that allows the ball to flow down (when the diameter of the ball is 11 mm).
The length of the flow passage is set to about 16 mm, while the distance between the flow passage and the outer edge member A73 is set to a length that includes a slight gap of about 16 mm, so that the ball flows down while contacting the right flow passage forming wall portion 86d or the outer edge member A73.

More specifically, when the ball reaches the return rubber 69, the ball is bounced off toward the center of the play area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69 and collides with the right flow path forming wall portion 86d.
Since right flow passage forming wall portion 86d is formed as an inclined wall that slopes downward as it approaches the right, a ball flowing down due to its own weight will tend to roll down right flow passage forming wall portion 86d.

In the process of flowing down, the ball rides up on the horizontal protrusion 86e.
The protruding length of 6e is designed to be approximately 2 mm (just under 20% of the diameter of the ball) and the spacing is designed to be 16 mm (the same length as the flow path width), so that a good balance can be achieved between slowing down the flowing ball and preventing ball clogging.

In addition, in this embodiment, a front protrusion 86f is provided at the intermediate position between the horizontal protrusions 86e.
The horizontal protrusions 86e are formed with the same protruding length (2 mm) as the horizontal protrusions 86e. This makes it possible to improve the deceleration effect by setting the formation interval of the protrusions at half the flow path width, while making it easier to prevent ball clogging.

Usually, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game center, it is tilted slightly (1
Therefore, the covering portion 86h is disposed as an inclined wall that slopes downward toward the front side, and the balls flowing down due to their own weight tend to roll down the covering portion 86h.
In comparison with the case where a protrusion is formed from the covering portion 86h toward the flow path, it is possible to effectively cause the ball to collide with the front protrusion 86f protruding from the covering portion 86h. Note that in Fig. 307(b), the inclination angle of the game board A13 is illustrated to be larger than usual (about 5 degrees) in order to make the inclination easier to understand.

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion disposed opposite to the lottery unit A600, and has a through hole 13a
The lottery unit A600 has a role of blocking and isolating the area in which the lottery unit A600 is disposed. The assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described below.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is arranged, the through hole 13a of the game board A13 is
A small recess 13b is formed extending rightward from the substantially circular portion that receives the center frame A86, and a large recess 13c is formed extending rightward and downward below the small recess 13b. In this manner, the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c as the arrangement area of the lottery unit A600 are formed by the through hole 1
By forming the recessed portion connected to the opening portion that receives the center frame A86 of 3a, a larger area can be secured as an arrangement area for the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600, compared to the case where a plurality of independent through holes are formed (where the area occupies the area required for the width of the portion that forms the boundary). The lottery unit A600 will be described in detail later.

As shown in Figures 305 and 306, the operating unit A300 has a rear case A310 formed in a box shape with the front side open from a bottom wall portion A311 and an outer wall portion A312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311.

The rear case A310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening A311a at the center of the bottom wall portion A311.
It is formed to a size that corresponds to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (i.e., a size that can divide the display area of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front).

The operating unit A300 is configured as one unit by housing a plurality of first operating units A400 in the internal space of the rear case A310, each of which is arranged in a manner in which movable devices of approximately identical configuration cover the upper peripheral portion of the internal space, and a second operating unit A700 arranged on the lower side where the arrangement of the first operating units A400 is omitted.

Specifically, the first operating unit A400 is disposed on the upper and left and right sides of the opening A311a, and the second operating unit A700 is disposed on the bottom wall A311 of the rear case A310 at a position below the opening A311a.
In step 06, the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700 are attached to the rear case A31.
0 is shown attached.

The rear case A310 is extended as a flat plate from the front end of the outer wall portion A312 along the rear surface of the game board A13 (e.g., arranged parallel to the rear surface), and is provided with a support plate portion A313 that provides surface support for the game board A13 in the assembled state (see Figure 304).

The support plate portion A313 is a columnar portion protruding from the rear surface of the game board A13 toward the rear surface side, and is provided with a positioning protrusion A313a protruding in a shape capable of positioning the fastening protrusion 13d having a female screw portion formed in the center.
An insertion hole A313b having a size that allows the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening protrusion 13d to be inserted therethrough is drilled at the position where the female screw of the fastening protrusion 13d matches the female screw of the fastening protrusion 13d.

In other words, by positioning the fastening convex portion 13d using the positioning convex portion A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening convex portion 13d, the game board A13 and the operating unit A300 can be fixed together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board A13 and the operating unit A300.

The shape of the positioning protrusion A313a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the positioning protrusion A313a may be a protrusion having an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening protrusion 13d (circular in this embodiment), or may be a protrusion having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening protrusion 13d (circular in this embodiment), and ...
Alternatively, the positioning protrusion A 313a may be formed in an oval shape along the direction in which the fastening protrusion 13d is formed. In addition, when the fastening protrusion 13d is formed in a rectangular column shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion A 313a will also be a rectangular shape corresponding thereto.

As shown in Figures 305 and 306, in this embodiment, a large number of support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left and upper sides of the rear case A310, and fewer support plate portions A313 are formed on the right and lower sides. This is the result of a design that takes into consideration the balance between improving the overall rigidity of the game board A13 and operating unit A300 and space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is made of a light-transmitting resin material as in this embodiment, the movable members arranged on the rear side of the game board A13 are visible through the game board A13, so the entire rear side of the game board A13 is effective as an area for arranging the movable members. On the other hand, in the area where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the internal space of the rear case A310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion A313 when viewed from the front.
Therefore, if the strength problem can be solved and maintained even if the support plate portion A313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid limiting the range in which the movable member can be disposed by omitting the support plate portion A313.

In this embodiment, the reason why many support plate portions A313 are arranged on the left and upper sides of the rear case A310 is that this is related to the range of the area where the player can see the shot ball in the game area, etc. In other words, the support plate portions A313 are formed in places other than the range where the shot ball can be seen.

To explain in more detail, in this embodiment, the ball launched from the launching device 112a (Fig. 304) is introduced into the play area by passing between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passing through the return ball prevention member 68, and thereafter flows down the play area. In a pinball game, the place that is thought to attract the most attention is the place where the ball passes, and other outer areas (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and inner rail 61) usually attract less attention.

Therefore, it is thought that players will pay less attention to the lower left and upper left areas based on the left-convex arc formed by the outer rail 62, and the upper left and upper right areas based on the upward-convex arc, which are areas that the ball cannot reach.

In addition, in this embodiment, the above-mentioned outer edge member A73 and the block-shaped member 74 arranged on the front side of the game board A13, whose surfaces facing the outer rail 62 at the lower left and upper left parts of the outer rail 62 are formed to have a shape that follows the outer rail 62, are made of a light-impermeable resin material.
The game board A13 is configured so that the rear side of the game board A13 cannot be seen from the front side of the game board A13 through the outer edge member A73 and the block-shaped member 74.

In this embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is preferentially disposed in such locations where attention is low or where the support plate portion A313 is not visible. In fact, even in the left side and upper side where many support plate portions A313 are formed, the support plate portions A313 are formed near the corners of the rear case A310, avoiding the center portion as the protruding end portion of the outer rail 62.

In other words, the location where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 is selected from the locations with low visibility (low performance).
This provides the effect of ensuring the rigidity of the entire game board A13 and the ball, while still ensuring a wide area within the field of vision of the player who is focusing on the ball.

From this viewpoint, since the ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a is rolled along the outer rail 62 and introduced into the play area, which is a common configuration for pachinko machines, it is easy to determine the area where the ball does not flow down to the lower left, upper left, and upper right. On the other hand, the return rubber 6, which absorbs the kinetic energy of the ball once and can adjust the way it flows down,
Downstream of 9, it is difficult to identify a common area where the balls do not flow down.

In other words, downstream of the return rubber 69, the path of the balls will change not only in relation to the components that form the outer edge of the playing area, but also depending on the configuration and condition of the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65, so it is not possible to determine the location of the support plate portion A313 until the specifications of the playing board A13 are decided.

Compared to the configuration of the game board A13 related to the ball-discharging performance of the pachinko machine A10, the operating unit A
Since the operation unit A300 can be freely designed, the design of the operation unit A300 usually proceeds ahead of the design of the game board A13.
If a change in the specifications (change in configuration) of the game board A13 occurs toward the end of the development schedule, and the position of the support plate portion A313 is changed as a result, this will require design changes not only for the back case A310 but also for other devices disposed in the internal space of the operating unit A300, resulting in increased costs for the design change.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the support plate portion A
In this way, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 needs to be changed due to a change in the specifications (configuration) of the game board A13.

In addition, the internal space of the rear case A310 in the area downstream of the return rubber 69 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313, and sufficient space can be secured for disposing the first operation unit A400 for presentation, and the path along which the ball flows down and the first operation unit A400 can be secured.
Since the range in which first operating unit A400 is arranged can overlap with the front and rear, first operating unit A400 can be naturally brought into the field of vision of the player who is paying attention to the ball.

In this embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed at the rear position of the outer edge member A73 is
The support plate A313 is formed on the left side of the rear case A310 and is formed on the inside (left side) of the right outermost end of the outer wall A312. On the other hand, the support plate A313 formed on the left side of the rear case A310 is formed on the outside (left side) of the left outermost end of the outer wall A312. In other words, the formation mode of the support plate A313 (the formation direction relative to the outer wall A312) is asymmetrical.

This makes it possible to shorten the distance between the right outermost end of the outer wall portion A312 and the right end of the game board A13 compared to the distance between the left outermost end of the outer wall portion A312 and the left end of the game board A13, thereby allowing the right end of the internal space of the rear case A310 to be closer to the right end of the game board A13.

The right outer wall portion A312 does not have a surface that faces the game board A13 except for the support plate portion A313, and the edge portion on the front side abuts against the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right outer wall portion A312 abuts against the game board A13 in line contact.

The right outer wall portion A312 has a notch portion A312a cut out toward the rear side in a substantially lower half portion thereof. The notch portion A312a is formed by cutting out the lottery unit A60.
304, in the assembled state,
A gap is formed between the game board A13.

By forming the cutout portion A312a in this manner, the following effects can be obtained. For example, the lottery unit A
The wiring connected to the variable winning device 65 or the rear case A310 can function as a wiring pass through the rear case A310. This can reduce the possibility of the wiring interfering with the first operating unit A400 or the second operating unit A700 side, compared to when the wiring is routed up and down.

Furthermore, the gap formed by the cutout portion A312a can be used as a space for arranging components required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65. Examples of components required for the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 include a solenoid that generates a driving force, a flow path for the balls, a board for the light emission performance, a detection sensor that detects the balls, and other structures. In this embodiment, the second winning port 6 of the lottery unit A600
The discharge path ER through which winning balls are discharged is configured to pass through the gap between the cutout portion A312a and the game board A13 (see Figure 317).

In addition, by arranging a light-emitting means such as an LED near the cutout portion A312a, the light emitted from the light-emitting means can be easily recognized by the player as light with a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (where the boundary of the light irradiated from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310), the boundary of the light visible through the game board A13 can be made ambiguous. This makes it possible to prevent the boundary of the light visible through the game board A13 from depending on the shape of the back case A310, and improves the degree of freedom of the light-emitting performance.

In addition, the length (vertical length) of the cutout portion A312a is not limited in any way. For example, the cutout portion A312a may be formed over the entire region (vertical width) between the upper and lower support plate portions A313.
2a may be formed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game board A13 is located on the right side of the rear case A310.
Since the fastening and fixing to the right side of the game board A13 is omitted, when considering the rigidity of the right side of the game board A13,
The rigidity of the motion unit A300 cannot be relied upon.

To address this issue, in this embodiment, a metal plate member 75 made of metal is disposed on the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end of the game board A13. The metal plate member 75 will be described below.

Fig. 308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73, and the metal plate-like member 75, and Fig. 309 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73, and the metal plate-like member 75. In Figs. 308 and 309, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board A13 is illustrated alone, and other members disposed on the game board A13 are omitted from the illustration.

The outer edge member A73 is made of a resin material and includes an arc wall portion 73a that constitutes the upper part and has an arc-shaped inner surface, a vertical wall portion 73b that extends downward from the lower end of the arc wall portion 73a in a thin wall shape, and an inclined wall portion 73c that is formed with an upper surface that slopes downward to the left from the lower end of the vertical wall portion 73b. In this way, by forming the outer edge member A73 from a single member that covers almost the entire area in the vertical direction, the number of steps for assembling the outer edge member A73 to the game board A13 can be reduced compared to when the outer edge member A73 is formed from multiple members that are separated into upper and lower parts.

The vertical wall portion 73b has a plurality of plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1 protruding in a plate shape toward the rear side along the right surface portion.
The right wall portion 73a is provided with a plurality of bent portions 73b2 bent in a U-shape when viewed in the vertical direction from the front edge portion of the right wall portion, a cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear side at the joint between the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c, and a fastening portion 73b4 that is provided adjacent to the cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3 and formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed in.

The bent portion 73b2 is disposed at the middle of the intervals between the plate-shaped protruding portions 73b1. This makes it possible to improve the holding force of the metal plate-shaped member 75 relative to the vertical wall portion 73b while suppressing the number of seam-penetrating portions 75c formed in the metal plate-shaped member 75, which will be described later.

In other words, compared to the case where only the three plate-shaped protrusions 73b1 resist the bending of the metal plate member 75, the plate-shaped protrusions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 can generate resistance to the bending of the metal plate member 75, thereby reducing the load generated at one location. In addition, since the plate-shaped protrusions 73b1 and the bent portions 73b2 are disposed at equal intervals, the load generated when the metal plate member 75 is bent can be evenly distributed.
This makes it possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to any one location.

The metal plate-like member 75 comprises a main body plate portion 75a which is folded over multiple times in the short direction but is formed without any creases in the long direction, a folded portion 75b which is folded to the left at the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 75a, a plurality of joint penetration portions 75c which are formed to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction at the joint between the main body plate portion 75a and the folded portion 75b, through holes 75d which are formed to penetrate in the front-to-rear direction at the upper and lower ends of the folded portion 75b, and an insertion hole 75e which is drilled in the plate portion where the through holes 75d are formed and which is stepped toward the front side so that a fastening screw can be inserted.

The metal plate member 75 generates particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bent portions 75b are formed in the vertical direction in addition to the manner in which the folds are formed in the main body plate portion 75a. Therefore, by arranging the metal plate member 75 integrally with the vertical wall portion 73b, which is easily bent in the longitudinal direction, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced.

The joint penetrating portion 75c is formed to have a size that allows the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 of the vertical wall portion 73b to be inserted therethrough. In this embodiment, the joint penetrating portion 75c is formed so that the vertical wall portion 73b and the metal plate-shaped member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-shaped protruding portion 73b1 through the joint penetrating portion 75c.

When the metal plate member 75 is assembled to the vertical wall portion 73b so as to be integrated therewith, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, and the cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3
is inserted into the through hole 75d. In this manner, the metal plate member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are positioned relative to each other at a plurality of points in the up-down direction. In this state, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75e is screwed into the fastening portion 73b4, whereby the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed together.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the metal plate member 75 is disposed above and below the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-shaped protrusion portion 73b1 and the cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b penetrate the metal plate member 75 and extend to the back side, and their tips engage with the game board A13. The engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described below.

The game board A13 has a number of recessed portions 13e recessed into the right edge of the front surface to be capable of receiving the plate-shaped protrusion portion 73b1, and a number of positioning holes 13f formed above and below the recessed portions 13e as long holes that are vertically long and capable of receiving the cylindrical protrusion portion 73b3.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate-like member 75 are assembled together and attached to the game board A13, the plate-like protrusion 73b1 is received in the recess 13e, and the circular protrusion 73b3 is received in the positioning hole 13f, and the game board A13 is positioned.
The metal plate member 75 is positioned relative to the game board A13. The metal plate member 75 is positioned relative to the game board A13. This reduces the number of positioning elements.

In this embodiment, as described above, the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the curvature of the vertical wall portion 73b, so there is no need to impart sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall portion 73b alone, and the vertical wall portion 73b can be formed thin enough that it will easily curve in the left-right direction on its own.

Furthermore, because the rigidity of the metal plate member 75 can suppress deformation of the game board A13 (improve rigidity), the shape of the game board A13 can be maintained even when the game board A13 and the back case A310 (see FIG. 306) are separated. This makes it possible to omit the formation of the fastening protrusion 13d at the right end position of the game board A13, as shown in FIG.

Therefore, the small recess 1 is located at a position close to the right end of the game board A13 (close to the right end).
In this way, the right edge of the through hole 13a, the small recess 13b, and the large recess 13c can be moved further to the right with respect to the game board A13, and the opening shape can be enlarged.

In this case, when a game area is formed using a game board A13 having the same vertical and horizontal widths and a center frame A86 having the same opening size, the right end of the game area relative to the game board A13 can be moved rightward, so that the area on the left side of the center frame A86 can be expanded. In other words, the degree of freedom in designing the path along which the game ball flows when hitting from the left (the degree of freedom in designing the nail positions, the ball guide flow path, the ball passage position, etc.) can be improved.

Further, a distribution device (not shown) through which balls flow down during right-hand play (for example, a device that switches the path of the balls in the order in which they arrive) and a lottery unit A600 and a variable winning device 65 (FIG. 305
Since a large area can be secured for the arrangement of the lottery unit A600 and the variable winning device 65 (see reference), the design freedom of the distribution device (not shown), can be improved.

Fig. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and Fig. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 includes the above-mentioned electric role 640.
a and a second winning port 640 which can be switched between a state in which the ball can pass through and a state in which the ball cannot pass through depending on whether the electric device 640a is in an open state or a closed state.

The lottery unit A600 includes a main body member A610 that is fastened to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305) and through which the second winning hole 640 is formed, forming a flow path for the balls to flow down on the front side, and an engagement member A610 that is rotatably supported on the back side of the main body member A610 and engages with the electric role 640a.
620, and a drive unit A63 for generating a driving force for operating the engaging member A620.
0, a covering member A650 that is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 and defines the flow path of the ball, a main irradiation device A660 that is disposed on the back side of the main body member A610 and irradiates light to an area corresponding to the flow path of the ball, and an auxiliary irradiation device A660 that is disposed on the back side of the main body member A610 and irradiates light to an area different from the flow path of the ball that is made less visible by the covering member A650.
670.

The main body member A610 has a main body plate portion A6 having a plane on the front side parallel to the front surface of the game board A13.
11, and a left extending wall portion A61 extending from the left edge of the main body plate portion A611 toward the front side in a wall shape.
2, a right extended obstacle wall portion A613 extending in a wall-like manner from a position including the right edge portion of the main plate portion A611 to the front side, an extended rectangular frame A614 extending to the rear side in a rectangular frame-like manner surrounding the second winning opening 640 when viewed from the rear, a protrusion receiving portion A615 protruding to the rear side above the second winning opening 640 inside the extended rectangular frame A614, a main light-emitting holding frame A616 extending to the rear side in a frame-like manner including the right edge portion of the extended rectangular frame A614, and an auxiliary light-emitting holding frame A617 extending to the rear side in a frame-like manner to the left of the extended rectangular frame A614.

A through gate 67 is inserted and fixed to the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in this embodiment, at least a part of the ball that is about to enter the inside of the lottery unit A600 is
It passes through a through gate 67 and flows downstream.

The left extending wall A612 is a wall disposed opposite to the separating wall 86g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separating wall 86g of the center frame A86 and the left extending wall A612 engage (abut) with each other to ensure rigidity. As a result, the through-hole 13a is inserted between the center frame A86 and the lottery unit A600.
The center frame A86 and the lottery unit A87 are formed in a shape large enough to accommodate both the
The position of the substrate 600 can be stably held in a manner that suppresses positional deviation.

The right extended obstacle wall portion A613 is a wall portion that constitutes the rolling surface of the ball.
The ball flowing down 600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extended obstacle wall portion A613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A614 has a shaft support hole A614a formed as a portion for rotatably supporting the engagement member A620, and the extended end edge is formed in a shape capable of receiving the front end of the drive device unit A630. In other words, by fastening the front end of the drive device unit A630 in a state where it is assembled to the extended end of the extended rectangular frame A614, the drive device unit A63
0 is fixed to the extended rectangular frame A614.

The protruding receiving portion A615 is configured to be able to come into contact with the engaging member A620 and the operating member A632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL serving as the drive device of the drive device unit A630, and is a portion that determines the movement end position thereof, as will be described in detail later.

The main light emission holding frame A616 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the main irradiation device A660, and has an insertion hole A616a drilled inside thereof through which a fastening screw is inserted.
The fastening screw inserted through the through hole A616a is screwed into the fastening portion A652a of the covering member A650, but as described later, the fastening portion A652a is formed at a position overlapping with the low-transmittance area A651b of the covering member A650 in a front view. This makes it possible to make the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole A616a difficult to see in a front view, and to avoid impairing the design of the lottery unit A600.

The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame that constitutes the outer frame of the light emitted from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position that overlaps with the low transmittance area A651b of the covering member A650 in a front view.

The engaging member A620 is rotatably supported in the support hole A614a of the extending rectangular frame A614.
The claw-shaped portion A622 disposed at the tip of the rotation is configured to engage with the electric accessory 640a. This allows the state of the electric accessory 640a to change (open or closed) in accordance with the change in the posture of the engaging member A620. Next, the details of the engaging member A620 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 312(a) shows the engaging member A620 viewed from the direction of the rotation axis J1.
312(b) is a front view of the engaging member A620 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312(a), and FIG. 312(c) is a front view of the engaging member A620 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCCXIIb in FIG.
A cross-sectional view of the engaging member A620 taken along line c-CCCXIIc.

The engaging member A620 is formed from a flexible resin material and comprises a pair of rotating arms A621 each composed of a plate-shaped portion that intersects (orthogonal to) the rotation axis J1, a claw-shaped portion A622 formed in a C-shaped claw shape at the rotating tip of the rotating arm A621, a pair of protruding shaft portions A623 protruding from the rotating arm A621 in a cylindrical shape centered on the rotation axis J1, a base end connecting rod portion A624 which is a rod-shaped portion extending radially from the rotation base end side of the rotating arm A621 and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front so that its extended end is curved toward the opposing side and then joined, and a tip end connecting rod portion A625 which is a rod-shaped portion extending from the rotation tip side of the rotating arm A621 in a direction parallel to the base end connecting rod portion A624 and is formed in a U-shape when viewed from the front so that its extended end is curved toward the opposing side and then joined.

The pair of rotating arms A621 are disposed opposite each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the ball. This allows a flow path for the ball to pass between the rotating arms A621 (see FIG. 313), improving the design freedom of the ball flow path configured by the lottery unit A600.

The base end connecting rod portion A624 is made up of a main body rod portion A624a formed with a substantially uniform cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod, and a tip end connecting rod portion A62
The protruding restriction portion A624b is configured as a portion for restricting over-rotation of the engaging member A620, and will be described in detail later.

The distal end connecting rod portion A625 is formed such that the cross-sectional shape of the rod-shaped portion A625a extending parallel to the rotation axis J1 is different from that of the proximal end connecting rod portion A624.
The surface of the rod-shaped portion A625a facing the rotating arm portion A621 is formed in a flat shape that maintains the distance from the rotating arm portion A621, while the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm portion A621 is formed as an inclined surface A625b that inclines in a direction away from the rotating arm portion A621 as it approaches the tip of the rotation. In other words, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed so that it becomes thicker and more rigid (resistance to deformation increases) as it approaches the tip of the rotation.

In addition, the rod-shaped portion A625a is formed as a recessed surface A625c in which the surface opposite the rotating arm portion A621 is recessed in such a manner that it approaches the surface opposite the rotating arm portion A621 as it approaches the center in the direction of the rotation axis J1.

This recessed surface A625c is recessed along the inclination of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed in the inclined direction of the inclined surface A625b, each point of the recessed surface A625c that differs only in the thickness direction of the tip side connecting rod portion A625 (the width direction of the surface facing the rotating arm portion A621) is viewed as the same point.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed to correspond to the shape of the operating member A632 so as to be able to receive the operating member A632 of the drive unit A630, as will be described in detail later.

Fig. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, the engagement member A620, and the drive unit A630. In Fig. 313, the engagement member A620 is inserted into the shaft support hole A6 of the main body member A610.
14a.

The engaging member A620 is attached to the main body member A610 by applying a compressive force to the engaging member A620 to deform it, then fitting it into the inside of the extended rectangular frame A614, and removing the load to release the deformation when the shaft support hole A614a and the protruding shaft portion A623 of the engaging member A620 are aligned.

That is, the engaging member A620 is grasped with the fingers from the direction of the rotation axis J1, a compressive force is applied, and the engaging member A620 is deformed to the extent that the arrangement width of the protruding shaft portion A623 becomes shorter than the inner width of the extended rectangular frame A614, and then the engaging member A620 is inserted inside the extended rectangular frame A614, and once positioned, the fingers are released, thereby assembling the engaging member A620 to the main body member A610.

In this embodiment, the pair of rotating arms A621 are connected by the base end connecting rod A624 and the tip end connecting rod A625, which are narrower and more easily deformed than the rotating arms A621. Therefore, most of the deformation caused by the load for assembly is induced by the base end connecting rod A624.
and the tip-side connecting rod portion A625. Therefore, deformation of the rotating arm portion A621 related to the function of opening and closing the electric accessory 640a can be suppressed, and therefore it is possible to prevent the engaging member A620 from malfunctioning due to deformation during assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arms A621 are connected by a pair of rod-shaped portions (the base end connecting rod portion A624 and the tip end connecting rod portion A625) rather than by a single rod-shaped portion, it is easier to prevent the posture of the rotating arms A621 from shifting after the load is released.

Furthermore, by arranging a wider rod-shaped portion at the tip end of the pair of rod-shaped portions, where the load during operation is likely to be greater, than at the base end of the pair (see Figure 312 (c)), it is possible to prevent the posture of the rotating arms A621 from shifting when the rotating arms A621 are operated by the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL.

In addition, by narrowing the width of the rod-shaped portion on the rotation base end side (see FIG. 312(c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 required for assembly can be concentrated near the protruding shaft portion A623 on the rotation base end side. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate assembly of the engaging member A620 while realizing stable operation using the engaging member A620.

As shown in Fig. 313, the front end of the engagement member A620 abuts against the lower end of the protruding receiving portion A615, so that further rotation is restricted. As described above, the engagement member A620 is a part for opening and closing the electric role 640a, and when the electric role 640a is in an open state, a ball may enter the second winning hole 640. The ball that enters the second winning hole 640 flows down between the engagement member A620 and the lower bottom inclined surface A614b, which is a surface constituting the extended rectangular frame A614 and is arranged opposite the engagement member A620, and is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the back side, and flows into the drive unit A630.

In this embodiment, as described above, the rotating arms A621 are arranged at an interval longer than the diameter of the ball (11 mm), so that the ball can flow between the opposing rotating arms A621. This allows the engaging member A620 to be arranged in such a manner that it surrounds the ball's flow-down path from above, so that the engaging member A620 and the ball's flow-down path can be arranged compactly.

The drive device unit A630 comprises a box-shaped main body box portion A631 with an open front side which is connected and fixed to the rear end portion of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the main body member A610, an electromagnetic solenoid ASOL held in the upper part of the main body box portion A631, an operating member A632 which slides in the forward and backward directions when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is excited, a coil spring A633 which applies a biasing force to the operating member A632, and a detection sensor A634 held in the lower part of the main body box portion A631 for detecting the passage of a ball.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-energized state, the operating member A632 is disposed in the front side position (see FIG. 314(a)) by the biasing force of the coil spring A633, and the electromagnetic solenoid A
When SOL is excited, the operating member A6 resists the biasing force of the coil spring A633.
The operating member A632 is driven and placed in the rear side position (see FIG. 314(b)). The front side position of the operating member A632 is configured as a position where a disk-shaped disk portion A632a fixed to the tip of the operating member A632 abuts against the protruding receiving portion A615. Next, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described with reference to FIG.

314(a) and 314(b) are side views of the electric role 640a, the engagement member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In order to facilitate understanding, in Fig. 314(a) and 314(b), only the electric role 640a, the engagement member A620, and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are illustrated, and illustration of other configurations that hold these members is omitted.

In FIG. 314(a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state (the electric accessory 640
In FIG. 314(b), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in an excited state (
The open state of the electric device 640a is shown.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is de-energized and the operating member A632 is positioned at the front side position, the engaging member A620 is in a downward inclined position (see Figure 314 (a)), and when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is energized and the operating member A632 is positioned at the rear side position, the engaging member A620 is in an upward inclined position (see Figure 314 (b)).

The electric accessory 640a is rotatably supported on the shaft support portion A653 of the covering member A650.
The rotary shaft 640 includes an eccentric protruding portion 640b protruding toward the rear side from a position eccentric to the rotary shaft.
This eccentric protrusion 640b is positioned so as to be able to abut against the claw-shaped portion A622 of the engagement member A620 from above and below, and as the eccentric protrusion 640b displaces in conjunction with the claw-shaped portion A622, the state of the electric accessory 640a changes.

In this embodiment, the electric role 640a is composed of a single wing-shaped member, but as can be seen from the fact that there are two sets of claw-shaped parts A622 of the engagement member A620, the electric role 640a may be composed of a pair of wing-shaped members facing each other. In this case,
The engaging member A620 of this embodiment can be used.

310 and 311, the explanation will be given. The covering member A650 is made of a colorless resin material having light transmission, and is a member arranged on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric role 640a sandwiched therebetween. The covering member A650 is made of a main body plate portion A651 which constitutes a flow path of the ball between the main body plate portion A611 of the main body member A610, a restricting wall portion A652 which is protruded like a wall on the back side of the main body plate portion A651 and restricts the flow of the ball, and a restricting wall portion A652 which is protruded like a column on the back side of the main body plate portion A651 and restricts the flow of the electric role 640a.
and a shaft support portion A653 for rotatably supporting the shaft.

The main body plate portion A651 is divided into a high transmission area A651a in which the rear side is easily visible when viewed from the front, and a low transmission area A651b in which the rear side is difficult to see because the light transmission is lower than that of the high transmission area A651a.
b.

In this embodiment, a sticker with a print surface designed to define a high transparency area and a low transparency area is attached to the front side of the main body plate portion A651 to define the high transparency area A651a and the low transparency area A651b, but the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by two-color molding of resin,
The surface of the main body plate portion A651 may be roughened by machining to form an area with low transparency.

In this embodiment, the high transmission area A651a is formed on the front side (mainly the right side) of the ball's flow path, and the low transmission area A651b is formed on the side (mainly the left side) where the restricting wall A652 that restricts the ball's flow is disposed. This ensures the visibility of the ball's flow path, while blocking the view of the internal structure from the player in the area where the ball does not flow down.

The restricting wall portion A652 has, for example, an insertion hole A616a for fastening and fixing to the main body member A610.
The fastening portion A652a is provided with a fastening screw inserted into the ball. The fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A652a is made of metal and is non-transparent, so it is easy to cast a shadow when viewed from the front. In contrast, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A652a is disposed outside the ball's flow path, so that it is possible to prevent the shadow cast by the fastening screw from entering the ball's flow path and giving the player a sense of discomfort. This makes it possible to prevent the player's concentration on visually checking the ball's flow pattern from being distracted by the shadow of the fastening screw.

The main illumination device A660 comprises a diffusion plate A661 housed inside the main emission holding frame A616 of the main body member A610, an illumination board A662 on which an illumination means A663 such as an LED is arranged on the diffusion plate A661 side, and a rear cover portion A664 formed with an outer shape approximately the same as that of the illumination board A662 and fastened to the rear end portion of the main emission support frame A616.

The diffusion plate A661 is a plate-like member having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emission holding frame A616, and having a diffusion shape formed on both the front and rear sides to diffuse light, and is provided with a plurality of extension parts A661a extending in a plate shape from the outer edge part toward the rear side.
The extensions A661 are used to maintain the orientation of the diffuser plate A661 when it is housed in the main light emission holding frame A616. When the diffuser plate A661 is about to tilt, any of the extensions A6
Since 61a comes into contact with the inner surface of the main emission holding frame A616 and generates resistance in the direction to return the inclination, the attitude of the diffusion plate A661 is maintained.

In addition, when the main irradiation device A660 is attached to the main body member A610, the illumination board A66
The front surface of the second diffuser A661 comes into contact with the extended end of the extended portion A661a, thereby preventing the diffuser A661 from slipping off toward the rear surface side.

The outer shape of the illumination board A662 is substantially the same as the outer shape of the outer surface of the main light-emitting holding frame A616.
The outer shape of the rear cover portion A664 is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape of the illumination base plate A662.
That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A662 is held in a manner that it is sandwiched from the front and back between the main light-emitting holding frame A616 and the rear cover portion A664 (held by surface abutment).

As a result, even if the rear cover portion A664 is thin and has low rigidity on its own, the rigidity of the main light-emitting holding frame A616 can be utilized to stably hold the illumination board A662.

Here, the insertion holes A616a through which the fastening screws are inserted are formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screws, it is necessary to remove the diffusion plate A661 from the main emission holding frame A616, and therefore, by increasing the number of steps required to remove the fastening screws, it is possible to suppress tampering.

As described above, the fastening screw is non-transparent and easily casts a shadow, but according to this embodiment, a plurality of light emitting means A663 and a diffusion plate A661 capable of diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 are disposed on the rear side of the fastening screw. Therefore, the shadow of the fastening screw can be made lighter (the shadow can be eliminated) by the diffused light, and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made less noticeable.

In particular, the light emitting means A663 is disposed at a position where the through hole A616a does not overlap with the optical axis directed along the front-rear direction (a position where the outline projected in the front-rear direction does not overlap). This makes it possible to make the shadow of the fastening screw thinner (to eliminate the shadow), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw less noticeable can be more pronounced.

As described above, the main irradiation device A660 is disposed on the rear side of the ball's flow path, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 is irradiated onto the ball's flow path, but in this embodiment, the light reaches the flow path via the diffuser plate A661. Therefore, compared to the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 without going through the diffuser plate, the light can be made faint and spread out. This allows
This reduces eye fatigue caused to players who focus on the path of the ball.

The auxiliary illumination device A670 comprises an illumination board A671 arranged on the rear side of the auxiliary light emitting holding frame A617 and having a plurality of light emitting means A672 arranged thereon, and a rear cover portion A673 arranged on the rear side of the illumination board A671 and formed from an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the illumination board A671.

The illumination board A671 is fixed in the same manner as the illumination board A662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A671 is held in a manner sandwiched from the front and rear between the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 and the rear cover portion A673 (held by surface abutment).

As a result, even if the rear cover portion A673 is thin and has low rigidity on its own, the rigidity of the auxiliary light-emitting holding frame A617 can be utilized to stably hold the illumination board A671.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, the auxiliary irradiation device A670 has an illumination board A671
That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 is irradiated to the main body member A610 without being diffused and with the luminous intensity maintained.

Although the light is emitted in this manner, in this embodiment, the light emitting means A672 is disposed at a position overlapping with the low transmission range A651b when viewed from the front, so that the light emitted from the light emitting means A672 passes through the low transmission range A651b and is visible to the player. Therefore, the player sees light weakened by the low transmission range A651b, so it is possible to avoid excessive eye fatigue of the player who sees the light.

In addition, by maintaining the light emission intensity, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked by the low transmission range A651b. As a result, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is depicted in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to execute an effect in which the character is brightly illuminated by the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

FIG. 315(a) and FIG. 315(b) are CCCXIIc-CCCXI of FIG. 312(b).
315(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lottery unit A600 taken along a line corresponding to line Ic. In FIG. 315(a), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state, that is, the electric role 640a is in a closed state (FIG. 31
4(a)) is shown, and in FIG. 315(b) the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL,
That is, the open state of the electric device 640a (see Figure 314 (b)) is shown.

315(a), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in a non-excited state, the lower end of the disk portion at the tip of the operating member A632 abuts against the recessed surface A625c of the engaging member A620. Here, the disk portion of the operating member A632 advances toward the front side to an extent that it faces the vicinity of the widthwise middle position of the recessed surface A625c, and in addition, the recessed surface A625c is made to be a surface that is approximately parallel to the front-rear direction in which the operating member A632 moves, so that the load applied from the engaging member A620 to the operating member A632 is a load whose main component is in the up-down direction (the direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction).

Therefore, by moving (retreating) the operating member A632 with the load from the engaging member A620, it is possible to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620, and therefore it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts such as inserting a wire such as a piano wire through a gap in the pachinko machine A10 and applying a load to the movable part 640a to change it to the open state.

Pachinko machines have traditionally been equipped with a function that outputs an error notification if fraudulent activity is detected. However, in cases where the movable part 640a, which is visible from the front, can be fraudulently loaded to open the movable part 640 regardless of the state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, this has not been a sufficient deterrent to fraudulent activity.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine A10 of this embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable role 640 and the state is about to change, the movable role 640a and the engagement member A620 are engaged via the eccentric protruding portion 640b of the movable role 640a (see FIG. 314(a)).
In the configuration of this embodiment in which it is difficult to change the posture of 620, it is also possible to make it difficult to open the movable part 640a by applying a load to the movable part 640a.

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent act of applying a load to the movable part 640a, the concave surface A625a is formed so that the rod-shaped part A625a becomes thicker toward the rotating tip side of the engagement member A620.
Since 625c is inclined, if the engaging member A620 is forcibly displaced in the upward direction from the state shown in Figure 315(a) (for example, while deforming the tip connecting rod portion A625), the contact position of the rod-shaped portion A625a with the operating member A632 shifts toward the thicker side (the rotating tip side), making it difficult for the tip connecting rod portion A625 to deform.

Therefore, every time the engaging member A620 is displaced in the rising direction, the engaging member A62
Since the load required to displace 0 can be increased, fraudulent behavior of attempting to open the movable part 640a by applying a load to the movable part 640a can be suppressed.

In addition, the flat surface of the rod-shaped portion A625a opposite to the recessed surface A625c is an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side.
When the moving member A6 a is bent and deformed in the thickness direction due to the load received from the moving member A632,
The reaction force applied to the support 32 can be directed in a direction that inclines upward as it approaches the front side.

This allows the load in the front-rear direction applied from the rod-shaped portion A625a to the operating member A632 to be generated as a load toward the front side, and the operating member A632 can be prevented from retreating backward due to the load from the rod-shaped portion A625a, so that the engaging member A62 can be more reliably engaged.
The rising displacement of 0 can be restricted.

As shown in FIG. 315(b), when the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in an excited state, the operating member A6
When the lower end of the disk portion of 32 comes into contact with the protruding restriction portion A624b of the engagement member A620, further backward rotation (movement in the rising direction) of the engagement member A620 is restricted before it collides with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In other words, since the rotation of the base end side connecting rod portion A624 can be restricted without causing a collision with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, it is possible to avoid the problem of the base end side connecting rod portion A624 colliding with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL and cracking or bending.

FIG. 316(a) is a top view of the operational unit A300, and FIG. 316(b) is a top view of the operational unit A300 shown in FIG.
FIG. 317 is a side view of the operating unit A300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 2.
13 and the rear view of operation unit A300.

As shown in Figures 316(a) and 316(b), the front end surface of the first operating unit A400 is disposed so as to protrude further forward than the front end of the rear case A310. When forming the game board A13 from a plywood board while disposing the first operating unit A400 in this manner, it is necessary to form a recess or hole on the rear side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first operating unit A400. However, in this embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed from a resin base plate A60, if a shape that avoids interference with the first operating unit A400 is designed in advance and a mold is manufactured, the game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in this embodiment, the base plate A60 of the game board A13 is recessed from the rear side to the front side along the left, right and upper surfaces (see FIG. 306), so that the front end surface of the first operating unit A400 is configured to protrude further toward the front side than the front end of the rear case A310, and interference between the game board A13 and the first operating unit A400 can be easily avoided.
Since the first action unit A400 can be positioned closer to the player, the presentation effect of making the first action unit A400 visible can be improved.

As shown in Figures 316 (b) and 317, the support plate portion A313 arranged on the upper part of the rear case A310 is arranged inside (lower) than the outer surface (upper surface) of the outer wall portion A312.
This allows the outer wall portion A312 in the left-right center where the support plate portion A313 is not disposed to be positioned further outward (upper), while lowering the upper end position of the rear case A310 compared to when the support plate portion A313 is disposed outside the outer wall portion A312.

In other words, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit A400 (or the second operating unit A700) relative to the rear case A310, while improving the degree of freedom in arranging the rear case A310 relative to the game board A13.

In addition, as described above, the left and right positions where the support plate portion A313 on the upper part of the rear case A310 is arranged are located outside the playing area when viewed from the front, so that the impact (disadvantage) on playing caused by the support plate portion A313 being positioned below the outer wall portion A312 can be kept to a minimum.

As shown in Fig. 317, unlike the left side, the support plate A313 is omitted on the right side of the rear case A310 except at the upper end position. In other words, the space that would be occupied by the support plate A313 below the upper end position can be omitted, so that the outer wall A312 of the rear case A310 can be moved closer to the right end of the game board A13.

FIG. 318 shows the game board A13 on the CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII line in FIG. 302.
318 is a partial cross-sectional view of the base plate A60 and the operation unit A300.
In comparison with the outer edge extension portion 60a extending toward the rear side along the outer edge, the central protrusion portion 60b protruding toward the rear side in an area more inward than the outer edge extension portion 60a and at least partially overlapping with the play area front-to-back is formed to have a shorter front-to-back width.

Since the front end surface of the base plate A60 is formed on approximately the same plane, the rear end of the central protrusion portion 60b is positioned closer to the front than the rear end of the outer edge extension portion 60a, thereby avoiding interference between the base plate A60 and the first operating unit A400.

Between the outer edge extension 60a and the central protrusion 60b, a recess 60 is provided that is recessed toward the front side.
In the range where the recessed portion 60c is formed, the base plate A60 is formed to be thinner than the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central protrusion portion 60b. That is, the degree of reduction in the energy of light passing through the base plate A60 is adjusted by adjusting the thickness of the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central protrusion portion 60b in the range where the recessed portion 60c is formed.
0a and the central projection 60b.

The front side of the base plate A60 is covered with a center frame A86, and the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap between it and the outer edge member A73 as shown in Fig. 318, and this gap is disposed at a position overlapping with the recessed portion 60c when viewed in the front-rear direction.
It can also be maintained on the front side of 0.

The light with reduced energy loss is used to illuminate the ball as it flows down between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73. In this manner, in this embodiment, the degree of energy loss of the light used to illuminate the ball can be reduced as it passes through the game board A13, so that a weaker light can be used to effectively illuminate the ball.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, the inner surface of the outer edge member A73 is disposed outward from the inner surface of the outer edge extension portion 60a of the base plate A60 in a front view, so that the flow path of the ball is set to the recessed portion 6
Therefore, it is possible to easily arrange the recess 60c at a position where it overlaps with the recess 60c at the front and rear. Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the sphere with light that has passed through the recess 60c.

318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate-like member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. This allows the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate-like member 75 to be configured integrally and mutually complementary from the viewpoint of rigidity.

In addition, when light is irradiated onto the bent portion 75b, the light is reflected by the metal.
The light emission intensity between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60 can be locally increased. The light emission with locally increased intensity occurs when the inner end (left end) of the bent portion 75b in the width direction is in contact with the outer edge member A73.
Since the light is emitted from a location that can be seen through the vertical wall portion 73b (FIG. 30),
8) can be limited to the formation range of the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c (the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c can be excluded).

As a result, even when light is irradiated from the rear side toward the entire top and bottom of the metal plate-like member 75, the areas where the light emission intensity is locally high can be limited to the vertical length range of the vertical wall portion 73b, making it easier to focus the player's line of sight on the lottery unit A600, which is positioned opposite the vertical wall portion 73b, and the area above it where the flow path is formed.

319, 320, 321, and 322 are front views of the operating unit A300. In the explanations of Fig. 319, 320, 321, and 322, the description "all first operating units A400" or "plurality of first operating units A400" means five first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.
The configurations and functions that can be commonly adopted by the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D may be described using the first operation unit A400 as a representative example.

In FIG. 319, all the first operation units A400 and the second operation units A700 are the third
The state where the symbol display device 81 does not protrude toward the side and maintains the retreated state is illustrated in FIG.
At 0, all of the first operating units A400 are excited and placed in an extended state extending toward the third pattern display device 81, while the second operating units A700 maintain a retracted state.

FIG. 321 shows a state in which all the first operating units A400 are kept in the retreated state, and the second operating unit A700 is in the extended state extending toward the third pattern display device 81.
In FIG. 22, some of the first operating units A400B and A400C are in the retracted state, the other first operating units A400, A400A and A400D are in the extended state, and the second operating unit A700 is maintained in the extended state.

As shown in FIG. 319 to FIG. 322, the plurality of first operating units A400 are arranged in an area defined by a colored (in this embodiment, ultramarine) cover member A591, so that the player can
A front cover A4 formed in a conspicuous color (in this embodiment, the front surface is gold plated)
10 and the first displacement member A440 are configured to be mainly visible, and the first displacement member A440
The edge of the third pattern display device 81 is positioned so that it is closest to the adjacent first operating unit A400.

In other words, the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are arranged in a position that follows a radial line extending from the inside (center) of the third pattern display device 81 toward the outside, so that the player's gaze can be focused toward the inside of the third pattern display device 81, which is the center of this radial line.

The side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the third pattern display device 81 side is adjacent to the first displacement member A440.
Since the first displacement member A440 is closest to the first displacement member A440, as shown in FIG. 319, the lateral side of the first displacement member A440 (including the side adjacent to the adjacent first displacement member A440) is closest to the tip side (the third pattern display device 8
1 side). As a result, the adjacent first displacement member A4
It avoids interfering with 40.

Although there is no limitation on the starting point of chamfering, in this embodiment, chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection where a straight line extending along the lateral side surface of the first displacement member A440 intersects with a straight line similarly extended from an adjacent first displacement member A440, and chamfering is performed from just before the intersection. This allows the first displacement members A440 to avoid interference with each other while
A wide range in which the first displacement member A440 can be visually recognized can be ensured.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the retreated state of the first operating unit A400, the first displacement member A4
The first displacement member A440 is disposed in a position that is wide from front to back so as to occupy a range from the rear side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, compared with the case where the position of the first displacement member A440 is limited to a position in which the light-emitting side surface (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) faces the front side, the area that the first displacement member A440 occupies in a front view can be reduced, and the visual change can be increased while reducing the amount of displacement in a front view.

This configuration is effective when there are circumstances in which the range available for displacement of the first displacement member A440 is limited within the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see Figure 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1, but details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, in the extended state of the first operating unit A400, the second displacement member A4
90 is positioned in an extended position, while the first displacement member A440 is positioned in an extended position (a position away from the third pattern display device 81).

In detail, the first displacement member A440 is disposed in a position wide from the front to the rear so as to occupy a range from the rear side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81,
The state changes from a state in which it interferes with the movement trajectory of the displacement member A490 (retracted state of the first operating unit A400) to a state in which it moves closer to the game board A13 to allow movement of the second displacement member A490 and is positioned more forward than the second displacement member A490 (extended state of the first operating unit A400).

As a result, the first displacement member A440 determines whether the first operating unit A400 is in the retreated state or
Regardless of whether it is in the extended state or not, the light is not blocked by the second displacement member A490, and it is possible to perform a light emission performance in which light is emitted toward the player side. In particular, in the extended state of the first displacement member A440, the light emission state of the long holes A412a (see FIG. 325) arranged around the third symbol display device 81 can be switched, and it is configured to be able to guide the line of sight to the third symbol display device 81, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, the second operation unit A700 is configured so that the performance unit A710 can move up and down to the center side of the third pattern display device 81. Also, the second operation unit A700
It is equipped with a rotating body A720 which is configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the performance unit A710, and the rotation of this rotating body A720 makes it possible to perform a light-emitting performance in which light travels in multiple directions, as will be described in more detail below.

As shown in Fig. 322, each of the first operating units A400 has an individual driving device, and therefore each first operating unit A400 can independently change and maintain the state. In other words, the combinations that configure the retracted state and the extended state in the first operating unit A400 are not limited to those shown in Fig. 322, and can be set arbitrarily.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one of the first operation units A400, or to execute the state change in different first operation units A400 in sequence. For example, it is possible to execute the state change in sequence clockwise from the bottom left first operation unit A400, or to execute the state change in sequence from the bottom left first operation unit A400B in clockwise order.
In this way, the first operation unit A can execute state changes in both directions.
400 can be used to perform a variety of effects.

Also, for example, the first operating units A400B and A400C, which are in the retreated state in FIG.
00C's second displacement member A490 is disposed in the extended position, whereby the second operating unit A700
When the first operation units A400B and A400C are configured to interfere with the second operation unit A700, the first operation units A400B and A400C that may interfere with the second operation unit A700 can be in a retracted state, and the other first operation units A400, A400A, and A400D can be in a protruding state.
Compared to the case where all the first operating units A400 are synchronously operated by the same driving device,
It is possible to increase the variety of combinations of the operations (states) of the operational unit A400 and the second operational unit A700.

Fig. 323 is a front view of the operating unit A300. In Fig. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As shown in Fig. 323,
The front cover A410 of the operating unit A400 is arranged to effectively decorate the play area, as will be described below.

First, when the play area is defined as the area where the ball that passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, the section where the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are arranged opposite each other to guide the ball (the section from the ball launching unit 112a side to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302)) is not included in the play area, and the outer frame of the play area in this section is the inner rail 61. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operating unit A400, A400A (up to the second one from the bottom left) arranged on the back side of the inner rail 61 is arranged near (on the outer side of) the inner rail 61 (it is not necessary to extend it to the outer rail 62).

On the other hand, the outer frame of the play area in the area after the ball passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (particularly the area where a ball hit to the right flows down) becomes the outer rail 62. Therefore, the outer ends of the front covers A410 of the first operating units A400B, A400C (the third and fourth from the bottom left) arranged on the back side of the outer rail 62 are arranged near the outer rail 62 (on the outer side).

Furthermore, the outer rail 62 ends and the outer edge member A73 is disposed in the area where the outer edge member A73 is disposed, and the outer edge member A73 constitutes the outer frame of the play area. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operating unit A400D (the first one on the bottom right) disposed on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is disposed near the inner side surface (outer side) of the outer edge member A73. This is because, in this embodiment, the rear case A310
The support plate A313 is omitted in the middle of the right side of the game board A13, and the rear case A13 is attached to the right end of the game board A13.
This is possible because the right end of 310 is brought closer to the center.

That is, by forming the internal area of the rear case A310 close to the right end of the game board A13 when viewed from the front, the first operating unit A400D can be arranged close to the right end of the game board A13. As a result, a flow path (a flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall portion 86d and the outer edge member A73, FIG. 3) is arranged near the right end of the game board A13 as a flow path through which a ball hit to the right flows.
02)) on the outer side (right side) of the front cover A410.
An operational unit A400D may be provided.

In other words, like a typical right-handed machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not symmetrical),
When the right-hand hitting flow path is made extremely narrow compared to the left-hand hitting flow path and is arranged close to the right edge of the game board A13, as in this embodiment, a movable device such as the first operating unit A400 can be arranged right-justified in the internal area of the rear case A310, making it possible to arrange movable devices over the entire rear side of the game area.

On the other hand, on the left side of the rear case A310, a guide portion is formed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 when viewed from the front, and since it is difficult for the player to focus his or her gaze on this guide portion, even if the support plate portion A313 is disposed on the left side of the rear case A310 as in this embodiment, it is possible to avoid reducing the degree of improvement in the decoration of the play area. Therefore, in this embodiment, it can be said that the optimal choice from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the play area is to dispose the support plate portion A313 on the left side of the rear case A310 and omit the support plate portion A313 on the right side of the rear case A310.

As described above in FIG. 323, the multiple front covers A410 are effectively arranged in the game area, so that the patterns and figures that are visible to the player who is paying attention to the game area can be displayed on the game board A410.
The housing 10 may be made up of a plurality of front covers A410 visible through 13.

This makes it unnecessary to decorate the game area by attaching stickers or the like with characters or the like printed on the surface of the game board A13.
The area in which the first operation unit A400 is arranged is configured so that the appearance can be changed depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emission mode of the light emitting means, as described above.
This allows for more variety in the manner of decorating the play area compared to attaching stickers or the like to the display 13. The change in appearance will be described in detail later.

In addition, the outside of the play area is hidden by a block-shaped member 74 (see FIG. 305).
Even if parts of the structure are exposed or a drive unit is disposed here, it is possible to avoid the appearance being poor.

As shown in FIG. 323, adjacent first operating units A400 are arranged close to each other with a small gap therebetween, and the cover member A591 arranged between them covers the adjacent first operating units A400.
The first operation unit A400 is fastened and fixed to the first operation unit A400 in a manner that connects them together. That is, in this embodiment, a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) first operation units A400 arranged around the third pattern display device 81 are connected to each other to form an integrated structure.

Furthermore, the outer side surface of the first operating unit A400 is disposed close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire first operating unit A400 can be improved, and the rigidity of the first operating unit A400 can assist the deformation of the rear case A310. Therefore, from the viewpoint of reinforcing the rear case A310 described above,
It is possible to avoid relying too much on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308).
Since the strength (rigidity, plate thickness) required for the metal plate member 75 can be reduced, the degree of freedom in designing the metal plate member 75 can be improved.

This allows the metal plate member 75 to be easily designed into a shape that facilitates its original functions of noise prevention and earthing by contact with the inner surface of the inner frame 12 (see Figures 303 and 304).

Fig. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit A300. Fig. 324 illustrates a state in which a plurality of (five in this embodiment) first operating units A400 are removed from the rear case A310 to the front side, and a second operating unit A700 is attached to the rear case A310.

The first operational units A400 are configured to be operable in a generally common operational manner,
A plurality of first operating units A400 are arranged to surround a part of the periphery of the internal space of the rear case A310. Each first operating unit A400 is configured to move in a moving direction toward the center of the internal space of the rear case A310 (a direction along the radial line emitted from the center of the internal space of the rear case A310) as shown in Figs. 319 and 320.

Therefore, for example, since the influence of gravity may vary for each first operation unit A400, in this embodiment, a configuration is devised so that the operation can be realized without relying on gravity.
As described above, each first operation unit A400 has a roughly common configuration, so the first operation unit A400 disposed at the bottom left will be described in detail, and the description of the other first operation units A400 will be omitted.

Fig. 325 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and Fig. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. As shown in Fig. 325 and Fig. 326, the area of the first operating unit A400 is a generally rectangular area when viewed from the front, covered by a front cover A410, and is composed of a main body area A400b where light emission performance is mainly performed, and an auxiliary area A400v that is provided at the end of the main body area A400b.

The annex area A400v is not an area that is expected to be visible to the player in the assembled state. In particular, the central side that is likely to be visible to the player is covered with a concealing cover member A591, and the back side of the cover member A591 is configured so that it cannot be seen by the player.

By arranging components (such as the drive motor AMT1, the detection sensor A426 for detecting the position, wiring, connectors, etc.) that are inevitably generated in association with the performance executed in the main body area A400b, but are not intended to be visually recognized by the player, in this auxiliary area A400v, it is possible to make maximum use of the main body area A400b for arranging components that are intended to be visually recognized by the player.
Since it is possible to prevent the main body area A400b from being encroached upon by components that are not intended to be viewed by the player, it is possible to make full use of the size of the main body area A400b and place large components therein.

Fig. 327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit A400, and Fig. 328 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit A400. Note that Figs. 327 and 328 show a state in which the front cover A410 has been removed.

As shown in FIG. 327 and FIG. 328, the first operating unit A400 includes a front cover A41
A first displacement member A440 that can be displaced in a manner to enter between the front cover A410 and the
and a rear unit BU disposed on the rear side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 is constructed by bending a thin plate into a U-shape on the front side of the front unit FU so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU, and mainly comprises a main body portion A411 which is fastened and fixed to the rear unit BU, a plurality of through holes A412 which are drilled at positions determined in relation to the front unit FU, and a guide portion A413 which guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 has the following functions: it conceals most of the area of the front unit FU from the player's view while allowing a specific area to be viewed through the through hole A412;
The main function is to guide the displacement of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.

FIG. 329 is an exploded front perspective view of the front cover A410, and FIG.
329 and 330, the front cover A41
329 ) or other light emitting means A416a such as LEDs (illustrated as substantially square chip shapes in FIG. 329 ) with their optical axes facing the diffuser A415 toward the diffuser A415 side. The diffuser A415 is stacked on the back side of the central performance part A411a of the main body part A411. The diffuser A415 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is disposed opposite the central performance part A411a. The diffuser A415 has an external shape corresponding to the shape of the central performance part A411a. The diffuser A415 is stacked on the back side ...
and a board fixing plate A417 which is arranged opposite the front unit FU and which fixes the illumination board A416 and is fastened to the front unit FU.

Below, we will explain the configurations of the diffusion plate A415, the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and how this configuration suppresses positional misalignment.

The diffusion plate A415 is not fastened with fastening screws or the like, but is supported by being sandwiched between the main body A411 and the substrate fixing plate A417 from the front and rear directions, and has a wave pattern formed from protrusions that extend concentrically around an axial corresponding position A415a arranged opposite the light emitting means A416a on the rear side, and mainly comprises a recessed portion A415b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of fine holes A415c drilled as through holes with a fine diameter smaller than the light emitting means, and a plurality of protruding plate portions A415d protruding in a plate-like manner toward the rear side from the edges that constitute the upper and lower ends.

The protrusions that form the wave pattern on the back side of the diffusion plate A415 are formed in a shape that refracts the light irradiated toward the axis corresponding position A415a, causing it to travel in the radial direction of a circle centered on the axis corresponding position A415a and then travel toward the front side. That is, the light that is incident on the axis corresponding position A415a side is visually recognized by the player at a position away from the axis corresponding position A415a (radially outward), but the reverse is not true. That is, the protrusions are formed to prevent the light that is incident at a position away from the axis corresponding position A415a from traveling toward the axis corresponding position A415a side.

The recessed portion A415b is a notch formed to avoid interference between components, and in this embodiment, it is formed for the purpose of avoiding interference with the screw head of the fastening screw that fastens the illuminated board A416 to the board fixing plate A417.

The thin-diameter portion 415c is formed in the through-hole A412 of the main body portion A411 so as to be difficult to see when viewed from the front.
(a position facing the plate portion of the main body portion A411)
The through hole is formed at a position corresponding to the insertion column portion A417f of the diffusion plate A415,
This is used to align the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, but details will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A415d is formed to be fitted into the notch portion A417h of the substrate fixing plate A417 so as to enable alignment of the diffusion plate A415 with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417. The protruding plate portion A415d is formed with a protruding length of approximately 4 mm and a width of approximately 10 mm at the upper limit, and has a certain degree of rigidity, so that it is possible to prevent the protruding plate portion A415d from bending or breaking due to loads generated during assembly or maintenance (for example, loads generated by collisions or friction with other members), and the alignment function can be maintained for a long time.

The diffusion plate A415 has a wave pattern formed over the entire back side, and can diffuse light over the entire area, but from the perspective of the presentation, it is clearly divided into a first area AC1 and a second area AC2. That is, the first area AC1 is an area that overlaps with the illumination board A416 when viewed from the front, and the second area AC2 is an area that does not overlap with the illumination board A416 when viewed from the front.

The first area AC1 is lit by the light axis of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416, and can be visually recognized by the player as a strong light emitting effect.
This corresponds to an area formed so as to extend from the right side wall A417a3 of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the outside (right) of the substrate fixing plate A417, and the optical axis of the light-emitting means A416a of the illuminated substrate A416 does not pass through it, so the light from the light-emitting means A416a reaches it weakened.

On the other hand, the second area AC2 has a function of enhancing the effect of the light emission produced by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, but this will be described in detail later.

The illumination board A416 includes the above-mentioned light emitting means A416a, a recessed portion A416b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large diameter holes A416c drilled with a large diameter for positioning, a plurality of group fastening holes 416d arranged as a group of small diameter through holes, a plurality of connectors A416e arranged on the front and back and to which the ends of wiring are connected, and an electric wiring F for supplying electricity to the first displacement member A440.
C (in this embodiment, a flat cable) is connected to an intermediate connector A416f
And, mainly prepare.

The light emitting means A416a is located at a position where the intensity of light visible to the player is likely to be maximum, and in this embodiment, is preferentially arranged at a position that coincides in the front-rear direction with the position where the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 is formed. This makes it easier to ensure the intensity of light that the player sees through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A416b is a cutout formed to avoid interference with the head of a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A417b to fasten the board fixing plate A417 to the front unit FU.

The large diameter hole A416c is a through hole with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar portion A417f of the board fixing plate A417, and is drilled at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar portion A417f.
can be aligned with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

The assembly fastening portion A416d is composed of a pair of small diameter through holes aligned vertically. The fastening screw is inserted into the upper through hole of the pair of through holes, thereby improving maintenance efficiency.

For example, as a maintenance measure, the main body A411 and the diffusion plate A415 are removed with the first operating unit A400 fixed to the rear case A310, and the defective illumination board A4
16 is removed from the board fixing plate A417, and the normal illumination board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A417.
It is assumed that the work of attaching the board to the mounting plate A416 will be performed, and before the board is fastened, the board A416 will fall forward due to its own weight. In contrast, in this embodiment, the upper through-hole (the side with the greater displacement toward the front side due to the forward fall) of the pair of upper and lower through-holes of the assembly fastening portion A416d is fixed with a fastening screw, so that the forward fall due to its own weight can be returned to the backward fall direction with the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the position of the board A416 from being erroneously fixed when fastening for maintenance.

In addition, the lower through-hole of the assembly fastening portion A416d has a function of inserting the columnar portion of the board fastening portion A417c protruding from the front side of the board fixing plate A417 to position the illumination board A416 and temporarily fasten the illumination board A416. In other words, even before the fastening screw is fastened, the lower through-hole is hooked onto the columnar portion of the board fastening portion A417c, thereby preventing the illumination board A416 from falling under its own weight.

The connector A416e is arranged on the front side and mainly comprises a first connector A416e1 to which wiring for supplying power and controlling the light emission of the light-emitting means A416a is connected, a second connector A416e2 to which wiring that is connected to the detection sensor A426 fixed to the front unit FU is connected, and a third connector A416e3 to which wiring that is connected to the second displacement member A490 arranged in the rear unit BU is connected.

These connectors A416e can be arranged at any position because the position of the mating member to which the wiring is connected is fixed (first connector A416e1, second connector A416e2) and there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating member is movable (third connector A416e3). In this embodiment, the connectors A416e are arranged at a position corresponding to the lower end of the illumination board A416 and in the annex area A416e so as to be unlikely to interfere with other members and to be visible to players.
It is placed at a location included in 400v.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440, which is the counterpart member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring, is configured to displace the area on the opposite side of the illuminated board A416 (the gap formed between the board fixing plate A417 and the guide plate portion A430 (see Figure 335)) by sandwiching the board fixing plate A417. As a result, the spacing between the connectors (front-to-back spacing) becomes short, and there is a risk of excessive strain being placed on the wiring if the connectors are positioned incorrectly.

In this embodiment, unlike the connector A416e, which can be wired in any direction (in this embodiment, the wires are connected to the connector A416e from below), the intermediate connector A416
The posture of f is changed to the direction A416x, which is the moving direction of the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU.
and the direction in which the electric wiring FC can stretch (the band of the flat cable can stretch and bend easily, and there is little possibility of breakage).

The board fixing plate A417 has a main body A417a formed in a box shape with an open front side capable of accommodating the illumination board A416, a plurality of through holes A417b having a protrusion portion on the back side of the main body A417a to receive the fastening portion of the front unit FU and configured to allow the fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion to be inserted therethrough, and a plurality of board fastening portions A417c each composed of a fastening portion into which the fastening screw is screwed and a thin-diameter columnar portion protruding from a common plane with the tip surface of the fastening portion toward the front side.
And, it is equipped with.

The main body A417a of the substrate fixing plate A417 is made up of a deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1 connected to the rear end of the substrate fastening portion A417c, and a shallow bottom plate-like portion A417a1 which is parallel to the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1 and has a front surface formed on the same plane as the tip surface of the fastening portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c.
17a2.

In other words, the rear surface of the illumination board A416 can be surface-supported by the tip surfaces of the fastening portions of the multiple board fastening portions A417c and the shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a sharp protruding portion A417d that protrudes from the deep bottom plate portion A417a1 toward the front side with a sharp tip, and a rectangular through hole A417e that is drilled in the lower left part of the sharp protruding portion A417d and has a width equal to the vertical width of the sharp protruding portion A417d.

The sharp protrusion A417d is disposed at the lower left of the intermediate connector A416f in the assembled state, and is formed as a linearly extending protrusion having a triangular cross section with a gap of about the thickness of the electric wiring FC, which is a flat cable, between the electric wiring board A416 and the electric wiring board A416, and the extension direction of the protrusion intersects (is perpendicular to) the direction A416x in a front view. The wiring connected to the intermediate connector A416f is routed to the back side through the insertion hole A417e, so that
The electrical wiring FC connected to the intermediate connector A416f is sandwiched between the board fixing plate A417 and the sharp protruding portion A417d.

In this way, by sandwiching and supporting the electrical wiring FC between the substrate fixing plate A417 and the sharp protruding portion A417d, the portion of the electrical wiring FC that is displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is shifted from the end position of the electrical wiring FC that is connected to the intermediate connector A416f to the substrate fixing plate A41
7 and the sharp protruding portion A417d. This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from falling off from the intermediate connector A416f.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a shallow bottom plate-like portion A417 at a position corresponding to the large diameter hole A416c.
A plurality of through-hole column-shaped portions A417f protruding from the front side from the shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2 are provided.
a2, a plurality of through holes A417g formed at the boundary between the shallow bottom plate-like portion A417a2 and the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1, a plurality of notches A417h formed in the side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main body A417a to the front side with a width capable of receiving the protruding plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415, and a plurality of protruding pieces A417i protruding toward the inside of the main body A417a along the front side end of the side wall A417a3 formed obliquely on the right side when viewed from the front.
And, it is equipped with.

The insertion columnar portion A417f includes a large diameter base portion which protrudes beyond the thickness of the illumination board A416 with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large diameter hole A416c of the illumination board A416c and on the plane formed by the tip of the side wall A417a3, and a thin diameter tip portion which protrudes from the tip of the large diameter base with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the thin diameter hole A415c of the diffusion plate A415.

This allows the large-diameter base portion to align the illumination board A416 and support the surface of the diffusion plate A415, and the small-diameter tip portion to align the diffusion plate A415.
The diffusion plate A415 is aligned at its small-diameter tip and is surface-supported by the side wall A417a3 and the tip of the large-diameter base of the insertion columnar portion A417f. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the position of the diffusion plate A415 from shifting, even though the diffusion plate A415 is not directly fastened and fixed.

The through hole A417g has a function of forming an air passage and suppressing heat generation of the illumination board A416. In this embodiment, the diffusion plate A415 is arranged in a manner to block the front side of the light emitting means A416a of the illumination board A416, and since it is difficult to form an air passage to the front side, the through hole A417g is formed on the back side. This makes it possible to suppress heat generation of the illumination board A416 without reducing the performance effect of the light emitting means A416a.

The cutout portion A417h receives the protruding plate portion A415d of the diffusion plate A415 and is formed on the side wall A41
7a3. This allows the diffusion plate A4 to be engaged in the direction along the axial direction of ...
It is possible to prevent the substrate fixing plate A417 from being misaligned in the longitudinal direction of the protruding plate portion A415d (the direction along the formation direction of the side wall A417a3, the upper right direction).
In the above-described supporting mode in which the diffusion plate A415 is not fastened, it is possible to prevent the diffusion plate A415 from shifting out of position.

The protruding piece A417i is formed in a thin plate shape that allows the illumination board A416 to enter between the shallow bottom plate-shaped portion A417a2 and the protruding piece A417i. In this embodiment, in the assembled state, the protruding piece A417i is formed with a protruding length that interferes with the illumination board A416 in a front view.
is protruding downward (diagonally downward) from the side wall A417a3, so that even if the illuminated board A416 receives a load in a direction that causes it to fall forward due to gravity or the like, this protruding piece A417i will engage (stop from the front side) the tilted tip side (upper right side) of the illuminated board A416, thereby preventing the illuminated board A416 from falling forward.

The protruding piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operating unit A300, and the illumination board A4
The displacement of the operating unit A3 toward the front side is restricted (fluttering is suppressed).
The illumination board A416 can be stably fixed while omitting the arrangement of fastening screws inside the internal space of the unit A3.00. This makes it possible to stably fix the illumination board A416.
The illumination board A416 is fixed to the board fixing plate A410 while avoiding a reduction in the light-emitting effect caused by arranging fastening screws inside the internal space of the illumination board A410 (due to a shadow caused by the fastening screws).
7 and can be stably fixed thereto.

When assembling the illumination board A416 to the board fixing plate A417, the right edge of the illumination board A416 is inserted obliquely between the shallow bottom plate-like portion A417a2 and the protruding piece A417i, and the illumination board A416 is pushed backward from the tip of the insertion, so that the illumination board can be smoothly assembled. This will be described with reference to Figures 331 and 332.

FIG. 331(a) is a front view of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.
1(b) is a cross-sectional view of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 taken along the line CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb in FIG. 331(a), and FIG. 332(a) is a cross-sectional view of the illumination board A416
332(b) is a front view of the substrate fixing plate A417, and FIG. 332(a) is a front view of the CCCX.
This is a cross-sectional view of the illuminated substrate A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417 along the line XXIIb-CCCXXXIIb.

Figures 331(a) and 331(b) show the state in which the illumination board A416 is inserted into the board fixing plate A417, and Figures 332(a) and 332(b) show the state in which the illumination board A416 is assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

The illumination board A416 has chamfered portions A416g that are chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the board body.
The chamfered portions A416g, A416h correspond to the length from the top and bottom ends of the right side of the board fixing plate A417 to the adjacent notch portion A417h. In other words, the length to the notch portion A417h at the bottom end is shorter than the length to the notch portion A417h at the top end of the right side of the board fixing plate A417.
Compared to the first chamfered portion A416g at the upper end of the illumination board A416, the second chamfered portion A416h at the lower end is formed at a shorter distance from the right side of the illumination board A416.

In FIG. 331, the illumination board A416 is fixed to the board fixing plate A41, as compared with the state shown in FIG.
331 shows a state in which the first chamfered portion A416g has been displaced upward along the inclination of the left side of the substrate fixing plate A417. The degree of this displacement is limited to the length of the space formed between the first chamfered portion A416g and the upper side surface of the substrate fixing plate A417, and in the state shown in FIG. 331, the edge of the first chamfered portion A416g enters the gap formed by the cutout portion A417h.

Contrary to the state shown in Figure 331, when the illuminated board A416 is displaced downward, the illuminated board A416 can be shifted downward from the state in Figure 332 up to the length of the space formed between the second chamfered portion A416h and the underside of the board fixing plate A417, and in this downward shifted state, the edge of the second chamfered portion A416h will fit into the gap formed by the cutout portion A417h.

In this way, by forming the chamfered portions A416g and A416h on the illumination board A416, the degree of freedom of the position of the illumination board A416 when inserting the illumination board A416 into the board fixing plate A417 can be improved.
The illumination board A416 can be inserted into the board fixing plate A417 by allowing a slight vertical deviation even if the right side of the illumination board A416 is not in the positional relationship as shown in FIG.
The illumination board A416 can be easily inserted into the board fixing plate A417.

To change from the state shown in FIG. 331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the illumination board A416 should be tilted so as to approach the board fixing plate A417 with its right side as the axis of tilt.
As shown in FIG. 331, the substrate fixing plate A41 is inserted through the large diameter hole A416c of the illumination substrate A416.
As can be seen from the insertion column portion A417f of .7, the tapered insertion column portion A417f (see FIG. 329) guides the large diameter hole 417c, so that the illumination board A4
The vertical positional deviation of the illumination board A416 is corrected to the state shown in FIG. 332. Therefore, the vertical deviation of the illumination board A416 is corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical deviation of the illumination board A416.
The illumination board A416 can be easily assembled to the board fixing plate A417.

In addition, the notch portion A417h is provided with a protruding plate portion A415 in the assembled state (see FIG. 325).
d is fitted in and the gap is filled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the illumination board A416 from entering the notch portion A417h after assembly.
It has the function of widening the gap when assembling the illuminated board A416, and once it is in the assembled state, it can have the function of maintaining the position of the illuminated board A416 by filling the gap.

As shown in FIG. 332(b), when the illumination board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A417, the protruding piece A417i protrudes from the front side of the illumination board A416.
The right side of the illumination board A416 is interfering with the removal of the board fixing plate A41.
7.

By using such a retaining structure to prevent the illumination board A416 from falling off, in this embodiment, a board fastening portion A417 is provided near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417.
c is not provided (the fastening screw is omitted). This allows the arrangement area of the light emitting means A416a to be secured near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417, and also prevents the fastening screw from casting a shadow. Therefore, the effect of the light emitting effect near the right side of the illumination board A416 and the board fixing plate A417 can be improved.

When the illumination board A416 becomes defective and a maintenance work is performed to replace the illumination board A416, it is necessary to tilt the illumination board A416 from the state shown in FIG. 332(b) to the state shown in FIG. 331(b) with respect to the board fixing plate A417.
Since the illumination board A416 is surrounded by the board fixing plate A417, it is difficult to tilt the illumination board A416 directly. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first connector A416e1 is disposed on the front side, and the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 is pulled forward, so that the illumination board A416 can be easily tilted with respect to the board fixing plate A417.

Furthermore, the first connector A416e1 is disposed at a position opposite to the right end portion (the end portion facing the side wall A417a3) which is the starting point of the posture change of the illumination board A416.
The load applied to the wiring connected to the first connector A416e1 efficiently cools the illumination board A.
In other words, the moment of force applied to the illumination board A416 by the load applied to the wiring can be increased. This makes it possible to prevent the illumination board A416 and the wiring from being subjected to an excessive (excessive) load during maintenance work.

FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU.
333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and the front unit FU is fixed to the open front side in a manner of covering it.
A second displacement member A490 disposed on the front side of the rear unit BU and the front unit FU is configured to be able to advance and retreat through the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

As shown in FIG. 333, the driving device arranged in each first operation unit A400 is only one driving motor AMT1. The driving force of the driving motor AMT1 is transmitted to the front unit F
The power is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 of the rear unit BU and the second displacement member A490 of the rear unit BU, thereby executing the movement performance of the first operating unit A400.

In this embodiment, the front unit FU and the rear unit BU are simply called as units that can be disassembled as units, and when performing a moving performance, the front unit FU and the rear unit BU do not operate independently, but operate in conjunction with each other. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 that transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the rear unit BU.

Fig. 335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400, and Fig. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and rear unit BU of the first operating unit A400.
335 and 336 are exploded perspective views of the first operating unit A400 with the cover 10 removed. Note that wiring HC and the like are omitted from illustration in Fig. 335 and Fig. 336. First, an outline of the configuration of the first operating unit A400 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, the first operating unit A400 is a front unit FU
The support plate A420 is formed in a plate shape from a light-transmitting, colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and the support plate A42 is formed from a light-transmitting, colorless resin material.
The first displacement member A440 is disposed on the front side of the support plate A42 with a gap therebetween so that the first displacement member A440 can advance and retreat.
0, and the guide plate portion A430 and the support plate portion A42
A first displacement member A440 that is guided in a gap between the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A440 and displaces back and forth (slide displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344 ), and a slide link A4 that is a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440 and displaces in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440.
50, and a drive motor AMT1 and its drive motor AM
and a drive gear AMG1 fastened and fixed to T1.

The first operating unit A400 includes, as components constituting the rear unit BU, a transmission gear group A460 which is engaged with the drive gear AMG1 and whose components rotate in accordance with the rotation of the drive gear AMG1, and a support box portion A470 which rotatably supports the transmission gear group A460 and is formed in a box shape with an open front side from a light-transmitting, colored (black in this embodiment) resin material.
The rear plate portion A480 is made of a light-transmitting, colorless resin material, and is disposed on the rear side of the support box portion A470 with a gap therebetween and fastened to the support box portion A470. The rear plate portion A480 is movable forward and backward (
The support box portion A470 mainly comprises a second displacement member A490 which is adapted to pivotal displacement and rotational displacement (see Figures 356 to 358), and a rack and pinion mechanism A510 which transmits the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the second displacement member A490 and is fastened and fixed to the back side of the support box portion A470.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 have a common configuration in which the transmission mechanism (slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) is disposed on the rear side of the plate-shaped portion (support plate portion A420, bottom portion of support box portion A470) disposed on the rear side of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490.
50 and a second displacement member A490 are disposed together.

That is, the plate-shaped portion is sandwiched between the displacement members A440 and A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A45
The first displacement member A440 on the front side is connected to a slide link A450 as a transmission mechanism, and the second displacement member A450 is connected to a rack and pinion A510 on the front side.
In comparison with the case where the displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are disposed in separate gaps in the front and rear, it is possible to omit the provision of plate members for forming the separate gaps, and therefore it is possible to reduce the front-to-rear width occupied by the displacement mechanism parts of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. As a result, other performance mechanism parts can be disposed in the front-to-rear gaps that can be formed by reducing the front-to-rear width, and therefore the performance effect of the first operating unit A400 can be improved.

Next, each component of the first operating unit A400 will be described in detail. As described above, the first operating unit A400 includes the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490, which have different displacement modes, and the components required for the displacement of each member are partially different.
The configuration required to realize the displacement of the displacement member A440 will be described later.
The remaining configuration required for the displacement of 490 will now be described.

The support plate portion A420 constitutes the framework of the first operating unit A400 and is a portion that guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. The support plate portion A420 includes a main plate portion A421 that is configured in a rectangular plate shape to which the drive motor AMT1 is fastened and fixed, a plurality of guide holes A422 that are formed as long holes extending parallel to the direction A416x, a punched hole A423 that is formed as a similar long hole adjacent to one of the guide holes A422, a plurality of guide ridges A424 that protrude from the front side as ridges parallel to the direction A416x, a recessed portion A425 that is recessed from the right edge of the main plate portion A421 along the direction A416x and is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in a direction away from the right edge of the main plate portion A421 as the recessed end approaches the front side, a detection sensor A426 that detects that the first displacement member A440 is arranged in the initial position, and a shaft support hole A45 of the slide link A450.
The main body plate portion A421 mainly comprises an axle support portion A427 which has a circular cross-sectional shape and protrudes toward the rear side from the main body plate portion A421 at positions corresponding to the arrangement of the transmission gear group A460.

The guide hole A422 includes a first guide hole A422a that guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and
A plurality of second guide holes A for guiding the displacement of the guided protrusion A455c of the slide link A450
422b.

The hole A423 is a through hole through which the spring hook portion A455d of the slide link A450 passes toward the front side, and the spring hook portion A455d engages (hooks) the end of the coil spring ASP1 while protruding toward the front side of the main body plate portion A421.

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is engaged (hooked) at the lower left corner of the main body plate portion A421, and the coil spring ASP1 generates a biasing force in a contracting direction (lower left direction).

The guide protrusion A424 is fitted over the guide groove A441g of the first displacement member A440 and has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A425 is formed to guide the bending of the electric wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A440, and will be described in detail later.

The detection sensor A426 is a photocoupler type sensor that is arranged so as to be able to determine whether the first displacement member A440 is disposed in the initial position. In this embodiment, the detection sensor A426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A440, but detects the position of the slide link A45.
The position of the detection plate portion A455e of 0 is detected.

In this embodiment, the sensor arranged to determine the positioning of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is the detection sensor A426, and the arrangement of a detection sensor to determine that the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are arranged in the extended position is omitted.

While this can reduce material costs and free up space for arranging other displacement members, it is also anticipated that problems such as the drive motor AMT1 not stopping even though the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are already arranged in the extended position may occur.
Measures have been taken to maintain the placement of 0, but details will be given later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A428 is provided in a protruding cylindrical shape with an inner diameter that is approximately half the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A461 of the transmission gear group A460, and the protruding tip is disposed opposite the transmission gear group A460 with a small gap therebetween.
This serves to suppress displacement in the direction of falling off the shaft side.

In this embodiment, a retaining screw (not shown) is fixed to the tip of the shaft support of the transmission gear A461. Therefore, unless the screw loosens or falls off, the screw can restrict the transmission gear A461 from being displaced in the direction of falling off the shaft. In this manner, in this embodiment, the screw and the retaining cylindrical portion A428 are configured to suppress the retention of the transmission gear A461 in two stages, so that the transmission gear A461 can be reliably prevented from falling off the shaft.

The right edge of the guide plate portion A430 is parallel to the right edge of the main plate portion A421.
a plate-shaped main body plate portion A431 disposed opposite to the surface formed by the first plate 21 in a position parallel to the surface formed by the first plate 21;
A plurality of elongated recesses A432 are recessed in an elongated rectangular shape along the direction A416x on the back side of the main body plate portion A431, an inclined surface A433 is formed on the right edge of the front side of the main body plate portion A431 in a manner that the more it goes toward the front side as it goes toward the lower left along the direction A416x, and is configured to be able to assist the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (the rear cover portion 443), and a recessed portion A432 of the support plate portion A420.
A guide plate portion A434 formed in a long plate shape along the direction A416x with a width corresponding to the width of the guide plate portion A425.
And, mainly prepare.

The main body plate A431 has a plurality of insertion holes A431a in its periphery through which fastening screws are inserted. The left edge of the main body plate A431 is supported by a surface (side) of a side wall A421a that is raised from the left edge of the main body plate A421 of the support plate A420 toward the front side. Therefore, while there is only one insertion hole A431a disposed on the left edge of the main body plate A431, the guide plate A431 has a plurality of insertion holes A431a in its left edge.
430 can be stably fastened to the support plate portion A420.

In addition, the main body plate portion A440 is a position where the first displacement member A440 passes through the front and back when moving forward and backward.
In the right edge portion of the main body plate portion A431, the insertion hole portion A431a is disposed at only one position substantially at the center of the vertical width. Therefore, compared to the case where the insertion hole portion A431a is disposed at an offset position,
The deviation in the distance between the right edge portion of the first displacement member A44 and the support plate portion A420 can be suppressed over the entire right edge portion, and the distance between the right edge portion of the first displacement member A44 and the support plate portion A420 can be reduced compared to the case where a plurality of insertion holes A431a are arranged.
This improves the design freedom of the .DELTA.0.

The long recess A432 is a recess that guides the displacement stopper protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440 in the direction A416x, which is the direction in which the displacement stopper protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440 is displaced, and is recessed with a length that is approximately equal to the displaceable length of the displacement stopper protrusion A441e of the first displacement member A440.
The rear side of the elongated recess A420 is not only guided by the guide hole A422 of the support plate A420, but also by the guide hole A422 of the support plate A420.
The front side is also guided by 432.

The guide plate portion A434 has an electric wiring FC made of a flat cable on the right edge side.
The claws A434a are arranged at intervals slightly wider than the thickness of the
The electric wiring FC, the end of which is connected to the first displacement member A440, is passed through the gap between the first displacement member A434a and temporarily fixed therein. As a result, the electric wiring FC, which is displaced by bending due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440,
One end of the deflection displacement can be set to the position of the claw portion A434a, and the position of the electrical wiring FC to the left of the claw portion A434a can be stabilized.

Therefore, the electric wiring FC consisting of a flat cable is guided to the guide plate portion A434.
Since the first displacement member A440 can be maintained in such a state that it is almost in contact with the guide plate portion A434, when the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A434 and the electric wiring FC is similarly displaced (see FIG. 346), it is possible to avoid interference between the first displacement member A440 and the electric wiring FC. The first displacement member A440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338.

Fig. 337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and Fig. 338 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first displacement member A440. Note that Fig. 338 is shown from a different perspective than Fig. 336 for the sake of convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIG. 337 and FIG. 338, the first displacement member A440 is a guided plate portion A416, which is a plate-shaped portion that is guided between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430 along the direction A416x.
41, an interlocking plate portion A442 which is a plate-shaped portion formed from a colored (gold-plated in this embodiment) light-opaque resin material, pivotally supported by the guided plate portion A441, and displaced in conjunction with the guided plate portion A441, and a back side of the interlocking plate portion A442 which is fastened and fixed to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442.
2, a diffusion plate A444 formed in a plate shape from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and arranged opposite the rear side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and an illuminated board A445 arranged opposite the rear side of the diffusion plate A444, formed with an outline roughly equivalent to that of the diffusion plate A444, and arranged opposite the rear cover portion 443.

Here, the interlocking plate portion A442, the rear cover portion 443, the diffusion plate A444, and the illumination board A445 are,
Since they are fixed together, these will be explained first.
A plurality of positioning pins A442a protruding from the rear surface of the diffusion plate A444 are inserted into a plurality of insertion holes A444.
The interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444 are positioned relative to each other by inserting the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444 through the positioning pins A444b protruding from the back surface of the diffusion plate A444.
The diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 are positioned relative to each other by being inserted into a plurality of insertion holes A445a of .

Then, the multiple screw-in portions A442b of the interlocking plate portion A442 are fitted into the multiple insertion holes 44 of the rear cover portion 443.
By fastening the fastening screw that passes through 43a, the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 are held between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the rear cover portion 443 in a manner that allows displacement (displacement less than the height of the positioning pins) to the extent that the positioning pins A442a, A444b do not fall off.
This allows the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445 to be stably fixed without directly inserting fastening screws into the diffusion plate A444 and the illumination board A445.

In this embodiment, the rear cover portion 443 is formed with dimensions such that a load is generated by abutting the plurality of protruding ribs 443b protruding toward the front side near the outer periphery of the rear cover portion 443 against the illumination board A445 and pressing the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444.
444 and the illumination board A445 can be stably fixed to the interlocking plate portion A442.

The illumination board A445 is provided with a plurality of light-emitting means A445b such as LEDs (shown in FIG. 337 as substantially square chip shapes) on the front side, with their optical axes directed toward the diffusion plate A444.

The diffusion plate A444 is disposed on the rear side opposite the light emitting means A445b at the axis corresponding position A444
A wave pattern is formed from protrusions that extend concentrically around c, and the outer edge of the wave pattern is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442.

On the front side of the diffusion plate A444, a fitting portion A444d is formed which protrudes to the front side and has an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442, and in the assembled state, the fitting portion A444d is fitted into the opening A442c.

With this configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting means A445b is diffused by the diffusion plate A444.
Of the light that passes through, the player can see the light that passes through opening A442c.

The illumination board A445 is provided with a connector A445c on the back side to which the electrical wiring FC made of a flat cable is connected. The electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is connected to the connector A445c from the rotating tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442.
This allows the curved position of the electrical wiring FC to be configured on the rotation tip side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the degree of curvature can be made gentle.

The rear cover 443 includes a connector A 445c and circuit components (not shown) (such as a capacitor and resistor).
and a through hole A443d formed in parallel with the ventilation opening 416c in the direction A416x.

The tip of the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c is disposed in the ventilation opening 443c where the connector A445c is located, but the electrical wiring FC is routed through the through hole A443d to the rear side of the rear cover portion 443. This allows the electrical wiring FC to be sandwiched between the thin rod-shaped portion 443e that separates the ventilation opening 443c and the through hole A443d and the illumination board A445, so that the electrical wiring FC is arranged between the connector A445c and the thin rod-shaped portion 443e.
The through hole A443d also serves to form a space in which the electrical wiring FC is arranged, and can reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring FC compared to a case in which the through hole A443d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A416x.

In addition, in this embodiment, the thin rod-shaped portion 443e is formed to protrude toward the illumination board A445 side in the same manner as the protruding rib 443b.
This narrows the gap between the rear cover 443 and the illumination board A445. This configuration limits the points at which a load is applied from the rear cover 443 to the illumination board A445. In other words, the rear cover 443 is configured so that only the protruding rib 443b and the thin rod-shaped portion 443e apply a load from the rear cover 443 to the illumination board A445.

This makes it possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from coming loose from the connector A445c even if the electrical wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440.

Next, a description will be given of a connection between the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441, and details of the guided plate portion A441.
The support shaft portion A442d is provided with a support hole A442e which is a circular opening coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and a roller member A442f which is a resin member supported on the interlocking plate portion A442 so as to be rotatable around an axis parallel to the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d and is formed into a circular outer shape.

The guided plate portion A441 is a main body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b protruding in an outer circular shape from the upper end of the main body plate portion A441a, a support shaft hole A441c bored in a circular shape coaxial with the center axis of the support shaft portion A441b at the lower end of the main body plate portion A441a, a plurality of guide protrusions A441d protruding in a long linear shape from the front of the main body plate portion A441a to the front side, a plurality of displacement stopper protrusions A441e protruding in a long shape along a direction intersecting (perpendicular to) the guide protrusions A441d to the front side, and an inclined surface A441f that inclines outward (to the lower left) as it approaches the front side at a position opposite to the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the illumination board A445, and the main body plate portion A441a.
A plurality of guide grooves A4 formed as small diameter grooves along the direction A416x on the rear side of the
41g, a recessed portion A441h recessed in the direction A416x from the upper right edge of the main body plate portion A441a, and a fastening portion A441i protruding onto the back side of the main body plate portion A441a in a manner that allows a fastening screw to be fastened.

The support shaft A441b and the shaft receiving hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate A442.
After arranging the interlocking plate A442 so that it is arranged on the axis of the interlocking plate A442, the interlocking plate A442 is moved along the axis.
By moving the guide plate portion A442 relative to the guide plate portion A441, the support shaft portion A442 is inserted into the shaft support hole A442e.
The shaft support hole A441b and the support shaft portion A442d are inserted into the shaft support hole A441c to form a shaft support state.
The dimensions of the support shaft portion A 441c and the support shaft portion A 442d are configured to leave a slight gap between them to allow rotation.

In this embodiment, after the interlocking plate portion A442 and the guided plate portion A441 are supported by the above-mentioned method, a screw for preventing the interlocking plate portion A442 from coming off is fixed to the tip of the support shaft portion A441b, and the diameter of the head of the screw is made larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole A442e, thereby preventing the interlocking plate portion A442 from coming off the guided plate portion A441.

The guide protrusion A441d is a narrow-diameter portion for narrowing the contact area with the back surface of the guide plate A430. This reduces the frictional force generated between the guide plate A430 and the main plate A431, allowing the guided plate A441 to be smoothly displaced.

The displacement prevention protrusion A441e is formed with a width slightly shorter than the width of the elongated recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and is formed with a protruding length that enters the elongated recess A432 when the first operating unit A400 is in the assembled state (see Figure 324).

The position of the displacement stopper protrusion A441e is designed so that when the guided plate portion A441 is positioned at the displacement end, the displacement stopper protrusion A441e is positioned at the end in the longitudinal direction of the long recess A432. Therefore, even if the guided plate portion A441 does not stop normally at the displacement end, the displacement stopper protrusion A441e is engaged with the long recess A432, so that the guided plate portion A441 can be prevented from being stopped.
The displacement of 41 can be restricted.

The inclined surface A441f is a surface for connecting the electric wiring F to the connector A445c of the electric lighting board A445.
The guide plate portion A is a plane for receiving and guiding the guide plate portion C.
The load applied to the electric wiring FC due to the displacement of 441 can be suppressed.
The manner in which the electric wiring FC constituted by the flat cable bends will be described later.

The guide groove A441g is a groove that straddles the guide ridge A424 of the support plate portion A420, is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide ridge A424, and has a protruding portion that protrudes in a semicircular cross section from both sides toward the inside of the groove near the end of each groove.
This prevents the extension direction of the guide groove A441g from deviating from the longitudinal direction of the guide ridge A424, and allows the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A441 to be in contact with each other.
The frictional force generated between the bearing 24 can be reduced.

The recessed portion A441h is a recessed portion that is recessed to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole portion A431a on the right side of the guide plate portion A430. As a result, in this embodiment, the right end portion of the guided plate portion A441 is configured to be able to be positioned to the right of the insertion hole portion A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted into the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324) and is connected to the displacement side long hole A453 of the slide link A450.
That is, when a driving force is transmitted to the fastening portion A441i via the slide link A450, the first displacement member A440 including the guided plate portion A441 is displaced.

Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, the slide link A450 is a support plate portion A42.
A long link A451 rotatably supported on the support portion A427 of the long link A4
The irregular slide member A4 is connected to the 51 and supported so as to be movable in parallel along the direction A416x.
55 and is provided.

The long link A451 is a member formed in a long rod shape, and includes a shaft support hole A452 drilled with a diameter that allows the shaft support portion A427 to be inserted therethrough, a displacement side long hole A453 drilled in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the end on the long side based on the shaft support hole A452, and a displacement side long hole A454 drilled in the shape of a long hole along the longitudinal direction at the end on the long side based on the shaft support hole A452.
A transmission side long hole A45 is drilled in the longitudinal direction at the end opposite to the end where the transmission side hole A45 is disposed.
4 and

The irregular slide member A455 is disposed in a recessed portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421, which is recessed toward the front side from the base end surface from which the pivot support portion A427 of the support plate portion A420 is protruded, and the main body plate portion A4
a plate-shaped main body plate portion A455a sandwiched between the support plate portion A420 and the long link A451; a transmission protrusion portion A455b protruding in an outer circular shape toward the rear side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted into the transmission side long hole A454 of the long link A451; and a plurality of guided protrusion portions A455c protruding in an outer circular shape toward the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted into the second guide hole A422b of the support plate portion A420.
A spring hook A455a is provided on the front side of the main body plate A455a in the shape of a hook at the tip, and is inserted into a hole A423 in the support plate A420 to hook (lock) the end of the coil spring ASP1.
455d, a detected plate portion A455e formed in a plate shape thin enough to enter the detection gap of the detection sensor A426, and an irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 to which driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460.

The transmission gear group A460 is composed of a pair of gears rotatably supported by the support box portion A470, and includes a pair of transmission gears A461, one of which is meshed with the drive gear AMG1, and a pin gear A462, which is meshed with the pair of transmission gears A461 on the opposite side of the drive gear AMG1.
and an in-phase member A465 that matches the phase of the pin gear A462 and follows it.

The pin gear A462 is provided with a transmission projection A that protrudes from an eccentric position toward the front side in an outer circular shape.
and an arc wall portion A464 formed as an arc-shaped wall portion with the transmission protrusion A463 as a base end and centered on the rotation axis of the pin gear A462.

The arc wall portion A464 has a central angle of about 230 degrees, and is shorter in length toward the front side than the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as will be described later, the transmission protrusion A463 is also shorter than the arc wall portion A464.
Similarly, the first displacement member A464 is a part that transmits load to the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456, but the location where the load occurs differs in the front-rear direction. That is, the position where the load occurs via the transmitting protrusion A463 (if the load occurs at multiple points, the intermediate point or average point) is closer to the front than the position where the load occurs via the arc wall portion A464. The above-mentioned configuration makes it possible to explain the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440, so the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 will be explained below.

FIG. 339(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339(c) is a rear view of the front unit FU.
A partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc.

For ease of understanding, in Fig. 339(a), the guide plate portion A430 is shown by imaginary lines, in Fig. 339(b), the transmission gear A461 and the electric wiring FC are omitted, and for the pin gear A462, only the transmission protrusion A463 and the arc wall portion A464 are shown, and in Fig. 339(c), the front cover A410 is shown by imaginary lines. Also, in Fig. 339(a) and Fig. 339(b), the rear unit BU is omitted from illustration unless otherwise specified.
The same applies to the following Figures 340 to 345.

In FIG. 339(a) to FIG. 339(c), the first displacement member A440 is a drive motor AMT1.
In this state, the irregular slide member A455 is disposed at the retracted position before excitation of the coil spring ASP1. In this state, the irregular slide member A455 is disposed at the outermost position (left side), and the length of the coil spring ASP1 is made the shortest, so that the biasing force applied from the coil spring ASP1 to the irregular slide member A455 is made the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456 is a part that engages with the pin gear A462, and is located on the protruding position (upper right) side of the transmitting protrusion A463 and is located on the main body plate part A45.
A protruding plate portion A456a protrudes from the rear surface of the transmission protrusion A463 at a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A463 on the retracted position (lower left) side of the protruding plate portion A456a.
a and the protruding plate portion A456a and the opposing arrangement portion A456b arranged opposite to each other.
and an insertion gap A456c formed between the insertion gap A456a and the insertion gap A456b.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is formed longer than the length of the opposing portion A456b in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmitting protrusion A463 and the arc wall portion A46
4 in the movement direction.

The opposing portion A456b is capable of contacting the transmission protrusion A463a in the moving direction (
On the other hand, it does not abut (does not overlap) with the arc wall portion A464 in the movement direction.
In other words, the opposing portion A456b and the arcuate wall portion A464 are formed with a dimensional relationship that creates a front-to-back gap.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A463, and a clearance portion A456d is formed on the open end side so as to be shaped along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A463. This clearance portion A456d allows the transmission protrusion A463 to move smoothly (with low resistance) toward and away from the insertion gap A456c.

In FIG. 339(b), the transmission gear A461 is omitted from the illustration, but the actual assembled state (
In FIG. 324, a pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears of the same shape, are disposed between the drive gear AMG1 and the pin gear A462, and the driving force of the drive gear AMG1 is transmitted to the pin gear A4
Transmit to 62.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), the first displacement member A44 guided by the first guide hole A422a
0 and the irregular slide member A455 guided by the second guide hole A422b are the long link A
That is, the long link A451 rotates around the pivot portion A427.
As a result, the first displacement member A440 and the irregular slide member A455 are displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x.

As shown in FIG. 339(b), when the first displacement member A440 is disposed in the retracted position, the detected plate portion A455e enters the detection gap of the detection sensor A426.

As shown in FIG. 339(c), in the first displacement member A440, a roller member A442f is disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410. The arrangement of the roller member A442f corresponds to the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.
1b and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the guided plate portion A44
The interlocking plate portion A442 rotates about the shaft support hole A442e in response to the sliding displacement of the first displacement member A440. Operational diagrams for explaining the displacement mode of the first displacement member A440 in chronological order will be described.

FIG. 340(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340(c) is a rear view of the front unit FU.
A partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc.

In Fig. 340(a) to Fig. 340(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, and the roller member A442f is in the same position as that in Fig. 339(c) when viewed in the front-rear direction, and the support box part A47
3 shows a state in which the guide wall portion A471b of No. 0 abuts against a bent corner portion of the guide wall portion A471b.

By the time the state of Fig. 339 is changed to the state of Fig. 340, the pin gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by a first angle d1. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, causing the irregular sliding member A455 to slide and displace, and this slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. As described above, since a front-to-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction (see Fig. 340(b)).

In this embodiment, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 at the initial angle d0 is parallel to the direction A416x, but this is not limited to the above.

For example, at the initial angle d0, the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A463 may be formed as a straight line inclined by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A416x (inclined by 10 degrees in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the pin gear A462). In this case, the section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section in which no load is applied to the protruding plate portion A456a in the forward direction, so that it is possible to avoid excessive driving resistance being generated immediately after the start of rotation.

That is, the section of 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-up section, and the protruding plate portion A456a can be pushed forward vigorously after rotating 10 degrees from the initial angle d0, so that the driving resistance can be suppressed. Also, when driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, the section of 10 degrees can be used as a deceleration section.

FIG. 341(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341(c) is a rear view of the front unit FU.
A partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc.

341(a) to 341(c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the roller member A442f abuts against the middle portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

339 to the state of FIG. 341, the pin gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by a second angle d2. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, causing the irregular sliding member A455 to slide and displace, and this slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. As described above, since a front-to-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 341(b)).

FIG. 342(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342(c) is a rear view of the front unit FU.
A partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc.

342(a) to 342(c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 is substantially perpendicular to the direction A416x.

342 from the state in Fig. 339, the pin gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by a third angle d3. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, causing the irregular sliding member A455 to slide and displace, and this slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. As described above, since a front-to-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction (see Fig. 342(b)).

In this embodiment, when the first displacement member A440 starts to slide along a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction (see Figure 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the irregular sliding member A455 (direction parallel to direction A416x) are configured to be approximately perpendicular, so that the first displacement member A440 can smoothly slide in one direction (the same plane).

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement-side long hole A453 to the fastening portion A441i can be limited to one side (the lower side in this embodiment) based on the displacement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) of the irregular sliding member A455. This makes it possible to suppress wobbling of the sliding displacement of the first displacement member A440 compared to a case in which the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 during the sliding displacement of the first displacement member A440.

FIG. 343(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343(c) is a rear view of the front unit FU.
A partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc.

343(a) to 343(c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, and the roller member A442f moves from the state of FIG. 342(c) to the extended position of the first displacement member A440 (FIG. 3
44(c)) (see FIG. 44(c)).

343 from the state in Fig. 339, the pin gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by a fourth angle d4. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, causing the irregular sliding member A455 to slide and displace, and this slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. As described above, since a front-to-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction (see Fig. 343(b)).

FIG. 344(a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344(b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344(c) is a rear view of the front unit FU.
A partial cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XIXc.

344(a) to 344(c) show a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the first displacement member A440 is disposed in the extended position (also referred to as the extended state).

339 to the state of FIG. 344, the pin gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by a fifth angle d5. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protruding plate portion A456a, causing the irregular sliding member A455 to slide and displace, and this slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. As described above, since a front-to-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall portion A464 can be arranged to overlap the facing portion A456b in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 344(b)).

When the pin gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A463 starts to displace in the opposite direction to the direction A416x. Here, the arc wall A464 and the protruding plate A456a are formed with a dimensional relationship such that they come into contact with each other in the direction A416x.
Even after the protruding plate portion A463 is separated from the protruding plate portion A456a, the arc wall portion A464
When the irregular slide member A455 abuts against 456a, the displacement of the irregular slide member A455 is restricted.

The point of contact between the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a is disposed on a straight line parallel to the direction A416x and passing through the rotation axis of the pin gear A462. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding plate portion A456a to the arc wall portion A464 passes through the rotation axis of the pin gear A462, so that the pin gear A462 can be prevented from rotating due to the load from the protruding plate portion A456a.

Furthermore, since the arc wall portion A464 is curved, the contact area between the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a can be reduced (theoretically, the contact area is 0 because the contact can be made linear). Therefore, when the pin gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a can be reduced (theoretically, it can be made 0), so that it is possible to avoid the need for an additional driving force to regulate the displacement of the irregular slide member A455. In other words, the displacement of the irregular slide member A455 can be regulated only by the driving force required to rotate the pin gear A462.

In addition, when considering the wear and deformation of the resin material constituting the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a, the contact area increases over time, and the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456
It is considered that the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a will be large. To cope with this, a low-friction seal may be attached to the arc wall portion A464 and the protruding plate portion A456a, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied. In this embodiment, the ideal contact area is small, so the area that needs to be treated with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be small. Therefore, the cost of the countermeasure can be reduced.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 344 (b), the outer surface of the transmission protrusion A463 and the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the pin gear A462, making it difficult for the player to grasp the timing of the transition from a state of abutment with the transmission protrusion A463 to a state of abutment with the arc wall portion A464.

Fig. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. Fig. 345 illustrates a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate, the first displacement member A440 is disposed in the protruding position, and the transmitting protrusion A463 is in contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456.

By the time the state of FIG. 339 is changed to the state of FIG. 345, the pin gear A462 rotates from the initial angle d0 by a sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) (see FIG. 360).
After the state of (a), the transmission protrusion A463 does not push the protruding plate portion A456a and displaces without contacting other members.
344(b) (returning displacement is restricted). That is, the contact between the transmitting protrusion A463 and the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456 occurs when the first displacement member A440 is disposed in the extended position.

As shown in Fig. 345, the contact position between the transmission protrusion A463 and the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456 is set to a position on the protruding position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. In other words, the location where a load is applied to the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 (the insertion gap A456c) is different from the location where a load is applied to the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456 in Fig. 345. This causes the pin gear A462 to unintentionally over-rotate, causing the transmission protrusion A4
Even if an overload occurs in the irregular slide member A455 or the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456, the shape of the insertion gap A456c can be prevented from changing. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 will be affected after an overload occurs.

In the state of FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the irregular slide member A455 is the direction toward the retracted position of the first displacement member A440 (upper right direction).
Since the irregular slide member A455 is disposed at the end of the range of movement in this direction, the irregular slide member A455 is prevented from being displaced by the load applied from the transmitting protrusion A463.

In this way, the transmission protrusion A4 is moved while preventing the irregular slide member A455 from being displaced.
The load applied from 63 can be alleviated by elastic deformation (flexion and expansion) of the facing portion A456b.

As shown in FIG. 345, the portion with which the transmission protrusion A463 abuts is the side wall of the facing portion A456b on the side of the detected plate portion A455e.
In this embodiment, when an overload occurs on the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456 due to overrotation of the pin gear A462, the detected plate part A455e is configured to break preferentially. That is, the detected plate part A455e is configured to be weaker than the transmitting protrusion A463.

This makes it possible to prevent the structure of the irregularly shaped transmitted part A456, which is involved in the displacement of the irregularly shaped slide member A455, from being destroyed by the load caused by the over-rotation of the pin gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the irregularly shaped slide member A455 can be improved.

If the detected plate portion A455e is broken, the detected plate portion A455e will not be detected by the detection sensor A426 even if the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position.
Based on the failure to detect 455e, it is possible to assume that over-rotation of the pin gear A 462 has occurred, and timely maintenance can be performed.

The design of the detected plate portion A455e is not limited in any way, and various designs are exemplified. For example, the transmission protrusion A463 may be controlled to abut against the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456 for each series of displacement operations of the first displacement member A440, and the drive motor AMT1 may be excited until a slight load is applied, so that the portion (e.g., the transmission protrusion A463) that is likely to be fatigue-damaged due to long-term use may be controlled to a certain extent.
In this case, in addition to being able to predict the possibility of over-rotation of the pin gear A462, it is also possible to inform the user when it is time to replace the transmission protrusion A463, allowing for timely maintenance to be performed.

FIG. 346(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339(a), and FIG. 346(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG.
346(a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A400 taken along line XLVIb-CCCXLVIb, and FIG 346(b) shows the first displacement member A440 in a retracted position (also referred to as a retracted state), and FIG 346(b) shows the first displacement member A440 in a protruding position (also referred to as a protruding state).

As shown in FIG. 346(a) and FIG. 346(b), the connector A of the first displacement member A440
An electrical wiring FC formed as a flat cable is connected to 445c.
The electrical wiring FC is loosely arranged in the space between the guided plate portion A441 and the rear cover portion 443.

As shown in FIG. 346(a), the inclined surface A441f of the guided plate portion A441 is
That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface A441f is formed at a position (a position retracted toward the side away from the first displacement member A440) slightly recessed from the end portion (the end portion facing the first displacement member A440) of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430, and the inclined surface A441f is formed at a position slightly recessed from the end portion (the end portion facing the first displacement member A440) of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430.
A sufficient distance can be secured between 41f and the electrical wiring FC.

The electric wiring FC is retracted from the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 when the first displacement member A440 is in the extended state, whereas it is arranged by entering the displacement locus of the second displacement member A490 when the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state. This allows a space VE, which will be described later, to be used both as a space into which the electric wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A490 enters, thereby making it possible to reduce the space required for arrangement.

When the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state, the electric wiring FC is disposed in a space VE formed on the rear side of the first displacement member A440. As a result, the first displacement member A440 functions as a shielding means for blocking the view of the electric wiring FC, and the electric wiring FC is not visible when viewed from the front, rear, left, or right directions.
It is possible to prevent the space VE from being visually recognized. The space VE will now be described.

The space VE is a surface (
The space behind the interlocking plate portion A442 is formed by tilting the interlocking plate portion A442 (the surface on which the opening A442c is formed) toward the third symbol display device 81.
E can be easily formed by forming the first displacement member A440 in a plate shape and configuring it in an inclined position that is easy for the player to see when the first displacement member A440 is in a retracted state in which it is in a wide position in the front-to-rear direction.

On the other hand, since this space VE is also the space into which the second displacement member A490 described later enters due to displacement, it is preferable to maintain a wide field of view when viewed from the front, taking into consideration the visibility of the second displacement member A490. Since the field of view when viewed from the front spreads at an angle centered on the player's eyes, it is preferable that the outer periphery of the space VE is formed so as to be inclined in a direction away from the third symbol display device 81 as it approaches the rear side. However, in this embodiment, for ease of manufacturing, the space VE is formed so as to be inclined in a direction away from the third symbol display device 81 as it approaches the rear side.
The outer contour (the boundary surface away from the third pattern display device 81) is formed by a surface that is not inclined in the front-to-back direction.

In this manner, according to the present embodiment, the space VE that is generated to improve the visibility of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 is effectively utilized as an area for slackening and arranging the wiring. As a result, the slackened portion of the electrical wiring FC is arranged in a third position relative to the first displacement member A440 at the protruding position.
When placed on the opposite side of the pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to secure the area required to slacken the wiring (in other words, the area between the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310 and the first displacement member A440).

Therefore, compared to the case where the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is positioned on the opposite side of the third pattern display device 81 from the first displacement member A440 in the protruding position, the electrical wiring FC can be accommodated inside the rear case A310, while the displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought closer to (closer to) the outer wall portion A312 of the rear case A310.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the extended position (see FIG. 346(b)), the front surface of the interlocking plate portion A442 is disposed on the front limit line FL, and in the retracted position (see FIG. 346(a)), the first displacement member A440 is disposed on the front limit line FL.
During the displacement process from the first displacement member A44 to the first displacement member A44, at least a part of the interlocking plate portion A442 (mainly the side portion of the protruding position) protrudes forward beyond the front limit line FL.
In the process of displacing the first displacement member A440 from the retracted position (FIG. 339(
Since this occurs between the state where the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted position (see Figure 346 (c)) and the completion of the posture change of the first displacement member A440 (see Figure 342 (c)), the first displacement member A440 may protrude beyond the front limit line FL toward the front side, particularly on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440 (left side of Figure 346).

Therefore, since it is necessary to form a space on the front side of the front limit line FL to avoid collision with the first displacement member A440, it is necessary to arrange the illumination board A416 farther away from the first displacement member A440 (closer to the front side).
By not forming the displacement member A440 on the retreat position side (left side in FIG. 346), the first displacement member A4
In addition, by forming only the diffusion plate A415 to project toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to avoid limiting the area in which the light irradiated from the light emitting means A416a disposed on the illumination board A416 is visible from being limited to the range in which the illumination board A416 is formed.

In this way, the formation range of the illumination board A416 is limited, and the diffusion plate A415 is formed to protrude from the outer edge of the illumination board A416, so that the illumination board A416 and the first displacement member A44
While narrowing the front-to-back spacing between the illumination board A416 and 0, a sufficient range can be secured for visually viewing the illumination effects produced by the illumination board A416.

347 to 352, a change in appearance of the first operating unit A400 caused by the displacement of the first displacement member A440 from the viewpoint of light emission performance will be described. This change in appearance occurs because the first displacement member A440 is configured to be partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 when the first displacement member A440 is disposed in the extended position (position after excitation).

347(a), 347(b) and 348 are front views of the first operating unit A400. FIG. 347(a) illustrates the retracted state of the first displacement member A440, and FIG.
347(b) shows the first displacement member A440 disposed at a midway position of the displacement section (the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 348 shows the first displacement member A440 in a protruding state. Note that in FIG. 347(b) and FIG. 348, the front cover A41 of the first displacement member A440 is
The shape of the part hidden by 0 is shown with hidden lines.

A diffusion plate A415 for diffusing light emitted from a light emitting means A416a disposed on an illumination board A416 is disposed on the rear side of the front cover A410. The diffusion plate A415 is
It is divided into the first area AC1 and the second area AC2 described above (see FIG. 330).

The first displacement means 440 is disposed on the rear side of the diffusion plate A415 at least in the extended position, and light emitted from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) and passing through the opening A442c advances toward the diffusion plate A415. Here, the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping the first region AC1 in a front view, but the first region AC1 does not include the illumination board A41.
6 is provided, the light passing through the opening A442c is blocked by the illumination board A416.

Therefore, the light passing through the opening A442c can reach the diffusion plate A415 in the second region AC2. In other words, in the second region AC2, the light irradiated from the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329) arranged on the illumination board A416 and diffused by the diffusion plate A415 and the light irradiated from the light emitting means A445b (see FIG. 337) of the first displacement means 440 can be visually recognized in a mixed state.

In detail, the state of the second area AC2 is that the light emitting means A416a is turned on and the light emitting means A
The light-emitting means A416a is configured to be switchable among at least four modes: a mode in which the light-emitting means A416a and the light-emitting means A445b are turned off; a mode in which the light-emitting means A416a and the light-emitting means A445b are turned on; a mode in which both the light-emitting means A416a and the light-emitting means A445b are turned on; and a mode in which both the light-emitting means A416a and the light-emitting means A445b are turned off.

In this embodiment, the state of the second region AC2 can be seen through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410.
It has a plurality of long holes A412a formed in three places in a straight line along the edge of 410 on the third pattern display device 81 side.

As shown in FIG. 348, of the multiple long holes A412a, the central long hole A412a is disposed opposite the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the long holes A412a on both sides of the central long hole A412a are disposed opposite the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440.
As a result, the light emitting means A412a is more visible when viewed through the central long hole A412a than when viewed through the long holes A412a on both sides.
This can improve the visibility of the light emitted from 445b.

For example, when the first displacement member A440 is disposed in the extended position, the light emitting means A44
It is possible to configure the light irradiated from the light emitting means A416a and the light irradiated from the light emitting means A445b to be visible through the central long hole A412a, but not visible through the long holes A412a on either side. In this way, a mixture of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A416a and the light irradiated from the light emitting means A445b is visible through the central long hole A412a, and a mixture of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A416a and the light irradiated from the light emitting means A445b is visible through the long holes A412a on either side.
It can be configured so that the light emitted from the light-emitting means A445a is visible (the light emitted from the light-emitting means A445b is difficult to see).

Here, the form (e.g., luminous color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 is determined by the first displacement member A440.
While the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emission state depends on the light emitting means A416a (see FIG. 329). Therefore, even when the first displacement member A440 is disposed in the extended position (see FIG. 348), if the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the effect on the light emission effect by the light emitting means 416b can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A440 to the extended position without causing a change in the state of the front cover A410 when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, when the light-emitting means A445b is turned on while it is positioned in the extended position 440, the light-emitting mode of the long hole A412a, which is formed in each first operating unit A400 at a position closer to the third pattern display device 81, changes, thereby directing the player's gaze toward the third pattern display device 81.

The effect of the change in the appearance seen through the through hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the first displacement members A440 of the first operation unit A400 arranged in a set of five are arranged in the extended position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 arranged at the bottom left is turned on, and at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent thereto in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front is turned on, and at the timing when the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 adjacent thereto in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front is turned on.
For example, the light-emitting means A 445b may be turned on in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front.

In this case, by leaving the light-emitting means 416b lit, it is possible to produce an effect in which the brightness of the front cover A410 itself is maintained, while only the state of the light visible through the long hole A412a changes in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

Here, the light emission modes of the other first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be described. The first operating unit A400A is the second operating unit in the clockwise direction from the bottom left when viewed from the front.
The first operating unit A400A is the third unit in the clockwise direction from the bottom left in a front view, the first operating unit A400B is the third unit in the clockwise direction from the bottom left in a front view, the first operating unit A400C is the fourth unit in the clockwise direction from the bottom left in a front view, and the first operating unit A400D is the fifth unit in the clockwise direction from the bottom left in a front view. The main differences between the first operating units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D and the first operating unit A400 are the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the first operating units A400A, A400B, A40
The openings corresponding to the opening A442c of A400C and A400D are respectively designated as openings WA, WB, WC,
The other components are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first operation unit A400 for the sake of convenience.

Figures 349(a) and 349(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400A.
In addition, FIG. 349(a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed in an intermediate position (the same position as the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 349(b) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed in an intermediate position (the same position as the position shown in FIG. 342).
40 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIG. 349(a) and FIG. 349(b), in the first operating unit A400A,
Unlike the first operating unit A400, the opening WA is configured to overlap the long holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front. Furthermore, since the width of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 (it is longer on the retracted position side), the overlapping area between the opening WA and the long holes A412a at both ends can be increased as the first displacement member A440 approaches the extended position. This allows the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 and the appearance of the light visually recognized through the long holes A412a to be changed in conjunction with each other.

Figures 350(a) and 350(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400B.
In addition, FIG. 350(a) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed in an intermediate position (the same position as the position illustrated in FIG. 342), and FIG. 350(b) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A4
40 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIG. 350(a) and FIG. 350(b), in the first operating unit A400B,
Unlike the first operating unit A400, the opening WB is configured so that it may overlap the long holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front, and the width of the opening WB is configured to repeatedly expand and contract along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440.
The central long hole A41 while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position
350(a), it can be configured so that the area where 2a overlaps with the opening WB is maximum in the state shown in Fig. 350(a), decreases once with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and then increases again in the state shown in Fig. 350(b). This makes it possible to configure the change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the central long hole A412a in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction) while the first displacement member A440 is displaced in one direction.

Figures 351(a) and 351(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400C.
In addition, FIG. 351(a) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed in an intermediate position (the same position as the position illustrated in FIG. 342), and FIG. 351(b) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed in an intermediate position (the same position as the position illustrated in FIG. 342).
40 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIG. 351(a) and FIG. 351(b), in the first operating unit A400C,
Unlike the first operating unit A400, the opening WC is configured to overlap the long holes A412a at both ends when viewed from the front, and the width of the opening WC is configured to repeatedly expand and contract along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440.
C is tapered and widened in the vicinity of its upper end in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440.

As a result, the area of overlap between the left and right long holes A412a and the opening WC while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position can be configured to decrease once with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and then increase again.
While the lens 40 is displaced in one direction, the appearance of the light visually recognized through the long holes A412a at both ends can be changed in two directions (enlargement and reduction directions).

Figures 352(a) and 352(b) are front views of the first operating unit A400D.
In addition, FIG. 352(a) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed in an intermediate position (the same position as that illustrated in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352(b) illustrates a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed in an intermediate position (the same position as that illustrated in FIG. 342).
40 is shown in an extended position.

As shown in FIG. 352(a) and FIG. 352(b), in the first operating unit A400D,
Unlike the first operating unit A400, the opening WD is configured in a branched shape when viewed from the front. That is, the opening WD is configured in a branched shape in such a manner that it widens near the lower end portion toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A440.

This makes it possible to divide the area where the central elongated hole A412a overlaps with the opening WD while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, the state of light visually recognized through the central elongated hole A412a can be changed from an area in which the entire central elongated hole A412a emits light uniformly (see FIG. 352(a)) to an area in which the central elongated hole A412a is divided into a plurality of areas and emits light (see FIG. 352(b)).

In the first operation unit A400D, the edge of the opening WD divides the central long hole A412a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the range in which light can be seen may be divided for all three long holes A412a. That is, the three long holes A412a and the opening WD overlap each other, making it possible to see uniform light through the three long holes A412a, and the opening WD overlaps the central long hole A412a among the three long holes A412a.
a, so that the range in which light can be seen is divided by the central long hole A412a and limited to the long holes A412a on both sides.

335 and 336, the support box A470 includes a main body box A471 formed in a box shape with the front and upper right side open, a shaft hole A472 formed in the main body box A471 and through which the rotation shaft of the pin gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 passes, and a second displacement member A4
a shaft support hole A473 that is drilled so as to be able to support the rack and pinion A510; a notch A474 that is cut out in a shape that follows an arc centered on the shaft support hole A473; a fastening portion A475 that is protruded in a columnar shape near the notch A474 and has a tip that is formed so that a fastening screw that is inserted into a through hole A482 of the rear plate portion A480 can be screwed in; a rack support portion A476 that slidably supports the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510;
and a pinion support portion A477 supporting a pinion A517 which meshes with the slide rack A511 supported by the slide rack A511 supported by the slide rack A476.

The main body box portion A471 has a protruding wall portion A471a that protrudes from the bottom edge toward the rear side in a wall-like shape,
The first operating unit A400 is provided in an assembled state (FIG. 32).
4), and a protruding wall portion A471b disposed opposite the roller member A442f on the opposite side of the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) with the notch portion A474 interposed therebetween.
and a wiring guide portion A471c arranged opposite to the wiring guide portion A471a.

The detailed shape of the guide wall portion A471b will be described later, but a roller member A442f abuts against the edge of this guide wall portion A471b, and guides the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in a sliding or rolling manner (see Figures 339 to 344).

The wire guide portion A471c is designed so that its shape can appropriately correct the arrangement of the wires HC, which will be described later, and details of this will be described later.

The second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 of the rack and pinion A510 are connected through the shaft support hole A473 and the notch portion A474. In particular, the notch portion A474 is formed wide as a region through which wiring connected to the second displacement member A490 passes, and will be described in detail later.

The rack support portion A476 includes a pair of columnar portions protruding toward the rear side of the main box portion A471, and a support columnar portion A476a which is inserted into a support hole A512 of the rack and pinion A510, and a stepped portion A476b which extends along the sliding movement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510 and is formed in a stepped shape protruding toward the rear side beyond the surface on which the support columnar portion A476a is arranged.

The pinion support portion A477 includes a pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack and pinion A510 is rotatably supported, and an arc wall portion A477b extending in a wall (plate) shape from the bottom of the main body box portion A471 to the back side along an arc centered on the pinion shaft A477a.

Through the shaft hole A472, the pin gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 and the same phase member A
Here, with reference to Fig. 353, a connection mode between the pin gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 will be described.

Fig. 353(a) is an exploded perspective view of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465, and Fig. 353(b) is a front perspective view of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 on the left side and a rear perspective view of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 on the right side. Note that Fig. 353(a) illustrates the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 in an orientation in which the sides connected to each other face forward.

As shown in FIG. 353(a), the pin gear A462 has a plurality of phase alignment peripheral protrusions A462 protruding from the surface facing the same phase member A465 toward the same phase member A465.
462a.

The same phase member A465 includes a phase alignment projection A465a projecting from the surface facing the pin gear A462 toward the pin gear A462, a transmission projection A466 projecting from an eccentric position toward the back surface in an outer circular shape, and an arc wall A467 formed as an arc wall centered on the rotation axis of the same phase member A465 with the transmission projection A466 as a base end.
In comparison with the transmitting protrusion A466, the arc wall portion A467 is formed to have a shorter length toward the rear surface side.

The phase alignment peripheral protrusion A462a and the phase alignment radial protrusion A465a will be described. The phase alignment peripheral protrusion A462a has a plurality of arc-shaped wall portions formed by making cuts along the axial direction in a circular wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the pin gear A462.

The phase alignment radial protrusion A465a has a protrusion that protrudes radially outward from a cylindrical protrusion with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the phase alignment peripheral protrusion A462a, and the protrusion is formed to match the angle (phase) at which the notches are made in the phase alignment peripheral protrusion A462a. By inserting the protrusion into the notches of the phase alignment peripheral protrusion A462a, the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 can be connected in a state where the phase of the same phase member A465 relative to the pin gear A462 is aligned, and the fastening gear is inserted along the central axis of the pin gear A462 and screwed into the tip of the phase alignment radial protrusion A465a to connect the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465.
62 and the phase member A465 can be fixed.

In this embodiment, the angles between the cuts of the phase alignment peripheral protrusion A462a are not uniform (120 degree intervals if divided into three as in this embodiment), but are unequal, so that the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A462 are only in a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353(b)).
65 are configured to be connected to each other.

That is, the angle between the notches of the phase alignment peripheral protrusion A462a is set to 100 degrees, 120 degrees, 140 degrees,
By combining them at different degrees (by making them unequal), the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A
465 can be limited to one type of angle relationship.

In this embodiment, the notches of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A462a (phase matching radial protrusion A
In the above description, the pin gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 are formed in three places, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the pin gear A462 may be formed in one place, two places, or four or more places, and the number of places can be appropriately selected in consideration of the rigidity of the pin gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 when assembled.

335 and 336, the rear plate portion A480 includes a main body plate portion A481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light-transmitting resin material, through holes A482 drilled in the main body plate portion A481 and through which fastening screws are inserted to be screwed into the fastening portions A475 of the support box portion A470, a plurality of alignment protrusions A483 protruding toward the outer periphery of the arc wall portion A477b of the support box portion A470 and used for alignment by abutting against the outer periphery, and a plurality of protruding plate portions A484 protruding from the main body plate portion A481 to the front side so as to be in a plate shape that conforms to the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510.

The outer edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the left edge in Figures 335 and 336) abuts against the rear end of the protruding wall portion A471a of the main body box portion A471, and only the protruding plate portion A484 functions for positioning in the left-right direction.

In contrast, the inner edge of the rear plate portion A480 (the right edge in FIGS. 335 and 336)
In this case, the positioning projection A483 and the arc wall portion A477b come into contact with each other, so that the positioning projection A483 and the arc wall portion A477b are aligned in multiple directions (
This allows the rear plate portion A480 to be properly aligned with the support box portion A470 while ensuring a large space near the outer edge by removing the portion for alignment from near the outer edge.
This secured space is utilized as a space for arranging wiring HC (see FIG. 356(a)), the details of which will be described later.

The protruding plate portion A484 is disposed so that its protruding tip is close to (abuts against) the bottom of the main body box portion A471, or faces the bottom of the main body box portion A471 with a slight gap therebetween so that wiring cannot pass through.
This serves to separate the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510 from the outer area. This makes it possible to prevent the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 from entering the movement range of the slide rack A511 of the rack and pinion A510, as will be described in detail later.

Fig. 354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A490, and Fig. 355 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second displacement member A490. As shown in Fig. 354 and Fig. 355, the second displacement member A490 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material and is inserted into the shaft support hole A473 of the support box portion A470.
a cover member A492 formed of a colorless light-transmitting resin material and fitted to the pivot plate A491 in a manner to cover the pivot plate A491 from the front side, and a light-emitting portion A493 composed of an LED or the like.
a is arranged on an illumination board A493 housed in a support plate A491 and a covering member A492;
Equipped with.

The support plate A491 includes a support protrusion A491a that protrudes toward the rear side in a circular shape and is inserted into the support hole A473, a fastening protrusion A491b that protrudes shorter than the support protrusion A491a, a plurality of insertion holes A491c through which fastening screws can be inserted, a long hole A491d that is formed in a long rectangular shape along the radial direction of the support protrusion A491a, and a fastening hole A491c that is formed in a rectangular shape along the radial direction of the support protrusion A491a.
It is provided with a plurality of circular support portions A491e protruding toward the front side in a circular (arc) shape centered on c, and a plurality of thin protrusion portions A491f protruding toward the front side in a thin protrusion shape along the side wall portion that forms the outer periphery.

The circular support portion A491e and the thin protrusion portion A491f are in the assembled state of the second displacement member A490 (
335 and 336), it abuts against the outer peripheral edge of the illumination board A493 and supports the illumination board A493 from the rear side.

In particular, the thin protrusions A491f are formed at the locations where the shape of the housed illumination board A493 is narrowed, that is, at the locations where the outer peripheral side wall of the pivot support plate A491 is recessed inward, so that it is possible to selectively support the locations where the shape of the illumination board A493 is narrowed. This makes it possible to suppress deformation of the illumination board A493 at the narrowed locations where it is assumed that the rigidity is likely to decrease due to the shortened width dimension, and to prevent the illumination board A493 from breaking.

The covering member A492 is inserted into the supported portion A493b of the illumination board A493, and the insertion hole A4
A plurality of fastening portions A492a into which fastening screws are inserted through the fastening portions A49
A plurality of protruding support parts A492b protruding in the radial direction on the base side of the cover member A492 and connected to the plate-shaped part of the covering member A492, and a plurality of thin protruding parts A491f protruding in the radial direction on the base side of the cover member A492 and connected to the plate-shaped part of the covering member A492 are provided along the side wall part forming the outer periphery at a position corresponding to the thin protruding part A491f of the support plate A491.
92c.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the illumination board A493 is supported at its outer periphery by the thin protrusions A491f and A492c, and is supported by the circular support A491e and the protruding support A492b around the fastening screw.
This allows the illumination board A493 to be supported by the shaft support plate A491 and the covering member A4
92.

The support form of the illumination board A493 is not limited in any way. For example, the illumination board A493 may be fixed by applying a load along the fastening direction, or the illumination board A493 may be fixed without load by being formed with a dimensional relationship that does not generate a compressive load (for example, the dimensional relationship in which the front-to-rear spacing of the thin protrusions A491f and A492c is equivalent to the thickness of the illumination board A493).
It is also possible to maintain the arrangement of 493.

The illuminated board A493 includes the above-mentioned multiple light-emitting portions A493a, multiple supported portions A493b that are drilled or recessed so as not to interfere with the fastening portion A492a when viewed in the front-to-back direction, and a board-side connector A493c that is arranged on the rear side and to which the end (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board-side connector A493 is fixed in a position in which the wiring extends along the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole A491d of the pivot support plate A491, and the elongated hole A491d is formed with a partition extension portion A491d1 extending from the inner edge on the short side in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction until the distance between the inner edge on the opposite side is shorter than the width dimension of the board-side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be connected), and a wide protrusion portion A491d2 protruding from the opposite edge of the board-side connector A493c toward the rear side based on the partition extension portion A491d1.

Based on the partition extension portion A491d1, the visible area side of the third pattern display device 81 (FIG. 355
On the left side, the board side connector A493c is disposed, and on the opposite side, the board side connector A49
The wiring connected to the board side connector A493c passes through the long hole A491d.
The wiring connected to the wiring is sandwiched and supported between the partition extension portion A491d1 and the illumination board A493.

This makes it possible to suppress displacement of the wiring between the board side connector A493c and the partition extension portion A491d1 even if the second displacement member A490 is displaced, thereby reducing the possibility of the wiring coming loose from the board side connector A493c when the second displacement member A490 is displaced.

The protruding portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length sufficient to enter the notched portion A474 of the support box portion A470. This allows the wiring HC, the end of which is connected to the board-side connector A493c, to be routed so as to rise toward the rear surface side of the supported shaft plate A491 (toward the protruding direction of the protruding portion A491d2), so that the wiring HC can be prevented from coming into contact with the notched portion A474, compared to when the wiring is disposed close to the rear surface of the supported shaft plate A491 and routed to the rear surface of the support box portion A470. This makes it possible to prevent the wiring from being broken.

In addition, since the protrusion A491d2 protrudes perpendicularly from the rear surface of the support plate A491, the angle of the wires HC can be adjusted to the right angle side, and the width of the notch A474 for avoiding contact with the wires HC can be reduced.
Since a large area can be secured on the fastening portion A475 side of the main body box A71,
This ensures the rigidity of the fastening portion A471 and improves the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the fastening portion A475.

Returning to FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, the rack and pinion A510 rotates in the direction A416x
the support box portion A470. The support box portion A470 is provided with a slide rack A511 supported so as to be slidable along the slide rack A511, a pinion A517 meshed with a gear portion of the slide rack A511, journaled on a pinion shaft A477a of the support box portion A470, and rotating in synchronization with the slide movement of the slide rack A511, and a reinforcing arm portion A518 meshed with the pinion A517 and rotating in synchronization with the rotation of the pinion A517.

The reinforcing arm A518 is connected and fixed to the second displacement member A490 described above, thereby forming a second
The displacement member A490 is supported by the support box portion A470 so as not to be pulled out.
18 is fastened to the supported protrusion A491a of the second displacement member A490 at the rotation center position of
The reinforcing arm A518 is fastened to the fastening protrusion A491b at the rotating tip side thereof (see FIG. 355). Therefore, the rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm A518 is synonymous with the rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 includes a pair of support holes A512 formed in elongated holes extending in the direction A416x with a size that allows the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 to be inserted therethrough, a supported plate portion A513 formed in a plate shape along the gear portion, a protruding plate portion A514 that protrudes in a plate shape toward the front side at a position away from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction of the support hole A512, and an irregularly shaped transmitted portion A513 that is disposed opposite the same phase member A465 and to which a driving force is transmitted from the same phase member A465.
15.

The support hole A512 is inserted with the tip end thin portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470, and the large diameter portion on the base end side is formed with a diameter larger than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging this large diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a can prevent the displacement. In this way, the slide rack A511 is configured such that the plate-shaped portions are arranged opposite to the rear bottom of the main body box portion A471 with a gap at least about the height of the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a, and is slidably movable along the direction A416x while maintaining the gap.

The supported plate portion A513 is disposed opposite the rear end portion of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a small gap therebetween, and the protruding plate portion A514 is disposed opposite the rear bottom portion of the main body box portion A471 with a small gap therebetween. In other words, even if the slide rack A511 is about to be displaced toward the front side, the supported plate portion A513 and the protruding plate portion A514 can prevent the displacement from occurring.

There are various examples of causes for the slide rack A511 to be displaced in the front-rear direction, such as when a player gives an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called banging), or when fine particles get stuck in the gaps, causing excessive meshing resistance and excessive load at the meshing position.

356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU.
357(b) and 358, in order to facilitate understanding, the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the plate portion of the slide rack A511 is broken so that the irregular-shaped transmitted portion A515 can be seen.
465 and the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A 515 are shown enlarged.

In Figs. 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358,
The second displacement member A490 moves from the retracted position (see FIG. 356(a)) to the extended position (see FIG. 358).
The displacement is illustrated in chronological order.

The second displacement member A490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm A518. When the in-phase member A465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the slide rack A511 in response to the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed, a driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm A518 via the pinion A517. In this manner, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 is caused by the rotation of the in-phase member A465.

As described above, the in-phase member A465 rotates in the same phase as the pin gear A462. Therefore, the rotation of the pin gear A462 described above in Figures 339 to 345 occurs in synchronization with the rotation of the in-phase member A465 described in Figures 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, but the relationship between these will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356(b), the irregularly shaped transmitted part A515 is a part that engages with the in-phase member A465, and the transmitting protrusion A466 can enter and move independently (the slide rack A465).
The non-transmission recess A515a is recessed in the non-transmission recess A515a so that the non-transmission recess A515a can move without applying a load to the non-transmission recess A515b. ...
The insertion gap A515c is a recess of the same depth connected to the opposite side of the transmission protrusion A4
A protruding plate portion A515d is provided in a plate-like shape protruding from the slide rack A511 toward the front side at the retreat position (lower left) side from the slide rack A511 and constitutes the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c.
The opposing portion A515d is disposed opposite the protruding plate portion A515d at a distance equal to or greater than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A466 at the protruding position (upper right) side of the insertion gap A515c.
5e.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A515d is formed longer than the length of the opposing portion A515e in the same direction, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmitting protrusion A466 and the arc wall portion A46
7 in the movement direction.

The facing portion A515e is capable of contacting (overlapping) the transmission protrusion A466 in the movement direction, but is not capable of contacting (does not overlap) the arc wall portion A467 in the movement direction. In other words, the facing portion A515e and the arc wall portion A467 are formed in a dimensional relationship that creates a front-to-rear gap.

The side surfaces of the protruding plate portion A515d and the opposing portion A515e are configured as planes perpendicular to the movement direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x).

The connecting recess A515b has the same function as the escape portion A456d of the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456. That is, the connecting recess A515b is configured to be able to receive the transmitting protrusion A466, and the side connected to the non-transmitting recess A515a is formed in a shape that follows the moving direction of the transmitting protrusion A466. This allows the transmitting protrusion A466 to move smoothly (with low resistance) with respect to the insertion gap A515c.

Although not shown in Figures 356(a), 356(b), 357(a), 357(b), and 358, the same phase member A465 rotates as the driving force of the driving motor AMT1 is transmitted by the driving gear AMG1 and a pair of transmission gears A461, similar to the pin gear A462 (see Figure 335).
The displacement manner in which the second displacement member A490 rotates and is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position will be described in chronological order.

In FIG. 356(a), the driving gear AMG1 is in a state before it rotates, and the slide rack A511 is disposed at the end of the movement range on the retreat position side, and accordingly, the second displacement member A49
0 is shown in the retracted position.

In this state, the transmitting protrusion A466 is in the moving direction (direction A416x
), the arc wall portion A467 abuts against the protruding plate portion A515 d from the upper right (projecting position side) along the moving direction (direction A416x) at an abutment portion A467 a arranged opposite the protruding plate portion A515 d.
Since the displacement of d can be regulated, it is possible to prevent the slide rack A511 from being unintentionally displaced due to an external force applied when the drive motor AMT1 is in a non-excited (non-driven) state.

The abutment point between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d is disposed on a straight line that passes through the rotation axis of the same phase member A465 and is parallel to the direction A416x. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding plate portion A515d to the arc wall portion A467 passes through the rotation axis of the same phase member A465, so that the same phase member A465 can be prevented from rotating due to the load from the protruding plate portion A515d.

Furthermore, since the arc wall portion A467 is curved, the contact area between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be reduced (theoretically, the contact area is 0 because line contact can be achieved). Therefore, when the same phase member A465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 356(a), the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d can be reduced (theoretically, it can be made 0), so that it is possible to avoid the need for an additional driving force to restrict the displacement of the slide rack A511. That is, the same phase member A4
The displacement of the slide rack A 511 can be restricted by only the driving force required to rotate the slide rack A 511.

In addition, when considering the wear and deformation of the resin material constituting the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d, the contact area increases over time, and the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d are in contact with each other.
It is considered that the frictional force generated between the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d will be large. To cope with this, a low-friction seal may be attached to the arc wall portion A467 and the protruding plate portion A515d, or a lubricant (grease, etc.) may be applied. In this embodiment, the ideal contact area is small, so the area that needs to be treated with a low-friction seal or lubricant can be small. Therefore, the cost of the countermeasure can be reduced.

Examples of external forces include gravity, loads caused by vibrations during an earthquake, and forces generated when a player hits or shakes the pachinko machine A10.

FIG. 356(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the connection recess A515b.
b), the phase member A465 changes from the initial angle d10 to the first angle d11.
However, the transmitting protrusion A466 is still in contact with the irregularly shaped transmitted part A515 in the moving direction (
It is non-contact in the direction A416x).

On the other hand, the arc wall portion A467 is still in contact with the protruding plate portion A515d at the contact portion A467a from the upper right (the protruding position side) along the movement direction (direction A416x).
As shown in Fig. 356(a) and Fig. 356(b), since the contact portion A467a is formed on the outer surface of the arc wall portion A467, the contact portion A467a is not displaced in the moving direction (direction A416x) of the slide rack A511. Therefore, even in the state shown in Fig. 356(b),
4, the position of the slide rack A511 is maintained at the end of the movement range on the retracted position side.

As described above, a front-to-back gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposing portion A515e, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be positioned overlapping the opposing portion A515e front-to-back (see Figure 356 (b)).

FIG. 357(a) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts to enter the insertion gap A515c.
) the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the second angle d12, and the transmission protrusion A466 comes into contact with the protruding plate portion A515d.

In Fig. 357(a), a straight line passing through the center of rotation of the same phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the part of the transmission protrusion A466 farthest from the center of rotation of the same phase member A465 abuts against the protruding plate portion A515d, so when the same phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in Fig. 357(a), the restriction by the same phase member A465 is released, and the slide rack A511 moves.
11 can be displaced toward the extended position (upper right).

As described above, a front-to-back gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposing portion A515e, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be positioned overlapping the opposing portion A515e front-to-back (see Figure 357 (a)).

FIG. 357(b) shows a state in which the drive motor AMT1 is excited to rotate and the transmission protrusion A466 enters the insertion gap A515c.
b), the phase member A465 changes from the initial angle d10 to the third angle d13.
In accordance with this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement portion A515e, causing the slide rack A511 to slide and displace, and the slide displacement causes the pinion A517 to rotate.
The torque is transmitted to the second displacement member A490 via the

In Figure 357 (b), a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is perpendicular to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). In other words, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

As described above, a front-to-back gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposing portion A515e, so that the arc wall portion A467 can be positioned overlapping the opposing portion A515e front-to-back (see Figure 357 (b)).

In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 is
515e is pushed forward, the slide rack A511 is positioned at the end of the movement range on the extended position side, and the second displacement member A490 is positioned at the extended position.

356(a) to the state of FIG. 358, the in-phase member A465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by a fourth angle d14 (one or more rotations). With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A466 pushes the opposing arrangement portion A515e, thereby causing the slide rack A5
The sliding displacement of the second displacement member A4 is transmitted to the pinion A517 via the pinion A517.
It will be transmitted to 90.

In Fig. 358, a straight line passing through the rotation center of the in-phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (parallel to the direction A416x). In other words, the angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

As described above, since a front-to-rear gap is provided between the arc wall portion A467 and the opposing portion A515e, the arc wall portion A467 can be positioned overlapping the opposing portion A515e in the front-to-rear direction (see FIG. 358).

In Fig. 358, the portion of the transmission protrusion A466 farthest from the rotation center of the same phase member A465 abuts against the opposing arrangement portion A515e, so if the same phase member A465 rotates beyond the state shown in Fig. 358, there is a risk that the slide rack A511 will be displaced toward the retracted position (lower left side).
When the in-phase member A465 is positioned at the extension position end of its movement range, it is configured to be able to rotate from the position of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358) to the permissible angle dd1.

That is, the transmission protrusion A466 and the protruding plate portion A515d are configured to come into contact with each other only after the in-phase member A465 rotates by the permissible angle dd1. Therefore, until the rotation of the in-phase member A465 by the permissible angle dd1, the transmission protrusion A466 and the protruding plate portion A515d are not in contact with each other and no load is transmitted.
The arrangement of the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the movement range on the extension position side.

Therefore, in the series of displacement modes shown in FIG. 356 to FIG. 358, the same phase member A46
In the control to stop the rotation of the member A465 at the fourth angle d14, the same phase member A465 is actually stopped at the fourth angle d14.
Even if the rotation exceeds angle d14, as long as the rotation angle exceeds the allowable angle dd1, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the end of the extension position of the movement range, and the second displacement member A490 can be maintained in the extension position.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the in-phase member A465 is not strict (allowable angle dd1
Since the arrangement of the second displacement member A490 can be maintained in the extended position even if there is an error (see the following table), the increase in the rotation speed of the in-phase member A465 and the second displacement member A490 can be prevented with a simple configuration.
It is possible to realize a highly accurate displacement of 0 (the second displacement member A490 can be suddenly decelerated and stopped at the extended position without suddenly decelerating and stopping the in-phase member A465).
.

Furthermore, by deliberately causing the rotation angle to exceed the fourth angle d14 by less than the allowable angle dd1, the excess can be used as a run-up section when driving the second displacement member A490 toward the retracted position (when the drive direction is reversed).

In addition, when the transmission protrusion A466 of the same phase member A465 is disposed at the position of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358), the transmission protrusion A466 and the opposing portion A515e of the slide rack A51
1 in the moving direction (parallel to the direction A416x), the slide rack A51
This can prevent the return movement (bound displacement) of the movable member 1 toward the retracted position.

This makes it possible to regulate the rotation of the pinion A517 in the state shown in Figure 358 (to prevent back rotation), thereby preventing the reinforcing arm portion A518 that is meshed with the pinion A517 and the second displacement member A490 that is fastened and fixed to the reinforcing arm portion A518 from rotating back from the extended position (see Figure 358).

FIG. 359 shows the rear unit B in the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line of FIG. 356(a).
359 is a cross-sectional view of U. Note that, in order to facilitate understanding, illustration of the alignment protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated in FIG.

Hereinafter, the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A490 will be described with reference to Fig. 359. In addition, in the description of the wiring HC, Fig. 356 to Fig. 358 will be referred to as appropriate.
C denotes electrical wiring composed of multiple cables with a round cross section that are connected to the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and is disposed in the space surrounded by the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480.

As shown in FIG. 359, the portion of the wiring HC that is connected to the board side connector A493c passes between the partition extension portion A491d1 and the illuminated board A493, and is guided along the protrusion portion A491d2 into the space surrounded by the support box portion A470 and the rear plate portion A480.

As described above, the protrusion portion A491d2 is formed with a protruding length sufficient to enter the notch portion A474 of the support box portion A470, so that the wiring HC is guided away from the notch portion A474 and is prevented from contacting the notch portion A474. This makes it possible to prevent the wiring HC from rubbing against the notch portion A474 and becoming disconnected.

On the other hand, the wiring HC is guided by the protruding portion A491d2 so as to approach the rear plate portion A480. Without any countermeasure, the wiring HC may rub against the rear plate portion A480 and break in a short period of time. In this embodiment, however, a middle portion HC of the wiring HC is provided between the rear plate portion A480 and the rear plate portion A480.
By suitably inserting the portion a, friction with the rear plate portion A480 is suppressed. This will be described in detail below.

In this embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. In more detail, the wiring HC extending from the third connector A416e3 of the illumination board A416 (see FIG. 330) is bound by a cable tie KB wound around a winding portion A471a1 formed so that the cable tie KB can be wound around the intermediate position of the protruding wall portion A471a, and the side of the second displacement member A490 that is connected to the board side connector A493c is wound around the fastening portion A475 once based on the binding position, and the tip of the cable tie HC is connected to the board side connector A493c.

The wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, and is in a loose state (FIG. 356(a
)), it is possible to suppress the amount of upward displacement of the wiring HC away from the fastening portion A475 (the direction in which the wiring HC tied with the cable tie KB extends). This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the wiring HC without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A475.

In this embodiment, the location where the wiring HC is wound is the fastening portion A475, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, in the assembly process of fastening the rear plate portion A480 to the support box portion A470, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion A475 through the rear plate portion A480. At this time, the fastening screw being screwed in can prevent the wiring HC from falling off the fastening portion A475 before the fastening is completed.

In addition, when fastening and fixing, the back side of the support box part A470 (the side from which the fastening part A475 protrudes) is faced upward, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening part A475, and then the rear plate part A480 is placed on the support box part A470 and the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening part A475, so that the assembly can be performed while preventing the wiring HC from sagging in the direction of gravity in the main body box part A471, and therefore the assembly can be completed easily. That is, compared to the case where the fastening part A475 is designed so that it must be assembled in a downward position, the assembly of the support box part A470 and the rear plate part A480 can be easily completed by winding the wiring HC around the fastening part A475.

Since the winding portion A471a1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A471a, the wiring HC temporarily fastened by the cable tie KB is guided (pulled toward) the rear plate portion A480. As a result, when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475, the wiring HC comes closest to the rear plate portion A480 at the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 that is closest to the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 359).

The wiring HC is extended toward the board side connector A493c while leaving some slack in its length so that no tensile load is applied to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A490 is displaced, and at the position where the wiring HC intersects with each other, the end of the wiring HC that is connected to the board side connector A493c is wound in such a manner that it is slid between the wiring HC that is already in place and the support box portion A470.

As a result, the intermediate portion HCa is connected to the rear plate portion A480 of the wiring HC on the board-side connector A493c side.
The wiring HC can be configured to abut against the protrusion A from the side (see FIG. 356(a)).
The degree of approach to the rear plate portion A480 can be suppressed by 491d2.

The manner in which the wiring HC is displaced when the second displacement member A490 is displaced will be described.
The wiring HC is not fixed in position by the support box portion A470 or the rear plate portion A480 between the cable tie KB and the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the wiring HC between the cable tie KB and the board side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490
By utilizing the entire length of the wiring HC to generate a displacement (deflection) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A490, the load (fatigue) associated with the displacement can be made uniform, thereby preventing a large load from being generated locally on the wiring HC.

The board-side connector A493c is disposed on the retracted position side compared to the shaft-supported protrusion 491a which functions as the rotation shaft of the second displacement member A490 and the reinforcing arm portion A518 which is formed on the protruding position side of the second displacement member A490. That is, when the second displacement member A490 is disposed in the retracted position, the board-side connector A493 is disposed on the inside (see FIG. 346(a) , right side) of the support plate portion 420 which blocks the line of sight towards the second displacement member A490.

This reduces the possibility that the wiring HC will protrude outside the outer shape of the support plate portion A420 or the support box portion A470. In other words, by arranging the shaft support protrusion A491a and the reinforcing arm portion A518 closer to the protruding position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), the amount of protrusion of the second displacement member A490 can be secured large, while preventing the wiring HC from being visible to the player.

As shown in Fig. 356(a), the board side connector A493c is configured to be able to receive the end of the wiring HC along the radial direction of a circle centered on the supported shaft protrusion A491a. The board side connector A493c is switched between being disposed on one side (lower right side, see Fig. 356(a)) and being disposed on the other side (upper left side, see Fig. 358) of a straight line connecting the center of the supported shaft protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475 by the displacement of the second displacement member A490.

As a result, the second displacement member A490 moves in the forward and backward directions to the board side connector A49
3c, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a difference in the displacement mode of the portion connected to 3c. This makes it possible to suppress the fluctuation in the load applied to the wiring HC, and therefore to prevent breakage of the wiring HC.

In addition, since the displacement of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the board-side connector A493c can be easily shifted toward the straight line connecting the center of the supported shaft protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475, the amount of displacement can be reduced, and the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be described in detail below.

357B shows the state in which the second displacement member A490 starts to be displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and rotates about 45 degrees.
The direction in which the wiring HC connected to the connecting portion A475 extends is such that the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the fastening portion A475
The center of the slit 14 is approximately parallel to the line connecting the center of the slit 14 and the center of the slit 14 .

In other words, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 is disposed on a bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 that passes through the center of the supported shaft protrusion A491. That is, the fastening portion A475, where the wiring HC is loosely wound, is located at the intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A490, so that the deformation (deflection) of the wiring HC can be minimized.

In comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357(a)), the local displacement of the wiring HC is such that the portion that was in contact with the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 and the portion that was located below the fastening portion A475 are slightly raised. Also, the intermediate portion HCa is located at a position that does not interfere with the wiring HC extending from the board-side connector A493c in the front-rear direction.

In other words, when the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357(b) toward the protruding position, the wiring HC on the board side connector A493c does not obtain the effect of the intermediate portion HCa entering between it and the rear plate portion A480, but the second displacement member A490 can be displaced at high speed without the wiring HC rubbing against each other.

Here, as the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the state shown in Fig. 357(b) to the protruding position shown in Fig. 358, the wiring HC on the side connected to the board-side connector A493c assumes a posture along the left-right direction. Therefore, a load for maintaining the wiring HC in a posture along the left-right direction is generated as a load applied to the wiring HC, and the influence of the load applied by the protrusion portion A491d2 on the arrangement of the wiring HC is reduced compared to when the second displacement member A490 is in the retracted position (see Fig. 357(a)).

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa does not enter between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, excessive frictional force is prevented from being generated between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480.
Only when there is a risk of excessive frictional force being generated between the rear plate portion A480, is the intermediate portion HCa inserted between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC extending from the board side connector A493c, thereby moving the wiring HC away from the rear plate portion A480.

On the other hand, when the possibility of excessive frictional force occurring is low, as shown in FIG.
By eliminating the front-to-rear overlap between the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the board side connector A493c, it is possible to prevent unnecessary resistance from occurring in the displacement of the second displacement member A490, thereby enabling high-speed displacement of the second displacement member A490.

In the protruding state of the second displacement member A490 (see FIG. 358), in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 357(b), the local displacement of the wiring HC is such that the portion disposed above the fastening portion A475 is slightly lowered, and the portion disposed below the fastening portion A475 is slightly raised. In other words, the displacement of the wiring HC is such that it approaches the straight line connecting the center of the supported shaft protrusion A491a and the center of the fastening portion A475.

358, when the second displacement member A490 is in the extended position (i.e., rotated 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wiring HC comes into contact with the wiring guide A471c, and the wiring guide A471c is designed for one purpose to reduce the load applied to the wiring HC in this corrected position.

In detail, when the second displacement member A490 is in the extended state, the arc that passes through the board side connector A493c and touches the lower end of the wiring guide portion A471c is the fastening portion A471c, which is the path of the wiring HC.
475 and the protruding wall portion A471a.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent an excessive load from being applied to the wiring HC, and the durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

Fig. 360 is a schematic diagram showing the rotation angles of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465 based on the initial angles d0 and d10. In the explanation of Fig. 360, unless otherwise specified, the angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate the rotation angles of the pin gear A462 and the same phase member A465.

As described above, the first displacement member A440 is moved from the initial angle d0 to the fifth angle d5.
The second displacement member A490 continues to displace and stops after the fifth angle d5, while the second displacement member A491 stops between the initial angle d10 and the second angle d12, while the second displacement member A492 stops between the second angle d12 and the fourth angle d
The displacement continues up to 14.

360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle range of the pin gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 that generate a driving force for displacing the first displacement member A440 and the pin gear A462 that generates a driving force for displacing the second displacement member A490 are set to 10 degrees.
An angle range in which no driving force is generated is inserted between the rotation angle ranges of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. This makes it possible to stably drive the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490.

However, the setting of the angle range is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be configured to be the same angle. In this case, the second displacement member A490 starts to displace from a stopped state at the same time that the first displacement member A440 is switched from a continuing displacement state to a stopped state. Therefore, the first displacement member A440 is displaced by the driving force of the drive motor AMT1.
Since the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are not displaced at the same time, a single drive motor AMT1 can be used to drive a plurality of members (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490).
490), the load applied to the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (the load can be limited to that applied by a single member).

Also, for example, the second angle d12 may be disposed between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced simultaneously, the section in which the driving forces of both the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 need to be generated can be limited to between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to this embodiment, the member in which the displacement occurs is switched at the boundary of the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12. Therefore, by rotating the pin gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 in an inverse manner within an angle range on one side based on the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, one member (
While the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490 is stopped, the other member (the second
The displacement member A490 or the first displacement member A440 can be rotated in an inverted manner.

As described above, the actuator is configured so that it is not necessary to add a large driving force to stop one of the members (the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490). That is, at the contact position for restricting the displacement of one of the members, the members contact (rub) each other in a line contact, so theoretically no frictional force is generated. This makes it possible to reduce the driving force required for the drive motor AMT1, so that a small drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

In addition, the drive motor AMT1 is driven to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12, stopped, and rotated in the reverse direction to cause only the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the displacement of the second displacement member A49
It is also possible to maintain the zero in the retreated state.

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set to an angle that does not exceed the angle obtained by adding the allowable angle dd1 to the fourth angle d14.
Before the second displacement member A465 rotates the sixth angle d6 from the fourth angle d14 by the permissible angle dd1, the rotation is mechanically restricted at the point where the second displacement member A490 rotates the sixth angle d6 (see FIG. 345). Therefore, since the second displacement member A465 does not rotate beyond the permissible angle dd1, the accuracy of stopping the second displacement member A465 at the fourth angle d14 is low, and even in a configuration (control mode) in which overrotation is likely to occur, the second displacement member A490 can be mechanically restricted from the extended position (see FIG. 3
58).

The value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set to an angle slightly exceeding the angle obtained by adding the fourth angle d14 to the allowable angle dd1 (for example, the sixth angle d6 may be set to an angle exceeding the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees). In this case, the pin gear A462 and the in-phase member A465 may be set to an angle slightly exceeding the fourth angle d14 and exceeding the allowable angle dd1.
While allowing the second displacement member A490 to rotate by an angle of 1, if the rotation continues beyond the allowable angle dd1 and reaches the sixth angle d6, the displacement of the second displacement member A490 can be immediately stopped by mechanical regulation.

This reduces the tolerance for the deviation in the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 (i.e., the fourth
By controlling the stop at an angle (tolerance) slightly exceeding angle d14, it is possible to avoid the second displacement means A490 not reaching the extended position and to ensure that the second displacement means A490 can be stopped at the extended position to a large extent, and it is also possible to prevent the second displacement member A490 from accidentally being displaced significantly in the event that the timing of stopping the drive motor AMT1 becomes unintentionally large.

Since the arc wall portion A464 is formed with a central angle of about 230 degrees as described above, even if the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle, the position that restricts the first displacement member A440 (fifth angle d
Since the arc wall portion A464 is arranged up to the protruding position (the position where it abuts against the first displacement member A440 at position 5), it is possible to maintain the displacement restriction at the protruding position of the first displacement member A440.

In addition, since the state where the arc wall portion A467 of the same phase member A465 abuts against the protruding plate portion A515d corresponds to a state where the detection sensor A426 detects the detected plate portion A455e and the motor A465 is stopped, there is little possibility that the timing of the drive motor AMT1 to stop will unintentionally become large when the arc wall portion A467 abuts against the protruding plate portion A515d.
In order to maintain the arc wall portion A467 in the retracted position, the arc wall portion A467 is formed at an angle smaller than that of the arc wall portion A464 (approximately 210 degrees in this embodiment). This makes it possible to reduce the cost of materials required for the arc wall portion A467.

Next, the second operation unit A700 will be described with reference to Fig. 361 to Fig. 381. Fig. 361 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700 and the rear case A310. As shown in Fig. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a left-right width exceeding the left-right width of the visible area of the display of the third pattern display device 81, and is arranged below the visible area of the display of the third pattern display device 81.

Fig. 362 is an exploded front perspective view of the second operating unit A700, and Fig. 363 is an exploded rear perspective view of the second operating unit A700.
The operating unit A700 comprises a lifting unit A701 held by a long rectangular plate-like member and equipped with a lifting section A702 configured to be able to move up and down, and a performance unit A710 which is displaceable between a retracted position and an extended position by the lifting and lowering action of the lifting section A702 and is configured to be able to operate (perform performances) in multiple ways.

The lifting unit A701 supports a long lifting section A702 on the left and right sides and includes a pair of arm members A703 rotatably supported on the left and right ends, and a pair of drive motors A704 that transmit driving force to the arm members A703 via a drive mechanism not shown.

The mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the driving motor A704 to the arm member A703 is as follows:
For example, a gear transmission mechanism is exemplified in which gear teeth are formed on the end of the arm member A703 on the side of the rotating shaft, and a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 meshes with the gear teeth.

Alternatively, a gear link transmission mechanism may be used in which a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, a pin is inserted into the long hole and protrudes in the axial direction at an eccentric position, a rotor is provided with gear teeth on its outer periphery, and the gear teeth of the rotor mesh with a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704.

In addition, a link transmission mechanism may be used in which a long hole is formed in the arm member A703 and a pin formed on the outer diameter end of an auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted into the long hole, thereby transmitting a driving force from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703.

In this embodiment, the game board A700 is disposed opposite the front side of the second operating unit A700.
In response to the fact that the rear side shape of the drive motor A7 is asymmetrical (see FIG. 306),
The arrangement of the numbers 04 is asymmetrical. That is, the gap (space) on the rear side of the game board A13
By incorporating the drive motor A704 in the space, the front-to-rear width required for the arrangement of the game board A13 and the second operating unit A700 is reduced.

As such, since it is desirable to set the position of the drive motor A704 to match the shape of the game board A13, in this embodiment, it is preferable to adopt a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism rather than a link transmission mechanism.

FIG. 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the performance unit A710, and FIG. 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the performance unit A710.
A circular front cover A711 that divides the performance range of the
The skirt-shaped upper cover A7 is disposed below the upper cover A7 and fastened to the upper cover A740 described later.
12 and a lifting unit A712, which is disposed on the rear side under the upper cover A712.
7 shows the state in which the skirt-shaped lower cover A713 fastened to the lifting section of the lifting mechanism 01 has been disassembled and separated towards the front side.

Figures 364 and 365 show an annular rear cover A714 that is formed in an approximately equal ring shape to the annular front cover A711 when viewed in the front-to-rear direction and that defines an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 and the annular front cover A711, and is fixed to an upper cover portion A740, and a rotating body A720 that is rotatably arranged in the circular center of the annular rear cover A714.

The rotating body A720 is configured so that a member that fits in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A711 when viewed from the front can rotate around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and light-emitting means A7 such as LEDs arranged on a plurality of illumination boards A715 fixed to the annular rear cover A714.
The light emitting means A715a is capable of receiving light emitted from the illumination board A715.
They are placed in groups of three on each side of the pentagon formed by the squares, at equal intervals along the side.

In this embodiment, the illumination board A715 is composed of LEDs or the like arranged at equal intervals along each side of the pentagon in the same manner as the light emitting means A715a, and includes a front light emitting means A715b whose optical axis faces the front side.
The annular front cover A711 is illuminated by shining light on the rear side of the annular front cover A711. That is, the player can visually recognize the light-emitting effect through the light-transmitting portion partially formed on the annular front cover A711.

In this embodiment, five flat plate-like illumination boards A715 each form one side of a pentagon, the illumination boards A715 above the rotating body A720 are arranged in a horizontal position, and the lower ends of the illumination boards A715 on the left and right lower sides are arranged in a position facing the rotation axis, and the light emitting means A715a are arranged in a position in which the optical axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each illumination board A715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotating body A720 rotates, the outer rotation part of the rotating body A720 is the light emitting means A
It is possible to configure the light emitting means A715a so as to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. This makes it possible to change the traveling direction of the light when the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the rotating body A720 in accordance with the rotation of the rotating body A720, thereby enabling the production of a dazzling effect.

In this embodiment, in order to make it easier for the rotating body A720 to reflect light,
The outer surface of the light source 720 is plated (gold plated, silver plated, etc.). The outer surface is not limited to being plated, and may be in various other forms. For example, a tape with a reflective color may be attached.

As described above, the rotating body A720 rotates around a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, so that light traveling on the rotation axis is irradiated to the same location on the rotation axis of the rotating body A720 regardless of whether the rotating body A720 is rotating or not. In this embodiment, a light passing recess A722a is formed at that location to open the upper part of the rotating body A720 and allow light to pass through.
Details will be provided below.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 have recesses A711a and A714a on the edges of the opposing sides, which form windows through which light emitted from the light emitting means A715a passes.
and a semicircular recessed portion A711b that is recessed in a semicircular cross section to surround the rotation shaft of the rotating body A720.
, A714b.

The inner peripheral surface of the ring, excluding the window portion formed by the recessed portions A711a and A714a, and the other outer surfaces are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a and reflected by the rotating body A720 can be further reflected by the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714, so that the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the same light emitting means A715a as light traveling (reflected) from multiple points. This makes it possible to reduce the number of light emitting means A715a while providing a dazzling presentation.

In this respect, it is advantageous to make the window portion necessary for passing the light from the light emitting means A715a as small as possible, since this makes it possible to secure a wide area for reflecting other light (area to which plating is applied).
The shape of the window portion formed by a is formed slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED that constitutes the light-emitting means A715a, so that a wide area for reflecting light can be secured without compromising the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting means A715a.

FIG. 366 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotating body A720 of the performance unit A710.
366 and 367 are exploded rear perspective views of the rotating body A720 of the performance unit A710. In Fig. 366 and Fig. 367, the annular front cover A711, the upper cover A712, and the lower cover A713 of the performance unit A710 are omitted from the illustration.

The rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members, and is a set of members each supported by a plurality of support parts A730 which support the plurality of rotating members. The rotating body A720 comprises a first rotating member A721 having a pair of members having an approximately hemispherical outer shape, and a second rotating member A728 which is composed of a pair of members formed from a colored (blue in this embodiment) light-transmitting resin material and has a shape that can rotate around the outside of the first rotating body 721.

The first rotating member A721 is divided into front and rear portions and is formed of a substantially hemispherical shell-shaped skeleton made of a resin material with low optical transparency. The lower portion of the first rotating member A721 is fastened and fixed to the support portion A730.
722, an annular gear member A723 which is rotatably supported in an annular recess formed on the back side of the front-side shell portion A722 and has gear teeth engraved on the back side, and a central rotating member A724 which is arranged on the back side of the annular gear member A723 and rotatably supported in a manner sandwiched between the pair of shell portions A722, with gear teeth A724a engraved on the shaft engaging with the gear teeth of the annular gear member A723.

The pair of shell portions A722 have light passing recesses A722 recessed in the upper portions in directions away from each other.
At least in the shell portion A722 on the front side, the light passing recess A72
2a are formed on both the top and bottom of the annular gear member A723 and are arranged in such a manner that most of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side of the recessed end of this light transmitting recess A722a.

That is, even if one looks into the through hole surrounded by the light transmitting recess A722a in a top view, most of the annular gear member A723 is not visible from that direction, so one can see the central rotating member A724 arranged inside the annular gear member A723. Therefore, when light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light transmitting recess A722a, the annular gear member A723 is not visible.
This prevents the first rotating member A721 from blocking the light, and allows the light to reach the central rotating member A724. Here, an overview of the operation of the first rotating member A721 will be described with reference to Fig. 368.

Fig. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A721. In Fig. 368, in order to make the inside visible, the shell portion A722 on the rear side is omitted, and for the sake of convenience of explanation, the support portion A7
A fixed gear SG that is non-rotatably disposed above the ring gear member A723 is shown in mesh with the ring gear member A723.

The outline of the operation of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the first rotating member A721 is configured to rotate around a rotation axis (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) extending in the vertical direction. When this rotation occurs, the relative position of the annular gear member A723 arranged inside the first rotating member A721 and the fixed gear SG changes, and the annular gear member A723 and the fixed gear SG are displaced relative to each other (the meshing relationship changes).

In this embodiment, the fixed gear SG is fixed to the tip of the shaft rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 so as not to rotate, so that the relative displacement between the fixed gear SG and the ring gear member A723 is ensured by the rotation of the ring gear member A723.
The central rotating member A724 rotates in mesh with the central rotating member A724. The rotation axis of the central rotating member A724 is
Since the first rotating member A721 extends in a direction intersecting (perpendicular to) the axis (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) that extends in the vertical direction as the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721,
In accordance with the rotation of the central rotating member A 722 (horizontal rotation about a vertical axis), the central rotating member A 724 rotates in a different manner (vertical rotation about a horizontal axis). The relationship of the rotation directions will be described later.

The rotation axis of the central rotating member A724 rotates together with the shell portion A722 (in synchronization with the rotation angle).
Since the rotation continues to change within the same plane, the central rotating member A724 appears to the player to rotate on multiple rotation axes, up, down, left, and right. Therefore, by causing the shell portion A722 to rotate in one direction, the central rotating member A724 can be caused to rotate in multiple directions.

In this embodiment, the number of teeth of the gear teeth A724a and the number of teeth of the fixed gear SG are configured to be the same (both 10 teeth), so the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell portion A722 and the central rotating member A724
As a result, during rotation of the shell part A722, each time the shell part A722 assumes a position in which the ring shape is visible when viewed from the front as shown in Fig. 368 (every half rotation), the central rotating member A724 assumes (returns) a position in which the disk part side faces the front as shown in Fig. 368. Therefore, the reproducibility of the rotation performance can be maintained.

Returning to FIG. 366 and FIG. 367, the second rotating member A728 is a first rotating member A7
The first rotating member A721 is made up of a pair of members having a substantially symmetrical shape, which are fastened and fixed to the support portion A730 below the first rotating member A721, and the first rotating member A721 is connected to the support portion A730 by passing from the lower side of the first rotating member A721 through the outside of the first rotating member A721.
The rod-shaped extension portion A is formed in a rod shape extending upward so as to reach a position covering the upper side of the
728a.

The rod-shaped extension portion A728a is formed to be narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721,
Depending on the difference in the arrangement, a part of the first rotating member A721 may be hidden, or the first rotating member A721 may be left uncovered.
It is possible to configure the first rotating member A721 so that the first rotating member A721 can be seen outside the first rotating member A721 (so that the first rotating member A721 barely overlaps with the first rotating member A721), but this will be described in detail later.

The outer shapes of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are the same as those of the annular rear cover A7
The inner diameter of the annular rear cover A714 is slightly smaller than that of the inner diameter of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, thereby shortening the gap in the vertical direction. This allows the annular rear cover A714 to function as a retainer for the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, and prevents the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 from being inadvertently pulled out upward (disassembled) while the annular rear cover A714 is in place.

As described above, the rotating body A720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728) fastened to the support portion A730.
It rotates with the rotation of the support portion A730. Next, the support portion A730 will be described.

FIG. 369(a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A730, and FIG.
Fig. 370(a) is an exploded front perspective view of the support portion A735. Fig. 370(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the support portion A730. Fig. 370(b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the second support portion A735.

As shown in FIG. 369 and FIG. 370, the support portion A730 is colored (white in this embodiment).
The first support portion A731 has a cylindrical body formed from a non-light-transmitting resin material, and the second support portion A735 has a cylindrical body formed from a colorless, light-transmitting resin material with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the first support portion A731, and is configured as a set of divided bodies divided into two in the radial direction. A box-shaped portion A7
The shaft rod portion A751 fixed to the shaft 50 is inserted, and the tip side of the shaft rod portion A751 is supported so as not to be removed by a metal ring-shaped C-ring C1 and a fixed gear SG which are fixed so as not to be rotatable by fitting with an irregular shaft.

The first support portion A731 comprises a cylindrical main body portion having an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the axial rod portion A751 of the box-shaped portion A750 and a through hole A731a through which the axial rod portion A751 can be inserted, a plurality of support plate portions A732 extending in a plate shape in both directions in a straight line from the upper end of the main body portion and having through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, and a pair of protrusion portions A733 protruding downward from two positions at the lower end of the main body portion.

The protruding portion A733 is disposed at a position corresponding to a notched portion A772a of the lower transmission mechanism A770 described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting, and is formed with different widths. This makes it easier to match the angles of the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 and the first support portion A731 when fitting, compared to when the pair of protruding portions A733 are formed with the same width.

As shown in Figures 369(b) and 370(b), the second support part A735 is composed of a pair of approximately symmetrical divided bodies including a semi-cylindrical part A736 constituting a cylindrical part, and a plurality of semi-support plate parts A737 extending in a plate-like manner in both directions in a straight line from the upper end part of the semi-cylindrical part A736 and having through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

The semi-cylindrical portion A736 has a recessed fitting portion A736a which is recessed in a rectangular shape upward from the lower end at the center position of the arc on the lower end side, and a protruding fitting portion A736b which protrudes in a rectangular shape radially outward from the end of the arc.

The recessed fitting portion A736a is fitted to an inner protrusion A762d (see FIG. 3) of the upper transmission mechanism A760, which will be described later.
73), and the protruding fitting portion A736b is a protrusion that fits into the notch portion A762c of the upper transmission mechanism A760.

When the recessed fitting portion A736a is in the fitting position, the wall portion surrounding the recessed fitting portion A736a is positioned opposite the inner wall of the cylindrical protrusion portion A762b, and the inner wall restricts radial outward displacement of the semi-cylindrical portion A736. The protrusion fitting portion A736b fits into the cutout portion A762c, thereby supporting the divided body constituting the second support portion A735 in an inseparable manner.

Furthermore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b are fitted in a manner that they abut against the notched portion A762c of the upper transmission mechanism A760 in the circumferential direction of the rotation about the shaft portion A751 as the rotation axis, and therefore also function as a transmission portion for transmitting the rotation of the large diameter gear LG12 to the second support portion A735. Therefore, the recessed fitting portion A736a and the protruding fitting portion A736b can function both to prevent the second support portion A736 from splitting and to transmit rotation to the second support portion A736.

A groove A735a is formed in the inner surface of the semi-cylindrical portion where the semi-support plate A737 is formed, the groove A735a being recessed in the circumferential direction.
The contact area with the outer surface of the support portion A731 can be reduced, and the generated frictional force can be reduced.

In particular, in the portion disposed between the half support plate portions A737, there is a risk that a load will be generated when the second rotating member A728 is fastened and fixed, and the inner diameter may become smaller than the designed dimensions.
Since the grooves A735a are formed, it is possible to reduce the contact area at the locations where sliding friction is likely to occur between the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731. This allows the second support portion A735 and the first support portion A731 to have a good contact area while minimizing the decrease in rigidity caused by the formation of the grooves A735a.
It is possible to effectively reduce the frictional force occurring between the

The semi-support plate portion A737 includes a pair of assembly protrusions A737a protruding toward the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second support portion A735 is divided, a pair of alignment protrusions A737b protruding from one of the divided portions, an insertion hole A737c drilled in the other divided portion as a through hole large enough to insert the alignment protrusions A737b, and a pair of fastening holes A737d drilled in the thickness direction and formed in a size large enough to insert the fastening portion A728b (see Figure 367) of the second rotating member A728.

The half support plate portion A737 is aligned with the second rotating member A728 (
367) into the fastening portion A728b, the fastening screws are screwed in and fastened to the half support plate portion A737, thereby connecting the two together. That is, the fastening screws used to fasten the second rotating member A728 can also be used to fasten the half support plate portion A737, thereby reducing the number of fastening screws.

The assembly protrusions A737a are inserted into recesses formed at corresponding positions on the second rotating member A728 and are used for positioning, and the protruding intervals are different between the pair of partitions constituting the second support portion A735. That is, the intervals of the assembly protrusions A737a arranged on the partition arranged on the front side are longer than the intervals of the assembly protrusions A737a arranged on the partition arranged on the rear side.
It is wider than the spacing of 37a.

By forming the assembly protrusions A737a at different intervals, each of the pair of members constituting the second rotating member A728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second support portion A735. That is, only when assembled from the correct direction, the assembly protrusions A737a and the second rotating member A728 can be properly fitted together, and in the case of an incorrect direction, the positions of the assembly protrusions A737a and the recesses of the second rotating member A728 do not match, and assembly cannot be performed, thereby making it possible to notice the incorrect assembly direction.

In addition, the second rotating member A728 has a major difference in that it has a fastening portion A728b or not, and other configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, when handling the second rotating member A728, although it was intended to be assembled as a pair of members,
According to the present embodiment, since the intervals at which the assembly protrusions A737a are formed are different (there is no common pattern), it is possible to detect the error of assembling the second rotating member A728 to be assembled to the second support portion A735 as both being one-sided members (members on one side of the combination) before the fastening screw is inserted.

Before disassembly, the second support portion A735 is spaced radially from the cylindrical protrusion portion A760 of the upper transmission mechanism A760.
366, the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A73
The assembly of the protruding portion A5 is performed solely by translation in the axial direction.
733 is a notch portion A772a, and the recessed fitting portion A736a is an inner protrusion A762d (FIG. 373
) and the protruding fitting portion A736b is fitted into the notch portion A762c. Here, due to its shape, the second support portion A735 is assembled first, and in this state, the first support portion A73
1 is assembled.

Here, due to the shape of the mating member to which it is to be assembled, the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A732 are
The posture when the support part A735 is assembled together is not an arbitrary posture but is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when assembling the first support part A731, the second support part A735 may block the view, making it difficult to assemble the first support part A731.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the second support portion A735 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, and the first support portion A731 is formed from a light-non-transmitting resin material.
After the first support A731 is assembled, the inside of the second support A735 can be seen. In addition, the cylindrical extension A772 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 to which the first support A731 is assembled is
Since the protruding portion A733 of the first support portion A731 is disposed to extend upward from the upper cover portion A740, the position where the protruding portion A733 of the first support portion A731 fits is not hidden by the upper cover portion A740, and can be configured to be easily visible.

Therefore, when assembling the first support portion A731, it can be easily adjusted to an appropriate posture, so that the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735 can be easily assembled.

Here, the upper cover portion A740, which disposes (contains) the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770 between the box-shaped portion A750 and the upper cover portion A740, has a through hole A740 surrounding the central axis of the support portion A730.
Since the through hole A741 is formed in the upper cover portion A740, in order to disassemble the upper transmission mechanism A760 or the lower transmission mechanism A770 and to modify the upper cover portion A740, it is necessary to displace the upper cover portion A740 upward relative to the box-shaped portion A750 in order to remove the axial rod portion A751 fixed to the box-shaped portion A750 from the through hole A741.

At this time, if the support portion A730 is left assembled, the support plate portion A732 and the semi-support plate portion A733 may be damaged.
737 interferes with the upper cover A740, making it impossible to displace the upper cover A740 upward.
It is necessary to disassemble the support part A730 before disassembling the support part A740. As described above, in order to disassemble the support part A730, it is necessary to disassemble the C-ring C1 and the fixed gear SG, and since the fixed gear SG is disposed inside the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 368), it is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

In this way, by requiring disassembly of multiple components in sequence in order to access the upper transmission mechanism A760 or the lower transmission mechanism A770, it is possible to make it more difficult to gain unauthorized access to the upper transmission mechanism A760 or the lower transmission mechanism A770, and it is possible to more easily prevent unauthorized acts such as tampering with the upper transmission mechanism A760 or the lower transmission mechanism A770 to cause malfunctions.

371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper cover part A740 and the box-shaped part A750. Note that Fig. 371 shows a view looking down from diagonally above, and Fig. 372 shows a view looking up from diagonally below (a view inclined at 22.5 degrees from the vertical).

As shown in Figures 371 and 372, the upper cover portion A740 has a through hole A741 drilled vertically at the central position in the left-right direction, and a shape (such as a concave-convex shape) is formed on the lower surface facing the box-shaped portion A750 to support each transmission member of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760.

The box-shaped portion A750 is disposed below the upper cover portion A740 and is formed in a box shape with at least the upper surface side open, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 are disposed at the open position. The box-shaped portion A750 is fixed to the bottom plate portion A750a of the box and is inserted through the through holes A741 of the upper cover portion A740.
A metal (brass in this embodiment) shaft rod portion A751 extends vertically coaxially with the central axis of the
The box-shaped portion A750 is provided with a first detection sensor A752 consisting of a detection device configured using a photocoupler system and arranged on the upper surface side of the box-shaped portion A750, a second detection sensor A753 consisting of a detection device configured using a photocoupler system and arranged on the lower surface side of the box-shaped portion A750, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body portion protrudes toward the lower surface side and is fastened and fixed thereto, a drive gear AMG2 that rotates when excited by the drive motor AMT2, and a relay board A754 that is arranged below the bottom plate portion A750a and relays wiring that is connected to the various sensors A752, A753, the drive motor AMT2, etc.

373 and 374 show a box-shaped portion A750, an upper transmission mechanism A760 and a lower transmission mechanism A770.
373 and 374 show a state in which the upper transmission mechanism A760 is vertically separated from the lower transmission mechanism A770, with Fig. 373 showing a view from diagonally above looking down, and Fig. 374 showing a view from diagonally below looking up.

Both the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770 are configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to gears of two types of shapes (sizes). That is, the lower transmission mechanism A770 is configured by a drive gear AMG2, a small diameter gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small diameter gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small diameter gear PG1, and a large diameter gear LG1 of the same shape as the drive gear AMG2 meshed with the small diameter gear PG2.

In addition, the upper transmission mechanism A760 is composed of a large diameter gear LG11 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, a large diameter gear LG12 of the same shape that is meshed with the large diameter gear LG11, a small diameter gear PG11 that is meshed with the large diameter gear LG12 and has the same shape as the small diameter gear PG1, and a large diameter gear LG13 that is meshed with the small diameter gear PG11 and has the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

The driving gear AMG2 is the upstream side, and the large diameter gears LG13 and LG1 are the downstream side.
Detectable pieces A763 and A773 are formed on the substrate 11 and are detected by a first detection sensor A752 and a second detection sensor A753, respectively.

In the process of transmitting the driving force of each of the transmission mechanisms A760 and A770, a small diameter gear is passed through, but since a large diameter gear is again positioned downstream, the absolute value of the rotation angle when both large diameter gears LG13 and LG1 are rotating is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of the drive gear AMG2.

In this embodiment, the detection pieces A763 extending radially outward from the umbrella portion covering the gear teeth of the large diameter gear LG13 from above are formed at two locations (180 degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference, and the detection piece A763 extending axially from the umbrella portion covering the gear teeth of the large diameter gear LG1 from below is formed at two locations (180 degree intervals) at equal intervals on the circumference.
Since the first detection sensor A7 is formed at four equal intervals (90 degree intervals) on the circumference,
When the drive gear AMG2 rotates 180 degrees from a state in which the detection pieces A763, A773 are detected by both the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372), the state returns to a state in which the detection pieces A763, A773 are detected by both the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753.
The detection timings of the second detection sensor A753 and the second detection sensor A754 can be related to each other.

On the other hand, the reason why a plurality of detection sensors, the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753, are provided is because there are times when only one of the detection sensors is activated.
More details will be provided below.

In the detailed description of the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770, the upper transmission mechanism A760 is supported by the lower transmission mechanism A770 at multiple points. Therefore, in order to facilitate understanding, the lower transmission mechanism A770 will be described first.
50, and as described above, the four gears AMG2, PG1,
This is a transmission mechanism composed of PG2 and LG1.

A plurality of fitting recesses A771 are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side of the drive gear AMG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770. One of the recesses A771 has a protrusion A771 protruding radially inward.
As a result, the internal shape of one recess A771 is formed in the other recess A771.
The internal shape of the device is formed differently.

The small diameter gear PG2 of the lower transmission mechanism A770 includes a cylindrical extension A772 that extends upward from the upper surface so as to surround the shaft rod A751. The upper end of the cylindrical extension A772 includes a pair of rectangular notches A772a that are cut out at symmetrical positions across the shaft rod A751.
The cutout portion A772a is a portion that fits with the protrusion portion A733 of the support portion, and is formed as cutouts having different widths corresponding to the formation mode of the protrusion portion A733.

The large diameter gear LG1 is disposed below an intermediate plate portion A750b formed above the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-shaped portion A750, and the intermediate plate portion A750b restricts the large diameter gear LG1 from being removed upward.
Since it is necessary to remove the detection sensor A753, the number of steps required to remove the large diameter gear LG1 can be increased. This makes it easier to prevent the large diameter gear LG1 from being accidentally removed.

In addition, by dividing the area with the intermediate plate portion A750b, it is possible to easily avoid contact between the large diameter gear LG1 and the components of the upper transmission mechanism A760. This makes it possible to avoid transmission of driving force between the large diameter gear LG1 and the upper transmission mechanism A760 (on the downstream side of the transmission path of the driving force).

Next, the upper transmission mechanism A760 will be described in detail. The upper transmission mechanism A760 is disposed on the upper layer of the box-shaped portion A750, and includes the four gears LG11,
This is a transmission mechanism composed of LG12, PG11, and LG13.

The large-diameter gear LG11 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 transmits driving force only when it rotates in one direction (clockwise when viewed from above) due to a one-way clutch housed inside, and transmits driving force only when it rotates in the opposite direction (
The one-way clutch is configured to rotate freely when rotating in a clockwise direction (counterclockwise when viewed from above) and is provided with a plurality of protrusions A761 protruding downward from the lower surface of the one-way clutch.

The protrusion A761 is a curved wall-shaped protrusion that fits into the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2, and the corresponding portion A761a that corresponds to the protrusion A771a is shaped to be recessed inward in the radial direction (a straight line shape that does not protrude outward in the radial direction). This allows the drive gear AMG2 and the large diameter gear LG11 to be assembled only in a position where the protrusion A771a of the drive gear AMG2 and the corresponding portion A761a of the large diameter gear LG11 match.

The large-diameter gear LG12 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 has a cylindrical extension A of the small-diameter gear PG2 at its center.
A through hole A762a having an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the shaft rod portion A772 is drilled, a cylindrical protrusion portion A762b is protruded from the upper surface side in a large diameter cylindrical shape, and a pair of notched portions A772 are formed at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion portion A762b at opposite positions across the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 by notching in a rectangular shape.
62c, and a pair of inner protrusions A762d protruding along a straight line that passes through the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 and is perpendicular to a straight line that passes through the cutout portion A762c and the central axis of the shaft rod portion A751 in a top view.

The cylindrical protrusion portion A762b receives the lower end of the second support portion A735 (see FIG. 366 ).
These are parts that regulate the displacement of the second support portion A735 in the division direction, and the cutout portion A762c and the inner protrusion A762d are parts that fit into the protruding fitting portion A736b and the recessed fitting portion A736a of the second support portion A735, respectively, and are configured to be able to transmit a driving force.

The large diameter gear LG13 of the upper transmission mechanism A760 includes the pair of detectable pieces A763 described above, elongated gear teeth A764 formed in the axial direction at a position offset in the same direction and at the same angle from the detectable pieces A763 with the formation of the umbrella portion omitted, and a cylindrical functional part A765 arranged inside the large diameter gear LG13 so as to be coaxially rotatable and configured to be rotatable relative to the large diameter gear LG13.

The cylindrical functional part A765 is provided with a pair of rotation restricting protrusions A765a that are disposed symmetrically with respect to the rotation axis and supported by a support groove A750c formed in a groove shape on the upper surface of the box-shaped part A750. Here, a functional device that functions as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) between the cylindrical functional part A765 and the large diameter gear LG13 is housed inside the cylindrical functional part A765.

That is, when the load generated between the large diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional part A765 is smaller (slight) than the reference, the transmission of torque is maintained, and the large diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional part A7
65 is configured to cut off the transmission of torque when an excessive load is generated between the first and second contacts 61 and 65.

In this embodiment, the torque limiter is used as a torque limiter that generates resistance to more reliably prevent the upper transmission mechanism A760 from rotating when the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 spins freely to cut off the transmission of driving force to the upper transmission mechanism A760. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions in the same way as a resistance member that constantly generates resistance or a member that generates viscous resistance, such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without spinning freely, transmitting the driving force through the upper transmission mechanism A760, the transmission of torque is blocked by the torque limiter and the resistance from the large diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, thereby suppressing the load applied to the drive motor AMT2 and suppressing heat generation by the drive motor AMT2.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above and the one-way clutch inside the large-diameter gear LG11 rotates without spinning freely, the torque limiter is in a state of transmitting torque at the start of rotation, and after a certain amount of rotation has continued (after a certain angle of rotation), it switches to a state of releasing the torque transmission. Therefore, before this switching occurs,
A large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In this embodiment, the elongated gear teeth A764 are formed as a portion that receives this large load. That is, the position of the large gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise as viewed from above is set to a position in which the detection piece A763 enters the gap of the first detection sensor A752 ( FIG. 37 ).
3), it is possible to limit the gear teeth that mesh with the small diameter gear PG11 when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise in a top view to specific gear teeth.

By forming the specific gear tooth as the elongated gear tooth A764 with a long length in the axial direction, the load generated per unit length in the axial direction can be reduced.
The durability of the material can be improved.

The first detection sensor A752 can detect a plurality of targets by detecting the detection target piece A763 of the large diameter gear LG13.
When the upper transmission mechanism A76 rotates to transmit the driving force and then stops,
It is possible to detect that the 0 has stopped at the appropriate posture (angle).

Secondly, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large gear LG11 is rotated idly to release the transmission of the driving force to the upper transmission mechanism A760 (when the drive gear AMG2 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from above), it can be detected that the release of the driving force transmission is functioning well. That is, for example, when the cutoff of the driving force transmission (idling) is insufficient due to damage to the internal structure of the one-way clutch or when the torque generating function of the torque limiter is insufficient due to a malfunction, if the driving force transmitted to the large gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large gear LG13 will rotate.

When the drive gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from above, if the first detection sensor A752 detects that the detectable piece A763 has been displaced, an error signal is issued, making it possible to use the first detection sensor A752 to discover malfunctions occurring in the one-way clutch or torque limiter.

The mechanism that uses the torque limiter function to compensate for the cancellation of the driving force transmission using the one-way clutch as described above is effective when the driving force to be transmitted is directed horizontally, as in this embodiment. That is, in this embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by multiple transmission members that rotate around a rotation axis that extends in the vertical direction, but this configuration does not allow the use of gravity.

When the transmitted driving force has a component in the direction of gravity, a structure can be used to utilize the weight of the member to which the driving force is transmitted to suppress movement in the direction in which the transmission of the driving force is released; however, in this embodiment, the weight cannot be utilized, and there is a risk that the transmission of the driving force will occur even due to a weak load generated by the free rotation of the one-way clutch in the release direction.

In addition, as a structure for suppressing displacement due to freewheeling, it is possible to generate friction with other members, but in this case, it becomes necessary to generate a driving force greater than the friction to drive the members, which may cause other problems. From this perspective, in this embodiment, a torque limiter is adopted and the structure is configured to reliably cause the release of the driving force transmission accompanying the switching of the driving direction.

FIG. 375(a) is a top view of the upper cover portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, the upper transmission mechanism A760, and the lower transmission mechanism A770, and FIG. 375(b) is a top view of the upper cover portion A740, the box-shaped portion A750, and the lower transmission mechanism A770.
13 is a front view of the upper transmission mechanism A760 and the lower transmission mechanism A770.

With reference to Figures 375(a) and 375(b), the transmission of the driving force of the drive motor AMT2 will be described. When the drive gear AMG2 rotates due to excitation of the drive motor AMT2, the protrusion A761 (see Figure 374) engages with the recess A771 (see Figure 373) of the drive gear AMG2.
(see reference) also rotates.

When the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the one-way clutch housed inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates freely, and the protrusion portion A761 and the large diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other, so that even when the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large diameter gear LG11 maintains its current state.

That is, the driving force is transmitted only through the lower transmission path DL1 that travels through the lower transmission mechanism A770, and the driving force transmission through the upper transmission path UL1 that travels through the upper transmission mechanism A760 is cut off. Therefore, of the cylindrical extension portion A772 and the cylindrical protrusion portion A762b that fit into the support portion A730 (see FIG. 369), only the cylindrical extension portion A772 rotates, and the cylindrical protrusion portion A762b remains in its original state.

As a result, in the assembled state of the performance unit A710 (see FIG. 362), of the first support portion A731 and the second support portion A735, the first support portion A7 that fits into the cylindrical extension portion A772 is
Since only the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) rotates and the second support part A735 maintains its current state, of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, only the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) that is fastened and fixed to the first support part A731 rotates and the second rotating member A728 maintains its current state.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is clockwise as viewed from above, as described above, the one-way clutch housed inside the large diameter gear LG11 sufficiently transmits the driving force, and the protrusion A761 and the large diameter gear LG11 rotate synchronously (integrally).
When MG2 rotates, the large gear LG11 rotates as well.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only through the lower transmission path DL1 but also through the upper transmission path UL1.
Both 62b rotate.

As a result, in the assembled state of the performance unit A710 (see FIG. 362), both the first support part A731 and the second support part A735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support part A73
Both the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367), which are fastened and fixed to the first and second support portions A735, respectively, rotate.

Here, the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 will be described. First, the second rotating member A728 (see FIG. 367) rotates by the drive transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. As the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the large diameter gear LG
Since the large diameter gear LG11 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, and the large diameter gear LG12 that meshes with the large diameter gear LG11 rotates in the opposite direction, counterclockwise when viewed from above, the rotation direction of the second rotating member A728 is counterclockwise when viewed from above.

Next, the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 367) rotates by the driving force transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1.
The small diameter gear PG1 that meshes with MG2 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, and the small diameter gear PG2 (see Figure 373) that meshes with the small diameter gear PG1 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, so the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 is clockwise when viewed from above.

That is, the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 is the same as that of the shaft rod portion A751.
As a result, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A7
In comparison with the case where the rotation directions of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are the same, the player can visually recognize that the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are rotating at a high speed (with a large change in angle).
This makes it easier to create effects such as making it appear as if the two are rotating independently.

FIG. 376(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(b) is a front view of the first rotating member A721 shown in FIG.
376(a) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of the arrow D in FIG.
FIG. 376(d) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 376(c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
13 is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction.

Figures 376(a) and 376(b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, and Figures 376(c) and 376(d) show the state (first state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above from the initial state.

FIG. 377(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(b) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
FIG. 377(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 377(a).
FIG. 377(d) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 377(c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
13 is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction.

In FIG. 377(a) and FIG. 377(b), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is
The state (second state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise from the above state is shown in FIG.
377(c) and 377(d) show a state (third state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above from the second state.

FIG. 378(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(b) is a front view of the first rotating member A721 shown in FIG.
FIG. 378(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of the arrow D in FIG. 378(a);
FIG. 378(d) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 378(c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
13 is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction.

In FIG. 378(a) and FIG. 378(b), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is a third
The state (fourth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise from the above state is shown in FIG.
378(c) and 378(d) show a state (fifth state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above from the fourth state.

FIG. 379(a) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(b) is a front view of the first rotating member A721 shown in FIG.
FIG. 379(c) is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction of the arrow D in FIG.
FIG. 379(d) is a front view of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 379(c) is a front view of the first rotating member A721.
13 is a top view of the first rotating member A721 as viewed in the direction.

In FIG. 379(a) and FIG. 379(b), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is a fifth
The state (sixth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise from the above state is shown in FIG.
379(c) and 379(d) show a state (seventh state) after the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 has rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from above from the sixth state.

When the shell portion A722 rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the seventh state, the first rotating member A7
21 returns to the initial state. That is, one section (one cycle) of rotation of the first rotating member A721 is shown in Figures 376 to 379.

In addition, in the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376(a)), the shell portion A72
The side visible in front view of the first rotating member A721 will be described as the front shell portion A722F, and the opposite side will be described as the rear shell portion A722B.
The side visible when viewed from the front of 24 will be described as a member front surface A724F, and the opposite side will be described as a member back surface A724B.

In addition, Figs. 376(a), 376(c), 377(a), 377(c), and 378
In (a), 378(c), 379(a) and 379(c), the illumination board A715 (
The optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A715a of FIG. 364 is shown by an imaginary line.
Fig. 376(b), Fig. 376(d), Fig. 377(b), Fig. 377(d), Fig. 378(b),
378(d), 379(b), and 379(d) show a predetermined imaginary plane VS. The optical axis KJ passes through this imaginary plane VS.

In addition, arrows HL and VL are shown in Fig. 376(d), Fig. 377(d), Fig. 378(d), and Fig. 379(d) to show the direction of light reflection. The arrow HL indicates the direction of light reflection of the central rotating member A7.
The arrow VL indicates the direction in which light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is reflected by the shell portion A722 and travels, and the arrow VL indicates the direction in which light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the upper side of the central rotating member A724 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 and travels.

As shown in Figs. 376(d), 377(d), 378(d) and 379(d),
In response to one rotation of the first rotating member A721 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from above, the direction of the arrow VL changes by one rotation in the clockwise direction as viewed from above.
The light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is
The first rotating member A721 can be moved in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 via the rotor 722, and the direction of the movement can be changed in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721.

This is difficult to achieve, for example, in a configuration in which the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the shell portion A722 or the central rotating member A724. For example, when the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the shell portion A722, the change in the direction of the light irradiated from the light emitting means changes in the same rotational direction as the rotational direction of the first rotating member A721.

In addition, for example, since the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 always faces the front side when the first rotating member A721 rotates,
When a light emitting means is placed in the direction normal to the surface, the change in the direction of travel of the light irradiated does not change around the rotation axis of the first rotating member A721 (it changes in the rotational direction with the rotation axis in the front-to-rear direction).

Therefore, it is possible to perform a more unexpected light-emitting effect than when a light-emitting means is disposed on the side of the first rotating member A721 to perform a light-emitting effect. For example, by making the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721 opposite to the rotation direction of the light, it is possible to make the player feel as if the member is rotating at a higher speed than the actual rotation speed.

As shown in Figures 376 to 379, the central rotating member A724 also rotates with the rotation of the first rotating member A721, but the surface visible to the player is limited to the member front surface A724F. Therefore, even if the fastening screws for fastening and fixing the central rotating member A724 are exposed on the back side (see Figure 368), the fastening screws can be prevented from being visible to the player.

In other words, the back surface A724B of the central rotating member A724 can be configured as an area for a different purpose, rather than as an area for the player to view, so that a configuration that can more easily achieve the purpose (in this embodiment, the purpose of reflecting light) can be selected regardless of appearance. For example, in this embodiment, by deliberately exposing the fastening screw, light reflection can be generated by utilizing the gloss of the member surface of the fastening screw.

The configuration of the surface of the fastening screw member can be set as desired. For example, the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted black to make it easier to create shadows, or the surface of the fastening screw member may be painted a colored color to reflect that color, or a light-emitting device such as an LED may be attached to the fastening screw.

The action of the light irradiated to the first rotating member A721 will be described. In the following description, FIG. 364 will be referred to as appropriate. The illumination board A715 equipped with the light emitting means A715a that irradiates light to the first rotating member A721 is arranged to form each side of a pentagon as described above, and the optical axis KJ is arranged along the direction perpendicular to each side (the direction inclined to each other).
First, the illuminated board A715 (see FIG. 364) arranged above the first rotating member A721 will be described, and then the illuminated boards A715 arranged on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 will be described.

The illumination board A715 arranged above the first rotating member A721 is irradiated with light downward from the light emitting means A715a. This light passes through the light passing recess A722a and reaches the central rotating member A724 regardless of the state of the first rotating member A721.
By irradiating light from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the central rotating member A724 can be constantly illuminated with light.

In addition, the light emitting means A715a has three LEDs arranged in parallel horizontally, and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724 can change depending on the state of the first rotating member A721.
In the initial state (see Figure 376 (b)), the light-passing recess A722a is formed long in the same direction as the light-emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, so that light emitted from the left and right light-emitting means A715a can easily reach the central rotating member A724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377(b)), the light passing recess A722a does not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A715a are arranged in parallel, and the light irradiated from the left and right light emitting means A715a does not easily enter the light passing recess A722a, so that of the light irradiated from the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724, the light that reaches the central rotating member A724 is mainly the light irradiated from the central light emitting means A715a. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotating member A721 can be associated with the difference in the light emission intensity of the central rotating member A724.

In this respect, in the initial state and the fourth state in which the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is easily visible from the front view, the illumination board A71 disposed above the central rotating member A724
The intensity of the light irradiated from the central rotating member A724 is maximized.
In the second state and the sixth state in which the front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is difficult to see from the front, the intensity of the light irradiated from the illumination board A715 arranged above the central rotating member A724 and reaching the central rotating member A724 can be minimized. In other words, the visibility of the central rotating member A724 from the front and the intensity of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed correspondingly.

The illumination boards A715 arranged on the left and right of the first rotating member A721 are provided with light emitting means A715a whose optical axis KJ is arranged on a plane (imaginary plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell portion A722. Light is irradiated from the light emitting means A715a toward the first rotating member A721.
Depending on the state of the rotating member A721, the location where the light reaches varies.

That is, the shell portion A722 is disposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a (initial state (see FIG. 376(a) and FIG. 376(b)) or the fourth state (see FIG. 378(a)).
378(b) , the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is reflected by the shell portion A72.
2 and does not reach the central rotating member A 724.

The shell portion A722 is curved in such a manner that the width becomes narrower as it goes radially outward at the outer peripheral edge portion, and a connecting portion A722 connects the edges of the openings of the shell portion A722 with an irregular arch-shaped bridge.
Therefore, even in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, a part of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a to the shell part A722 can be reflected by the curvature of the outer periphery of the shell part A722 or the curvature of the arch of the connecting part A722b, and can be made to travel toward the player.

In addition, since the shell A722 is in an inclined position that reflects the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a toward the player (along the arrow HL) in a state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the difference between the amount of light traveling toward the player in a state slightly offset from the initial state and the fourth state and the amount of light in other states can be emphasized. That is, a light-emitting effect can be executed in which the central rotating member A724 is momentarily (pulsatingly) viewed as dark in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, and the central rotating member A724 is switched to a state in which it is brightly viewed in a state slightly offset from the initial state and the fourth state.

On the other hand, in a state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A721, not all of the optical axis of the light-emitting means A715a overlaps with the shell portion A722, so at least a portion of the light reaches the central rotating member A724.

In this way, the light emitting means A of the illumination board A715 arranged on the left and right of the first rotating member A721
The state in which the light irradiated from 715a reaches the central rotating member A724 and the state in which the light irradiated from 715a reaches the central rotating member A724 are shown in FIG.
In this way, it is possible to switch between a state where the light reaching the central rotating member A724 does not reach the central rotating member A724 and a state where the light reaching the central rotating member A724 does not reach the central rotating member A724, and a state where the light reaching the central rotating member A724 does not reach the central rotating member A724, even if the light emitting mode (e.g., blinking mode) of the light emitting means A715a is not controlled.

For example, by maintaining the light emitted from the light-emitting means A715a in a lit state while changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721, the light can be made to appear to flash with different on or off times (it can be made to appear as a light-emitting effect with different flashing periods).

In this case, when the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed that cannot be tracked as a still image and exceeds the speed at which an afterimage is created (for example, 20 rps), the central rotating member A724 will appear to be stationary regardless of the speed, while the blinking period of the light irradiated onto the central rotating member A724 can be made to differ depending on the speed.

That is, the faster the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 is, the shorter the interval until the first rotating member A721 reaches the initial state or the fourth state can be, and the shorter the cycle during which the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a (the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724) is blocked by the shell portion A722 can be, and therefore the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotating member A724 can be shortened.
By changing the rotation speed of the central rotating member A724, it is possible to change the blinking cycle of the light irradiated onto the central rotating member A724.

In this embodiment, as shown in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, in a state in which the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a and the shell portion A722 are arranged opposite to each other, the central rotating member A724 is configured so that the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A724 overlaps with the shell portion A722 when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (or when viewed in the direction of the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a).
The longitudinal direction of 724 is defined as a direction parallel to the member front surface A724F or the member back surface A724B (for example, the direction of arrows L-R, U-D, or F-B in FIG. 376(a)), and the lateral direction is defined as a direction connecting the member front surface A724F and the member back surface A724B (FIG. 37
6(b) in the direction of arrows F-B).

In other words, in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A721, the central rotating member A724 has a longitudinal direction that is longer than the shell portion A72 when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis (or the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a).
2. This improves the light shielding effect of the shell portion A722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A721. That is, by shielding light with the shell portion A722, it is possible to easily prevent the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a from reaching the central rotating member A724, and therefore it is possible to easily configure a situation in which, for example, the light from the light emitting means A715a illuminates the shell portion A722 but does not illuminate the central rotating member A724.

In addition, when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at a constant speed, the total (proportion) of the time during which the first rotating member A721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state relative to the time during which the rotation continues is the same regardless of the rotation speed. This makes it possible to prevent the brightness of the first rotating member A721 as viewed by the player from changing due to a change in the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first rotating member A721 from being viewed as being dark when the first rotating member A721 is rotated at high speed.

In this embodiment, the first rotating member A72 is turned on when the light emitting means A715a is turned on.
By rotating the central rotating member A724, the blinking period of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed. This makes it possible to obtain the same effect as when the light emitting means A715a itself is made to blink, while eliminating the need to form a circuit for making the light emitting means A715a blink. Therefore, the illumination board A715 can be made smaller.

As described above, the light emitting means A715a irradiates light from above the central rotating member A724;
The light emitting means A715a for irradiating light from the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 is a first rotating member A
The first rotating member A721 is configured to be illuminated differently depending on the state of the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by controlling them separately, it is possible to perform the light emission effects exemplified below.

For example, the initial state of the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 376(a) and FIG. 376(b))
Or in the fourth state (see FIG. 378(a) and FIG. 378(b)), the central rotating member A7
By controlling the light-emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 to be turned off and the light-emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 to be turned on or blinking, a light effect can be created in which the central rotating member A724 is made to appear dark and the shell portion A722 is brightly illuminated.

Furthermore, for example, by controlling so that only the light-emitting means A715a (the central light-emitting means A715a) located above the central rotating member A724 is lit or flashes, and the light-emitting means A715a located to the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are turned off, a light effect can be produced in which the central rotating member A724 is brightly illuminated and the shell portion A722 is visually dark.

Also, for example, light is irradiated from both left and right directions, but light is irradiated only from one side (upper side) in the up and down directions (switching between being reflected from the central rotating member A724 to the front side and being reflected to the back side every half rotation), making it possible to perform complex light emitting effects. For example, by configuring the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 to irradiate blue light and the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 to irradiate red light, it is possible to switch between a situation in which blue light is seen by a player viewing from the front and a situation in which blue light and red light are seen mixed every half rotation of the first rotating member A721.

In this case, the period at which the appearance of the light changes can be changed arbitrarily by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A721 while controlling the light to be continuously lit without flashing it.

An example of the stop control of the first rotating member A721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotating the first rotating member A721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375(b)), and the detected piece A773 (see FIG. 374) of the large diameter gear LG1 arranged on the lower transmission path DL1 is detected by the second detection sensor A753 at 90 degree intervals, so that the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the occurrence of rotation every time the first rotating member A721 rotates 90 degrees. This determination is made according to the rotation direction of the first rotating member A721, the results are accumulated, and the accumulated results are separately determined, thereby determining the state of the first rotating member A721.

That is, for example, when the drive motor AMT2 is driven to rotate in a rotation direction (positive direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from above, the detection piece A773 is rotated in the second detection sensor A75.
On the other hand, when the drive motor AMT2 is driven to rotate in a rotation direction (reverse direction) in which the shell portion A722 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the cumulative counter value is decreased by 1 each time the detectable piece A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753.

If the value of the cumulative counter is 0 or a multiple of 4, it is in the initial state.
If the value is (a multiple of 0 or 4) + 1, it is determined to be in the second state; if the value is (a multiple of 0 or 4) + 2, it is determined to be in the fourth state; and if the value is (a multiple of 0 or 4) + 3, it is determined to be in the sixth state.

Therefore, according to this embodiment, even if the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2 cannot be specified, the value of the cumulative counter is determined and the drive motor AMT2 is stopped, so that the first rotating member A72 is rotated in any of the initial state, the second state, the fourth state, and the sixth state.
1 can be stopped.

Therefore, it is possible to perform a performance in which the posture in which the first rotating member A721 stops has a different meaning. For example, it can be used as a performance means to notify the difference in the expectation of a big win or to notify time information (such as changing the posture every two hours).

In this embodiment, the detection pieces A773 are formed at four equal intervals, but this is not necessarily limited to this. The detection pieces A773 may be arranged at unequal intervals, may be formed at three or five or more locations, or may be formed at one location.

FIG. 380(a) is a front view of the performance unit A710, and FIG. 380(b) is a front view of the performance unit A710.
FIG. 380(a) is a top view of the performance unit A710 as viewed in the direction of the arrow D in FIG.
FIG. 380(d) is a front view of the performance unit A710, and FIG. 380(c) shows the arrow D
This is a top view of the performance unit A710 viewed from the direction.

FIG. 381(a) is a front view of the performance unit A710, and FIG. 381(b) is a front view of the performance unit A710.
FIG. 381(c) is a top view of the performance unit A710 as viewed in the direction of the arrow D in FIG.
FIG. 381(d) is a front view of the performance unit A710, and FIG. 381(c) is a front view of the performance unit A710.
This is a top view of the performance unit A710 viewed from the direction.

380 and 381 show the rotation of the rotating body A720 in chronological order. That is, the first rotating member A721 is driven in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from above.
380(a) and 380(b) show the initial state of the first rotating member A721, FIG. 380(c) and FIG. 380(d) show the first state of the first rotating member A721, and FIG. 381(a) and FIG. 381(b) show the first rotating member A721.
381(c) and 381(d) show the first rotating member A721 in the second state,
A third state of the rotating member A721 is shown respectively.

When the first rotating member A721 is driven in a rotational direction rotating counterclockwise when viewed from above, as described above, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1, so that the second rotating member A728 also rotates in the opposite direction at the same rotational angle as the first rotating member A721.

That is, in FIG. 380(a) and FIG. 380(b), the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is disposed on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 in the initial state of the second rotating member A728, and in FIG.
In FIG. 380(c) and FIG. 380(d), the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is rotated clockwise from the initial state by 4 degrees as viewed from above.
The first state of the second rotating member A728 rotated 5 degrees is shown in FIG. 381(a) and FIG.
1B, the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the first state when viewed from above to the second state.
The second state of the rotating member A728 is illustrated. In FIG. 381(c) and FIG. 381(d), the rod-shaped extension portion A728a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise from the second state when viewed from above.
A third state is shown.

Since the pair of rod-shaped extension portions A728a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetrical shape, the second rotating member A728 returns to the initial state by rotating a further 45 degrees clockwise when viewed from above from the third state.

In addition, in Figures 380(b), 380(d), 381(b) and 381(d), in order to facilitate understanding, the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 are shown by imaginary lines as schematic diagrams (simplified shape diagrams).

In addition, in Fig. 380(a), Fig. 380(c), Fig. 381(a) and Fig. 381(c), the outer shape of the illumination board A715 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in Fig. 380(b), Fig. 380(d) and Fig. 381(c),
In (b) and (d) of FIG. 381, a virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 380 and FIG. 381, the second rotating member A728 rotates.
The light passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the illumination board A715 (two boards arranged on each side) arranged on the left and right sides of the rotation member A721. Therefore, like the first rotation member A721, the traveling mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 is controlled by the second rotation member A7
It can be changed corresponding to 28 rotations.

Here, unlike the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721, which is formed from a resin material with low light transmittance, the second rotating member A728 is formed from a resin material with light transmittance, and therefore acts to change the refraction mode of light and the color of light, rather than blocking the light when passing through the optical axis of the light. In this embodiment, since the second rotating member A728 is formed from a blue resin material, the light reaching the first rotating member A721 can be changed to a color closer to blue (a color mixed with blue) at the timing when the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rod shape that extends in a direction along the rotation axis and bends along the circumferential direction of rotation, and is configured so as not to overlap with any of the optical axes of the light-emitting means A715a arranged to the left and right of the central rotating member A724.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380(d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illumination board A715 arranged on the upper left and right sides of the central rotation member A724 overlaps with the second rotation member A728, and the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the other illumination boards A715 does not overlap with the second rotation member A728. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG.
The optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the illumination board A715 arranged on the left and right lower sides of the illumination board A724 overlaps with the second rotating member A728, and the light emitting means A715a arranged on the other illumination boards A715
The optical axis of the second rotating member A728 does not overlap with the optical axis of the second rotating member A728.
In the state shown in FIG. 81(b), the optical axis of any of the light emitting means A715a is aligned with the second rotating member A72
8 are configured so as not to overlap.

This makes it possible to increase the variety of the modes of light that reaches the central rotating member A724, compared to a case in which the optical axes of all the light-emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right sides of the central rotating member A724 and the second rotating member A728 are switched between overlapping or not overlapping.
The manner in which light that passes through the rotating member A728 reaches the central rotating member A724 can be increased to a manner in which only light arriving from the upper left and right passes through the second rotating member A728, and a manner in which only light arriving from the lower left and right passes through the second rotating member A728.

In this case, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned on and the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis does not overlap with the second rotating member A728 is turned off, or conversely, the light emitting means A715a whose optical axis overlaps with the second rotating member A728 is turned off and the second rotating member A72
The light emitting means A715a, whose optical axis does not overlap with the central rotating member A724, is turned on depending on whether it is turned on or not.
That is, the appearance of the central rotating member A724 can be changed by rotating the second rotating member A72
It is possible to switch between emitting light in a manner that mixes the colors of the first and second rotating members A728 or emitting light independently of the color of the second rotating member A728.

In addition, the direction of the optical axis overlapping with the second rotating member A728 can be changed from the upper left and right sides to the lower left and right sides depending on the arrangement of the second rotating member A728.
The portions of the central rotating member A724 that are illuminated in a mixed manner of 28 colors can be switched.

As shown in FIG. 380 and FIG. 381, the second rotating member A7
As a result, the optical axis of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 passes through the light transmitting recess A722a without passing through the second rotating member A728, regardless of the arrangement of the second rotating member A728.
Head towards 2a.

Therefore, for example, only the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 is turned on, and the light emitting means A715 arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 are turned on.
By configuring the second rotating member A728 to be turned off, it is possible to prevent the color of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 from being changed by the second rotating member A728.

If this were to be achieved using light-emitting means A715a arranged to the left and right of the central rotating member A724, control would be required to turn on the light-emitting means A715a at a timing when the second rotating member A728 does not intersect with the optical axis of the light-emitting means A715a and to turn off the light-emitting means A715a at a timing when the second rotating member A728 intersects with the optical axis (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A728). However, in this embodiment, such control can be eliminated by the function of the light-emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724.

The second rotating member A728 is arranged so as to partially hide the central rotating member A724 from the player's field of vision when the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 does not face forward and the performance function of the central rotating member A724 is in a low position (see FIG. 381(a)), and is configured to easily allow light refracted by the second rotating member A728 to travel to the player. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the performance function of the rotating body A720 during continued rotation.

Here, since the rod-shaped extension portion A728a of the second rotating member A728 is formed in a rotationally symmetric shape, the shape (outer shape) when viewed from the front can be switched at intervals of 180 degrees.
The shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 shown in FIG. 1(a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A728 in a state rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381(a).

On the other hand, the first rotating member A721 rotating inside the second rotating member A728 does not have the same state at 180 degree intervals. That is, when the first rotating member A721 rotates 180 degrees from the second state (see FIG. 377(a)) shown in FIG. 381(a), it becomes the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)). In this embodiment, as described above, the second rotating member A728 rotates the first rotating member A721
In the position where the second rotating member A728 is disposed in front of and behind the first rotating member A721 (see FIG. 381(a)), the first rotating member A721 is partially hidden by the second rotating member A728.
This makes it difficult to determine whether 21 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, from the state in which the second rotating member A728 is disposed as shown in FIG.
While the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are rotated 45 degrees in synchronization with each other, when the first rotating member A721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377(a)), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A728.
The direction of reflection by the first rotating member A721 is toward the front side (see arrow VL in FIG. 377(d)). The central rotating member A724 is brightly recognized by the player, while the first rotating member A721 is not brightly recognized by the player.
When the first rotating member A721 is in the sixth state (see FIG. 379(a)), the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the first rotating member A721 is reflected by the central rotating member A724 in a direction toward the rear side (see the arrow VL in FIG. 379(d)).
24 appears dark to the player.

That is, the light emitting means A changes the appearance of the first rotating member A721 (the brightness of the central rotating member A724) while keeping the visible outer shape of the second rotating member A728 during the displacement the same.
715a without changing the lighting mode of the other light sources.
By relating the difference between whether the central rotating member A724 appears bright or dark to, for example, the likelihood of a jackpot being won by drawing a special pattern, when the second rotating member A728 stops in the state shown in Figure 381 (a), it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation for the subsequent operating state and to increase attention to the rotating body A720.

In this case, while the second rotating member A728 and the first rotating member A721 are rotated 90 degrees in synchronization with each other from the state in which the second rotating member A728 is disposed as shown in FIG. 381(a), the member front face A724F of the central rotating member A724 rotates 90 degrees from an upward orientation to a front-to-rear orientation.
Until just before the rotation angle reaches 90 degrees, the direction of light reflected through the central rotating member A724 gradually changes from the vertical to the front-to-back direction (changing in synchronization with the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721), while when the rotation angle of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 reaches 90 degrees, the member front surface A724F faces the front-to-back direction (since there is no inclination from above relative to the optical axis KJ), the front-to-back component of the direction of light reflected through the central rotating member A724 approaches 0, and the reflection direction of the light returns to the vertical direction.

In this way, in synchronization with the rotation of the first rotating member A721 from the second state or the sixth state, the forward and backward components of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a arranged above the central rotating member A724 and reflected by the central rotating member A724 can be gradually increased.
Therefore, it is easy to determine whether the first rotating member A721 was in the second state or the sixth state not only at the moment when the first rotating member A721 starts to rotate, but also after the rotation.
This allows for high levels of attention to be maintained.

In this embodiment, it is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A721 while keeping the second rotating member A728 stationary by driving the rotating body A720 in a direction in which the first rotating member A721 rotates clockwise when viewed from above from the state shown in Fig. 381(a).
Since the light reflected by the central rotating member A724 (light along the arrow VL) passes through the second rotating member A728 and easily reaches the player's eyes, the central rotating member A724 becomes easily visible due to its color.

In other words, in the state shown in Figure 381 (a), the posture of the first rotating member A721 can be configured in two ways, spaced 180 degrees apart, and it can be configured in a mode in which the first rotating member A721 rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the second rotating member A728 from the state shown in Figure 381 (a), and a mode in which only the first rotating member A721 rotates from the state shown in Figure 381 (a) while maintaining the posture of the second rotating member A728.Therefore, a total of four different ways can be implemented for presenting the central rotating member A724 to the player.

In addition, the light reflected through the central rotating member A724 not only functions to change the brightness of the central rotating member A724 itself, but also has the function of illuminating the members arranged around the central rotating member A724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side through the central rotating member A724 (Figure 377 (
In the case of the above, the light can be used to brightly illuminate the left side flow path (the flow path formed in the left area based on the center of the left and right width of the play area) in the play area formed on the front side of the play board A13, and when the light is reflected to the right front side via the central rotating member A724 (
See Figure 376 (d)) can be used as a light to brightly illuminate the right-side flow path (a flow path formed in the area on the right side based on the center of the left-right width of the game area, a flow path through which balls mainly hit with the right hand pass) in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13.

In addition, for example, when light is reflected to the left rear side via the central rotating member A724 (FIG. 3),
When the light is reflected to the right rear side through the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 379 (d)), it can be used to brightly illuminate the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, etc., which are located on the left side of the front of the third pattern display device 81. When the light is reflected to the right rear side through the central rotating member A724 (see FIG. 379 (d)), it can be used to brightly illuminate the first operation units A400C, A400B, etc., which are located on the right side of the front of the third pattern display device 81.
00D, etc. In this way, the central rotating member A7
Since the light reflected through 24 can be switched to a direction toward a different component, by switching the direction of the light, the player's line of sight can be guided to a different component (location).

In addition, the second rotating member A728 is configured with a vertical length that can divide the inner area of the annular front cover A711 into left and right areas when viewed from the front (see FIG. 381(a)). As a result, when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, for example, the performance unit A710
When the second rotating member A728 is disposed on the front side of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the display area of the third pattern display device 81 visible through the inner area of the annular front cover A711 can be partitioned so as to divide it into left and right. That is, the second rotating member A728 can be utilized not only as a member that executes the performance by the rotating action, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when it is stopped.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise when viewed from above, the first rotating member A721 can be rotated while keeping the second rotating member A728 stopped, so that an effect can be executed in which the first rotating member A721 rotates while the display area of the display device is divided.

In this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotating member A721 is driven in a counterclockwise rotation direction as viewed from above, and is not rotated in the reverse direction (the first rotating member A7
In the driving mode in which the second rotating member A728 rotates clockwise when viewed from above, the second rotating member A728 stops.

In other words, in one rotation direction, the first rotating member A721 passes through the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right, thereby arbitrarily changing the blinking period of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724, and in the other rotation direction, in addition to changing the blinking period, the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis arranged on the left and right, thereby arbitrarily changing the blinking period of the light that reaches the central rotating member A724.
This can cause a change in the emission aspect (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching 24.

In this way, the visibility of the light emission effect can be changed by changing the direction of the rotation drive. Since the frequency at which the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis depends on the rotation speed of the second rotating member A728, the variation in the change in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 depends on the resolution (switchable number) of the rotation speed of the second rotating member A728.

Naturally, there is an allowable limit to the rotational speed of the second rotating member A728, and this allowable limit determines the limit of variation in the change in the light emission mode. However, in this embodiment, the second rotating member A728 can be switched between operating and stopping by changing the rotation direction. Therefore, even if the rotational speed is the same, by changing the rotation direction, the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be changed.

Therefore, when the first rotating member A721 or the second rotating member A728 rotates only in one direction, or when the effect on light does not change even if the rotation direction is changed (for example, when the second rotating member A7
In the case where there is no rotatable member A721, or when only the rotation direction of the first rotatable member A721 is changed, the second rotatable member A72
Compared to the case where rotation is maintained (e.g., 8), the change in visibility of the light reaching the central rotating member A724 can be doubled, thereby increasing the variety in how the central rotating member A724 appears.

The appearance of the central rotating member A724 will be described in detail. As described above, the central rotating member A724 maintains a posture in which the member front surface A724F faces the front side, and the member front surface A724
Repeat the action of flipping F upside down.

Therefore, when the central rotating member A724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding the speed at which an afterimage occurs (e.g., 20 rps) without being able to be tracked as a still image, the central rotating member A724 is visually recognized as if it were a combination of an upside-down shape of the member front surface A724F when viewed from the front. That is, the central rotating member A724 formed in the present embodiment as a star shape having five corners is visually recognized as a star shape having ten corners.

In this embodiment, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 is formed to have a vertically asymmetric shape, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the member front surface A724F of the central rotating member A724 may be formed to have a vertically symmetric shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape that is visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (a shape formed by combining vertically inverted shapes) and the shape of the member front surface A724F, the central rotating member A724 can be visually recognized as if it were stationary.

Also, for example, a distinctive shape or figure may be formed on either the top or bottom of the rotation axis of the central rotating member A724, and this shape or figure may be inverted upside down and combined to evoke a different concept.

For example, by drawing an equilateral triangular shape on the member front surface A724F above the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724 so that one side of the shape overlaps with the rotation axis in a front view, the central rotation member A724 can be rotated in a straight line.
When the 24 is rotated, the equilateral triangles combine above and below to form a diamond shape, and by drawing the hiragana character "tsu" (figure) on the front face A724F of the component above the axis of rotation of the central rotating component A724 with its bottom end overlapping the axis of rotation when viewed from the front, when the central rotating component A724 is rotated, the inverted shapes combine above and below to form the number "3" (figure). This allows for the execution of an unexpected effect.

In Figure 382, an example of a performance using the second action unit A700 is described.
FIG. 382 is a front view of the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720.
In the state where the performance unit A710 is placed in the extended position (see FIG. 321), that is, the third
The figure shows a state in which a ring-shaped front cover A711 and a rotating body A720 are arranged on the front side of the pattern display device 81.

In FIG. 382, the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 are in the second state (FIG. 381
(a) is shown, and in the area on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728, inside the annular front cover A711 (inside the circular opening), an image displayed by the third pattern display device 81 is shown.

That is, the rotating second rotating member A728V is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This allows the player to visually recognize the second rotating member A728 as if it were rotating even when the second rotating member A728 is stopped.

In addition, the means for displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display is not limited to the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side of the second rotating member A728. For example, a transparent liquid crystal may be arranged on the front side of the second rotating member A728, and the second rotating member A728 may be displayed rotating on the transparent liquid crystal, an illumination plate may be arranged on the front side or back side of the second rotating member A728, and the figure formed on the illumination plate may be combined with the image of the third pattern display device 81 to be visually recognizable as the second rotating member A728V on the display, or a combination of a plurality of display means including these means may be used to display the second rotating member A728V on the display.

When light is irradiated from the light-emitting means A715a of the illumination board A715 in this state, the player predicts the type of light presentation when the second rotating member A728 is in the rotating state, but the light presentation can be executed in the state when the second rotating member A728 is in the stopped state, so that a highly unexpected presentation can be executed.

This is not limited to the state where the performance unit A710 of the second operating unit A700 is stopped at the extended position, but also applies while the performance unit A710 is moving up and down. For example, the performance unit A710 is configured so that the third pattern display device 81 cannot be seen through the left and right positions of the rotating body A720 in the retreated position (see FIG. 3).
On the other hand, in the extended position, the third symbol display device 8 is
1 can be seen (see FIG. 321).

That is, in response to the rising operation of the performance unit A710 toward the extended position, the annular front cover A711 on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728
The display area of the third symbol display device 81, which is visually recognized through the area inside (the inside of the circular opening), gradually widens. By displaying the second rotating member A728V on the display described above in this gradually visually recognized area of the third symbol display device 81, when the performance unit A710 is controlled to perform the upward operation with the second rotating member A728 stopped, the player is informed of the second rotating member A728V.
It is possible to implement a performance that makes the viewer feel as if 728 has started rotating at some point (an optical illusion can be used to create the performance).

In this case, when the performance unit A710 is raised, the outer shape of the rotating body A720 that is visible to the player can be kept the same when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped, while when light is irradiated from the light emitting means A715a, the light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotating body A720 that is visible to the player can be changed when the second rotating member A728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A728 is stopped. This allows for a highly unexpected performance.

Next, the 23rd embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 383. In the 22nd embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A728 passes through the optical axis KJ of the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a was described, but in the 23rd embodiment, the member passing through the optical axis KJ is configured as a sliding member A2729 that moves in parallel in the front-rear direction. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 383 is a top schematic diagram showing the first rotating member A2721 in the 23rd embodiment. As shown in Fig. 383, the sliding member A2729 is configured to be slidable between a rear side position intersecting with the imaginary plane VS and a front side position not intersecting with the imaginary plane VS.

Therefore, even if the sliding member A2729 is disposed at a position intersecting with the optical axis KJ at the rear side position, the intersection with the optical axis KJ can be eliminated by moving it to the front side position, and it is possible to change the way in which light reaches the first rotating member A2721. And, since the movement of the sliding member A2729 is a sliding movement in the front-to-rear direction, it is possible to make it difficult for a player viewing the sliding member A2729 from the front side to understand that the sliding member A2729 is moving.

That is, while maintaining (leaving) the shapes (outer shapes) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 in a front view, it is possible to change the presentation mode (lighting manner) of the first rotating member A2721 when the LEDs or the like constituting the light-emitting means A715a are turned on. This makes it possible to create a surprising presentation without controlling the LEDs to be turned on.

The material of the slide member A2729 is not limited in any way. For example, the slide member A2729 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material, a light-opaque resin material, or a metal material.

Next, the twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the pin gear A46
In the above description, the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 of the second embodiment is formed in an arc shape along the movement path of the transmission protrusion A463. However, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin gear A3462 is formed by a plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3462 that protrude radially outward from the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 and have a semicircular cross section.
464. The same components as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

Fig. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in Fig. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the circumferential length of the arc wall portion A464 into approximately five equal parts in rear view.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the long holes (the first long hole A422a, the second long hole A422b, the displacement side long hole A453, and the transmission side long hole A454) formed to displace the first displacement member A440 are
4) is formed to be longer than in the twenty-second embodiment, so that the first displacement member A440 is configured to be displaceable beyond the displacement end on the protruding position side in the twenty-second embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the irregular slide member A455 abuts against the arc wall portion A464, and the movement is restricted, so that the first displacement member A440 stops at the extended position. When the pin gear A3462 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 contacts the protruding plate portion A4
Each time it comes into contact with 56a, the irregular slide member A455 is pushed toward the upper right from the state shown in FIG. 384, causing the long link A451 to rotate and the first displacement member A440 to be displaced to the left from the extended position.

As a result, at the timing when the second displacement member A490 is displaced (see FIG. 360 ),
The first displacement member A440 can be configured to be displaced.

In addition, in Fig. 384, the sizes of the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are shown randomly, but this is not limited to this. For example, they may all be protruding with the same size, or outer diameter protrusions A3464 of different sizes may be formed. In this case, they do not all need to be different sizes.

In this embodiment, the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 closer to the transmission protrusion A463 are formed larger than the two outer diameter protrusions A3464 farther from the transmission protrusion A463.
When the pin gear A3462 continues to rotate after the first displacement member A40 reaches the extended position, the displacement caused by the contact between the outer projection A3464 and the irregular slide member A455 is smaller in the latter two times than in the former two times.
It is possible to make it appear as if the displacement of 440 (small reciprocating displacement) gradually subsides.

From this viewpoint, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be formed so as to become smaller as it moves away from the transmission protrusion A463 along the arc wall portion A464, or vice versa. This makes it possible to perform an effect in which the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocating minute displacement) of the first displacement member A440 gradually changes.

Also, a recessed portion recessed radially inward from the arc wall portion A464 may be formed at the location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed. In this case, contrary to the description in the 24th embodiment, each time the recessed portion is disposed opposite to the protruding plate portion A456a, the irregular slide member A455 is pulled back in the lower left direction from the state shown in Fig. 384 by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1, and the long link A451 rotates accordingly, so that the first displacement member A440 can be displaced to the right (toward the retracted position) from the protruding position.

In addition, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is set to the first operation unit A400, A400A, A
The first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D (see FIG. 319) may be different (shifted).
, A400D are synchronized (the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 start to operate at the same timing), the timing at which the first displacement member A440 is displaced can be made different in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, in a control mode in which the drive motors AMT1 are excited simultaneously,
The timing of the displacement (micro displacement) occurring in the first displacement member A440 in relation to the outer diametrical protrusion A3464 can be shifted by a predetermined displacement width determined by the arrangement of the outer diametrical protrusion A3464.

For example, each of the first operating units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A40
The timing at which each of the first displacement members A440 of the 1st displacement member ...
The timing of occurrence of the displacement (micro displacement) occurring in the first displacement member A440 in relation to 464 is expressed as follows:
The signals can be adjusted to be generated in sequence in a clockwise direction starting from the first operating unit A400 located at the lower left when viewed from the front.

This makes it easier to guide the line of sight of the player who is paying attention to the displacement of the first displacement member A440 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Also, as described above, the state of the light viewed through the long hole A412a (see FIG. 320) can be changed in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440, so that the line of sight of the player who is viewing the light can be easily guided in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front. For example, a performance suggesting a right hit, which is executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like during a big win game (special game), can be performed by utilizing the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440.

Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the first displacement member A44
In the above description, the case where the decorative member A4550 is displaced toward the rear side of the illumination board A416 has been described, but in the 25th embodiment, a decorative member A4550 is provided that is displaced toward the front side of the illumination board A416. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 385(a) shows the first operation unit A4400 in the 25th embodiment.
3a) is a cross-sectional view taken along a line corresponding to the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG.
85(b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit A4400 taken along a line corresponding to the line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 344(a).

As shown in FIG. 385(a) and FIG. 385(b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate portion A4551 that is displaceably disposed on the front side of the front cover A410, and a main body portion A411.
The front cover A410 has a pair of guided portions A4552 that are guided by long holes A4411b that are drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x on the side surface of the front cover A410, and these are integrally connected and fixed to a pair of connecting arms A4553 formed on the outside of the front cover A410.

Since the pair of guided portions A4552 are both inserted into the long holes A4411b,
The guided portion A4552 is only allowed to move along the long hole A4411b. This makes it possible to suppress changes in the posture of the decorative plate portion A4551. In other words, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to sliding displacement in a direction parallel to the direction A416x, which is the extension direction of the long hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 is provided with a pair of protrusions A4442g protruding toward the front side from the left and right ends of the interlocking plate portion A4442, and apart from this, the first displacement member A4440 has the same configuration as the first displacement member A440.

In this embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed to protrude inward from the front cover A410 to a position where it can come into contact with the protruding portion A4442g in the displacement direction.
During displacement of the first displacement member A4440, the decorative member A4550 moves in conjunction with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the protruding portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 come into contact with each other.

The interlocking plate portion A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced with a change in posture during the displacement of the guided plate portion A441.
The position of the protrusion A4442g is set so that the protrusion A4442g can enter between the protrusions A4442g.
As a result, the decorative member A455 moves in conjunction with the forward and backward displacement of the first displacement member A4440.
0 can be displaced in both forward and backward directions (both left and right directions in FIG. 385(a)).

According to this embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is disposed on the front side of the front cover A410, it is possible to configure the timing for hiding the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551.
This makes it possible to physically block the light traveling through the through hole A412.

In addition, the first displacement member A4440 that is hidden on the rear side of the front cover A410 in the extended position
Unlike the above, the decorative plate portion A4551 is always positioned so that it can be seen by the player without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 can be used as a means for solving the problem that the openings A442c of the first displacement member A4440 are configured in different shapes for each first operating unit A4400, and are configured to have a continuous meaning in the retracted position, but cannot be seen by the player in the continuous meaning in the hidden protruding position, while it is difficult to create a sense of unity in the light emission mode.

That is, by configuring the shape and the drawn figure of the decorative plate portion A4551 of each first operating unit A4440 in the same manner, the first displacement member A4440 is disposed in the protruding position and the front cover A41
The decorative plate portion A4551 can create a sense of unity between each of the first operating units A4440 when they are hidden by the decorative plate portion A4551 (see Figure 385 (b)).

Furthermore, light-emitting means A445b can be arranged in advance at similar positions on the first displacement members A4440 of the multiple first operating units A4400, at positions that are visible through the through holes A412 when the first displacement members A4440 are positioned in the extended position, and the light-emitting means A445b can be turned on simultaneously in the multiple first operating units A4400 when the first displacement members A4440 are hidden as described above, thereby achieving a unified light-emitting effect.

In this embodiment, the long hole A4411b is formed by utilizing the gap area (the area on the side of the retracted position of the first displacement member A4440) secured by the absence of the illumination board A416. That is, the space created by limiting the range in which the illumination board A416 is formed is filled with the decorative member A4550.
This space can be effectively used to place a structure for realizing the displacement.

The range in which the decorative member A4550 can be displaced is limited to the range in which the long holes A4411b are formed.
That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the illumination board A416 can be the range in which not only the first displacement member A4440 but also the decorative member A4550 can be displaced. Therefore, in the range where the illumination board A416 is not formed (the corresponding range when viewed from the front), the number of displaceable members can be increased.

In addition, a change in posture (displacement in the front-back direction) occurs in the first displacement member A4440 before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550. Therefore, in the range where the illumination board A416 is not formed (the corresponding range when viewed from the front), the displacement amount (displacement amount in the front-back direction) of the first displacement member A4440 can be secured large.

The form of the decorative member A4550 is not limited in any way. For example, it may be made of a light-transmitting resin material, or may be made of a resin material with low light transmittance, and LEDs or an electric board may be disposed inside. Also, a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction may be formed in the decorative member A4550. This allows the light irradiated from the electric board A416 to be visible through the through hole.

Next, a twenty-sixth embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 386. In the twenty-second embodiment, the arc wall portion A464 is rotationally displaced along the displacement trajectory of the transmitting protrusion A463, so that the transmitting protrusion A463 can be moved in the irregular slide member A455 even after the transmitting protrusion A463 is separated from the irregular slide member A455.
In the above embodiment, the displacement of the rotor 5 is restricted, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the displacement is not limited to rotation. The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

386(a) and 386(b) are front views of the displacement device A5000 in the 26th embodiment. Fig. 386(a) illustrates a state in which the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000 is in the middle of displacement, and Fig. 386(b) illustrates a state in which the displacement member A5001 is disposed at the displacement end.

The displacement device A5000 is configured to be slidable along a straight line and is biased by a biasing member (
A displacement member A5001 biased to the left by a coil spring or the like, and the displacement member A5
A transmission member A5002 to which a driving force for displacing the shaft along the displacement direction of the shaft 001 is transmitted, a supported member A5003 which is rotatably supported at an end of the transmission member A5002, and a thin-walled portion A5003 which is extended from both ends of the supported member A5003 to one side in the rotation direction and which is connected to each other.
A roller member A5005 is disposed at the end of the supported member A5003 opposite to the end of the supported member A5003 that is supported by the shaft, and guide grooves A5006 and A5007 in which the roller member A5005 is guided.
It is equipped with 007.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 are first grooves extending in the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.
The first region A5006 is configured with a second region A5007 that deviates from the end of the first region A5006 in the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.
Although 5007 is configured to have an arc shape, it is sufficient if the shape deviates with respect to the displacement direction of the displacement member A 5001, and is not limited to an arc shape.

The following describes the operation of the displacement device 5000. While the roller member A5005 is guided in the first region A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed toward the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386(a)).

On the other hand, when the roller member A5005 is guided through the second region A5007 of the guide groove (see Figure 386 (b)), the point of contact with the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin portion A5004, and in this state, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 to the left can be regulated.

The roller member A5005 rotates the outer shape of the thin portion A5004 in the second region A50 of the guide groove.
The position of the displacement member A 5001 is kept unchanged in at least one section while the displacement member A 5007 is being displaced (
By configuring the displacement member A5001 so that the abutment position of the displacement member A5001 remains unchanged regardless of the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 during displacement of the force receiving member A5003 can be restricted within the above-mentioned one section.

Furthermore, if the thin-walled portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to be crushed toward the supported member A5003, the displacement member A5001 can be maintained at a position where the repulsive force of the deformed thin-walled portion A5004 and the biasing force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. This makes it possible to suppress displacement of the displacement member A5001 even after the contact between the supported member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released.

Next, a twenty-seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 387 and 388.
In the embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening portion A475 and supported so as not to fall off from the fastening portion A475 has been described.
In the following, a case will be described in which the wiring HC is supported so as to be relatively displaceable by the wiring guide member A6560 which is supported so as to be displaceable relative to the wiring guide member A6560. Note that the same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

387(a), 387(b) and 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the 27th embodiment. In FIG. 387(a), the second displacement member A490 is disposed in the retracted position, in FIG. 388, the second displacement member A490 is disposed in the extended position, in FIG.
387(b) illustrates a state in which the second displacement member A490 is disposed at an intermediate position (a position rotated by about 45 degrees) between the retracted position and the extended position. In addition, in Fig. 387(a), Fig. 387(b) and Fig. 388, the rear plate portion A480 is omitted from the illustration in order to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in Figures 387(a), 387(b) and 388, in this embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see Figure 356) is not formed, and instead the wiring guide member A6560 is supported between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480 (see Figure 359).

The upper end of the wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported by at least one of the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. In this embodiment, the rear plate portion A480 is fixed in a state where a support protrusion A6471d that is cylindrical and protrudes from the rear side of the support box portion A6470 is inserted into a through hole drilled in the upper end of the wiring guide member A6560.
0 is pivotally supported by the supporting protrusion A6471d so as not to fall off.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in a long plate shape and comprises a main body plate portion A6561 arranged opposite the back surface of the support box portion A6470 with a gap therebetween, and a plurality of protrusion portions A6562 protruding from the lower end and middle portion of the main body plate portion A6561 toward the front side (the support box portion A6470 side).

The main body plate portion A6561 is disposed adjacent to the rear plate portion A480.
Since the space in front of the wiring HC can be increased, a large space can be secured for arranging the wiring HC, thereby preventing the wiring HC from being subjected to an unnecessary load.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from rubbing against the rear plate portion A480. In particular, in this embodiment, the wiring HC is guided toward the rear side (the rear plate portion A480 side) by the protrusion portion A491d2 and the cable tie KB, and the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed in a position between them (a position sandwiching the wiring HC in the left-right direction), so that the main body plate portion A6561 can be disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate portion A480,
This effectively prevents friction between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480.

Furthermore, by setting the portion where the wiring HC is pressed against the rear plate A480 at a position where it overlaps with the main plate A6561, it is possible to easily create a situation where the main plate A6561 displaces in a direction along the displacement of the wiring HC in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. In this case, the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main plate A6561 can be reduced, so that the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, wear of the wiring HC can be prevented, and the durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

The displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 387(a), the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed at the limit position on the side of the retracted position. In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), the second displacement member A490 starts to displace, but since the displacement of the board side connector A493c in the left-right direction is small and the displacement in the up-down direction is large, the displacement of the wiring HC occurs mainly in the up-down direction. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the position shown in FIG. 387(a).

In the state shown in FIG. 387(b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC causes the upper protrusion A
That is, the protruding portion A 6562 can function as a portion that regulates the vertical displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, the displacement of the board side connector A493c occurs mainly in the left-right direction, and the wiring HC is also displaced in the left-right direction. Therefore, the wiring guide member A is pushed by the wiring HC.
In this case, the position of the wire HC is changed by the wire guide member A.
The lower limit of the displacement of the wire HC is determined by the lower protruding portion A6562.
This can prevent the liquid from entering (dripping) onto the side 18.

In this way, the portion around which the wiring HC is wound (the protruding portion A656 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561)
2) By configuring the arrangement to be changeable, the design length of the wiring HC can be made shorter compared to when the arrangement of the point where the wiring HC is wound is fixed (fastening portion A475, see Figure 356 (a)).

From another perspective, the policy of changing the arrangement of the portion around which the wiring HC is wound (the protruding portion A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561) is that, when displacing from FIG. 387(a) to FIG. 387(b), the board side connector A493c is displaced in a manner approaching the protruding portion A6552 (the wiring H
387(b) to the protruding portion A6552 side), the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced to the side where it is loosened, while the displacement from FIG. 387(b) to FIG.
The board side connector A493c is displaced away from the protruding portion A6552 (the wiring HC is
387 (b), the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced toward the tightening side.
) and FIG. 388.

For this reason, when the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 is displaced toward the tightening side, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC toward the tightening side (
It can be said that the wiring HC is configured to be displaceable in the direction of the protrusion A6552 (displacement of the wiring HC toward the direction of expanding the wiring HC). This makes it possible to prevent the radius of curvature of the curve of the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protrusion A6552 from becoming excessively small, and makes it possible to prevent excessive deformation (bending, chipping, etc.) of the wiring HC.

According to this embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 that is not connected to the second displacement member A490
is displaced with the displacement of the wiring HC. For this reason, for example, by disposing a decorative member that is interlocked with the wiring guide member A6560 and is arranged so that the player can see it in any of the states of Fig. 387(a), Fig. 387(b), or Fig. 388 (for example, configured to be able to protrude to the third pattern display device 81 side (the right side of Fig. 387(a))), it is possible to perform a performance with the decorative member that is displaced with the displacement of the wiring HC.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wiring guide member A6560 are not completely linked, but the wiring guide member A6560 is stopped while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position, and is configured so that the wiring guide member A6560 displaces when the second displacement member A490 rotates further (as the timing of the displacement is staggered), so that it can be visually perceived as if the decorative member is displacing independently of the second displacement member A490.

For convenience of explanation, the wiring HC is illustrated as being wound once (the wiring passes between a pair of protruding portions A6562 twice), but the present invention is not limited to this.
The wiring HC may be configured to pass between 65 and 62 only once (without being wound).

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above form in any way, and it can be easily inferred that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope that does not deviate from the spirit of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or substituted for a part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 310 is pushed down, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tilting device 310 may be in the initial position when hanging down, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, the force that returns the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be provided by gravity, so the torsion spring 3
15 may be unnecessary.

In the above first embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilt device 310 has moved to the end of the depression, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance when the tilt device 310 is in the first state. In this case, the load required to press the tilt device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for presentation (for example, a "button that cannot be pressed" presentation can be performed).

In this case, it is preferable to arrange the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 in such a dimensional relationship that a slight gap is created between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320 even when the voice coil motor 352 moves to the end of its motion (the end of the extending motion). This makes it possible to suppress the impact sound of the voice coil motor 352 colliding with the lower frame member 320 during operation of the voice coil motor 352. This makes it possible to prevent the player from realizing that the voice coil motor 352 has already extended out, and makes it possible for the player to realize that the button is in the "button cannot be pressed in" state only after the tilting device 310 is pressed in.

In the above-mentioned first embodiment, the engaging rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connecting pin 344d are fixed relative to each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the engaging rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in the state where the first protruding portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, so that the degree to which the tilting device 310 rises can be changed immediately after the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rotation direction from that state to change the attitude of the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, it is possible to form more operating states of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 than in the first embodiment.

In addition, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be switched sequentially (the ascent end can be switched sequentially) by the driving mode that continues to rotate the disk cam 344 in the forward rotation direction. This makes it possible to perform a complex operation mode in which the ascent position of the tilting device 310 is switched sequentially while suppressing deterioration of the drive motor 342 by operating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 that applies a driving force to the tilting device 310
In the above description, the operation timing of the tilt device 310 is controlled by the operation speed and the operation direction of the tilt device 310, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the driving mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotates the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed and the operation direction of the tilt device 310. For example, the tilt device 310 may continue to rotate until it reaches the end of the push-in (
The drive motor 5411 may be fixed in a position where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis while the tilt device 310 is moving downward, and the rotation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before the tilt device 310 reaches the end of the push-in and starts to move upward. In this case, the repulsive force pushing back the tilt device 310 can be reduced while the tilt device 310 is being pushed down when the tilt device 310 is repeatedly struck, while the repulsive force pushing back the tilt device 310 can be increased when the tilt device 310 starts to move upward.

In the above-described fifth embodiment, the case where the accommodation member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the accommodation member 543
Alternatively, the tilt device 31 may be fixed and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside the tilt device 31.
When the storage member 5430 is fixed to the storage member 5430, for example, the protruding leg portion 5424 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321.
By placing the flexible member 5420 on the side opposite the housing member 5430 and configuring the protruding leg portion 5424 to be pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved downward to the end of the push-in period, the shape of the flexible member 5420 within the vibration device 5400 can be changed, thereby switching whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut against the housing member 5430.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the storage member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, a change in shape of the flexible member 5420 occurs. Since the degree of change in shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 can be increased by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or higher, and a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts against the storage member 5430 can be formed. In other words, the player can feel vibration not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, so that the variety of effects for making the player operate the tilting device 310 can be increased.

For example, when the player is to operate the tilting device 310, the third symbol display device 81 displays "Press the button.", but by adding a display such as "Press the button. Press it quickly, and if you feel a vibration, it's your big chance," it is possible to specify how the player should press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether the player presses the button (tilting device 310) in the specified way is set as the condition for transmitting vibration to the player.
This can increase the player's motivation to operate the button (tilt device 310) in the specified pressing manner, and can prevent the operation of the button (tilt device 310) from becoming monotonous.

The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be inverse to the magnitude relationship with the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. In other words, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is slow, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 becomes large, and the weight member 5412 and the containing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can come into contact with each other. In this case, a slow pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be set as a condition for transmitting vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 to the player, and the player can be recommended to slow down the pushing speed of the tilting device 310.
This makes it possible to restrain the player from operating the tilting device 310 by pushing it with excessive force, and to prevent malfunctions caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with excessive force.

In the above fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the player can feel the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 by pushing in the tilt device 310, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 is arranged so as to be able to abut against the housing member 5430 when the tilt device 310 is not pushed in,
The tilting device 310 may be formed in such a manner that the weight member 5412 cannot come into contact with the housing member 5430 on the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end of its movement.
When the button 0 is not being operated, vibrations can be transmitted to the player to liven up the presentation,
The vibration stops when the button is pressed, allowing the player to change the presentation mode (
Since the player can recognize the difference in the degree of expectation, only the player playing the machine can sense the change in the presentation mode, excluding the surrounding players, creating a sense of premium.

As a variation of the presentation, the player may push the tilting device 310 to place the weight member 5412 and the storage member 5430 in a position where they cannot come into contact with each other, or the weight member 5412 may be placed in a position where they cannot come into contact with each other.
It is desirable to generate both a case where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are in a position where they can be in continuous contact with each other, and this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the two different cases can be generated by changing the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

In the fifth embodiment, the disk cam 5344 is deformed by axial inclination, so that the disk cam 53
In the above description, the frictional force is generated by the contact between the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the plate portion of the main body member 341 in which the shaft support hole 341b is formed may be configured to partially protrude in a direction approaching the disc cam 5344 and to contact the disc cam 5344 when the disc cam 5344 is deformed by axial inclination. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a moving part, it is possible to ensure a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346, compared to the case in which the disc cam 5344 and the movable release member 346 contact each other. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the above eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one of the top and bottom board surface support devices 600 may be configured to be able to abut against the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, a portion of the multi-function cover member 171 that interferes with the board surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to abut against the board surface support device 600 arranged at the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when the game board 13 is attached to the board surface support device 600,
In the above description, the vertical position of the board 13 does not change, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support bottom 12c supporting the lower end surface of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the front side, and the front side end of the support bottom 12c is inclined toward the front side of the game board 13.
The rear side extension plate 621c may be arranged below the upper surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board support device 600 in the released state. In this case, when the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 from there, the game board 13 can be made to ride up onto the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be made lower than the height at which the game board 13 is fixed, so that the efficiency of the work of fixing the game board 13 can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent forward and backward, or may be a combination of forward, backward, left and right bends. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
It is preferable to form a long path in the front-to-rear direction directly behind 3, because this allows the ball to be discharged more smoothly. Also, by forming a path that bends back and forth, the range of foul ball passage 145 along the surface of game board 13 can be narrowed, making it easier to prevent interference between the launch path and foul ball passage 145.

In the eighth embodiment, the light guide member 540 is curved so that the portion facing the opening 524 is concave. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example,
The position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is faintly visible. In addition, the light guiding member 540 does not need to be curved from top to bottom, and for example, curved parts and straight extending parts may be mixed at the top and bottom.

In the above eighth embodiment, the case where the passage forming ribs 467, 487 form a passage that bends up and down has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of the passage bending may be left and right, or a combination of up, down, left and right.

In the above eighth embodiment, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts against the inner surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi are in contact with each other, the rear side wall 461H
The speaker connection wire 453 may be spaced apart from the speaker connection wire 453 in the thickness direction.
Since the speaker connection wire 453 can be sandwiched and held between the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha and the inner surface 461Hi, even if a load is applied to the speaker connection wire 453 in a direction in which it is pulled outward from the speaker assembly 450 due to the resistance of the sandwiching, the speaker connection wire 453 can be held in place.
53 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451.

Also, the auxiliary protrusion 481Ha may be configured so that, within a range of protruding length corresponding to the recess depth of the wire passing recess 464, it abuts against the inner surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall 461H, while within a range of protruding length greater than this, it has a step midway so as to be separated from the inner surface 461Hi in the thickness direction of the rear side wall 461H by approximately the diameter of the speaker connection wire 453. In this case, a sufficient range is secured in which the rear side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H form a double wall, and the speaker connection wire 453 can be clamped while suppressing sound leakage.

In the above eighth embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 is described as constituting a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T correspond to a speaker room and the intermediate body portion 461M corresponds to a duct, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the front-rear width of the intermediate body portion 461M to be equal to that of the base end side body portion 461B and the tip end side body portion 461T, the base end side body portion 461B and the intermediate body portion 461
The speaker unit 461M and the tip side main body portion 461T may be configured together to form a large speaker chamber.

In addition, although the base end side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the tip end side main body portion 461T in the above description, the volume relationship may be reversed, or the two may be configured to have the same volume.
The location of 1 is not limited to the left or right end, but may be the center in the left or right direction, or may be a position between the left or right end and the center in the left or right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, the rib portions 467a to 487 constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 are
Although the case has been described where adjacent rib portions among 67e, 487a to 487e do not overlap when viewed in the left-right direction (the direction connecting base end main body portion 461B and tip end main body portion 461T, the direction intersecting the opening direction of the opening formed by front recessed portion 471 and rear recessed portion 491), this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, adjacent rib portions (e.g., rib portion 467d and rib portion 467c) may be configured to overlap when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, the internal path of speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze-like manner, so that, for example, front recessed portion 47
The opening formed by the recess 491 and the rear recess 492 makes it difficult to commit a fraudulent act of inserting a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the game area, and by lengthening the time required for such a fraudulent act, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts. Note that suppression of fraudulent acts here includes suppression of fraudulent acts themselves and obtaining a fraudulent benefit through fraudulent acts (successful fraudulent acts).
Examples include suppression of

In the above eighth embodiment, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 is linked to the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the intermediate gear 808 is connected to the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830,
G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose-fitting device 880 may be configured to mesh with each other. In this case,
Since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked, the loose fitting device 880 can be rotated not only during the rotational operation of the petal operation device 800, but also during the spreading operation and the gathering operation. This allows the radial sliding operation of the petals 802 and the rotational operation of the decorative member 884 to be performed simultaneously, improving the presentation effect.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the loose fitting device 880 may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotating plate 830, or may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the axis of rotation of the rotating plate 830.

In the above eighth embodiment, the second performance member 940 is operated by transmitting a driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides due to the operation of the driving side arm member 910, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second performance member 940 may be operated based on the displacement of the petal operation device 800 by connecting the upper part of the support base material 801 of the petal operation device 800 to the tip of the second performance member 940. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which when the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening/closing restricting portion 159, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 may be configured to abut in the front-rear direction above the opening/closing restricting portion 159. In this case, even if the lower board support device 600 is in a fixed state, if the upper board support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the upper end of the game board 13 will be displaced toward the front side (the right side of the game board 13 will tilt toward the front side), and the game board 13 arranged opposite the operation unit back member 155 will move away from the front side.
Since the portion is also displaced toward the front side, it is possible to cause interference between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13. This makes it possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed against the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed in the inner frame 12 and the board surface support device 600 arranged on the lower side of the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board surface support device 600 arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 is fixed.
Whether or not the board support device 600 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 arranged opposite the lower board support device 600 and the game board 13, and if the board support device 600 arranged on the upper side of the inner frame 12 is not in a fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing against the inner frame 12. This allows the function of determining the state of the board support device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 to be removed from the multi-function cover member 171, thereby improving the design freedom of the multi-function cover member 171. For example, the multi-function cover member 171 can be recessed to a position where it does not come into contact with the board support device 600 regardless of the state of the board support device 600 (
In this case, the multi-function cover member 171 made of synthetic resin may collide with the metallic board surface support device 600, so that the multi-function cover member 171
Since the risk of damage to the multi-functional cover member 171 can be reduced, the multi-functional cover member 171 can be used for other purposes (for example, as a wiring cover) for a long period of time.

In the eighth embodiment, the right panel unit 500, in which light irradiated onto the end face of the light-guiding member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light-guiding member 540, is disposed at the right end of the front frame 14 on the front side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be disposed inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, the right panel unit 500 may be configured to be switchable between a state in which one face of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side and a state in which the other face is disposed on the front side (for example, configured so that the right panel unit 500 rotates around an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510), thereby making it possible to switch the state of light irradiated onto the center frame 86. Also, the state of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 and the state of light irradiated onto the center frame 86 may be switched by configuring the right panel unit 500 to be switchable between a state in which one face of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side and a state in which the other face of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side (for example, configured so that the right panel unit 500 rotates around an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510).
By switching between the moving props that extend inward and the different movements, it is possible to diversify the presentation.

That is, for example, it is considered that only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the multiple openings 524 are illuminated, and the right panel unit 500 is switched between a state in which one surface is disposed on the front side and a state in which the other surface is disposed on the front side.
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving props, the moving props arranged opposite the part corresponding to the top opening 524 (the part near the edge) emit light, whereas when the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving props, the moving props arranged opposite over a wide area of the opening 565 (a wider area than the top opening 524) emit light. Therefore, the light-emitting part of the moving props can be switched by switching the position of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to be illuminated.

In this case, for example, the performance effect can be improved by operating the moving prop in accordance with the timing of the change in the light-emitting location. For example, the moving prop may be configured to contract and expand so that it fits into the location corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving prop, and expand (stretch) in the direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500 when the surface on the outer cover member 560 side faces the moving prop. This makes it possible to change the location of the light-emitting location according to the movement of the moving prop by switching the position of the right panel unit 500 without the need to switch the LED 512a that controls the light emission.

In addition, in the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is concentrated (brightness is high, the amount of light is large, and the light is clear), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is diffused (brightness is low, the amount of light is small, and the light is faint). Therefore, by switching the position of the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the light-emitting object (liquid crystal or moving object) can be easily changed.
The light emission mode can be changed.

Furthermore, by changing the orientation of the right panel unit 500 so that the front end 551 a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving props or liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is placed in front of the moving props or liquid crystal, the front end 551 a of the outer lens member 550 is placed on the rear side of the support plate portion 510), a beam-like (
While emitting light from a narrow beam (narrow width), it can emit light over a wide area in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving props and liquid crystal. This allows only the details of the moving props and liquid crystal to be illuminated, while illuminating a wide area away from the moving props and liquid crystal.

In the ninth and tenth embodiments, the foul ball passages 9145 and 10145
In the above description, the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 arranged in the slot 9150, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the sheet metal members may be so fragile that they are partially broken by the load from the thread Y8 and the broken parts fall, and the detection sensor may be arranged at a position through which the broken parts pass when they fall. In this case, by issuing an alarm and forcibly stopping the shot of the balls due to the detection of the sheet metal member by the detection sensor, it is possible to detect the cheating act early and to minimize the profits gained by the cheater through the cheating act (losses suffered by the gaming hall).

In the twelfth embodiment, the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving frictional force may be added. For example, a rubber sheet may be attached to the inclined surface 2803T to improve frictional force, or spike-shaped hard members (members harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be arranged to bite into the resin slit member 810 to improve the operating resistance.

In addition, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portions of the side slits 815 arranged opposite the inclined surface 2803T are
A recess may be formed to an extent that the inclined surface 2803T can fit in. In this case, the inclined surface 2803T can fit in the recess, thereby improving the operating resistance.

In the sixteenth embodiment, the light traveling direction is changed to a direction in which the light is gathered or spread by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light-guiding member 2540. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all of the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light-guiding member 2540 is changed to a direction in which the light is gathered or spread by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region CCVIb to CCVIe.
In all of the above, the light is inclined upward, so that it is easy to direct the light toward the eye level of people walking by to choose a machine to play. This can improve the customer attraction effect of the pachinko machine 8010.

In addition, for example, the regions CCVIc and CCVIc are regions that emit light to the inner lens member 530.
A downward concave portion 2543c may be formed in the area CCVIb, CCVId, which is an area for emitting light to the outer lens member 550, and an upward concave portion 2543b may be formed in the area CCVIb, CCVId, which is an area for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010 and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is in a direction that is inclined upward, so that the light can be easily made to travel toward the eye level of a person walking to select a machine to play, while the light traveling toward the player and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is in a direction that is inclined downward, so that, for example, the balls stored in the upper tray 17 can be illuminated with light to make the balls look glittering. Therefore, the interest of the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved while improving the customer attraction effect.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 are formed near the center of the left and right sides, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the positions may be changed in accordance with the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

In addition, both the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 for accommodating the operating load of the operating device 10300 and the front frame 10014 alone (
In order to meet requirements for ease of holding, durability, etc., a protruding portion 6413 and a recessed portion 6414 may be provided separately.

In the above 17th embodiment, the case where the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is arranged so as to be attachable (replaceable) above the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. That is, anything that can be attached (replaceable) may be used. For example, it may be an audio device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured so that it cannot be operated by the player and performs a vibration effect, an electric display board that performs a light-emitting effect, or an object that is not intended to be directly visually recognized by the player, such as a board box.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 are formed in a groove shape extending in the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the recessed portion and the protruding portion may be formed in a triangular or circular shape when viewed from above. In this case, a plurality of recessed portions and protruding portions may be formed, and the size of each recessed portion and protruding portion may be designed based on the amount of the operation load of the operation device 10300 that is directed or the frequency with which the load is applied.

In addition, multiple grooves may be formed even if they have the same groove shape. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while forming the grooves narrow, it is possible to achieve the same effect as when one wide groove is formed in terms of reducing the contact area with the operating device 10300. When multiple grooves are formed, each groove does not necessarily need to be aligned in the front-rear direction. For example,
The projections may be formed radially when viewed from above.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, the protruding portion 6413 is protruding downward from the outer shape of the front frame 10014, and can be used as a finger hook when carrying the front frame 10014. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-shaped support portion 6426 and the recessed portion 6414 may be formed to be longer in the vertical direction than the finger of a worker carrying the front frame 10014. In this case,
It is possible to insert fingers into the gap between front frame 10014 (which can be used as a finger hook), making front frame 10014 easy to carry.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, the resin member 6427 is disposed below the operating device 10300 to reduce the transmission of the load of the operating device 10300, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a member that generates an elastic biasing force (coil spring, torsion spring, etc.) or a device for vibration control such as a damper may be used.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have poor flexibility or resilience, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the operating device 10300 from being transmitted to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the lever member 10340 is rotated around the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor, but various modes of the drive motor are exemplified. For example, the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 from a rotating gear rotated by the drive motor by a load transmission of a simple gear mechanism, or a mechanism other than a gear mechanism (e.g., a rotating cam) may be interposed in the transmission path to transmit the load to the lever member 10340, or the load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 by a movable clutch 343c and a transmission gear 343b.
0340 may be configured to be able to rotate freely when an overload occurs by transmitting a load to the rotor 0340.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in a direction perpendicular to the plane on which the load is applied during operation of the operation device 10300, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when an operation part that does not move on the plane is arranged (for example, when there is an operation part that pushes in a diagonal direction to the left or right), a direction (for example, a middle angle direction) found as a balance (average) of the operation directions of each operation part may be set as the fastening direction, or the fastening direction may be set for an operation part that is frequently instructed to operate (ignoring an operation part that is rarely instructed to operate). This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening due to the load during operation.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are combined by fastening, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be combined with an adhesive, or may be combined by fitting together based on matching shapes.

In the above-mentioned 17th embodiment, the case where the direction in which the rigidity of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is high (the direction along the up and down) and the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 are aligned have been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 may be the left and right direction. In this case, the shape of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the generation of vibration of the vibration device 10366, so that it is possible to perform a performance in which the design around the operation device 10300 is dynamically changed when vibration is generated. In addition, the form of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, it may be a linear type represented by a voice coil motor, or a rotary type represented by a vibrator, or a combination of them.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed from a transparent resin material instead of an opaque resin. In this case, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be configured to be irradiated with light from a predetermined irradiation device.
The appearance of light viewed through the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be changed by changing the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which bending can be easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 by forming the left and right muscle parts D24a with different inclinations, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by making the inclination angles of the left and right muscle parts D24a the same regardless of the position, it is possible to increase the difference in the degree of rigidity between the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle parts D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened relative to that direction.

In this case, for example, by forming the left and right muscle parts D24a in the direction along the direction Y17a, it is possible to suppress the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is positioned in the upward position, while at the same time increasing the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is positioned in the downward position.
The degree of deflection of the 0322 can be varied.

Conversely, the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed may be along the direction Y17b.
In this case, when the swing operation member 10310 is placed in the downward position, the vibration device 1036
The vibration device 10366 generates a vibration when the swing operation member 10310 is located in the upward position, and the vibration of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 generated by the vibration device 10366 is suppressed.
In other words, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be made different.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 may be integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be attached to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324.
In this case, when assembling to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled due to the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and after the subsequent assembling to the front frame 10014, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed, thereby making it possible to effectively suppress displacement due to interference between the protruding interference portion 6805a and the inner edge portion Rm1.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 abuts against the plate-shaped support portion 6426 from above and below, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction may be formed at the position of the plate-shaped protrusion 6453R, and the fastening screw may be inserted into an insertion hole formed in a plate portion that extends above the plate-shaped support portion 6426 in correspondence with the fastening portion. In this case, the plate-shaped support portion 642
Not only during the upward displacement of 6, but also during the downward displacement, the load that is the basis of the displacement is applied to the V-shaped design member 645
0, and the load can be distributed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 has a gap between the main body 6451 and the upper opposing portions 6455b and 6456b, and the dimensions of the gap between the main body 6451 and the upper opposing portions 6455b and 6456b are set to be smaller than the dimensions of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted.
In the above description, the covers 10321 and 10322 are formed to a thickness that allows them to fit together (a dimensional relationship that leaves almost no gap) with respect to the thickness of the cover 10321. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the thickness of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be configured to be shorter than the gap (a dimensional relationship that leaves a gap between the members during assembly may be configured). In this case, if the displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (the displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, it is possible to prevent the covers 10321 and 10322 from coming into contact (colliding) with the V-shaped design member 6450, thereby suppressing the generation of powder (dust).

In the seventeenth embodiment, the flange portion 6582 is formed in a flat plate shape, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flange portion 6582 may be formed in a hook-shaped cross section protruding downward from the front side edge of the flange portion 6582, and the opposing plate portion 6560 of the partition member 6560 may be formed in a hook-shaped cross section.
The partition member 6560 may be formed in a shape that fits the partition member 6561, so that they fit together when assembled. In this case, the partition member 6560 may be positioned in the assembled state position, and the partition member 6561 may be formed in a shape that fits together with the partition member 6561, so that they fit together when assembled.
60 can be prevented from moving away from the rear support member 6580 toward the front side.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the opposing side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined relative to the front-rear direction in cross section, but the key point is that the distance between them increases toward the front side, and this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only one of the two side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed in a curved shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the transparent covering member 654 is made of a colorless and transparent resin material.
In the above description, the color of the milky white member 6541 and the partition member 6560 arranged behind the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 is made visible to a player viewing the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546, so that the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a and the lower edge of the box-shaped light receiving portion 6546 can be easily viewed as a continuous area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the transparent covering member 6548 may be formed by two-color molding to form the lower edge plate-shaped portion 6548a in advance in milky white color.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, the plate guide unit 6550 is fastened with a fastening screw having a fastening direction that slopes downward as it approaches the front side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the plate guide unit 6550 may be fastened with a fastening screw having a fastening direction that slopes downward as it approaches the rear side. This fastening direction can be set arbitrarily depending on the arrangement space required by the parts arranged near the fastening position and the side on which displacement is to be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a compressive force is generated between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 in association with the deformation of the top cover member 6510, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the partition member 6560 may be configured in such a manner that its front-to-rear width can be changed, and the degree of the compressive force that can be generated in association with the deformation of the top cover member 6510 may be changed.

That is, if the partition member 6560 is driven to shorten its front-to-rear width in such a manner that the rear edge of the partition member 6560 is displaced toward the front side, a gap can still be generated between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 even if the upper cover member 6510 is deformed, and compressive force can be made difficult to occur. Since compressive force is made difficult to occur, the degree to which the illumination board 6570 is held can be reduced, and therefore, in a situation in which the upper cover member 6510 is similarly deformed, the degree of displacement of the illumination board 6570 can be changed.

In other words, by controlling the front-to-rear width of the partition member 6560, the behavior of the illuminated board 6570 in a situation where deformation of the top cover member 6510 may occur can be changed, and similarly, the appearance of the light irradiated to the front side of the illuminated board 6570 can be changed.

In addition, the front-to-rear width of the partition member 6560 may be kept short under normal circumstances (leaving a gap between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580), and the front-to-rear width may be expanded by drive control, thereby changing the situation so that a compressive force can be generated between the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the partition member 6560 and the rear support member 6580 that sandwich and support the illumination board 6570 are stacked on the front side of the front frame 10014. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
580, or the illumination board 6570 may be disposed below the partition member 6560 (sound device 6
610) or the illumination board 6570 may be fastened to the partition member 6
560. In either case, the acoustic device 6610 can be prevented from transmitting vibrations to the illumination board 6570.

In addition, the rear support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 arranged on the rear side of the front frame 10014, while the partition member 6560 is fixed to the front frame 1
In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the rear support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 can be separated from each other.
In the closed state of 014, it is easy to replace the illumination board 6570 sandwiched between the rear support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 or to correct any misalignment.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is disposed opposite the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw loosens, vibrations are transmitted and abnormal noises are generated, thereby making it possible to detect the loosening of the fastening screw, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which light travels near the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw loosens, the shadow of the fastening screw can be visually confirmed from the front side. In this case, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be detected by checking the presence or absence of a shadow, so that in a noisy environment, it is easier to detect the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw than when it is detected by abnormal noise.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the fastening direction of the fastening screws is inclined up and down with respect to the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fastening direction may be inclined left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or there may be a mixture of portions inclined up and down and left and right.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 are formed in a shape extending linearly in a front view, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be formed in a shape extending in a curved line, or in a mesh or lattice shape.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, the side surface of the long rib 6734 is made smooth to prevent light from diffusing from the side surface, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light-shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734. In this case, it is possible to easily suppress the decrease in the energy of the light traveling to the fin 6735. Also, the light-shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light of the front edge portion can be emphasized, and if a part of the side surface is covered (for example, if a light-shielding tape with holes in a polka dot pattern is used), the player can visually recognize the light as a shape equivalent to the light-shielding tape, so that the presentation effect of the light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, the long rib 6734 is not extended to the rear side in the left side performance device 6700 of the pachinko machine 10010, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the long rib 6734 may be extended to the rear side, but may be formed so that it is not connected to the inner extension portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Even in this case, the light intensity near the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the above seventeenth embodiment, a case has been described in which light traveling in the front-rear direction through the long rib 6734 is emitted from the front end of the fin 6735, thereby improving the light presentation effect when viewed from the front of the fin 6735. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (notch (cut) or the like) may be formed in order to emit at least a portion of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from a side surface of the fin 6735 midway along the front-rear width of the fin 6735.

For example, as shown in this embodiment, the side surfaces of the fins 6735 may be inclined so that the thickness gradually decreases as the fins 6735 approach the front side, making it easier for light to repeatedly reach the side surfaces of the fins 6735 before reaching the front tip of the fins 6735, thereby making it easier for light to exit from the side surfaces of the fins 6735.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the number of fastening positions of the curved plate member 6750 relative to the base member 6710 is reduced. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the fastening may be performed by fitting or meshing claws based on the shape relationship. In this case, the fastening screw can be eliminated, so that it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening screw from reducing the effect of the light.

In the above 18th embodiment, the case where the illumination board 18830 slides due to the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be arranged close to the back side of the connection base member 18810, and the illumination board 18830 may be configured to slide due to the vibration of this speaker box. In this case, the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (direction along the direction Y17a) and the vibration direction of the speaker box (approximately the front-back direction) are different, so that the displacement mode of the illumination board 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating a sound with a vibration frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, it is possible to execute a silent performance in which the sliding movement of the illumination board 18830 occurs while the player is unable to hear the sound. At this time, by configuring the vibration of the illumination board 18830 to be transmitted to the operation device 10300,
A player who touches 00 can understand the vibration caused by the sound output from the speaker. This can increase the interest in touching the operation device 10300, for example, by controlling the silent effect to be executed when a change in the situation that is advantageous to the player occurs.

In the above 18th embodiment, the case where the illumination board 18830 is supported so as to be floating (slidable) near the operation device 10300 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the illumination board 6570 of the upper performance device 6500 may be supported so as to be floating. In this case, it may be supported so as to be floating on a rod member fixed to the front frame 10014 and extending from the gap between the pair of left and right acoustic devices 6610 to the front side, or it may be supported so as to be floating on a rod member fixed to the wall of the acoustic device 6610. In addition, the sliding direction is not limited to up and down, but may be left and right or diagonal.

In the above-mentioned 19th embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is aligned with the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be configured to be aligned with one of the vibration directions Y17a, or may be configured to be aligned with a direction between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, at an intermediate angle).

In addition, taking into consideration the frequency of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317, the reference line X1
For example, when the vibration direction Y17a or the operation direction is set in a first direction and other directions, if the occurrence frequency of vibration or operation in the first direction is extremely high and the occurrence frequency of vibration or operation in the other directions is low, the reference line X17a may be set along the first direction.
By setting the length 19, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw that fastens the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a from becoming loose.

In the twenty-first embodiment, the case where the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is configured to be less likely to be transmitted to the operation device 10300 side has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
In this case, the vibration device 2 may be configured to transmit vibration to the same degree as the vibration transmission to the
1500 can vibrate multiple objects.

In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, the front part of the overhang part De3 against which the protrusion part 21522 is pressed due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is formed in a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front part of the overhang part De3 may be formed in a plane that is inclined up and down with respect to the front-rear direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied from the overhang part De3 to the vibration device 21500 (the normal direction of the front part of the overhang part De3) becomes a direction that is inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, so that a component in a direction (up and down direction) that intersects with the front-rear direction can be added to the displacement (especially the displacement toward the front side) during the vibration of the vibration device 21500. This allows the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 to be displaced in the vertical direction, so that in addition to the collision mode between the eccentric weight 21512 and the covering cover member 21530 in the front-to-back direction, it is also possible to configure a collision mode in the vertical direction (a non-guidance direction that intersects the guiding direction of the protrusion portion 21534), thereby making it possible to complicate the vibration mode.

In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, a case has been described in which the protrusion portion 21534 of the covering member 21530 is formed along the front-to-rear direction, which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512), but this is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the protrusion 21534 may be formed along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, may be formed along a curved line, or may be formed along a line of any shape. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the protrusion 21534 when the vibration device 21500 generates vibration.

In the above-mentioned 21st embodiment, the fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened together through the support hole 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 may be slightly increased, and the support hole 214
28. This makes it difficult for the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to be transmitted to the lower tray forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support hole 21428, and prevents the balls stored in the lower tray 50 from vibrating due to the vibration of the vibration device 21500. Therefore, the vibration effect by the vibration device 21500 can be executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the support plate A313 is omitted on the side where the cutout A312a is formed in the rear case A310, and the end face is disposed opposite the base plate A60. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support plate A313 may be maintained on the side where the cutout A312a is formed. In this case, the effect of blurring the boundary of the light visible through the base plate A60 of the game board A13 can be maintained while maintaining the rigidity when the base plate A60 and the rear case A310 are assembled.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the rear case A310 is formed in a box shape with an opening on the front side, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
10 may be constructed from a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or may be constructed so that the outer edge is formed by a columnar portion extending from the bottom of the back side to the front side (no wall portion is formed). In this case, the rigidity can be ensured by fastening and fixing the back case A310 to the third pattern display device 81 and other movable units (the first operating unit A400 and the second operating unit A700).

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the case where the part on the right side adjacent to the game board A13 is formed in a line rather than a plane has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the line-shaped part may be formed on the left side. Also, when the line-shaped part is formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (proportion) of one of the left and right sides may be configured to be lower than the other.

In the above-mentioned twenty-second embodiment, the metal plate-like member 75 is disposed on the outer periphery of the game board A13. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal plate may be disposed on the outer edge member A7
The outer edge member A73 may be disposed on the inner side (the side of the playing area) of the outer edge member A73. In this case, the metal plate is formed along the curved shape on the inner side of the outer edge member A73, so that the metal plate can be given the function of improving the rigidity of the playing board A13 and the operating unit A300 and the function of guiding the balls flowing down the playing area. Also, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be disposed in the gap.

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the front protrusion A86f capable of contacting the game ball is protruded from the back side to the front side of the game area, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flange portion extending from the front end of the right flow path forming wall portion A86d of the center frame A86 toward the game area may be provided, and a protrusion portion may be protruded from the back side of the flange portion to the back side. In this case, the protrusion portion can be made to contact the game ball even when the game ball flows down at a position closer to the front side of the game area, so that the game ball can be efficiently decelerated.

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, a case has been described in which the front surface of the illumination board A416 and the protruding piece A417i do not come into contact with each other and a gap is formed when the illumination board A416 is attached to the board fixing plate A417, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The front surface of the light-emitting board A416 may be in contact with the protruding piece A417i, or another member (e.g., a soft rubber member) may be interposed between the front surface of the light-emitting board A416 and the protruding piece A417i so that the load can be transmitted from the protruding piece A417i to the light-emitting board A416. This allows the light-emitting board A416 to be stably supported.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second area AC2 of the diffusion plate A415 of the first operation unit A400 is disposed closer to the third pattern display device 81, and the first operation units A4
Although the second area AC2 of 00 is configured to surround the third pattern display device 81 from above, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second area AC2 may be configured to be scattered around the third pattern display device 81, or the second area AC2 may be configured to be displaceable so as to reach the front and rear of the third pattern display device 81, and may be configured in any arrangement.

In the above twenty-second embodiment, the case where the illumination board A445 is enclosed in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an illumination board and a diffusion plate on which light-emitting means such as LEDs that irradiate light to the front side are arranged may be arranged on the guide plate portion A430 or the support plate portion A420. In this way, the arrangement of the first displacement member A440 can be configured to hide the light-emitting means from the player.

The first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Even if configured in this way, the same effect can be achieved. In this case, the first displacement member A440 may be configured so that the illumination board A445 is not disposed. For example, the first displacement member A440 may be configured so that a single or multiple through holes are formed in the thickness direction, and light can pass through the through holes. According to this, since the position of the through holes changes due to the different arrangement of the first displacement member A440, the position from which the light irradiated to the back side of the first displacement member A440 leaks can be changed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is disposed on the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A41.
Although the case where one side of the first displacement member A440 is displaced (not cutting through the illumination board A416 in front view) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first displacement member A440 may be displaced so as to pass through (cut through) the illumination board A416 or the diffusion plate A415 in front view. In addition, the entire first displacement member A440 does not need to enter the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view, and a part of the first displacement member A440 may be configured not to reach the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view.

In the above-described twenty-second embodiment, the case where the illumination board A445 is included in the first displacement member A440 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The illumination board A445 does not have to be provided on the first displacement member A440. In this case, by providing an illumination board on the back side of the first displacement member A440 and configuring it so that light is irradiated on the front side, it is possible to configure so that the player can see the light that passes through the ventilation opening A443c of the rear cover portion A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442.

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the case where the displacement of the irregular slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall portion A464 of the pin gear A462 even after the transmission protrusion A463 of the pin gear A462 separates from the irregular slide member A455 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case where the arc wall portion A464 is not formed, the transmission protrusion A463
is disposed at a position away from the irregularly shaped slide member A455, the arc wall portion A464
A shutter member formed as a separate member from the pin gear A462 may be configured to protrude toward the position where the irregular slide member A455 was intended to be located, and the displacement of the irregular slide member A455 may be regulated by abutting against the shutter member.

In the above-described 22nd embodiment, the case where the multiple guided protrusions A455c arranged on the irregular slide member A455 are arranged to be shifted in the direction (left and right) intersecting the direction A416x has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
5c may be arranged on a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, or on the same straight line as the direction A4
In either case, the position of the irregular shaped slide member A455 can be stabilized.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are displaced at different times, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the length of the arc wall portion A464 of the pin gear A462 from the transmission protrusion A463 may be shortened (at the same time, the protrusion plate portion A456a may be lengthened so as not to interfere with the abutment with the arc wall portion A464).
By reducing the angular width by which the irregular slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall portion A464, the first displacement member A440 can be displaced from the extending position toward the retracted position in synchronization with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position toward the extending position. At this time, by adjusting the length of the arc wall portion A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is contained in the section in which the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained, interference between the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 can be avoided.

In this case, whether the first displacement member A440, after being displaced toward the retracted position, comes into contact with the transmission protrusion A463 or the end of the arc wall portion A464 opposite the transmission protrusion A463 depends on the operating mode of the pin gear A462, i.e., the driving mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the driving speed (which may be constant or variable) and the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 to be different, the stop position of the first displacement member A440, after being displaced toward the retracted position, can be made different between the case where the irregular slide member A455 (irregular transmitted portion A456) comes into contact with the arc wall portion A464 and the case where it comes into contact with the transmission protrusion A463.

In this case, the deformed slide member A455 (
It is assumed that the irregularly shaped transmitted portion A456) abuts against at least one of the arc wall portion A464 or the transmitting protrusion A463, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
When the transmission protrusion A 464 and the transmission protrusion A 463 are disposed in a predetermined position, the direction A
A fixed wall portion that protrudes toward the irregular sliding member A455 (irregularly shaped transmitting portion A456) along the arc wall portion A46 may be formed. In this case, the irregular sliding member A455 (irregularly shaped transmitting portion A456) may stop the first displacement member A440 after it has been displaced toward the retracted position.
4, the transmission protrusion A463, and the fixed wall portion.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the wiring HC is disposed on the outer side of the rotation axis of the second displacement member A490. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The rotation axis of the second displacement member A490 may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may pass through the inside of the cylinder and reach the board side connector A493c. In this case, it is possible to prevent the portion of the wiring HC arranged on the opposite side of the second displacement member A490 via the cylinder from being displaced (pulled).

In the above twenty-second embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A475 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flexible member made of a flexible material and having a similar shape to the fastening portion A475 may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Furthermore, the number of flexible members does not need to be one, and multiple members may be used. In this case, even if the wiring HC is pulled excessively and comes into contact with the flexible member, the flexible member deforms, thereby reducing the load acting on the wiring HC.

Also, the wiring HC may be supported not by the fastening portion A475 but by a simple columnar portion (a portion not used for fastening). In this case, a gap (narrower than the width of the wiring HC) may be present between the columnar portion and the rear plate portion A480.
Alternatively, a cable tie may be loosely wound around a fixing portion formed separately on the wire guide member A6560, etc. In this case, the displacement of the wires HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed by the cable tie, so that the load applied to the wires HC can be reduced.

Also, the fastening portion A475 may not be fixed, but may be configured to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the displacement direction is not limited to this.
Various embodiments are illustrated.

Also, the displacement of the fastening portion A475 may be made to occur in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490. For example, by making the second displacement member A490 displace in the opposite direction as it approaches the projecting position, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC from coming into the player's eyes.

The method of displacing the fastening portion A475 may be such that the fastening portion A475 is supported displaceably in a long hole, or such that the fastening portion A475 is tiltable around the main body box portion A471. In this case, it is desirable that a guide groove, a notch, or an interlocking portion is formed in the rear plate portion A480 so as to allow displacement of the fastening portion A475 while maintaining the coupled state with the fastening portion A475.

In addition, the fastening portion A475 has been described as a portion around which the wiring HC is wound, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fastening portion A475 may be configured as a pair of support walls formed in a wall shape on both the upper and lower sides of the wiring HC to regulate the passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be determined by the support walls.

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, a case was described in which one end of the wiring HC is connected from the rear side to the board-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490, and the other end is connected from the rear side to the third connector A416e3 arranged on the front side of the board-side connector A493c, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the board to which the other end is connected may be arranged facing inward on the side surface of the rear case A310. In this case, the wiring HC can be connected to the board by extending it to the side surface of the rear case A310, so that the length required for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

Also, for example, the board to which the other end is connected may be disposed on the rear plate portion A480 disposed on the rear side of the board-side connector A493c. In this case, the length required for routing the wiring HC to the front side can be omitted.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position by the drive motor AMT1 being driven (excited) in one direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the end face of the detection plate portion A455e that contacts the transmission protrusion A463 may be recessed toward the opposing arrangement portion A456b, and the pin gear A462 may be recessed from the end face of the detection plate portion A455e that contacts the transmission protrusion A463 toward the opposing arrangement portion A456b.
The rotation angle of the second displacement member A490 may be allowed to exceed the sixth angle. In this case, since the in-phase member A465 is allowed to rotate from the fourth angle d14 to the allowable angle dd1, the second displacement member A490 can be displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and further displaced back to the retracted position by driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction. As a result, by switching the length for driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1, the displacement mode of the second displacement member A490 can be switched between a mode in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and the arrangement is maintained, and a mode in which the second displacement member A490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position and then further displaced back to the retracted position by switching the length for driving (exciting) the drive motor AMT1.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 are described as paths through which the driving force is transmitted by gears, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a cam, a gear belt, or a linear slider may be used.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the illumination board A715 that irradiates the rotating body A720 with light is formed from a flat plate-shaped member. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example,
The substrate may be a sheet-like substrate made of a flexible material. In this case,
A substrate having a light emitting means for irradiating the rotating body A720 with light can be easily arranged on a circumference surrounding the rotating body A720.

In the above twenty-second embodiment, the rotating body A720 is disposed in a position that is always visible to the player. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
In this case, the first rotating member A721 may be configured to be movable to a position where the rotating body A720 cannot be seen by the player.
The first rotating member A721 is rotated horizontally on a vertical axis relative to the second rotating member A728 (the second rotating member A728 is stopped), and synchronous rotation is started in that state, and the rotating member is moved to a position visible to the player while continuing to rotate, thereby drawing attention to the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 that are rotating. This makes it possible to increase the attention to the rotating member A720 that is continuing to rotate when a performance is executed in which the relative relationship between the first rotating member A721 and the second rotating member A728 at the time of stopping is associated with information useful to the player (for example, the probability of a big win).

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 operate independently, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the performance unit A710 of the second operation unit A700 is configured to be tiltable forward from the lower end,
When the second displacement member A490 of the first operating unit A400 is in the extended position, the performance unit A71
The second displacement member A490 may be raised and lowered so that the two members come into contact with each other and receive a load, causing the performance unit A710 to change to a tilted position. In this case, a performance can be performed in which the position of the performance unit A710 is changed by the positioning of the second displacement member A490. Note that the configuration for allowing the performance unit A710 to tilt is not limited in any way. For example, the performance unit A710 and the lifting section may be connected by a flexible member, or the performance unit A710 may be configured to be pivoted to the lifting section.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the shell portion A722 is made of an impermeable material, and the first rotating member A
In the above description, the light irradiated toward the central rotating member A724 is blocked in the initial state or the fourth state of the shell portion A721. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
The first rotating member A721 may be configured to have a light-transmitting portion.
This allows fine adjustment of the relationship between the orientation of the central rotating member A724 and the amount of light reaching the central rotating member A724.

In the above twenty-second embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the annular gear member A723 that meshes with the fixed gear SG intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the annular gear member A723 may be in the shape of a rack that extends linearly (corresponding to an infinite radius of curvature), or the rotation axis of the gear member that meshes with it may be arranged parallel to the fixed gear SG. A first performance member in which the rotation axis of the gear member that meshes with it intersects with the axis of the fixed gear SG,
By combining it with a second performance member in which the rotation axis of the meshed gear member is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG, complex performances can be achieved.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first area AC1 of the diffusion plate A415 is formed on the outer side of the operating unit A300. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, the illumination board A416 may be formed in a C-shape that is concave from the outside to the inside when viewed from the front, so that the first area AC1 is formed closer to the inside of the operation unit A300 and the second area AC2 is formed closer to the outside of the operation unit A300. In this case, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight to a position closer to the outside of the operation unit A300.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the light is irradiated from the left, right, and above the second rotating member A728 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
An illumination board is disposed below the first rotating member A721. The light emitted from the light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the illumination board is conducted to the second support portion A735, reaches the second rotating member A728 supported by the second support portion A735, and is visually recognized by the player after conducting the second rotating member A728. In this case, unlike the second support portion A735, the first rotating member A721
Since the first support portion A731 that supports the first rotating member A721 is difficult for light to transmit, it is possible to achieve an effect in which the second rotating member A728 is illuminated without illuminating the first rotating member A721.

This is intended to realize a performance that is difficult to achieve with the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is directed toward the first rotating member A721, and the second rotating member A7 that can be arranged between the first rotating member A721 and the light emitting means A715a is directed toward the second rotating member A721.
Since the second rotating member A728 transmits light, the light emitted from the light emitting means A715a is guided to the second rotating member A728.
It is difficult to control the light to reach only the first rotating member A721 and not to reach the first rotating member A721. Therefore, by making the second support portion A735 conductive and allowing the light to reach the second rotating member A728, it is possible to perform an effect that is difficult to achieve with the light irradiated from the light emitting means A715a.

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the first rotating member A721 supported by the first support part A731 arranged on the inside of the rotating shaft is arranged on the inside of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728 supported by the second support part A735 arranged on the outside of the rotating shaft, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A721 may be extended on the outside of the rotating shaft on the side opposite to the side supported by the first support part A731, and an extension part may be formed in a direction parallel to the rotating shaft so as to cover the second rotating member A728 from the outside of the rotating shaft from the extended end side. In this case, the first rotating member A721 supported on the inside of the rotating shaft can be configured to rotate on the outside of the rotating shaft of the second rotating member A728, and a surprising performance can be performed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the central rotating member A724 is rotated and displaced to cause the light emitting means A7
In the above description, the area of the central rotating member A724 changes when viewed in the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A715a. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the central rotating member A724 may expand without changing its posture, or a moving body may protrude from inside the central rotating member A724.
The area of the central rotating member A724 when viewed in the optical axis direction a may be configured to change.

In the above-mentioned 22nd embodiment, the case where the shell part A722 interposed between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a is rotationally displaced has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a specific member may be configured to move forward and backward between the central rotating member A724 and the light emitting means A715a by linear motion (sliding movement). Also, the light emitting means A715a may be disposed on the specific member.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitting means A715a is always directed toward the central rotating member A724. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The optical axis of 715a may be configured to swing around the central rotating member A724 and point toward the central rotating member A724 at a predetermined timing.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the central rotating member A724 and the shell portion A722 are driven by the same driving source, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be driven by different driving sources, or they may be configured to be switched between being driven by the same driving source and being driven by different driving sources.

In the above twenty-second embodiment, the second rotating member A728 is configured so as not to overlap with all of the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second rotating member A728 may be configured to be composed of a plate-like member formed to cover a plane passing through the rotation axis when viewed in the rotation axis direction, and to overlap with all of the optical axes at a timing. In this case, the influence of the posture of the second rotating member A728 on the central rotating member A724 when light is irradiated from the light emitting means A715a arranged on the left and right of the central rotating member A724 can be increased.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is configured to have a different shape when viewed from the front when the position of the shell portion A722 changes by 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shell portion A722 may be formed to have a shape that is the same when viewed from the front when the position of the shell portion A722 changes by 180 degrees. This makes it impossible to distinguish between the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A721 from the difference in the shape of the shell portion A722.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the light emitting means A715a is arranged so that the optical axis KJ faces the virtual plane VS, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of planes on which the optical axis KJ is arranged may be set. In this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes does not have to pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.

In the above-mentioned 23rd embodiment, the case where the sliding member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, or the light emitting means A715 may be configured to be displaceable, and the virtual plane VS may be changed by the displacement of the light emitting means A715 (not limited to the front-rear direction, but may be a mixture of front-rear, left-right, up-down displacement). In either case, it is possible to change the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 when the light emitting means A715 is turned on, while suppressing the change in the outer shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the sliding member A2729 when viewed from the front.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin gear A3462 is attached to the irregular slide member A455.
In the above description, the contact positions of the transmission protrusion A463 are arranged in a plurality of positions in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protruding tip of the transmission protrusion A463 may be formed with a large diameter, so that the contact position of the transmission protrusion A463 with the irregular slide member A455 and the contact position of the external protrusion A3464 with the irregular slide member A455 are shifted in the front-rear direction.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin gear A3462 is connected to the irregular slide member A455.
In the above description, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are in contact with each other at the same position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
The wall portion perpendicular to the side of the extended portion in rear view is the pin gear A346.
It may be configured to extend to two sides.

In this case, the orthogonal wall portion does not abut against the arc wall portion A464, and the outer diameter protrusion A
By positioning the pin gear A3462 so that it abuts against the outer diameter protrusion A3464, it is possible to generate a rotational load (a load in the braking direction) on the pin gear A3462 while suppressing displacement of the irregular slide member A455 in a direction intersecting the direction A416x when the orthogonal wall portion abuts against the outer diameter protrusion A3464.

Furthermore, the second guide hole A422b may be deformed at the longitudinal end so as to extend in the lateral direction (into an L-shape), so that the irregular slide member A455 can be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction A416x, and the first displacement member A440 may be displaced in conjunction with the displacement.
When the transmission protrusion A455b enters the portion extending in the short direction of the transmission protrusion A422b, the transmission protrusion A455b is in the direction A41.
The first displacement member A440 may be configured to be displaced in a direction intersecting with the direction 6x, and the displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451.

In this case, when the irregular slide member A455 enters a portion extending in the short direction of the second guide hole A422b, the second guide hole A422b and the guided protrusion portion A455c are aligned in the direction A416x.
By engaging the protruding plate portion A456a with the arc wall portion A464, the displacement of the irregular slide member A455 in the direction A416x can be restricted. As a result, even after the contact between the protruding plate portion A456a and the arc wall portion A464 is released, the displacement of the irregular slide member A455 in the direction A416x can be restricted.

In addition, the displacement caused in the first displacement member A440 when the irregular slide member A455 enters the portion extending in the short direction of the second guide hole A422b is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to cause displacement along the direction A416x, or may be configured to cause displacement in a direction intersecting the direction A416x.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is described as being semicircular, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be rectangular, triangular, semi-elliptical, or any other shape. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, it is preferable that the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is tapered (the width does not increase) as it goes radially outward.

This also applies to the case where a recess is formed in place of the outer diameter protrusion A3464. That is, the shape may be any shape, but the recess is tapered toward the inside of the diameter (the width does not increase).
It is preferable that the control unit 100 is configured as follows.

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 may be symmetrical with respect to a line passing through the rotation axis, or may be asymmetrical. In this case, when the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is configured with an asymmetrical shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction.

For example, in a rear view of the outer protrusion A3464, the side surface of the extended tip end side of the arc wall portion A464 (the opposite side of the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arc wall portion A464) is larger than the side surface of the extended base end side (the side of the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arc wall portion A464).
4 may be configured so that the angle with respect to the outer circumferential surface is small.

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by the contact with the outer diameter protrusion A3464 while rotating the pin gear A3462 at a constant speed can be made faster when displacing toward the retracted position side than when displacing from the extended position toward the opposite side of the retracted position (the side that extends beyond the extended position). In other words, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A440 can be changed for each direction of displacement.

In addition, as an example of a case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the opposite side of the retracted position, if the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protruding shape, it is displaced beyond the protruding position toward the opposite side of the retracted position. In a case where a recessed portion is formed instead of the outer diameter protrusion A3464, the irregular slide member A455 slides and moves by the dimension of the recessed portion, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the opposite side of the retracted position.
An example is a case in which the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position, and then the deformed slide member A455 is pushed out and slid against the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464, thereby displacing the first displacement member A440 to the extended position.

In addition, in the case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position side, the outer diameter protrusion A
If the outer diameter protrusion A3464 has a protruding shape, the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retreated position as the irregular slide member A455 slides by the protruding dimension, and then the outer diameter protrusion A3
The abutment between the irregular slide member A464 and the irregular slide member A455 is released, so that the irregular slide member A45
In the example shown, the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position (retracted position side) as the deformed slide member A455 slides. In the case where a recessed portion is formed instead of the external projection A3464, the deformed slide member A455 is displaced by the dimension of the recessed portion, and the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the extended position (retracted position side).
40 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position.

In the above-described 27th embodiment, the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed closer to the rear plate portion A480. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example,
Alternatively, the main body plate A65 may be disposed at a position away from the rear plate A480 (closer to the support box A6470) and the protruding portion A6562 may be protruded toward the rear plate A480.
The wiring HC may be formed thin (for example, in a sheet shape). In this case, a wide area for the wiring HC to be displaced can be secured.

In addition, although the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is formed in a long shape has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed in a wide plate shape. In this case, since a member can be disposed between the rear plate portion A480 and the wiring HC over a wide range, it is possible to increase the possibility that the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be displaced in a synchronized manner to suppress friction.

In the above-described 27th embodiment, the protrusion A6562 is fixed to the main body plate A6561. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the protrusion A6562 may be held displaceable in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate A6561, and the protrusion A6562 may be moved by the load from the wiring HC.
The main body plate A6561A may be configured to rotate in response to the displacement of the protruding portion A6562. That is, for example, a long hole (groove) through which the protruding portion A6562 is inserted may be formed in the main body box A471, and the long hole (groove) may be formed in a shape that rotates and displaces the main body plate A6561 in response to the displacement of the protruding portion A6562 in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate A6561. In this case, the arrangement of the wiring guide member A6560 can be appropriately changed in response to the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide member A6560, so that the load generated between the wiring HC and the wiring guide member A6560 can be appropriately reduced.

In addition, although the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is rotatably supported has been described, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may move by sliding, or may move along a path that combines rotation and sliding.

In addition, although the case where the second displacement member A490 is reciprocatingly rotated and displaced has been described, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second displacement member A490 may be one that slides and displaces, or the second rotating member A490 may be one that rotates and displaces one or more times.

In the above-described 27th embodiment, the case where the wire guide member A6560 is disposed on the rear side of the support box portion A6470 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this.
The support box A6470 may be configured such that the protrusion A6561 is disposed on the front side of the support box A6470, while the support box A6470 has a long through hole (a long hole along a circular arc shape centered on the rotation axis of the main body plate A6561) for guiding the protrusion A6562, and the protrusion A6562 passes through the long through hole and protrudes to the back side of the support box A6470. In this case, the support box A6470 and the rear plate A480
In comparison with the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480, a space equivalent to the volume of the main body plate portion A6561 can be provided. This makes it easier to ensure a space for the wiring HC to be displaced, and improves the design freedom of the main body plate portion A6561 (for example, the main body plate portion A6561 can be configured as a member having a thickness greater than the gap dimension between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480).

<First control example>
Next, various control examples applicable to the pachinko machines of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described. First, a first control example in the pachinko machines of the above-mentioned embodiments will be described with reference to Figs. 389 to 478. Note that, in the configuration used in this first control example, some components that are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given different reference numerals, but this is for the purpose of easily explaining the invention of this first control example, and the specific contents of the components are the same as those in the above-mentioned embodiments, so detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, the outline (specifications) of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, a first area (V area) where game balls can enter, a second area (non-V area) different from the first area, and a distribution device (V role) that distributes game balls that flow into the inside of the variable winning device 65 to either the first area or the second area are provided inside the variable winning device 65, which is capable of entering if a jackpot is won in the lottery of a special symbol. If at least one game ball enters (passes) the first area during one jackpot, a special symbol probability state is granted after the jackpot ends, while if no game balls enter the first area during one jackpot, a normal symbol time-saving state is granted after the jackpot ends until a maximum of 100 special symbol lotteries are executed. Therefore, when a jackpot game is executed, the player can play the game in the hope that the distribution device (V role) will distribute the game ball to the first area (V area).

The distribution device (V role) is basically maintained in an arrangement that allows game balls to be distributed to the second area (arrangement that does not allow distribution to the first area), and during a specific round (e.g., the fifth round) of a jackpot, it changes to an arrangement that allows game balls to be distributed to the first area only during a specific period (e.g., the five seconds from 5 seconds after the start of the fifth round to 10 seconds after the start of the fifth round). By having the game ball enter the specific winning port 65a during this specific period, it becomes possible for the game ball to enter the first area, and the game state after the jackpot ends can be transitioned to a state of high probability of special symbols that is advantageous.

In this first control example, at least two types of jackpots are provided: a jackpot type (high probability jackpot) in which the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is opened and closed in an opening and closing pattern that allows the game ball to reach the distribution device during a specific period in the fifth round (for example, an opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning port 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from 5 seconds after the start of the fifth round to 9.5 seconds after the start of the fifth round), and a jackpot type (normal jackpot) in which the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a is opened and closed in an opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the distribution device during a specific period (for example, an opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning port 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the fifth round to 4.5 seconds after the start of the fifth round). In the former jackpot type (high probability jackpot), the distribution device can easily distribute the game ball to the first area by simply continuing to shoot the game ball aiming at the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot, so that after the jackpot ends, the game ball is almost in a high probability state with a special pattern. On the other hand, in the latter type of jackpot (normal jackpot), even if you continue to shoot game balls aiming at the specific winning hole (large opening) 65a during the fifth round of the jackpot, all game balls that reach the distribution device are distributed to the second area, so the special state is not granted (a time-saving state is granted).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, when the special symbol moves to a high probability state, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to drop to a low probability state of the special symbol each time the lottery conditions for the special symbol are satisfied. More specifically, when the lottery conditions for the special symbol are satisfied in the high probability state of the special symbol, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to drop to a low probability state of the special symbol (probability of falling 1/500). If the lottery result corresponds to a fall, a lottery is executed with a lottery probability (1/250) in the low probability state of the special symbol, while if the lottery result does not correspond to a fall, a lottery is executed with a lottery probability (1/125) in the high probability state of the special symbol. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, regardless of whether it is a high probability jackpot or a normal jackpot, the normal symbol time-saving state is maintained after the jackpot ends until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed. That is, when a probability-variable jackpot is reached and the probability-variable state of the special symbol is set after the jackpot is ended, the normal state of the normal symbol continues until the 100th special symbol lottery condition is met, regardless of whether the lottery result corresponds to a fall during the 100th special symbol lottery. Therefore, since the operations other than the probability of the jackpot are almost the same until the 100th special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot is ended, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize whether the special symbol is in a low probability state or a probability-variable state. Therefore, even if the previous jackpot was a normal jackpot and the special symbol was in a low probability state after the jackpot ended, or even if the previous jackpot was a probability-variable jackpot but fell into a low probability state during the 100th special symbol lottery, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the special symbol is in a probability-variable state until the 100th special symbol lottery is executed. This helps players maintain their motivation to play.

As described above with reference to FIG. 302 etc., the second ball entrance (second winning hole) 640 is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the right side of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front can enter the game (a position where a game ball that has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side of the front view cannot (is difficult to enter the game ball)). That is, in the probability variable state and time-saving state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set in which the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened (i.e., the game ball is easy to enter the second ball entrance 640), by shooting the game ball toward the flow path on the right side of the front view, a high proportion of the game balls (for example, one in three balls) enter the second ball entrance 640, so that the game can be played efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state where the normal state of the normal pattern is set, the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is difficult to open (i.e., it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), so the game is played by shooting the game ball at the first ball entrance (first winning hole) 64, which is located at a position where the game ball that flows down the flow path located on the left side of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front can enter (a position where the game ball that flows down the flow path located on the right side of the front cannot (is difficult to enter)). Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of explanation, shooting the game ball toward the flow path on the left side of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front is referred to as "left hit", and shooting the game ball toward the flow path on the right side of the front is referred to as "right hit". In addition, the lottery for the special symbol that is executed based on the game ball entering the first ball entry port (first winning port) 64 is called the lottery for the first special symbol (lottery for special symbol 1), and the lottery for the special symbol that is executed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry port (second winning port) 640 is called the lottery for the second special symbol (lottery for special symbol 2).

Next, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this control example will be explained with reference to Figure 389. Figure 389(a) is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in this first control example, and Figure 389(b) is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 in this first control example. The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 404), so that, for example, three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed.

The third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is composed of nine main patterns numbered "1" to "9". Each main pattern is composed of a rear pattern consisting of a wooden box with the numbers "1" to "9" added above it, and the main patterns with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) have large numbers added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. In contrast, the main patterns with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) have additional patterns imitating characters such as shields, swords, and capes added to almost the entire front of the wooden box, and even numbers are added in small green to the lower right of the additional patterns so that they are displayed in front of the additional patterns.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 404), which will be described later, is a jackpot (jackpot A to E), a variable display in which the same main symbols line up is performed, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended. In contrast, if the lottery for the special symbols is a miss, a variable display in which the same main symbols do not line up is performed.

Furthermore, if the type of the jackpot won is a normal jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols with even numbers are always aligned is performed, while if it is a special jackpot, either a variable display in which the same main symbols with even numbers are aligned or a variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned is executed. In other words, by executing a variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned, not only the jackpot but also the special jackpot state after the jackpot ends is determined. In addition, in this first control example, the probability of executing a variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned in the case of a special jackpot is set to an extremely low probability (for example, a rate of 1%). This makes it possible to make it rare to know that a jackpot is a special jackpot from the type of symbols aligned when a jackpot is won. As described above, the time-saving state of the normal symbols is maintained until the 100 special symbol drawings are performed after the end of the jackpot (it becomes difficult to tell whether or not the game is in a special symbol state from the operating state of the electric role 640a), so by configuring it so that it is difficult to tell whether or not the game is in a special symbol state from the type of main symbol that is aligned at the time of the jackpot, it is possible to more frequently create a situation in which it is unclear whether the game is in a special symbol state or a time-saving state from the end of the jackpot until the 100 special symbol drawings are completed. Therefore, whether the game is a special symbol state or a normal jackpot, the player's sense of expectation that the game is in a special symbol state can be maintained from the end of the jackpot until the end of the 100 special symbol drawings.

As shown in FIG. 389(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is composed of a main display area Dm for displaying the third pattern when the third pattern is displayed in a variable manner or when the third pattern is displayed in a stopped manner, a small area Ds1 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern, a small area Ds2 for displaying the number of reserved balls of the second special pattern, and a small area Ds3 for displaying a reduced version of the variable performance of the third pattern while a specified performance (for example, the interrupt rapid-fire performance described below) is being performed.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, left, center, and right, and three pattern columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. The above-mentioned third pattern is displayed in a specified order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. That is, the main patterns are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3, and the display is changed by scrolling from top to bottom periodically for each of the pattern columns Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in descending order in the left pattern column Z1, and the numbers of the main patterns are arranged in ascending order in the center pattern column Z2 and the right pattern column Z3.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and with each play, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the following order: left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2. If a jackpot symbol combination (a combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is lined up on the active line L1 when the third symbols stop, a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been changed among the balls that have entered the first ball entrance 64 (number of reserved balls of the first special pattern), small area Ds2 is an area that displays the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not yet been changed among the balls that have entered the second ball entrance 640 (number of reserved balls of the second special pattern), and small area Ds3 is an area that displays a reduced version of the change performance when, for example, a display performance different from the change performance is performed in the main display area. By displaying the change performance in a reduced version, it is possible to prevent the display performance different from the change performance from being obscured by the third pattern and becoming difficult to see.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 389(b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display effect indicating the expected probability of a jackpot is executed in the background of the third symbol.

If a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the third pattern display device 81 (first pattern display device 37A, 37B) is displaying a variable number of balls, the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37A and also in the small area Ds1. Similarly, if a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37B and also in the small area Ds2. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball of the first special pattern, and in the small area Ds2, one reserved ball number pattern is displayed for each reserved ball of the second special pattern. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds2, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. Also, if the reserved ball count symbol is not displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is 0, i.e., there are no reserved balls. Figure 389(b) illustrates an example in which the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol is 4, and the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol is 0.

In the first control example, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be reserved up to four times each, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the reserved ball number may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as a number, or the four divided areas may be displayed in a different manner (e.g., color or lighting pattern) according to the number of reserved balls. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the number being the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

Next, various types of entertainment effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example will be described with reference to Figs. 390 to 403. First, with reference to Figs. 390 to 393, display effects executed by the third symbol display device 81 during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set (time-saving state or probability variable state) in this first control example will be described. As described above, in this first control example, the configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the time-saving state or the probability variable state is in effect after the end of the jackpot until the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times. In other words, whether the game state after the jackpot is set to the time-saving state or the probability variable state, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is maintained until the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times after the end of the previous jackpot, unless a jackpot occurs. This time-saving state for normal symbols is maintained even if the special symbol falls from a high probability state to a low probability state before 100 plays are performed, making it difficult for players to distinguish not only the game state set at the end of the jackpot, but also the timing of the fall from the high probability state to the low probability state for special symbols.

However, if the state of the special symbol of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special symbol high probability state or a low probability state) is made completely unidentifiable, the game will become monotonous while the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal symbol is set continues, and there is a risk that the player's interest in the game will not be sufficiently increased. Therefore, in this first control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to enable the player to predict to some extent the possibility of the high probability state. More specifically, each time the variable display of the special symbol is executed, one of three types of back modes that indicate the expectation of the high probability state is set, taking into account the game state at the time of execution, etc. This makes it possible to realize a game feature in which the state of the special symbol can be predicted from the state of the back mode, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

First, referring to FIG. 390(a), a display mode (back mode) in which the current state is a probability change state and the expectation is relatively low will be described. As shown in FIG. 390(a), when the probability change state is set in the back mode (cave exploration mode) in which the expectation is relatively low, a display mode in which an adventurer-like character 801 is carrying a sword and a torch and exploring inside a cave is displayed. In addition, a display area 802 in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front to indicate the remaining number of times of drawing special patterns (guaranteed number of times of the time-saving state of the normal pattern) until the number of times of drawing that may end the time-saving state of the normal pattern is reached. The example of FIG. 390(a) illustrates a case in which 90 times is displayed as the guaranteed number of times. That is, it illustrates a state after the special pattern has been drawn 10 times since the end of the jackpot. Furthermore, a display area 803 in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 when viewed from the front. Inside this display area 803, horizontally elongated, roughly oval-shaped right-hit images with the word "right hit" are displayed on the left and right, and the word "cave exploration mode" is displayed between these right-hit images. These display modes allow the player to easily understand that the time-saving state of the normal pattern will continue until at least 90 more special pattern draws are performed (there is a possibility that the time-saving state will end when 90 draws are completed), and that the player can play by hitting the right. In addition, compared to the temple search mode (see FIG. 390(b)) and super temple search mode (see FIG. 391), which will be described later, the display content is more subdued, allowing the player to intuitively understand that the possibility of the probability ...

Figure 390 (b) shows the display mode when the back mode (temple exploration mode) is set, which has a higher expectation that the current state will be a special chance state compared to the cave exploration mode. When the temple exploration mode is set, a display mode is displayed in which an adventurer-like character 801 is exploring inside a temple, and the text between the right-hit images inside the display area 803 is changed to "Temple Exploration Mode." The display content of the temple exploration mode is brighter in appearance than the cave exploration mode, and is a display mode that is likely to give the player a flashy impression, allowing the player to intuitively understand that there is a relatively high expectation that the special chance state will be reached.

Figure 391 shows the display mode when the back mode (super temple search mode) is set, which indicates a higher expectation of the probability ...

In this way, in this first control example, during the game state in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, one of three types of back modes, namely, the cave search mode in which the expectation of the probability ... This can increase the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by setting the Super Temple Mode, it is confirmed that the reserved balls will not contain any lottery results that correspond to a fall (it is possible to execute lotteries for at least the number of reserved balls with the probability of winning a jackpot in the special state), so the player can play with a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot in the reserved balls.

Next, referring to FIG. 392 and FIG. 393, the probability variation continuation suggestion effect that is executed in this first control example when a special pattern is drawn a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) without winning a jackpot in a state where the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set will be described. FIG. 392 is a diagram showing the display state at the start of this probability variation continuation suggestion effect. This probability variation continuation suggestion effect is an effect for suggesting whether the game state is a probability variation state or not, and is executed from the 96th variable display effect to the 99th variable display effect after the end of the jackpot. In other words, it is an effect that is executed until just before the 100th special pattern lottery, which is the guaranteed number of times in the time-saving state, is executed. Note that in this first control example, in the time-saving state, the remaining number of time-saving times is subtracted at the start of the special pattern variation. In other words, in the time-saving state, the number of time-saving times becomes 0 at the start of the 100th variable display after the end of the jackpot, so that during the execution of the 100th variable display, the time-saving state has already ended (the state has been transferred to the normal state). Therefore, whether or not the player is in a special state is notified by the 99th variable display effect, which reliably maintains the time-saving state of the normal pattern, whether in a special state or in a time-saving state. By configuring it in this way, it becomes difficult to determine whether the special state is continuing or not until the result of the special state continuation suggestion effect is confirmed (i.e., it becomes difficult to tell from the operation of the electric role 640a whether the player is in a time-saving state or a special state), so the player can pay attention to the special state continuation suggestion effect while playing.

As shown in FIG. 392, when the special probability continuation suggestion effect starts, an effect is executed in which a door 806 appears in front of a character 801 modeled after an adventurer. In addition, above the door 806, a display area 805 is displayed in which the words "Door breakthrough mode begins!!" and "If you break through the door, the special probability continues!?" are displayed. Furthermore, the text displayed between the right-hit images in the display area 803 is changed to "Door breakthrough mode." These display contents allow the player to easily understand that if the character 801 can break through the door, it means that the special probability state is continuing. In this special probability continuation suggestion effect (door breakthrough mode), an effect is executed in which an attack is made on the door 806 every time the variable display is executed, and if the door 806 can finally be destroyed (broken through), an effect is executed in which the continuation of the special probability state is announced.

Figure 393 (a) is a diagram showing a presentation mode suggesting that the probability of ...

It is intuitively clear to many players that hitting the door 806 with a hammer is more effective than slashing it with a sword, so the player can easily understand that a performance of hitting with a hammer has a higher chance of breaking through the door 806. Therefore, while the performance indicating the continuation of the probability change is being executed, the player can play the game in the hope that the performance of hitting the door 806 with a hammer will be executed more times. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In this first control example, at the start of the probability bonus continuation suggestion effect, the results of the lottery from the 96th to the 99th times, which is the execution range of the probability bonus continuation suggestion effect, are read in advance to determine whether the probability bonus state will continue until the 99th special pattern is drawn, and if the probability bonus state continues until the 99th special pattern is drawn, the selection rate of the effect scenario that is likely to produce a high-expectation attack pattern is high. On the other hand, if the time-saving state has occurred before the 99th special pattern is drawn (or the time-saving state was in effect after the end of the previous jackpot), the selection rate of the effect scenario that is likely to produce a low-expectation attack pattern is high. In this way, by configuring the effect mode to be set based on the game state at the end of the effect, the game state after the end of the effect can be more accurately notified.

Here, if the special probability continuation suggestion effect is configured to be executed based only on the game state at the start of the effect, there is a risk that the player will fall into a low probability state while the special probability continuation suggestion effect is being executed, and the time-saving state will end with the start of the drawing of the 100th special pattern, even though the continuation of the special probability state has been announced. In this case, there is a possibility that the player will lose trust in the pachinko machine 10 and the hall due to a discrepancy between the effect content and the actual operation. As a countermeasure to this, it is also possible to configure the special probability continuation suggestion effect to be an effect that is completed in one change, but this method makes it difficult to ensure a sufficient period of time for the effect, making it difficult to diversify the effect format.

In contrast, in the first control example, the special probability continuation suggestion effect is executed over the last four variable displays during which the time-saving state of the normal symbols is guaranteed, and the notification content of the special probability continuation suggestion effect is determined based on the game state at the time when the lottery for the last special symbol in the execution range of the special probability continuation effect is executed. This configuration makes it possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the effect, while diversifying the presentation mode. Note that, when the special probability state is in effect at the start of the effect, and there are no reserved balls until the end of the effect, a presentation that is likely to produce an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation is selected. This is because the probability of the lottery result corresponding to a fall is lower than the probability of a jackpot, and it is extremely rare for the special symbol to fall into a low probability state during the presentation period (there is a relatively high probability that the presentation will end while still in the special probability state).

Next, referring to FIG. 394, the transition of various states after the end of the special jackpot in this first control example will be described. First, referring to FIG. 394(a), the transition of states when the state falls to a low probability state within 100 tries after the end of the special jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 394(a), if the state falls within 100 tries, the state will transition to a low probability state of the special pattern at the time of the fall, but the time-saving state of the normal pattern will continue until the special pattern has been drawn 100 times. Then, in the special jackpot continuation suggestion effect executed in the 96th to 99th variable display effects, an effect of failing to break through door 806 is executed, and the transition to the normal state is announced.

On the other hand, Figure 394(b) is a diagram showing the transition of states when the special symbol falls into a low probability state in the lottery for the special symbol 100 times or more after the end of a special jackpot. As shown in Figure 394(b), if the state falls after 100 times or more after the end of a jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal symbol and the special symbol's special jackpot state are maintained until the fall. For this reason, in the special jackpot continuation suggestion effect that is executed over the execution period of the 96th to 99th variable display, an effect of successfully breaking through door 806 is executed, and the continuation of the special jackpot state is announced.

In this first control example, the time-saving state of the normal pattern ends when the variation starts, just as in the case where the special pattern falls when the special pattern is drawn after 100 times. Therefore, if the time-saving state ends when the special pattern is drawn within 100 times (i.e., within the guaranteed number of times of the time-saving state), the winning of the jackpot is confirmed at that point. On the other hand, if the time-saving state ends after 100 times (i.e., after the guaranteed number of times of the time-saving state has elapsed), it means that either a jackpot or a fall has occurred. And since the probability of winning a jackpot (1/125) is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), it can be expected that a jackpot will occur even if the time-saving state ends at the start of the variation after 100 times. Therefore, the player can play the game while paying attention to whether the time-saving state is continuing, which can improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, the push stop effect in this first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 395. This push stop effect is an effect in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swing operation member 10310 is pressed. In other words, the timing at which each symbol row stops can be set to any timing desired by the player depending on the timing of the player's operation of the PUSH button 10317.

Figure 395 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the push stop effect. In this push stop effect, as shown in Figure 395 (a), below each of the variable display symbol rows, button images (left button image 807aL, center button image 807aC, right button image 807aR) that imitate the PUSH button 10317 are displayed. In addition, below each button image, a valid period gauge (left valid period gauge 807bL, center valid period gauge 807bC, right valid period gauge 807bR) that indicates the remaining period during which the stop operation for each symbol row is valid is displayed. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that each symbol row is stopped and displayed every time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

Figure 395(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when a player performs a first operation (press) on the PUSH button 10317 while the press stop effect is being executed. As shown in Figure 395(b), when the first operation (press) is executed, the left pattern row is displayed as still. If a second operation is executed within the valid operation period, the right pattern row is displayed as still, and if a third operation is executed, the center pattern row is displayed as still. In this way, by configuring the timing of the pattern stop to be determined at the player's discretion, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, when each symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the timing of the player's operation, if the player's operation is too early, there may be too much time left after all symbol rows are stopped. As a countermeasure, in this first control example, when three stop operations are performed early (for example, within one second after the start of the valid period), the central symbol row is not immediately stopped and displayed, but is displayed after a specific performance, thereby suppressing the period after the stop display from being too long. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 396(a), based on the third operation (press), after multiple (three) symbols including a specific symbol (a symbol with the letters Chance Charge) move up and down in the central symbol row (i.e., after suggesting that one of the three symbols may be displayed as a stop symbol in the central symbol row), a performance (chance charge teasing performance) in which symbols other than the specific symbol (chance charge symbol) are displayed is executed. In this way, depending on the length of the remaining valid operation period at the time of performing the stop operation of the central symbol row (the third press of the PUSH button 10317), the system switches between immediately displaying the central symbol row as still and filling the time with a chance charge prompting effect, thereby preventing all symbol rows from being displayed as still for an unnaturally long period of time. This makes it possible to realize a more natural presentation mode.

In addition, in this first control example, in the push stop effect, there is also a separate effect of a pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the central symbol row. In this case, regardless of the timing of the stop operation on the central symbol row, the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed through the chance charge prompting effect (see FIG. 396(a)). When this chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed, it progresses to the chance charge effect (see FIG. 396(b)) described below. By setting an effect pattern in which the chance charge symbol is actually stopped and displayed, even if the operation stop effect is selected as a mere miss effect and the chance charge prompting effect occurs, the player can be made to think that there is a possibility that it will progress to the chance charge effect. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 396(b) and FIG. 397, the performance mode of the above-mentioned chance charge performance will be described. FIG. 396(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the chance charge performance is started. When the chance charge performance is started, a character 801 imitating an adventurer is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the surrounding area is set to a luminous state (aura-clad state). In addition, a vertically elongated, approximately rectangular spirit gauge KG is displayed to the right of the character 801. This spirit gauge KG is for displaying the amount of spirit accumulated in the character 801 in meter form, and can be displayed in stages from 1 to 6. In addition, the display area 805 displayed above the character 801 displays the words "The more spirit you accumulate, the more chances you will stock." Furthermore, the words "Chance Charge 5 times remaining" are displayed in the display area 803. In the first chance charge performance, the character 801 attempts to accumulate spirit five times, and the amount of spirit accumulated is indicated by the amount of light around the character 801 (the amount of aura surrounding the character) and the amount of the spirit gauge KG. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the more spirit accumulated, the better.

Figure 397(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the chance charge effect. As shown in Figure 397(a), in addition to the amount of light around the character 801 (the amount of aura surrounding it) and the amount of the meter on the spirit gauge KG, the amount of spirit accumulated is also indicated by the text displayed in the display area 805. The example in Figure 397(a) shows a state in which spirit has accumulated to the fifth level out of six, and the text "Charge level 5!!" is displayed in the display area 805. These display contents allow the player to easily understand the final amount of spirit accumulated.

The spirit gauge accumulated during the chance charge effect is consumed at each timing until the reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect are consumed to generate some kind of chance up effect. A chance up effect is an effect that increases the expectation of a big win, such as a change in the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern, the occurrence of so-called pseudo consecutive hits, the occurrence of a cut-in effect, or the occurrence of lines written in red text. The spirit gauge is configured to always be consumed until it reaches 0. In other words, it is configured not to be discarded without being consumed. This configuration allows the player to easily grasp the remaining number of chance up effects, so that the player can play while looking forward to what kind of chance up effect will occur next. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this first control example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG that accumulates during the chance charge performance is determined mainly based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge performance. After the chance charge performance ends, the pace at which the chance up performance is executed (i.e., the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied, taking into account the lottery results for each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start of the chance charge performance (the processing load when determining the gauge number).

Figure 397(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode when the spirit gauge is consumed. Figure 397(b) illustrates a case where one gauge of the spirit gauge is consumed and a so-called reserved change effect is executed as a chance-up effect. That is, as shown in Figure 397(b), the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG is reduced by one gauge (consumed), and at the same time, an effect is executed in which the display mode of the third reserved ball number pattern Hz3 in the small area Ds1 changes from white to blue (increasing the expectation). In this way, by configuring a configuration in which some effect (chance-up effect) that increases the expectation of winning is executed along with the reduction in the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG, it is possible to play the game while looking forward to when and what kind of chance-up effect will occur next while the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG remains. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Next, referring to FIG. 398, the change over time of the display mode (performance mode) in the variable display performance in which the push stop performance is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 398(a), the change over time of the performance mode when the third stop operation (stop operation on the middle pattern row) is executed one second or more after the start of the valid period in the push stop performance that does not develop into the chance charge performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 398(a), when the variable display in which only the push stop performance is set (i.e., the chance charge performance is not executed) is executed, the normal variable display (the variable display in which each pattern row simply changes vertically at high speed) is executed until six seconds have elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, and when six seconds have elapsed, the push stop performance (see FIG. 395(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed one second or more after the start of the valid period of the push stop performance (two seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 398(a)), in addition to the left pattern row and the right pattern row that have already been stopped, the center pattern row is pseudo-stopped and displayed. Note that a pseudo stop display means that the display is in a manner that is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display (for example, a manner that vibrates with an extremely small amplitude). This pseudo stop continues until the actual stop display timing of the variable display (the timing when a stop command is received from the main control device 110), and when the stop display timing is reached, each row of symbols is displayed completely stopped.

Next, referring to FIG. 398(b), in a push stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, the change over time in the performance mode when the third stop operation (stop operation on the middle symbol row) is performed within 1 second from the start of the valid period will be described. As shown in FIG. 398(b), when a variable display in which only the push stop effect is set (i.e., the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, a normal variable display is executed from the start of the variable until 6 seconds have elapsed, and when 6 seconds have elapsed, a push stop effect (see FIG. 395(a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed within 1 second or less from the start of the valid period of the push stop effect (0.5 seconds have elapsed in the example of FIG. 398(b)), a chance charge teasing effect (see FIG. 396(a)) is executed, and then an effect in which a combination of losing symbols is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing is executed. As a result, even if three stop operations are performed relatively early after the start of the valid period, the period until the stop display can be bridged (filled) by the chance charge promotion effect, so the transition of the presentation mode until the stop display of the losing symbol can be made to look natural. Therefore, a presentation mode that is less strange to the player can be provided.

Next, referring to FIG. 398(c), we will explain how the presentation mode changes over time when it develops into a chance charge presentation. As shown in FIG. 398(c), even when it develops into a chance charge presentation, the presentation mode progresses in the same way as when the chance charge presentation is not executed until the press stop presentation is executed. Then, in a variable display in which a chance charge presentation is set, when three stop operations are executed in the press stop presentation, a chance charge teasing presentation (see FIG. 396(a)) occurs regardless of the timing of the third stop operation, and then, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, it develops into a chance charge presentation.

In this way, in this first control example, even in a variable display where only the push stop effect is set, the chance charge prompting effect can be executed depending on the timing at which the stop operation ends, so that the player can have more expectations for the chance charge effect to be executed. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 399 to FIG. 401, the interruption continuous tapping effect, which is one of the interesting effects in this first control example, will be described. This interruption continuous tapping effect is an effect in a display mode in which an effect of a different mode from the display effect that has been displayed until then suddenly interrupts during normal variable display or reach fluctuation. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399(a), by executing the interruption continuous tapping effect during the execution of the normal variable display effect (see FIG. 389(b)), a cut-in area CR in which a monster's face is displayed up close is formed (displayed) superimposed (on the front layer) on the image of the normal variable display effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 399(a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a strip-like shape extending downward from the upper left side to the lower right side on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the display range of this cut-in area CR occupies about 70% of the area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and an image imitating a monster is enlarged and displayed in the center of the cut-in area CR. In addition, a display area 805 with the words "Monsters Attack!!" is displayed (formed) above the image of a monster in the cut-in area CR. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that a completely different effect has been executed (interrupted) from the effect executed before the cut-in area CR was displayed. While the cut-in area CR is formed (i.e., while the interruption continuous tapping effect is being executed), the display effect executed immediately before is interrupted. That is, all display effects of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR are paused, and the effect mode is resumed from the situation at the time of interruption when the interruption continuous tapping effect ends. Note that, with regard to the sound (music), it is switched between being paused (interrupted) or continuing to play depending on the situation. In this first control example, when the interruption continuous tapping effect is executed during the execution of the normal variable display, both the display mode and the sound mode are controlled to be interrupted until the interruption continuous tapping effect ends, while when the interruption continuous tapping effect is executed after the reach occurs (during the reach fluctuation), only the display mode is interrupted. This is because flashier music (BGM) plays after a reach occurs compared to when the normal variable display is being executed, and the aim is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the relatively flashy BGM is interrupted.

After the cut-in area CR in which an image of a monster or the like is displayed is formed by executing the interruption rapid-fire effect, a display mode is displayed that encourages the player to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (repeated press). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399(b), a button image BG resembling the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in area CR, and below it, a gauge image GG is displayed in gauge format showing the remaining period during which the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid. In addition, above the button image BG, the word "repeated press" and an image of three arrows pointing toward the PUSH button image BG are displayed. Furthermore, the word "reducing monsters with rapid presses!!" is displayed in the display area 805, and a display area 808 in which the word "100 remaining" is displayed is formed (displayed) on the right side of the button image BG. These display contents allow the player to easily understand that the more times the PUSH button 10317 is pressed within the valid period of rapid tapping, the more the number of monsters can be reduced.

In this first control example, multiple types of interrupt rapid-fire effects are provided, each of which differs in at least the number of monsters that can be reduced during the rapid-fire valid period (the lower limit of the number of remaining monsters displayed). Basically, the more monsters that are defeated (the fewer the number of remaining monsters), the higher the chance of a big win. More specifically, when an interrupt rapid-fire effect is set for a big win variable display, it is possible to select a type of effect that makes it possible to defeat all 100 monsters (reducing the number of remaining monsters to 0), whereas in a loss variable display, it is configured such that it is impossible to reduce the number of monsters to 0 (it can only be reduced to a maximum of 3).

In addition, in this first control example, the number of monsters defeated (decremented) by one press of the PUSH button 10317 is configured to vary according to the length of the remaining valid period. More specifically, the longer the remaining valid period, the fewer the number of monsters defeated (decremented) by one press. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters from being decremented to the minimum limit too early after the start of the performance, even when a player who plays with a fast pace of successive taps is playing.

Here, as a type of entertainment effect, an operation effect in which the performance mode is changed by continuously operating an operating means such as an operating button for a specified period of time has been known. In this operation effect, an upper limit for the number of times the performance mode can be changed (the number of times it can be developed) is generally set for each effect, and it is normal for the development mode to be changed to the upper limit when the number of operations reaches a certain number. However, in such a specification, when a player with a fast operation speed is playing, the performance will develop (change) to the upper limit stage in the performance early, and if the upper limit stage is a stage indicating low expectation, there is a problem that this may ruin the interest of the player. Furthermore, when a player with a slow operation speed is playing, even if the player is actively operating, the operation effective period may end before the specified number of operations to develop to the upper limit development mode is performed, which may ruin the interest of the player.

In contrast, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the number of monsters to be defeated (deducted) by one press is varied according to the remaining valid period, and the longer the remaining valid period, the fewer the number of monsters to be defeated. Therefore, even if the player presses the buttons at a fast pace, it is possible to prevent the number of monsters to be defeated from reaching the lower limit too early. In other words, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the press from stopping at 10 or 4 monsters remaining, which is likely to be set in the case of a miss, and to prevent the player's expectations for a big win from being ruined. This can improve the player's interest in the game. Also, even if a player who presses the buttons slowly is playing, if the player presses the buttons in the latter half of the effective period of consecutive presses, a relatively large number of monsters to be defeated is likely to be selected, so the possibility of reaching the lower limit of the number of monsters can be increased. Therefore, even players who press the buttons slowly can enjoy the interrupt consecutive press performance, which can improve the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 400(a), in a performance in which continuous operations on the PUSH button 10317 are valid, such as an interruption repeated tap performance, the output mode of the sound output each time an operation (press) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the repeated tap valid period of the performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 400(a), each time a press (operation) on the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the repeated tap valid period, sound data corresponding to the press is played on either CN2 or CN3 of the multiple channels provided for playing sound data in the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 423) described later. More specifically, when the first press is detected during the repeated tap valid period, the first sound data (first repeated tap sound) is played on CN2. As shown in FIG. 400(a), the sound data corresponding to this first repeated tap sound is composed of sound data that, when played, outputs the sound "Bisyyy". Also, when a second press is detected during the effective period of consecutive taps, second sound data (second consecutive tap sound) is played for CN3. As shown in FIG. 400(a), the sound data corresponding to the second consecutive tap sound is composed of sound data that outputs the sound "bash" when played. Thereafter, every time a press is detected, control for playing sound data corresponding to the first consecutive tap sound for CN2 and control for playing sound data corresponding to the second consecutive tap sound for CN3 are alternately repeated. In this way, by configuring the device to output sound data corresponding to different sounds every time a press is detected, it is possible to diversify the sound mode during the consecutive taps. In other words, it is possible to prevent the sound mode from becoming monotonous, and therefore it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the effective period of consecutive taps. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the first and second consecutive tapping sounds are simply played back alternately on a single channel (i.e., a configuration in which the output of one sound being played back is stopped and the output of the other sound is repeated), the other sound can be output while maintaining the output state of one sound (the first and second consecutive tapping sounds can be output in an overlapping manner), so that the sound mode during the execution of the consecutive taps can be made more lively. More specifically, when the first and second consecutive tapping sounds are played back alternately on a single channel, when a player with a short interval between consecutive taps performs a consecutive tapping operation, only the beginning parts of each sound data are alternately repeated, resulting in a monotonous sound mode. In contrast, if a configuration is adopted in which multiple sound data are played back in sequence on multiple channels, the output of one sound data played back on one channel is not interrupted, and other sound data can be played back on other channels. In other words, sound based on one sound data and sound based on other sound data can be synthesized and output. This allows the sound to be more diversified, as it is possible to configure the device so that sounds other than the initial part of each sound are more easily output. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, two types of audio data are alternately played on two channels each time a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected, thereby diversifying the audio mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately played on CN1 and CN2 in sequence. This can further diversify the audio mode. In this case, the number of channels for playing audio data is not limited to two, and audio data may be played on three or more channels in sequence. By configuring in this way, the period from when one piece of audio data is played on one channel to when the next piece of audio data is played on the same channel (when the audio data being played is finished) can be made longer, thereby further diversifying the audio mode. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be different depending on the interval between successive taps. Specifically, for example, when a player with a relatively short interval between successive hits (e.g., 0.5 seconds or less) is playing, three types of audio formats may be played in sequence on three channels, whereas when a player with a relatively long interval between successive hits (e.g., longer than 0.5 seconds) is playing, two types of audio data may be played in sequence (alternately) on two channels. With this configuration, the audio output mode can be changed according to the successive hit interval, so that a gameplay feature that allows the successive hit interval to be adjusted can be realized. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, a configuration was made in which one of the continuous tapping sounds was output in conjunction with the continuous tapping operation, but under a predetermined condition, a configuration may be made in which a continuous tapping sound can be output even if a continuous tapping operation is not performed. More specifically, for example, if the continuous tapping sound output last during the effective period of the continuous tapping operation was the first continuous tapping sound, the second continuous tapping sound may be output after the operation is completed. By configuring in this way, even if the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound were output as a set in response to the continuous tapping operation, the last sound output becomes the first continuous tapping sound (i.e., the paired second continuous tapping sound is not output), and it is possible to suppress the sound mode from becoming half-finished. Therefore, the sound mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last continuous tapping sound output was the first continuous tapping sound, the control to output the second continuous tapping sound after the operation may be configured to be set only during the execution of a variation display (for example, a jackpot variation) corresponding to a predetermined variation type (a lottery result). By configuring it in this way, for players who want to know whether or not the specified variation type is present, the last sound to be output during the interrupt rapid-fire performance is deliberately set to the first rapid-fire sound, making it possible to realize a game feature. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, the first and second consecutive tapping sounds are alternately output regardless of the interval between the player's consecutive taps, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a consecutive tapping operation is detected when no sound is being played, the first consecutive tapping sound may be output without fail. In other words, if the interval between consecutive taps is too long and the next consecutive tapping operation is executed after the playback of one consecutive tapping sound has ended, only the first consecutive tapping sound may be continuously output. This configuration allows players who wish to diversify the sound style to perform consecutive tapping operations at a faster pace, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt consecutive tapping performance.

Next, referring to FIG. 400(b), the correspondence between the pressing timing during the effective period of the repeated tapping of the interruption repeated tapping performance and the subtraction number of monsters will be described. In the example of FIG. 400, the correspondence in the interruption repeated tapping performance of a type in which a maximum of 100 monsters can be defeated will be described as an example. FIG. 400(b) is a graph showing the correspondence between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) at the time when the pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected and the number of monsters defeated (vertical axis). As shown in FIG. 400(b), the later the timing of the pressing, the greater the number of monsters subtracted (number of monsters defeated). This makes it possible to prevent the number of monsters from being defeated early to the lower limit even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace. In other words, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the pressing from stopping at 10 or 4 remaining, which is likely to be set in the case of a miss, and to prevent the player's expectation of a big win from being damaged. This can increase the player's interest in the game. Also, even if a player who presses the buttons slowly is playing, pressing the buttons in the latter half of the effective period of rapid tapping makes it easier to select a relatively large number of monsters to defeat, increasing the possibility of reaching the lower limit of the number of monsters. Therefore, even players who press the buttons slowly can enjoy the interrupt rapid tapping effect, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

The correspondence between the pressing timing and the number of monsters to be subtracted is not limited to that shown in FIG. 400(b) and can be determined arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, by making the slope smaller (e.g., halving it) with respect to the correspondence shown in FIG. 400(b), it is possible to make it more difficult to subtract the monsters until the lower limit of the number of monsters is reached, even if the player actively performs consecutive taps. Therefore, it is possible to make the player perform consecutive taps more seriously, and it is possible to further increase the player's motivation to participate in the interrupt consecutive tapping performance. On the other hand, on the other hand, if the slope is made larger, it becomes relatively easy to subtract the number of monsters until the lower limit of the number of monsters is reached by consecutive taps, so that even a player who is not good at consecutive tapping can easily confirm the lower limit of the number of monsters. Therefore, even a player who is not good at consecutive tapping can be actively allowed to participate in the interrupt consecutive tapping performance. In addition, in this first control example, the correspondence between the pressing timing and the subtraction number of the monster is configured to be a proportional relationship (linear function), but the designer can set any correspondence, such as a quadratic function correspondence, a logarithmic function correspondence, or an exponential function correspondence. The correspondence may also be configured to differ depending on the type of interrupt rapid-fire effect. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to realize a gameplay that allows the player to predict the likelihood of a jackpot from the progress of the subtraction number during rapid-fire, thereby further increasing the player's interest in the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 401, the change in the presentation state over time during the execution of a variable display presentation in which an interrupt rapid-hit presentation is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 401(a), the change in the presentation state over time during the execution of a variable display presentation in which an interrupt rapid-hit presentation is not executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 401(a), when a variable display in which an interrupt rapid-hit presentation is not set is executed, the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal variable display is executed, the variable display BGM (music 1) corresponding to the normal variable display is played in a loop. This music 1 is made up of three melody parts, parts A, B, and C, and is configured to be played in a loop for 10 seconds, so that the playback position is exactly at the end when 10 seconds have elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 401(a), a normal reach occurs after 10 seconds have elapsed, and the display changes to that of a normal reach. When this normal reach occurs, as shown in FIG. 401(a), the sound is switched to the background music (music 2) that corresponds to the normal reach fluctuation. As with music 1, the playback time of music 2 is set so that it ends in time with the normal reach performance by playing it in a loop.

In contrast, in a variable display performance in which an interruption continuous tapping performance occurs before a normal reach performance occurs, as shown in FIG. 401(b), the normal variable display performance is interrupted and the interruption continuous tapping performance begins (is interrupted) two seconds after the normal variable display performance begins. When the interruption continuous tapping performance is executed, not only the display mode (normal variable display performance) but also the sound (normal variable display BGM) is interrupted. Then, nine seconds after the start of the fluctuation (seven seconds after the start of the interruption continuous tapping performance), the interruption continuous tapping performance ends, and the normal variable display performance and variable display BGM are resumed from the interrupted point. After that, 17 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the normal variable display ends and a normal reach occurs. That is, a normal reach occurs after a total of 10 seconds of normal variable display is executed. After the development into a normal reach, the transition of the display mode is the same as that in a variable display in which an interruption continuous tapping performance is not set (see FIG. 401(a)), so a description thereof is omitted here.

In addition, in the variable display performance in which an interruption rapid-hit performance occurs after the occurrence of a normal reach performance, as shown in FIG. 401(c), after the normal variable display is executed for 10 seconds, the display mode transition of the variable display performance without the interruption rapid-hit performance is the same as that of the variable display performance without the interruption rapid-hit performance (see FIG. 401(a)). Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the development to the normal reach performance, the normal reach performance is interrupted and the interruption rapid-hit performance is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the 7-second interruption rapid-hit performance ends, the interrupted normal reach performance is resumed. Note that when the interruption rapid-hit performance is executed after the occurrence of a reach, only the display mode is interrupted, and the sound output mode is maintained as it is. In other words, the configuration is such that while the playback of the BGM for the reach performance is continued, the BGM for the interruption rapid-hit performance is played on other channels (e.g., CN2 to CN4). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the relatively lively BGM for the reach performance from suddenly being interrupted, which may cause a player to feel uncomfortable.

In this first control example, as the variation type in which a normal reach occurs, a normal reach with a variation time of 30 seconds (miss normal reach A, win normal reach A) and a normal reach with a variation time of 37 seconds (miss normal reach B, win normal reach B) are provided. That is, different variation types with different variation times are set for the seven seconds that is the presentation time of the interruption continuous hitting presentation. And, the interruption continuous hitting presentation is configured so that whether or not it can be executed is selected by lottery only in the case of a variation type with a variation time of 37 seconds. By configuring in this way, it is possible to fill exactly 37 seconds of variation time by combining the presentation mode (30 seconds' worth of presentation mode) that can be set for a 30-second variation pattern and the presentation mode of the interruption continuous hitting presentation. That is, when the interruption continuous hitting presentation is set, there is no need to provide a dedicated presentation mode, so display data and audio data can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, for the miss variation type where no reach occurs and the variation type that develops into a super reach, multiple types with a variation time that differs by 7 seconds are set, but the interrupt rapid-hit effect can only be set for the variation type that is 7 seconds longer. This allows the 7-second long variation time to be filled just by combining the presentation mode that can be selected for the variation type that is 7 seconds shorter with the presentation mode of the interrupt rapid-hit effect, so that the presentation can be executed appropriately without increasing the memory capacity of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the details will be described later, but in this first control example, the main control unit 110 determines the variation time of the first pattern to indicate the result of the special pattern lottery when the special pattern lottery is executed, and notifies the voice lamp control unit 113 of the determined variation time by the variation pattern command. The voice lamp control unit 113 selects a variation display performance of a performance period that matches the variation time notified by the variation pattern command, and executes the variation display performance of the third pattern in synchronization with the variation display of the first pattern. The variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating the basic variation time and an additional time command indicating the additional variation time, and whether the variation time is 7 seconds longer is notified by the additional time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of a variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds is notified as the additional variation time. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern of a 37-second fluctuation time is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as the basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as the additional fluctuation time. In other words, it is configured so that it is possible to identify whether or not the fluctuation type is 7 seconds longer depending on the notification content of the additional time command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the fluctuation type is subject to a lottery for whether or not to execute an interruption rapid-fire performance simply by checking the content of the additional time command. In addition, when it is decided to execute an interruption rapid-fire performance, the fluctuation time can be filled just by setting a performance mode corresponding to the fluctuation time notified by the basic time command (a fluctuation time 7 seconds shorter). Therefore, without preparing a performance mode dedicated to the interruption rapid-fire performance, the end timing of the performance mode and the end timing of the fluctuation display performance can be easily matched, so a suitable performance mode can be provided.

Next, referring to Fig. 402 to Fig. 403, the reserved balls all-at-once change effect, which is one type of interesting effect in this first control example, will be described. This reserved balls all-at-once change effect is an effect that may be executed when there are multiple reserved balls, and at least some of the reserved balls all-at-once patterns are changed to a display mode with a high expectation based on one operation by the player. Fig. 402 to Fig. 403 will explain an example in which there are four reserved balls, and the reserved balls all-at-once change effect is executed in a state in which the second reserved balls pattern Hz2 is changed to a blue display mode and the third reserved balls pattern Hz3 is changed to a green display mode. The display mode of the reserved balls pattern is configured so that the expectation of a jackpot increases in the order of white, blue, green, and red. The display mode of the reserved balls pattern is basically determined based on various random numbers (counter values) obtained based on the start winning when the start winning (a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640) is detected. More specifically, the system predicts (reads ahead) the outcome of the special symbol lottery and the type of change in advance from various random numbers obtained at the time of the start winning, and then draws a lottery for which display mode the reserved ball count symbol will be set to with a lottery probability according to the prediction result (read-ahead result). In this lottery, the system controls so that the higher the expected lottery result, the higher the probability that the reserved ball count symbol will be set to the expected mode. Note that since the timing of the start winning is variable depending on the player's playing situation (the pace of launching game balls, etc.), the reserved ball collective change effect is executed independently of the variable display effect. In other words, it is an effect that may be executed across the variable periods of multiple variable display effects (it may even fit within one variable period).

Figure 402(a) is a diagram showing the display state when the reserved ball batch change effect is executed. This reserved ball batch change effect may be executed if there are multiple reserved balls at the time a new start winning is detected. When the reserved ball batch change effect is executed, first, a reserved ball change character HC, which indicates the start of the reserved ball batch change effect, is displayed and framed in from the top of the display screen. As shown in Figure 402(a), the part of the reserved ball change character HC that corresponds to the face is displayed in a manner that imitates the PUSH button 10317. The display state of this reserved ball change character HC can suggest to the player in advance that an effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 will be executed.

After the reserved ball change character HC appears (enters the frame), as shown in FIG. 402(b), the display mode of each reserved ball number pattern Hz1 to Hz4 is changed to resemble a rock. In other words, the expectation level indicated by the reserved ball number pattern (display color of the reserved ball number pattern) is temporarily changed to a concealed state. Also, a speech bubble image FG resembling a speech bubble is displayed above the reserved ball change character HC, and the words "PUSH BUTTON TO UPGRADE RESERVED RANK!?" are displayed inside the speech bubble image FG. This display mode allows the player to easily understand that by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the expectation level (display color) of any of the reserved ball number patterns will increase.

Figure 403(a) shows the display state when the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during the execution of the batch reserved ball change performance. As shown in Figure 403(a), when the player presses the PUSH button 10317, the rocks around all reserved ball number symbols that have been changed to a display state imitating rocks are blown away, and the display state of the reserved ball number symbols returns to the normal display state. At this time, the expectation level indicated by at least some of the reserved ball number symbols increases compared to before the occurrence of the batch reserved ball change performance. The example of Figure 403(a) shows the case where the second reserved ball number symbol Hz2, which was set to a blue display state before the execution of the batch reserved ball change performance, is changed to a red display state after the batch reserved ball change performance.

By executing this batch-change presentation of reserved balls, it is determined that the expectation level indicated by at least one reserved ball number symbol will increase, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation for a big win. Furthermore, since it is not known which reserved ball number symbol will change (increase expectation level) until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, the player can operate the PUSH button 10317 in anticipation of which reserved ball number symbol will change. Furthermore, since the expectation level is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the timing of the notification can be adjusted to suit the player's preference. This improves convenience for the player.

Figure 403 (b) shows a state in which the reserved ball change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the valid period of the reserved ball batch change performance. When the reserved ball change character HC fades out of the screen, even if the operation valid period in the reserved ball batch change performance remains, the valid period is interrupted. Therefore, as shown in Figure 403 (b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, the performance in which the expectation level of each reserved ball number pattern changes (see Figure 403 (a)) will not be executed. This performance in which the mini character is absent is executed, for example, when another operation performance involving an operation on the PUSH button 10317 conflicts with the reserved ball batch change performance. The absence of the reserved ball change character HC corresponding to the reserved ball batch change performance makes it easy for the player to understand that the operation valid period has been temporarily interrupted. Therefore, in the reserved ball batch change performance, it is possible to suppress the player from mistakenly operating the PUSH button 10317 as valid, and feeling dissatisfied with the performance not progressing. This allows for a more optimal presentation.

<Electrical configuration in first control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to Fig. 404. Fig. 404 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. Note that in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are transmitted in only one direction from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

The main control device 110 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second pattern display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 405) that stores various counters for controlling these processes.

Now, referring to FIG. 405, we will explain the counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform the jackpot lottery, set the display of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and draw the display results of the second pattern display device 83.

The special win random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the jackpot lottery, the special win type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the fall lottery counter C4 used for the fall lottery from the special symbol's high probability state, the change type counter CS1 used for selecting the change pattern, and the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the special win random number counter C1. In addition, the normal win random number counter C5 is used for drawing the normal symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the normal win random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 434), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the special winning random number counter C1, special winning type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, fall lottery counter C4, and fluctuation type counter CS1 in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and in each of these areas, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the change type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a special pattern reserved ball execution area, and the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the change type counter CS1, which are the targets of the lottery execution, are stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal pattern reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved areas 1 to 4), and in each of these areas, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is stored in accordance with the timing of the game ball passing through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be explained in detail. The special random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within a specified range (e.g., 0 to 999) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 999 for a counter that can take values from 0 to 999). In particular, when the special random number counter C1 goes around once, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special random number counter C1.

In addition, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the special win random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the special win random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. This initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 434).

The value of the special winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and when a gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203. On the other hand, when a gaming ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

The value of the random number that results in a special symbol jackpot is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and when the value of the special jackpot random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that results in a jackpot set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined that a special symbol jackpot has occurred. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a is divided into two types: one for when the probability of a special symbol is low (the period when the special symbol is in a low probability state) and one for when the probability of a special symbol jackpot is higher than the low probability (the period when the special symbol is in a special probability state), and the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot included in each is set differently (see FIG. 407(a)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a jackpot different, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol is in a low probability state and when the special symbol is in a high probability state.

The special winning type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by one within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 99) and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the special winning type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (the special symbol reserved ball execution area when a lottery for a special symbol is not being executed). On the other hand, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the special symbol reserved ball execution area when a lottery for a special symbol is not being executed).

Here, if the value of the special winning random number counter C1 stored in the special pattern reserved ball execution area is not a random number that results in a jackpot for the special pattern, in other words, if it is a random number that results in a miss for the special pattern, the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern displayed on the first pattern display device 37 will be that of a miss for the special pattern.

On the other hand, if the value of the special win random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area is a random number that results in a special symbol jackpot, the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be that of a special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the jackpot will be the display mode indicated by the value of the special win type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b.

The special win random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 999. In this special win random number counter C1, when the probability of a special symbol is low, there are four random number values that result in a special symbol jackpot, and these random number values "0 to 3" are stored in a special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability (see FIG. 407(a)). In this way, when the probability of a special symbol is low, the total number of random number values that result in a jackpot is 4 out of a total of 1000, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is "1/250". The random number value (counter value) that results in a jackpot is the same for the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol.

On the other hand, when the probability of a special symbol is high, there are eight random numbers that will result in a special symbol jackpot, and these values, "4 to 11," are stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability (Figure 407 (a)). Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is high, the total number of random numbers that will result in a jackpot is 8 out of a total of 1000, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is 1/125.

The value of the special win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter with a range of 0 to 99. As shown in FIG. 408(b), if a jackpot is awarded by drawing the first special symbol and the value of the special win type counter C2 is "0 to 9", the jackpot type is "jackpot A" (15-round guaranteed jackpot). If the value is "10 to 49", the jackpot type is "jackpot B" (5-round guaranteed jackpot), and if the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "jackpot C" (5-round normal jackpot).

On the other hand, if the second special symbol is selected as the jackpot and the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is between 0 and 79, the jackpot type will be "jackpot D" (15-round guaranteed jackpot). If the value is between 80 and 99, the jackpot type will be "jackpot E" (15-round regular jackpot).

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to determine one of five jackpot types (jackpots A to E) based on the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the special jackpot type counter C2.

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 250, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 250). In this embodiment, the stop type of the stop pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3. As the stop type, for example, a "reach before and after" in which the final stop pattern stops just one before and after the reach pattern after the reach occurs, a "reach other than before and after" in which the final stop pattern stops other than before and after the reach pattern after the reach occurs, and a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs, etc. are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (in the special pattern reserved ball execution area when the lottery for the special pattern is not being executed). In addition, when a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (or the special pattern reserved ball execution area if the lottery for the special pattern is not being executed).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (i.e., 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines the rough display mode, such as the so-called normal reach and super reach. Specifically, the display mode is determined by determining the variation time of the pattern variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and detailed pattern variation mode of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main processing (see FIG. 434) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the main processing. Note that the variation pattern table 202b (see FIG. 409(a)), which stores the random number value that determines one variation time of the pattern variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1, is provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110.

Next, referring to FIG. 409 and FIG. 410, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 409(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 409(a), the variation pattern selection table 202b in this first control example is composed of at least a normal table 202b1 that is referenced to determine the variation time of the pattern variation to show the lottery result of the special pattern when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in the normal state, and a special pattern/time-saving table 202b2 that is referenced to determine the variation time of the pattern variation when a lottery for a special pattern is executed in the game state (special pattern state and time-saving state) in which the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set.

First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 409(b). FIG. 409(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202b1. In the normal table 202b1, various variation patterns are defined in accordance with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the variation patterns. In addition, when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a hit, a variation pattern is set corresponding to the determined jackpot type (the jackpot type determined by the acquired value of the special hit type counter C2 from the jackpot type selection table 202d). Specifically, when the type of the special symbol (pattern type) is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the hit/miss judgment result is a jackpot, the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50", and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "0 to 180", a win normal reach A with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When this winning normal reach A is determined, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, when this winning normal reach A is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, the interruption continuous tapping performance (see FIG. 399) is not executed. Also, when the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50" and the acquired value of the variation type selection counter CS1 is "181 to 198", a winning normal reach B with a variation time of 37 seconds is specified as a variation pattern. When this winning normal reach B is determined, a combination command indicating a base time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when this winning normal reach B is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, as described above, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the interruption continuous tapping performance (see FIG. 399).

Also, as shown in FIG. 409(b), when the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "51 to 250" and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 150", a winning super reach A with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and when the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is in the range of "151 to 198", a winning super reach B with a fluctuation time of 67 seconds is specified. In the winning super reach A, the additional time is 0 seconds, so there is no possibility of an interrupt rapid-hit performance being executed, whereas in the winning super reach B, an additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is notified to the sound lamp control device 113, so a lottery is drawn to see whether or not an interrupt rapid-hit performance can be executed.

Similarly, when the symbol type is special symbol 1 and the result of the win/loss judgment is a miss, as shown in FIG. 409(b), a variation pattern is specified in which the variation time is set to 8 to 67 seconds depending on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the variation type counter CS1. Even in the case of a miss, in a variation pattern in which an additional time command corresponding to an additional time of 7 seconds is specified, the sound lamp control device 113 draws a lottery to determine whether or not to execute the interrupt rapid-hit performance, while in a variation pattern in which an additional time command corresponding to an additional time of 0 seconds is specified, the interrupt rapid-hit performance is not executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 409(b), when the symbol type is special symbol 2, if the hit/miss judgment result is a hit (jackpot D, jackpot E), regardless of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, a hit long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and if the hit/miss judgment result is a miss, regardless of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1, a miss long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds is specified. This is intended to suppress irregular playing methods of hitting the right during normal times by worsening the playing efficiency when hitting the right to execute a lottery for the second special symbol, which has a favorable distribution of jackpots under normal conditions (i.e., a high probability of winning a special jackpot).

Next, the contents of the table 202b2 for the probability change and time reduction will be described with reference to FIG. 410. In the table 202b2 for the probability change and time reduction, various change patterns are set in accordance with the results of the lottery for the special symbols, as shown in FIG. 410, and the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the change type counter CS1 are assigned to each of the change patterns. The table 202b2 for the probability change and time reduction is different from the table 202b1 for the normal use only in that a relatively short change time is easily set, and that a common change time is selected for the lottery for the first special symbol and the lottery for the second special symbol, so a detailed description of this is omitted here. By configuring the table 202b2 so that a short change time is easily set, the lottery for the special symbol can be executed more efficiently than in other game states during the probability change state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, and during the time reduction state.

Returning to FIG. 405 for further explanation, the normal win random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter that increments by one within the range of, for example, 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after it reaches a maximum value (i.e., 239). When the normal win random number counter C5 goes around once, the value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the normal win random number counter C5. In this embodiment, the value of the normal win random number counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically, for each timer interrupt process, and is obtained when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the through gate 67, and is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that results in a winning normal symbol is specified in the normal winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 407(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and when the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 matches the value of the random number that results in a winning that is specified in the normal winning random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol is a winning symbol. In addition, this normal winning random number table is divided into two types: one for low probability of normal symbols (period in which the normal symbol is in the normal state) and one for high probability of normal symbols that are more likely to win than the low probability (period in which the normal symbol is in the time-saving state), and the number of random numbers that result in a big win included in each type is set differently (see FIG. 407(b)). In this way, by making the number of random numbers that result in a winning symbol different, the probability of winning is changed between low probability of normal symbols and high probability of normal symbols.

As shown in FIG. 407(b), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are two random numbers that result in a winning normal symbol, and the values are "5, 6." Thus, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 2 out of a total of 240, so the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is "1/120."

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for 30 seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is within the range of "5, 6", it is determined to be a win, and after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, a "circle" pattern is displayed as a stop pattern (second pattern), and the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of a normal pattern, if a normal pattern is hit, the electric device 640a is opened only "0.2 seconds x 1 time", but the opening time and number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of a normal symbol is high, there are 200 random number values that will result in a normal symbol jackpot, with the range being 5 to 204. These random number values are stored in a normal jackpot random number table for high probability situations. Thus, when the probability of a special symbol is low, there are a total of 240 random number values, and the total number of random number values that will result in a jackpot is 200, so the probability of a special symbol jackpot is 1/1.2.

When the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a normal pattern, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is acquired, and the variable display of the normal pattern is executed for three seconds on the second pattern display device 83. If the acquired value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning pattern. In this case, after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, the "○" pattern is displayed as the stop pattern (second pattern), and the electric role 640a is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, when the normal pattern is in a high probability state, the variable display time is very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to when the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and further, the opening period of the electric role 640a is very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), so that the game ball is easily able to enter the second ball entrance 640. In this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the probability of winning a normal symbol is high, the electric device 64a opens only "1 second x 2 times" when a normal symbol wins, but the opening time and number of times can be set as desired. For example, it may open "3 seconds x 2 times."

The normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the normal hit random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see Figure 425) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see Figure 434).

In this way, various counters and the like are provided in the RAM 203, and the main control unit 110 can execute the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as drawing jackpots, setting the displays on the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, and drawing the display results on the second pattern display device 83, depending on the values of these counters and the like.

Returning to FIG. 404, the explanation will continue. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 405, RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags and values of counters, I/O, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on due to the recovery from the power outage; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is performed by the main processing (see FIG. 30) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is performed during the start-up processing (see FIG. 433) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432) as the power outage processing is immediately executed.

Next, the specific contents of ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 406(a). FIG. 406(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of ROM 202 provided in main control device 110 in this embodiment. In ROM 202 of main control device 110, at least a special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, a variable pattern selection table 202b, a normal jackpot random number table 202c, a jackpot type selection table 202d, a drop lottery table 202e, and an opening pattern selection table 202f are stored as part of the fixed value data described above.

The special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) is a data table that specifies the correspondence between the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 and the lottery result. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of judgment values that are judged as a jackpot is specified as "0 to 3," and in the high probability state (high probability state) of the special symbol, the range of judgment values that are judged as a jackpot is specified as "4 to 11" (see FIG. 407(a)). If the value of the first jackpot random number counter C1 obtained based on the start winning matches any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpot specified in this special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)), it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol.

The jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 408(a)) is a data table in which the judgment value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is specified in correspondence with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the jackpot type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 408(a), the jackpot type selection table 202b is composed of at least a special jackpot 1 table 202d1 that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained in the drawing of the first special symbol (drawing of special symbol 1), and a special jackpot 2 table 202d2 that is referenced to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is obtained in the drawing of the second special symbol (drawing of special symbol 2). First, the details of the special jackpot 1 table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 408(a).

As shown in FIG. 408(b), the range of the value of the special win type counter C2 from 0 to 9 is associated with a "jackpot A" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot A" is a jackpot with 15 rounds and a high probability state after the jackpot ends (an opening and closing pattern is set that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area). Of the 100 possible counter values of the special win type counter C2, there are 10 counter values that are "jackpot A", so the rate at which "jackpot A" is determined when a jackpot is selected by drawing the first special symbol is 10% (10/100). This "jackpot A" is the most advantageous jackpot type among jackpots with the first special symbol, since it has the most rounds among jackpots with the first special symbol and a favorable high probability state is granted after the jackpot ends.

The range of the value of the special win type counter C2 from 10 to 49 is also associated with a "jackpot B" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot B" is a jackpot with 5 rounds and a high probability state after the jackpot ends (an opening and closing pattern is set that allows the ball to enter the specific winning port 65a during the period allocated to the V area). Of the 100 possible counter values of the special win type counter C2, 40 are "jackpot B", so the probability of "jackpot B" being determined when the first special symbol is selected is 40% (40/100). Although this "jackpot B" has fewer rounds than "jackpot A", it is a relatively advantageous jackpot type because it is given a favorable high probability state after the jackpot ends.

The range of the value of the special winning type counter C2 from 50 to 99 is also associated with a "jackpot C" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot C" is a jackpot with 5 rounds and a time-saving state after the jackpot ends (an opening and closing pattern is set that makes it impossible for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area). Of the 100 possible counter values of the special winning type counter C2, 50 counter values are "jackpot C", so the probability of "jackpot C" being determined when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the first special symbol is 50% (50/100). This "jackpot C" has the fewest number of rounds, and the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a relatively unfavorable time-saving state, so it is the most unfavorable jackpot type among the jackpots of the first special symbol. It is configured to enter a probability change at a lower rate than .

Next, referring to FIG. 408(c), the details of the special symbol 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 408(c), the range of the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 from 0 to 79 is associated with a "jackpot D" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot D" is a jackpot with 15 rounds, and a high probability state is granted after the jackpot ends (an opening and closing pattern is set that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area). Of the 100 possible counter values of the special jackpot type counter C2, 80 counter values are "jackpot D", so the rate at which "jackpot D" is determined when a jackpot is obtained by drawing the second special symbol is 80% (80/100). This "jackpot D" is the most advantageous jackpot type because it has the most rounds among all jackpots and a favorable high probability state is granted after the jackpot ends.

As shown in FIG. 408(c), the range of the value of the special win type counter C2 from 80 to 99 is associated with a "jackpot E" (see FIG. 408(b)). This "jackpot E" is a jackpot with 15 rounds and a time-saving state after the jackpot ends (an opening and closing pattern is set that makes it impossible for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the period allocated to the V area). Of the 100 possible counter values of the special win type counter C2, there are 20 counter values that are "jackpot E", so the rate at which "jackpot E" is determined when the second special symbol is selected is 20% (20/100). Although this "jackpot E" has the most rounds among all jackpots, it is a jackpot type that is disadvantageous in terms of the game state after the jackpot ends because an unfavorable time-saving state is granted after the jackpot ends.

In this way, in this first control example, when a jackpot is won by drawing the first special symbol, the probability of a special jackpot (jackpot A, B) is determined 50%, while when a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, the probability of a special jackpot (jackpot D) is determined 80%. Therefore, when a jackpot is won by drawing the second special symbol, the player can be made to have a stronger expectation of a special jackpot state. As mentioned above, in this first control example, it is extremely rare (1% of the cases where a special jackpot is won) for the type of jackpot to be clearly indicated to the player. Then, after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state of the normal symbol is maintained until 100 special symbol drawings have been performed. Therefore, since it is difficult for the player to know whether the high probability state or the time-saving state has been set during the period from the end of the jackpot until the 100th drawing of the special symbol has been performed, even if an unfavorable time-saving state has been set, the player can play in the hope of being in the high probability state until the 100th drawing of the special symbol has been performed. Also, if a jackpot is achieved within 100 tries, even if it is a jackpot during the time-saving state, it can be made to feel as if the jackpot has been achieved during the high probability state, so that the probability of entering and the continuation rate of the high probability state are higher than they actually are. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

The normal win random number table 202c (see FIG. 407(b)) is a data table in which the winning judgment value for the normal symbol is specified (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5, 6" is specified as the judgment value for the winning of the normal symbol (see FIG. 407(b)). Also, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, "5 to 204" is specified as the judgment value for the winning of the normal symbol (see FIG. 407(b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 obtained based on the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 and the normal win random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol.

The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 409(a)) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is specified for each display mode. Note that the details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d are as described above in the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1, so a detailed explanation of this will be omitted here.

The fall lottery table 202e is a data table that specifies the judgment value of the fall lottery counter C4 that is judged as a fall. In the special symbol's high probability state, if the value of the fall lottery counter C4 obtained when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (at the time of the initial winning) matches any of the judgment values specified in the fall lottery table 202e, the game is set to transition to the low probability state of the special symbol (to fall).

More specifically, two judgment values, "0" and "1", are defined as judgment values that are judged as falling in the special symbol's high probability state. Here, the fall selection counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of "0 to 999". Of the 1000 possible values of the fall selection counter C4, there are two judgment values that are judged as falling, so the probability of falling (transitioning to a low probability state of the special symbol) in the special symbol's high probability state is 1/500 (2/1000).

In the present embodiment, the fall selection table 202e only specifies a judgment value for judging whether or not a fall will occur in the special symbol's high probability state (a judgment value for the special symbol's high probability state), and does not specify a judgment value for the special symbol's low probability state. This is because it would be a waste of processing to judge whether or not to transition to the special symbol's low probability state when the special symbol's low probability state has already been reached.

In this embodiment, this drop lottery table 202e is compared with the drop lottery counter C4, which is updated periodically, to determine whether or not to transition (drop) from the special symbol high probability state to the special symbol low probability state. In other words, the timing of transition from the high probability state to the time-saving state can be made random. Therefore, when transitioning to the high probability state, the player can play while feeling a sense of tension as they do not know when the high probability state will end, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this first control form, whether or not there will be a transition (fall) from the special symbol high probability state to the special symbol low probability state is determined by lottery (determination), but it may be configured so that a transition to another state can be determined by lottery (determination). For example, whether or not there will be a transition from the normal symbol time-saving state to the normal normal symbol state may be determined by a lottery executed for each change. This allows the number of times the normal symbol time-saving state continues to be random, so that in this case too, the player can play with a sense of tension. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

The opening pattern selection table 202f is a data table in which data is specified for setting a pattern according to the type of jackpot as the opening pattern (opening/closing pattern of the specific winning port 65a) in the fifth round of the jackpot. Although not shown in the figure, in the fifth round of the guaranteed jackpot (jackpot A, B, D), data is read out for setting an opening period (opening period from 5 seconds to 9.5 seconds after the start of the fifth round) during which the distribution device (V role) is placed in a state in which it distributes game balls to the first area (V area) (5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the fifth round) during which the distribution device can reach the distribution device. Meanwhile, in the fifth round of a normal jackpot (jackpots C and E), data is read out to set an open period (4.5 seconds from immediately after the start of the fifth round until 4.5 seconds have passed) during which the distribution device (V device) is placed in a state in which it distributes game balls to the second area (non-V area) (the period from immediately after the start of the fifth round until 5 seconds have passed).

Next, details of RAM 203 will be described with reference to Fig. 406(b). Fig. 406(b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of RAM 203 of the main control unit 110. As shown in FIG. 403(b), the RAM 203 has at least a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a time-saving counter 203g, a special bonus flag 203h, a jackpot start flag 203i, a jackpot in progress flag 203j, a special bonus setting flag 203k, a special bonus passing counter 203m, a winning number counter 203n, a remaining ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a special bonus effective flag 203r, a special bonus effective timer 203s, a discharge number counter 203t, and a miscellaneous memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4), and each of these areas stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3.

More specifically, when a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (initial entry), the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 are obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the available areas of the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) in order of the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings are stored, and the first holding area stores data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a special symbol, the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted (moved) to the special symbol reserved ball special symbol reserved ball execution area (see Figure 405), and a decision such as the lottery for the special symbol is made based on the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in that execution area.

When data is shifted from reserved area 1 to the special pattern reserved ball execution area, reserved area 1 becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in the other reserved areas (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) to the reserved area with the area number one smaller (reserved area 1 to reserved area 3). In this first control example, data is shifted only for the reserved areas in which winning data is stored (reserved area 2 to reserved area 4) in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas, similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b stores each counter value obtained based on the initial winning into the second ball entrance 640. The method of storing the counter values is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4). A normal winning random number counter C5 is stored in each of these areas. More specifically, when the game ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the counter C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) in order starting from the area with the smallest area number (1 to 4). In other words, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the order of winning is maintained and data corresponding to the winning is stored. Note that if data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing new is stored.

After that, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery for a winning normal symbol, the value of counter C5 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (moved) to the execution area, and a determination such as the lottery for a winning normal symbol is made based on the value of counter C5 stored in the execution area.

When data is shifted from the reserved area 1 to the execution area, the reserved area 1 becomes empty, and a shift process is performed to move the winning data stored in other reserved areas to a reserved area with an area number one smaller, just like in the case of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Also, data shifting is only performed for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81) of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37 based on a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S404 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special pattern is executed (see S210 in FIG. 426).

The value of this special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d (the number of reserved ball counts N1 for the variable display of the first special pattern) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a reserved ball count command (see S211 in FIG. 426 and S405 in FIG. 428). The reserved ball count command is a command sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203e is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 can obtain the actual number of reserved balls of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. As a result, even if the reserved ball number of the variable display managed by the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual reserved ball number of the variable display reserved in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the deviation can be corrected by the next received reserved ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and sends a reserved ball number display command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls each time the number of reserved balls changes. The display control device 114 displays a reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by this reserved ball number display command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 (initial winning), up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and each time a game ball enters the second ball entrance 640 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to the maximum value of four (see S410 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 426). The value of this special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, just like the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is a counter that counts up to four reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the game ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is initially set to zero, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls of the variable display increases, it is incremented by one up to a maximum value of four (see S704 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time a new variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S605 in FIG. 430).

When a gaming ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display M) is less than 4, the value of the normal win random number counter C4 is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, when a gaming ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S703 in FIG. 431: No).

The time-saving counter 203g is a counter that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with a normal pattern. If the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or more, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-saving state with a normal pattern. If the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 and the probability of winning flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with a normal pattern. The initial value of this time-saving counter 203g is set to zero, and each time a special pattern is drawn in the main control device 110 and a jackpot is obtained, 100 is set at the end of the jackpot (see S1303 in FIG. 437). In addition, regardless of the type of jackpot, if a jackpot is obtained by drawing a special pattern, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the jackpot (see S310 in FIG. 427). By configuring the value to be set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating a jackpot, it is possible to increase the expectation of a jackpot when behavior occurs that may indicate the end of the time-saving state, such as when the normal symbol is out of position during the variable display executed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

When a lottery is held for a winning normal symbol, the value of the time-saving counter 203g and the state of the special probability flag 203h are referenced, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or greater or the special probability flag 203h is on, it is determined that the time-saving normal symbol is in progress. In this case, a lottery is held for a normal symbol based on the normal hit random number table for high probability (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 and the special probability flag 203h is off, it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol is in progress, and a lottery is held for a normal symbol based on the normal hit random number table for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 430).

The probability variation flag 203h is a flag that indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state for a special symbol. If the probability variation flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state for a special symbol, and if the probability variation flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state for a special symbol. Also, as described above, while in the probability variation state for a special symbol, the time-saving state for a normal symbol is entered. Therefore, if the probability variation flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability variation state for a special symbol and also in a time-saving state for a normal symbol.

The high probability flag 203h is initially set to OFF, and is set to ON at the end of a jackpot if the game ball enters the first area (V area) in the variable winning device 65 in the fifth round of the jackpot (see S1302 in FIG. 437). The high probability flag 203h is also reset to OFF when the lottery result corresponds to a fall during the high probability state (see S305 in FIG. 427) and when the variable display of the jackpot starts (see S310 in FIG. 427).

This probability change flag 203h is referenced in the special symbol change start process to determine whether the game state is in the probability change state or not (see S302 in FIG. 427). Specifically, when the special symbol change start process (FIG. 427, S208) is executed, a lottery for a special symbol is performed. In the special symbol change start process (FIG. 427, S208), the probability change flag 203h is referenced, and if it is on, a fall lottery is first performed, and if it has not fallen, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) for high probability. On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203h is off or the probability change flag 203h is on and it is determined that a fall has occurred by the fall lottery, a lottery for a special symbol is performed based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407(a)) for low probability.

In addition, the probability variable flag 203h is also referenced in the normal symbol variation process to determine whether the game state is in a time-saving state or not (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 430). Specifically, the probability variable flag 203h and the time-saving counter 203g described above are referenced in the normal symbol variation process, and if the probability variable flag 203h is on or the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or more, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a time-saving state, and a lottery for a normal symbol is performed based on the normal win random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407(b)) (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the probability variable flag 203h is off and the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the normal state of the normal pattern is in progress, and the normal pattern is selected based on the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 407(b)) for low probability (see S610 in FIG. 430). In addition, in the normal pattern variation process, the probability variable flag 203h is also referenced when determining the variation time of the normal pattern and the opening time of the electric role 640a in the case of a winning normal pattern (see S614, S620 in FIG. 430).

The jackpot start flag 203i is a flag that indicates whether or not to start a jackpot. If this jackpot start flag 203i is on, it means that it is time to start a jackpot, and if it is off, it means that it is not time to start a jackpot. This jackpot start flag 203i is set on when the timing for the variable display indicating a jackpot to end has arrived (see S217 in FIG. 426). Also, the jackpot start flag 203i is set off when the start of a jackpot is set (see S1103 in FIG. 435).

The jackpot flag 203j is a flag that indicates whether or not a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203j is on, it means that a jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that a jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203j is set to on when a jackpot is generated by drawing a special symbol and a jackpot (special game state) starts (see S1103 in FIG. 435). It is also set to off when the jackpot (special game state) ends (see S1305 in FIG. 437). In the special symbol change process (see FIG. 426), the jackpot flag 203j is referenced to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 426).

The high probability setting flag 203k is a flag that indicates whether or not the game state is to be changed to the high probability state after a jackpot game. In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is to be set to the high probability state is determined by whether or not a game ball has entered the first area (V area) during a jackpot game. Here, when it is detected that a game ball has entered this first area (passing through the high probability switch provided in the first area), the high probability setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415 in FIG. 438). On the other hand, this high probability setting flag 203k is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (see S1305 in FIG. 437). Note that this high probability setting flag 203k is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Also, it is set to OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is in an initialized state.

If the special chance setting flag 203k is set to on when the power is turned on, it may be configured to determine whether the special chance setting flag 203k was passed before the power was turned off, and if it is determined that the special chance setting flag 203k was passed, the special chance setting flag 203k may be set to on and restored. In this case, whether the special chance setting flag was passed before the power was turned off can be determined by whether the special chance passing counter 203m, which will be described later, is greater than 0. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine fraud such as rewriting only the special chance setting flag 203k to on and turning the power back on while the power is off, thereby reducing damage to the gaming establishment.

The probability change passing counter 203m is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability change switch (entered the V area) in one round during a jackpot game (in this embodiment, one round of the jackpot). It is possible to determine whether all game balls that have entered the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by adding up the probability change passing counter 203m and the discharge number counter 203u described later. This probability change passing counter 203m is updated by incrementing by one when the probability change switch is passed (entry into the V area is detected) (S1414 in FIG. 438). In addition, after executing a process to determine whether the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 65 and the number of discharged balls match, it is reset to the initial value "0" (S1511 in FIG. 439). This probability change passing counter 203m is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The winning number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have won in the specific winning hole 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round of a big win game, and is updated by incrementing by one when a win in the specific winning hole 65a is detected (S1403 in FIG. 438). On the other hand, when one round is completed, it is determined whether the number of balls that have won in the variable winning device 65 (the value of the winning number counter 203p) and the number of balls that have been discharged (the total value of the discharge number counter 203u and the special chance passing counter 203m) match, and then it is reset to the initial value "0" (see S1511 in FIG. 439). The value of this winning number counter 203p is backed up when the power is turned off. In addition, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

The remaining ball timer flag 203q is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the ball discharge period after one round has ended and the specific winning port 65a has closed. When this remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to on, it means that it is the ball discharge period. While this remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to on, the remaining ball timer 203r described below is updated by incrementing by one (see S1505 in FIG. 439). The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time since the specific winning port 65a was closed, and is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed.

The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining whether the time required for the game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed when a preset round ends and the specific winning port 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed. In this embodiment, the time required for the game balls that have won the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in this embodiment, a counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is set in advance as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203r. Based on the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203r (0.8 seconds in this embodiment), a determination is made as to whether the number of winning balls in the variable winning device 65 and the number of balls discharged match (S1507 in FIG. 439). If they do not match, an error command is set and a notification is issued to that effect. Therefore, it is possible to notify early that the game balls are stuck in the variable winning device 65. It also prevents fraudulent play by leaving balls inside the variable winning device 65 and letting game balls flow down to the distribution device (V role) when five seconds have elapsed since the start of the fifth round of jackpot C or jackpot E.

If the number of winning balls and the number of balls dispensed do not match, a dedicated flag may be set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the special probability setting flag 203k may not be set to ON even if the game ball passes through the special probability switch. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent the special probability state from being improperly granted.

The high probability activation flag 203s is a flag for determining whether or not the passage (entry) of a game ball through the high probability activation switch (entering the V area) is valid when the V role device is switched to a configuration that cannot be allocated to the first area (V area). When this high probability activation flag 203s is set to on, it indicates that it is a normal period for the game ball to pass through the high probability activation switch.

The special chance valid timer 203t is a counter for counting the time since the special chance valid flag 203s described above is set to ON. This special chance valid timer 203t makes it possible to determine the period required for the V role object to pass through the special chance switch normally after it has been switched to the non-V side arrangement. In this embodiment, the time required for a game ball that has reached the V role object to pass through the special chance switch is 0.3 seconds. The upper limit of the special chance valid timer 203t is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and even if the game ball passes through the special chance switch after that, it is determined to be illegal and is not determined to have passed.

This makes it possible to prevent damage caused by fraud, such as illegally throwing a game ball into the V area and passing it through the probability change switch, or pushing the game ball up from below the probability change switch with a piano wire or the like to pass through, or using radio waves or the like to cause the magnetic sensor to erroneously detect that the ball has passed through.

The dispensed ball counter 203u is a counter for counting the number of game balls dispensed from the variable winning device 65 in one round. This dispensed ball counter 203u is reset to an initial value of 0 after it is determined that the number of balls that have won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of dispensed balls (S1511 in FIG. 439).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values, etc. used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110.

In this way, various counters and flags are provided in the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110.

Next, the method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203, will be described with reference to FIG. 411. FIG. 411 is a diagram showing the method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example.

As shown in FIG. 411, the pachinko machine 10 of this first control example has three game states. That is, there is a normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, a special state shown in the middle of FIG. 411, and a time-saving state shown in the lower part of FIG. 411.

As described above, the normal state indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a normal state of the normal symbol, and is the most unfavorable gaming state for the player because the probability of a jackpot is low and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 (the electric role 640a is difficult to open). Also, the probability of a special symbol being in a high probability state and a normal symbol being in a time-saving state, and is the most favorable gaming state for the player because the probability of a jackpot is high and the game ball frequently enters the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right. Also, the time-saving state indicates a low probability state of the special symbol and a time-saving state of the normal symbol, and is the relatively favorable gaming state for the player because the probability of a jackpot is low but the game ball frequently enters the second ball entrance 640 by hitting to the right.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, there is a possibility of transitioning from the normal state to another state only when a jackpot occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 411, when a jackpot occurs with the first special pattern and either jackpot A or B is selected as the jackpot type, the state transitions to a probability change state after the jackpot ends, provided that the game ball enters the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot. With jackpots A and B, the game ball can be made to enter the V area almost entirely by simply hitting the right in the fifth round. Note that if no game ball enters the V area in the fifth round because the player did not shoot the game ball in the fifth round, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to a time-saving state. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, when jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type with the first special pattern, it is impossible (difficult) to make the game ball enter the V area in the fifth round of the jackpot, so the state transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot ends.

As shown in the interruption of FIG. 411, there is a possibility of transitioning from the probability variable state to another game state when a jackpot is won, or when a player falls in a fall lottery. Specifically, when a jackpot is won in the probability variable state and the jackpot E is determined with a 20% probability, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the time-saving state. Also, if the lottery result of the fall lottery corresponds to a fall before the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times after the probability variable state is set, the game state transitions to the time-saving state. Furthermore, if the lottery result of the fall lottery corresponds to a fall after the lottery for the special symbol is executed 100 times or more after the probability variable state is set, the game state transitions to the normal state. In contrast, when a jackpot is won in the probability variable state and the jackpot D is determined with a 80% probability, the game state after the jackpot ends is set to the probability variable state again (looping the most favorable probability variable state). Therefore, in the probability variation state, the player can play in the hope of hitting the jackpot before the ball falls and hitting the jackpot D.

As shown in the lower part of FIG. 411, the time-saving state transitions to another game state when a jackpot is won, and also when a set number of special symbol lotteries are performed after the jackpot is ended. More specifically, when a jackpot is won in the time-saving state and the jackpot D is determined with a probability of 80%, the game state after the jackpot is ended is set to the most favorable probability state. Also, the game state transitions to the most unfavorable normal state by performing 100 special symbol lotteries since the previous jackpot is ended. In contrast, when the jackpot of the second special symbol is won and the jackpot E is determined with a probability of 20%, the game state after the jackpot is ended is set to the time-saving state again (the time-saving state loops). In the time-saving state, the probability of winning a jackpot is 1/250, the same as in the normal state, so the possibility of winning a jackpot again within 100 times is not very high (the probability of winning a jackpot again is about 33%). Therefore, when the time-saving state is entered, the possibility of transitioning to the normal state increases. As mentioned above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the time-saving state and the probability of winning (the operation other than the probability of winning, such as the operation mode of the electric role 640a, is the same), so while the time-saving state of the normal pattern is set, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the game is in the probability of winning. In other words, even if a time-saving state that is unfavorable compared to the probability of winning (i.e., that is more likely to transition to the normal state) is set, it is possible to make the player feel as if they are playing in the probability of winning, so the player's motivation for playing can be maintained high. This can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

In this way, this first control example can provide a novel gameplay experience that switches between three different game states, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 404, the explanation will continue. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37, the second pattern display device 83, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which include a group of switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. In addition, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 432) is immediately executed as a process during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

When the main control device 110 issues an instruction to launch a game ball, the launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the strength of the game ball launch corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a is equipped with a launch solenoid and electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to operate when certain conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the game ball is off (not operated), the launch solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (illumination section 29-33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable display performance (variable display), performed by the display control device 114. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, the PUSH button 10317, and the like.

The audio and lamp control device 113 also monitors input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, it controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 to change the stage displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or to change the performance content during a super reach, and also instructs the display control device 114. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 so that a rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Here, the rear image refers to the image displayed on the rear side of the third pattern, which is the main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error based on commands from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and sends an error command including the type of error to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display without delay an error message image according to the error type (e.g., a vibration error) indicated by the received error command.

Next, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail. FIG. 412(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a back mode selection table 222b, a reserved change selection table 222c, a change point calculation table 222d, a lump-sum change selection table 222e, a chance charge selection table 222f, a continuation suggestion performance selection table 222g, and an interrupt rapid-fire selection table 222h.

The variation pattern selection table 222a is used by the voice lamp control device 113 to determine more detailed variation content from the rough variation content (variation time, variation type (reach, miss, etc.)) indicated by the variation pattern command output from the main control device 110. This allows even more diverse variation modes to be determined. Here, one of multiple types of variation modes is determined by lottery for the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The back mode selection table 222b is a data table that specifies data for selecting a change in the back mode to indicate the expectation of the probability ...

As shown in FIG. 413, the back mode selection table 222b is composed of at least a table for continuing the special probability which is referenced to select a change in the back mode when the current game state is the special probability state and it has been determined that the reserved state does not contain a selection result corresponding to a fall, a table for not falling which is referenced to select a change in the back mode when the current game state is the special probability state but the reserved state contains a selection result corresponding to a fall, and a table for falling which is referenced to select a change in the back mode when the game state has already fallen to the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 413, the back mode selection table 222b specifies a range of values for the effect selection counter 223y for each combination of the current back mode type and the destination (changed) back mode. Here, the effect selection counter 223y is composed of a random number counter whose value is updated periodically, and is updated to one of the values within the range of "0 to 99" at each update timing. The value of this effect selection counter 223y is used to select the performance mode of various effects. Note that the effect selection counter 223y is provided as a separate and independent random number counter for each type of effect for which a lottery is executed. In other words, the effect selection counter 223y is a general term for the random number counters used in the selection of various effects.

As shown in FIG. 413, in the table for continuing the probability change, the range of values of the performance selection counter 223y "0 to 19" is specified in association with the combination of the current back mode being the cave search mode and the transition destination back mode being the temple search mode (mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode). Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the performance selection counter 223y can take, the number of random number values corresponding to the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20, so when the current game state is in the probability change state and the reserved state does not include a lottery result of falling, the rate of transition (change) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20% (20/100). Also, as shown in FIG. 413, the value of the performance selection counter 223y "20, 21" is specified in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 possible random number values of the performance lottery counter 223y, two random number values are associated with a mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode. Therefore, when the current game state is in a special state and the pending lottery results do not include a fall, the probability of transitioning (changing) from cave exploration mode to super temple exploration mode is 2% (2/100). Note that if the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is outside the above range (i.e., the range of "22 to 99"), no mode transition will occur. In other words, the cave exploration mode will be maintained.

In this way, when the probability variation continuation table is referenced while the cave exploration mode is set (when the probability variation state is in progress and the reserved lottery does not include a fall result), there is a 22% chance of transitioning from cave exploration mode to another mode each time the variable display is executed. In other words, the number of times the cave exploration mode continues is reduced to an average of about 5 times. In other words, even if the cave exploration mode is set, it transitions to another mode with higher expectations in a relatively short period of time, so the period set in cave exploration mode tends to be short (the proportion of times the player stays in a mode with higher expectations tends to be high). Therefore, the longer the period of time spent in a mode with higher expectations, the higher the player's sense of expectation that the probability variation state will continue, and the higher the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the table for continuing the probability change, the value range of the performance selection counter 223y, "0", is specified in correspondence with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. Of the 100 random number values (counter values) that the performance selection counter 223y can take, the number of random number values corresponding to the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1, so when the current game state is in the probability change state and the reserved state does not include a lottery result of falling, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100). Also, as shown in FIG. 413, the value range of the performance selection counter 223y, "1 to 10", is specified in correspondence with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 possible random number values of the performance lottery counter 223y, 10 random number values are associated with a mode transition from temple search mode to super temple search mode. Therefore, when the current game state is in a special state and the pending lottery results do not include a fall, the probability of transitioning (changing) from temple search mode to super temple search mode is 10% (10/100). Note that if the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is outside the above range (i.e., the range of "11 to 99"), no mode transition will occur. In other words, temple search mode will be maintained.

In this way, when the temple exploration mode is set and the table for continuing the special chance is referenced (when the special chance state is in effect and the reserved lottery result does not include a fall), there is a 1% chance of transitioning to the cave exploration mode each time the variable display is executed, and a 10% chance of transitioning to the super temple mode, where the special chance state is confirmed and it is confirmed that the reserved lottery result does not include a fall. In other words, the configuration makes it difficult to transition to the cave exploration mode, which has a low expectation, and easy to transition to the super temple mode, which has a high expectation.

Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the table for continuing the probability change, the value of the performance selection counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. Also, the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223y, "0 to 4", is associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode. Of the 100 random number values that the performance selection counter 223y can take, the number of random number values associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5, so when the current game state is in the probability change state and the reserved state does not include a lottery result of falling, the rate of transition (change) from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). Note that if the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223y is other than the above (i.e., the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. In other words, the super temple search mode is maintained.

In this way, when the Super Temple Search Mode is set, there is only a 5% chance of transitioning to another mode, and even if the mode does transition, it transitions to the Temple Search Mode, which has a relatively high expectation. Therefore, even if the mode transitions from the Super Temple Mode, which has the highest expectation, to another back mode, the player's sense of anticipation for the special state can be sustained.

Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the table for non-fall, the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223y, "0 to 4", is associated with the mode transition from the cave exploration mode to the temple exploration mode. Of the 100 possible random number values of the performance selection counter 223y, the number of random number values associated with the mode transition from the cave exploration mode to the temple exploration mode is 5. Therefore, when the current game state is in a high probability state and the reserved lottery result includes a fall, the rate of transition (change) from the cave exploration mode to the temple exploration mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance selection counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the cave exploration mode to the super temple exploration mode. Note that if the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223y is other than the above (i.e., the range of "5 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. In other words, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the table for non-fall, the mode transition from the temple exploration mode to the cave exploration mode is specified to correspond to the value range "0 to 9" of the performance lottery counter 223y. Of the 100 random number values that the performance lottery counter 223y can take, the number of random number values that correspond to the mode transition from the temple exploration mode to the cave exploration mode is 10. Therefore, when the current game state is in a high probability state and the reserved lottery result includes a fall, the rate of transition (change) from the temple exploration mode to the cave exploration mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the temple exploration mode to the super temple exploration mode. Note that if the value range of the performance lottery counter 223y is other than the above (i.e., the range of "10 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. In other words, the temple exploration mode is maintained.

Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the table for not falling, the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, the range of the value of the performance lottery counter 223y "0 to 99" is associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode. In other words, when the table for not falling is referenced in a state in which the super temple search mode is set, the mode always transitions to the temple search mode (falls). The table for not falling is referenced in the super temple search mode only when the lottery result of falling was not included in the reserved balls at the start of the previous fluctuation, and the new reserved ball reserved by the start of the current fluctuation display is the lottery result of falling. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result of falling is included, the configuration is such that the mode always transitions to the temple search mode in this case.

In this way, when the table for non-fall is referenced (i.e., when the reserved lottery results include a lottery result corresponding to a fall) and the lottery for transition to the back mode is executed, the rate of mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is lower than when the table for continuing the probability change is referenced, and even if the mode transition occurs to temple exploration mode, the rate of falling back to cave exploration mode is higher. In other words, the rate of stay in cave exploration mode, which has a low expectation, is higher. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay that predicts whether the current game state is in a probability change state by using the rate of stay in cave exploration mode as a clue, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is associated with the value range "0, 1" of the performance selection counter 223y. Of the 100 possible random number values of the performance selection counter 223y, the number of random number values associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 2, so when the current game state is in the time-saving state, the rate of transition (change) from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance selection counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from cave exploration mode to super temple exploration mode. Note that if the value range of the performance selection counter 223y is outside the above range (i.e., the range "2 to 99"), the mode transition does not occur. In other words, the cave exploration mode is maintained.

Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the mode transition from temple exploration mode to cave exploration mode is associated with the value range of the performance selection counter 223y, "0 to 29". Of the 100 possible random number values of the performance selection counter 223y, 30 random number values are associated with the mode transition from temple exploration mode to cave exploration mode. Therefore, when the current game state is in a high probability state and the reserved lottery result includes a fall, the rate of transition (change) from temple exploration mode to cave exploration mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the value of the performance selection counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from temple exploration mode to super temple exploration mode. Note that if the value range of the performance selection counter 223y is outside the above range (i.e., the range of "30 to 99"), the mode transition is not performed. In other words, the temple exploration mode is maintained.

Also, as shown in FIG. 413, in the fallen table, the value of the performance selection counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, the range of the value of the performance selection counter 223y, "0 to 99", is associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode. In other words, when the fallen table is referenced in a state in which the super temple search mode is set, the mode always transitions to the temple search mode (falls), just as when the not-fallen table is referenced. The fallen table is referenced in the super temple search mode only when the previous fluctuation start time was in a high probability state and the current special pattern lottery result was a fall. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained even though the lottery result includes a fall, the configuration is such that the mode always transitions to the temple search mode in this case.

In this way, when the table for fallen balls is referenced (i.e., in the time-saving state) and the lottery for transition to the back mode is executed, the rate of mode transition from cave exploration mode to temple exploration mode is even lower than when the table for not fallen balls is referenced, and even if the mode transition occurs to temple exploration mode, the rate of falling into cave exploration mode is significantly higher. In other words, the rate of stay in cave exploration mode, which has a low expectation, is higher. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gameplay that predicts whether the current game state is in a special state by using the rate of stay in cave exploration mode as a clue, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to Figure 412(a), the explanation will continue. The reserved ball change lottery table 222c is a data table that is referenced when performing a lottery for the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the initial winning, by referring to the pre-reading result executed based on the detection of the initial winning at the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640. The details of this reserved ball change lottery table 222c will be explained with reference to Figure 414(a). Figure 414(a) is a diagram showing the contents of the reserved ball change lottery table 222c.

As shown in FIG. 414(a), the reserved change lottery table 222c specifies the range of values of the performance lottery counter 223y for selecting each reserved pattern mode (white, blue, green, red) for each pre-read result (variation type). More specifically, as shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "long miss", the white reserved pattern mode is specified in correspondence with the range of the performance lottery counter 223y value "0 to 98", and the blue reserved pattern mode is specified in correspondence with the value "99" of the performance lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the green and red reserved pattern modes are not specified in correspondence with the value of the performance lottery counter 223y. Therefore, when the prediction result is a long miss variation type (the main control unit 110 notifies the long miss prediction result by the winning information command), the reserved ball count pattern corresponding to the initial winning is set to a white reserved pattern pattern 99% (99/100), and to a blue reserved pattern pattern 1% (1/100). In other words, in the case of a long miss, the reserved pattern pattern is almost always set to a white one, and it is extremely rare for a reserved change (a reserved pattern pattern other than white) to be set.

As shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "miss normal reach", the value of the performance selection counter 223y is set in the range of "0 to 94" to correspond to a white reserved pattern mode, and the value of the performance selection counter 223y is set in the range of "95 to 99" to correspond to a blue reserved pattern mode. On the other hand, the value of the performance selection counter 223y is not set in the green and red reserved pattern modes. Therefore, when the pre-reading result is a variation type of a miss normal reach, the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the starting winning is set to a white reserved pattern mode at a rate of 95% (95/100), and to a blue reserved pattern mode at a rate of 5% (5/100). In other words, even in the case of a miss normal reach, the reserved pattern mode is set to a relatively high rate, and the reserved change (reserved pattern mode other than white) is set to a low rate.

As shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "missing super reach", the value of the performance selection counter 223y is specified to correspond to the range of "0 to 74" with a white reserved pattern mode, the value of the performance selection counter 223y is specified to correspond to the range of "75 to 89" with a blue reserved pattern mode, the value of the performance selection counter 223y is specified to correspond to the range of "90 to 97" with a green reserved pattern mode, and the value of the performance selection counter 223y is specified to correspond to the range of "98, 99" with a red reserved pattern mode. That is, in the case of the variation type of the missing super reach, which has a long variation time and executes a relatively flashy (lively) performance mode, the rate of the white reserved pattern mode is 75% (75/100), which is lower than other missing variation types, and the rate of the blue reserved pattern mode is 10% (10/100), which is higher. Furthermore, it can also be set to green or red reserved pattern mode. That is, the rate at which the reserved symbol pattern will be green is 8% (8/100), and the rate at which the reserved symbol pattern will be red is 2% (2/100). Therefore, when the reserved symbol pattern is green or red, at least the variation types below the normal reach miss (variation types with low expectation) are denied, so the player's expectation of a big win can be increased.

Also, as shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "Win Normal Reach", a white reserved pattern mode is associated with the value of the performance selection counter 223y in the range of "0 to 74", a blue reserved pattern mode is associated with the range of "75 to 84", a green reserved pattern mode is associated with the range of "85 to 94", and a red reserved pattern mode is associated with the range of "95 to 99". In other words, the proportion of reserved patterns set to green or red is higher than in the case of a miss super reach.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 414(a), for the variation type "Winning Super Reach", a white reserved pattern mode is associated with the value of the performance selection counter 223y in the range of "0 to 49", a blue reserved pattern mode is associated with the range of "50 to 59", a green reserved pattern mode is associated with the range of "60 to 84", and a red reserved pattern mode is associated with the range of "85 to 99". In other words, the occurrence rate of reserved changes is higher than for the variation types of Missing Super Reach and Winning Normal Reach, and the proportion of green or red reserved pattern modes being selected is also higher. Therefore, when the reserved pattern mode is set to green or red, the sense of expectation for a big win can be further increased.

Returning to FIG. 412, the explanation will be continued. The change point calculation table 222d is a data table that is referred to when calculating a change point that is a criterion for determining whether or not to execute the reserved ball batch change performance (see FIG. 402 and FIG. 403). Details will be described later, but this change point is configured to be set to a higher number of points the more the variation type of each reserved ball and the jackpot expectation indicated by the reserved pattern state are diverged (the expectation level is reported too low) at the time of drawing the reserved ball batch change performance. The more the reserved pattern state with a relatively low expectation level is set by the reserved ball batch change performance, the easier it is to execute a performance that improves the expectation level by the reserved ball batch change performance. This makes it possible to more appropriately report the expectation level by the reserved pattern state. Details of this change point calculation table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 414(b).

As shown in FIG. 414(b), the change point selection table 222d specifies a change point corresponding to the type of reserved ball change (pre-read result) and the reserved symbol state set for that reserved ball. In this first control example, if multiple reserved balls are reserved at the time when the start winning is detected, the change point selection table 222d calculates the change point of each reserved ball, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute the reserved ball batch change performance based on the total change point value. In other words, the higher the total change point value, the higher the execution rate of the reserved ball batch change performance. As a result, even if a low expectation level is initially reported in the reserved ball change performance, an opportunity to increase the expectation level can be provided by the reserved ball batch change performance, so the expectation level can be more appropriately reported by the reserved symbol state.

As shown in FIG. 414(b), for the short miss and long miss variation types, a change point of "0" is associated with the reserved symbol state, regardless of the reserved symbol state. Also, for the miss normal reach variation type, a change point of "1" is associated with the reserved symbol state of white reserved, and a change point of "0" is associated with the other reserved symbol states. Also, for the miss super reach variation type, a change point of "2" is associated with the reserved symbol state of white reserved, a change point of "1" is associated with the reserved symbol state of blue reserved, and a change point of "0" is associated with the other reserved symbol states. In addition, for the variation types of normal win reach and super win reach, the change point 3 is associated with the reserved symbol state of white reserve, the change point 2 is associated with the reserved symbol state of blue reserve, the change point 1 is associated with the reserved symbol state of green reserve, and the change point 0 is associated with the reserved symbol state of red reserve.

In this way, in this first control example, the more reserved balls of a high expectation variation type are set to reserved pattern configurations with low expectation, the more change points there are. In other words, the more room there is to improve the expectation of the reserved pattern configuration, the more change points there are, making it easier to allow the execution of a batch reserved change performance. By configuring it in this way, a more appropriate expectation level can be notified based on the reserved pattern configuration.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), the explanation continues. The batch change lottery table 222e is a data table that is referenced when drawing a lottery for whether or not to execute the pending batch change performance. Details of this batch change lottery table 222e will be explained with reference to FIG. 415(a). FIG. 415(a) is a diagram showing the contents of this batch change lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 415(a), the batch change lottery table 222e specifies the range of values of the performance lottery counter 223y for which the execution of the pending batch change performance is determined, in correspondence with each total value of the change points. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415(a), the value of the performance lottery counter 223y is not associated with a total value of 0 for the change points. In addition, the value of the performance selection counter 223y "0 to 9" is associated with a total change point value of 1, the value of the performance selection counter 223y "0 to 24" is associated with a total change point value of 2, and the value of the performance selection counter 223y "0 to 49" is associated with a total change point value of 3 or more. In other words, if the change point is 1, there is a 10% chance that the reserved batch change performance will be selected, if the change point is 2, there is a 25% chance that the reserved batch change performance will be selected, and if the change point is 3, there is a 50% chance that the reserved batch change performance will be selected.

In this way, in this first control example, the higher the total change points are (a reserved ball with a high expectation change type is set with a reserved pattern appearance with a low expectation), the higher the probability of deciding to execute the reserved ball batch change performance. As a result, the greater the room for improving the expectation of the reserved pattern appearance, the more change points there are, making it easier to allow the execution of the reserved ball batch change performance. By configuring it in this way, a more appropriate expectation level can be notified based on the reserved pattern appearance.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), we continue the explanation. The chance charge lottery table 222f is a data table that is referenced to draw lots for whether or not a chance charge effect will be executed. Details of this chance charge lottery table 222f will be explained with reference to FIG. 415(b). FIG. 415(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the chance charge lottery table 222f. As shown in FIG. 415(b), the chance charge lottery table 222f specifies, for each variation type, a correspondence between the number of reserved balls and the range of values of the effect lottery counter 223y that determines whether a chance charge effect will be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation patterns of a missed normal reach and a missed super reach, a value range of "0 to 4" of the performance selection counter 223y is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 0 and 1. A value range of "0 to 14" of the performance selection counter 223y is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 2, and a value range of "0 to 24" of the performance selection counter 223y is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 3 or more. In other words, if the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, there is a 5% chance that a chance charge performance will be executed, if the number of reserved balls is 2, there is a 15% chance that a chance charge performance will be executed, and if the number of reserved balls is 3 or more, there is a 25% chance that a chance charge performance will be executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation pattern of the winning normal reach, the value range of the performance selection counter 223y "0 to 34" is specified in correspondence with the number of reserved balls of 0 and 1, while the value of the performance selection counter 223y is not associated with the number of reserved balls of 2 or more. In other words, if the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, the execution of the chance charge performance is determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of reserved balls is 2 or more, the execution of the chance charge performance is not determined. In other words, when the number of reserved balls is 1 or less, the decision rate of the chance charge performance is higher than in the losing variation pattern. In addition, the reason why the chance charge performance is not executed when the number of reserved balls is 2 or more is to suppress the malfunction in which the spirit gauge is too much accumulated and a jackpot starts before it is consumed. In other words, in the case of the winning normal reach, the variation time is relatively short (there are few opportunities to execute the chance up performance), so there is a high possibility that the spirit gauge will accumulate beyond the timing when the chance up is possible. And the number of spirit gauges accumulated in the chance charge performance is determined only according to the number of reserved balls. In other words, the more balls reserved, the more likely it is that a higher Spirit Gauge number will be set. Therefore, in this control example, in a situation where the fluctuation results in a win, if there are a large number of reserved balls, the execution of the chance charge effect is avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the problem of a jackpot starting before the Spirit Gauge number is completely consumed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 415(b), in the variation pattern of the winning super reach, the value range of the performance selection counter 223y "0 to 49" is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 0 to 2, and the value range of the performance selection counter 223y "0 to 9" is defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 3. On the other hand, the value of the performance selection counter 223y is not defined in association with the number of reserved balls of 4. In other words, if the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, the execution of the chance charge performance is determined at a rate of 50%, if the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution of the chance charge performance is determined at a rate of 10%, while if the number of reserved balls is 4, the execution of the chance charge performance is not determined. In other words, if the number of reserved balls is 2 or less, the determination rate of the chance charge performance is higher than the variation pattern of the losing or the variation pattern of the winning normal reach. Also, if the number of reserved balls is 3, the execution rate of the chance charge performance is lower, and if the number of reserved balls is 4, the chance charge performance is not executed. This is intended to prevent a glitch where a jackpot starts before the spirit gauge is completely used up, just like with a normal hit reach.

Returning to FIG. 412(a), we will continue the explanation. The continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g is a data table that is referenced when selecting the effect scenario of the continuation suggestion effect that is executed over the 96th to 99th variable display effects after the end of the jackpot (i.e., after the start of the time-saving state of the normal pattern). The details of this continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g will be explained with reference to FIG. 416.

Figure 416 is a diagram showing the contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g. As shown in Figure 416, the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g is composed of at least a continuation confirmation table that is referenced when it is confirmed that the special state will continue until the end of the continuation suggestion effect, a high continuation table that is referenced when the reserved balls are not reserved until the end of the continuation suggestion effect, but it is confirmed that the special state will be maintained within the reserved balls, and a non-continuation table that confirms that the time-saving state will be in effect when the continuation suggestion effect ends. Each table specifies multiple combinations (scenarios) of performance modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variable displays.

As shown in Fig. 416, the continuation confirmation table specifies a range of values for the performance selection counter 223y in association with each of the seven scenarios, "01H" to "07H." Specifically, as shown in Fig. 416, the value "0 to 9" of the performance selection counter 223y is specified in association with the performance scenario "01H" in which a weak attack with low expectation (see Fig. 393(a)) is executed in the 96th to 98th variable displays, and a strong attack with high expectation (see Fig. 393(b)) is executed in the 99th variable display to break through the door 806. In addition, a value of "10 to 19" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with a presentation scenario "02H" in which a weak attack (see FIG. 393(a)) is executed in the 96th and 97th changing display, and a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed in the 98th and 99th changing display, thereby breaking through the door 806. A value of "20 to 59" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with a presentation scenario "03H" in which a weak attack (see FIG. 393(a)) is executed in the 96th changing display, and a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed in the 97th to 99th changing display, thereby breaking through the door 806. A value of "60 to 89" of the performance lottery counter 223y is defined in association with a presentation scenario "04H" in which a strong attack (see FIG. 393(b)) is executed in all of the 96th to 99th changing displays, thereby breaking through the door 806. In other words, the selection rate of a performance scenario with a low number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of a performance scenario with a high number of strong attacks is high.

As shown in FIG. 416, the continuation determination table has special scenarios for breaking through the door 806 with fewer than 99 variations. That is, the following scenarios are set: a scenario "05H" for performing a weak attack in the 96th variation and breaking through the door 806 (the value of the performance selection counter 223y is in the range of "90, 91"); a scenario "06H" for performing a weak attack in the 96th variation and a strong attack in the 97th variation and breaking through the door 806 (the value of the performance selection counter 223y is in the range of "92 to 94"); and a scenario "07H" for performing a weak attack in the 96th and 97th variations and a strong attack in the 98th variation and breaking through the door 806 (the value of the performance selection counter 223y is in the range of "95 to 99") These special scenarios may be set only when the continuation determination table is referenced. In other words, because it can only be executed when it is confirmed that the probability of ...

As shown in FIG. 416, the table for continuation concentration specifies four scenarios, "08H" to "0BH". The flow of the presentation of the presentation scenarios "08H" to "0BH" is exactly the same as the presentation scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, so the details are omitted here. As shown in FIG. 416, the presentation scenario "08H" is specified to correspond to the value "0 to 14" of the presentation lottery counter 223y, the presentation scenario "09H" is specified to correspond to the value "15 to 29" of the presentation lottery counter 223y, the presentation scenario "0AH" is specified to correspond to the value "30 to 69" of the presentation lottery counter 223y, and the presentation scenario "0BH" is specified to correspond to the value "70 to 99" of the presentation lottery counter 223y. That is, as with the table for continuation confirmation, the selection rate of the presentation scenario with a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection rate of the presentation scenario with a large number of strong attacks is high. If the lottery result corresponds to a fall during the progress of a scenario specified in the continuation strong table, the display that resulted in the lottery result of the fall is switched to the presentation scenario "0CH", which is one of the presentation scenarios specified in the non-continuation table. This makes it possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the 99th variation by switching scenarios midway through, even if there are not enough reserved balls up to the 99th variation display at the start of the continuation suggestion presentation.

As shown in FIG. 416, the non-continuation table specifies four scenarios, "0CH" to "0FH". The flow of the presentation of the presentation scenarios "0CH" to "0FH" is exactly the same as the presentation scenarios "01H" to "04H" described above, except that the player ultimately fails to break through the door 806, so details will be omitted here. As shown in FIG. 416, the presentation scenario "0CH" is specified to correspond to the value "0 to 39" of the presentation lottery counter 223y, the presentation scenario "0DH" is specified to correspond to the value "40 to 79" of the presentation lottery counter 223y, the presentation scenario "0EH" is specified to correspond to the value "80 to 94" of the presentation lottery counter 223y, and the presentation scenario "0FH" is specified to correspond to the value "95 to 99" of the presentation lottery counter 223y. That is, in contrast to the continuation confirmation table and the continuation strong table, the selection rate of the presentation scenario with a small number of strong attacks is high, and the selection rate of the presentation scenario with a large number of strong attacks is low. Therefore, the more strong attacks there are, the less likely the presentation scenario was determined by referring to the non-continuation table, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the content of each attack during the continuation suggestion presentation. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Returning to Figure 412(a), the explanation will continue. The interrupt rapid-hit selection table 222h is a data table that is referenced to select whether or not an interrupt rapid-hit effect (see Figure 399) can be executed, and the type of effect. Details of this interrupt rapid-hit selection table 222h will be explained with reference to Figure 417. Figure 417 is a diagram showing the contents of the interrupt rapid-hit selection table 222h. As shown in Figure 417, the interrupt rapid-hit selection table 222h specifies, for each variation type, a correspondence between the type of effect and the range of values of the effect selection counter 223y.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 417, in the case of a long miss variation pattern, the value of the variation counter 223y "0 to 4" is associated with the type of presentation that is executed during the normal variation presentation period and can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 10 remaining, as specified. Therefore, in the case of a long miss, there is a 5% chance (5/100) that the interrupt rapid-fire presentation is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of a missed normal reach, the value "0 to 9" of the variation lottery counter 223y is specified in association with the type of presentation mode that is executed during the normal variation presentation period and allows the number of monsters to be reduced to a minimum of five, and the value "10 to 14" of the variation lottery counter 223y is specified in association with the type of presentation mode that is executed during the reach variation and allows the number of monsters to be reduced to a minimum of four. Therefore, in the variation pattern of a missed normal reach, the execution of the interrupt rapid-hit presentation is determined to be 15% in total. In other words, the execution of the interrupt rapid-hit presentation is determined to be more frequently than in the case of a long miss.

As shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of the Miss Super Reach, the value of the variation lottery counter 223y "0 to 4" is specified in correspondence with the type of the variation mode in which the minimum number of monsters can be reduced to 5 as the interruption continuous hit performance executed during the normal variation performance period, and the value of the variation lottery counter 223y "5 to 9" is specified in correspondence with the type of the variation mode in which the minimum number of monsters can be reduced to 4 as the interruption continuous hit performance executed during the reach variation, and the value of the variation lottery counter 223y "10 to 14" is specified in correspondence with the type of the variation mode in which the minimum number of monsters can be reduced to 4 as the interruption continuous hit performance executed during the reach variation, and the value of the variation lottery counter 223y "15 to 19" is specified in correspondence with the type of the variation mode in which the minimum number of monsters can be reduced to 3 as the interruption continuous hit performance executed during the reach variation. In other words, the total execution rate of the interruption continuous hit performance is higher than that of the Miss Normal Reach, and the number of monsters can be reduced to a smaller number, so that the player's expectation for a big win can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of a winning normal reach, the value of the effect selection counter 223y "0 to 3" is specified as the interruption continuous hit effect executed during the normal variation performance period for the performance type in which the monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 5, and the value of the effect selection counter 223y "4" is specified as the performance type in which the monsters can be reduced to 0. As the interruption continuous hit effect executed during the reach variation, the value of the effect selection counter 223y "5 to 24" is specified as the performance type in which the monsters can be reduced to a minimum of 4, and the value of the effect selection counter 223y "25" is specified as the performance type in which the monsters can be reduced to 0. In other words, the total execution rate of the interruption continuous hit effect is higher than in the case of a miss, and there is a possibility of defeating all the monsters, so the player's expectations for a big win can be increased.

Also, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of the winning super reach, the value of the effect selection counter 223y "0, 1" is specified in association with the type of the effect mode in which the minimum number of monsters can be reduced to four as the interruption continuous tapping effect executed during the normal variation performance period, and the value of the effect selection counter 223y "2" is specified in association with the type of the effect mode in which the minimum number of monsters can be reduced to zero. Also, as the interruption continuous tapping effect executed during the reach variation, the value of the effect selection counter 223y "3 to 19" is specified in association with the type of the effect mode in which the minimum number of monsters can be reduced to four, the value of the effect selection counter 223y "20 to 39" is specified in association with the type of the effect mode in which the minimum number of monsters can be reduced to three, and the value of the effect selection counter 223y "40, 41" is specified in association with the type of the effect mode in which the minimum number of monsters can be reduced to zero. In other words, the total rate of interrupt rapid-fire effects is higher than in the case of misses or normal hits, and the chances of defeating all the monsters are higher, which increases the player's sense of anticipation for a big win.

In this way, in this first control example, the timing of the interrupt rapid-hit effect and the number of monsters that can be defeated are configured to differ for each variation type, and the effect of defeating all monsters can be selected only in the case of a big win. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player perform rapid-hit operations more proactively while the interrupt rapid-hit effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt rapid-hit effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 412(b), the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 412(b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223b, a normal reserved ball counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a game status storage area 223f, a time-saving guaranteed number counter 223g, a continuation scenario storage area 223h, a right-hit win flag 223i, a successive hit type storage area 223j, a chance charge standby flag 223k, and a charge At least a number counter 223m, a charge state counter 223n, a batch change flag 223p, a change point storage area 223q, a reserved symbol state storage area 223r, a change time timer 223s, an operation valid period timer 223t, a stop operation count counter 223u, a continuous hit valid period timer 223v, a batch change period timer 223x, a performance selection counter 223y, and a miscellaneous memory area 223z are provided.

The special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting times) corresponding to the drawing of the first special pattern reserved in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times, and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls corresponding to the drawing of the second special pattern up to a maximum of four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to obtain the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command sent from the main control device 110, and manages the number of reserved balls for each type of special pattern using the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is increased by a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, or when the variable display of a special pattern is executed in the main control unit 110 and the number of reserved balls is decreased, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e after the increase or decrease is sent to the voice lamp control unit 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, it obtains the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110 from the reserved ball number command and stores it in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b (see S3910 in FIG. 451). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223b according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the values can be updated in synchronization with the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b are used to display the reserved ball number pattern on the third pattern display device 81. That is, in response to receiving a reserved ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b, and transmits a display reserved ball number command to the display control device 114 to notify the display control device 114 of the stored values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, it controls the drawing of the image so that the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number value indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113, is displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81. As described above, the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b are changed in synchronization with the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the values of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which a variable display is pending.

The normal reserved ball counter 223c has the same content as the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 223a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 223b described above, but differs only in that the target is changed from special patterns to normal patterns. Since the technical control concept is the same, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command for the first special pattern or a fluctuation pattern command for the second special pattern transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S3904 in FIG. 451), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third pattern display device 81 (see S4202 in FIG. 455). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 during the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variation performance so that the third pattern is displayed in the third pattern display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command for a special symbol is received from the main control unit 110 (see S3907 in FIG. 451), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S4208 in FIG. 455). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot).

The game status storage area 223f is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10. This game status storage area 223f is updated every time a status command is received from the main control device 110, which is output every time a change occurs in the game status of the pachinko machine 10 (see S3902 in FIG. 451). The game status storage area 223f is configured, for example, as a 1-byte storage area, and is configured so that the game status can be specified by the status of the lowest two bits. More specifically, for example, the lowest bit indicates whether or not the normal pattern is in a time-saving state, and the second lowest bit indicates whether or not the special pattern is in a guaranteed bonus state. Therefore, in the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "normal state of normal symbols", the lowest two bits are "00B", in the "low probability state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols", the lowest two bits are "01B", and in the "probability variable state of special symbols" and the "time-saving state of normal symbols", the lowest two bits are "11B". The MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 can grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10 on the sound lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in this game state storage area 223f.

The time-saving guaranteed count counter 223f is a counter for counting the remaining number of variations for which the time-saving state is guaranteed. The initial value of this time-saving guaranteed count counter 223f is set to 0, and the value is set to 100 when the jackpot ends (see S4107 in FIG. 454). In addition, the value is decremented by 1 each time a new variable display execution is set (see S4304 in FIG. 456). As described above, in this first control example, after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state of the normal pattern is maintained until the special pattern lottery has been executed 100 times. By counting the number of guaranteed time-saving times using this time-saving guaranteed count counter 223f, the voice lamp control device 113 can also accurately grasp the guaranteed number.

The continuation scenario storage area 223h is a memory area for storing data indicating the type of presentation scenario determined from the continuation suggestion presentation selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start of the high probability continuation suggestion presentation. The initial value of this continuation scenario storage area 223h is set to 00H, and when a presentation scenario is determined by lottery using the continuation suggestion presentation selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start timing of the high probability continuation suggestion presentation, data indicating that presentation scenario is stored (see S4409 in FIG. 457). During the execution of the high probability continuation suggestion presentation, the variable display mode at the start of each variable display is determined based on the data in this continuation scenario storage area 223h (see S4415 in FIG. 457).

The right-hitting winning flag 223i is a flag that indicates whether the jackpot being played is a jackpot won during a right-hitting game state (a time-saving state of a normal pattern). If the right-hitting winning flag 223i is on, it indicates that the jackpot was won during a right-hitting game state, and if it is off, it indicates that the jackpot was won during a left-hitting game state (i.e., the first win). At the end of the jackpot, the back mode is set according to the state of the right-hitting winning flag 223i. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see S4109, S4110 in FIG. 454). As described above, if a jackpot is won in a left-hitting game state (i.e., a jackpot is won by drawing the first special pattern), there is only a 50% chance of transitioning to a special state, whereas if a jackpot is won in a right-hitting game state (i.e., a jackpot is won by drawing the second special pattern), there is an 80% chance of transitioning to a special state. The difference in the percentage is notified by the expectation indicated by the back mode.

The rapid-fire type storage area 223j is a memory area for storing data indicating the type of rapid-fire interrupt effect (the timing of the effect execution and the lower limit of the number of monsters to be subtracted). The timing of the start of the rapid-fire interrupt effect and the number of monsters to be subtracted in response to pressing the PUSH button 10317 are set according to the data in the rapid-fire type storage area 223j.

The chance charge standby flag 223k is a flag that indicates whether or not it is the period between the decision to execute a chance charge performance and the actual start of the chance charge performance (chance charge standby period), and if it is on, it indicates that it is the chance charge standby period. This chance charge standby flag 223k is initially set to off, and is set to on when the decision to execute a chance charge performance is made (see S4564 in FIG. 459), and is set to off when the execution of a chance charge performance starts (see S3313 in FIG. 443). If a new start winning is detected while this chance charge standby flag 223k is on, it is determined whether or not to add a gauge number to the gauge number that is predetermined as the spirit gauge number to be accumulated in the chance charge performance that is executed thereafter.

The charge number counter 223m is a counter that indicates the gauge number of the spirit gauge that is notified in the chance charge performance. The initial value of this charge number counter 223m is set to 0, and when it is decided to execute the chance charge performance, a value is set that is the number of reserved balls at the time of the decision plus 1 (see S4563 in FIG. 459). In addition, when the chance up performance is executed, the value is updated by subtracting 1 each time the spirit gauge is consumed (see S3559, S3561 in FIG. 446).

The charge state count counter 223n is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuations until the consumption of the spirit gauge accumulated by the chance charge effect is completed. This charge state count counter 223n is set to a value according to the current number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect (see S3314 in FIG. 443), and the value is decremented by one each time the execution of a new variable display effect is set (see S4302 in FIG. 456). While the value of this charge state count counter 223n is 1 or more, a determination is made as to whether or not to consume the spirit gauge to execute the chance up effect each time it is possible to execute the chance up effect.

The batch change flag 223p is a flag that indicates whether or not a batch hold change performance is being executed. If it is on, it means that a batch hold change performance is being executed, and if it is off, it means that a batch hold change performance is not being executed. This batch change flag 223p is initially set to off, and is set to on when execution of a batch hold change performance is set (see S4059 in FIG. 453).

The change point storage area 223q is a memory area for storing the change points identified by referring to the change point calculation table 222d described above. This change point storage area 223q is configured to be able to store the change points of each reserved ball separately.

The reserved pattern status storage area 223r is a memory area for storing data indicating the reserved pattern state of each reserved ball count pattern. The reserved pattern state of each reserved ball count pattern can be accurately understood by the data stored in this reserved pattern status storage area 223r.

The variable time timer 223s is a timer for measuring the variable time. The timer value of this variable time timer 223s makes it possible to accurately determine the progress of the variable display performance.

The operation valid period timer 223t is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the press stop performance (see FIG. 395). This operation valid period timer 223t determines whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 in the press stop performance is treated as valid. In the press stop performance, a separate button image and valid period gauge are displayed on the display screen for each pattern row, but in reality, a single operation valid period is used to determine whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid. This configuration simplifies the determination of whether or not the stop operation of each pattern row is valid, thereby reducing the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113.

The stop operation count counter 223u is a counter that indicates the number of remaining stop operations that can be executed in the press stop performance (see FIG. 395). When the value of this stop operation count counter 223u is 3 and a stop operation is detected during the valid operation period, the left pattern row is displayed as still, when the value is 2 and a stop operation is detected during the valid operation period, the right pattern row is displayed as still, and when the value is 1 and a stop operation is detected during the valid operation period, the center pattern row is displayed as still.

The repeated tapping validity period timer 223s is a timer for measuring the period during which a repeated tap operation on the PUSH button 10317 is valid in an interrupt repeated tapping performance (see FIG. 399). This repeated tapping validity period timer 223s determines whether or not an operation on the PUSH button 10317 in an interrupt repeated tapping performance is treated as valid.

The batch change period timer 223x is a timer for measuring the period during which the PUSH button 10317 is valid during the pending batch change performance (see Figures 403 and 404). This batch change period timer 223x determines whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 during the pending batch change performance is treated as valid.

As described above, the performance selection counter 223y is a random number counter used to select the performance mode.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. This other memory area 223z is provided with, for example, a winning information storage area for storing winning information based on a winning information command received from the main control device 110. The winning information storage area has a memory area consisting of four areas (first area to fourth area) for each of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In this pachinko machine 10, when a start winning is detected in the main control device 110, various information (win/lose, stop type, change pattern) that will be obtained when a lottery for a special symbol corresponding to the start winning is held is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110 from the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in response to the start winning, and the various predicted information is notified from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 by a winning information command.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command, the various information notified by the winning information command (win/lose, stop type, change pattern) is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in the available areas of the four areas (area 1 to area 4) in order of the area number (1 to 4) starting from the smallest. In other words, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to older winnings are stored, and the first area stores data corresponding to the oldest winnings.

The RAM 223 also has a command memory area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until the processing corresponding to the command is performed, and a timer that counts the duration of the performance. The command memory area is configured as a ring buffer, and data is read and written using a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the first command stored in the command memory area is read out from the unprocessed commands stored therein, and the command determination process analyzes the command and performs processing according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the variable display (variable performance) of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 and the continuous preview performance based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. Details of this display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG. 418.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruptions due to power failures, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 with a RAM erase switch 122. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in 24-volt AC voltage supplied from the outside, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs a power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. The power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 418. FIG. 418 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 has an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241.

The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the voice lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via bus line 240. The image controller 237 is connected to the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236, and is also connected to the output port 239 via bus line 241. The output side of the output port 239 is also connected to the third pattern display device 81.

Incidentally, even if the pachinko machine 10 is of a different model with different lottery probabilities for a special jackpot or different numbers of prize balls paid out for one special jackpot, there are models with the exact same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

Below, we will first explain the MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236, and then explain the work RAM 233.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in command pointer 231a, reads and fetches the command code stored at the address indicated by the command pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the command code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply device 115 immediately after power is turned on (including power recovery from a power outage. The same applies below). When the system reset is released, the command pointer 231a is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time a command code is fetched, the value of the command pointer 231a is incremented by one. Also, when the MPU 231 executes a command to set the command pointer, the value of the pointer indicated by the command is set in the command pointer 231a.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the various fixed value data used in the control program are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Although details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for a large capacity in a small area. This allows sufficient storage of not only image data but also control programs, etc. Furthermore, if the control programs, etc. are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control programs, etc. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs but also suppresses an increase in the occurrence of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

On the other hand, NAND flash memory has a problem in that the read speed is slow, especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on multiple pages, the data from the second page onwards can be read at high speed, but when reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from when the address is specified until the data is output. Also, when reading non-contiguous data, it takes a long time each time the data is read. As such, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it may take a long time to read the commands that make up the control program, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, this may deteriorate the processing performance of the display control device 114.

In this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, the control program stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is first transferred to and stored in the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As described below, the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read the commands that make up the control program without delay. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated presentations.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. The image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character memory area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, which are connected to the image controller 237.

This character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as the main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has at least a second program memory area 234a1 that stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third pattern display device 81, and a character memory area 234a2 that stores data for images (characters, etc.) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The NAND flash memory has the characteristic of being able to obtain a large storage capacity in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, by using a NAND flash memory 234a with a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character memory area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, in order to further increase the interest of the player, the images displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be made more diverse and complex.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and can also store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control programs and fixed value data can be stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, without having to provide a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines. This reduces the number of parts in the display control device 114, reducing manufacturing costs and preventing an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on an address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads out the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a, etc., and outputs the data to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits to which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks to which data cannot be written. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and also performs known data address conversion so that data is read and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data blocks.

This ROM controller 234b performs error correction on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, including error bits. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing based on erroneous data and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Furthermore, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the bad data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids accessing the bad data blocks, so that the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can easily access the character ROM 234 without having to consider the address positions of the bad data blocks, which differ in each NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is specified from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b determines whether one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If the data is not set, the buffer RAM 234c reads one page (e.g., 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a (or the NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily sets it in the buffer RAM 234c. The ROM controller 234b then performs a known error correction process and outputs the data corresponding to the specified address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

This buffer RAM 234c is made up of two banks, and one page's worth of data from the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. This allows the ROM controller 234b to, for example, output data from the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using one bank while data is set in the other, or to perform parallel processing of transferring one page's worth of data, including data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237, from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting it, and reading data corresponding to an address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 from the other bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or image controller 237. This improves the responsiveness of the character ROM 234 when reading it out.

The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is configured to have a much smaller capacity (e.g., 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a in order to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. This NOR ROM 234d is provided with at least a first program memory area 234d1 that stores, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs that are not stored in the second program memory area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, a part of the boot program that is executed first in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 executes this boot program first after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program memory area 234d1 stores a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, then 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (i.e., one page of the NAND type flash memory 234a) of this boot program. Note that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 is configured to set the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a on the bus line 240. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" has been specified on the bus line 240, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by 1, and specifies the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating a program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads out from the buffer RAM 234c the instruction code at the corresponding address from the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d, and outputs it to the MPU 231.

In this embodiment, the reason why not all control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but rather a predetermined number of commands from the boot program, starting with the command that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, are stored in the NOR ROM 234d, is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem specific to NAND flash memories in that when reading data from the first page, it takes a long time from when an address is specified until the data is output.

If all the control programs are stored in such a NAND type flash memory 234a, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the command code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (command code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND type flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. And, because of the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time from reading to setting in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 consumes a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the command code corresponding to the address "0000H". Therefore, it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, by storing a predetermined number of commands from the command to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the NOR type ROM 234d, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (command code) to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the command code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start up the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if a control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

Now, the boot program is programmed to transfer the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, i.e., the control programs excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d, and the fixed value data used in the control programs (e.g., a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) to the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 in a predetermined amount (e.g., the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). Then, the MPU 231 first transfers and stores the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c in which the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released.

Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the address of the internal bus being specified as "0000H", the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, since there is no need to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c again after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

The boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1 is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a. As a result, after the system reset is released, when a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined location in the program storage area 233a.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 can read out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a and execute various processes. That is, the MPU 231 does not read out the control programs from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads out the control programs transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches the instructions, and executes various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

The control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is programmed so that the remaining boot program is included in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed to set the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a using the boot program stored in the first program memory area 234d1, and then executes the remaining boot program included in the transferred control program.

This remaining boot program executes a process of transferring all the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and all the fixed value data used in the control programs (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., described later) from the second program memory area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts. In addition, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the start address of the program stored in the program storage area 233a that corresponds to the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) that is executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 460) by the boot program is completed is set.

The MPU 231 executes the remaining boot program, and all of the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, by transferring the control program to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated presentations can be easily executed using the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, instead of storing the entire boot program in NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instructions to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in second program storage area 234a1 of NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding an extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to character ROM 234, MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of time can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third pattern display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws one frame of an image based on a drawing list (see FIG. 423) sent from the MPU 231, and displays the drawn image in one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later, while outputting the image information for one frame previously displayed in the other frame buffer to the third pattern display device 81, thereby displaying the image on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 performs the drawing process for this one frame of an image and the display process for this one frame of an image in parallel within the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a "V interrupt signal") to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of image is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the next frame of image. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes drawing processing of the next frame of image and also executes processing to display the image previously developed by drawing on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing in response to a V interrupt signal from image controller 237 and issues drawing instructions to image controller 237, so that image controller 237 can receive image drawing instructions from MPU 231 at image drawing and display processing intervals (20 milliseconds). Therefore, image controller 237 will not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing and display processing are completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also performs processing to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 or transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Images are drawn using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, while NAND-type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of ROM, its read speed is slower than other ROMs (such as mask ROM and EEPROM). In contrast, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer a portion of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on. Then, as described below, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to remain resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 can perform image drawing processing while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained until an image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

When the display control device 114 uses image data that is non-resident in the resident video RAM 235 to draw an image, the MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. As described below, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used to draw the image. However, when drawing the image, there is no need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, and the time required for reading can be saved, so that the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, by storing image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to keep all image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, and therefore it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. This makes it possible to suppress the increase in costs that would otherwise be caused by providing the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a consisting of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction issued by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (start address of the source storage) and the end address (end address of the source storage) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, the destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236). Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the end address of the source storage.

In accordance with the various information in the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 reads one block of data from a specified address in the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and transfers the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. This process is then repeated until all of the image data stored from the storage start address to the storage end address indicated by the transfer instruction has been transferred.

This allows image data that is read out from the character ROM 234 over a long period of time to be temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data can be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of image data while the image data is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. This prevents the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 from being occupied by the transfer of image data, which makes it impossible to use the video RAMs 235 and 236 for the image drawing process, and as a result, prevents the image from being drawn or displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in time for the required time.

In addition, since the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, it is possible to easily determine the period during which the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are not being used for image drawing processing or display processing on the third pattern display device 81, thereby simplifying the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used to hold image data transferred from the character ROM 234 without being overwritten while the power is on, and is provided with a power-on main image area 235a, a back image area 235c, a character design area 235e, and an error message image area 235f, as well as a power-on variable image area 235b and a third design area 235d.

The power-on main image area 235a is an area for storing data corresponding to the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. The power-on variable image area 235b is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that displays the lottery results performed in the main control device 110 by a variable presentation when the player starts playing while the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball entering the first starting hole 64a is detected.

When power supply from the power supply unit 251 begins, the MPU 231 sends a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a (see FIG. 460).

The power-on variable image will now be described. Immediately after power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b, and then transfers the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image (see FIG. 419) on the third pattern display device 81.

At this time, when the display control device 114 receives a display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main control device 110, which is an instruction command to start the variation, the display control device 114 alternately displays, on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a power-on variation image with a "○" pattern in the lower right position facing the screen and a power-on variation image with a "X" pattern in the same position as the "○" pattern, during the variation period. Then, the display control device 114 judges the result of the lottery performed by the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and stop type command from the main control device 110, and if it is a "special pattern jackpot", an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops, and if it is a "special pattern miss", an image indicating this is displayed for a certain period after the variation performance stops.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the power-on main image using the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235. This allows players and hall staff to check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the remaining image data that should be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the display control device 114 can take the time to transfer the remaining image data that should be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Furthermore, since players can recognize that some processing is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, they can wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped while the remaining image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operational checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that it is possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on. Furthermore, by using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of operational checks from deteriorating.

Furthermore, if a player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and a ball is detected entering the first entrance ball 64, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw a power-on variable image using image data corresponding to the power-on variable image that is constantly resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, and to display images showing "○" and "×" alternately on the third pattern display device 81. This allows a simple variable presentation to be performed using the power-on variable image. Therefore, the player can be sure that a lottery has been drawn by the simple variable presentation, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on variable performance image is already resident in the power-on variable image area 235b, so if a ball entering the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variable performance can be instantly displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 418, the explanation will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern area 235d is an area for storing the third pattern used in the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81. That is, the third pattern area 235d stores image data corresponding to the above-mentioned nine types of main patterns numbered "1" to "9" which are the third patterns. As a result, when performing a variable performance on the third pattern display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so that even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the variable performance can be started quickly on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the variable performance is not immediately started on the third pattern display device 81 despite the fact that the variable performance has been started on the first pattern display device 37 after the ball has entered the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters including a "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these characters is resident in the character design area 235e. When the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the contents of a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads the image data that is resident in advance in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character design can be changed instantly even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message that is displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Also, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of that error together with the type of error by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third pattern display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing players from committing fraud and protecting players from errors, it is required that the error message be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error. In this pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is pre-resident in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 can instantly draw each error message image in the image controller 237 by reading out the image data pre-resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read out image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234, so that even if a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message can be displayed immediately after the error command is received.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data required for drawing the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into multiple sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to a specific sub-area in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the type of image data should be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads out the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to the specified specific sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The instruction to transfer image data is given by including transfer data information in a drawing list (described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. This allows the MPU 231 to issue an instruction to draw an image and an instruction to transfer image data simply by sending the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for displaying an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The image controller 237 writes one frame of an image drawn in accordance with instructions from the MPU 231 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby displaying one frame of an image in that frame buffer, and while displaying an image in one of the frame buffers, reads out one frame of image information previously displayed from the other frame buffer and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal, thereby executing a process for displaying the one frame of an image on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can display one frame of image drawn in one frame buffer while simultaneously reading out one frame of image previously displayed from the other frame buffer, and display the one frame of image that has been read out on the third pattern display device 81.

The frame buffer into which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read in order to display the image on the third pattern display device 81 are alternately designated by the MPU 231 as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame's worth of image is completed.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs, and is composed of DRAM. This work RAM 233 has at least a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background mode storage area 233k, and an interrupted data storage area 233m.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

The data table storage area 233b is an area that stores a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 over time for a performance that is displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a transfer data table that specifies the transfer data information and transfer timing for image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used in a performance that is displayed based on the display data table.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND type flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in this data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third pattern display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated performances.

Here, we will explain the details of the various data tables. First, a display data table is prepared for each presentation mode displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands from the main control device 110. For example, display data tables corresponding to variable presentations, round presentations, ending presentations, and demo presentations are prepared.

The variable performance is an effect that is started in the third pattern display device 81 when a display variable pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When the display variable pattern command is received, a display stop type command that indicates the stop type of the variable performance is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is a miss, the stop pattern indicating a miss is finally stopped and displayed, whereas if the stop type of the variable performance is either jackpot A or jackpot B, the stop pattern indicating the respective jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually checking the stop pattern in this variable performance, and can easily determine the game value awarded according to the jackpot type.

In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is a prize entrance from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters it, so when a normal jackpot occurs and the electric device is opened, making it easier for balls to enter the second ball entrance 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced even when playing, so the player can get a sense of the period when the balls held are unlikely to be reduced or are not reduced and a jackpot with a special pattern can be obtained. This increases the player's motivation to participate in the game, and allows the player to continue to be motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is an effect that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a predetermined time has passed since the first variable effect stopped, but the next variable effect associated with a start winning does not start. The third symbol, consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is displayed frozen, and only the back image changes. If the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, players and hall personnel can recognize that no play is being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round performance, the ending performance, and the demo performance. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is the display data table for the variable performance, will have one table per variable performance pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Now, with reference to Figure 421, the display data table will be described in detail. Figure 421 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table specifies in detail the contents (drawing contents) of one frame of image to be displayed during that time, corresponding to an address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite, which is a display object that constitutes one frame's worth of image, and also specify drawing information for the third pattern display device 81 to draw the sprite, such as display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information, according to the sprite type.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The magnification ratio is information for specifying the magnification ratio relative to a standard display size previously set for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed according to that magnification ratio is specified. Note that if the magnification ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged compared to the standard size, and if the magnification ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is displayed reduced compared to the standard size.

The rotation angle is information used to specify the angle of rotation when a sprite is rotated for display. The translucency value is used to specify the transparency of the entire sprite; the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite is visible through the image. The alpha blending information is information used to specify a known alpha blending coefficient used when overlaying other sprites. The color information is information used to specify the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. And the filter specification information is information used to specify the image filter to be applied to the specified sprite when drawing that sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing information for each sprite is specified for each address as the drawing content for one frame, which includes one background image, nine third patterns (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effects that express the shining of light in the image, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and text. Information about effects and characters is specified as one or more pieces according to the content to be displayed in that frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information are constant over time, so the variable display data table specifies only the rear type, which is information for identifying the type of rear image.

When the MPU 231 determines that one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (underwater, beach, preparation period background, background dedicated to time presentation) should be displayed based on the background type, it determines the background image corresponding to the stage specified by the player from among the backgrounds as the drawing target, and also determines the range of the background image to be displayed for that frame in accordance with the passage of time.

In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only the rear view type is specified as the drawing content of the rear view image in the display data table. Alternatively, the rear view type and position information indicating which range of the rear view image corresponding to that rear view type should be displayed may be specified. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the rear view image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the rear view image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

The position information may also be information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) based on this display data table was started. In this case, the MPU 231 determines the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame based on the position of the rear image that was displayed at the stage when drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started based on the display database, and the elapsed time since drawing of the image (or display of the third pattern display device 81) was started, as indicated by the position information.

Furthermore, depending on the type of back surface, the position information may indicate either information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display data table (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began, or, together with the back surface type and position information, type information of the position information (for example, information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the back surface image of the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed or information indicating the elapsed time since drawing of an image based on the display database (or display of the third pattern display device 81) began) may be specified as the drawing content of the back surface image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating the address where the range of the back surface image to be displayed is stored, rather than information indicating the elapsed time.

For the third patterns (Pattern 1, Pattern 2, ...), pattern type offset information is recorded as pattern type information for specifying the third pattern to be displayed. This offset information is information that represents the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern. The reason offset information is determined rather than the type of third pattern directly is that the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance and the stopping pattern of the current variable performance, and the pattern offset information from the start of the fluctuation until a specified time has elapsed records the offset information from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stopping pattern of the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the fluctuation started, offset information from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113 is recorded. This makes it possible to stop the fluctuation performance at the stop pattern according to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110.

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable performance and the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control unit 110 are managed by the number assigned to the third symbol, and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers assigned to each third symbol, so that the third symbol to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, the specified time during which the pattern offset information is switched from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance is set to be the time during which the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed. While the third pattern is rapidly variable displayed, the third pattern is not visible to the player. Therefore, by switching the pattern offset information from the offset information of the stopped pattern of the previous variable performance to the offset information of the stopped pattern of the currently variable performance during that time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player cannot be aware of the interruption in the continuity of the numbers.

The first address of the display data table, "0000H," contains "Start" information indicating the beginning of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be specified by that display data table is written.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, reads the selected display data table from the data table storage area 233b, stores it in the display data table buffer 233d, and initializes the pointer 233f. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image content to be drawn next is specified based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) is created, which will be described later. This drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 to instruct the image to be drawn. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, and the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In this way, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 can change the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, rather than changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 in response to commands (e.g., display variation pattern commands) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

If, as in conventional pachinko machines, a program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is changed, a large load is placed on the processing of starting and executing programs that become more complex and expansive as the variety of performance images increases, which may limit the processing power of the display control device 114 and result in a limit to the diversification of controllable performance images. In contrast, in this pachinko machine 10, the performance image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be changed simply by replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, so that a variety of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114.

The reason why the display data table is prepared in accordance with each performance mode, the display data table buffer is set according to the performance mode to be displayed, and the drawing list can be created frame by frame according to the set data table is because the performance to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning in the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display content cannot be predicted, and therefore it is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to each performance mode as described above. In this way, the configuration of preparing a display data table in accordance with each performance mode, setting a display data table buffer according to the performance mode to be displayed, and creating a drawing list frame by frame according to the set data table can only be realized based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine in advance the performance mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

Next, the transfer data table will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 422. FIG. 422 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared in correspondence with the display data table prepared for each performance, and as described above, the transfer data information and transfer timing are specified for transferring image data of sprites used in the performance specified in the display data table that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

If all image data for sprites used in the effects defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, then no transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is prepared. This makes it possible to prevent an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to an address specified in the display data table, and describes the transfer data information of the image data of the sprite (hereinafter referred to as the "image data to be transferred") that should start being transferred at the time indicated by that address (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in Fig. 422 correspond to this). Here, the transfer start timing of the image data to be transferred is set so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite starts according to the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified in the transfer data table in correspondence with the address corresponding to that transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, Null data is specified, which means that there is no image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table (this corresponds to address "0002H" in Figure 422).

The transfer data information includes the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

The first address of the transfer data table, "0000H", contains "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, just like the display data table, and the last address of the transfer data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 422) contains "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" containing the "Start" information and the address containing the "End" information, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table is contained.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, etc., and if a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table exists, it reads the transfer data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores it in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) described later is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time is obtained from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 422, when pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", MPU 231 adds the transfer data information specified at that address in the transfer data table to the drawing list created based on the display data table, and transmits the drawing list after the addition to image controller 237. On the other hand, when pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is specified at address "0002H" in the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data from which transfer should begin, and the transfer data information is not added to the generated drawing list, and the drawing list is transmitted to image controller 237.

Then, if transfer data information is included in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 executes a process to transfer the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information.

As described above, the transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, it is possible to ensure that image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and required for drawing the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, the image data stored in the image storage area 236a can be used to draw the specific sprite based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 sets a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in that display data table can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This makes it possible to manage and control the transfer of image data for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred, which should start being transferred at the time indicated by the address, is specified in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. Therefore, the timing of the start of transfer can be specified so that the image data of a specified sprite is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before that image data is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constructed using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, a wide variety of performance images can be easily displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIG. 419. This simple image display flag 233c is set to ON in the main processing (see FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM (see S8005 in FIG. 460). Then, when all resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, it is set to OFF in order to display images other than the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81 (see S9705 in FIG. 471(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 462(b)). When the simple image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b)) and a simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 462(b)) are executed so that the power-on image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, a command determination process (see FIGS. 463 to 468) and a display setting process (see FIGS. 469 and 470) are executed so that various images are displayed in response to commands transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110, etc.

The simple image display flag 233c is also referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during V interrupt processing (see S9601 in FIG. 471(a)). If the simple image display flag 233c is on, resident target image data exists that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, so a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 471(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) is executed to transfer the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display data table buffer 233d is a buffer for storing a display data table corresponding to the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. The MPU 231 determines the performance mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113, selects a display data table corresponding to the performance mode from the data table storage area 233b, and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 generates a drawing list (see FIG. 423) that describes the image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the performance corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by one, and generates a drawing list (see FIG. 423) for each frame that describes image drawing instructions for the image controller 237 based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a buffer for storing a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to commands sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110. When storing a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and stores the selected transfer data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Note that if all the image data of the sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared, and the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that no image data to be transferred exists in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, while incrementing the pointer 233f by one, if the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is specified (i.e., if no null data is written), the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to a drawing list (see FIG. 423) described below that describes the image drawing instructions to the image controller 237 generated for each frame.

As a result, if the drawing list received from the MPU 231 contains transfer data information, the image controller 237 executes a process of transferring the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information. Here, as described above, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a specified address in the transfer data table so that the image data corresponding to a specified sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the specified sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. Therefore, by transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specified sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is used to specify an address from which the corresponding drawing contents or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. The MPU 231 initializes the pointer 233f to 0 once when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, during the display setting process (see S8303 in FIG. 462(b)) of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of image is completed, the pointer update process (see S9305 in FIG. 470(b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated in this manner, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, creates a drawing list (see FIG. 423) described below, and also obtains transfer data information for the image data of a specified sprite that should start being transferred at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing power of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

In addition, when a transfer data table is stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is used to draw a sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a based on the transfer data table until the drawing of the sprite is started by the corresponding display data table. This makes it possible to read images required for display from the character ROM 234 without delay in advance and transfer them to the normal video RAM 236, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. In addition, by writing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame of an image, which is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Now, referring to FIG. 423, the details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 423 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table that instructs the image controller 237 to draw one frame's worth of images, and as shown in FIG. 423, it describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite, such as the back image used in one frame's image, the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), the effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), the character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2, ..., error pattern). The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer specified image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its address. The image controller 237 obtains the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) also includes display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information. The image controller 237 performs enlargement/reduction processing according to the magnification ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, semi-transparency processing according to the semi-transparency value, composition processing with other sprites according to the alpha blending information, color correction processing according to the color information, filtering processing according to the filter specification information in a manner specified by the information, and then performs various processing on the standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read from the various video RAMs, and draws the image obtained by performing various processing at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates. The drawn image is then expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, as specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The MPU 231 generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a reserved image displaying a reserved ball count pattern, a warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), and creates a drawing list by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information for each sprite, the storage RAM type and address for the sprite (display object) data are generated according to the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type identified from the contents of other images. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data for that sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data for that sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 copies other information (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter specification information) from the detailed information of each sprite as is, as specified in the display data table.

When generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites in one frame's worth of images in order from the sprite that should be placed furthest back to the sprite that should be placed in the foreground, and describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite. That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by detailed information corresponding to each sprite in the following order: third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., reserved ball count pattern 1, reserved ball count pattern 2, ..., error pattern).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process for each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting them. Therefore, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list, the first sprite drawn can be placed at the backmost side, and the last sprite drawn can be placed at the frontmost side.

Furthermore, when transfer data information is written at the address indicated by pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in transfer data table buffer 233e, MPU 231 adds the transfer data information (the source start address and source end address in character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the destination start address of the sub-area in image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred should be stored) to the end of the drawing list. When the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, image controller 237 reads image data from a specified area in character ROM 234 (area indicated by the source start address and source end address) based on the transfer data information, and transfers the image data to be transferred to a specified sub-area (destination address) in image storage area 236a in normal video RAM 236.

The timing counter 233h is a counter that counts the presentation time of the presentation displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When the MPU 231 stores a display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, it sets time data indicating the presentation time of the presentation displayed based on that display data table. This time data is the presentation time divided by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process for one frame of image are completed, each time the display setting process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)) is executed by the MPU 231, the timing counter 233h is decremented by one (see S9307 in FIG. 469). As a result, when the value of the timing counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and executes various processes that should be performed in conjunction with the end of the presentation.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is a flag indicating the storage state, for each sprite whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, indicating whether the image data corresponding to that sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

This stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" for all sprites, indicating that they are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction is set for image data to be transferred that corresponds to a sprite during the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 231. In this update, the storage status corresponding to the sprite for which a transfer instruction has been set is set to "on", indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, image data for other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite will necessarily be in an unstored state due to the storage of the image data of the one sprite, so the storage status corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

In addition, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and determines whether the image data of the sprite to be transferred is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S9813 in FIG. 472). If the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, it sets a transfer instruction for that image data (see S9814 in FIG. 472) and causes the image controller 237 to transfer that image data from the character ROM 234 to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage status corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of that image data is stopped. This prevents unnecessary data transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a flag for specifying one of the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c) into which the image drawn by the image controller 237 is expanded (hereinafter referred to as the "drawing target buffer"); if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and if it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, information on this specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process in which the image drawn based on the drawing list is expanded onto the designated drawing target buffer. In addition, the image controller 237 executes a display process in which the image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 by reading out previously expanded drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing process, and transferring the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is sent. In addition, the drawing list is sent each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal sent from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of image is completed (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, and image drawing and display processing is executed. 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing of one frame's worth of image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that will display one frame's worth of image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. This allows the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c to be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, while at the same time a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

The background mode storage area 233k is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the currently set background mode. The interruption data storage area 233m is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the display mode at the time of interruption during the interruption period when an instruction to interrupt the display mode is given.

Next, referring to FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 in this first control example will be described. FIG. 424 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 is equipped with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer that is a calculation device. The MPU 301 includes a ROM 302 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 301, and a RAM 303 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc. when the control programs stored in the ROM 302 are executed.

The MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 is electrically connected to the input/output port 305 and the audio synthesis unit 306. When the audio output device 226 receives a command specifying audio data from the audio lamp control device 113, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input/output port 305. In addition, the audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel of the audio synthesis unit 306 corresponding to the audio type.

The voice synthesis unit 306 is composed of a known voice synthesis LSI that synthesizes the voice data input to each channel and outputs it to the amplifier unit 307 as synthetic voice data. The synthetic voice data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. This allows the speaker unit 308 to output various sounds specified by the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this first control example will be described with reference to FIG. 424. As shown in FIG. 424, the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

The audio file storage area 302a is a storage area that stores audio files (audio data) used to output music, sound effects, and the like in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10. When the execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, an audio file corresponding to the effect is read from this audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 424, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a repeated hit sound output flag 303a, a playback position storage area 303b, and a music output in progress flag 303c.

The hit sound output flag 303a is a flag that indicates the type of hit sound most recently output during the execution of an interrupt hit effect (whether it is the first hit sound or the second hit sound). If this hit sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the hit sound most recently output is the first hit sound, and if it is "02H", it indicates that it is the second hit sound. By configuring this hit sound output flag 303a to be able to know the type of hit sound most recently output, it is possible to play different types of hit sounds alternately on different channels each time a hit operation is detected. This makes it possible to diversify the sound modes during the execution of a hit operation, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The playback position storage area 303b is a memory area for storing data indicating the playback position at the time of interruption when an instruction to interrupt playback of a song is received. When playback of a song is resumed, playback can be resumed accurately from the interrupted playback position based on the data stored in this playback position storage area 303b.

The music output flag 303c is a flag that indicates whether a variable display effect or the like is being executed and music based on an audio file is being output. If this music output flag 303c is on, it means that music is being output, and if it is off, it means that music is not being output.

<Regarding control process of main control device in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of Fig. 425 to Fig. 439. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly divided into start-up process which is started when the power is turned on, main process which is executed after the start-up process, timer interrupt process which is started periodically (at 2 ms intervals in this control example), and NMI interrupt process which is started by input of a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and main process will be described.

Figure 425 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control unit 110 is read, and the state of the switches is determined and detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Furthermore, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, the variation type counter CS1, and the normal win random number counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the fall lottery counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their maximum values (999, 99, 250, 999, 198, and 239, respectively, in this control example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of RAM 203.

Next, a special pattern change process is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first pattern display device 37 and also sets the change pattern of the third pattern by the third pattern display device 81, and then a start winning process is executed in response to winning (start winning) at the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 (S105). Details of the special pattern change process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to Figures 426 to 429.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol change process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance is executed (S107). Details of the normal symbol change process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to Figs. 430 and 431. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and then the other winning process is executed (S109). Furthermore, other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process is a process that determines whether the launch of the ball is on or off, on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. When the launch of the ball is on, the main control unit 110 instructs the launch control unit 112 to launch the ball.

Next, referring to FIG. 426, the special pattern change processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing this special pattern change processing (S104). This special pattern change processing (S104) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and is processing for controlling the change display of the special pattern (first pattern) performed by the first pattern display device 37, the change display of the third pattern performed by the third pattern display device 81, etc.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S201). The period during which a special symbol jackpot is in progress includes the period during which the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying a special symbol jackpot (including during a special symbol jackpot game), and during a predetermined period of time after the special symbol jackpot game ends. If the result of the determination is that a special symbol jackpot is in progress (S201: Yes), this process ends.

If the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S201: No), it is determined whether the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and if the display state of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the reserved number of times N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the reserved number of times N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) are obtained (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204), and if the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball count counter 203e from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the second special pattern reserved ball count counter 223b in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the process of S207 is executed, the process proceeds to S208.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the second special pattern reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d obtained in the process of S203 is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S209, if it is determined that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the first special pattern reserved ball count counter 223a in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball count command is set by the process of S211, the data stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, the data stored in the reserved area 1 to reserved area 4 of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted in order to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, a special pattern change start process is executed (S208) to set the start of the change of the special pattern (first pattern), and this process is terminated. The special pattern change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 427.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first pattern display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 has elapsed (S213). The change time of the change display being executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the change pattern selected by the change type counter CS1 (determined according to the change pattern command), and if this change time has not elapsed (S213: No), the display of the first pattern display device is updated (S214), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the change time of the executing change display has elapsed (S213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped pattern of the first pattern display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stopped pattern is performed in advance by the special pattern change start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. 427. When this special pattern change start process (S208) is executed, a lottery for a special pattern is performed based on the values of various counters stored in an execution area provided in common to the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. More specifically, whether or not a special pattern jackpot has been awarded is determined according to the value of the special winning random number counter C1, and if a special pattern jackpot has been awarded, the jackpot type is determined according to the value of the special winning type counter C2.

In this control example, if the first pattern (special pattern) is a stopped pattern that results in a jackpot A, a blue LED is turned on in the first pattern display device 37, if it is a jackpot B, a red LED is turned on, if it is a jackpot C, a green LED is turned on, if it is a jackpot D, a blue LED and a red LED are turned on, and if it is a jackpot E, a red LED and a green LED are turned on. Also, if it is a miss, the blue LED and the green LED are set to light up. Note that the LEDs are turned off when the next variable display starts, but they may be turned on for only a few seconds after the variable stops.

After the process of S215 is completed, when the ongoing variable display is started in the first symbol display device 37, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol performed by the special symbol variable start process (S208) (the current lottery result) is a jackpot for the special symbol (S216). If the current lottery result is a jackpot for the special symbol (S216: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203i is set to ON (S217). Then, a stop command is set (S218), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S216 that the result of this lottery is not a jackpot (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped, and after executing the process of S218, this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 427, the special symbol change start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start process (S208). This special symbol change start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 426) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and is a process for drawing a lottery (determining whether or not a "special symbol jackpot" or a "special symbol miss" based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and for determining the presentation pattern (variable presentation pattern) of the variable presentation performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process (S208), first, the values of the special win random number counter C1, the special win type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area are obtained (S301). Next, it is determined whether the game state is currently in a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols) (S302). The determination of whether or not the game is in a high probability state is made by determining whether the value of the high probability state flag 203h is 1 or more. Here, the high probability state flag 203h is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

In the process of S302, if it is determined that the game is in a high probability state (S302: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state (high probability state of special symbols), so a lottery (fall lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to fall from the high probability state of the special symbols to a low probability state of the special symbols by comparing the value of the fall lottery counter C4 obtained in the process of S301 with the fall lottery table 202e (see FIG. 407 (c)). Specifically, the value of the fall lottery counter C4 is compared one by one with two random number values stored in the fall lottery table 202e. As described above, the random number values corresponding to the fall to the low probability state during the high probability state (high probability state of special symbols) are set to two values, "0, 1", and when the value of the fall lottery counter C4 matches the random number values corresponding to these falls, it is determined that the game is to fall to the low probability state. Once the results of the drop lottery are obtained in step S303, the process moves to step S304.

In the process of S304, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to a fall into a low probability state of the special symbol (S304), and if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to a fall (S304: Yes), the special probability flag 203h is set to OFF (S305), a state command indicating a fall into a low probability state is set (S306), and the process proceeds to S307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S302 that the pachinko machine 10 is not in a special probability state (high probability state of special symbols), i.e., is in a low probability state of special symbols (S302: No), the process of S303 to S306 is skipped and the process proceeds to S307.

In the process of S307, the result of the lottery as to whether or not a special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for low probability (see FIG. 407(a)). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the four random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Four random number values, "0 to 3," are set as the random number values that result in a special symbol jackpot in the low probability state of the special symbol, and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a win, it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot. Once the lottery result for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S309.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S304 that the lottery result does not correspond to a fall (S304: No), the process proceeds to S308. In the process of S308, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is obtained based on the value of the special win random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a for high probability (see FIG. 407(a)). Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the eight random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a. Eight random numbers from "4 to 11" are set as the random number values that result in a jackpot for the special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol, and if the value of the special win random number counter C1 matches these random number values that result in a win, it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. After the lottery result for the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S309.

In the process of S309, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the special symbol obtained by the process of S307 or S308 is a special symbol jackpot (i.e., whether the value of the obtained special jackpot random number counter C1 matches the judgment value set in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) (S309), and if it is determined that it is a special symbol jackpot (S309: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203g and the probability change flag are reset to their initial values (S310), and the display mode at the time of the jackpot is set based on the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 (S311). More specifically, the value of the special jackpot type counter C2 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the jackpot type selection table 202d, and it is determined which of the five types of special symbol jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot E) is the jackpot type this time. As described above, in the case of a jackpot with the first special symbol, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9", it is determined to be jackpot A (15R certain jackpot), if it is in the range of "10 to 49", it is determined to be jackpot B (5R certain jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", it is determined to be jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408(b)). Also, in the case of a jackpot with the second special symbol, if the value of the special win type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79", it is determined to be jackpot D (15R certain jackpot), and if it is in the range of "80 to 99", it is determined to be jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408(c)).

In this S311 process, the display mode (illumination state of LEDs 37A, 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A to E). In addition, the jackpot type (jackpot A to E) is set as the stop type so that the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display mode of the stop pattern set in this S311 process is stopped and displayed by the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) described above.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of winning the jackpot is selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202b (see Fig. 409(a) and Fig. 410). Here, in this control example, as described above with reference to Fig. 409(b) and Fig. 410, in order to make it easier to set different variation patterns according to the set game state, the variation time of the special pattern is set by referring to different data tables according to the set game state. Specifically, when the game state is a normal state, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the normal table 222b1 (see Fig. 409(a)) of the variation pattern selection table 222b, while when the game state is a probability variable state or a time-saving state, the variation pattern is determined by referring to the probability variable/time-saving table 222b2 (see Fig. 410) of the variation pattern selection table 202b (S312). After the processing of S312 is completed, the processing proceeds to S318. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S312, the variation time (display time) of the variation performance in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until it stops at the big win symbol is determined in the third symbol display device 81. At this time, the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area of RAM 203 and the value of the stop type selection counter C3.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S309 that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a miss (S309: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the time-saving counter 203g is greater than 0 (S313). If it is determined in the process of S313 that the value of the time-saving counter 203g is greater than 0 (i.e., a value of 1 or greater) (S313: Yes), the value of the time-saving counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S314), a state command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203g after the decrement is set (S315), and the process proceeds to S316. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S313 that the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 (S313: No), the processes of S314 and S315 are skipped and the process proceeds to S316.

In the process of S316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the losing symbol, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) at the time of a loss is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol reserved ball execution area (S317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until it stops at the losing symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, as in the process of S312, the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area.

In the process of S318, which is executed after the process of S312 or the process of S317 is completed, a variation pattern command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S312 or the process of S317 (S318). Next, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S312 or the process of S317 (S319). When the process of S319 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

Next, referring to FIG. 428, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and determines whether or not there has been a win in the first ball entry port 64 (start winning). If there has been a start winning, it is a process for reserving the values indicated by the various random number counters, and for pre-reading the lottery results for the special symbols from the values indicated by the various random number counters that have been reserved.

When the start winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of reserved variable display times N1 for the special pattern) is obtained (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S403).

If it is determined in the process of S401 that there is no winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), the process proceeds to S408, and even if there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), if it is determined in the process of S403 that the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (i.e., the upper limit value of 4) (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S401 that there is a winning ball in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes) and if it is determined in the process of S403 that the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball count command for the first special pattern is set, which indicates the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d that has been changed by the calculation (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball count command, it extracts the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 203d from the reserved ball count command, and stores the extracted value in the special pattern 1 reserved ball count counter 223a in the RAM 223.

After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S405, the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, and the variable type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the first area of the free reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a of RAM 203 (S406). In addition, in the process of S406, the value of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, the reserved area 1 is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved area 2, if the value is 2, the reserved area 3, and if the value is 3, the reserved area 4 are set as the first area. After the process of S406 is completed, the pre-reading process is executed (S407) and the process proceeds to S408. The details of this look-ahead process (S407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 429, but based on the values of various counters obtained for balls entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a process is executed to determine in advance (look-ahead) the results of each lottery that is executed at the start of the fluctuation.

Note that the processes of S408 to S413 are essentially the same as those of S401 to S406, except that the processes of S401 to S407 described above, which are based on a ball entering the first ball entry hole 64, are changed to processes based on a ball entering the second starting hole 640, and therefore detailed explanations are omitted. After executing the process of S413, a look-ahead process is executed (S414 (S407)), and then this process ends.

In this control example, the values of each counter are obtained based on the ball entering the game, but they may be obtained when the game starts to change. This configuration eliminates the need for storage space to store the values of each counter until the game starts to change, reducing the use of storage space in RAM 203. Also, some of the counters (for example, only the change type counter CS1) may be obtained when the game starts to change. This configuration allows the counters related to the hit/miss determination to be obtained when the ball enters the game, and the counters not related to the hit/miss determination to be obtained later, reducing the amount of data to be stored while maintaining the fairness of the game.

Next, referring to FIG. 429, we will explain the look-ahead process (S407 (S414)), which is one process within the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S407 (S414)).

In the pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether there is a new winning (S501). In this process of S501, if the value (N1) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the value (N2) of the special pattern 2 reserved ball counter 203e is incremented, it is determined that there is a new winning. In the process of S501, if it is determined that there is no new winning (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (S501: Yes), it is next determined whether the winning this time is special pattern 1 (first special pattern) (S502), and if it is determined that it is special pattern 1 (S502: Yes), the lottery results for each counter value obtained this time are obtained in advance based on the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a and the special pattern 1 jackpot table 202d1 (S503), and the process proceeds to S504. In the process of S504, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result and the jackpot type is set as the lottery result obtained in advance (S504), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S502, if it is determined that the current winning combination is not special pattern 1 (special pattern 1), i.e., special pattern 2 (special pattern 2) (S502: No), the lottery results for each counter value obtained this time are obtained in advance based on the special pattern jackpot random number table 202a and the special pattern 2 jackpot table 202d2 (S505), and a winning information command including the jackpot determination result and jackpot type is set as the previously obtained lottery result (S504), and this process ends.

In this way, the result of the win/loss judgment made in advance before the fluctuation starts is output to the voice lamp control device 113 as a winning information command each time a reserved ball is established, so the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the win/loss judgment result and the type of win in advance. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute a preview performance (for example, a performance such as changing the color of the reserved pattern to a color that suggests the win/loss judgment result, or outputting a notification sound to notify the win/loss judgment result of the reserved ball) that notifies the player in advance of the win/loss judgment result for the reserved ball based on the winning information command. In addition, since one winning information command is output for the reserved ball each time the reserved ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the reserved ball. In the pre-reading process (see S407 in FIG. 429) in this control example, when it is determined that there is no new winning in the process of S501 (S501: No), this process is terminated as it is. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to set a winning information command again for each counter value already stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. By configuring in this way, even if it is determined that a notice performance is not to be performed for the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a notice performance again for the same reserved pattern. Also, in this control example, it is configured to determine the lottery result based on each counter value acquired on the main control device 110 side in advance, and set information for indicating the pre-determination result as a winning information command. However, without being limited to this, it may be configured to set information for indicating each acquired counter value as a winning information command, and determine the lottery result in advance based on the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In addition, if information indicating each acquired counter value is set as a winning information command, it is advisable to encrypt the winning information command so that a player who acquires the command illegally cannot identify the currently acquired counter value, or to configure the winning information command to be output at multiple times.

Next, referring to FIG. 430, the normal symbol change processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol change processing (S106). This normal symbol change processing (S106) is executed during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and is processing for controlling the second symbol change display performed by the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640, etc.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently winning (S601). The normal symbol (second symbol) is winning when the second symbol display device 83 is displaying a win and when the electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is being controlled to open and close. If the result of the determination is that the normal symbol (second symbol) is winning (S601: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern (second pattern) is not winning (S601: No), it is determined whether the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S602), and if the display state of the second pattern display device 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved variable display times M for the normal pattern) is obtained (S603). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal pattern reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved areas 1 to 4 of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: reserved area 1 → execution area, reserved area 2 → reserved area 1, reserved area 3 → reserved area 2, reserved area 4 → reserved area 3. After the data is shifted, the value of the normal win random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S607), and the process proceeds to S608.

In the process of S608, it is determined whether or not the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is in progress (S608). In this process of S608, the value of the time-saving counter 203g and the state of the high probability flag 203h are checked, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or more or the high probability flag 203h is on, it is determined that the time-saving state is in progress, and if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 and the high probability flag 203h is off, it is determined that the time-saving state is not in progress. In the process of S608, if it is determined that the time is being shortened (high probability state of normal symbols) (the value of the time-shortened counter 203g is 1 or more, or the probability change flag 203h is on) (S608: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of normal symbols, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained based on the value of the normal win random number counter C5 obtained in the process of S603 and the normal win random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407(b)), and the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S609, specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C5 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal win random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407(b)). As mentioned above, if the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is determined that the normal pattern is a losing symbol (see Figure 407 (b)).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S608 that the game is not in the time-saving mode (high probability state of normal symbols) (the value of the time-saving mode counter 203g is 0 and the probability-change flag 203h is off) (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the low probability state of normal symbols (normal state, potential state), so the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is a win is obtained based on the value of the normal win random number counter C5 obtained in the process of S603 and the normal win random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 407(b)) (S610). Specifically, the value of the normal win random number counter C5 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal win random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 407(b)). As mentioned above, if the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239", it is determined that the normal pattern is a losing symbol (see Figure 407 (b)).

In this control example, during a jackpot of a special symbol, the lottery for a normal symbol is less likely to be a winning combination. This is because during a jackpot of a special symbol (i.e., during a special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to make the ball enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entry hole 640 is opened to prevent the game ball, which is intended to enter the specific winning hole 65a, from entering the second ball entry hole 640 as much as possible.

After executing the process of S609 or S610, the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal pattern obtained by the process of S609 or S610 is a winning normal pattern (S611), and if it is determined that the normal pattern is a winning normal pattern (S611: Yes), the display mode at the time of winning is set (S612), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S612, after the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the "○" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (second pattern).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S611 that the normal pattern has been missed (S611: No), the display mode in the case of a miss is set (S613), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S613, after the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 has ended, the "X" pattern is set to be lit and displayed as the stopping pattern (second pattern).

In the process of S614, it is determined whether or not the time is being shortened (whether or not the normal pattern is in a high probability state) (S614), and if the time is being shortened (normal pattern is in a high probability state) (S614: Yes), the change time of the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the time is not being shortened (normal pattern is in a high probability state), that is, if the normal pattern is in a low probability state (S614: No), the change time of the variable display in the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S616), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second pattern display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether the change time of the changing display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 has elapsed (S617). Note that the change time here is the time that was previously set by the process of S615 or S616 before the changing display was started in the second pattern display device 83.

In the process of S617, if the change time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the change time of the executed change display has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal pattern is a loss and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "X" pattern as the second pattern is set to be stopped (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83. When the stop display is set by processing S618, the next time the second pattern display update processing (see S1009) of the main processing (see FIG. 434) is executed, the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 ends, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed as a stop (illuminated) on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by processing S612 or S613.

Next, when the ongoing variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83, it is determined whether the result of the lottery for the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol variable process (the current lottery result) is a winning normal symbol (S619). If the current lottery result is not a winning normal symbol (S619: No), this process ends as is. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a winning normal symbol (S619: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the time is currently being shortened (S620). If it is determined that the time is being shortened (S620: Yes), the opening time and number of times of the electric device 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set to 1 second x 2 times (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S620 that the time-saving mode is not in effect (S620: No), the opening time and number of times of the first electric device 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds x 1 time (S622), and the process proceeds to S623.

In the process of S623, which is executed after the process of S6212 or S622, the start of the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is set (S623), and this process ends. When the start of the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is set by the process of S623, the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a is started when the electric role opening and closing process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is next executed, and the opening and closing control of the electric role 640a continues until the opening time and the number of openings set in the process of S621 or the process of S622 in FIG. 430 are completed.

In this way, except during a jackpot of a special pattern, in a high probability state of a normal pattern, the time of the variable display becomes very short (from 30 seconds to 3 seconds) compared to a low probability state of a normal pattern, and further, the opening period of the second ball entrance 640 becomes very long (from 0.2 seconds x 1 time to 1 second x 2 times), making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640.

In this control example, the opening time and the number of times of opening in the long-time hit are the same in the normal state and the potential state, but they may be configured to be set to different opening times and numbers of times of opening. In addition, in this control example, the opening operation content of the first electric device 640a is set based on the game state set at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation (at the time of the lottery), but it is not limited to this, and for example, the winning or losing judgment of the normal pattern is performed based on the game state set at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation (at the time of the lottery), and the opening operation content of the first electric device 640a may be set based on the game state at the time when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern that won the winning has elapsed. In other words, in this control example, since the game state is configured to be variably set based on the lottery of the special pattern, the game state may be variably set during the fluctuation of the normal pattern. In such a case, if the opening operation contents of the first electric device 640a are set based on the game state set at the start of the change of the common pattern (at the time of the lottery), there is a problem that the first electric device 640a will be open for a long time during a big win game or during a high probability state of a normal pattern. In contrast, by configuring the opening operation contents of the first electric device 640a to be set based on the game state at the time when the change time of the normal pattern that won the win has elapsed, the opening operation of the first electric device 640a can be executed with contents suitable for the set game state.

Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 431. FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed within the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) and is a process for determining whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and, if a ball has passed through, acquiring and retaining the value indicated by the normal hit random number counter C5.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of reserved normal symbol variable display M) is obtained (S702). Then, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (S703).

If the game ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 but the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the normal winning random number counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the first of the empty reserved areas (reserved area 1 to reserved area 4) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 (S705), and then this process is terminated. In addition, in the process of S705, the value of the normal pattern reserved ball counter 203d is referenced, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is set as the first area.

Next, referring to FIG. 432, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt processing is a processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt processing stores information on the occurrence of a power outage in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the information on the occurrence of the power outage in the RAM 203 as the setting of the information on the occurrence of the power outage (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above-mentioned NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout/firing control device 111, and this NMI interrupt processing causes information about the occurrence of a power outage to be stored in the RAM 213. In other words, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SG1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control currently being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing.

Next, referring to FIG. 433, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is initiated by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (a process for setting a wait time of 1 second in this control example) is executed to wait for the sub-side control units (peripheral control units such as the voice lamp control unit 113 and the dispensing control unit 111) to become operable (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

Then, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 122 provided on the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power outage did not end normally, so in this case too, the process proceeds to S913.

If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S905: Yes), a RAM judgment value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM judgment value is not normal (S907: No), that is, if the calculated RAM judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power outage, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process also proceeds to S913. Note that, as will be described later in the process of S1016 in FIG. 434, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the working area address of RAM 203. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not a keyword written in a specified area of RAM 203 is saved correctly.

In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the areas (working areas) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets initial values, and becomes ready to start controlling the payout of game balls. After sending the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S914, S915).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is to be initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall opens for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. Similarly, if the power outage occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. In the RAM initialization process (S914, S915), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After the RAM 203 initialization process is executed, the process proceeds to S911.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: Yes), a status command indicating the value of the time-saving counter 203g and the state of the probability change flag 203h (i.e., the game state at the time of start-up) is transmitted (S908). Next, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S909) while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203. Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery is transmitted (S910) to return the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of the drive power interruption, and the process proceeds to S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it becomes possible to start the payout control of the game balls while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S911, a performance permission command is sent to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various performances. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S912), and the process proceeds to the main process described below.

Next, referring to FIG. 434, the main processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up processing will be described. FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. In summary, each process from S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process at a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update processes of S1010 and S1011 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), an external output process is executed to transmit output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of balls acquired is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the reserved ball number command set in the special pattern variation process (see FIG. 426) or the start winning process (see FIG. 428) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the winning command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 428) or the look-ahead process (see FIG. 429) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Furthermore, this external output process transmits to the voice lamp control device 113 a variation pattern command, a stop type command, etc. required for the third pattern display device 81 to display the variation of the third pattern.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches its maximum value (198 in this control example), it is cleared to 0. The updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is then stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of a special pattern jackpot state, a jackpot performance is executed and a jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning port 65a is opened according to the content of the jackpot game to be executed (jackpot type), and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning port 65a has elapsed or whether a prescribed number of balls have entered the specific winning port 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is met, the specific winning port 65a is closed. The opening and closing of this specific winning port 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. Details of this jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to Figures 435 to 439. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Also, in this control example, the jackpot game content corresponding to the jackpot type (type of ball entrance to be opened, opening time, number of openings (number of rounds), and opening period, interval period, ending period) is pre-stored as a jackpot scenario, and the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is read out, and the jackpot game based on the read out jackpot scenario is executed.

Next, an electric reel opening/closing process is executed to control the opening/closing of the electric reel 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 (S1005). In the electric reel opening/closing process, when the start of the opening/closing control of the electric reel 640a is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 430), the opening/closing control of the electric reel 640a is started. Note that the opening/closing control of the first electric reel 640a continues until the opening time and the number of openings set by the process of S621 or S622 of FIG. 430 in the normal symbol fluctuation process are completed.

Next, a first pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B (S1006). In the first pattern display update process, when a change pattern is set by the process of S312 or S317 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 427), the change display according to the change pattern is started in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B. In this control example, from the start of the change until the change time has elapsed, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on, if the green LED is on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED color were to be changed each time the main process was executed, the player would not be able to see the change in the LED color. Therefore, to allow the player to see the change in the LED color, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED color is changed. In other words, the LED color is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the LED color is changed.

In addition, in the first pattern display update process, when the change time corresponding to the change pattern set by processing S312 or S317 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 427) ends, the change display being performed in the first pattern display device 37 is terminated, and the stopped pattern (first pattern) is displayed as stopped (lit) on the first pattern display device 37 in the display mode set by processing S311 or S316 of the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 427).

Next, a second pattern display update process is executed to update the display of the second pattern display device 83 (S1007). In the second pattern display update process, when the second pattern change time is set by the process of S615 or S616 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 430), the second pattern display device 83 starts a change display. As a result, the second pattern display device 83 performs a change display in which the "○" pattern and the "×" pattern as the second pattern are alternately lit. Also, in the second pattern display update process, when the stop display of the second pattern display device 83 is set by the process of S618 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 430), the change display being executed in the second pattern display device 83 is terminated, and the stop pattern (second pattern) is displayed (lit) in a stopped state on the second pattern display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or S613 of the normal pattern change process (see FIG. 430).

Then, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in RAM 203 (S1008). If information on the occurrence of a power outage is not stored in RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power outage signal SG1 is not output from the power outage monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009). If the predetermined time has already elapsed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-mentioned processes from S1001 onwards are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the specified time has not yet elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated until the specified time is reached, i.e., within the remaining time until the timing for executing the next main process (S1010, S1011).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this control example), the counter is cleared to 0. The updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are then stored in the corresponding buffer areas of RAM 203. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated in the same manner as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

Here, the execution time of each process from S1001 to S1007 changes depending on the game state, so the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (i.e., the initial value of the special win random number counter C1 and the initial value of the normal win random number counter C5), and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

In addition, if the power interruption information is stored in the RAM 203 in the process of S1008 (S1008: Yes), the power is interrupted due to a power outage or power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1, which means that the NMI interruption process in FIG. 432 is executed, so the process at the time of power interruption from S1012 onwards is executed. First, the occurrence of each interruption process is prohibited (S1012), and a power off command indicating that the power has been interrupted is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113) (S1013). Then, a RAM judgment value is calculated and the value is saved (S1014), and access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and an infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and working area backed up in the RAM 203.

The process of S1008 is executed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the change in the game state performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the end of one cycle of the processes of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power interruption occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, so when returning from the power interruption state, the process can be started from the process of S1001 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, just as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process at the time of power interruption, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value) in the initial setting process, and the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 435. FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed during the main process (see FIG. 434), and is a process for executing various effects according to the jackpot and opening or closing the specific winning port (large opening port) 65a when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with a special symbol.

In the jackpot control process (S1004), first, it is determined whether the jackpot start flag 203i is on or not (S1101). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is on (S1101: Yes), the opening command for the jackpot is set (S1102), the jackpot start flag 203i is set to off, and the jackpot in progress flag 203j is set to on (S1103), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is off in the process of S1101 (S1101: No), it is next determined whether or not the current jackpot of the special pattern is in progress (i.e., whether the jackpot in progress flag 203j is on) (S1104). If it is determined that the current jackpot is not in progress (the jackpot in progress flag 203j is off) in the process of S1104 (S1104: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1104 that a jackpot is currently occurring (the jackpot flag 203j is on) (S1104: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is time to start a new round (S1105).

If it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is time to start a new round (S1105: Yes), a jackpot operation setting process is executed to set the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds (S1106), and this process ends. Details of this jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 436.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1107). Here, in this control example, when the final round of the jackpot has ended, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108) and this process is terminated. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending performance indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third pattern display device 81.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1107 that the timing is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S1107: No), then it is determined whether it is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109). Here, the end timing of the jackpot refers to the case where the execution period of the ending performance has elapsed. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the timing is the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends is executed (S1110), and this process is terminated. Details of this jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG. 437. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1109 that the timing is not the end timing of the jackpot (S1109: No), a winning process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning port 65a is executed (S1111), an abnormality process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally is executed (S1112), and then this process is terminated. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIG. 438 and FIG. 439.

Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 436. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). This jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed within the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening and closing operation of the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds.

When this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436) starts, it is first determined whether it is time to start the 5th round (i.e., the round in which the V role is activated) (S1201). If it is determined in the process of S1201 that it is time to start the 5th round (S1201: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of the V role is set (S1202), the opening pattern of the specific winning port 65a corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1205.

As described above, in this first control example, a common operation scenario is set for the V role regardless of the type of jackpot. Specifically, an operation scenario is set in which the arrangement is changed so that game balls can be distributed to the V area from 5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the 5th round. Meanwhile, as described above, different opening patterns are set for the specific winning port 65a depending on whether it is a guaranteed jackpot or a normal jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a sure-win jackpot, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in an opening and closing pattern that allows the game ball to reach the V device while the V device is being changed to a configuration that distributes the game ball to the V region (an opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from 5 seconds to 9.5 seconds after the start of the 5th round), while in the case of a normal jackpot, the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in an opening and closing pattern that makes it impossible to reach the V device while the V device is being changed to a configuration that distributes the game ball to the V region (an opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the 5th round to 4.5 seconds).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that it is not time to start the fifth round (S1201: No), the specific winning port 65a is set to open (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1205, which is executed after the process of S1203 or S1204, a round number command indicating the number of new rounds to be started is set (S1205), and the process ends.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for sending commands provided in the RAM 203, and is sent to the voice lamp control device 113 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started number of rounds on the third pattern display device 81. This makes it possible to update the display content of the third pattern display device 81 according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436), the specific winning hole 65a can be opened in each round of the jackpot, and the state can be set so that the ball can enter the V area in the fifth round. As a result, in the case of jackpots A, B, and D, the player can almost certainly enter the V area and pass the probability change switch by simply hitting the right side in the fifth round, so that the game ball can be transferred to the probability change state (probability change state of the special pattern and time-saving state of the normal pattern) after the jackpot ends. In addition, in the case of jackpots C and E, it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the V area even by hitting the right side, so the time-saving state can be set after the jackpot ends. As a result, the lottery for the first special pattern, which determines the jackpot C at a relatively high rate (50%) in the case of a jackpot, can be made a lottery that is disadvantageous to the player, and the lottery for the second special pattern, which determines the jackpot E at a relatively low rate (20%) in the case of a jackpot, can be made a lottery that is advantageous to the player.

Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 437. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S1110). This jackpot end process (S1110) is executed within the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for setting the game state after the jackpot ends.

In this jackpot end process (S1110), first, it is determined whether the special probability setting flag 203k is on (S1301). If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the special probability setting flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), this means that the game ball passed the special probability switch during the jackpot, so the special probability setting flag 203h is set to on to set the state after the jackpot to a special probability state (S1302), and the process proceeds to S1303. On the other hand, if the special probability setting flag 203k is off in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), this means that the game ball did not pass the special probability switch during the jackpot, so the process of S1302 is skipped to set the state after the jackpot to a low probability state for special symbols, and the process proceeds to S1303.

In the process of S1303, the value of the time-saving counter 203g is set to 100 (S1303), and a state command (big win end command) for indicating the game state after the big win is ended is set based on the state of the probability change flag 203h and the time-saving counter 203g (S1304). The state command (big win end command) set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, it updates the game state storage area 223f according to the game state notified by the state command. This allows the voice lamp control device 113 to accurately grasp the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the big win flag 203j and the probability change setting flag 203k are both set to OFF (S1305), and this process is terminated.

By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 437), the game state after the jackpot end can be accurately set depending on whether or not the game ball passed through the special chance switch during the jackpot.

Next, the details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 438. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1111). This winning process (S1111) is executed within the big win control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for carrying out control in response to a win at a specific winning port 65a.

In this winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current time is the valid round period (S1401). Here, the valid round period is the period during which a round of play is set, that is, the period from when the specific winning port 65a is opened until the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if the current time is not the valid round period (S1401: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the current time is the valid period for the round (S1401: Yes), it is then determined whether a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected (S1402), and if a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected (S1402: Yes), the value of the winning number counter 203p is updated by adding 1 (S1403), a winning command indicating that a win at the specific winning port 65a has been detected is set (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1402 that a win at the specific winning port 65a has not been detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped and the process proceeds to S1405.

In the process of S1405, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405), and if the value of the winning number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, if it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406), and if the round time has elapsed (S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. In the process of S1406, it is determined that the round time has elapsed if 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the round.

In the process of S1407, the specific winning port 65a is set to be closed (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the specific winning port 65a has been set to be closed is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the current closing of the specific winning port 65a is based on the end of one round (S1409). If it is determined that the current closing is based on the end of five rounds (S1409: Yes), the flow path solenoid for varying the V role is set to off, and the state of the V role is set to an arrangement in which the game balls are distributed to the non-V area (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that the current closing of the specific winning port 65a is based on the end of a round other than the fifth round (S1409: No), there is no possibility that the flow path solenoid is set to on, so the process of S1410 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1411.

In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203q, the special chance active flag 203s, and the round end flag are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. Also, if the value of the winning number counter 203p is determined to be 9 or less in the process of S1405 (S1405: No), and if it is determined in the process of S1406 that the round time has not elapsed (S1406: No), the processes of S1407 to S1411 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1412.

In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is on (S1412), and if the round end flag is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1412 that the round end flag is on (S1412: Yes), it is then determined whether the special chance active flag 203s is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the special chance active flag 203s is off (S1416: No), the process ends as is.

On the other hand, if the special chance effective flag 203s is on (S1416: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special chance effective timer 203t (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the special chance effective timer 203t is the upper limit value (S1418). If the value of the special chance effective timer 203t is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1413, where the special chance effective switch is monitored and a process for updating the special chance setting flag 203k is executed. As a result, if the special chance effective timer 203t is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed through the special chance effective switch, and the special chance effective state can be set taking into account the time for the ball to be cleared. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be effective, it is possible to prevent the special chance effective state from being improperly imparted by passing a game ball through the special chance effective switch.

On the other hand, if the value of the special chance effective timer 203t is the upper limit (S1418: Yes), the special chance effective flag 203s and the round end flag are set to off (S1419), the value of the special chance effective timer 203t is reset (S1420), and this process ends.

In addition, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has passed through the special probability switch (S1413), and if the gaming ball has not passed through the special probability switch (S1413: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming ball has passed through the special probability switch (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the special probability passage counter 203m (S1414), the special probability setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415), and this process is terminated.

Next, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 439. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormality processing (S1112) is a process executed during the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for determining whether the ball that entered the specific winning port 65a was discharged normally.

In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the current time is the valid period for the round (S1501), and if it is not the valid period for the round (S1501: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the current time is the valid period for the round (S1501: Yes), it is then determined whether the game ball has passed through the ball discharge switch (whether a game ball discharged from the variable winning device 65 has been detected) (S1502).

If it is determined in the process of S1502 that the gaming ball has passed through the ball discharge switch (the gaming ball has been discharged from the variable winning device 65) (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the discharged ball number counter 203u (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1502 that the gaming ball has not passed through the ball discharge switch (S1502: No), the process skips S1503 and proceeds to S1504.

In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203q is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203q is off (S1504: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203q is on (S1504: Yes), since it is during the ball removal period, the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is updated by adding 1 (S1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit (S1506: Yes), it then determines whether the number of dispensed balls (the sum of the value of the special chance passing counter 203m and the value of the dispensed ball number counter 203u) matches the number of winning balls (the value of the winning ball number counter 203p) (S1507).

If it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of dispensed balls does not match the number of winning balls (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508) and the process proceeds to S1509. When the error command is received by the sound and lamp control device 113, an error is displayed (for example, the text "Winning balls do not match error" is displayed), and an error signal is output to the hall computer. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent behavior such as illegally throwing a game ball into the V area and passing it through the special chance switch while the V area is closed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of dispensed balls matches the number of winning balls (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is reset (S1510). After that, the values of the winning number counter 203p, the dispensed number counter 203u, and the special chance passing counter 203m are each reset (S1511), and this process ends.

By executing this abnormality processing (see Figure 439), it is possible to detect and notify early on of the occurrence of a malfunction in which a ball that has entered a specific winning port 65a is unable to be discharged normally due to a ball becoming jammed inside the variable winning device 65, etc.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the first control example>
Next, referring to Fig. 440 to Fig. 458, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The process of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, referring to FIG. 440, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the startup process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Then, depending on whether the power-off processing in progress flag is on, it is determined whether the current startup process was started during the execution of the power-off processing of S3119 (see FIG. 441) due to a momentary voltage drop (momentary power outage, so-called "instantaneous power outage") (S3002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 441, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 441), it executes the power-off processing of S3119. Before the execution of such power-off processing, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off. Therefore, whether the power-off processing of S3119 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in progress flag.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S3002: No), the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power outage occurred and the power-off processing of S3119 was completed, or the process was started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 has been corrupted (S3003).

The confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of RAM 223 by the processing of S3006. Therefore, by checking the data stored in that specific area, if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process moves to S3004 and starts initialization of RAM 223. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process moves to S3008.

If the current startup process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of RAM 223 (because the memory of RAM 223 is lost when the power supply is cut off), so it is determined that the data in RAM 223 has been destroyed (S3003: Yes) and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, if the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the power cut process of S3119 is completed, or if the startup process is started after only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of RAM 223, so the data in RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No) and the process proceeds to S3008.

If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S3002: Yes), this startup process was started after a momentary power outage occurred, and the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 was reset while the power-off processing of S3119 was in progress. In this case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct, since the power-off processing is in progress. Therefore, in this case, control cannot continue, so the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 begins.

In the process of S3004, the entire storage area of RAM 223 is checked (S3004). The check method is to first write "0FFh" to each byte, then read each byte to check whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. This writing and checking for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". This read/write check of RAM 223 clears all storage areas of RAM 223 to 0.

If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all memory areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether data destruction has occurred in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any memory area of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007) and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the abnormality in the RAM 223 may be notified by outputting a sound from the audio output device 226, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third pattern display device 81.

In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3119 is executed (see S3118 in FIG. 441). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S3119 is executed, so the process of S3008 is reached with the power-off flag on when the current startup process is started after a momentary power outage occurs and the execution of the power-off process of S3119 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the working area of the RAM is cleared (S3009) to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3010), interrupt permission is set (S3011). Note that the working area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110. When the process of S3011 is completed, it is next determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3012). This status command is a command set in the process of S908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 433) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. If it is determined in the process of S3012 that a status command has been received (S3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (S3013), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3012 that a status command has not been received (S3012: No), the process of S3013 is skipped and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441).

On the other hand, when the power-off flag is off and the process reaches S3008, this occurs because, for example, the current startup process was started after the power was completely cut off, and so the process went from S3004 to S3006 and then to S3008, or because noise or the like caused only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 to be reset (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009, which is the process of clearing the working area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3010, where the processes of S3010 to S3013 described above are executed, and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441).

In this way, when the power is turned on, the main control unit 110 outputs a command that can determine whether or not a long-term normal win is occurring, allowing the voice and lamp control unit 113 to also determine that state.

The clearing process of S3009 is skipped because when the process proceeds from S3004 to S3006 and then to S3008, all storage areas of RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, and when only MPU 221 of voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, control of voice lamp control device 113 can be continued by storing the data in the working area of RAM 223 without clearing it.

Next, referring to FIG. 441, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main processing is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main processing was started or since the current processing of S3101 was executed (S3101). If 1 ms or more has not elapsed (S3101: No), the processing of S3102 to S3113 is not executed and the processing proceeds to S3114. The reason for determining whether or not 1 ms has elapsed in the processing of S3101 is that, whereas S3102 to S3113 are mainly processing related to display (performance) and do not need to be edited in a short cycle (within 1 ms), it is preferable to execute the command determination processing of S3114, the variable display setting processing of S3115, and the processing of updating various counter values not shown in the figure in a short cycle. In other words, by executing the process of S3114 at short intervals, it is possible to prevent commands sent from the main control device 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S3115 at short intervals, it is possible to set up the variable performance without delay based on the commands received by the command determination process.

If 1 ms or more has elapsed in the processing of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S3103 to S3115 are sent to the display control device 114 (S3102). Next, the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 is set and the output of each lamp is set to the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power-on notification processing is executed (S3104). The power-on notification processing is a processing for notifying that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. In addition, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Note that if the power is not turned on, the notification by the power-on notification processing is not performed and the processing proceeds to S3105.

In the process of S3105, a customer waiting performance process is executed, and then a reserved ball number display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting performance process, when a predetermined time has elapsed during which the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and this setting is sent as a command to the display control device 114. In the reserved ball number display update process, a process is performed to light up the reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the value of the normal reserved ball number counter 223c.

After that, the frame button input monitoring/presentation process is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring/presentation process monitors input to determine whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the presentation effect, and sets up a corresponding presentation when input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

When the frame button input monitoring and performance process is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing and output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81. In the sound editing and output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the settings.

After processing S3109, the LCD performance execution management process is executed (S3110), and the process moves to S3111. In the LCD performance execution management process, a time is set that is synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the variable pattern command sent from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in this LCD performance execution monitoring process. The sound editing/output process of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81.

When the processing of S3110 is completed, a performance update process is then executed (S3111) to update the performance aspects of the various performances executed during execution of the variable display performance. This performance update process (S3111) will be described later with reference to Figs. 442 to 446. After the performance update process (S3111) is executed, the operation status (presence or absence of pressing) of the PUSH button 10317 is then monitored, and if pressing is detected, a press detection process is executed (S3112) to execute control according to the pressing status. Details of this press detection process (S3112) will be described later with reference to Figs. 447 to 450.

When the processing of S3112 is completed, a counter update process is executed (S3113). In this counter update process (S3113), a process is executed to update the value of a counter required when executing various effects (for example, the effect selection counter 223y for selecting the effect mode).

When the processing of S3113 is completed, next, a command determination process is executed (S3114) to execute control according to various commands received from the main control device 110. Details of this command determination process (S3114) will be described later with reference to Figs. 451 to 454. After the command determination process (S3114) is executed, a variable display setting process is executed (S3115). In the variable display setting process, a display variable pattern command is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to Figs. 455 to 459.

After the processing of S3115 is completed, it is determined whether or not information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). Information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored when a power outage command is received from the main control unit 110. If information on the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S3118), and the power outage processing is executed (S3119). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S3120), and the processing then loops infinitely. In the power outage processing, the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. The stored information on the occurrence of a power outage is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power failure information is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S3117). If the RAM 223 is not destroyed (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of subsequent processes. Here, if the RAM is determined to be destroyed and an infinite loop occurs, the main process is not executed, and the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a hall staff member or the like to repair the pachinko machine 10. In addition, if it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the player of the RAM destruction.

Next, referring to FIG. 442, the performance update process (S3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing this performance update process (S3111). This performance update process (S3111) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is a process for updating the performance aspects of various performances executed during the execution of the variable display performance.

In the performance update process (S3111), first, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer 223s is greater than 0 (S3201). If it is determined that the value is 0 (S3201: No), this means that the variable display is not currently being executed, and it means that there is no possibility that the performance to be updated is being executed, so this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is greater than 0 (i.e., a value of 1 or more) (S3201: Yes), the value of the variable time timer is subtracted (S3202), and then a press stop performance process is executed (S3203) to update the performance mode during execution of the press stop performance (see FIG. 395). Details of this press stop performance process will be described later with reference to FIG. 443.

When the processing of S3203 is completed, next, an interruption successive tapping performance process is executed (S3204) to update the performance mode during the execution of the interruption successive tapping performance (see FIG. 399). Details of this interruption successive tapping performance process (S3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. 444. Also, when the processing of S3204 is completed, next, a batch change performance process is executed (S3205) to update the performance mode during the execution of the pending batch change performance (see FIG. 402, FIG. 403). Details of this batch change performance process (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. 445. When the processing of S3205 is completed, a charge consumption process is executed (S3206) to set the consumption of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge performance (see FIG. 397), and this process is terminated. Details of this charge consumption process will be described later with reference to FIG. 446.

Next, referring to FIG. 443, the press stop performance processing (S3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing this press stop performance processing (S3203). This press stop performance processing (S3203) is executed as part of the performance update processing (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is processing for updating the performance mode during execution of the press stop performance (see FIG. 395).

In this press stop effect process (see FIG. 443), first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301). In the process of S3301, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the press stop effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301: Yes), the press stop effect is set to start (S3302), and the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is set to a timer value corresponding to 3 seconds (S3303). Next, the value of the stop operation count counter 223u is set to 3 (S3304), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that it is not the timing to start the press stop performance (S3301: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3305). In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3305: Yes), the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is updated (S3306), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the operation valid period timer 223t after the update is 0 (S3307). In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t after the update is not 0 (S3307: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t after the update is 0 (S3307: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the chance charge waiting flag 223k is on (S3308). In the process of S3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3308: Yes), the stop display of the chance charge pattern is set (S3309), and this process is terminated. In contrast, in the process of S3308, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3308: No), this means that only the push stop effect (see FIG. 395) was set for the current variable display effect (the execution of the chance charge effect was not set), and the operation valid period (3 seconds) has elapsed without the player performing a stop operation, so the stop display of the losing pattern is set (S3310), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3305, if it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is 0 (S3305: No), then it is determined whether or not the stopped display period of the chance charge pattern has elapsed (S3311). If it is determined that the stopped display period of the chance charge pattern has not elapsed (S3311: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3311, if it is determined that the stopped display period of the chance charge pattern has elapsed (S3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge performance corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223m is set (S3312), and the chance charge standby flag 223k is set to OFF (S3313). Next, the value of the charge state number counter 223n is set to a value corresponding to the current number of reserved balls (S3314), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 444, the interrupt rapid-hit presentation process (S3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 444 is a flowchart showing this interrupt rapid-hit presentation process (S3204). This interrupt rapid-hit presentation process (S3204) is executed within the presentation update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for updating the presentation mode during the execution of the interrupt rapid-hit presentation (see FIG. 399).

When this interruption rapid-fire performance process (see FIG. 444) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the interruption rapid-fire performance (S3401). If it is determined in the process of S3401 that it is the timing to start the interruption rapid-fire performance (S3401: Yes), then, from the value of the variable time timer 223s, it is determined whether or not the current variable time is the time before the reach (S3402). If it is determined in the process of S3402 that it is the variable time before the reach (S3402: Yes), both the display and the sound are paused, and the pause flag is set to "01H" (S3404), and the process proceeds to S3405. Specifically, in the process of S3404, a display pause command indicating the start of the stop (pause) of the display mode is set to be output to the display control device 114, and an audio pause command indicating the start of the stop (pause) of the BGM output is set to be output to the audio output device 226.

On the other hand, in the process of S3402, if it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s is not a timer value indicating a pre-reach state (S3402: No), the display mode only is paused (interrupted), the pause flag is set to "02H" (S3403), and the process proceeds to S3405. In the process of S3405, which is executed after the process of S3403 or S3404 is completed, the start of the interrupt rapid-hit effect (see FIG. 399) is set (S3405), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that it is not the start timing of the interrupt rapid-hit effect (S3401: No), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of the rapid-hit period (S3406). If it is determined in the process of S3406 that it is the start timing of the rapid-hit period (S3406: Yes), the timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the value of the rapid-hit valid period timer 223v (S3407), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3406, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the continuous hitting period (S3406: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3408: Yes), the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is subtracted by 1 (S3409), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v after the subtraction is 0 (S3410). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v after the subtraction is 0 (S3410: Yes), then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3410, if it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v after the subtraction is not 0 (S3410: No), then the display of the end image of the interrupt continuous hitting effect is set (S3411), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S3408, if it is determined that the value of the continuous tapping effective period timer 223v is 0 (S3408: No), it is next determined whether or not it is the timing to end the interrupt continuous tapping effect (S3412). In the process of S3412, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the interrupt continuous tapping effect (S3412: Yes), it is determined whether or not the value of the pause flag is "01H" (S3413). If it is determined that the value of the pause flag is "01H" (S3413: Yes), this means that both the display and the sound were stopped (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt continuous tapping effect, so both the display mode and the sound mode are set to resume from the pause position (S3414). That is, the display control device 114 is set to output a display interrupt command indicating the end of the interruption of the display mode, and the sound output device 226 is set to output a sound interrupt command indicating the end of the interruption of the sound mode. When the process of S3414 is completed, the process proceeds to S3415.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3413 that the value of the pause flag is not "01H" (S3413: No), this means that the value of the pause flag is "02H", meaning that only the display mode has been paused (interrupted), so a setting is made to resume the display mode from the pause position (i.e., a display interrupt command indicating the end of the interruption of the display mode is output to the display control device 114) (S3416), and the processing proceeds to S3415. In the processing of S3415, which is executed after the processing of S3414 or S3416, the pause flag is set to the initial value "00H" (S3415), indicating that neither the audio nor the display has been paused (interrupted), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3412 that it is not time to end the interrupt rapid-fire effect (S3412: No), this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 445, the batch change performance processing (S3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing this batch change performance processing (S3205). This batch change performance processing (S3205) is executed within the performance update processing (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is processing for updating the performance mode during execution of the pending batch change performance (see FIG. 402, FIG. 403).

In the batch change performance process (see FIG. 445), first, it is determined whether the batch change flag 223p is on or not (S3501). If it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is not on (off) (S3501: No), this means that the pending batch change performance (see FIG. 402, FIG. 403) is not in execution period, and there is no possibility of setting the pending batch change performance, so this process is terminated. If it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is on (S3501: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the timing when the effective period of operation on the PUSH button 10317 for changing the pending pattern state in a batch in the pending batch change performance starts (S3502). In the process of S3502, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the valid period for operations on the PUSH button 10317 (S3502: Yes), the batch change period timer 223x is set to a timer value corresponding to 3 seconds (S3503), thereby setting the valid period for operations on the PUSH button 10317 to 3 seconds, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of 3502 that it is not the start timing of the valid period (S3502: No), then it is determined whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (i.e., whether it is within the valid period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317) (S3504). If it is determined in the process of S3504 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3504: Yes), the value of the batch change period timer 223x is subtracted by 1 (S3505), and it is determined whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x after the subtraction is 0 (S3506). If it is determined in the process of S3506 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x after the subtraction is not 0 (S3506: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3506 that the value of the collective change period timer 223x after subtraction is 0 (S3506: Yes), the reserved ball count pattern is changed and displayed in the reserved pattern mode indicated by the data in the reserved pattern mode storage area 223r (S3507), the values of the collective change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the collective change period timer 223x are all reset (S3508), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3504 that the value of the collective change period timer 223x is 0 (S3504: No), this process ends as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 446, the charge consumption process (S3206) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 446 is a flowchart showing this charge consumption process (S3206). This charge consumption process (S3206) is executed within the performance update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is a process for setting the consumption of the spirit gauge charged in the chance charge performance (see FIG. 397).

In the charge consumption process (S3206), first, it is determined whether the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3551). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is 0 (S3551: No), this means that there is no room to consume the spirit gauge and generate a chance-up effect, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3551 that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than 0 (S3551: Yes), it is next determined whether it is the timing to execute a charge consumption effect (S3552). If it is determined in the process of S3552 that it is not the timing to execute a charge consumption effect (S3552: No), this process is terminated.

In contrast, if it is determined in the processing of S3552 that it is the timing to execute the charge consumption effect (S3552: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 or not (S3553). If it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 (S3553: Yes), this means that this is the last variable display in which the spirit gauge can be consumed, and since it is necessary to consume the spirit gauge within this variable display, processing is executed to consume the spirit gauge and set the chance-up effect (processing of S3560, S3561).

On the other hand, in the process of S3553, if it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is not 0 (S3553: No), it is next determined whether or not the currently executing change display (the change) is a change display with a presentation mode set to indicate a degree of expectation of Super Reach or higher (S3554). If it is determined that the change does not have a degree of expectation of Super Reach or higher (has a normal reach presentation or lower) (S3354: No), it is next determined whether or not the range of the charge state includes a reserved ball of Super Reach or higher (S3555). If it is determined that the range of the charge state includes a reserved ball of Super Reach or higher (S3555: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than the number of reserved balls in the charge range plus 2 (S3556). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than the number of reserved balls within the charge range plus 2 (S3556: Yes), this means that there is a large amount of gauge number (charge number) remaining in the spirit gauge compared to the number of reserved balls, even if it is taken into account that the reserved balls include super reach or more, which has many opportunities for executing chance-up effects, so in order to reduce the spirit gauge during this fluctuation, processing is executed (processes of S3558 and S3559) to consume the spirit gauge and set the chance-up effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3556 that the value of the charge number counter 223m is equal to or less than the number of reserved balls in the charge range plus 2 (S3556: No), this means that it is possible to consume the spirit gauge fully within the range of the value of the charge state number counter 223n by consuming the spirit gauge at the timing of execution of multiple chance-up effects in the variable display in which the super reach effect is set, so the consumption of the spirit gauge for that change is not set and this processing ends as it is.

In addition, in the process of S3555, if it is determined that the range of the charge state includes a reserved number of balls of Super Reach or more (S3555: No), it is next determined whether the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than the number of reserved balls in the charge range (S3557). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is less than or equal to the number of reserved balls in the charge range (S3557: No), this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, in the process of S3557, if it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is greater than the number of reserved balls in the charge range (S3557: Yes), this means that there is a large remaining gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge compared to the number of reserved balls, so in order to reduce the spirit gauge during the change, a process is executed (each process of S3558, S3559) to consume the spirit gauge and set a chance-up performance.

In the process of S3558, a charge consumption presentation of a presentation mode corresponding to the execution timing is set (S3558), the value of the charge number counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S3559), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3554, if it is determined that the fluctuation is a super reach or greater (S3354: Yes), a charge consumption presentation of a presentation mode corresponding to the execution timing is set (S3560), the value of the charge number counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S3561), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 447, the press detection process (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 447 is a flowchart showing this press detection process (S3112). This press detection process (S3112) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for monitoring the operation status (presence or absence of pressing) of the PUSH button 10317, and when pressing is detected, executing control according to the pressing status.

In the pressing detection process (S3112), first, it is determined whether or not a press on the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (S3601). If it is determined that a press on the PUSH button 10317 has not been detected (S3601: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a press on the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (S3601: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is greater than 0 (S3602: Yes), this means that the PUSH button 10317 has been pressed (operated) during the valid period of the pressing stop performance (see FIG. 395), so a stop operation detection process is executed (S3603) to perform control corresponding to the stop operation during the execution of the pressing stop performance, and this process is terminated. Details of this stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 448.

If it is determined in the process of S3602 that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is 0 (S3602: No), it is then determined whether the value of the repeated tapping valid period timer 223v is greater than 0 (i.e., whether it is the valid period of the repeated tapping operation in the interrupt repeated tapping performance) (S3604). If it is determined that the value of the repeated tapping valid period timer 223v is greater than 0 (S3604: Yes), a repeated tapping operation detection process is executed (S3605) to execute control corresponding to the repeated tapping operation during the execution of the interrupt repeated tapping performance, and then this process is terminated. Details of this repeated tapping operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 449.

In the process of S3604, if it is determined that the value of the repeated tap valid period timer 223v is 0 (S3604: No), it is next determined whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (i.e., whether it is the valid period of the PUSH button 10317 in the pending batch change performance) (S3606). If it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is greater than 0 (S3606: Yes), a change operation detection process is executed to perform control for setting a batch change during the execution of the pending batch change performance (S3607), and then this process is terminated. Details of this change operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 450. On the other hand, in the process of S3606, if it is determined that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Next, referring to FIG. 448, the stop operation detection process (S3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 448 is a flowchart showing this stop operation detection process (S3603). This stop operation detection process (S3603) is executed within the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is a process for performing control corresponding to the stop operation during execution of the press stop performance.

In the stop operation detection process (S3603), first, it is determined whether the value of the stop operation counter 223u is greater than 1 (S3701). If it is determined that the value of the stop operation counter 223u is greater than 1 (S3701: Yes), the stop display of the pattern row corresponding to the value of the stop operation counter 223u is set (S3702), and the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3702, if the value of the stop operation counter 223u is 3, a stop operation of the left pattern row is set, while if the value of the stop operation counter 223u is 2, a stop operation of the right pattern row is set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3701, if it is determined that the value of the stop operation count counter 223u is 1 or less (S3701: No), it is determined whether or not the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3703). In the process of S3703, if it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3703: Yes), this means that a variable display in which the chance charge performance is set to be executed is being executed, so by setting the chance charge pattern stop display performance for the remaining period, it is notified that the chance charge performance will start (S3707), and the process proceeds to S3708.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3703 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3703: No), it is next determined whether or not the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704). If it is determined that the operation valid period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704: Yes), the execution of the chance charge prompting effect (see FIG. 396(a)) is set for the remaining period (S3705), and the process proceeds to S3708. By executing the process of S3705, in a variable display in which only the push stop effect is set, if three pushes are completed at an early stage in the valid period (within 1 second after the start), a chance charge prompting effect with a longer performance period can be executed than if the losing pattern is immediately stopped. Therefore, the performance period can be changed according to the speed of the player's operation (pushing), and a more suitable performance mode can be realized.

If it is determined in the process of S3704 that the effective operation period is less than 2 seconds or more remaining (less than 2 seconds) (S3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set to a losing symbol combination (S3706), and the process proceeds to S3708.

In the process of S3708, which is executed after any of the processes of S3705 to S3707 has been executed, the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is reset to 0 (S3708), and the process proceeds to S3709. In the process of S3709, which is executed after the process of S3702 or S3708 has been executed, the value of the stop operation count counter 223u is updated by subtracting 1 (S3709), and the process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 449, the rapid-fire operation detection process (S3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing this rapid-fire operation detection process (S3605). This rapid-fire operation detection process (S3605) is executed within the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is a process for executing control corresponding to rapid-fire operations during the execution of an interrupt rapid-fire performance.

In the rapid-fire operation detection process (S3605), first, the remaining effective period (T) is identified from the value of the rapid-fire effective period timer 223v (S3751), and then the lower limit (D) of the number of monsters corresponding to the effect type of the current rapid-fire interrupt effect is calculated (S3752). Note that the lower limit of the number of monsters is predefined for each effect type in the rapid-fire interrupt lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) as described above. When the process of S3752 is completed, next, "T/5 seconds x (100 monsters - D)" is calculated (S3753), and the calculated value is subtracted from the current remaining number of monsters to calculate a value (S3754). Note that in the process of S3754, the value after the decimal point is rounded up or down. When the process of S3754 is completed, next, it is determined whether the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit for the effect type of the current rapid-fire interrupt effect (S3755).

If it is determined in the processing of S3755 that the calculated number of monsters is below the lower limit (S3755: Yes), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated to the lower limit (S3756), and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3755 that the calculated number of monsters is equal to or greater than the lower limit (S3755: No), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated by subtracting the specified subtraction number (S3757), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 450, the change operation detection process (S3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing this change operation detection process (S3607). This change operation detection process (S3607) is executed within the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, is a process for controlling the setting of a batch change during the execution of the pending batch change performance.

In the change operation detection process (S3607), first, the change point corresponding to each reserved ball is identified from the data of the change point storage area 223q (S3801), and the data of the reserved pattern mode storage area 223r is updated so that the mode of reserved balls with a change point of 1 or more is uniformly increased by one level (S3802). Next, the change type of reserved 1 is identified (S3803), and the reserved pattern mode is identified according to the identified change type, the reserved change lottery table 222c, and the performance lottery counter (S3804). Then, it is determined whether the identified reserved pattern mode has a higher expectation than the data of the reserved pattern mode storage area 223r (S3805). If it is determined that the identified reserved pattern mode has a higher expectation than the data of the reserved pattern mode storage area 223r (S3805: Yes), the data of the reserved pattern mode storage area 223r is updated to data indicating the identified reserved pattern mode (S3806), and the process proceeds to S3807.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3805 that the identified reserved pattern form does not have a higher expectation level than the data in the reserved pattern form storage area 223r (S3805: No), the process of S38006 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3807.

In the process of S3807, it is determined whether the lottery for ranking up the reserved pattern pattern performed by the processes of S3804 to S3806 has been completed for all reserved balls (S3807). If it is determined that the lottery for all reserved balls has not been completed (S3807: No), the variation type of the reserved ball that detected the initial winning more recently than the reserved ball that was the subject of the current lottery is identified (S3808), and the process returns to S3804.

If it is determined in the processing of S3807 that the rank-up lottery for all reserved balls has been completed (S3807: Yes), the display of the reserved pattern state indicated by the data in the reserved pattern state storage area 223r is set (S3809), the values of the collective change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the collective change period timer 223x are all reset (S3810), and this processing is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 451, the command determination process (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S3114). This command determination process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110.

In the command determination process (S3114), first, the unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and determined whether or not the unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 includes a status command (S3901). In the process of S3901, if it is determined that the unprocessed command received from the main control unit 110 includes a status command (S3901: Yes), the data in the game status storage area 223f is updated according to the game status notified by the received command (S3902), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3901, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (S3901: No), it is next determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the main control unit 110 (the variation pattern command is included in the unprocessed command) (S3903). If it is determined in the processing of S3903 that a fluctuation pattern command has been received (S3903: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to on (S3904), a fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S3905), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3903 that a variation pattern command has not been received (S3903: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S3906). If it is determined in the process of S3906 that a stop type command has been received (S3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3907), the stop type is extracted from the received command (S3908), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S3909, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S3906: No), then it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received (S3909). In the process of S3909, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has been received (S3909: Yes), the reserved ball number is extracted from the received command, the value of the corresponding special pattern reserved ball number counter (special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b) is updated (S3910), and this process is terminated. Here, the reserved ball number corresponding to the first special pattern is stored in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 223a, and the reserved ball number corresponding to the second special pattern is stored in the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b. In addition, when a reserved ball number command indicating the reserved ball number of a normal pattern is received, information indicating the reserved ball number is stored in the normal reserved ball number counter 223c. In this control example, the reserved ball count command sent from the main control unit 110 contains information indicating the current number of reserved balls, so even if the values of the reserved ball count counters on the voice lamp control unit 113 side are erased due to a power outage or the like, the value of each reserved ball count counter can be restored to the appropriate value by receiving the next reserved ball count command sent. In this case, it is recommended to configure the main control unit 110 to send each reserved ball count command in the process of sending the status command (see S908 in FIG. 433) during the startup process (see FIG. 433) of the main control unit 110.

On the other hand, if the reserved ball count command has not been received in the process of S3909 (S3909: No), it is then determined whether or not a winning information command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S3911). If it is determined in the process of S3911 that a winning information command has been received (S3911: Yes), a winning information command process is executed (S3912) to set various effects (pre-reading effects) according to the type of winning information notified by the winning information command, and this process is terminated. Details of this winning information command process (S3912) will be described later with reference to Figures 452 and 453.

If it is determined in the process of S3911 that a winning information command has not been received (S3911: No), then it is determined whether or not various commands related to a win (any of an opening command, a round number command, a big win end command, and an ending command) have been received (S3913). If it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S3913: Yes), a win-related command process is executed to execute control according to the type of win-related command (S3914), and this process ends. This win-related command process (S3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. 454. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3913 that a win-related command has not been received from the main control unit 110 (S3913: No), then this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 452, the details of the winning information command process (S3912), which is one process within the command determination process (S3114), will be described. FIG. 452 is a flowchart showing this winning information command process (S3912). In this winning information command process (S3912), first, data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in an empty area of the winning information storage area (S4001), and processing moves to S4002. In processing S4001, data indicating the winning information notified by the command is stored in the empty area with the smallest number among the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area.

In the process of S4002, it is determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S4002). If it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S4002: No), it means that the variable display performance in which the chance charge performance is set is being executed and the chance charge performance has not yet started, so a process is executed to add the gauge number (charge number) of the spirit gauge to be charged in the chance charge performance to the value that was determined in advance at the start of the fluctuation according to the content of the newly detected start winning. More specifically, first, it is determined whether the current winning information command is a winning information command indicating a win (S4003), and if it is determined that it is a winning information command indicating a win (S4003: Yes), the value of the charge number counter 223m is updated by adding 2 (S4004), and the process proceeds to S4006. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4003 that the current winning information command is not a winning information command indicating a win (it is a winning information command indicating a loss) (S4003: No), the value of the charge number counter 223m is updated by adding 1 (S4005), and the processing proceeds to S4006.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4002 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S4002: No), since there is no possibility of increasing the gauge number (number of charges) of the spirit gauge, the process skips each process of S4003 to S4006 and proceeds to the process of S4006. In the process of S4006, it is determined whether or not a lottery result corresponding to a fall has been notified (S4006). In the process of S4006, if it is determined that a lottery result corresponding to a fall has been notified (S4006: Yes), it is then determined whether or not a presentation mode corresponding to a continuation strong scenario in the probability change continuation suggestion presentation is being executed (S4007). In the process of S4007, if the data in the continuation scenario storage area 223h is any of "08H" to "0BH" corresponding to a continuation strong scenario, it is determined that a presentation mode corresponding to a continuation strong scenario is being executed.

In the process of S4007, if it is determined that the continuation suggestion performance of the high probability scenario is being executed (S4007: Yes), it is next determined whether the winning information notified by the current winning information command is winning information that will be consumed during the execution of the high probability continuation suggestion performance (S4008). In other words, it is determined whether the new winning information determines whether the special pattern will fall from the high probability state to a low probability state during the execution of the high probability continuation suggestion performance, and if it is determined that the winning information is consumed during the execution of the continuation suggestion performance (it is determined that the fall will occur during the execution of the high probability continuation suggestion performance) (S4008: Yes), the continuation suggestion performance scenario is determined by referring to the non-continuation table of the continuation suggestion performance selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) (S4009), data indicating the selected scenario is overwritten in the continuation scenario storage area 223h (S4010), and the process proceeds to S4011. In the processes of S4009 and S4010, the performance scenario of "0CH" in the non-continuation table is stored in the continuing scenario storage area 223h.

In this first control example, if the new starting winning is a lottery result that corresponds to a fall in the number of fluctuations within the execution range of the sure-win continuation suggestion effect, the "0CH" presentation scenario is always set, but this is not limited to this, and one scenario may be determined by lottery from among the four presentation scenarios (any of "0CH" to "0FH") specified in the non-continuation table. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further diversify the presentation style when a fall occurs.

On the other hand, in the process of S4006, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has not been notified (S4006: No), if it is determined that the high probability of continuation suggestion effect of the high probability of continuation scenario is not being executed (S4007: No), or if it is determined that the new winning information notified by the current winning information command is not winning information that will be consumed during the execution of the high probability of continuation suggestion effect (S4008: No), then since there is no need to rewrite the performance scenario in the high probability of continuation suggestion effect to a scenario in the non-continuation table, the process proceeds directly to S4011.

By executing the processes of S4006 to S4010, the special chance continuation suggestion effect is executed when the special chance continuation suggestion effect starts in a special chance state and there are not enough reserved balls accumulated to end the number of fluctuations at which the special chance continuation suggestion effect ends. If a starting winning occurs after that, which corresponds to a fall, the effect scenario can be switched to a non-continuation effect scenario (the "0CH" effect scenario), making it possible to notify the player that they have already fallen off as a result of the special chance continuation suggestion effect. In other words, it is possible to prevent the effect from appearing as if the player has continued on despite the fact that they have already fallen off, thereby realizing a more suitable effect.

In addition, in the process of S4011, a reserve notice lottery process is executed to draw the execution of the reserve change effect and the reserve batch change effect based on the winning information notified by the winning information command (S4011), and this process ends. Details of this reserve notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 453.

Figure 453 is a flowchart showing this reserved notice lottery process (S4011). In this reserved notice lottery process (S4011), first, data indicating the reserved pattern mode of the white reserved is stored in an empty area of the reserved pattern mode storage area 223r (S4051). More specifically, data indicating the reserved pattern mode of the white reserved is stored in the empty area with the smallest number of the reserved pattern mode storage area 223r. When the process of S4051 is completed, it is then determined whether the collective change flag 223p is on (S4052), and if it is determined that the collective change flag 223p is on (S4052: Yes), the reserved pattern mode of the white reserved is set to be displayed as the reserved pattern corresponding to the new winning information (S4053), and this process is terminated. By executing the process of S4053, the reserved ball number pattern that has been changed to resemble a rock by the reserved ball batch change performance can be made different from the reserved ball number pattern based on the start winning newly detected after the reserved ball batch change performance has started, so that the player can easily understand the range of reserved ball number patterns that are the target of the reserved ball batch change performance. Therefore, a performance mode that is easier for the player to understand can be realized.

In the first control example, the reserved ball number pattern based on the start winning detected after the start of the reserved batch change performance is set to a reserved pattern state of white reserved uniformly, but this is not limited to this. For example, a lottery for the reserved pattern state using the reserved change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414 (a)) may be performed for the new reserved ball number pattern. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation of a big win not only for the reserved ball number pattern that is the target of the reserved batch change performance, but also for the reserved ball number pattern based on the new start winning. In addition, for example, a new start winning detected after the start of the reserved batch change performance may be configured to be added to the target of the reserved batch change performance. In this case, the reserved ball number pattern based on the new start winning may be configured to be always added to the target of the reserved batch change performance, or may be configured to be added to the target of the reserved batch change performance only under certain conditions. The predetermined condition may be, for example, that if the winning information corresponding to the new start winning indicates a jackpot expectation of a super reach or higher, it is included in the execution of the batch reserved change performance, or, for example, that only when new winning information corresponding to a variation type with a higher expectation than the reserved balls in the range in which the batch reserved change performance is set is notified, it is included in the execution of the batch reserved change performance. By configuring it in this way, when the reserved ball number pattern based on the new start winning is added to the execution of the batch reserved change performance, the player's expectation of a jackpot can be further increased.

In the process of S4052, if it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is off (S4052: No), it is next determined whether the number of reserved balls is greater than 1 (S4054). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls is 1 or less (S4054: No), there is no possibility of executing the reserved batch change performance, so the process proceeds to the process of S4060 for drawing a reserved pattern form of the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the new winning information. In contrast, in the process of S4054, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls is greater than 1 (2 or more) (S4054: Yes), a change point is calculated according to the data of the winning information storage area, the data of the reserved pattern form storage area 223r, and the change point calculation table 222d (S4055), and it is determined whether or not the reserved batch change performance can be executed according to the calculated change point, the batch change selection table 222e, and the value of the performance selection counter (S4056). Next, it is determined whether the result of the determination by the processing of S4056 corresponds to the execution of the reserved batch change performance (S4057), and if it is determined that the result does not correspond to the execution of the reserved batch change performance (S4057: No), the processing proceeds to S4060 for drawing a reserved pattern state of the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the new winning information. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4057 that the result corresponds to the execution of the reserved batch change performance (S4057: Yes), the execution of the reserved batch change performance is set (S4058), the batch change flag 223p is set to ON (S4059), and this processing ends.

In the process of S4060, the reserved symbol change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414(a)) is read (S4060), and the reserved symbol state is determined based on the read reserved symbol change lottery table 222c, the winning information notified by the command, and the value of the performance lottery counter (S4061). Next, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the reserved symbol state storage area 223r is updated based on the reserved symbol state determined in the process of S4061 (S4062), and the display of the reserved symbol state indicated by the updated data is set (S4063), and this process ends.

By executing this reserved ball count lottery process (see FIG. 453), various presentation modes using the reserved ball count pattern can be suitably set.

Next, the contents of the hit-related command processing (S3914) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 454. FIG. 454 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit-related command processing (S3914). This hit-related command processing (S3914) is executed by the command determination processing (see FIG. 451) of the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for performing control according to the type of command received when a hit-related command is received from the main control device 110.

In the hit-related command process (see FIG. 454), first, it is determined whether the currently received command is an opening command (S4101). If it is determined that the currently received command is an opening command (S4101: Yes), a display opening command corresponding to the received opening command is set (S4102), and then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the process of S4101 that the currently received command is not an opening command (S4101: No), then it is determined whether the currently received command is a round number command (S4103), and if it is determined that it is a round number command (S4103: Yes), a round number command for display is set based on the round number indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S4104), and this process is terminated.

In the process of S4103, if it is determined that the command received this time is not a round number command (S4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is a jackpot end command (S4105). If it is determined that the command received this time is a jackpot end command (S4105: Yes), the data in the game state storage area 223f is updated according to the information indicating the game state after the jackpot end contained in the received jackpot end command (S4106), and then it is determined whether the right-hit win flag 223i is on (S4107). If it is determined that the right-hit win flag 223i is on (S4107: Yes), it means that a jackpot occurred during a probability variable state or a time-saving state in which a game is played by hitting the right hand (i.e., a so-called consecutive win occurred), and it means that a jackpot occurred in the lottery of the second special pattern, which has a high probability of a probability variable jackpot, so the back mode for high expectation (see FIG. 390(b)) is set (S4109), and this process is terminated. The reason for uniformly setting the high expectation back mode is to make it difficult to tell whether the time-saving state or the probability bonus state has been set, thereby realizing gameplay that allows the player to predict the current game state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4107 that the right-hit win flag 223i is off (S4107: No), this means that a jackpot was won in the normal state where play is performed by hitting from the left (i.e., the first win was won), and that the jackpot was won in the drawing of the first special symbol, which has a low probability of winning a jackpot with a special chance, so a back mode for low expectation (see FIG. 390(a)) is set (S4108), and then this processing ends. The reason for uniformly setting the back mode for low expectation is to realize gameplay that allows the player to predict the current game state by making it difficult to tell whether the time-saving state or the special chance state has been set.

Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4105 that the jackpot end command has not been received (S4105: No), it is then determined whether the currently received command is an ending command (S4110), and if it is determined that it is an ending command (S4110: Yes), an ending command for display is set (S4111), and this processing ends. Also, if it is determined in the processing of S4110 that the ending command has not been received (S4110: No), then this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 455, the variable display setting process (S3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S3115). This variable display setting process (S3115) is executed within the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process for generating and setting a display variable pattern command based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute a variable performance in the third pattern display device 81.

In the variation display setting process (S3115), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S4201). Then, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4201: No), since no variation pattern command has been received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S4207. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is on (S4201: Yes), the variation start flag 223d is turned off (S4202), and the variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the variation pattern command for display is obtained from the RAM 223 (S4203).

Next, a variable performance setting process is executed to set the performance mode to be executed for the extracted variation pattern (variation time) (S4204). The contents of this variable performance setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 456. When the process of S4204 is completed, a display variation pattern command is generated to notify the display control device 114 of the performance mode determined in the process of S4204, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4205). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 starts display control of the variable performance so that the third pattern display device 81 displays the third pattern variation in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (S4206). In this process, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area is shifted in order to the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S4207.

In the process of S4207, it is determined whether the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on or not (S4207). Then, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (i.e., it is off) (S4207: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S4208), and the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223 (S4209). Next, the stop type specified by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable performance in the third pattern display device 81 (S4210), and the process proceeds to S4211.

In the process of S4211, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S4211). By receiving this display stop type command, the display control device 114 controls the stop display of the variable performance so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. After the process of S4211 is executed, this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 456, the contents of the variable performance setting process (S4204), which is one process within the variable display setting process (see FIG. 455) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be explained. FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variable performance setting process (S4204). In this variable performance setting process (S4204), processing is executed to set the detailed performance mode (preview content) of the variable performance of the third pattern corresponding to the variation of the special pattern.

In the variable performance setting process (S4204), first, it is determined whether the value of the charge state count counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4301). If it is determined that the value of the charge state count counter 223n is greater than 0 (S4301: Yes), the value of the charge state count counter 223n is decremented by 1 (S4302) and the process proceeds to S4303. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4301 that the value of the charge state count counter 223n is 0 (S4301: No), the process skips S4302 and proceeds to S4303.

In the process of S4303, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4303). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g is 0 (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4311. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g is greater than 0 (S4303: Yes) in the process of S4303, the value of the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4304), and then it is determined whether the value of the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g after the decrement is greater than 0 (S4305). If it is determined that the value of the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g after the decrement is 0 (S4305: No) in the process of S4305, the process proceeds to S4311. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4305 that the value of the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 0 (S4305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 4 (S4306). If it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 4 (S4306: Yes), the process proceeds to S4312.

In the process of S4311, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state (S4311). Here, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state based on the data stored in the game state storage area 223f. If it is determined in the process of S4311 that the current game state is a high probability state (S4311: Yes), this means that the high probability state has continued for more than 100 times since the end of the jackpot, and the process proceeds to S4312 to perform a lottery for the back mode. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4311 that the current game state is not a high probability state (S4311: No), the process skips S4312 and proceeds to S4313.

In the processing of S4312, in a gaming state (time-saving state, special probability state) where a game is played by hitting the right button, a back mode lottery process is executed (S4312) to select one back mode from a plurality of back modes that indicate the expected probability of the special probability state with a lottery probability according to the gaming state, and then the process proceeds to S4313. Details of this back mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 458.

In the process of S4313, a presentation mode selection process is executed to select the presentation mode for the variable display presentation (S4313), and then this process ends. Details of this presentation mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 459.

In addition, in the variable performance setting process in this first control example, if it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the time-saving guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is 4 or less (S4306: No), this means that it is the execution period of the sure-variation continuation suggestion performance (the period of the 96th to 99th variable display after the end of the jackpot), so next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special pattern is a jackpot or not (S4307). In the process of S4307, if it is determined that the lottery result is a jackpot (S4307: Yes), the jackpot performance mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion performance is set as the current variable display mode (S4308), the right-hit winning flag is set to ON (S4309), and this process is terminated. Note that, as an example of a jackpot performance mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuation suggestion performance, a performance is executed in which an adventurer who breaks through the door 806 by the performance of breaking through the door 806 discovers a treasure on the other side of the door 806, and a performance is executed in which a jackpot is notified.

On the other hand, in the process of S4307, if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the special symbol is not a big win for the special symbol (S4307: No), a continuation suggestion effect setting process is executed (S4310) to set the effect mode during the execution period of the sure-change continuation suggestion effect, and this process is terminated. Details of this continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 457.

Next, referring to FIG. 457, the contents of the continuation suggestion performance setting process (S4310), which is one process within the variable performance setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be explained. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation suggestion performance setting process (S4310).

When the continuation suggestion performance setting process (S4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving guaranteed number counter 223g is 4 or not (S4401), and if it is determined that the value of the time-saving guaranteed number counter 223g is not 4 (it is 3 or less) (S4401: No), the data of the continuation scenario storage area 223h is read (S4411), and it is determined whether the read scenario is a scenario for continuation concentration (S4412). In the process of S4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is not a scenario for continuation concentration (S4412: No), it proceeds to the process of S4415. On the other hand, in the process of S4412, if it is determined that the read scenario is a scenario for continuation concentration (S4412: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result of this special pattern is a lottery result of falling (S4413), and if it is determined that it is not a lottery result of falling (S4413: No), it proceeds to the process of S4415. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4413 that the lottery result is a fall (S4413: Yes), the presentation scenario is switched to "0CH" (S4414) and the processing proceeds to S4415.

In the process of S4415, the presentation mode of the number of variations corresponding to the value of the time-saving guaranteed number counter 223g is read from the scenario read from the continuing scenario storage area 223h (S4415), and the read presentation mode is set as the display mode of the current variation pattern (S4416). Next, it is determined whether or not the final presentation mode of the scenario has been set (S4417), and if it is determined that the final presentation mode of the scenario has been set (S4417: Yes), the data in the continuing scenario storage area 223h is reset to "00H" (S4418), and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4417 that the final presentation mode of the scenario has not been set (S4417: No), the process of S4418 is skipped and this process ends as is.

On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving guaranteed number counter 223g is 4 (S4401: Yes), this means that it is the start timing of the high probability continuation suggestion effect (see FIG. 392), so a process is executed to determine the effect scenario of the high probability continuation suggestion effect. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the current game state is a high probability state (S4402). In the process of S4402, if it is determined that the current game state is a high probability state (S4402: Yes), data is read from the winning information storage area (S4403), and it is determined whether the winning information includes the lottery result of falling (S4404). In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the winning information does not include the lottery result of falling (S4404: No), it is next determined whether four winning information are stored (i.e., the reserved balls until the end of the high probability continuation suggestion effect are already reserved) (S4405).

If it is determined in the processing of S4405 that four pieces of winning information have been stored (S4405: Yes), the continuation suggestion presentation scenario is determined (S4406) by referring to the continuation confirmation table in the continuation suggestion presentation selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) and the processing proceeds to S4409. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4405 that four pieces of winning information have not been stored (S4405: No), the continuation suggestion presentation scenario is determined (S4407) by referring to the continuation high probability table in the continuation suggestion presentation selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) and the processing proceeds to S4409.

In contrast, if it is determined in the process of S4402 that the current game state is not a sure-win state (S4402: No), and if it is determined in the process of S4404 that the winning information includes a lottery result of falling (S4404: Yes), the non-continuation table in the continuation suggestion performance selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referenced to determine the performance scenario (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4409.

In the process of S4409, which is executed after any of the processes of S4406 to S4408 has been executed, data indicating the selected performance scenario is stored in the continuing scenario storage area 223h (S4409), the performance mode of the first variation in the determined scenario is set as the performance mode of the current variation pattern (S4410), and this process is terminated.

Next, referring to FIG. 458, the contents of the rear mode lottery process (S4312), which is one process within the variable performance setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be explained. FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rear mode lottery process (S4312).

When the rear mode lottery process (S4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S4501). If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S4501: Yes), the jackpot fluctuation display mode is selected as the fluctuation display mode (S4502), the right-hit win flag 223i is set to ON (S4503), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4501 that the current fluctuation pattern is not a jackpot fluctuation pattern (S4501: No), then it is determined whether or not the current game state is in a high probability state (S4504). If it is determined that the current game state is not in a high probability state (S4504: No), the back mode is selected by referencing the table for fallen balls in the back mode selection table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the value of the performance selection counter 223y (S4505), and the process proceeds to S4510.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4504 that the current game state is a probability bonus state (S4504: Yes), the data in the winning information storage area is read (S4506), and then it is determined whether or not the winning information includes a lottery result for falling (S4507). If it is determined in the process of S4507 that the winning information includes a lottery result for falling (S4507: Yes), the back mode is selected by referring to the non-fall table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the value of the performance lottery counter 223y (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4510.

On the other hand, in the process of S4507, if it is determined that the winning information does not include a fall lottery result (S4507: No), the back mode is selected by referencing the table for continuing the special chance in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the value of the performance lottery counter 223y (S4509), and the process proceeds to S4510.

In the process of S4510, which is executed after any of the processes of S4505, S4508, and S4509 has been executed, it is determined whether the lottery result of each process indicates a change to a back mode different from the current back mode (S4510). In the process of S4510, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to a change of back mode (S4510: Yes), a back mode change command for display indicating the changed back mode is set (S4511), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S4510, if it is determined that the back mode is not to be changed (S4510: No), the process of S4511 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 459, the contents of the presentation mode selection process (S4313), which is one process within the variable presentation setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be explained. FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the contents of the presentation mode selection process (S4313).

When the performance mode selection process (S4313) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (S4551). If it is determined that a variation pattern command including an additional time command has not been received (S4551: No), this process is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4551 that a variation pattern command including an additional time command has been received (S4551: Yes), the interruption successive hits lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) is read (S4552), and the possibility of executing the interruption successive hits performance and the type are determined according to the value of the performance lottery counter 223y (S4553), and then it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponds to the execution of the interruption successive hits performance (S4554). In the process of S4554, if it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the execution of an interrupt rapid-hit effect (S4554: Yes), data corresponding to the type of interrupt rapid-hit effect to be executed is stored in the rapid-hit type storage area 223j (S4555), and then it is determined whether the type of interrupt rapid-hit effect is a type executed before a reach (S4556). In the process of S4556, if it is determined that the interrupt rapid-hit effect is a type executed before a reach (S4556: Yes), the sound mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4558), and the process proceeds to S4559.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4556 that the type of interrupt rapid-fire effect determined is not the type that is executed before a reach (S4556: No), the sound mode corresponding to the sum of the variable time indicated by the basic time command and the variable time indicated by the additional time command is determined (S4557), and the processing proceeds to S4559.

In the process of S4559, the display mode corresponding to the variable time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4559), and this process ends. In this way, in this first control example, it is configured so that whether or not the variable type is 7 seconds longer can be easily identified depending on the presence or absence of the additional time-saving command. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the variable type is subject to a lottery for whether or not to execute the interrupt rapid-fire performance simply by checking the contents of the additional time command. In addition, when it is decided to execute the interrupt rapid-fire performance, the variable time can be filled exactly by setting the performance mode corresponding to the variable time notified by the basic time command (variable time 7 seconds shorter). Therefore, without preparing a performance mode dedicated to the interrupt rapid-fire performance, the end timing of the performance mode and the end timing of the variable display performance can be easily matched, so a suitable performance mode can be provided.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4554 that the interrupt rapid-fire effect is not being executed (S4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222f (see FIG. 415(b)) is read (S4560), and the possibility of executing a chance charge effect (see FIG. 396(b), FIG. 397(a)) is determined based on the current fluctuation type, the number of reserved balls, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y (S4561), and then it is determined whether or not the execution of the chance charge effect has been determined by the judgment (lottery) in the processing of S4561 (S4562). If it is determined in the processing of S4562 that the execution of the chance charge effect has not been determined (S4562: No), the effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S4566), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4562 that the execution of the chance charge effect has been decided (S4562: Yes), the value of the charge number counter 223m is set to a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of reserved balls (S4563), the chance charge standby flag 223k is set to ON (S4564), the effect mode including the chance charge effect is decided as the variable display mode this time (S4565), and this process is terminated. In this way, in this first control example, when the execution of the chance charge effect is decided, the gauge amount (value of the charge number counter 223m) of the spirit gauge KG accumulated in the chance charge effect is decided based on the number of reserved balls at the time of decision. Then, after the chance charge effect ends, the pace at which the chance up effect is executed (i.e., the spirit gauge is consumed) is changed taking into account the lottery results of each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, the processing load at the start of the chance charge effect (the processing load when deciding the gauge number) can be reduced.

<Regarding control process of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to Figs. 460 to 473. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing which is repeatedly executed after power-on, a command interrupt processing which is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt processing which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. The MPU 231 usually executes the main processing, and executes the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. Note that when the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are performed simultaneously, the command reception processing is executed with priority. This allows the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 to be quickly reflected and the V interrupt processing to be executed.

First, referring to FIG. 460, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is for executing initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the main process is started according to the following flow. When the power is applied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231, using its hardware configuration, sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. The MPU 231 then fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction, thereby starting the main process.

If all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, when the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 will consume a lot of waiting time from specifying the address "0000H" to receiving the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". This increases the time it takes to start up the MPU 231, resulting in a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not start immediately.

In contrast, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program, starting with the instruction to be processed first by MPU 231 after system reset is released, are stored in NOR ROM 234d, and since NOR ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, when address "0000H" is specified from MPU 231 via bus line 240 after system reset is released, character ROM 234 can immediately set the boot program stored in first program storage area 234d1 of NOR ROM 234d in buffer RAM 234c and output the corresponding data (instruction code) to MPU 231. Therefore, since MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to address "0000H" in a short time after specifying address "0000H", main processing can be started in MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 is started so that various controls for the third pattern display device 81 can be executed.

Now, the boot process (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. 461. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S8001) executed during the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional gaming machines, but are instead stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a, which allows for large capacity in a small area, so that not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored, while there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing control programs and the like. This makes it possible to reduce the number of parts in the display control device 114, which not only reduces manufacturing costs, but also suppresses an increase in the rate of failures due to an increase in the number of parts.

However, since the read speed of NAND flash memory is slow, especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, there is a risk that the processing performance of the display control device 114 will deteriorate even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231. Therefore, in this boot process, a process is executed in which the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b provided in the work RAM 233 composed of DRAM.

Specifically, first, based on the operation of the hardware of the MPU 231 and character ROM 234 described above, a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program memory area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program read from the first program memory area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c (S8101). The predetermined amount of the control program transferred here includes the remaining boot program that is not stored in the first program memory area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a first predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, i.e., the starting address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8101.

Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined location in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND type flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetches instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a, fetches instructions, and executes various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute the process for the instructions.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S8102, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not yet been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred in predetermined amounts to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in accordance with the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a (S8103). Specifically, the control programs and some of the fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) that should be executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 460) is completed (S8105), thereby completing the execution of the boot program and terminating this boot process.

In this way, by executing the boot process (S8001), the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233, which are all composed of DRAM. Then, when the boot process ends, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above, and thereafter, the MPU 231 executes various processes using the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a.

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234, which is composed of a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program and fixed value data can be transferred to the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released, and the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM, which is composed of a DRAM with a fast read speed, and perform various controls. This allows the display control device 114 to maintain high processing performance, and makes it easy to execute diversified and complex presentations using the auxiliary presentation unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing the entire boot program in the NOR ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored starting from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, so that the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, by simply adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234d to the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 can be started up in a short time, and the increase in cost of the character ROM 234 associated with this shortening of the time can be suppressed.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 461, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 are configured to include all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 may be part of the boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S8102. The boot program transferred here may transfer a predetermined amount of control programs including all remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further execute a process of setting the top address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

The boot program transferred by the process of S8101 may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. The boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this process may further transfer a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then execute a process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a. Then, the process of transferring a predetermined amount of a portion of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a, and then setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a may be repeated multiple times, including the processes of S8101 and S8102, and then the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot program not stored in the first program memory area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a all at once, the MPU 231 can use the boot program already stored in the program storage area 233a and transfer it to the program storage area 233a in a predetermined amount at a time.

In addition, in this control example, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program that is executed first by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released is stored in the first program storage area 234d1, but all of the boot program may be stored in the first program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, it may execute the processes of S8103 to S8105 without executing the processes of S8101 and S8102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, and therefore reduces the number of times the program is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the processing time of the boot process. This allows the MPU 231 to start controlling the auxiliary performance unit, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 460. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed in accordance with the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and for the I/O devices, etc. Also, processes such as clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 are performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. The initial value of each flag is set to "off" or "0" unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute image drawing and display processing so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. As a result, immediately after power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on is set to be a different color depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, during an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 immediately after power is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 can start up normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is sent to the image controller 237 to transfer image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is stored, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the power-on main image area 235a, which is the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235.

When the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction is complete, image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal to MPU 231 indicating the end of transfer. By receiving this transfer end signal, MPU 231 can know that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when image controller 237 has completed the transfer of all image data specified by the transfer instruction, it may write transfer end information indicating the end of transfer to a register or a partial area of built-in memory provided inside image controller 237. MPU 231 may then read information from this register or partial area of built-in memory at any time and detect the writing of transfer end information by image controller 237, thereby knowing that the transfer of image data specified in the transfer instruction has ended.

The image data transferred to the power-on main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is cut off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S8003, a transfer instruction is then sent to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S8004). This transfer instruction includes the top address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image is stored, the data size of the image data, information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the top address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. The image data transferred to the power-on variable image area 235b is then retained so that it is not overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction sent to the image controller 237 by the processing of S8004, the simple image display flag 233c is then turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a resident image transfer setting process is executed in which the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process described below (see FIG. 471(a)) (see S9602 in FIG. 471(a)).

Furthermore, the simple image display flag 233c is maintained on until the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is completed based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by this resident image transfer setting process. As a result, during that time, the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 462(b)) are executed so that the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on variable image) shown in FIGS. 419(a) to (c) are drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)).

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, since the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, it takes a long time for all image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, so that while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, players and hall personnel can check the power-on main image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, while the display control device 114 is displaying the power-on main image on the third pattern display device 81, it can take time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, players can recognize that some kind of initialization process is taking place while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, and so can wait until the initialization is complete without worrying that operation may have stopped until the image data that should be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.

In addition, during operation checks at the factory during manufacturing, the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, making it possible to immediately confirm that the third pattern display device 81 has started operating without any problems upon power-on, and the use of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234 prevents the efficiency of operation checks from deteriorating.

In addition, the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 transfers the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power is turned on. Therefore, if the player starts playing while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a ball enters the first start hole 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable performance is given by the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113, i.e., if a display variable pattern command is received, the power-on variable image (not shown) can be instantly displayed during the variable performance period, and a simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, the player can be sure that the lottery has been drawn by the simple variable performance, even while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, the power-on main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the transfer takes time, and the power-on main image continues to be displayed for a long time after power is turned on. However, in this pachinko machine 10, a simple variable performance can be performed using the power-on variable image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power is turned on, so that the player can play with peace of mind even while the power-on main image is being displayed immediately after power is turned on, for example, immediately after recovery from a power outage.

After the processing of S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main processing executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after interrupt permission is set by the processing of S8006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of a command and the detection of a V interrupt signal.

Next, referring to FIG. 462(a), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 462(a) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt processing is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described below, and processing according to the command is performed.

Next, referring to FIG. 462(b), the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 462(b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is identified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) of the image is created, and the drawing list is sent to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute the drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is generated in the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is sent to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of one frame of an image is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the drawing process or display process of the image is completed, so it is possible to prevent starting drawing of a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or developing an image in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information currently being displayed is stored.

Here, we will first explain the outline of the V interrupt processing flow, and then explain the details of each process with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 462(b), first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S8301). If the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, it is off (S8301: No), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so in order to display a normal performance image on the third pattern display device 81 instead of the power-on image, a command determination process (S8302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and processing according to the command is executed. If a display demo command or a display variation pattern command is stored, a demo display data table or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the main control device 110 decides to start a variable performance, it is highly likely that a display variable pattern command and a display stop type command are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the state and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113, and control the drawing of the image so that the performance image corresponding to that state is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to Figures 463 to 468.

In the display setting process (S8303), the contents of one frame of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 are specifically identified based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302) or the like. In addition, depending on the processing status, etc., the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined presentation mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 469 to 470.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S8304). In this task processing, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, which was specified by the display setting process (S8303) or the simplified display setting process (S8309), the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Also, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and even when a continuous preview command (not shown) is received from the voice lamp control device 113, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer image data of the continuous preview image used in the continuous preview performance and image data of the changed back image from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the forwarding setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 471 and 472.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, a drawing list as shown in FIG. 423 is generated from the types of sprites constituting one frame and the parameters required for drawing each sprite, which were determined in the task process (S8304), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S8305), and this drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 473.

Next, the display control device 114 executes an update process for various counters (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. An example of a counter updated by the process of S8307 is a stop pattern counter (not shown) for determining the stop pattern. The value of this stop pattern counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of a display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop pattern after the variable performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed, so a simple command determination process (S8308) is executed to cause the power-on image (not shown) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and then a simple display setting process (S8309) is executed, and the processing proceeds to S8304.

Next, with reference to Figs. 463 to 468, the details of the command determination process (S8302) described above, which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, Fig. 463 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process (FIG. 463, S8302), as shown in FIG. 463, first it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S8401: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), a new command flag is set to ON (S8402) to notify the display setting process (S8303) that a new command has been processed in the ON state, and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S8403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed (S8405), and processing returns to S8401.

Here, the variation pattern command processing (S8405) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 464(a). FIG. 464(a) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation presentation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8501).

In this case, the main control unit 110 always judges the start of the fluctuation at least several seconds apart, so two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command judgment process, it is impossible for two or more display fluctuation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a display fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, if it is judged that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and a change presentation having a shorter change time than the set display data table is actually instructed by the main control device 110, the next display change pattern command will be received from the main control device 110 while a change presentation according to the set change display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a different change display will suddenly begin, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, by setting the change display data table corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233d as in this control example, even if the main control unit 110 has actually instructed a change presentation with a longer change time than the set display data table, as described below, the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that a demo presentation is displayed after the change presentation according to the display data table buffer 233d has ended and until the next display pattern command is received from the main control unit 110, so that the player can continue to watch the change of the third pattern on the third pattern display device 81 without feeling any discomfort.

Then, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S8501 is set to ON, and the data table discrimination flags corresponding to the other variation display data tables are set to OFF (S8503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the processing of S8503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing that fluctuation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S8504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8505). Then, both the demo display flag and the final display flag are set to off (S8506), the fluctuation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

When this variable pattern command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S8505, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S8502 extracts the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the display setting process, the timing counter 233h, in which the time data is set by the process of S8504, is used to time the time of the variable performance specified in the variable display data table, and when it is determined that the variable performance in the variable display data table has ended, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control unit 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 463. If it is determined in the processing of S8404 that there is no variation pattern command for display (S8404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a stop type command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8406), and if there is a stop type command for display (S8406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S8407), and processing returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S8407) will be described with reference to FIG. 464(b). FIG. 464(b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes processing corresponding to the display variable type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S8601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter, which is updated each time the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462 (b)) is executed, to finally set the stop pattern after the variable performance to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (S8602).

Then, among the stop pattern discrimination flags provided for each stop pattern, the stop pattern discrimination flag corresponding to the stop pattern set by the processing of S8602 is turned on, and the stop pattern discrimination flags corresponding to the other stop patterns are set on (S8603). After that, the process returns to the processing of S8401 in FIG. 463.

Here, as described above, in the variable display data table, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation based on the data table, offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop pattern set by the processing of S8602 is described as type information for identifying the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In the above-mentioned task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop pattern set by the processing of S8602 is identified from the stop pattern discrimination flag set by S8603, and the pattern offset information acquired by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to this identified third pattern is stored is identified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third pattern is stored in the third pattern area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

Returning to FIG. 463, the explanation will continue. If it is determined in the processing of S8406 that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), it is then determined whether there is a display interrupt command among the unprocessed commands (S8408). If it is determined that a display interrupt command has been received (S8408: Yes), interrupt command processing is executed (S8409). Details of the interrupt command processing (S8409) will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 465.

Here, the interrupt command processing (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG. 465. FIG. 465 is a flowchart showing this interrupt command processing (S8409).

In the interrupt command process (FIG. 465, S8409), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the start of an interrupt (S8701). In the process of S8701, if it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of an interrupt (S8701: Yes), data indicating the type of the current display data table, the pointer value, and the timing counter value are stored in the interrupt data storage area 233m (S8702), and the interrupt rapid-hit effect display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8703). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the interrupt rapid-hit effect display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8704), time data is set in the timing counter 233h based on the interrupt rapid-hit effect display data table (S8705), the pointer 233f is initialized (S8706), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S8701 that the received command is not a command indicating the start of an interruption (i.e., a command indicating the end of an interruption) (S8701: No), the type of display data table, the value of pointer 233f, and the value of timing counter 233h are identified based on the data stored in the interruption data storage area 233m (S8707), and based on the identification results, the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f, and the timing counter 233h are updated (S8708), and this processing ends.

By executing this interrupt command processing, the progress status of the display performance that was paused (interrupted) at the start of the interrupt rapid-fire performance is stored in the interruption data storage area 233m, and when the interrupt rapid-fire performance ends, the display mode can be resumed from the display mode at the time of interruption that was stored in the interruption data storage area 233m.

Returning to FIG. 463 for further explanation. If it is determined in the processing of S8408 that there is no interrupt command for display (S8408: No), it is determined whether there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8410), and if there is an opening command for display (S8410: Yes), the opening command processing is executed (S8411), and the processing returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. 466(a). FIG. 466(a) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command processing executes processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8801 is determined and read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8802).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8804). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S8805), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

When this opening command processing is executed, the display setting processing updates the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S8804, extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, and specifies the contents of one frame's worth of image to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the processing of S8802 extracts the transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and controls the image controller 237 so that the image data of the sprite required in the set opening display data table is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Returning to FIG. 463, the explanation will continue. In the processing of S8410, if it is determined that there is no opening command for display (S8410: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a round number command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8412), and if there is a round number command for display (S8412: Yes), round number command processing is executed (S8413), and processing returns to S8401.

Here, the details of the number of rounds command processing (S8413) will be described with reference to FIG. 466(b). FIG. 466(b) is a flowchart showing the number of rounds command processing. This number of rounds command processing executes processing corresponding to the number of rounds command for display received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8901). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S8902).

Then, based on the number of rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8901, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8904). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S8905), the number of rounds command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 463. If it is determined in the processing of S8412 that there is no round number command for display (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8414), and if there is an ending command for display (S8414: Yes), ending command processing is executed (S8415), and processing returns to S8401.

Now, with reference to FIG. 467, the details of the ending command processing (S8415) will be described. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command processing executes processing corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command process, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending performance indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9001). Next, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S9002).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S9001, time data representing the presentation time is set in the timing counter 233h (S9003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9004). Then, the demo display flag and the final display flag are both set to off (S9005), ending command processing is terminated, and processing returns to command determination processing.

Now, we return to the explanation of FIG. 463. If it is determined in the processing of S8414 that there is no display ending command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a background image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8416), and if there is a background image change command (S8416: Yes), background image change command processing is executed (S8417), and processing returns to S8401.

Here, the rear image change command processing (S8417) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 468(a). FIG. 468(a) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command processing executes processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command processing, first, a rear image change flag that notifies the normal image transfer setting processing (S9603) of the change of the rear image resulting from receiving a rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S9101). Then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is set to on, and the rear image discrimination flags corresponding to the other rear image types are set to off (S9102), after which the rear image change command processing ends and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S9101 is on, the rear image type after the change is identified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S9102. Then, if the identified rear image type is rear B or rear C, as described above, since part of the image data corresponding to those rear images is not resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that image data corresponding to a predetermined range of rear images is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in the task processing, if it is specified that one of multiple back types is to be displayed depending on the back type of the back image specified in the display data table, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is identified from the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S9102, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is identified over time, and the type of RAM in which image data corresponding to that range of the back image is stored (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are identified.

Note that since the player does not operate the frame button 22 continuously within 20 milliseconds, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, when executing the command determination process, there should be no cases where two or more rear image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. However, there is a possibility that a part of the command may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may be erroneously interpreted as a rear image change command. In the process of S9102, if it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received first may be turned on, or the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. In addition, any one rear image change command may be extracted, and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by that command may be turned on. This change in the rear image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, so it is preferable to set it appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Now, we return to the explanation of FIG. 463. If it is determined in the processing of S8416 that there is no rear image change command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8418), and if there is an error command (S8418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S8419), and the processing returns to S8401.

Here, the error command processing (S8419) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 468(b). FIG. 468(b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing executes processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag is set to ON, which indicates that an error has occurred when in the ON state (S9201). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is set to ON, and the other error discrimination flags are set to OFF (S9202), the error command processing is terminated, and the process returns to command judgment processing.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9201, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S9202, and a process is executed to display a warning image corresponding to that error type on the third pattern display device 81.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the process in S9202 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, allowing players and hall staff to correctly understand the error occurrence status.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 463. If it is determined in the processing of S8418 that there is no error command (S8418: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S8420), and the process returns to the processing of S8401.

In the process of S8401, which is executed again after the processing of each command has been executed, it is again determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), the processes of S8402 to S8420 are executed again. Then, the processes of S8401 to S8420 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in the process of S8401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination process ends.

The simple command determination process (S8308), which is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462(b)), is similar to the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, only the commands necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 419, i.e., the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are extracted from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 464(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 464(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, while the other commands are discarded without executing the processes corresponding to those commands.

In the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 464(a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S8501, and since the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image required in this case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235, in the processing of S8502, Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e and its contents are cleared.

Next, with reference to Figs. 469 to 470, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. Fig. 469 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 469, it is determined whether the new command flag is on (S9301), and if the new command flag is not on, i.e., it is off (S9301: No), it is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the processes of S9302 to S9304 are skipped and the process moves to S9305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S9301: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S9302), the process corresponding to the new command is executed by the processes of S9303 to S9304.

In the process of S9303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S9303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S9303: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S9304).

Now, with reference to FIG. 470(a), the details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 470(a) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is for expanding image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error discrimination flags are referenced, and warning image data for displaying warning images of errors corresponding to all error discrimination flags that are set to on on the third pattern display device 81 is expanded (S9401).

The task process uses this expanded warning image data to identify the type of sprite (display object) that makes up the warning image, and determines various parameters required for drawing each sprite, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after processing S9401, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S9402) and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, let us return to the explanation of FIG. 469. After the warning image setting process (S9304), or in the process of S9303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, i.e., is off (S9303: No), then the process proceeds to S9305.

In S9305, pointer update processing is executed (S9305). Details of the pointer update processing will now be described with reference to FIG. 470(b). FIG. 470(b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer update processing is processing for updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address from which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the image data to be transferred should be obtained from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9501). That is, in principle, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Also, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is written at address "0000H" and the actual data of each table is specified from address "0001H" onwards. If the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the actual data can be read from each data table in order starting from address "0001H".

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S9501, it is then determined whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information (S9502). If the data is End information (S9502: Yes), this means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is written in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Then, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S9503), and if it is a demo display data table (S9503: Yes), time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is set in the timing counter 233h (S9504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S9505), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the top of the demo display data table, so that the third pattern display device 81 can be made to repeatedly display demo performances.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a demo display data table (S9503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S9506), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents of the previous address in which the End information is written are always expanded, so that the third pattern display device 81 can display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S9502: No), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, returning to FIG. 469, the explanation will continue. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are obtained from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9306). In the task process, based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S9306 together with the warning image expanded earlier, the type of sprites (display objects) that make up the image is identified, and various parameters required for drawing, such as the display coordinate position, magnification rate, and rotation angle, are determined for each sprite.

Then, the value of the timing counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S9307), and it is determined whether the value of the timing counter 233h after decrement is 0 or less (S9308). If the value of the timing counter 233h is 1 or more (S9308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the timing counter 233h is 0 or less (S9308: Yes), this means that the performance time for the performance corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform a stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on (S9309).

If the result is that the final display flag is off (S9309: No), the final display has not yet been performed and it is time to perform the final display, so first, the final display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9310), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S9311). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the final display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S9312), and further, the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9313). Then, after the final display flag, which indicates that the final display is being performed in the on state, is set on (S9314), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied directly to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S9315), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In this way, when a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents can be set so that the final display performance of the stopped pattern in the variable performance is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with the end of the performance. Also, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table, the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display performance. And compared to the conventional case where the display contents are changed by starting another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not subjected to a large load, so that various types of performance images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by the processing of S9315 is used to identify the third pattern to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in the next variable performance. That is, as described above, the display of the third pattern in the variable performance changes depending on the stop pattern of the previous variable performance, and in the variable display data table, pattern offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is recorded until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change based on the data table. In the task processing (S8304), the stop pattern of the previous variable performance is identified from the previous stop pattern discrimination flag set by S9315 until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the change, and the pattern offset information obtained by the display setting processing is added to the identified stop pattern to identify the third pattern to be actually displayed. As a result, the variable performance starts from the stop pattern in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S9309, if the confirmation display flag is on and not off (S9309: Yes), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on or not (S9316). If the demo display flag is off (S9316: No), this means that the value of the timing counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the confirmation display performance, so the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9317), and then null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear its contents (S9318). Then, time data corresponding to the performance time of the demo display data table is set in the timing counter 233h (S9319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9320), the demo display flag, which indicates that a demo performance is being performed in the on state, is set to on (S9321), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

In the processing of S9316, if the demo display flag is on (S9316: Yes), this means that a demo performance is performed after the final display performance has ended, and that the demo performance has ended, so the display setting processing is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demo performance will start again as described above by the pointer update processing executed in the next V interrupt processing, so that the demo performance can be repeatedly displayed on the third pattern display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113.

The same processing as the display setting processing is also performed in the simple display setting processing (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462 (b)). However, in the simple display setting processing, a processing is performed to set in the display data table buffer 233d a display data table that specifies that one of the images (see FIG. 419 (b) and (c)) of the power-on variable image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is displayed in a stopped state for a predetermined time after the performance time of the variable performance using the power-on variable image has ended.

Next, with reference to Figs. 471 and 472, the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S8305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail. First, Fig. 471 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on or not (S9601). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting process is executed (S9602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 471 (b).

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S9601 is that the simple image display flag 233c is not on, i.e., it is off (S9601: No), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfers of image data from the character ROM 234 are to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 472.

Next, referring to FIG. 471(b), we will explain the resident image transfer setting process (S9602), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 471(b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data has been sent to the image controller 237 (S9701), and if a transfer instruction has been sent (S9701: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has been completed (S9702). In this process of S9702, after an instruction to transfer image data has been sent to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has been completed. Then, if it is determined by the process of S9702 that the transfer process has not been completed (S9702: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, and therefore the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S9702: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S9703. Also, if the result of processing in S9701 indicates that a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S9701: No), the process proceeds to S9703.

In the processing of S9703, it is determined whether all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S9703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S9703: No), a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the untransferred resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9704), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends.

As a result, the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes transfer data information regarding the resident target image data that has not yet been transferred, and the image controller 237 can transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information written in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 where the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the start address of the transfer destination (an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then transfers it to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236 while the resident video RAM 236 is not in use. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is sent to the MPU 231.

If all resident target image data has been transferred as a result of the processing of S9703 (S9703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9705) and the resident image transfer setting processing is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462(b)), instead of the simple command determination processing (see S8308 in FIG. 462(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S8309 in FIG. 462(b)), the command determination processing (see FIG. 463 to FIG. 282) and the display setting processing (see FIG. 469 to FIG. 470(a), (b)) are executed, so that the drawing of the normal image is set, and the normal image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. In addition, the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 thereafter is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 472) (see S9601: No in FIG. 471(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 can transfer all resident target image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and power-on variable image that have already been transferred during the main processing. The MPU 231 then controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 so that it continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process remains resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

Therefore, after all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 can perform image drawing processing in the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, there is no need to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, which is made up of the NAND type flash memory 234a, which has a slow readout speed, when drawing an image, so the time required for reading can be saved, and the image can be drawn immediately and displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as the back image, the third pattern, the character pattern, and error messages, as well as image data of images that should be displayed immediately after their display is determined by the main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113, the display control unit 114, etc. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured from a NAND type flash memory 234a, high responsiveness can be maintained from various operations performed by the player at any time until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

Next, referring to FIG. 472, we will explain the normal image transfer setting process (S9603), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the information written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9305) of the previously executed display setting process (S8303) is obtained from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9801). Then, it is determined whether the obtained information is transfer data information (S9802), and if it is transfer data information (S9802: Yes), the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 (S9803), and further, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233, which indicates that image data to be transferred is present in the ON state, is set to ON (S9804), and the process proceeds to S9805.

In addition, in the process of S9802, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but is Null data (S9802: No), the processes of S9803 and S9804 are skipped and the process proceeds to S9805. In the process of S9805, it is determined whether a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer has ended (S9805), and if a transfer instruction has been set (S9805: Yes), it is further determined whether the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9806).

In the process of S9806, after an instruction to transfer image data is set for the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. Then, if it is determined by the process of S9806 that the transfer process has not ended (S9806: No), the image transfer process is still being performed in the image controller 237, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9806: Yes), the process proceeds to S9807. Also, if the result of the process of S9805 shows that an instruction to transfer image data has not been set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S9805: No), the process proceeds to S9807.

In the processing of S9807, it is determined whether the transfer start flag is on or not (S9807). If the transfer start flag is on (S9807: Yes), image data that should be transferred is present, so the transfer start flag is turned off (S9808), and the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S9803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and the processing proceeds to S9813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9807: No), it is then determined whether the background image change flag is on or not (S9809). Then, if the background image change flag is not on but off (S9809: No), image data that should be transferred is not present, so the normal image transfer setting processing ends.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S9809: Yes), this means that the rear image has been changed, so the rear image change flag is set to off (S9810), and then, of the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is identified, and that image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S9811). Furthermore, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag that is on is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are obtained (S9812), and the process proceeds to S9813.

Note that if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, all of the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so there is no image data to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Therefore, in the processing of S9812, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is for rear A, the normal image transfer processing ends as is.

In the process of S9813, it is determined whether the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813). This determination in the process of S9813 is made by referencing the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage status corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage status is "on", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236, and if the storage status is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If the result of the processing of S9813 is that the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent image data from being transferred unnecessarily from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing burden on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing traffic on the bus line 240.

On the other hand, if the result of the processing of S9813 is that the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S9814). As a result, the transfer data information for the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list sent to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the image to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. The transfer data information includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 where the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the start address of the transfer destination (a sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 where the image data of the image to be transferred here should be stored). The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and transfers it to the specified address of the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Then, when the transfer is complete, it sends a transfer end signal to the MPU 231.

After processing S9814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S9815), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the image data to be transferred to "on," and by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite to "off."

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, a process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination process, and as a result, if it is determined that the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is a jackpot stop type, image data used in the opening performance can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236. Also, if the rear image is changed based on the reception of a rear image change command in the previously executed command determination process, image data used for that rear image that is not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred without delay from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236.

In addition, in this embodiment, in response to a command (e.g., a display variation pattern command) sent from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, a display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and at the same time, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, by executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sets a transfer instruction for the image controller 237 for the image data to be transferred according to the transfer data information written in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table specifies the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred for a specific address so that the image data corresponding to a specific sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time drawing of the specific sprite begins in accordance with the display data table. By transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a specific sprite in accordance with the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is necessary for drawing the sprite can be ensured to be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured using a NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the images required for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the corresponding effects can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while drawing the images of each sprite specified in the display data table. Also, by writing in the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The transfer data table also specifies the transfer data information so that image data is transferred from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. This allows the transfer of image data to be managed and controlled for each sprite, making it easy to process the transfer. By controlling the transfer of image data from character ROM 234 to normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the process can be made easier while controlling the transfer of image data in detail. This makes it possible to efficiently prevent an increase in the load on the transfer.

Next, referring to FIG. 473, the above-mentioned drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described in detail. FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the drawing list shown in FIG. 423 is generated (S9901) from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S8305). That is, in the process of S9901, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304), the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are identified for each sprite, and the parameters required for the sprite determined in the task process are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprite that should be placed in the back of the image for one frame to the sprite that should be placed in the front, and the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters required for drawing the sprite are described as detailed drawing information (detailed information) for each sprite in the rearranged sprite order, thereby generating a drawing list. Furthermore, when a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the start address (start address of the source) and the end address (end address of the source) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added as transfer data information to the end of the drawing list.

As mentioned above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored, or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, is fixed for each sprite, so the MPU 231 can instantly identify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type, and easily include this information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are sent to the image controller (S9902). Here, if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the first frame buffer 236b to expand the image drawn, and if the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing the second frame buffer 236c to expand the image drawn.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images starting from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands them by overwriting them in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. This allows the first sprite drawn to be positioned at the backmost position, and the last sprite drawn to be positioned at the foremost position, in one frame's worth of image generated by the drawing list.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the start address (source start address) and end address (source end address) of character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted from the transfer data information, and the image data stored from the source start address to the source end address are read out of character ROM 234 in order and temporarily stored in buffer RAM 237a, and then, when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in buffer RAM 237a is transferred sequentially to the area of normal video RAM 236 indicated by the destination start address. The image data stored in this normal video RAM 236 is then used based on the drawing list sent by MPU 231, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and transmits the image information to the third pattern display device 81 together with a drive signal. This allows the third pattern display device 81 to display the image expanded in the frame buffer. Also, while an image drawn in one frame buffer is being expanded, an image expanded from the other frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, allowing the drawing process and the display process to be processed simultaneously in parallel.

After the processing of S9902, the drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j (S9903). Then, the drawing process ends and returns to the V interrupt processing. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, i.e., by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time a drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed each time the drawing process of the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)) executed by the MPU 231 is executed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and display process of one frame of the image are completed. As a result, when the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image at a certain timing, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read, and the image drawing process and display process are executed, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of one frame of the image is completed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer that displays one frame of the image, and the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of one frame is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously displayed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the second frame buffer 236c.

Then, after another 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified as the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read. Thus, the image information of the image previously displayed in the second frame buffer 236c is read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is displayed in the first frame buffer 236b. Thereafter, by alternately specifying the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffer in which one frame's worth of image is displayed and the frame buffer from which one frame's worth of image information is read, each time every 20 milliseconds, it is possible to perform the display process of one frame's worth of image continuously in 20 millisecond units while performing the drawing process of one frame's worth of image.

<Regarding control process of audio output device in first control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in this first control example will be described with reference to Fig. 474 to Fig. 478. First, main processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to Fig. 474(a). Fig. 474(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of this main process.

When the main processing of this audio output device 226 is executed, first, a command determination process is executed (20001) to perform control according to various commands received from the audio lamp control device 113. Details of this command determination process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 475. After the processing of S20001, an audio setting process is executed (S20001) to play audio data (audio file) according to the performance. Details of this audio setting process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. 478.

When the processing of S20001 is completed, it is determined whether or not information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the work RAM 303 (S20003). If information about the occurrence of a power outage is stored in the processing of S20003 (S20003: Yes), both the power outage flag and the power outage processing in progress flag are turned on (S20005), and the power outage processing is executed (S20006). After the power outage processing is executed, the power outage processing in progress flag is turned off (S20007), and the processing then enters an infinite loop.

On the other hand, if no information about a power outage has been stored in the process of S20003 (S20003: No), a determination is made as to whether or not RAM 303 has been corrupted based on the keywords stored in RAM 303 (S20004), and if RAM 303 has not been corrupted (S20004: No), the process returns to S20001 and the main process is executed repeatedly. On the other hand, if RAM 303 has been corrupted (S20004: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

Next, referring to FIG. 474(b), the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 474(b) is a flowchart showing the contents of this command interrupt processing. This command interrupt processing (see FIG. 474(b)) is processing that is executed each time a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored sequentially in a command buffer area provided in RAM 303 (S20101), and the process ends. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process described below, and processing according to the command is carried out.

Next, referring to FIG. 475, we will explain the command determination process (S20001), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 474(a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226. FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing the contents of this command determination process (S20001).

In the command determination process (S20001), first it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S20201), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S20201: No), the command determination process ends and the process returns to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S20201: Yes), the new command flag indicating that a new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S20202), and then the type of each command stored in the command buffer area is analyzed (S20203).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S20204). This audio variation pattern command is set in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 455) of the audio lamp control device 113 when the display variation pattern command is output (see S4205 in FIG. 455) in order to notify the type of audio to be played and the output timing corresponding to the display mode.

If it is determined in the processing of S20204 that there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S20204: Yes), the music and sound effects to be used during the execution of the notified variation pattern command are identified (S20205), the output channel and output timing of the identified music and sound effects are set (S20206), and the processing returns to S20201.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S20204 that there is no voice variable pattern command (S20204: No), then it is determined whether or not the unprocessed commands include a voice rapid-fire command (S20207). If a voice rapid-fire command is included (S20207: Yes), this means that the player has performed a rapid-fire operation, so rapid-fire sound command processing is executed to set the playback (output) of a rapid-fire sound (S20208), and processing returns to S20201. Details of this rapid-fire sound command processing (S20208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 476.

On the other hand, in the process of S20207, if it is determined that the unprocessed commands do not include a voice-use repeated tap sound command (S20207: No), then it is determined whether or not a voice-use pause command is included (S20209). If it is determined that the unprocessed commands include a voice-use repeated tap sound command (S20209: Yes), pause command processing is executed to set the pause and resumption of the BGM being played (S20210), and the process returns to S20201. Details of this pause command processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 747. On the other hand, in the process of S20209, if the unprocessed commands do not include a voice-use pause command (S20209: No), processing corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (S20211), and the process returns to S20201.

Next, the repeated hit sound command processing (S20208) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 476. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the repeated hit sound command processing (S20208). This repeated hit sound command processing (S20208) is executed as part of the command determination processing (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and as described above, is processing for setting the playback (output) of the repeated hit sound.

In this repeated tap sound command process (S20208), first, it is determined whether the value of the repeated tap sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (S20301). In the process of S20301, if it is determined that the value of the repeated tap sound output flag 303a is set to "00H" (S20301: Yes), this means that a repeated tap sound command has been received for the first repeated tap operation in the interrupt repeated tap performance (see FIG. 399), and the process proceeds to S20305 to play the first repeated tap sound.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the repeated tapping sound output flag 303a is not set to "00H" (S20301: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the repeated tapping sound output flag 303a is set to "01H" (S20302). In the process of S20302, if it is determined that the value of the repeated tapping sound output flag 303a is not set to "01H" (i.e., the value of the repeated tapping sound output flag 303a is "02H") (S20302: No), this means that the repeated tapping sound previously output in the interrupt repeated tapping performance of 1 is the second repeated tapping sound, and in this case too, the process proceeds to S20305 to play the first repeated tapping sound.

In the processing of S20305, the CN2 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 424) is set to play the sound file corresponding to the first repeated tap sound (S20305), the repeated tap sound output flag 303a is updated (set) to "01H" corresponding to the first repeated tap sound (S20306), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S20302 that the value of the repeated tapping sound output flag 303a is set to "01H" (i.e., the repeated tapping sound output previously was the first repeated tapping sound) (S20302: Yes), the playback of the audio file corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound is set for CN3 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 424) (S20303), the repeated tapping sound output flag 303a is updated (set) to "02H" corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound (S20304), and this processing is terminated.

By executing this continuous tapping sound command process, two types of sound data can be alternately played on two channels each time a continuous tapping operation is performed, so that the sound mode can be diversified. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are simply played alternately on a single channel (i.e., a configuration in which the output of one sound being played is stopped and the output of the other sound is repeated), the other sound can be output while maintaining the output state of one sound (the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound can be output in overlapping fashion), so that the sound mode during the execution of the continuous tapping can be made more lively. More specifically, if a configuration is used in which the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are played alternately on a single channel, when a player with a short continuous tapping interval performs a continuous tapping operation, only the beginning parts of each sound data are alternately repeated, resulting in a monotonous sound mode. In contrast, if a configuration is used in which multiple sound data are played in sequence on multiple channels, the output of one sound data played on one channel is not interrupted, and other sound data can be played on other channels. That is, a sound based on one sound data and a sound based on another sound data can be synthesized and output. This makes it easier to output sounds other than the first part of each sound, making it possible to diversify the sound modes. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, two types of audio data (repeated tapping sounds) are alternately output to two channels each time a repeated tapping operation is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately played back to CN1 and CN2 in sequence. This allows the audio mode to be more diverse. In this case, the number of channels for playing audio data is not limited to two, and audio data may be played back in sequence to three or more channels. This configuration allows the period from when one piece of audio data is played back to one channel until the next piece of audio data is played back to the same channel (when the audio data being played back is finished) to be longer, so that the audio mode can be more diverse. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be different depending on the interval between repeated taps. Specifically, for example, when a player with a relatively short interval between successive hits (e.g., 0.5 seconds or less) is playing, three types of audio formats may be played in sequence on three channels, whereas when a player with a relatively long interval between successive hits (e.g., longer than 0.5 seconds) is playing, two types of audio data may be played in sequence (alternately) on two channels. With this configuration, the audio output mode can be changed according to the successive hit interval, so that a gameplay feature that allows the successive hit interval to be adjusted can be realized. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, a configuration was made in which one of the continuous tapping sounds was output in conjunction with the continuous tapping operation, but under a predetermined condition, a configuration may be made in which a continuous tapping sound can be output even if a continuous tapping operation is not performed. More specifically, for example, if the continuous tapping sound output last during the effective period of the continuous tapping operation was the first continuous tapping sound, the second continuous tapping sound may be output after the operation is completed. By configuring in this way, even if the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound were output as a set in response to the continuous tapping operation, the last sound output becomes the first continuous tapping sound (i.e., the paired second continuous tapping sound is not output), and it is possible to suppress the sound mode from becoming half-finished. Therefore, the sound mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last continuous tapping sound output was the first continuous tapping sound, the control to output the second continuous tapping sound after the operation may be configured to be set only during the execution of a variation display (for example, a jackpot variation) corresponding to a predetermined variation type (a lottery result). By configuring it in this way, for players who want to know whether or not the specified variation type is present, the last sound to be output during the interrupt rapid-fire performance is deliberately set to the first rapid-fire sound, making it possible to realize a game feature. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, the first and second consecutive tapping sounds are alternately output regardless of the interval between the player's consecutive taps, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a consecutive tapping operation is detected when no sound is being played, the first consecutive tapping sound may be output without fail. In other words, if the interval between consecutive taps is too long and the next consecutive tapping operation is executed after the playback of one consecutive tapping sound has ended, only the first consecutive tapping sound may be continuously output. This configuration allows players who wish to diversify the sound style to perform consecutive tapping operations at a faster pace, thereby increasing the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt consecutive tapping performance.

Next, the interrupt command processing (S20210) will be described with reference to FIG. 477. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing this interrupt command processing (S20210). The interrupt command processing (S20210) is executed in the command determination processing (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is processing for setting interruption and resumption of the BGM being played.

In the interrupt command process (S20210), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the start of an interrupt (S20401). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of an interrupt (S20401: Yes), data indicating the playback position of the variable BGM being played is stored in the playback position storage area 303b (S20402), and playback of BGM for the interrupt rapid-hit effect is set in CN1 (S20403), after which this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S20401 that the received command is not a command indicating the start of an interruption (i.e., a command indicating the end of an interruption) (S20401: No), playback of the BGM for the interrupt rapid-hit effect is terminated (S20404), the data in the playback position storage area 303b is read (S20405), playback of the variable BGM is resumed in CN1 from the read playback position (S20406), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, the details of the audio setting process (S20002) will be described with reference to FIG. 478. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the audio setting process (S20002). This audio setting process (S20002) is executed as part of the main process (FIG. 474) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226.

In this audio setting process (S20002), first, it is determined whether or not it is currently the timing to output music (S20501). If it is determined that it is not currently the timing to output music (S20501: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S20501 that it is now time to output music (S20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (S20502), the read audio file is played on the corresponding channel (S20503), the music output flag 303c is set to ON (S20504), and this process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, when a jackpot is won, regardless of the type of jackpot, the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues until the lottery for the special pattern is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends. In other words, the operation (operation mode of the electric role 640a) between the time of the special pattern lottery being executed 100 times after the jackpot ends is common between the probability variable jackpot and the normal jackpot. Then, only if the game state is the probability variable state at the time when the lottery for the special pattern is executed 100 times after the jackpot ends, the time-saving state of the normal pattern continues after 100 times. In other words, if the time-saving state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends, and if the probability variable state is set as the game state after the jackpot ends and the game state has transitioned to the low probability state of the special pattern within 100 times, the time-saving state of the normal pattern ends at the timing when the lottery for the 100th special pattern is executed, and the game transitions to the normal state. By configuring it in this way, even if a relatively unfavorable time-saving state is set after the big win ends, or if the probability state falls to a low probability state within 100 tries after the probability state is set, it will be difficult for the player to distinguish between the time-saving state and the probability state until 100 special symbol lotteries have been performed, so the player can continue to have expectations that the game state is in the probability state until at least 100 special symbol lotteries have been performed.

In addition, in this first control example, if the time-saving state of the normal pattern is in effect at the time of winning the jackpot, the game state is set to the normal state (the time-saving state of the normal pattern is terminated) at the start of the variable display to indicate the jackpot. By configuring in this way, the case where the time-saving state of the normal pattern is terminated within 100 times after the jackpot is ended can be limited to the case where the variable display pattern of the jackpot is started, so that the player can be pleased at the point where the behavior that is likely to have terminated the time-saving state of the normal pattern occurs during the execution of the variable display performance within 100 times after the jackpot is ended (for example, when the variable time of the normal pattern exceeds 3 seconds, when the lottery for the normal pattern is a miss, or when a pattern of 0.2 seconds x 1 is executed as the opening pattern of the electric role 640a). Therefore, after the jackpot is ended, the player can play the game while paying attention to the lottery result of the normal pattern and the operation mode of the electric role 640a until the lottery for the special pattern is executed 100 times.

In addition, in this first control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 allows the player to predict the possibility of the probability ... On the other hand, if the Super Temple Mode is entered despite the prediction that the special symbol would have a low probability of appearing, the player can feel happy that the game state has been set to a more favorable state than expected. This can increase the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, by setting the Super Temple Mode, it is confirmed that the reserved balls will not contain any lottery results that correspond to a fall (it is possible to execute lotteries for at least the number of reserved balls with the probability of a jackpot in the special state), so the player can play with a stronger expectation of winning a jackpot in the reserved balls.

In addition, in this first control example, regardless of the game state, a certain range of variable display that is executed before the end of the 100 special pattern lotteries that guarantee the time-saving state of normal patterns (i.e., the 96th to 99th variable display after the end of the jackpot, just before the end of the 100 special pattern lotteries) is executed, the configuration is such that a continuous probability variation suggestion effect is executed to notify whether or not the continuous probability variation state is continuing. When starting this continuous probability variation suggestion effect, the lottery results from the 96th to 99th lottery, which is the execution range of the continuous probability variation suggestion effect, are read in advance to determine whether or not the continuous probability variation state continues until the 99th special pattern lottery, and if the continuous probability variation state continues until the 99th special pattern lottery, the selection rate of a performance scenario that is likely to generate a high-expectation attack pattern is high. On the other hand, if the time-saving state has fallen before the 99th special pattern lottery is executed (or the time-saving state was in effect after the end of the previous jackpot), the selection rate of a performance scenario that is likely to generate a low-expectation attack pattern is high. In this way, by configuring the performance mode based on the game state at the end of the performance, the game state after the performance can be more accurately notified. Here, if the performance is configured to execute the high probability continuation suggestion performance based only on the game state at the start of the performance, there is a risk that the probability state will fall into a low probability state during the execution of the high probability continuation suggestion performance, and the time-saving state will end with the start of the lottery for the 100th special pattern, even though the continuation of the high probability state has been notified. In this case, there is a possibility that the performance content and the actual operation will be inconsistent, causing the player to distrust the pachinko machine 10 and the hall. In addition, as a countermeasure against this, a method of configuring the high probability continuation suggestion performance by a performance that is completed with one change is also considered, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient performance period, making it difficult to diversify the performance mode. In contrast, in the first control example, the probability of the game continuing is indicated over the last four variable displays during which the time-saving state of the normal symbols is guaranteed, and the notification content of the probability of the game continuing is determined based on the game state at the time when the lottery for the last special symbol in the range of the probability of the game continuing is executed. This configuration makes it possible to accurately notify the game state at the end of the effect, while diversifying the presentation mode. Note that, when the probability of the game being in the probability of the game starting at the start of the effect and there are no reserved balls until the end of the effect, a presentation that is likely to produce an attack pattern with a relatively high expectation is selected. This is because the probability of the lottery result corresponding to a fall is lower than the probability of a jackpot, and it is extremely rare for the game to fall into a low probability state of the special symbol during the effect period (the effect ends in the probability of the game ending).

In addition, in this first control example, as a type of interest effect, a push stop effect in which the stop operation of each symbol row is executed according to the operation timing of the player on the PUSH button 10317 is executable. This push stop effect is basically an effect that suggests the possibility of developing into a chance charge effect. In this push stop effect, if it does not develop into a chance charge effect, each symbol row is stopped and displayed as a simple miss combination according to the player's push timing, while if it develops into a chance charge effect, the chance charge symbol is (pseudo) stopped and displayed to notify the development into the chance charge effect. In this way, by configuring the stop timing of each symbol row to be variable according to the player's push timing, the timing at which it is notified whether or not it will develop into a chance charge effect can be adjusted to the player's preference. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, in a push stop effect that does not develop into a chance charge effect, the configuration is configured to change the state of at least the central symbol row when it is stopped and displayed according to the timing at which the stop operation is performed on all symbol rows. More specifically, if the stop operation is completed a prescribed number of times (three times) within a prescribed period (one second) (i.e., at a relatively early stage) after the start of the effective period of the stop operation, the center pattern row is stopped and displayed by a chance charge incentive performance with a relatively long performance time, while if the stop operation is completed a prescribed number of times after the prescribed period (one second) has elapsed, a performance in which the center pattern row is immediately stopped and displayed as a losing pattern (i.e., a relatively short performance) is executed. By configuring in this way, depending on the timing of the completion of the stop operation by the player, the period after the stop display is prevented from becoming too long or, conversely, becoming too short, and the transition of the performance mode until the stop display of the losing pattern can be made to look natural regardless of the timing of the completion of the stop operation. Therefore, a performance mode that is less uncomfortable for the player can be provided. In addition, in the push stop performance in this first control example, a separate button image and a valid period gauge are displayed for each pattern row on the display screen, but in reality, whether or not the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is valid is determined based on a single operation valid period. Then, the pattern sequence for which the stop display is set is changed (determining whether the stop operation has been performed for all pattern sequences) depending on the number of times the stop operation (pressing the PUSH button 10317) is performed during one operation valid period. This simplifies the determination of whether the stop operation for each pattern sequence is valid or not, thereby reducing the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, in this first control example, a chance charge effect is configured to be executable as a type of entertainment effect. This chance charge effect is an effect that suggests (informs) the player in advance the number of times (minimum guaranteed number of times) a specific effect mode (chance up effect) will be performed within a predetermined number of fluctuations (until all reserved balls reserved at the time of the start of the effect are consumed). The guaranteed number of chance up effects (the number of gauges of the accumulated spirit gauge) notified in this chance charge effect is consumed to generate some kind of chance up effect at each timing until the reserved balls at the start of the chance charge effect are consumed. Here, the chance up effect is an effect that increases the expectation of a big win, and examples of this include a change in the display mode of the reserved ball number pattern, the occurrence of so-called pseudo consecutive hits, the occurrence of a cut-in effect, and the occurrence of red-lettered lines. Note that the spirit gauge is configured to be consumed until it reaches 0. In other words, it is configured not to be discarded without being consumed. By configuring in this way, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance up effects, so that the player can play while looking forward to what kind of chance up effect will occur next. This can increase the player's interest in the game. In this first control example, the amount of the spirit gauge that accumulates during the chance charge performance is determined primarily based on the number of reserved balls at the start of the chance charge performance. After the chance charge performance ends, the pace at which the chance up performance is executed (i.e., the spirit gauge is consumed) is varied, taking into account the lottery results for each reserved ball. By configuring in this way, the processing load at the start of the chance charge performance (the processing load when determining the number of gauges) can be reduced.

In addition, in this first control example, an interruption rapid-fire effect is configured to be executable as a type of entertainment effect. This interruption rapid-fire effect is an effect in which a display mode different from the display effect that has been displayed until then suddenly interrupts the normal variable display or reach variable, and is configured as an effect mode that urges the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 in a specific operation mode (rapid-fire operation mode). In this interruption rapid-fire effect, the more the stage of the performance mode develops (the number of monsters displayed is reduced) according to the player's rapid-fire operation, the higher the expectation of a big win. This makes it possible to encourage the player to perform rapid-fire operations proactively, thereby improving the player's motivation to participate in the interruption rapid-fire effect. This interruption rapid-fire effect is an effect that may be executed when it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (is a command indicating 7 seconds) among the basic time command and the additional time command that constitute the variable pattern command. Here, the variable time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. Then, when it is decided to execute an interrupt rapid-hit effect, the interrupt rapid-hit effect is executed for a period of the same length as the additional time notified by the additional time command, and for the normal variable display effect (the effect mode for the period other than the execution period of the interrupt rapid-hit effect), the effect mode for the period of the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command is set. By configuring in this way, even if a variable display effect with an interrupt rapid-hit effect set is executed, the effect mode corresponding to the basic time command can be reused, so the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

In addition, in the interruption repeated tapping performance in the first control example, one of the multiple types of sound data (sound data corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound and sound data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound) is played back each time a repeated tapping operation is performed. More specifically, in the effective period of the repeated tapping operation in one interruption repeated tapping performance, if an odd-numbered repeated tapping operation is detected, sound data corresponding to the first repeated tapping sound is played back to CN2 in the sound synthesis unit 306, while if an even-numbered repeated tapping operation is detected, sound data corresponding to the second repeated tapping sound is played back to CN3 in the sound synthesis unit 306. In this way, by outputting one of the multiple different sound data to one of the multiple different channels (the first and second repeated tapping sounds are output alternately to CN1 and CN2) each time a repeated tapping operation is performed, it is possible to diversify the sound mode during the repeated tapping operation. In other words, it is possible to prevent the sound mode from becoming monotonous, and therefore it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game during the effective period of repeated tapping. In addition, compared to a configuration in which the first and second consecutive tapping sounds are simply played back alternately on a single channel (i.e., a configuration in which the output of one sound being played back is stopped and the output of the other sound is repeated), the other sound can be output while maintaining the output state of one sound (the first and second consecutive tapping sounds can be output in an overlapping manner), so that the sound mode during the execution of the consecutive taps can be made more lively. More specifically, in a configuration in which the first and second consecutive tapping sounds are played back alternately on a single channel, when a player with a short interval between consecutive taps performs a consecutive tapping operation, only the beginning parts of each sound data are alternately repeated, resulting in a monotonous sound mode. In contrast, if a configuration is adopted in which multiple sound data are played back in sequence on multiple channels, the output of one sound data played back on one channel is not interrupted, and other sound data can be played back on other channels. In other words, sound based on one sound data and sound based on other sound data can be synthesized and output. This allows the sound to be more diversified, as it is possible to configure the device so that sounds other than the initial part of each sound are more easily output. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the interruption rapid-fire presentation in the first control example, the later the timing of pressing during the valid period in which the rapid-fire operation is valid (the shorter the remaining time of the valid period), the more the number of monsters to be subtracted (the easier it is to set a presentation mode with a higher expectation level). This makes it possible to prevent the number of monsters from being defeated early down to the lower limit, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace. In other words, it is possible to prevent the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the pressing from stopping at 10 or 4 monsters remaining, which is likely to be set in the case of a miss, and to prevent the player's expectation of a big win from being damaged. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in the game. Also, even if a player who presses the button at a slow pace is playing, pressing the button in the latter half of the rapid-fire valid period makes it easier to select a relatively large number of monsters to be defeated, so it is possible to increase the possibility of reaching the lower limit of the number of monsters. This allows players who press buttons slowly to enjoy the interrupt rapid-fire effect, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this first control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, a reserved ball number pattern that is changed to a specific form (a display form that looks like a rock) different from the normal reserved ball pattern form can be executed as a reserved ball number change effect. In this reserved ball number change effect, after the multiple reserved ball number patterns are changed to a specific form, the player performs a specific operation (a press operation on the PUSH button 10317), and an effect is executed in which at least one reserved ball number pattern is changed to a form with a higher expectation than the reserved pattern form before being changed to the specific form. By executing this reserved ball number change effect, it is determined that the expectation indicated by at least one reserved ball number pattern is increased, so that the player's expectation for a big win can be improved. In addition, since it is not known which reserved ball number pattern will change (the expectation level will increase) until the PUSH button 10317 is pressed, the player can operate the PUSH button 10317 in anticipation of which reserved ball number pattern will be changed. Furthermore, because the expectation level is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the timing of the notification can be adjusted to suit the player's preference. This improves convenience for the player.

In the first control example, during the execution of the interruption continuous tapping performance, two types of audio data are alternately played on two channels each time a press on the PUSH button 10317 is detected, thereby diversifying the audio mode. However, this is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately played on CN1 and CN2 in sequence. This can further diversify the audio mode. In this case, the number of channels for playing audio data is not limited to two, and audio data may be played on three or more channels in sequence. By configuring in this way, the period from when one audio data is played on one channel to when the next audio data is played on the same channel (when the audio data being played is finished) can be made longer, so that the audio mode can be further diversified. Furthermore, the type of audio data output may be different depending on the interval between continuous taps. Specifically, for example, when a player with a relatively short interval between successive hits (e.g., 0.5 seconds or less) is playing, three types of audio formats may be played in sequence on three channels, whereas when a player with a relatively long interval between successive hits (e.g., longer than 0.5 seconds) is playing, two types of audio data may be played in sequence (alternately) on two channels. With this configuration, the audio output mode can be changed according to the successive hit interval, so that a gameplay feature that allows the successive hit interval to be adjusted can be realized. This can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, during the execution of the interruption continuous tapping performance, one of the continuous tapping sounds is output in conjunction with the continuous tapping operation, but under certain conditions, the continuous tapping sound may be output even if the continuous tapping operation is not performed. More specifically, for example, if the continuous tapping sound output last during the effective period of the continuous tapping operation is the first continuous tapping sound, the second continuous tapping sound may be output after the operation ends. By configuring in this way, even if the first continuous tapping sound and the second continuous tapping sound are output as a set in response to the continuous tapping operation, the last sound output becomes the first continuous tapping sound (i.e., the paired second continuous tapping sound is not output), and the sound mode becomes incomplete. Therefore, the sound mode can be set more preferably. In this case, if the last continuous tapping sound output is the first continuous tapping sound, the control to output the second continuous tapping sound after the operation ends may be set only during the execution of the variation display (e.g., jackpot variation) corresponding to the predetermined variation type (lottery result). By configuring it in this way, for players who want to know whether or not the specified variation type is present, the last sound to be output during the interrupt rapid-fire performance is deliberately set to the first rapid-fire sound, making it possible to realize a game feature. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, the first and second consecutive tapping sounds are alternately output during the execution of the interrupt consecutive tapping performance, regardless of the interval between the player's consecutive taps, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a consecutive tapping operation is detected when no sound is being played, the first consecutive tapping sound may be output without fail. In other words, if the interval between consecutive tapping is too long and the next consecutive tapping operation is executed after the playback of one consecutive tapping sound has ended, only the first consecutive tapping sound may be continuously output. With this configuration, players who wish to diversify the sound modes can be made to execute consecutive tapping operations at a faster pace, thereby increasing the player's motivation to participate in the interrupt consecutive tapping performance.

In the first control example, the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the first sound and the audio data (audio file) corresponding to the second sound are alternately played on different channels each time a continuous tapping operation is detected. However, the method of playing the audio data may be changed (or the audio data may be processed in a predetermined manner) under a predetermined condition. More specifically, for example, the playback speed may be changed (or the audio data may be processed) so that the output period of each continuous tapping sound is variable according to the interval between the player's continuous tapping operations. That is, if the interval between the player's continuous tapping operations is longer than a predetermined interval (e.g., 1 second interval), the output period may be longer (e.g., 1.5 seconds or more). By configuring in this way, even when a player with a long continuous tapping interval is playing, it is relatively easy to output one continuous tapping sound while overlapping the other continuous tapping sound, so that the audio mode can be diversified. In the first control example, the first and second consecutive hit sounds are alternately output (played) on different channels based on the execution of a consecutive hit operation, but this control is not limited to the case based on a consecutive hit operation. Similar control may be executed when outputting a start winning sound based on a start winning or when outputting a winning sound based on the detection of a win in the specific winning port 65a. By configuring in this way, the sound can be output more suitably, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further increased. In addition, this control can be adopted when simply outputting a sound effect whose output period is set in advance as part of a variable display performance. By configuring in this way, when sound effects, etc. are output continuously in a relatively short time, the sound can be output more suitably, so that the interest of the player in the game can be further increased.

In the first control example, if the timing of execution of the interruption continuous tapping performance is before the reach, both the display mode and the sound mode are suspended to execute the interruption continuous tapping performance, while if the timing of execution of the interruption continuous tapping performance is during the reach performance, only the display mode is suspended to execute the interruption continuous tapping performance, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in the interruption continuous tapping performance executed before the reach, only the display mode may be suspended, while in the interruption continuous tapping performance executed after the reach occurs, both the display mode and the sound mode may be suspended. Since the sound output before the reach is relatively subdued, it is difficult to interfere with the sound of the interruption continuous tapping performance even if the output is not suspended. On the other hand, since a flashy sound is likely to be output after the reach, by suspending the sound mode, it is possible to prevent the sound of the interruption continuous tapping performance from becoming difficult to hear. Therefore, the sound mode of the interruption continuous tapping performance can be set more suitably. In addition, for example, it is possible to suspend both the display mode and the sound mode regardless of the execution timing of the interruption continuous tapping performance, or conversely, it is possible to suspend only the display mode regardless of the execution timing. In addition, the control is not limited to switching the interrupt target (at least one of the audio mode and the display mode) according to the execution timing of the interruption continuous tapping performance, and may be controlled to switch according to other conditions. More specifically, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined by lottery at the start of the interruption continuous tapping performance whether to interrupt both the audio and the display or to interrupt only one of them. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of determining that both are interrupted is different depending on whether it is a big win or a miss. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play the game while paying attention to whether both the audio and the display are interrupted or only one of them is interrupted, so that the interest of the player in the game at the start of the interruption continuous tapping performance can be improved. In addition, in the first control example, the interruption continuous tapping performance is configured to have only a performance time of 7 seconds, but it may be configured to have multiple interruption continuous tapping performances with different performance times. In this case, a command indicating an additional time other than 0 seconds and 7 seconds may be provided as the additional time command, and an interruption continuous tapping performance with a performance time according to the additional time notified by the additional time command may be executed. This allows the presentation mode to be more diverse, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Also, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of the additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the presentation time of the interruption continuous tapping presentation may be determined so that the difference between the total (i.e., the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command) variable time notified by the variable pattern command and the presentation time of the interruption continuous tapping presentation is the basic time that can be notified by the basic time command. More specifically, for example, when a variable pattern of a missed super reach B with a variable time of 67 seconds is notified, the presentation time of the interruption continuous tapping presentation may be set to 37 seconds so that 30 seconds, which is the basic time of a missed normal reach, remains. By configuring in this way, the variable display presentation can be ended just in time with the end of the variable time by simply setting the presentation mode for the basic time of 30 seconds, so that the presentation mode of the variable display presentation in which the interruption continuous tapping presentation is set can be suitably set without providing a dedicated variable display mode for the interruption continuous tapping presentation. In addition, when this control (control that determines the presentation time of the interrupt rapid-hit presentation so that there is a variable time remaining for the basic time) is adopted, the interrupt rapid-hit presentation can be executed even if the additional time is 0 seconds. In other words, it can be applied to pachinko machines 10 that do not have additional time commands in the first place. Therefore, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the interrupt rapid-hit presentation to be executed, which can further increase the player's interest in the game.

In the first control example, after the end of the jackpot, if the number of times the special symbol is drawn exceeds 100 times and the probability variable state continues, the special symbol is dropped to a low probability state and the time-saving state of the normal symbol is ended based on the lottery result corresponding to the drop, but this is not limited to this. Even after the number of times the special symbol is drawn exceeds 100 times, the condition for ending the time-saving state of the normal symbol may be different from the condition for dropping to the low probability state of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, a lottery for whether or not to drop from the time-saving state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol may be performed at the start of the fluctuation, separately from the lottery for dropping from the probability variable state. Also, for example, if a specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery for the special symbol, only the time-saving state may be ended. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to configure it so that even if the time-saving state of the normal pattern has ended, the probability of the special pattern continuing to be in a variable state is high. This prevents the player from quitting the game immediately after the time-saving state of the normal pattern has ended, and allows the player to continue playing in the hope that the probability of the special pattern continuing to be in a variable state. This can therefore improve the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10.

In the first control example, the reserved ball number pattern based on the start winning detected after the start of the reserved batch change performance is set to a reserved pattern state of white reserved uniformly, but this is not limited to this. For example, a reserved pattern state lottery using the reserved change lottery table 222c (see FIG. 414 (a)) may be performed for the new reserved ball number pattern. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation of a big win not only for the reserved ball number pattern that is the target of the reserved batch change performance, but also for the reserved ball number pattern based on the new start winning. In addition, for example, a new start winning detected after the start of the reserved batch change performance may be configured to be added to the target of the reserved batch change performance. In this case, the reserved ball number pattern based on the new start winning may be configured to be always added to the target of the reserved batch change performance, or may be configured to be added to the target of the reserved batch change performance only under certain conditions. The predetermined condition may be, for example, that if the winning information corresponding to the new start winning indicates a jackpot expectation of a super reach or higher, it is included in the execution of the batch reserved change performance, or, for example, that only when new winning information corresponding to a variation type with a higher expectation than the reserved balls in the range in which the batch reserved change performance is set is notified, it is included in the execution of the batch reserved change performance. By configuring it in this way, when the reserved ball number pattern based on the new start winning is added to the execution of the batch reserved change performance, the player's expectation of a jackpot can be further increased.

<Second control example>
Next, the second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 479 to Fig. 516. In the first control example described above, as described above with reference to Fig. 411, the game state is configured to be able to be set to a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), a probability change state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and a time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), and the game state is configured to be variably set based on the big win of the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery), the fall win of the fall lottery, and the number of times of special symbol fluctuation (number of times of special symbol lottery).

In contrast to this, in this second control example, in addition to the normal state, the probability bonus state, and the time-saving state, the game state can be set to a potential probability state (a state with a high probability of a special symbol, and a state with a low probability of a normal symbol). Also, in some cases where a big jackpot is not won in the special symbol lottery, a small jackpot can be won. Here, we will explain the small jackpots that can be won in the special symbol lottery.

When a small prize is won in the special drawing, a small prize game different from the big prize game that is executed when a big prize is won is executed. In this control example, the small prize game is configured to give a smaller amount of bonus (number of prize balls) to the player than the big prize game. Specifically, the big prize game is configured to execute five or more rounds of round games that open the variable prize winning device 65, whereas the small prize game is configured to execute only one round of round games that open the variable prize winning device 65. After the big prize game ends, a game state is set according to the type of big prize that was won. That is, the game state at the time of winning the big prize and the game state set after the big prize game end are configured to be variable, whereas when a small prize is won, the game state at the time of winning the small prize and the game state set after the small prize game end cannot be changed.

Furthermore, in this control example, in a state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set (high probability state, time-saving state), the high probability state for normal symbols is transitioned to a low probability state based on winning a small jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, as a condition (time-saving end condition) for transitioning the high probability state for normal symbols to a low probability state, in addition to the first time-saving end condition (reaching 100 special symbol fluctuations) also set in the first control example described above, a second time-saving end condition (winning a small jackpot) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing for transitioning the high probability state for normal symbols to a low probability state.

In this control example, there are multiple small win types (small win A, small win B) that are set when a small win is won, and the above-mentioned second time-saving end condition is met when the set small win type is a specific small win type (small win A). By configuring it in this way, the high probability state of the normal pattern transitions to a low probability state only when a specific small win type is won, making it possible to set cases where the high probability state of the normal pattern ends and cases where it does not end based on a small win. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the normal pattern transitions to a low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, like the first control example described above, the high probability state of the normal pattern is configured to transition to a low probability state at the start of the special pattern variation, and even when the high probability state of the normal pattern is transitioned to a low probability state based on a small jackpot win, the high probability state of the normal pattern is configured to transition to a low probability state at the start of the special pattern variation. In this way, by making the timing of ending the high probability state of the normal pattern the same regardless of what the trigger is for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the trigger is for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern.

Furthermore, in this control example, the second time-saving end condition described above is established when a specific small win type (small win A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing for transitioning from a high probability state of normal patterns to a low probability state.

In the above explanation, the game states (time-saving state, special probability state) in which it is easy to open the electric device 640a are generally referred to as high probability states for normal patterns, but for ease of explanation, hereafter, the game states in which it is easy to open the electric device 640a (game states in which the high probability state for normal patterns is set) will also be simply referred to as time-saving states.

In addition, in this control example, when a small prize is won in the special drawing, multiple small prize types can be set, but the same small prize game is executed regardless of which small prize type is set. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the small prize type that has been set this time, based on the game mode of the small prize game (the opening operation mode of the variable winning device 65). Therefore, each time a small prize game is executed, the player can predict whether a specific small prize type (small prize A) has been set, allowing the player to enjoy the period until the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state (second time-saving end condition) is met.

In this control example, the time-saving end condition for terminating the time-saving state is set based on the number of times the special pattern changes during the period in which the time-saving state is set, or the number of times a specific small win (small win A) is won. However, without being limited to this, for example, a time-saving end condition may be set that is established when the number of times a specific special pattern changes, which is the cumulative number of times only a specific special pattern type (for example, second special pattern (special pattern 2)) changes (number of draws) changes as the number of times a special pattern changes, the number of times the special pattern draw is a miss (a draw result other than a big win or a small win), or the number of times the ball passes through a specific area reaches a predetermined number.

In the first control example described above, when a special bonus state or time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is guaranteed until the number of special symbol changes reaches 100 times, whereas in the second control example, the second time-saving end condition is configured to be established before the number of special symbol changes reaches 100 times. And, if the second time-saving end condition is established before the number of special symbol changes reaches 100 times, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is terminated based on the establishment of the second time-saving end condition.

In the second control example configured in this manner, the end of the time-saving state is notified by the rear mode presentation (presentation for informing the player whether or not the high probability state of the special symbol has ended based on the lottery result of the fall-out lottery) described with reference to Figures 390 and 391 of the first control example described above. This makes it possible to execute a rear mode presentation according to the game state that is variably set depending on the lottery result of the fall-out lottery and whether or not the time-saving end condition has been met. The details of this rear mode presentation will be described later.

<About the content of the performance in the pachinko machine of the second control example>
Next, with reference to Figures 479 to 487, the content of the presentation executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this second control example will be explained.

Now, the contents of the above-mentioned back mode presentation will be explained with reference to Figs. 479 to 481. Fig. 479(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a presentation executed when winning information (winning information indicating a small win A win) indicating that the second time-saving end condition is met during the temple search mode is reserved and stored, and Fig. 479(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a presentation executed when a special chart 2 variation is started in which a small win A has been won during the temple search mode. Note that, among the display elements shown in each figure, the same display elements as those in the above-mentioned first control example are given the same reference numerals and their detailed explanations are omitted.

Figure 479(a) shows the display screen during special chart 2 change, when the number of special chart changes since the end of the big win game is the 77th, and the display area 802 displays "23 times" as the remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining change period) until the number of special chart changes reaches 100. And as shown in Figure 479(a), if there is a special chart 2 reserved (in the figure, displayed with the character "small") with winning information indicating that a small win A will be won, an effect in which the pillars of the temple shake is executed, and the character "Pinch" is displayed on the pillars of the temple. And the comment "What, what!?" is displayed in the display area 812, where comments to suggest the game situation are displayed.

By setting this display mode, the player can be led to believe that the time-saving state will be established before the number of special chart changes reaches 100, which makes it possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous compared to when a guaranteed number of times the time-saving state is executed is set as in the first control example.

In addition, in this control example, if the second time-saving end condition described above is met, or if a jackpot is won in the special chart lottery, the time-saving state is configured to end between the end of the jackpot game and the number of special chart changes reaching 100. Therefore, by executing an end suggestion effect that suggests the end of the time-saving state shown in FIG. 479(a), it is possible to suggest that either a jackpot win that is advantageous to the player, or the end of the time-saving state that is disadvantageous to the player, will be set. This allows the player to pay attention to the results of the end suggestion effect, and prevents the player from becoming bored with the game too early.

In this control example, the end suggestion effect (see FIG. 479(a)) is executed when the reserved special chart contains winning information that satisfies the condition for terminating the time-saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a pachinko machine 10 that is configured to establish the second time-saving end condition based on the small win type set when the small win is won and the number of times a specific small win type is set, as in this control example, the end suggestion effect may be executed based on the small win, or the end suggestion effect may be executed based on the type of small win type that is set. In this case, the end suggestion effect may be executed more easily when a small win type that can be a trigger for the establishment of the second time-saving end condition is won than when a small win type that cannot be a trigger for the establishment is won, and the end suggestion effect may be executed more easily as the number of times the small win type that can be a trigger for the establishment approaches the number of times the second time-saving end condition is established.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible for the player to predict whether or not the time-saving end condition is likely to be met depending on the frequency with which the end suggestion effect is executed, and the player can pay close attention to how often the end suggestion effect is being executed. This can improve the presentation effect. In addition, the frequency with which the end suggestion effect is executed can be varied based on whether or not a high probability state (high probability state) for the special pattern is set. For example, it is desirable to configure it so that the end suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when a high probability state is set than when a time-saving state is set.

In other words, when the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing is set, the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than when the time-saving state is set, so even if the time-saving state ends after the end suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to increase the percentage of times the time-saving state ends when a jackpot is won. Therefore, by making it easier for the end suggestion effect to be executed when the probability of winning a jackpot than when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation in the player for the end suggestion effect.

In addition, without being limited to this, the system may be configured so that the end suggestion effect is more difficult to execute when the special probability state is set than when the time-saving state is set, or the frequency of execution of the end suggestion effect may be different between when the time-saving state is set after the end of a jackpot game and when the special probability state is set after the end of a jackpot game and then transitions to the time-saving state based on winning the drop-out lottery. Also, the system may be configured so that the frequency of execution of the end suggestion effect is different based on the period required from when the special probability state is set until the drop-out lottery is won (number of special chart changes) or the period that has elapsed since the drop-out lottery is won (number of special chart changes).

Then, when time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 479(a) and the special pattern variation that satisfies the second time-saving end condition begins, the display screen shown in FIG. 479(b) is displayed. In this control example, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is configured to end at the start of the special pattern variation that satisfies the second time-saving end condition, and even if the result of the special pattern lottery is a jackpot win, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is configured to end at the start of the special pattern variation. In either case, the display screen shown in FIG. 479(b) is displayed.

Figure 479 (b) shows a scene in which the main character 801 falls into a pitfall 820, and the display area 806 displays the words "Temple search completed" as an end notification mode 822 indicating that the time-saving state has ended, and the words "Hit left" as a guidance notification mode 821 to guide the player on how to play after the time-saving state has ended. The comment "It's a pitfall!!" is then displayed as a display mode 812 to inform the player of the content of the currently executing effect. Also, the display area 802 displays "? times" as a remaining period display mode indicating the remaining period (remaining variation period) until the number of special chart variations reaches 100 times.

Next, the continuation of the presentation shown in FIG. 479(b) will be explained with reference to FIG. 480 and FIG. 481. FIG. 480(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation contents displayed when the presentation result of the pitfall presentation is a jackpot, and FIG. 480(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation contents displayed when the presentation result of the pitfall presentation is the end of the time-saving state. 480(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the presentation contents displayed during the variation presentation corresponding to the special chart variation on the 99th spin after the end of the jackpot game, and FIG. 481(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the presentation result of the variation presentation corresponding to the special chart variation on the 99th spin after the end of the jackpot game.

If the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479(b) above is executed based on a jackpot win in the special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 480(a), a display mode in which the character 801 discovers a treasure chest 807 is displayed, and the display area Ds3 showing the lottery result of the special symbol displays a display mode of "333" indicating a jackpot win. Then, "Hit right" is displayed in display areas 821 and 823 as a guide display mode to show the playing method during the jackpot play, and the comment "Treasure found!!" is displayed in display area 806 as a lottery result notification mode to indicate a jackpot win.

On the other hand, if the trap effect shown in FIG. 479(b) above is executed based on the establishment of the second time-saving end condition, a background mode (lost mode) in which the character 801 wanders through the forest is set as shown in FIG. 480(b). This lost mode is set when a potential state (high probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set due to the establishment of the second time-saving end condition during a sure-change state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), or when a normal state (low probability state for special symbols, low probability state for normal symbols) is set due to the establishment of the second time-saving end condition during a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols).

As described above, when the lost mode is set, because the probability of winning a normal symbol is low, "Hit Left" is displayed in display areas 821 and 823 as a guide display mode to show the player how to play, and the words "Enter Lost Mode" are displayed in display area 806 to indicate that "lost mode" has been set as the background mode. In addition, the display mode of "341" indicating a small prize win (small prize A win) is displayed in display area Ds3, which shows the results of the special symbol lottery.

This "lost mode" is configured to remain set until the number of special chart changes executed since the end of the jackpot game reaches 99. When the 99th special chart change is executed after the end of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 481(a), an effect is executed in which the character 801 stands at a fork in the road and chooses the direction to travel. Then, when the character 801 walks towards the selected direction, as shown in FIG. 481(b), a game status notification mode 821 is displayed to show the current game status.

In the example shown in FIG. 481(b), a game status notification mode 821 is displayed indicating that the current game status is normal, and the text "Sorry, returning to normal mode" is displayed in the display area 806 indicating that the game status is normal, and the background mode presentation ends. On the other hand, although not shown, if the current game status is a potential game status at the stage where the 99th special chart change is executed after the end of the jackpot, the text "Continue" is displayed as the game status notification mode 821, and the lost mode continues until the game status transitions from the potential game status to the normal game status through a drop lottery.

In other words, in this control example, if the lost mode is set even after the 99th special chart change is performed after the end of the jackpot, it is determined that the potential state is set. In this way, even if the time-saving state ends, during the specified period (99 special chart changes) after the end of the jackpot game, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current game state is a normal state or a potential state, and after the specified period (99 special chart changes) has passed, a performance is executed to make the current game state easy for the player to understand, so that it is difficult for the player to stop playing during the specified period (99 special chart changes) after the end of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game. In addition, after the specified period (99 special chart changes) has passed, the current game state is notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, so that it is possible to suppress the player from playing an excessively disadvantageous game.

In this control example, the timing for notifying the player of the current game status is fixed to the timing when the special chart changes 99 times after the end of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this. For example, multiple timings (for example, timings when the number of special chart changes after the end of the jackpot game is 10, 30, 70, or 90) can be set as timings for notifying the game status, and when that timing is reached, it is determined whether the time-saving state has ended (whether the second time-saving end condition has been met), and if it is determined that the time-saving state has ended, a presentation (see FIG. 481 (b)) for notifying the player of the current game status is executed. Also, a measuring means may be provided that measures the number of times the special chart changes after the second time-saving end condition is met (after the lost mode is set), and when the result of the measuring means reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 20, 30, 40), a lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute a presentation (see FIG. 481(b)) to notify the current game status, and a configuration may be adopted in which the presentation (see FIG. 481(b)) to notify the current game status is executed based on the result of the lottery.

By configuring it in this way, if the second time-saving end condition is met immediately after the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set and the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) ends, it is possible to prevent the player from playing in the lost mode for an unnecessarily long period of time.

In this control example, even if a jackpot is won while the lost mode is set, the effects shown in Figures 481(a) and 481(b) are executed, and the game status notification mode 821 is configured to display the word "jackpot." This allows the player to wait for the result of the effect while hoping for a jackpot win, even when an effect to notify the current game status (see Figure 481(b)) has started, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect until the very end.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, as in the first control example described above, the game state at the timing of the execution of a special pattern change to be executed in the future may be predicted based on the results of the advance reading of the special pattern reservation, and the game state notification mode 821 may be displayed in advance based on the prediction results.

As explained above, in this control example, when the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of a jackpot game, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is configured to end at various times, so that the transition process of the game state differs depending on the timing when the second time-saving end condition is met and the timing when the roll-down lottery is won, allowing the player to play in various game states and improving the interest of the game. In addition, as a background mode presentation, a background mode corresponding to each game state is set, and when the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) ends, a background mode (lost mode) is set to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the potential state or the normal state is set, so that the player can continue playing.

In addition, if a jackpot is won during a background mode presentation (during right-hand play), a "left hit" is notified during the special chart change period indicating the jackpot win, and a "right hit" is notified after the special chart change has stopped (confirmed). This allows the presentation style (see FIG. 479 (b)) when the time-saving state ends during a background mode presentation (during left-hand play) to be unified regardless of the trigger that ended the time-saving state. Note that in this control example, a "left hit" is uniformly notified (displayed) when the time-saving state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to uniformly notify (display) "right hit" for the period until the special chart change that ended the time-saving state has stopped (confirmed).

In addition, in this control example, an example of a presentation that makes it difficult for the player to understand the trigger for ending the time-saving state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. By varying the presentation mode of a part of the presentation that is executed, the presenter may be configured to suggest to the player the trigger for ending the currently established time-saving state. For example, in the end suggestion presentation shown in FIG. 479(a), the color of the temple pillars or the type of text displayed on the pillars may be varied to suggest to the player the trigger for ending the currently established time-saving state. In the pitfall presentation shown in FIG. 479(b), the color of the lid of the pitfall 820 or the display mode of the display area 812 may be varied to suggest to the player the trigger for ending the currently established time-saving state.

In this control example, when a time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set after a jackpot game ends, a first time-saving end condition (100 special symbol changes) is set to end the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) based on the number of times the special symbol changes, and if a second time-saving end condition is met when a specific small jackpot is won a predetermined number of times by a special symbol lottery before the first time-saving end condition is met, or if a jackpot is won, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is ended at that point.

Furthermore, in this control example, the time-saving state is configured to end at the start of the special chart fluctuation when various conditions are met to end the time-saving state described above. In other words, if the number of special chart fluctuations is set to 100 as the first time-saving end condition, the time-saving state ends at the start of the 100th special chart fluctuation while the time-saving state is set, and if the second time-saving end condition is set to winning a specific small prize (small prize A) twice, the time-saving state ends at the start of the special chart fluctuation when the second small prize A is won while the time-saving state is set, and the time-saving state ends at the start of the special chart fluctuation when the big prize is won while the time-saving state is set.

By configuring it in this way, if the time-saving state ends while the first time-saving end condition is not satisfied, the player can be notified that the special chart change being executed will stop and be displayed in a display mode that shows the lottery result indicating a big win or a lottery result indicating a small win. This keeps the player interested and allows him or her to pay attention to the change presentation executed in response to the special chart change until the special chart change being executed when the time-saving state ends is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in this control example, the second time-saving end condition is set to be satisfied when multiple small wins are won. For example, by closely watching the results of the special drawing performed during the time-saving state and determining whether or not a small win has been won, if the time-saving state ends in a state in which the first time-saving end condition is not satisfied and no small win has been won, it is possible to grasp that the drawing result of the special drawing change being performed is a big win. In this way, it is difficult to identify the time-saving end condition that has been satisfied this time based on the game content (special drawing result) during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) and the end timing of the time-saving state, and it is possible to identify the time-saving end condition that has been satisfied this time based on the game content (special drawing result) during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) and the end timing of the time-saving state, so that the player can be more interested in the game content (special drawing result) during the time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent the game during the time-saving state, which is an advantageous game state for the player, from becoming monotonous.

In this control example, the game content of the jackpot game that is executed when a jackpot is won in the special chart change (for example, round game, 15 round game) is different from the game content of the small jackpot game that is executed when a small jackpot is won (1 round game), so it is possible to determine the result of the special chart lottery after the fact based on the content of the winning game that is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, it is also possible to set the game type of the jackpot game that is executed based on winning a jackpot in the special chart lottery to a game type in which a winning game that is the same as a small jackpot game (a concept that includes differences that are difficult for players to distinguish) is executed.

By configuring it in this way, the game content of the winning game (the opening operation content of the variable winning device 65) can be unified for a part of the big win game that is executed based on winning a big win in the special drawing, and a small win game that is executed based on winning a small win in the special drawing, so it is difficult for the player to distinguish whether the winning game executed this time is a big win game or a small win game based on the game content of the winning game executed.

In this case, when a jackpot game in which the same winning game content as the small jackpot game is set is executed, it is preferable to configure it so that a potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the jackpot game ends. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the game (left-hand play) after the end of the small jackpot game based on the small jackpot win in which the second time-saving end condition is established the same as the game (left-hand play) after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the time-saving state ends while the first time-saving end condition is not established, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the time-saving end condition that has been established is based on the game content (opening operation content for the variable winning device 65) of the executed winning game (jackpot game, small jackpot game) and the game content (left-hand play) executed after the end of the winning game (jackpot game, small jackpot game).

Furthermore, in this control example, the probability state of the special pattern and the probability state of the normal pattern are variably set based on winning a jackpot, whereas in the case of winning a small jackpot, the state is only variably set from the high probability state of the normal pattern to a low probability state. In other words, winning a jackpot triggers the game state to be variably set within a range of 1, and winning a small jackpot triggers the game state to be variably set within a range of 2, which is narrower than range 1. In this way, by varying the range of game states that can be variably set based on the results of the special pattern lottery, it is possible to make it easier for the player to predict the game state that will be set in the future when the results of the special pattern lottery are known.

Next, referring to Figures 482 and 483, the content of the presentation in the dialogue zone executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. In this control example, the dialogue zone can be set based on the variable pattern command received from the main control device 110. When this dialogue zone is set, a presentation is executed in which each third pattern speaks a line in response to the character of the left third pattern LZ (see Figure 482 (a)), which is the first of the third patterns stopped and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

When executing an effect in which each third pattern speaks a line in accordance with the display mode (e.g., a character) of the left third pattern LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that is stopped first, if the same display mode (e.g., a character) of the left third pattern LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that is stopped first appears consecutively, the same line effect is executed, resulting in a problem of reduced effect.

In contrast to this, the second control example is configured to be able to store information (past information) indicating the character of the left third pattern LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) that was stopped and displayed in the past, and the set lines, and is configured to set the presentation mode (character, lines) of a newly executed line presentation based on the stored past information. This allows a variety of presentation modes to be set as the presentation mode of the line presentation, enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in this second control example, when setting the presentation mode of a new dialogue presentation, the presentation mode is set based on the result of a special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery). This makes it possible to intentionally set a presentation mode that gives a sense of discomfort to the player (for example, a presentation mode in which the same character is set consecutively) when, for example, the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot. Therefore, since it is possible to predict the result of the special symbol lottery based on the presentation mode of the dialogue presentation, it is possible to have the player focus on the presentation and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this second control example, the multiple characters that can be stopped and displayed in the left third pattern LZ (see FIG. 482(a)) are configured to be broadly divided into multiple groups (in this control example, a land creature group and a sea creature group), and the content of the dialogue is configured to be different when each third pattern corresponding to a character in the same group is stopped and displayed and when a third pattern corresponding to a character in a different group is stopped and displayed. This makes it possible to predict the dialogue to be displayed by grasping the third pattern that will be stopped and displayed before the timing at which the dialogue is to be displayed (the timing at which each third pattern is stopped and displayed). This allows the player to enjoy whether the predicted content of the dialogue matches the content of the dialogue that is actually displayed.

The method of selecting the characters used in the dialogue performance and the specific dialogue content will be described later with reference to Figs. 495 to 497. First, the performance content displayed during the dialogue performance will be described with reference to Figs. 482 and 483. Fig. 482(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the left third symbol LZ is stopped and displayed in the dialogue performance, and Fig. 482(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when the right third symbol RZ is stopped and displayed in the dialogue performance. Fig. 483(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when a reach state is reached in the dialogue performance, and Fig. 483(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen when characters belonging to different groups are stopped and displayed in the dialogue performance.

As shown in FIG. 482(a), when a dialogue zone is set, the display area 806 displays the word "Dialogue Zone" as a presentation notification mode to notify the player that a dialogue zone is set. Then, in the center of the display screen, the left third pattern LZ, the middle third pattern CZ, and the right third pattern RZ are displayed in a variable manner, and dialogue corresponding to the character attached to the stopped and displayed third pattern is displayed at the timing when each third pattern is stopped and displayed. When a dialogue zone is set, the third pattern is formed as a fusion third pattern that combines a number aspect, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern, with a character aspect that corresponds to the number aspect. In the diagram shown in FIG. 482(a), a fusion third pattern that combines the character aspect of "elephant" and the number aspect of "1" is displayed as the left third pattern LZ in a stopped manner, and the word "hello" is displayed as the dialogue LZ1.

In this control example, a different character mode is associated with each of the nine number modes. A detailed explanation of the display mode of each fusion third pattern will be given later with reference to FIG. 495(a).

In addition, in this control example, the lines displayed in the dialogue performance are configured to be output as sound by the audio output device 226. This makes it possible to identify the performance being executed by hearing, thereby enhancing the performance effect. Also, since it becomes possible for nearby players who have difficulty seeing the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to identify the performance mode (audio mode) of the dialogue performance, it becomes possible for them to feel a sense of superiority, for example, when a dialogue performance with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is executed.

Figure 482(b) shows a state in which the performance has progressed from the state of Figure 482(a) described above, with the right third pattern RZ being frozen and displayed. In Figure 482(b), a fused third pattern that combines the character aspect of a "lion" with the number aspect of a "2" is frozen and displayed as the right third pattern RZ, and the words "It's been a while" are displayed as the dialogue RZ1. Here, in Figure 482(b), because the left third pattern LZ and the right third pattern RZ are both frozen and displayed as a fused third pattern that has characters that belong to the same group (the land creature group), a dialogue performance in which a conversation is established is being executed.

In Fig. 483(a), the varying display shown in Fig. 482(b) shows that the left third pattern LZ and the right third pattern RZ are both displayed as a fused third pattern that combines the character form of an "elephant" with the number form of a "1", and a reach state is displayed in which the left third pattern LZ and the right third pattern RZ are displayed as the same fused third pattern. The words "Nice weather" are displayed as the dialogue LZ1, and "Hot, hot" is displayed as the dialogue RZ1.

Next, the variable operation presentation will be described with reference to FIG. 484 and FIG. 485. In this second control example, a variable operation presentation is configured to be executable in which the player operates the lever member 10340 that can move between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operation position). This variable operation presentation is configured to execute a preparation presentation executed during a presentation preparation processing period (2 seconds) in which the lever member 10340, which is normally located at the first position, is moved to the second position, an operation instruction presentation executed during an operation instruction period (3 seconds) in which the player operates the lever member 10340 located at the second position, an operation response presentation indicating that the player has operated the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, and a result presentation executed during a result display period (2 seconds) indicating the presentation result of the variable operation presentation.

In addition, a variable operation effective period is set in correspondence with the period during which the operation instruction period (3 seconds) is set, for validly determining whether the player has operated the operation means (lever member 10340). If the player operates the lever member 10340 during this operation instruction period and the operation is determined to be valid, an operation-responsive presentation is executed without waiting for the operation instruction period to elapse, and then a result presentation is displayed. This makes it possible to display a result presentation in response to the operation of the operation means executed by the player, making it possible to motivate the player to operate the operation means. However, without being limited to this, it is also possible to configure the system so that if the player operates the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period and the operation is determined to be valid, only the operation-responsive presentation is executed, and the result presentation is executed after the operation instruction period has elapsed.

Here, we will briefly explain the contents of the various effects that are executed during the variable operation effect. First, during the preparation effect, an effect is executed that suggests to the player that an effect that will cause the player to operate the lever member 10340 will soon be executed. Specifically, an image that resembles the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the preparation effect is executed in an effect mode that notifies the player that the lever member 10340 is moving from the first position to the second position.

In this control example, since the operation means is operated from the second position toward the first position during the variable operation presentation, the player is notified of the preparation presentation indicating that the lever member 10340 is moving from the first position to the second position, so that the player can easily understand the direction in which the lever member 10340 is operated by the variable operation presentation. In addition, when executing a variable operation presentation in which the operation means is operated by the player from the second position to a third position different from the first position after the operation means has moved from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to configure the presentation mode to notify the player that the operation means will move to the first position, the second position, and the third position during the preparation presentation, and to notify the player that the operation means is located at the second position when the presentation preparation process is completed. In other words, it is preferable to configure the preparation presentation to notify the player of the operation content to be performed by the player on the operation means.

Then, once the preparation performance is completed, an operation instruction performance is executed to have the player operate the operating means (lever member 10340). Here, the contents of the operation instruction performance will be explained with reference to FIG. 484(a). FIG. 484(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a performance screen displayed during the operation instruction performance. As shown in FIG. 484(a), when the operation instruction performance is executed, an image imitating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a display mode encouraging the player to press the lever member 10340 downward (towards the first position) and a comment saying "Press the lever" are displayed.

Note that, although not shown in Figure 484 (a), a period gauge is also displayed to indicate the elapsed time and remaining time of the operation instruction period (3 seconds). Also, although not shown, when the player presses down on the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, an operation-responsive presentation (for example, a comment indicating that the operation has been completed) is displayed indicating that the operation means has been operated during the valid operation period, and then the presentation result is displayed. The presentation result is similar to the presentation results of the various presentations using the operation means used in the first control example described above, and therefore a detailed explanation thereof is omitted.

In this way, in this control example, as a variable operation presentation, the operating means (lever member 10340) located in the first position (origin position) is moved to the second position (actuated position), and then an operation is performed by the player to move the operating means from the second position to the first position. This makes it possible to improve the player's sense of operation and enhance the presentation effect, compared to the case where the operation presentation is simply to press the PUSH button 10317, as in the first control example described above.

However, when the above-mentioned variable operation presentation is executed, if the player does not operate the operation means (lever member 10340) during the effective operation period, the lever member 10340 will remain in the second position even after the variable operation presentation ends, causing a problem that the structure of the operation device 10300 having the lever member 10340 will become unstable. Also, the operation device 10300 used in this control example is provided with an operation means (PUSH button 10317) in addition to the lever member 10340, and if the lever member 10340 remains in the second position, it becomes difficult to press the other operation means (PUSH button 10317).

To address this issue, it is conceivable to determine the position of the lever member 10340 at the end of the variable operation presentation, and if the lever member 10340 is not in the first position, execute operation control (return operation control) using a drive means to forcibly return the lever member 10340 to the first position. However, even though the lever member 10340 has been moved to the second position to improve the player's feel of operating the operating means, the lever member will end up moving from the second position to the first position without the player's operation, which leaves the problem that the presentation effect cannot be improved.

In contrast, in this control example, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation presentation, and if the lever member 10340 is not in the first position, the next variable operation presentation is more likely to be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to move the lever member 10340, which has once been moved to the second position, back to the first position, so that the lever member 10340 can be moved to the first position (origin position) while enhancing the presentation effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, an upper limit is set for the period during which the next variable operation presentation is likely to be executed, and if the lever member 10340 is still in the second position after that period has elapsed, a return operation control is executed using a drive means (drive motor) to move the lever member 10340 to the first position. This makes it possible to prevent excessive variable operation presentations from being executed for the player.

Here, when executing the return operation control, if the player applies force in a direction that resists the force generated when the lever member 10340 located at the second position moves toward the first position, i.e., if the player pushes up the lever member 10340 so that it does not move to the first position, a problem will arise in which the return operation control will not be able to move the lever member 10340 to the first position.

Therefore, if the return operation control is executed to move the lever member 10340 to the first position with a force stronger than the player can apply, there is a risk that the player may be injured. Also, if the return operation control is continued until the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position, there is a problem that an excessive load is placed on the drive motor that drives the lever member 10340, which may cause a breakdown.

In contrast, in this second control example, when the lever member 10340 is in the second position after the return operation control for a predetermined period (5 seconds) has been completed, a process is executed to switch the initial position of the lever member 10340 from the first position to the second position, and an effect is executed in which the second position becomes the initial position.

When a variable operation presentation is executed with the second position set as the initial position, the lever member 10340 moves from the second position to the first position during the presentation preparation period in which the presentation preparation process is executed, and an operation instruction presentation is executed in which the lever member 10340 is operated from the first position to the second position (see FIG. 484(b)). In this way, by varying the presentation mode of the variable operation presentation, it is possible to make the player interested in the variable operation presentation, and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

In addition, if it is determined that the position of the lever member 10340 is neither the first position nor the second position after the variable operation presentation has ended, i.e., if neither the origin detection flag 223ae nor the actuation position detection flag 223af, which will be described later, is set to on, it is possible that the player is holding the lever member 10340 at a position intermediate between the first and second positions. Therefore, the presentation mode of the next variable operation presentation is set to a presentation mode that uses a touch sensor having a detection area formed at a position overlapping the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 in order to have the player release his/her hand from the lever member 10340.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 485, an image 891 resembling a hand is displayed in correspondence with the detection area 890 of the touch sensor displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the word "touch" is displayed in the display area 892 to indicate touching the detection area 890, and the comment "Touch the LCD" is displayed in the display area 806 to indicate the operation content of this operation effect. By executing an effect to touch the LCD (touch effect) in this manner, it becomes possible for the player to release his/her hand from the lever member 10340 and touch the LCD. In this control example, the return operation control of the lever member 10340 is executed in accordance with the execution period of the touch effect. This ensures that the lever member 10340 can be moved to the first position.

In this second control example, the touch sensor is configured to be operable with one hand, but in this case, by releasing the hand from the operating handle, it becomes possible to operate the touch sensor while still holding the lever member 10340. Therefore, in addition to the touch effect for operating the touch sensor, it is preferable to also configure it to execute a launch effect that encourages the player to launch the ball by operating the operating handle. This makes it easier to release the player's hand from the lever member 10340.

In addition, the device may be configured to execute only the above-mentioned launch effect, or may be configured to execute a touch effect using both hands, for example, by providing multiple touch sensors on the game board 13 with a detection range spaced at least 20 cm apart so that the detection range cannot be reached with one hand, and by operating multiple touch sensors simultaneously.

Next, the contents of the reserved effects in this second control example will be explained with reference to Figs. 486 to 488. As with the first control example described above, this control example has a special symbol change effect that can be executed in response to a special symbol change to indicate the result of the special symbol lottery, and a reserved effect that can be executed when a special symbol reserved is acquired based on the initial winning of a special symbol, and in either effect, an operation effect can be set to have the player operate the operating means.

As described above, the special chart change effect is executed based on the special chart change, and the hold effect is executed based on the acquisition of a special chart hold, and the hold effect can be executed even while the special chart change effect is being executed, so that the operation effects can be executed at various times, which increases the interest of the game. However, there was a problem in that the operation effects derived from the special chart change effect and the operation effects derived from the hold effect were executed simultaneously, making it difficult for the player to understand which operation effect was changing based on the result of the operation on the operating means executed by the player.

In contrast, in this control example, when the execution conditions for one operation performance are met, the execution status of the other operation performance is determined, and the execution start timing of one operation performance is changed based on the result of that determination. This prevents multiple operation performances from being executed simultaneously, making it possible to provide the player with operation performances that are easy to understand. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a suggestion performance that suggests that the operation performance is waiting to be executed, using the period from when the execution conditions for the operation performance are met to when the operation performance is actually executed. This makes it possible to suggest that a new operation performance will be executed after the currently executed operation performance ends, allowing the player to play while looking forward to the performance that will be executed in the future.

Now, with reference to FIG. 486, the contents of the standby effect that is executed when the operation effects overlap will be explained. FIG. 486(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a standby effect that is displayed on the display screen when the conditions for executing an operation effect as a pending effect are met while an operation effect is being executed in a special chart change effect, and FIG. 486(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents that are displayed on the display screen after the standby effect ends. Note that the operation effect derived from the special chart change effect executed in this control example is the same as in the first control example described above, so a detailed explanation of the effect contents and execution trigger will be omitted.

Figure 486 (a) is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged view of the upper left display area of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 389), specifically, the vicinity of the display area Ds1 where the display mode (reserved ball pattern) for showing the number of reserved balls of the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is displayed. As described above, the waiting effect shown in Figure 486 (a) is executed when an operation effect derived from a special pattern change effect is being executed, so although it is not shown in Figure 486 (a), an operation effect derived from a special pattern change effect is being executed in approximately the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Figure 486 (a) shows a state in which the first reserved ball pattern Hz1 to the fourth reserved ball pattern Hz4 are displayed as reserved patterns of special chart 1, and based on the fourth reserved ball pattern Hz4 being displayed on the display screen (based on the audio lamp control device 113 receiving the winning information command indicating winning information that will be the fourth reserved ball of special chart 1), a standby performance is being executed.

In other words, based on receiving a winning information command indicating winning information that will result in the fourth reserved ball on special chart 1, it is determined that an operation effect (reserved operation effect) will be executed that causes the player to operate the operating means as a reserved effect (the execution condition for the reserved operation effect is met), and if it is further determined that an operation effect (special chart operation effect) is being executed as a special chart change effect at that time (the standby condition for the reserved operation effect is met), a standby effect is executed that suggests that a reserved operation effect will be executed.

In this waiting effect, a performance is executed in which the suggested character HC1 appears (frames in) on the display screen while rotating a display part (head in Figure 486 (a)) that has multiple display surfaces. This suggested character HC1 has three display surfaces, each of which displays the words "PUSH," "RED," and "CHANCE." Then, after the display part rotates during the waiting effect, a specific display part is displayed stopped in a position that is easier to see than the other display parts as a performance result of the waiting effect.

For example, if a hold operation display is executed after a standby display, a specific display area displaying the word "PUSH" will be displayed in a stopped position that is easier to see than other display areas as a result of the standby display, and the hold operation display will be executed.

In this way, when a standby effect is being executed, an effect is executed in which the display portion of the suggestive character HC1 framed in the display screen is rotated, and further, a display mode ("PUSH") for prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed on part of the rotating display portion, thereby suggesting to the player that the pending operation effect is in a standby state. Also, by rotating and displaying the display mode ("PUSH") for prompting the player to operate the operation means, the player can be clearly informed that at the current time (during the standby effect) the operation effective period of the pending operation effect has not been set.

In this control example, a presentation mode is shown in which the suggested character HC1 frames into the display screen while the standby presentation is being executed, but the suggested character HC1 may be configured to frame into the display screen only for a portion of the standby presentation period. Also, as a standby presentation, a presentation is executed in which the multiple display surfaces that are the display areas of the suggested character HC1 rotate while displaying a predetermined display mode ("PUSH", "Red", "Chance"), but this is not limited to this, and the display mode displayed on the multiple display surfaces that are the display areas of the suggested character HC1 may be changed during the standby presentation, or a presentation may be executed in which the display area rotates without displaying the display mode.

Furthermore, in the effect of rotating the display part of the suggestion character HC1 executed during the waiting effect, the rotation speed of the display part may be varied according to the progress of the waiting effect, for example, the rotation speed may be configured to be decreased as the timing of the end of the waiting effect approaches. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand what the suggestion character HC1 is suggesting immediately after the waiting effect is executed, and to make it easier for the player to grasp the suggestion content of the suggestion character HC1 as time passes. This makes it possible to get the player interested in the performance content of the waiting effect.

Furthermore, the rotation speed of the display area of the suggested character HC1 may be varied based on the operation of the operating means during the special chart operation performance being performed. For example, the rotation speed may be increased based on the player's operation of the operating means during the special chart operation performance. By configuring it in this way, when the player is actively operating the operating means during the special chart operation performance, the display area of the suggested character HC1 will rotate at high speed, making it difficult to distinguish the word "PUSH" displayed on the display area of the suggested character HC1. This allows the player to concentrate on the special chart operation performance while playing the game.

The relationship between the manner in which the player operates the operating means in response to the special chart operation presentation and the presentation mode displayed during the standby presentation is not limited to this, and the display mode displayed on each display surface of the display portion of the suggested character HC1 may be changed based on the player's operation of the operating means during the special chart operation presentation.

In this control example, when the standby effect shown in FIG. 486(a) ends, it is determined again whether the pending operation effect can be executed, and if it is determined that it can be executed, the display area of the suggested character HC1 is frozen so that the word "PUSH" is identifiable, but if it is determined that the pending operation effect cannot be executed after the standby effect ends, the display area of the suggested character HC1 is frozen so that the word "red" or the word "chance" is identifiable.

As shown in FIG. 486(b), when the display portion of the suggestive character HC1 is stopped so that the word "red" is identifiable, a reserved effect is executed in which the display mode of the reserved ball pattern is changed (in FIG. 486(a), the second reserved ball pattern, which was displayed in blue, is changed to a red display mode) without executing an operation effect.

In this way, when the execution conditions for the pending operation performance are met and it is not possible to execute the pending operation performance immediately, the standby performance is executed, and at the timing when the standby performance ends, it is determined again whether the pending operation performance can be executed, and the performance result of the standby performance is changed based on the result of this determination, thereby simplifying the determination of the execution conditions for the standby performance.

Next, referring to Figures 487 and 488, the flow of setting the operation presentation in this second control example will be explained. In this second control example, the presentation mode of the variation presentation corresponding to the special chart variation is configured to be set at different timings in the first half (first period) and the second half (second period) of the special chart variation period. Specifically, the presentation mode of the special chart variation presentation corresponding to the first half (first period) of the special chart variation period is configured to be set at the start timing of the special chart variation (the timing when the variation pattern command is received), and the presentation mode of the special chart variation presentation corresponding to the second half (second period) of the special chart variation period is configured to be set a predetermined period after the special chart variation has elapsed.

Furthermore, in this control example, the information (first information) used to set the presentation mode (first presentation mode) of the variable presentation corresponding to the first period of the special chart variable period is different from the information (second information) used to set the presentation mode (second presentation mode) of the variable presentation corresponding to the second period of the special chart variable period. Specifically, the first presentation mode is set based on the variable pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the second presentation mode is set based on the presentation information (information stored in the presentation information storage area 223ak) stored when the first presentation mode was set and information indicating whether the pending presentation (pending operation presentation) is on standby (setting status of the standby flag 223ah).

Here, the method of setting the special chart change effect and the reserved effect will be explained with reference to Fig. 487 and Fig. 488. Fig. 487 is a diagram showing a method of setting various effects when the execution conditions of the reserved operation effect as a reserved effect are met during the first period of the special chart change period, and Fig. 488 is a diagram showing a method of setting various effects when the execution conditions of the reserved operation effect as a reserved effect are met during the second period of the special chart change period.

As shown in FIG. 487, the variation pattern command is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the special chart variation is executed. Then, on the voice lamp control device 11 side, the variation performance of the first period is set by referring to the variation pattern table 223a based on the information indicating the special chart variation time, the information indicating the lottery result of the special chart selection, and the information indicating the special chart stop type contained in the received variation pattern command. Specifically, the variation performance mode of the first period and the performance information indicating the length of the second period are set and stored in the performance information storage area 223ak.

Here, when an operation presentation (special symbol operation presentation) is set as the variable presentation mode for the set first period, the special symbol operation presentation is executed in accordance with the execution timing of the special symbol operation presentation, and an effective operation period is set to effectively determine the operation performed by the player on the operation means. Then, during the period in which the variable presentation for the first period is being executed, when a start winning of a special symbol (a ball entering the first winning slot 64) occurs and a winning information command including a pre-reading result corresponding to the start winning is output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, a determination process is executed on whether or not to execute a pending presentation based on the winning information command received on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and further, when it is determined that a pending presentation has been executed, a process is executed to set the presentation mode of the pending presentation.

When a presentation mode other than the operation presentation (hold operation presentation) is set as the presentation mode of the reserved presentation (for example, a presentation mode in which the display mode of one of the special reserved ball patterns Hz1 to Hz4 is changed based on the elapsed time without the player operating the operating means), the reserved presentation is executed without determining the presentation mode of the special chart change presentation being executed. On the other hand, when the operation presentation (hold operation presentation) is set as the presentation mode of the reserved presentation, in order to determine whether the current situation is such that the reserved operation presentation can be executed, the presentation content of the currently executing special chart change presentation (special chart change presentation during the first period) is analyzed and it is determined whether the operation presentation overlaps; here, the presentation content of the special chart change presentation is analyzed by reading the presentation information stored in the presentation information storage area 223ak.

If this analysis determines that the operation effects overlap, i.e., the current time is within the period in which the special chart operation effect is being executed, or if it is determined that executing the pending operation effect would result in the special chart operation effect being executed during the pending operation effect, the pending operation effect is not executed within the first period of the special chart change period, and a standby effect is executed (see FIG. 486 (a)).

Then, at the timing for setting the performance mode for the second period of the special chart change period (the period from 30 seconds to 60 seconds of the special chart change period) (the timing when 28 seconds have passed since the start of the special chart change), the performance mode for the second period is set based on the performance results of various performances during the first period (for example, the performance results for the operation performance), the performance information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak, and the standby status of the pending operation performance. Although detailed explanations are omitted, a priority is set for the information referenced when setting the performance mode for the second period, and for information that overlaps when setting the performance mode, the performance mode is set based on information with a high priority. Specifically, if the lottery result of the special chart change being executed is a jackpot, the various information for indicating the lottery result of the change is set to a higher priority than the standby information of the pending operation performance, and if the lottery result of the special chart change being executed is a miss, the standby information of the pending operation performance is set to a higher priority than the lottery result of the special chart change being executed. By configuring it in this way, the presentation displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be tailored to suit the player's interests.

Next, referring to FIG. 488, a method of setting the effect when a new special winning occurs during the second period of the special winning period will be described. As shown in FIG. 488, if the winning information command is received and it is determined that the pending operation effect is to be executed during the second period of the special winning period, it is determined whether or not the pending operation effect can be executed at that point in time, and if it is determined that it can be executed, the pending operation effect is executed as is, and if it is determined that it cannot be executed (is difficult), a pending effect is executed in which the pending operation effect is not executed as the current pending effect.

As explained above, in this control example, at the start timing of the special pattern variable performance (special pattern variable performance), the length of the first period and the length of the second period are set based on the variable time information included in the received variable pattern command, and the performance mode is set according to the length of the set periods, but without being limited to this, it is also possible to set the performance mode to be executed in the first half period, set the execution period of the set performance mode as the first period, and set the remaining period as the second period. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the performance mode of the variable performance to be executed in the first half period without worrying about the performance period, so that the types of performances executed can be easily increased.

In addition, in this control example, the hold operation presentation that was put into a standby state during the first period is configured to be executable during the second period, but the presentation mode (presentation content, presentation period) of the hold operation presentation executed from the first period may be configured to be different from the presentation mode of the hold operation presentation executed after the second period (after standby). For example, the presentation period of the hold operation presentation executed during the first period may be configured to be shorter than the presentation mode of the hold operation presentation executed during the second period.

By configuring it in this way, if a standby effect is executed and then a hold operation effect is executed, the hold operation effect will be executed over a longer period of time, making it easier to enhance the effect of the hold operation effect. Therefore, when a standby effect is executed, the player can play the game while anticipating the hold operation effect being executed.

Furthermore, if a new reserved special chart is acquired during the standby period when the reserved operation performance is on standby, it is preferable to configure the system to execute a reserved operation performance that also reflects the pre-reading results corresponding to the newly acquired reserved special chart. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play even while the standby performance is being executed. Also, in the reserved operation performance executed after the standby performance, it is possible to execute a performance that can change the display mode of multiple reserved special charts, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Next, the method of state transition of the present pachinko machine 10, which is realized by controlling based on various tables defined in ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in RAM 203, will be described with reference to FIG. 489. FIG. 489 is a transition diagram showing the flow of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the present second control example. As shown in FIG. 489, the present second control example is significantly different from the pachinko machine 10 in the above-mentioned first control example in that a potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set as the game state of the pachinko machine 10, that in the case of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, a normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) can be set after the end of the jackpot game, and that a state transition is provided to end the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) based on winning a small jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

In other words, in the first control example described above, only the normal state could be set as the game state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, so if a jackpot game is not executed after the time-saving state ends, the player could easily determine that the currently set game state is the normal state. However, in this second control example, the normal state and the potential state can be set as the game state in which the low probability state of the normal pattern is set, so it is difficult for the player to easily determine the set game state if a jackpot game is not executed after the time-saving state ends.

In addition, among the game states in which a low probability state for normal symbols is set, the potential state is set to a high probability state for special symbols, and the normal state is set to a low probability state for special symbols, so the potential state is a game state in which it is easier to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery than the normal state, i.e., a game state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, even after the time-saving state has ended, it is possible to have the player play while hoping that the currently set game state is the potential state, making it difficult for the player to stop playing when the time-saving state has ended.

Now, referring to FIG. 489, the flow of game state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in this second control example will be specifically explained. Note that detailed explanations of the same flow as the first control example described above will be omitted. First, when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set, the normal symbols are in a low probability state, and it is a game state in which it is difficult to make the ball enter the second winning hole 640 that triggers the second special symbol (special symbol 2), so as in the first control example described above, special symbol 1 game (left-handed play) is executed to make the ball enter the first winning hole 64 that triggers the first special symbol (special symbol 1).

If a jackpot is won by the special chart 1 lottery (jackpot probability 1/250), a different game state is set after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot won. Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is "jackpot A, B" (50% of all jackpots), a special state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends; if it is "jackpot C" (30% of all jackpots), a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after the jackpot game ends; if it is "jackpot F" (20% of all jackpots), the normal state is set again after the jackpot game ends.

Next, when the time-saving state is set, the normal pattern is in a high probability state, and the game state is such that it is easy to get the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, which is the trigger for starting the special pattern 2. Therefore, as in the first control example described above, a special pattern 2 game (right-hand play) is executed in which the ball is made to enter the second winning hole 640, which is the trigger for starting the special pattern 2.

If a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery (jackpot probability 1/250), a different game state is set after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot won. Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is "jackpot D" (80% of all jackpots), a special probability state is set after the jackpot play ends, and if it is "jackpot E, G" (20% of all jackpots), the time-saving state is set again after the jackpot play ends. In other words, if a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery during a special probability state, the high probability state of a normal pattern is always set after the jackpot play ends.

In addition, in this control example, as in the first control example described above, a lottery is executed to determine whether or not to fall into a low probability state of a special pattern (so-called fall lottery) each time the lottery conditions for a special pattern are satisfied. Furthermore, there are multiple conditions for transitioning the time-saving state (high probability state of a normal pattern) to a low probability state of a normal pattern, and in addition to the first time-saving end condition that is satisfied when the number of times the special pattern changes after the time-saving state is set reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times), which was also set in the first control example, a second time-saving end condition is set that is satisfied when the number of times a specific lottery result other than the big prize win (for example, winning a small prize A) is won as a result of the special pattern lottery during the time-saving state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2 times), and when any of the time-saving end conditions is satisfied, the time-saving state (high probability state of a normal pattern) is transitioned to a low probability state of a normal pattern.

In this way, in this control example, if a probability variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols) is set after a jackpot game ends, during the probability variable state, a game aiming for a jackpot by a special symbol lottery is executed, while a game for transitioning the high probability state of the special symbol to a low probability state (falling lottery) and a game for transitioning the high probability state of the normal symbol to a low probability state (special symbol lottery) are executed in parallel. In addition, since there is no correlation between the timing for transitioning the probability state of the special symbol based on the falling lottery and the timing for transitioning the probability state of the normal symbol based on the special symbol lottery, which timing will arrive first is determined based on a predetermined lottery result, complex transitions in game states can be set for the player.

Returning to FIG. 489, the explanation will be continued. When a small win (1/100) is won in the high probability state, if the small win type is other than a specific small win type (small win B) (50% of all small wins) or if it is the first specific small win type (small win A), the game state is not changed, and if it is the second specific small win type (small win A), the high probability state of the normal pattern is changed to a low probability state. Furthermore, a drop lottery is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above, and if the drop lottery is won (drop probability 1/500) in the drop lottery when the number of special drawing times since the high probability state is set is less than 100, the time is shortened, and if the drop lottery is won (drop probability 1/500) in the drop lottery when the number of special drawing times since the high probability state is set is 100 or more, the game state is changed to the normal state.

In this control example, if there is no fall-out win during the high probability state and the time-saving end condition is not met, the high probability state continues until a jackpot is won in the special pattern lottery. However, without being limited to this, a configuration may be provided in which the high probability state of the special pattern is transitioned to a low probability state when the number of special pattern changes (number of special pattern lotteries) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150 times). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a game state (high probability state) that is advantageous to the player to be set for a long period of time, and it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous game state. Also, in this case, if a high probability state of the normal pattern is set at the timing when the high probability state of the special pattern is transitioned to a low probability state, the high probability state of the normal pattern may also be transitioned to a low probability state.

Finally, when the potential state is set, the normal symbol is in a low probability state, and the game state is such that it is difficult to get the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, which is the trigger for starting special symbol 2. Therefore, just like in the normal state, special symbol 1 game (left-handed play) is executed in which the ball is made to enter the first winning hole 64, which is the trigger for starting special symbol 1.

If a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery (jackpot probability 1/125), a different game state will be set after the jackpot ends depending on the type of jackpot won. Specifically, if the type of jackpot won is "jackpot A or B" (50% of all jackpots), a special state will be set after the jackpot game ends, and if it is "jackpot C or F" (50% of all jackpots), a time-saving state will be set after the jackpot game ends.

In other words, if a jackpot is won during a potential jackpot state, it is easier to set a game state favorable to the player after the jackpot game ends than if the jackpot is won during a normal state. By configuring it in this way, the potential jackpot state can be made a more favorable game state for the player than the normal state, so that even after the time-saving state ends, the player can continue playing while hoping that the currently set game state is the potential jackpot state, making it difficult for the player to stop playing when the time-saving state ends. Also, since a low probability state for normal symbols is set during the potential jackpot state, if a drop lottery is won and the high probability state for special symbols is transitioned to a low probability state, the state will transition to the normal state regardless of the number of special symbol draws.

As described above, in this second control example, a high probability state for normal symbols (probability bonus state or time-saving state) is set after the end of a jackpot game, and if the high probability state for normal symbols ends before the special symbol fluctuation reaches 100 times (before the first time-saving termination condition is met), a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, or the time-saving termination condition (second time-saving termination condition) is set based on a small jackpot win. Therefore, if the high probability state for normal symbols ends before the first time-saving termination condition is met, the player can play while hoping to win a jackpot in the special symbol lottery.

Furthermore, in this control example, as in the first control described above, even if the player wins the drop lottery during the period until the special pattern variation reaches 100 times, the player is not notified of the drop win. And, when the high probability state of the normal pattern ends during the period until the special pattern variation reaches 100 times, the same back mode (lost mode) is set regardless of the game state (normal state or potential state). By configuring in this way, when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set after the big win, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current state is a probability state (high probability state of the special pattern, high probability state of the normal pattern) or a time-saving state (low probability state of the special pattern, high probability state of the normal pattern), and even after the high probability state of the normal pattern ends, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current state is a potential state (high probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern) or a normal state (low probability state of the special pattern, low probability state of the normal pattern).

This makes it possible to prevent a player from easily determining that the currently set game state is unfavorable to the player (e.g., the normal state), and thus preventing the player from stopping play early.

<Electrical configuration in second control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 490 to Fig. 498. This control example differs from the electrical configuration of the above-mentioned first control example in that new elements have been added to the configuration of various counters possessed by the main control device 110, the configuration of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the configuration of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The same elements as those in the first control example are given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 490, the configuration of various counters in this second control example will be described. FIG. 490 is a schematic diagram showing the counter configuration in this second control example. In contrast to the first control example described above, this second control example is configured to allow a small prize to be won in the lottery of a special pattern, and is configured to determine whether or not a small prize has been won using the small prize random number 2 table 202ab (see FIG. 493 (a)) based on the value of the special prize random number counter C1 obtained when a small prize is won in the special prize lottery, and is configured to allow the small prize type to be selected using the small prize type selection 2 table 202ac based on the value of the small prize type counter C6 obtained in order to select the small prize type of the small prize that has been won. The details of the small prize types selectable in this control example will be described later.

The second control example configured in this way differs in that the above-mentioned small win type counter C6 is added to the various counters possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, that a small win type counter buffer for temporarily storing the acquired value of the small win type counter C6 is provided in the counter buffer, and that a small win type counter storage area is provided in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Also, although not shown in FIG. 490, the special pattern reserved ball execution area is also provided with storage areas for the counters provided in the special pattern 1 reserved ball number storage area 203a and the special pattern 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and is also provided with a small win type counter storage area, which differs from the first control example.

Although the details will be described later, in this second control example, the drawing of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 drawing) is made such that the small prize cannot be won, and the small prize can only be won in the drawing of the second special symbol (special symbol 2 drawing). In this way, by providing a small prize type storage area for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to the special symbol (special symbol 1) that cannot win a small prize, the configuration of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b can be unified. In addition, the contents of the process (information acquisition process) executed when the acquisition condition for acquiring the values of various counters is established can be unified. In other words, by deliberately providing a process for acquiring the value of the small prize type counter C6, which is unnecessary because a small prize cannot be won in the special drawing 1 lottery, and a configuration for storing the acquired small prize type counter C6 value, it is possible to execute the same process when the acquisition condition for special drawing 1 is met (when the ball enters the first winning slot 64) and when the acquisition condition for special drawing 2 is met (when the ball enters the second winning slot 640), thereby reducing the processing load on the main control device 110.

Furthermore, when changing the game characteristics so that the small prize can also be won in the special drawing 1, the change process can be easily executed, making it possible to easily diversify the game characteristics. Note that, as in this control example, instead of using a configuration that simplifies the entire process by providing unnecessary processing, it is also possible to configure the value of the small prize type counter C6 not to be acquired when the acquisition condition for special drawing 1 is met. This prevents the acquisition of information that is not actually used in the game (the value of the small prize type counter C6), and reliably prevents the game content from being analyzed based on unnecessarily acquired information.

As described above, in this second control example, the special win random number counter C1 is used for the small win lottery that determines whether or not a small win has been won during the special pattern lottery (special pattern lottery), and the small win type counter C6 is used when selecting the small win type. The initial value random number counter CINI1 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 used to select the fluctuation pattern of the special pattern are used to set the initial value of the small win type counter C6. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at 2 millisecond intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main process (see FIG. 434), and the updated values are appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a corresponding to winning in the first winning port 64 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4), and a second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning in the second winning port 640 consisting of four reserved areas (reservation areas 1 to 4). The first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the special winning random number counter C1, the special winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1, the fall lottery counter C4, and the small winning type counter C6 in accordance with the timing of winning in the first winning port 64 (in accordance with the establishment of the acquisition condition).

When the start condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is met, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area, and the special symbol variation based on the various stored values is started. In addition, the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a stores the values of the special win random number counter C1, special win type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, variation type counter CS1, fall lottery counter C4, and small win type counter C6 in accordance with the timing of winning at the second winning port 640 (in accordance with the establishment of the acquisition condition).

When the start condition (change condition) for the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is met, the various values stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a are shifted to the first special symbol execution area, and the special symbol change based on the various stored values begins.

In this control example, the value of the special random number counter C1 is used when drawing lots to see if a small prize has been won. In other words, to prevent a player from winning both a large prize and a small prize in a single special drawing, the special drawing is first used to determine if a player has won a large prize, and if it is determined that a player has not won a small prize, it is then used to determine if a player has won a small prize. This allows a common counter (special random number counter C1) to be used to determine if a player has won a large prize or a small prize. Without being limited to this, a dedicated counter (for example, a small prize random number counter) may be provided to determine if a player has won a small prize.

In addition, in this control example, when the acquisition condition is met based on the ball winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 (for example, when a new winning occurs when there is free space in the memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b), the values of the above-mentioned main counters are acquired and the acquired values are stored in the corresponding reserved ball storage areas. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, when a new winning occurs when there is free space in the memory area of the first special pattern reserved ball storage area 203a or the second special pattern reserved ball storage area 203b, only the right to acquire the values of the various counters may be stored in the corresponding reserved ball storage areas, and the values of the various counters may be acquired based on the special pattern change condition being met, or only a specific counter value may be acquired based on the ball winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640, and the remaining counter values may be acquired when the change condition is met.

As described above, in this control example, compared to the first control example described above, it is configured to be possible to win a small prize in the lottery for a special pattern (special pattern lottery), and various controls are configured to be executed based on the value of the acquired small prize type counter C6. Although not shown, the acquired value of the small prize type counter C is configured to be used for various processes like other counters, and in the processes of S406 and S413 in the start winning process (see FIG. 428), the value of the acquired small prize type counter C6 is stored in the corresponding reserved ball storage area like other counters. In addition, in the processes of S503 and S505 in the look-ahead process (see FIG. 429), the result of the small prize lottery corresponding to a new prize is obtained, and as the winning information command set in the process of S504, a winning information command including information indicating whether or not a small prize has been won and the type of small prize to be set is set.

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, if a small prize is won in the special prize lottery, the special prize variation to show the result of the special prize lottery will stop displaying (confirmed display), and then a flag indicating a small prize win (small prize start flag) will be set to ON, and a process for executing a small prize game based on the small prize win will be executed by the small prize control process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 434).

When this small win control process is executed, first, it is determined whether the flag indicating a small win (small win start flag) is set to ON. If it is determined that it is set to ON, a process is executed in which an opening operation for executing a small win game according to the set small win type is set, the small win mid-game flag is set to ON, and the small win start flag is set to OFF. In this control example, when a small win game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is configured to perform an opening operation, and specifically, the opening operation of the small win game is set so that the opening period of the small win game is the opening period (closing period of the variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)), the round game period (opening period of the variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)), and the ending period (closing period of the variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)).

In addition, in this control example, the above-mentioned opening operation is set regardless of which of the multiple small win types is set. This makes it possible to prevent the player from easily identifying the small win type set for the small win that has been won this time based on the game content of the small win game (the opening operation content of the variable winning device 65).

The game contents of the small win game are not limited to this, and different game contents may be set depending on the small win type, for example, the game contents of the small win game executed for the small win type in which the time-saving end condition can be established may be different from the game contents of the small win game executed for the other small win types. Also, as described above, in this control example, the period during which the variable winning device 65, which is opened during the small win game, is in an open state is shorter than in the big win game, and a winning game in which it is more difficult to get the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65 than in the big win game is executed. Note that the specific contents of the small win game in this control example are the same as the big win game described above in the first control example, except that the period during which the variable winning device 65 is in an open state and the period during which it is in a closed state are different.

Therefore, the various processing contents executed during small win play are the same as the processing related to the big win control in the first control example described above (see Figures 434 to 436), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Figure 491 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in this second control example. As shown in Figure 491 (a), this second control example differs from the first control example described above in that a big win type selection 2 table 202aa is provided instead of the big win type selection table 202c (see Figure 408), and that a small win random number 2 table 202ab, which is referred to when determining whether or not a small win has been won, a small win type selection table 202ac, which is referred to when selecting a small win type to be set when a small win has been won, and a time-saving end condition selection table 202ad, in which time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) are specified, have been added. All other elements are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is used to select the jackpot type to be set when a jackpot is won, and differs from the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 408(a)) of the first control example in that a defined jackpot type has been added. Specifically, it differs in that it is configured so that "jackpot F" can be selected as the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery, and "jackpot G" can be selected as the jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery. It also differs in that it is configured so that the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends is set based on the jackpot type that has been set and the game state at the time of the jackpot win.

Now, referring to FIG. 492, the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa will be explained. FIG. 492(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 492(a), the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa has a special chart 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery, and a special chart 2 jackpot 2 table 202aa2 that is referenced when a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery.

Next, the contents of the special chart 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 will be explained with reference to FIG. 492(b). FIG. 492(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special chart 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1. This special chart 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 is a data table used when a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery, similar to the special chart 1 jackpot table 202d1 described above. As shown in FIG. 492(b), in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special chart 1 lottery, four types of jackpot types, "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot F", can be set. The contents of the jackpot game (number of rounds) are specified in accordance with the set jackpot type. Furthermore, the game state set after the jackpot game is completed is specified for each jackpot type in accordance with the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, when the value of the acquired special win type counter C is in the range of "0 to 9", "jackpot A" is set, when it is in the range of "10 to 49", "jackpot B" is set, when it is in the range of "50 to 79", "jackpot C" is set, and when it is in the range of "80 to 99", "jackpot F" is set. When "jackpot A" is set as the jackpot type, "15 rounds (R) of round play" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, a "probable bonus state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

When "Jackpot B" is set as the jackpot type, "5 rounds (R) of round play" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, a "high probability state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

When "Jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, "5 rounds (R) of round play" is executed as the jackpot game. If the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal state, the "time-saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends, and if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is other than the normal state (latent state, probability change state, time-saving state), the "time-saving state" is set after the jackpot game ends.

Finally, when "Jackpot F" is set as the jackpot type, "5 rounds (R) of round play" is executed as the jackpot play. If the play state at the time of the jackpot win is the normal state, the "normal state" is set after the jackpot play ends, and if the play state at the time of the jackpot win is other than the normal state (latent state, probability change state, time-saving state), the "time-saving state" is set after the jackpot play ends.

In this control example, the game in which the special pattern 1 lottery is executed (left-hand play) is configured to be executed in the normal state and the potential state, and the presentation mode of the presentation (background mode presentation) executed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is configured to be set to the same presentation mode (lost mode) when the normal state is set and when the potential state is set.

As described above, the configuration is such that it is more difficult to set a game state (normal state) that is disadvantageous to the player when the player wins a jackpot in the special chart 1 lottery during the potential state than when the player wins a jackpot in the special chart 1 lottery during the normal state. By configuring in this way, the potential state can be made a more advantageous game state for the player than the normal state, so that the player can play while hoping that the potential state is set during the period when the lost child mode is being executed in the background mode presentation. In addition, as described above, the configuration is such that the probability of winning a jackpot in the special chart lottery is higher in the potential state, which is a high probability state for the special pattern, than in the normal state, which is a low probability state for the special pattern, so that the potential state can be made a more advantageous game state for the player than the normal state.

In addition, as a pattern in which the Special Chart 1 lottery is executed during a game (right-hand play) in which the Special Chart 2 lottery is executed in a probability variable state or a time-saving state, for example, there is a pattern in which the Special Chart 1 lottery based on the Special Chart 1 reserve that has already been acquired at the time of winning the jackpot is executed in a probability variable state set after the jackpot game ends, or during a time-saving state. In this control example, if a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery in such a pattern, the game state is configured to be set to the same content as when a jackpot is won in the Special Chart 1 lottery during a potential probability state.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player wins a jackpot in a special chart 1 lottery based on a special chart 1 reservation immediately after a game state (high probability state, time-saving state) that allows the player to play right-hand play is set, and then a game state (normal state) that allows the player to play left-hand play is set after the jackpot play ends. Therefore, even if a right-hand play that is advantageous to the player has been set, a left-hand play is set without executing a special chart 2 lottery by right-hand play, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's motivation to play is reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 492(c), the contents of the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa will be explained. FIG. 492(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the special chart 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2. This special chart 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 is a data table that is referenced when selecting a jackpot type when a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery.

As shown in FIG. 492(c), in this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery, three types of jackpot types can be set: "jackpot D," "jackpot E," and "jackpot G." The content of the jackpot game (number of rounds) is specified in accordance with the set jackpot type. Furthermore, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends is specified for each jackpot type in accordance with the game state at the time of winning the jackpot.

Specifically, when the acquired value of the special win type counter C is in the range of "0 to 79", "jackpot D" is defined, when it is in the range of "80 to 89", "jackpot E" is defined, and when it is in the range of "90 to 99", "jackpot G" is defined. In this control example, when a jackpot is won in the special chart 2 lottery, regardless of the jackpot type that is set, "15 rounds (R) of round play" is executed as the jackpot game. Then, depending on the jackpot type that is set, the game state that is set after the jackpot game ends is configured to differ.

Specifically, if "Jackpot D" is set, the "high probability state" is set after the jackpot play ends, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won, and if "Jackpot E" is set, the "time-saving state" is set after the jackpot play ends, regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. And if "Jackpot G" is set, if the game state when the jackpot is won is the "high probability state", the "normal state" is set after the jackpot play ends, and if a state other than the high probability state (normal state, potential state, time-saving state) is set, the "time-saving state" is set after the jackpot play ends.

The small prize random number 2 table 202ab is a data table for determining whether a small prize has been won in the special prize lottery, and is referenced when the big prize has not been won in the special prize lottery (when a miss has been won). This small prize random number 2 table 202ab is referenced when determining whether the lottery result is a small prize in the miss time change process (see S351 in FIG. 500) executed in the special pattern change start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499).

Here, the contents of the small prize random number 2 table 202ab will be explained with reference to FIG. 493(a). FIG. 493(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the small prize random number 2 table 202ab. As shown in FIG. 493(a), the small prize random number 2 table 202ab defines the value of the special prize random number counter C1 that will result in a small prize win for each pattern type (special pattern type), and when a lottery for each special pattern type is held, the obtained value of the special prize random number counter C1 is compared with the determination value defined in the small prize random number 2 table 202ab to determine whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a small prize or not.

Specifically, the value of the special win random number counter C1 that results in a small win is not specified for the symbol type "Special Chart 1", and "0 to 4" is specified as the value of the special win random number counter C1 that results in a small win for the symbol type "Special Chart 2". In other words, in this control example, the small win is only won in the Special Chart 2 lottery, and the probability of winning the small win in the Special Chart 2 lottery is specified to be 1/100. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the lottery results different between the Special Chart 1 lottery and the Special Chart 2 lottery, which makes the game more diverse and increases the interest of the game.

Moreover, although details will be described later, in this control example, if a specific small prize (small prize A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice) during the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns), the time-saving end condition (second time-saving end condition) is met and the time-saving state ends. As described above, in this control example, since a small prize cannot be won by the special drawing 1, the special drawing 1 based on the reserved special drawing 1 is executed immediately after the time-saving state is set, and the second time-saving end condition is not met based on the special drawing 1.

Therefore, when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 performed in the normal state and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, that is, when the time-saving state is set without the special drawing 2 reserved, the time-saving state can be prevented from ending due to the special drawing 1 performed. In addition, as with the first control example described above, this control example is configured so that the time-saving state ends at the start timing of the special drawing change. For example, if the time-saving end condition is met based on the special drawing performed immediately after the time-saving state is set (the first special drawing after the time-saving state is set), there is a problem that the time-saving state ends without playing during the time-saving state (time-saving game), that is, without playing the game of opening the electric device 640a to enter the second winning hole 640.

In contrast, in this control example, the second time-saving end condition is not satisfied by the special drawing of the special drawing 1, so that if a jackpot is won in the special drawing of the special drawing 1 executed in the normal state and the time-saving state is set after the jackpot play ends, that is, if the time-saving state is set without the special drawing of the special drawing 2 reserved, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending without playing the time-saving play. Also, in this control example, the number of times that a small jackpot is won that satisfies the second time-saving end condition is set to "2 times," so that the time-saving state is not ended by a single special drawing during the time-saving state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the time-saving state from ending without playing the time-saving play, even though the time-saving state has been set.

Here, if a small prize is won in the special drawing (special drawing 2), a different winning game is executed than when a big prize is won. Specifically, a winning game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.2 seconds), that is, a winning game that can grant the player fewer benefits than the big prize game is executed.

In this control example, the system is configured to execute a winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened so that the same winning hole (specific winning hole 65a) changes from a first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for the ball to win to a second state (open state) in which it is easy for the ball to win when a small prize is won and when a big prize is won, but the invention is not limited to this and different variable winning devices may be opened for big prize games and small prize games.

In this case, the bonus (the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters) awarded when a ball enters a winning port of the variable winning device that opens during a small win game may be configured to be less than when a ball enters a winning port of the variable winning device that opens during a big win game, or the winning port of the variable winning device that opens during a small win game may be configured to be more difficult to win a ball through than a winning port of the variable winning device that opens during a big win game.

In this control example, a data table (special pattern jackpot random number table 202a) for determining whether a jackpot has been won and a data table (small jackpot random number 2 table 203ab) for determining whether a small jackpot has been won are used separately in the special pattern lottery, but this is not limited to this, and a single data table may be used to determine whether the current special pattern lottery has been won as a jackpot or a small jackpot. In this case, for example, the value of the special jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to a small jackpot win can be specified in the jackpot random number table 202a without overlapping with the value of the special jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to a jackpot win. By configuring in this way, the number of data tables possessed by the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

The small prize type selection 2 table 202ac is a data table referenced when selecting the small prize type that is set when a small prize is won, and is referenced when a small prize is won in the special prize lottery. The small prize type selection 2 table 202ac in this control example is configured to allow selection of small prize A and small prize B as the small prize type, and is referenced to determine the small prize type (see S371 in FIG. 500) when it is determined that the result of this special prize lottery is a small prize (see S371 in FIG. 500) in the miss fluctuation process (see S351 in FIG. 500) executed in the special prize pattern fluctuation start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499).

Here, the contents of the small win type selection 2 table 202ac will be explained with reference to FIG. 493(b). FIG. 493(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents stipulated in the small win type selection 2 table 202ac. In this small win type selection 2 table 202ac, different small win types are stipulated in accordance with the value of the acquired small win type counter C6. Specifically, "small win A" is stipulated in the range of "0 to 64" of the acquired small win type counter C6, and "small win B" is stipulated in the range of "65 to 99". A detailed explanation will be given later, but in this control example, when a predetermined small win (for example, small win A) is won a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a state (time-saving state, probability change state) in which a time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) is set, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal pattern) is configured to end. In other words, the condition (time-saving end condition) for transitioning from the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) to a low probability state of normal symbols is set to be a time-saving end condition based on winning a small prize (second time-saving end condition).

Here, when the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set and the time-saving end condition is met, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. As with the first control example described above, this control example is configured so that the time-saving state is a more advantageous game state for the player than the normal state, so the player will play in the hope that the time-saving state will be set for as long as possible.

In contrast, as described above, in this control example, the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to understand when the time-saving state will end. This allows the player playing during the time-saving state to play with a sense of tension.

In addition, this control example is configured to set a time-saving end condition that is the same as the first control example described above, which is established when the number of times (number of variations) a special symbol is drawn while a high probability state for normal symbols is set reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 100 times). This makes it possible to set an upper limit on the period during which a game state that is advantageous to the player is set (period during which the time-saving state is set), thereby preventing excessive bonuses from being given to players.

Similarly, when the probability state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set and the time-saving end condition is met, the potential state (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set. In this case, too, the probability state is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the potential state. In addition, as with the first control example described above, this control example is configured to execute a special mode presentation during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (the period until the number of special symbol changes reaches 100), when a high probability state of normal symbols is set after the end of the jackpot game, and when a normal state or potential state is set during that mode presentation, the same mode (lost mode) is set, and a mode presentation corresponding to the lost mode is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

By configuring it in this way, it is difficult for the player to know whether the current state is the normal state or the potential state while the mode presentation is being performed. Here, the differences between the normal state and the potential state will be explained. In both the normal state and the potential state, a low probability state for normal symbols is set, and the electric role 640a opens based on a normal symbol hit, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, resulting in a game state in which a left-handed play (special symbol 1 game) is executed to make the ball enter the first winning hole 64. However, while the normal state is a low probability state for special symbols, the potential state is a high probability state for special symbols, so the probability of winning a jackpot in the special symbol lottery (special symbol lottery) is higher in the potential state (jackpot winning probability 1/125) than in the normal state (jackpot winning probability 1/250).

Furthermore, in the case where a jackpot is won, the game state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot is configured to be different between when the jackpot is won during the normal state and when the jackpot is won during the potential state, so that a game state that is more advantageous to the player is more easily set when the jackpot is won during the potential state than when the jackpot is won during the normal state. Specifically, the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game when a jackpot is won during the normal state is configured to be 50% probability state, 30% time-saving state, and 20% normal state, whereas the game state that is set after the end of the jackpot game when a jackpot is won during the potential state is configured to be 50% probability state and 50% time-saving state. Thus, the potential state is a more advantageous game state to the player than the normal state.

As explained above, in this control example, when the normal state is set during the mode presentation executed during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (the period until the number of special chart changes reaches 100), and when the potential state is set, the same mode (lost mode) is set and the mode presentation is executed in the same presentation manner. By configuring in this way, while the mode presentation corresponding to the lost mode (normal state, or a mode for indicating a potential state) is being executed, it is possible to prevent the player from easily identifying whether the current state is normal or the potential state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from immediately stopping play when the time-saving state or the potential state ends.

Furthermore, in this control example, at the timing when the mode presentation ends (the timing when the number of special chart changes executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 100), a notification presentation can be executed that allows the player to distinguish whether the current game state is normal or potential. This makes it possible to prevent a situation where a presentation that makes it difficult to tell whether the current state is normal or potential, is executed for a long period of time, leading the player to play a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a game that makes the player think that the potential state is set even though the normal state is set).

The time-saving end condition selection table 202ad is a data table for setting the conditions (time-saving end conditions) for ending the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) that is set after the end of a jackpot game, and is referenced at the timing for setting the time-saving state (end timing of the jackpot game).

Here, the contents of the time-saving end condition selection table 202ad will be explained with reference to FIG. 493(c). FIG. 493(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents defined in the time-saving end condition selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 493(c), the time-saving end condition selection table 202ad is defined so that different time-saving end conditions are set according to the set jackpot type. Specifically, after the end of a jackpot game in which "jackpot A, E, F, G" is set as the jackpot type, a time-saving end condition is set in which the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to "100" and no value is set in the small jackpot counter 203aa.

The details will be described later, but the time-saving counter 203j is a counter whose value is subtracted by 1 each time a special pattern variation is executed during the time-saving state, and when the counter value becomes "0", it is determined that the condition for terminating the time-saving state (first time-saving termination condition) is met. The small win counter 203aa is a counter whose value is subtracted by 1 each time a specific small win (small win A) is won during the time-saving state (each time a special pattern variation resulting from a specific small win is executed), and when the counter value becomes "0", it is determined that the condition for terminating the time-saving state (second time-saving termination condition) is met.

In other words, after the end of a jackpot game in which "jackpot A, E, F, G" is set, a time-saving state is set in which the second time-saving end condition (the time-saving end condition that is established based on the winning of a small jackpot) is not set.

On the other hand, after the end of a jackpot game in which "jackpot B, C, D" is set as the jackpot type, a time-saving end condition is set in which the value of the time-saving counter 203j is set to "100" and the value of the small jackpot counter 203aa is set to "2". In other words, after the end of a jackpot game in which "jackpot B, C, D" is set, a time-saving state is set in which a time-saving end condition that is established when the small jackpot A is won twice is set as the second time-saving end condition (a time-saving end condition that is established based on the winning of a small jackpot).

As described above, this control example is configured so that a game state in which the time-saving state (high probability state of normal symbols) is set is more advantageous to the player than a game state in which the low probability state of normal symbols is set. Therefore, by providing a time-saving state in which the second time-saving end condition is set and a time-saving state in which the second time-saving end condition is not set, it is possible to set a time-saving state in which the game state advantageous to the player is more likely to continue and a time-saving state in which it is less likely to continue.

In this control example, regardless of which jackpot type the time-saving state is set based on, the number of times the special pattern changes (number of times the special pattern changes) is set to "100 times" as the first time-saving end condition, but this is not limited to this, and different first time-saving end conditions may be set depending on the jackpot type, or a jackpot type may be provided that does not set the first time-saving end condition. Furthermore, while there are jackpot types that set the second time-saving end condition and jackpot types that do not set it, it is also possible to configure it so that different end conditions can be set as the second time-saving end condition depending on the jackpot type. Furthermore, in this control example, the time-saving state is ended when either the first time-saving end condition or the second time-saving end condition is established, but this is not limited to this, and the time-saving state may be ended when the first time-saving end condition and the second time-saving end condition are established.

In addition, in this control example, the time-saving state is configured to end at the start timing of the special pattern change regardless of which time-saving end condition is satisfied, but without being limited to this, the time-saving state may be ended at different timings depending on the type of time-saving end condition that is satisfied. For example, when the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving state may be ended at the timing when the satisfied special pattern change is stopped or the timing when the stopped display ends (the timing when the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed). When the second time-saving end condition is satisfied, the time-saving state may be ended at the timing when the special pattern change corresponding to the small win that satisfies the second time-saving end condition is stopped or the timing when the stopped display ends (the timing when the pattern confirmation display period has elapsed), or when the small win game based on the small win that satisfies the second time-saving end condition is executed or the timing when the small win game ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to predict the time-saving end condition that has been satisfied this time by grasping the timing at which the time-saving state ends.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 491(b). The RAM 203 of this second control example differs from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a small win mid-flag 203aa and a small win counter 203ab have been added, but otherwise is the same. Identical elements are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

The small win flag 203aa is a flag used to determine whether or not a small win game is currently being played, and is set to ON when a small win game is being played. Although detailed explanations of the specific processing contents are omitted, in this control example, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the special chart fluctuation processing (see S104 in FIG. 426) of the above-mentioned first control example (S213 in FIG. 426: Yes) and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216 in FIG. 426: No), a process is added to determine whether the current lottery result is a small win, and when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small win in the process, a control process for starting a small win game is executed, and a flag indicating that a small win game is playable (for example, a small win start flag) is set to ON. In the main processing of the main control device 110 in the first control example described above (see FIG. 434), it is configured to periodically (every 4 milliseconds) determine whether a flag indicating that a small win game can be played (for example, a small win start flag) is set to ON, and if it is determined that it is set to ON, a control process is executed to play a small win game according to a predetermined opening operation rule, and the small win in progress flag 203aa is set to ON. Then, when the small win game executed by the control process to play the small win game ends, the small win in progress flag 203aa is set to OFF.

In this control example, the variable winning device 65 is configured to open during the small win game, and the distribution device (V role) is configured to maintain an arrangement in which a ball that has won the variable winning device 65 can distribute the game ball to the second area (arrangement in which distribution to the first area is not possible), during this small win game, and even if a ball wins the variable winning device 65 during a small win game, it is configured not to pass through the first area (V area). This prevents the occurrence of a situation in which a special probability state (high probability state of a special pattern) is not granted even if the ball passes through the first area (V area) while the variable winning device 65 is in the opening operation.

In this control example, the winning device opened by the small win game and the winning device opened by the big win game are the same to reduce the number of devices arranged on the game board 13 and reduce costs, but this is not limited to this, and a winning device dedicated to small win games may be provided separately from the variable winning device 65. In this case, it is preferable to provide a winning device dedicated to small win games (winning device for small win) at a position away from the second winning port 640, which is the starting condition for the special drawing 2 that can win a small win. For example, if the pachinko machine 10 uses a configuration of the game board 13 that allows a ball to enter the second winning port 640 by right-handed play, it is preferable to configure the winning device for small win to be arranged in an area where a ball shot by left-handed play can flow down (an area where a ball shot by right-handed play has difficulty (impossible) flow down). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for a player playing right-handed play to notice that a small win game has been played. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for players to understand the trigger for the second time-saving end condition to be met. In addition, in this case, in some cases where the result of the special drawing 2 is a miss, it is preferable to configure the period during which the result of the special drawing is displayed in a static manner (determined display period) to be longer. This makes it possible to lengthen the period from when the result of the special drawing is displayed in a static manner to when the next special drawing is executed, making it difficult for players to understand whether a certain period is required until the next special drawing is executed because a small win game is being executed, or whether a certain period is required until the next special drawing is executed because a static display with a long determined display period is displayed.

The small win counter 203ab is a counter for measuring the number of times a small win is won in the special chart 2 lottery and the small win type is set as small win A. After the big win game ends, the value that becomes the second time-saving end condition is set by referring to the time-saving end condition selection table 202ad. Then, when a small win A is set during the time-saving state, the value is decremented by 1. Then, the value of the small win counter 203ab after the decrement is referred to when determining whether or not to end the time-saving state, and when the value after the decrement becomes 0, control is executed to end the time-saving state.

Next, referring to Figs. 494 to 498, the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. This control example differs from the first control example described above in that a configuration has been added to the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. First, referring to Fig. 494(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described. Fig. 494(a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this control example differs from the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in that a dialogue mode related table 222aa and an operation performance switching table 222ab have been added, and otherwise is the same. Note that in Figure 494(a), some of the elements that are the same as in the first control example are omitted, but since they have the same elements, detailed descriptions of them will be omitted.

The dialogue mode related table 222aa is a data table for setting the presentation mode of the dialogue presentation executed when the dialogue mode is set. Here, a brief explanation will be given of the dialogue mode set in this control example. The dialogue mode is one of the presentation modes set based on the variable pattern command output from the main control device 110, and when the dialogue mode is set, the "dialogue zone" described above in Figures 483 and 484 is displayed, and a presentation is executed in which dialogue corresponding to the stopped display mode of the third pattern is displayed (output from the audio output device 226).

Next, the detailed contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 495. First, with reference to FIG. 495(a), the display mode of each pattern that is variably displayed as the third pattern (fused third pattern) when the dialogue mode is set will be described. FIG. 495(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between each pattern. As shown in FIG. 495(a), the fused third pattern is formed in a display mode in which a number mode, which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern lottery, and a character mode indicating the character that utters the dialogue are fused, and a number mode is assigned to each character mode. The image data of this fused third pattern is stored in the character ROM of the display control device 114, and is used as image data indicating identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special pattern when a display command indicating that the dialogue mode is set is output from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114.

In this control example, different character forms are associated with the number forms 1 to 9, and the fusion third pattern is formed so that the character forms associated with the number forms "1 to 4" and "5 to 9" are broadly divided. Specifically, the fusion third pattern corresponding to the number forms "1 to 4" is set to a character form included in the land creature group, and the fusion third pattern corresponding to the number forms "5 to 9" is set to a character form included in the sea creature group.

Next, the contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 495(b). FIG. 495(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the dialogue mode related table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 495(b), the dialogue mode related table 222aa has a dialogue state setting table 222aa1 for setting the current dialogue progress level, a character selection table 222aa2 for selecting the character who will speak the dialogue, and a dialogue selection table 222aa3 for setting the actual dialogue content, and is configured to select the fusion third pattern to be displayed in a stopped state during the dialogue mode by referring to each table, and further to select the type of dialogue to be spoken by each fusion third pattern.

First, the contents of the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 495(c). FIG. 495(c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the dialogue state setting table 222aa1. This dialogue state setting table 222aa1 is a data table that is referenced when setting the current dialogue state based on the history information stored in the stopped pattern information storage area 223ac, which stores the history information of the fusion third pattern stopped and displayed when the dialogue mode is set, and as shown in FIG. 495(c), each dialogue state is defined based on the information stored in the stopped pattern information storage area 223ac. Based on the dialogue state selected here, the type of the fusion third pattern stopped and the dialogue content (dialogue style) to be displayed (output) during the dialogue mode are selected.

Next, the contents of the character selection table 222aa2 will be explained with reference to FIG. 496. FIG. 496 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the character selection table 222aa2. This character selection table 222aa2 is configured so that a different character (the left fusion third pattern that is stopped first) is selected based on the dialogue state set using the dialogue state setting table 222aa1, the result of the success/failure judgment of the target special pattern change, and the acquired value of the character selection counter 223ad.

Next, the contents of the dialogue selection table 222aa3 will be described with reference to FIG. 497. FIG. 497 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the dialogue selection table 222aa3. This dialogue selection table 222aa3 is a data table for selecting the type of right fusion third pattern, center fusion third pattern, and the dialogue content (dialogue style) of each fusion third pattern based on the dialogue state set using the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 and the character selected by the character selection table 222aa2.

The operation presentation switching table 222ab is a data table for switching the presentation mode of the variable operation presentation to be executed when the variable operation presentation is set based on the fluctuation pattern output from the main control device 110. In this control example, when the variable operation presentation is set, the lever member 10340 (hereinafter referred to as the lever member 10340) of the operation device 10300 is moved from the origin position to the actuation position (raised position), and then, as shown in FIG. 484(a), a variable operation presentation is executed to have the player operate (push down) the lever member 10340.

However, if the lever member 10340 is not pressed down after the performance period (effective operation period) of the variable operation performance has elapsed, the lever member 10340 remains in the operating position (raised position) even though the performance period (effective operation period) of the variable operation performance has elapsed. In this case, it is possible to return the lever member 10340 to the state before the variable operation performance was started by using a drive means (motor, etc.) for variably operating the lever member 10340 to move the lever member 10340 from the operating position (raised position) to the origin position and executing a return process to position the lever member 10340 to the initial state (origin position). However, if this configuration is used, even though the lever member 10340 is moved to the operating position for the purpose of enhancing the performance effect, the lever member 10340 returns to the initial position without the player being able to operate the lever member 10340 located in the operating position, so there is a problem that the performance effect cannot be enhanced.

In contrast to this, in this second control example, when the performance period of the variable operation performance has elapsed and the lever member 10340 is in the actuated position, the push-down operation performance in which a push-down operation is performed on the lever member 10340 is more easily executed than in the normal state (when the lever member 10340 is in the initial position). In other words, in order to execute one variable operation presentation, a presentation preparation process is executed to move the operating means (lever member 10340) from a first position (origin position) to a second position (actuated position), and after the presentation preparation process is completed, a variable operation presentation is executed for the player to move the operating means from the second position to the first position. If the player does not operate the operating means during the variable operation presentation and the operating means (lever member 10340) does not move to the first position (if it remains in the second position), the operating means is configured to maintain a state in which it is in the second position (actuated position) (a state in which the presentation preparation process is completed) even after the variable operation presentation has ended, and when the presentation preparation process is completed, it is configured to be easier to execute the above-mentioned push-down operation presentation.

By configuring it in this way, in order to execute one push-down operation effect, it is possible to execute multiple push-down operation effects on the operating means (lever member 10340) for which the effect preparation process has been executed, making it easier for the player to move the operating means to the initial position by operating it.

In addition, in this control example, when the operation means is in the second position (operation position) despite the pressing operation performance being executed a predetermined number of times (2 times) in the state where the performance preparation process is completed (the state where the operation means is in the operating position), the operation means is moved to the first position (origin position) using a drive means (motor, etc.) for variably operating the operation means (lever member 10340) (a return process is executed). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the situation where the pressing operation performance is executed persistently. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the frequency of execution of the performance that gives a feeling of dissatisfaction to a player who does not want to operate the operation means. In addition, in this case, a storage means capable of storing the execution of the return process may be provided, and when the return process is executed, that is, when the state where the operation means is in the second position (operation position) despite the pressing operation performance being executed a predetermined number of times (2 times) in the state where the performance preparation process is completed (the state where the operation means is in the operating position), it may be configured so that the variable operation performance is difficult to execute. This makes it possible to provide performance that corresponds to the player's preferences.

Now, referring to FIG. 498, the contents of the operation performance switching table 222ab will be explained. FIG. 498 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the operation performance switching table 222ab. This operation performance switching table 222ab is referenced when switching the performance mode of the variable operation performance to be executed depending on the setting status of the initial position change flag 223ag, the origin detection flag 223ae, and the actuation position detection flag 223af.

Specifically, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is off, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the actuation position detection flag 223af is off, a touch effect (see FIG. 485) is set as the effect mode of the variable operation effect, and when the actuation position detection flag 223af is on, a lever push-up effect (see FIG. 484(b)) is set. And when the initial position switching flag 223ag is off and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, a lever push-down effect (see FIG. 484(a)) is set regardless of the setting status of the actuation position detection flag 223af.

In addition, if the initial position switching flag 223ag is on, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the actuation position detection flag 223af is off, a touch effect is set, and if the actuation position detection flag 223af is on, a lever push-up effect is set. Finally, if the initial position switching flag 223ag is on and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, a lever push-down effect is set regardless of the setting status of the actuation position detection flag 223af.

Next, the configuration of RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to Fig. 494 (b). Fig. 494 (b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. As shown in FIG. 494 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example differs from the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in that it has added a special pattern change count counter 223aa, a performance mode memory area 223ab, a stopped pattern information memory area 223ac, a character selection counter 223ad, an origin detection flag 223ae, an activation position detection flag 223af, an initial position change flag 223ag, a return operation timer 223ah, an operation performance in progress flag 223ai, a performance standby flag 223aj, a performance information memory area 223ak, a variable operation valid period timer 223am, a second variation time timer 223an, a press performance prohibition flag 223ao, and a variable performance priority flag 223ap, but is otherwise identical. As shown in FIG. 494(b), for ease of explanation, some of the elements of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above have been omitted, but the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of this control example has all of the elements of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above, and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

The special pattern change count counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the number of changes of the special pattern (special pattern), and is for measuring the period until the number of special pattern changes executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 100 when a time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) is set after the end of the jackpot game. In this control example, when the second time-saving end condition is established, the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) may end before the number of special pattern changes executed after the end of the jackpot game reaches 100, so the name and configuration are different, but the specific content of the special pattern change count counter 223aa is the same as the time-saving guaranteed count counter 223g in the first control example described above.

The presentation mode memory area 223ab is a memory area for storing the presentation mode set by the background mode presentation, and temporarily stores the back mode set in the back mode lottery process 2 (see S4362 in FIG. 515).

The stopping pattern information storage area 223ac is a storage area for storing stopping pattern information (type of left pattern, set dialogue) when dialogue mode is set.

The character selection counter 223ad is a loop counter, a type of performance counter, and its value is referenced when setting a character by referring to the character selection table 2222aa2.

The origin detection flag 223ae and the actuation position detection flag 223af are flags for indicating the position of the lever member 10340. When an origin detection sensor (not shown) detects that the lever member 10340 is located in the initial position (origin position), the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and when an actuation position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the lever member 10340 is located in the actuation position, the actuation position detection flag 223af is set to ON.

When both the origin detection flag 223ae and the actuation position detection flag 223af are set to off, it is determined that the lever member 10340 is located between the initial position and the actuation position. When both the origin detection flag 223ae and the actuation position detection flag 223af are set to on, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred due to a possible malfunction of the detection means (origin detection sensor, actuation position detection sensor) for detecting the position of the lever member 10340 or a malfunction of the lever member 10340.

Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, if it is determined that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state, the operation presentation mode is set using an abnormality selection table in which variable operation presentation using the lever member 10340 is not selected, and an error command indicating that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state is output to the outside.

The initial position change flag 223ag is a flag for changing the initial position of the lever member 10340, and is set to off during a normal state in which the initial position of the lever member 10340 is the origin position, and is set to on when the actuation position of the lever member 10340 is the origin position. The presentation mode of the variable operation presentation is set according to the setting status of this initial position change flag 223ag.

This eliminates the need to repeatedly execute the return process that is executed after the execution period of the operation performance has elapsed. It also prevents the operation device 10300 from breaking down due to the return process being executed against the force that maintains the operating position.

The return operation timer 223ah is a timer for measuring the elapsed time during the return process for driving the lever member 10340 toward the initial position, and is set to a predetermined value (for example, a value indicating 5 seconds) when the return process is executed. The value of the return operation timer 223ah is subtracted by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the voice lamp control device 113, which is executed periodically, and the return process is executed until the value becomes 0. The value (time) set in this return operation timer 223af is set to be longer than the time required for one return process, and when the return process is executed once, the return process is executed multiple times for the lever member 10340.

The operation performance in progress flag 223ai is a flag for determining whether an operation performance is currently in progress, and is set to on when the operation performance is being executed, and is set to off when the operation performance has ended. This control example is configured so that the operation performance can be set (executed) at different triggers, specifically, the operation performance can be executed when setting a performance (variation performance) corresponding to a special chart change, and when setting a performance (hold performance) based on a ball winning the special chart start port (first winning port 64, second winning port 640).

The performance standby flag 223aj is a flag for indicating that the operation performance is in a standby state, and is set to ON when the operation performance is on standby for execution. This performance standby flag 223aj is set to ON when the timing at which it is determined that the operation performance can be executed as a pending performance is during the first period of the variable performance, and when the operation performance is being executed as a variable performance.

Then, at the timing to set the presentation mode for the second period of the variable presentation, the presentation mode is set based on the setting status of the flag.

The performance information storage area 223ak is a storage area for temporarily storing information about each performance. Various performance modes are set using the information stored in this performance information storage area 223ak.

The variable operation effective period timer 223am is a timer for measuring the variable operation effective period for validly determining the operation of the operating means (lever member 10340) executed by the player when a variable operation presentation is set as the operation presentation, and when a variable operation presentation is executed, a value corresponding to the executed variable operation presentation is set, and is subtracted by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the voice lamp control device 113, which is executed periodically. Then, the period until it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am has become 0 is set as the variable operation effective period.

The second variable time timer 223an is a timer for measuring the elapsed period of the variable performance executed in response to the special pattern variation, and is referenced when determining whether the timing for setting the performance mode of the second period of the variable performance has been reached. In the normal performance setting process (see S4351 in FIG. 513), a value calculated as the timing for setting the performance mode of the second period is set in this second variable time timer 223an (see S5215 in FIG. 513), and is subtracted by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the voice lamp control device 113, which is executed periodically. Then, if it is determined in the performance update process 2 (see S3151 in FIG. 503) that the value is 0 (S3255: Yes in FIG. 503), the second period setting process is executed to set the performance mode corresponding to the second period (see S3256 in FIG. 505).

The push effect prohibition flag 223ao is a flag for indicating the period during which a push effect that operates the PUSH button 10317 is prohibited from being selected as a change effect corresponding to a special chart change, and is set to ON during the period during which the selection of the push effect is prohibited.

In this control example, as described above with reference to Figures 207 to 211, one operating device 10300 has a PUSH button 10317 and a lever member 10340, and is configured so that when the lever member 10340 moves, the PUSH button 10317 also moves in conjunction with it. Therefore, in this control example, it is configured so that a press effect that prompts the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 is not executed while the return process is being executed to move the lever member 10340 to its initial position.

By configuring it in this way, when a player is about to press the PUSH button 10317 based on the execution of a pressing effect, the PUSH button 10317 moves in conjunction with the movement of the lever member 10340, preventing the player from being able to press the PUSH button 10317 smoothly.

In addition, by executing the press effect while the return process of the lever member 10340 is being performed, it is possible to prevent the player from focusing on the operating device 10300 during the return process, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable with the effect. Note that in this control example, a configuration is used in which the press effect prohibition flag 223ao is set so that the press effect is not executed during the return process of the lever member 10340, but this is not limited to this, and for example, it is also possible to configure so that the return process of the lever member 10340 is not executed while the press effect is being executed, and in this case as well, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

The variable performance priority flag 223ap is a flag that indicates the period during which the variable performance is set with priority when setting an operation performance (variable operation performance, press performance, etc.) that causes the player to operate an operation means (e.g., lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317), and is set to on during the period during which the variable performance is set with priority.

This variable performance priority flag 223ap is set to on when the variable operation performance ends with the lever member 10340 in the second position (actuation position). This makes it easier to set a variable operation performance when the lever member 10340 is in the second position (actuation position) than when the lever member 10340 is in the initial position (origin position). Also, it makes it more difficult to execute other operation performances (for example, press performances) when the lever member 10340 is in the second position (actuation position).

As described above, in this control example, the operating device 10300 uses a configuration having a PUSH button 10317 and a lever member 10340, and when the lever member 10340 is in the actuated position, the lever member 10340 is in a state where it is further away from the base of the operating device 10300 than when it is in the initial position. Since the PUSH button 10317 is provided on the tip side of the lever member 10340 (the opposite side to the base of the operating device 10300), when the PUSH button 10317 is pressed while the lever member 10340 is in the actuated position, in addition to the case where the PUSH button 10317 is pressed while the lever member 10340 is in the initial position, a large load is applied to various structures of the operating device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340), which may lead to a failure of the operating device 10300. In contrast, in this control example, when the lever member 10340 is in the actuated position, the variable operation presentation is selected as the operation presentation with priority, making it easier for the player to move the lever member 10340, which is in the actuated position, to the initial position, and also reducing the risk of malfunction of the operation device 10300.

In this control example, when an operation effect is set while the lever member 10340 is in the actuated position, the variable operation effect is selected in preference to other operation effects. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, even when a variable effect in which no operation effect is set is set, a variable operation effect may be set instead of the effect mode of the variable effect, as long as the variable operation effect is more likely to be selected when the lever member 10340 is in the actuated position than when it is in the initial position. In addition to the variable effect executed in response to the special pattern change, for example, in the normal pattern change effect executed in response to the normal pattern change (normal pattern change) and the winning game effect executed during the big win game and the small win game, the variable operation effect may be more likely to be selected when the lever member 10340 is in the actuated position than when it is in the initial position.

<Regarding control process of main control device in second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts in Fig. 499 to Fig. 501. Hereinafter, the same control processes as those in the first control example will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and illustrations and descriptions thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 499. This special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) is a process executed in place of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) in the first control example.

In the special pattern change start process 2 (S258) in this second control example, the steps S301 to S309, S310 to 313, S315, S318, and S319 are the same as the steps S301 to S309, S310 to 313, S315, S318, and S319 in the special pattern change start process (see FIG. 427) in the first control example.

If it is determined in the process of S309 that the jackpot is a special symbol jackpot (S309: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (S352), and the process proceeds to S310.

In addition, in the process of S313, after the process of S313 is executed, the process of S314 is not executed, and the process of S315 is executed. After the process of S315 is executed, the processes of S316 and S317 are not executed, and the process of variation when the ball is out is executed (S351), and the process moves to the process of S318. Details of the process of variation when the ball is out will be described later with reference to FIG. 500.

Next, the details of the miss-time change process (S351) in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 500. This miss-time change process (S351) is a process executed in the special symbol change start process 2 (see FIG. 499) in the second control example, and is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is other than a big win (a miss or a small win).

When the loss fluctuation process (S351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S371). If it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (loss) (S371: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S372), the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S373), and the process proceeds to S381. Here, the display time of the first pattern display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third pattern until it stops at the loss pattern on the third pattern display device 81 is determined. At this time, as in the process of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined.

If it is determined in the process of S371 that the current lottery result is a small win (S371: Yes), the type of small win is determined based on the small win type selection 2 table 202ac (S374).

Here, the value of the small win type counter C6 obtained in the processing of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the small win type selection 2 table 202ac (see FIG. 493 (b)) to set the small win type. Specifically, if the value of the small win type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 64", small win A is set, and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", small win B is set.

After completing the process of S374, it is next determined whether the determined small win type is small win A (S375). If it is determined that the small win type is not small win A (it is small win B) (S375: No), the process proceeds to S381. On the other hand, if it is determined that the small win type is small win A (S375: Yes), the value of the small win counter 203ab is incremented by 1 (S376), and then it is determined whether the value of the small win counter 203ab after the increment is 2 (S377).

If it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203ab after the addition is not 2 (S377: No), the process proceeds to S380. If it is determined that the value of the small win counter 203ab after the addition is 2 (S377: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the second time-saving end condition has been met by the current small win win, the value of the time-saving counter 203g is reset to the initial value (S378) to transition the time-saving state (high probability state of normal patterns) to a low probability state, a state command indicating the end of the time-saving state is set (S379), and the process proceeds to S380.

In the process of S380, a fluctuation pattern (small win fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the small win that has been won this time is determined. Although detailed explanation is omitted, if a small win is won in the special chart lottery, the same fluctuation pattern as when a big win is won in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is set. In other words, a fluctuation pattern that is referenced in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b when a big win is won in the special chart lottery is determined. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern determined based on the winning of a small win and the fluctuation pattern determined based on the winning of a big win the same. Therefore, the presentation mode of the special chart variation presentation executed based on the determined fluctuation pattern can also be made the same, making it difficult for the player to tell whether he or she has won a big win or a small win.

In the process of S381, a variation pattern command is set to notify the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation pattern determined in the processes of S373 and S380 (S381). Then, a stop type command is set to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type (S382). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 434) in the first control example. When the process of S382 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

Next, the details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1160) in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 501. This jackpot end process 2 (S1160) is a process that is executed in place of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 437) in the first control example.

In the jackpot end process 2 (S1160) in this second control example, steps S1301 to S1302 and S1305 are executed in the same manner as steps S1301 to S1302 and S1305 in the jackpot end process 2 (see FIG. 437) in the first control example.

After executing the processes of S1301 and S1302, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is read (S1351), and the presence or absence of the time-saving state setting is determined based on the read game state and the jackpot type (S1352). Here, in this second control example, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 has a storage means (game state storage means) that can temporarily store the current game state, the game state at the time of winning (the time when the winning decision is made by the special drawing), and the game state at the start of the winning game as the other memory area 203z. Then, in the process of S1351 described above, a process is executed to read the game state at the time of winning the jackpot from the game state storage means possessed by the other memory area 203z. With this configuration, it is possible to set a new game state based on the past game state (the game state at the time when the setting condition of the game state is established) rather than being limited to the game state set at the present time, so that a variety of games can be provided.

Next, it is determined whether or not a time-saving state is set (S1353). If it is determined that a time-saving state is set (S1353: Yes), values are set in various counters based on the contents specified in the time-saving end condition selection table 202ad (S1354), a jackpot end command indicating the game state after the jackpot ends is set (S1355), and the process proceeds to S1305.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1353 that the time-saving state is not set (S1353: No), the process of S1354 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1355.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device in the second control example>
Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIG. 502 to FIG. 516, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. In this second control example, the difference from the first control example described above is that a process for executing a variable operation performance for operating the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member, has been added, a process for setting a dialogue mode as a variable performance has been added, the process content for setting the performance mode of the variable performance to be set when a variable pattern command is received has been changed, the process content for setting a reserved performance (reserved notice performance) that can be set when a winning information command is received has been changed, and in the process for selecting the back mode, a process for selecting a lost child mode to be executed when a potential state or a normal state is set has been added, and the rest is the same. Hereinafter, the same control processes as those in the first control example are given the same reference numerals, and the illustrations and explanations thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 502, we will explain main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing this main processing 2. This main processing 2 is processing executed in place of the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 441).

In the main processing 2 in this second control example, steps S3102 to S3110 and steps S3116 to S3120 are identical to steps S3102 to S3110 and steps S3116 to S3120 in the main processing in the first control example (see FIG. 441).

After the process of S3110 is executed, the performance update process 2 is executed (S3151). Details of this performance execution process 2 will be described later with reference to Figs. 503 to 505. After the process of S3151 is executed, the press detection process 2 is executed (S3152). Details of this press detection process 2 will be described later with reference to Figs. 506 and 507. After the process of S3152 is executed, the operation performance management process is executed (S3153). Details of this operation performance management process will be described later with reference to Fig. 508. After the process of S3153 is executed, the variable operation means management process is executed (S3154). Details of this variable operation means management process will be described later with reference to Fig. 509. After the process of S3154 is executed, the command determination process 2 is executed (S3155). After the process of S3155 is executed, the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S3156), and the process proceeds to S3116.

Next, referring to the flowchart of FIG. 503, the performance update process 2 (S3151) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing this performance update process 2 (S3151). This performance update process 2 (S3151) is a process executed in place of the performance update process in the first control example (see FIG. 442), and a process is executed in which a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special chart fluctuation is set, and the progress of the fluctuation performance (variable display performance) is determined based on the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s that measures the fluctuation time (fluctuation elapsed time, fluctuation remaining period) of the special chart fluctuation by periodically updating the value, and the performance content of the variable operation performance is updated, and a process for executing a fluctuation performance corresponding to the second period (the latter half period of the special chart fluctuation being executed) is added to the performance update process in the first control example described above (see FIG. 442).

In addition, a process is executed to update the second variable time timer 223an, which measures the period from the start of the special chart variation to the setting of the variable performance mode corresponding to the second period, in the same manner as the variable time timer 223s described above, and when the value becomes 0 (when it is determined that it is the timing to set the performance mode for the second period), a process is executed to set the performance mode for the second period.

In the second control example, steps S3201 to S3206 of the performance update process 2 (S3151) are the same as steps S3201 to S3206 of the first control example (see FIG. 442).

If it is determined in the process of S3201 that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s is 0, i.e., if it is determined that the special chart is not currently fluctuating (S3201), the process proceeds to S3255.

On the other hand, after executing the processing of S3206, the variable operation presentation processing is executed (S3251), and the processing proceeds to S3252. Details of this variable operation presentation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 504.

In the process of S3252, it is determined whether the value of the variable time timer 223s indicates the start timing of the second period (S3252). If it is determined that the value of the variable time timer 223s indicates the start timing of the second period (S3252: Yes), information indicating the variable display mode of the second period stored in the performance information storage area 223ak is read (S3253), and a display variable pattern command is set based on the read information (S3254), and the process proceeds to S3255.

...

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to execute processing to set the presentation mode of the second period presentation 28 seconds after the start of the special chart change. The practice information storage area 223ak is also configured to store the presentation results for the presentation executed during the first period (for example, the presentation results of the operation presentation executed during the first period), and the presentation mode of the second period presentation is set based on the various information stored in the presentation information storage area 223ak.

This makes it possible to set the presentation mode of the variable presentation corresponding to the remaining period (second period) of the special chart variable period even at a timing different from the timing at which the variable pattern command was received from the main control device 110. Furthermore, since it is possible to set the second period presentation based on information indicating the presentation result of the presentation that has already been executed (the presentation executed during the first period), it is easier to set a variety of presentation modes than when the presentation mode of the variable presentation is set for the entire period of the special chart variable period at the start timing of the special chart variable.

In this control example, the special chart fluctuation period is divided into two periods, the first period (first half period) and the second period (second half period), but it is not limited to this and may be divided into three or more fluctuation periods, and the performance mode corresponding to each fluctuation period may be set before each fluctuation period is reached. In addition, in this control example, the performance mode during the second period is set not at the timing of arrival of the second period (timing 30 seconds after the start of the special chart fluctuation in the example shown in FIG. 487), but at a timing before the timing of arrival of the second period (timing 28 seconds after the start of the special chart fluctuation in the example shown in FIG. 487), and once stored in the performance information storage area 223ak, the variable performance is executed with the performance mode stored in the performance information storage area 223ak at the timing of arrival of the second period, so that the processing executed at the timing of arrival of the second period can be simplified, but it is not limited to this and may be configured to execute processing for setting the performance mode during the second period at the timing of arrival of the second period. By configuring it in this way, the amount of processing executed when the second period is reached will increase, but since it is possible to execute the presentation mode set in response to the second period as is without storing it in the presentation information storage area 223ak, it is possible to simplify the storage area that stores information indicating the presentation mode of the variable presentation.

If it is determined in the process of S3252 that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s does not indicate the start timing of the second period (in the example of FIG. 487, the timing when 30 seconds have elapsed since the start of the special chart fluctuation) (S3252: No), the processes of S3253 and S3254 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3255.

In the process of S3255, it is determined whether the value of the second variable time timer 223an is 0 (S3255). If it is determined that the value of the second variable time timer 223an is not 0 (S3255: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the value of the second variable time timer 223an is 0 (S3255: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is time to set the performance mode for the second period, a second period setting process is executed (S3256), and then this process is terminated. Details of this second period setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 505.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 504, the variable operation presentation process (S3251) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing this variable operation presentation process (S3251). This variable operation presentation process (S3251) is a process executed within the presentation update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example.

In this variable operation performance process (S3251), a process for setting the performance mode of the variable operation performance and a process for terminating the variable operation performance are executed. As described with reference to Figs. 485 and 486, in this control example, the performance modes of the variable operation performance can be set to a push-down performance in which the lever member 10340 is pushed down, a push-up performance in which the lever member 10340 is pushed up, and a touch performance in which the hand touches the detection range of the touch sensor instead of the lever member 10340, and the performance mode is set according to the positional situation of the lever member 10340 at the execution timing of the variable operation performance.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a contradiction occurs between the presentation mode of the variable operation presentation being executed and the positional state of the lever member 10340. Specifically, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a push-down operation presentation is executed when the lever member 10340 is already in a lowered state.

In this control example, for the sake of convenience, the touch effect that does not allow the player to operate the lever member 10340 is included as part of the variable operation effect. As described above, this touch effect is an operation effect that uses a touch sensor, and is an operation effect that does not use the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member. However, since it is an operation effect that creates a state in which the player's hand is removed from the lever member 10340 by executing an effect that causes the hand to touch the detection range of the touch sensor, for example, for a player who continues to hold the lever member 10340, it becomes an effect that causes the player to remove their hand from the lever member 10340, which is a variable operation member. Therefore, it is part of the variable operation effect when viewed from a broader concept. In other words, in this control example, the variable operation effects are configured to be executable as follows: a push-down operation effect (see FIG. 484(a)) that moves the variable operation member (lever member 10340) located in the second position (actuated position) toward the first position (origin position), a push-up operation effect (see FIG. 484(b)) that moves the variable operation member (lever member 10340) located in the first position (origin position) toward the second position (origin position), and a touch effect (see FIG. 485) that causes the hand to be released from the variable operation member (lever member 10340).

When the variable operation performance process (S3251) starts, first it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start timing of the variable operation performance (S4601). Here, the determination is made based on the performance mode information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak and the value of the variable time counter 223s.

If it is determined in the processing of S4601 that the current timing is the start timing of the variable operation presentation (S4601: Yes), the presentation mode of the current variable operation presentation is set by referring to the operation presentation switching table 222ab (S4602), a value corresponding to the operation presentation period is set in the variable operation effective period timer 223am corresponding to the presentation mode that has been set (S4603), the operation presentation in progress flag 223ai is set to on (S4604), and the processing proceeds to S4608.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4601 that the current timing is not the start timing of the variable operation presentation (S4601: No), then it is determined whether the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is 0 (S4605). If it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is 0 (S4605: Yes), a presentation mode indicating the end of the variable operation presentation is set (S4606), the operation presentation in progress flag 223ai is set to off (S4607), and the processing proceeds to S4608. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is not 0 (S4605: No), the processing of S4606 and S4607 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S4608.

In the process of S4608, a display command indicating the currently set presentation mode is set (S4608), and then this process ends. This makes it possible to execute a presentation that corresponds to the start timing and end timing of the variable operation presentation.

Next, the second period setting process (S3256) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 505. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing this second period setting process (S3256).

This second period setting process (S3256) is a process executed within the performance update process 2 (Fig. 503) in the second control example. In this second period setting process (S3256), a process is executed to set the performance mode corresponding to the second period (second half period) of the performance period of the variable performance corresponding to the currently executing special chart variation. Also, when the pending operation performance is on standby (performance standby flag 223ah is set to on), a process is executed to set the performance mode for executing the pending operation performance during the second period.

When the second period setting process (S3256) is started, first, information on the currently executing special chart change (information corresponding to various information included in the corresponding change pattern command), information on the performance result of the first period, and information on the second period (information indicating the length of the second period) are read from the performance information storage area 223ak (S4701), and then it is determined whether the performance standby flag 223ah is on (S4702). If it is determined that the performance standby flag 223ah is not on (off) (S4702: No), then it is determined whether there is additional performance information during the first performance period (S4703). The additional performance information determined in the processing of S4703 indicates information for indicating the performance result of a performance (e.g., special chart operation performance) in which the performance result varies based on the operation content performed by the player on the operation means (e.g., the PUSH button 10317, the lever member 10340) among the performances executed during the first period (first performance period), and indicates information for indicating the actually selected (set) performance mode among the performances configured to select one performance mode from multiple performance modes according to the selection condition (operation on the operation means) established during the first period as the performance mode of the variable performance executed during the first period (first performance period). When a performance mode is selected from multiple performance modes based on the selection condition established, this additional performance information indicates the information for indicating the selected performance mode as additional performance information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak.

If it is determined that there is additional performance information during the first performance period based on the information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S4703: Yes), the variable display mode corresponding to the additional performance information is set (S4705) and processing proceeds to S4710. If it is determined that there is no additional performance information during the first performance period (S4703: No), the variable display mode is set based on the information relating to the second period stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S4704) and processing proceeds to S4710.

In this way, this control example is configured so that the presentation mode for the second period (second presentation period) can be set based on the contents of the additional presentation information acquired (stored in the presentation information storage area 223ak) during the first period (first presentation period). Therefore, when the presentation mode of the variable presentation executed in accordance with the variation time of one special chart variation is divided into multiple presentation periods and configured to be set at different timings, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the presentation modes set in each presentation period are combined. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the entire variable presentation.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4702 that the effect standby flag 223ah is on (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether or not a pending batch change effect is possible during the second effect period (S4706). If it is determined that a pending batch change effect is possible during the second effect period (S4706: Yes), a variable display mode corresponding to the pending batch change effect is set (S4707), and processing proceeds to S4709. If it is determined that a pending batch change effect is not possible during the second effect period (S4706: No), a variable display mode is set based on information relating to the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4708), and processing proceeds to S4709.

Here, the processing contents executed in S4706 will be explained in detail. In this control example, if the current special chart change is a special chart change that has resulted in a jackpot win, or if the result of the special chart lottery is a miss but the change pattern is one that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot (for example, a change pattern in which a long change time is set), the latter half of the special chart change presentation (corresponding to the second period) is configured to make it easier to execute a special chart change presentation (for example, a super reach presentation) to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility that the current special chart change is a jackpot win.

In such a case, that is, when a performance is being performed to make the player interested in the lottery result of the special chart change being performed, there is a problem that the interest in the special chart change performance is weakened and the performance effect is reduced by performing a reserved performance to suggest the content of the newly acquired winning information (special chart reserved) in the latter half (second period) of the special chart change performance. Therefore, in this control example, the presence or absence of the reserved operation performance is determined based on information for setting the performance mode of the second period (various information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak). This makes it possible to make it easier to understand the performance (special chart change performance, reserved performance) that the player should pay attention to during the second period. In addition, without being limited to this, it may be configured to simply determine whether the length of the second period is longer than the execution period of the reserved operation performance (reserved all-change performance) and determine whether the period during which the reserved operation performance can be performed during the second period can be secured, or it may be configured to determine whether a performance result indicating that the reserved operation performance will not be performed during the second period is displayed (executed) as the performance result of the performance executed during the first period, and to determine based on the determination result.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned processing of S4708, that is, in the case where it is determined that the pending operation presentation (all pending change presentation) during the second period cannot be executed despite the presentation standby flag 223ah being set to on during the first period, as shown in FIG. 486(b), the display portion of the suggested character HC1 is frozen in a display mode that does not require the operation of the operating means (a display mode other than "PUSH"), and a presentation is executed in which the presentation mode is changed to one that corresponds to the frozen display mode.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 486(a), when the execution of the pending operation presentation is put on hold, a suggestion character HC1 is displayed, and a presentation is executed in which the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 is rotated. By rotating the display portion in this manner, a presentation can be executed that suggests the possibility that the pending operation presentation will be executed later, and even if a situation occurs in which the pending operation presentation is not executed as described above, the player can continue playing without feeling dissatisfied.

In the process of S4709, the effect standby flag 223ah is set to OFF (S4709), and the process proceeds to S4710. In the process of S4710, the information set this time is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4710), and then this process ends.

Next, the press detection process 2 (S3152) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 506. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing this press detection process 2 (S3152). This press detection process 2 (S3152) is executed in place of the press detection process in the first control example (see FIG. 447), and differs in that it is configured to be able to execute the process that is referenced when a press operation is performed on the PUSH button 10317, and the variable operation detection process that is executed when the lever member 10340 is variably operated.

In the press detection process 2 (S3152) in this second control example, steps S3601 to S3607 are executed in the same manner as steps S3601 to S3607 in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example.

If it is determined in the process of S3601 that a press on the PUSH button has not been detected (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3653. Also, if it is determined in the process of S3606 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), then it is determined whether the value of the other press valid period timer is greater than 0 (S3651). If it is determined that the value of the other press valid period timer is greater than 0 (S3651: Yes), a performance mode corresponding to the currently executing performance is set (S3652), and then the process proceeds to S3653. Also, if it is determined that the value of the other press valid period timer is 0 (S3651: No), the process proceeds to S3653.

In the process of S3653, it is determined whether an operation of the operating means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) used for the variable operation performance has been detected (S3653). If it is determined that an operation of the operating means used for the variable operation performance has been detected (S3653: Yes), variable operation detection processing is executed (S3654). Details of this variable operation detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 507.

Here, the processing content of S3653 will be explained. As described above, in this control example, the lever member 10340 is configured to be variably operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (actuated position). When a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lever member 10340 is located at the first position detects the lever member 10340, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and when a detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lever member 10340 is located at the second position detects the lever member 10340, the actuated position detection flag 223af is set to ON.

Then, when the origin detection flag 223ae, which was on, is set to off and then the actuation position detection flag 223af, which was off, is set to on, or when the actuation position detection flag 223af, which was on, is set to off and then the origin detection flag 223ae, which was off, is set to on, the process of S3653 is configured to determine that an operation of the lever member 10340 has been detected.

The method of determining that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected is not limited to the method of this control example. For example, the system may be configured to determine that an operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected when it is determined that the setting state (on state, off state) of one of the detection flags (origin detection flag 223ae, actuation position detection flag 223af) has switched. Alternatively, the system may be configured to determine that a first operation has been performed when it is determined that the setting state (on state, off state) of one of the detection flags (origin detection flag 223ae, actuation position detection flag 223af) has switched, and to determine that a second operation has been performed when it is determined that the setting states (on state, off state) of both detection flags (origin detection flag 223ae, actuation position detection flag 223af) have switched (when it is determined that an operation has been detected based on the operation detection content in this control example). Thus, the detection results may differ between when the first operation is established and when the second operation is established. Furthermore, when the second operation described above is performed, the detection result may be different based on the period from when the setting state of one detection flag is switched to when the setting state of the other flag is switched, that is, the period required to move the lever member 10340 located in the origin position to the actuated position, or the period required to move the lever member 10340 located in the actuated position to the origin position.

If it is determined in the processing of S3653 that no operation has been detected for the operation means used for the variable operation presentation (S3653: No), this processing ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 507, the variable operation detection process (S3654) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing this variable operation detection process (S3654). This variable operation detection process (S3654) is a process executed within the press detection process 2 (FIG. 506) in the second control example.

When the variable operation detection process (S3654) starts, first it is determined whether the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801). In other words, it is determined whether a variable operation presentation is currently being executed. If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4801: Yes), this means that the operating means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) has been operated within the variable operation effective period set for the variable operation presentation, so the presentation mode corresponding to the presentation being executed is set (S4802), the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is reset to 0 (S4803), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S4801: No), then it is determined whether the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4804). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4804: Yes), then it is determined whether the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805: Yes), then it is set to off (S4806) and the process proceeds to S4807. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4805: No), the process skips S4806 and proceeds to S4807. In the process of S4807, a lock process is set to fix the variable operation means at the origin position (S4807), and then this process ends.

By executing the above-mentioned process, if the lever member 10340 that is not located at the origin position is moved to the origin position during a period in which the variable operation effective period is not set, the lever member 10340 will be locked at the origin position. Therefore, even if the lever member 10340 is left in a state in which it is located at a position other than the origin position while a variable operation performance is being executed, the lever member 10340 can be reliably locked by simply moving the lever member 10340 to the origin position.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4804 that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4804: No), then it is determined whether or not the actuation position detection flag 223af is on (S4808). If it is determined that the actuation position detection flag 223af is off (S4808: No), this process ends as it is. If it is determined that the actuation position detection flag 223af is on (S4808: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4809). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4809: Yes), then it is set to off (S4810), and then this process ends. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4809: No), the process of S4810 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 508, the operation performance management process (S3153) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing this operation performance management process (S3153). This operation performance management process (S3153) is a process executed within main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example, and during the variable operation performance period, a process is executed to update the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am.

When the operation performance management process (S3153) is started, first, it is determined whether the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901). If it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4901: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is greater than 0 (S4901: Yes), the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is updated (S4902), and then it is determined whether the updated value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4903). If it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is not 0 (S4903: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4903: Yes), then it is determined whether the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4904). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4904: Yes), an initial return operation scenario is set (S4905), the value of the return operation timer 223ah is set to a value corresponding to 5 seconds (S4906), the press performance prohibition flag 223ao is set to on (S4907), and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4904 that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4904: No), then it is determined whether or not the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908: Yes), this processing ends as it is. If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S4908: No), the variable performance priority flag 223ap is set to on (S4909), and then this processing ends.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 509, the variable operation means management process (S3154) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing this variable operation means management process (S3154). This variable operation means management process (S3154) is a process executed within main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example.

When the variable operation means management process (S3154) starts, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the return operation timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5001: No), this process ends. If it is determined that the value of the return operation timer 223ah is greater than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the return operation timer 223ah is updated (S5002), and it is determined whether or not the updated value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5003). If it is determined that the updated value of the return operation timer 223ah is not 0 (S5003: No), a return operation corresponding to the value of the return operation timer 223ah is set (S5004), and then this process ends.

If it is determined in the process of S5003 that the updated value of the return operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5003: Yes), the press effect prohibition flag 223ao is set to OFF (S5005), and then it is determined whether the origin detection flag 223ae is ON (S5006). If it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae is ON (S5006: Yes), information indicating that the variable operating means is in a normal position is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5007), and then this process is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S5006 that the origin detection flag 223ae is off (S5006: No), then it is determined whether or not the activation position detection flag 223af is on (S5008). If it is determined that the activation position detection flag 223af is on (S5008: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to on (S5009), information indicating that the variable operating means is in the opposite position is stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S5010), and then this processing is terminated.

If it is determined in the processing of S5008 that the activation position detection flag 223af is off (S5008: No), information indicating that the variable operating means is in an unknown position is stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S5011), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 510, the pending notice lottery process 2 (S4031) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 510 is a flowchart showing this pending notice lottery process 2 (S4031). This pending notice lottery process 2 (S4031) is a process executed in place of the pending notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example.

In the reserved notice lottery process 2 (S4031) in this second control example, the processes S4051 to S4057 and S4060 to S4063 are the same as the processes S4051 to S4057 and S4060 to S4063 in the reserved notice lottery process in the first control example (see FIG. 453).

If it is determined in the process of S4057 that the pending batch change effect has been executed (S4057: Yes), the execution timing setting process is executed (S4081), and then this process is terminated. Details of this execution timing setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 511.

Next, the execution timing setting process (S4081) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 511. FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing this execution timing setting process (S4081). This execution timing setting process (S4081) is a process executed within the pending notice lottery process 2 (FIG. 510) in the second control example.

When the execution timing setting process (S4081) starts, first, the information stored in the performance information storage area 223ak is read (S5101), and then it is determined whether the operation performance in progress flag 223ai is on or not (S5102). If it is determined that the operation performance in progress flag 223ai is off (S5102: No), then it is determined whether or not the execution period of the pending batch change performance can be secured (S5103). If it is determined that the execution period of the pending batch change performance can be secured (S5103: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change performance is set (S5104), the batch change flag 223p is set to on (S5105), and then this process is terminated. Also, if it is determined in the process of S5103 that the execution period of the pending batch change performance cannot be secured (S5103: No), the processes of S5104 and S5105 are skipped and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5102 that the operation performance in progress flag 223ai is on (S5102: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current variable performance is in the first period of performance (S5106). If it is determined that the current variable performance is in the first period of performance (S5106: Yes), the performance standby flag 223aj is set to on (S5107), the display of the reserved pattern mode indicating standby is set (S5108), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that the current variable performance is not during the first period (S5106: No), then it is determined whether or not the current variable performance is during the second period (S5109). If it is determined that the current variable performance is not during the second period (S5109: No), this process is terminated. If it is determined that the current variable performance is during the second period (S5109: Yes), the display of the reserved pattern mode corresponding to the latest winning information is set (S5110), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 512, the variable performance setting process 2 (S4252) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing this variable performance setting process 2 (S4252). This variable performance setting process 2 (S4252) is a process executed in place of the variable performance setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example.

In the variable performance setting process 2 (S4252) in this second control example, steps S4301 to S4311 and S4313 are identical to steps S4301 to S4311 and S4313 in the variable performance setting process in the first control example (see FIG. 456).

If it is determined in the process of S4311 that the current state is a high probability state (S4311: Yes), the back mode lottery process 2 is executed (S4352) and the process proceeds to S4312. Details of the back mode lottery process 2 will be described later with reference to Figs. 515 and 516.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4311 that the current state is not a special state (S4311: No), the normal performance setting process is executed (S4351) and the process proceeds to S4313. Details of this normal performance setting process will be described later with reference to Figures 513 and 514.

Next, the normal performance setting process (S4351) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 513. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing this normal performance setting process (S4351). This normal performance setting process (S4351) is a process executed within the variable performance setting process 2 (FIG. 512) in the second control example.

When the normal performance setting process (S4351) is started, first it is determined whether or not the current state is normal (S5201). If it is determined that the current state is not normal (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5214. If it is determined that the current state is normal (S5201: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the current state is dialogue mode (S5202). If it is determined that the current state is dialogue mode (S5202: Yes), the dialogue mode setting process is executed (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. Details of this dialogue mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 514.

If it is determined in the process of S5202 that the dialogue mode is not currently in effect (S5202: No), the process of S5203 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5204.

In the process of S5204, it is determined whether the change time is 30 seconds or more (S5204). If it is determined that the change time is not 30 seconds or more (S5204: No), a change display mode corresponding to the received change pattern is set (S5205), and then the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5204, if it is determined that the change time is 30 seconds or more (S5204: Yes), the first period (first half) corresponding to the received change pattern is extracted (S5206), and then it is determined whether the operation display flag 223ai is on (S5207). If it is determined that the operation display flag 223ai is on (S5207: Yes), a change display mode is set from a group of display modes that do not use operation display as the display mode for the first period (S5208), and then the process proceeds to S5214.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S5207 that the operation performance in progress flag 223ai is off (S5207: No), then it is determined whether or not the set performance mode has an operation performance (S5210). If it is determined that the set performance mode has an operation performance (S5210: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variable performance priority flag 223ap is on (S5211). If it is determined that the variable performance priority flag 223ap is on (S5211: Yes), then a variable operation performance is set as the operation performance (S5212), the variable performance priority flag 223ap is set to off (S5213), and the processing proceeds to S5214.

In addition, if the process of S5210 determines that the set presentation mode does not include an operational presentation (S5210: No), or if the process of S5211 determines that the variable presentation priority flag 223ap is off (S5211: No), the process proceeds to S5214.

In the process of S5214, a value is calculated by subtracting 2 seconds from the number of seconds corresponding to the first period (S5214), a data value corresponding to the calculated value is set in the second variable time timer 223an (S5215), each piece of information set this time is stored in the performance information storage area 223ak (S5216), and then this process is terminated.

Next, the dialogue mode setting process (S5203) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 514. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing this dialogue mode setting process (S5203). This dialogue mode setting process (S5203) is a process executed within the normal performance setting process (FIG. 513) in the second control example.

When the dialogue mode setting process (S5203) is started, first, the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is read (S5301), and it is determined whether or not the second stop symbol information is stored (S5302). If it is determined that the second stop symbol information is not stored (S5302: No), the stopped character and dialogue corresponding to the lottery result are randomly selected, the presentation mode of the dialogue presentation is set (S5303), and the process proceeds to S5306.

If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the second stopping pattern information is stored (S5302: Yes), the dialogue state is set based on the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 (S5304), and a stopped character is selected by referring to the character selection table 222aa2 based on the set dialogue state and the result of the hit/miss judgment (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306.

In the process of S5306, the line selection table 222aa3 is referenced to set the presentation mode of the current line presentation (S5306), the information stored in the stopped symbol information storage area 223ac is shifted by one (S5307), the presentation mode set this time is stored in the previous storage area (S5308), and then this process is terminated.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 515, the rear mode lottery process 2 (S4362) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing this rear mode lottery process 2 (S4362). This rear mode lottery process 2 (S4362) is a process executed in place of the rear mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example.

In the rear mode selection process 2 (S4362) in this second control example, steps S4501 to S4504 and S4506 to S4511 are identical to steps S4501 to S4504 and S4506 to S4511 in the rear mode selection process in the first control example (see FIG. 458).

If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the current game state is not a sure-win state (S4504: No), the back mode setting process after the time-saving period ends is executed (S4551), and the process proceeds to S4510. Details of the back mode setting process after the time-saving period ends will be described later with reference to FIG. 516.

Next, referring to the flowchart in FIG. 516, the rear mode setting process after time-saving completion (S4551) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in this second control example will be described. FIG. 516 is a flowchart showing this rear mode setting process after time-saving completion (S4551). This rear mode setting process after time-saving completion (S4551) is a process executed within the rear mode lottery process 2 (FIG. 515) in the second control example.

When the back mode setting process (S4551) starts after the time-saving feature ends, first it is determined whether the current game state is normal or potential (S4561). If it is determined that the current game state is normal or potential (S4561: Yes), the back mode corresponding to the lost mode is selected (S4562), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4561 that the current game state is not the normal state or the potential state (S4561: No), the reverse mode is selected by referencing the fallen table and the value of the performance selection counter (S4563), and then this processing is terminated.

<Regarding the first modified example of the second control example>
Next, the first modified example in the second control example will be described. In the above-mentioned second control example, when an execution condition for executing an operation performance (reserved operation performance) for operating the operation means as a reserved performance is established while an operation performance (special chart operation performance) for operating the operation means in the special chart variation performance is being executed, the execution timing of each operation performance is configured not to overlap. In contrast, in the first modified example, the pachinko machine 10 has a game environment adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume level output from the sound output device 226 and the brightness of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the like, and the game environment can be set according to the player's preferences by operating the adjustment operation means (for example, a first button (for example, a button consisting of an up arrow button and a down arrow button) that can select the operation content, and a second button (for example, a button with "menu/confirm" displayed on the pressing surface of the button) that is operated when displaying a menu screen on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 or determining the selection content).

To briefly explain how to adjust the gaming environment, when the second button described above is pressed while the power is on to the pachinko machine 10, a menu screen for adjusting the gaming environment is displayed on part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The menu screen displays a volume adjustment display mode for adjusting the volume level, a light adjustment display mode for adjusting the brightness, a gaming information display mode for checking the gaming information of the pachinko machine 10, and an end display mode for ending the menu screen. Any display mode can be selected by operating the first button described above, and the corresponding screen is displayed when the second button is pressed.

When the first button is operated to select the volume adjustment display mode and the second button is pressed, a volume adjustment screen is displayed. This volume adjustment screen displays a volume indicator that indicates the volume of the pachinko machine 10 in stages, and the volume level of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied by operating the first button to vary the volume indicator. In this case, each time the first button is operated to vary the volume indicator, a demo sound (e.g., the lines of the character 801) is output at a volume that corresponds to the selected volume level. This allows the player to easily understand the volume level that corresponds to the currently selected volume level. Then, by operating the second button while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the currently selected volume level is determined and the volume adjustment is completed.

In addition, when the second button is pressed with the light intensity display mode selected, a light intensity adjustment screen is displayed. This light intensity adjustment screen displays a light intensity indicator that indicates the brightness (light intensity) of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in stages, and is configured to be able to adjust the light intensity based on the operation content of the first button, similar to the volume adjustment described above. The brightness of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (specifically, the brightness of the backlight for illuminating the display surface of the liquid crystal display that constitutes the third pattern display device 81) can be adjusted based on the light intensity determined here.

Furthermore, when the second button is pressed while the game status display mode is selected, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 and past game history are displayed.

When the second button is operated in this manner and a menu screen is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, it becomes difficult to see the special pattern variation effects and the reserved effects based on the special pattern reserved that was acquired based on the initial winning of the special pattern. Furthermore, since it is necessary to provide multiple operating means within the limited space of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to arrange the operating means (lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317) used in each of the control examples described above and the adjustment operating means (first button, second button) for adjusting the gaming environment in close proximity.

Therefore, if a special symbol operation effect is executed as a special symbol variation effect or a hold operation effect is executed as a hold effect while adjusting the gaming environment (while the first button and the second button are being operated), there is a problem that the operation means is mistakenly operated instead of the adjustment operation means when adjusting the gaming environment, resulting in an unintended effect being executed.

In contrast to this, in this first modified example, similar to the second control example described above, when the execution conditions for executing an operation presentation (special chart operation presentation, hold operation presentation) for operating the operation means are met, it is determined whether the period for operating the adjustment operation means (the period during which the menu screen is displayed) is in progress, and if it is determined that the period for operating the adjustment operation means is in progress, the execution of the operation presentation is put on hold.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent situations in which different operating means are operated at the same time, thereby providing the player with an easy-to-understand gameplay. Furthermore, when a waiting effect is being executed and a suggestion character HC1 (see FIG. 486(a)) is displayed, indicating that the execution of the operation effect is pending, if the player operates the first button to adjust the game environment, the rotation speed of the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 increases, and it is displayed rotating at high speed.

As a result, when a standby effect is being executed while adjusting the gaming environment, if the adjustment operation means is operated to adjust the gaming environment, the display content suggested by the presentation mode of the standby effect can be made difficult to understand. Specifically, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the word "PUSH" that is displayed in the display area of the suggested character HC1 and prompts the player to operate the operation means. This makes it possible to prevent a player who recognizes the word "PUSH" displayed in a rotating manner on the suggested character HC1 from mistakenly operating the operation means or the adjustment operation means.

On the other hand, when an operation presentation using the operating means is being performed, the effective period during which an operation to the second button can be effectively identified is not set, so that even if the player mistakenly operates the second button instead of the operating means, the menu screen is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the menu screen is displayed and the presentation effect is significantly reduced when the adjustment operating means is located near the operating means and the second button is mistakenly operated during the operation presentation.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of this first modified example, the configuration may be such that when the first button or the second button is operated during the period in which the operation presentation is being executed, the same presentation as when the operating means (lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317) is operated is executed, or a configuration may be used in which a physical restriction is set so that the player cannot press the first button or the second button during the period in which the operation valid period is not set for the first button or the second button.

<Second Modification of the Second Control Example>
Next, the second modified example in the second control example will be described. In the above-mentioned second control example, when an operation performance (special chart operation performance) for operating the operation means in the special chart variation performance is being performed, if an execution condition for executing an operation performance (reserved operation performance) for operating the operation means as a reserved performance is established, the execution timing of each operation performance is configured not to overlap, so that a game that is difficult for a player to understand, that is, a game in which the performance mode of the other operation performance (e.g., reserved operation performance) is changed based on the operation of the operation means despite the operation of the operation performance (e.g., special chart operation performance) for operating the operation means in the special chart variation performance and the operation performance (reserved operation performance) for operating the operation means as a reserved performance are executed in an overlapping manner (the operation effective period set for each operation performance overlaps), a special operation performance mode is set, so that an operation performance that is easy for a player to understand can be executed. Specifically, a fusion operation performance that fuses the special chart operation performance and the reserved operation performance is configured to be executable.

This fusion operation presentation is an operation presentation in which a presentation mode is set to show the presentation result of the special chart operation presentation or the presentation result of the reserved operation presentation as the presentation mode of the presentation executed based on the operation of the operation means. Specifically, for example, as a special chart operation presentation in which an effective operation period during which the operation of the operation means can be effectively determined is set in the 10 seconds from 5 to 15 seconds after the start of the special chart change, an operation presentation (so-called rapid-fire presentation) that changes the presentation mode based on the number of times the player operates the operation means is set, and when the execution conditions for the reserved operation presentation in which the presentation mode (display mode of the reserved pattern) is changed by the player operating the operation means once are met, a fusion operation presentation in which the effective operation period of 10 seconds for the special chart operation presentation is set is executed.

When the fusion operation presentation is being executed, the final presentation result (the presentation result of the special chart operation presentation and the presentation result of the reserved operation presentation) is configured to be displayed when the effective operation period has elapsed, and each time the player operates the operation means during the effective operation period, a presentation is executed that gradually changes the presentation mode of the special chart operation presentation and the presentation mode of the reserved operation presentation.

In other words, as with the above-mentioned pending operation presentation, an operation presentation is set up so that the presentation result is displayed based on a single operation when used alone, but by using a fusion operation presentation, the operation content required for the operating means to display the presentation result is varied, and the presentation result is notified after a specific presentation period (operation validity period) has elapsed.

In this way, when the execution timing of multiple operation effects that have different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the results of the operation effects overlap, a fusion operation effect is executed in which the display conditions (operation conditions) of each overlapping operation effect are corrected to be specific conditions. This makes it possible to prevent the unintended operation effect from displaying its results first when overlapping operation effects are executed, resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

In addition, in the above example, when the execution timing of multiple operation effects with different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the results of the operation effects overlap, specific conditions are set to make it difficult for the display conditions to be met. This makes it possible to make the period during which the fusion operation effect is executed longer than the period during which a standalone operation effect is executed, making it easier for the player to recognize that the fusion operation effect is being executed.

Furthermore, in the above example, the effective operation period set for the fusion operation performance is configured to be the same as the effective operation period set for any of the overlapping operation performances. This allows the fusion operation performance to be executed without setting a new effective operation period specifically for the fusion operation performance, thereby reducing the processing load on the voice lamp control device 113. Note that this is not limited to this, and the configuration may also be such that an effective operation period specifically for the fusion operation performance is set.

To explain the content of the above-mentioned fusion operation effect in detail, in this fusion operation effect, an effect is executed that makes it look like each operation effect is being executed in an overlapping manner. In other words, an effect is executed in which a special chart operation effect and a reserved operation effect are each executed. Furthermore, the operation suggestion mode that suggests the operation content to be performed on the operation means for each operation effect, and the effect mode that is set when an operation is performed on the operation means are configured to be different from when each operation effect is executed alone.

Specifically, when a fusion operation display is executed, a comment "Start set operation" is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 as a display mode to inform the player that a fusion operation display has been executed, and a display mode for operating the operating means (e.g., PUSH button 10317) is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

When the player operates (presses) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the operation valid period of the fusion operation effect, the operation discrimination means discriminates the content of the current operation and determines which of the fusion operation effects to change. Then, the effect mode of the operation effect that is the target of the effect mode to be changed is changed. In this case, for example, when a fusion operation effect including an operation effect configured to display a display mode indicating the effect result of the pending operation effect by one operation (for example, a display mode that changes the color of the pending pattern from blue to red) is executed when executed alone, such as the above-mentioned pending operation effect, an effect is executed in which the currently displayed display mode (blue pending pattern) is changed to a display mode (for example, a blue cracked pending pattern) different from the display mode indicating the effect result of the pending operation effect (red pending pattern).

This makes it possible to notify the player that a pending operation presentation is being executed as part of the fusion operation presentation, and to delay the period until the presentation result of the pending operation presentation is displayed. This makes it possible to motivate the player to operate the operating means until the fusion operation presentation ends. In this case, if the presentation of the operation presentation being executed is a presentation that changes a specific display mode in stages, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the stage located between the display mode indicating the current stage and the display mode of the stage indicated by the presentation result to be displayed during the fusion operation presentation. This configuration makes it possible to provide the player with the fun of predicting the presentation result of the fusion operation presentation.

In addition, while a fusion operation presentation is being executed, it is advisable to provide a notification means for notifying the player which operation presentation mode may change when the operation means is next operated (for example, by bringing the position of the operation means displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 closer to one of the presentation positions of the multiple operation presentations being executed). This makes it possible to provide a presentation that is easy for the player to understand. Note that in this modified example, when a fusion operation presentation is executed, only one operation means is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to display a number of operation means according to the number of operation presentations being executed, and to alternately display the corresponding operation means as the notification means described above.

In addition, in the above-mentioned second modified example, an example in which two operation performances are fused together as a fused operation performance has been described, but this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which three or more operation performances are fused together may also be used. In addition, by using the configuration of the above-mentioned second control example and the configuration of this second modified example, a waiting period after the execution conditions for the operation performance are met may be set for either one or both of them, and the execution period may be adjusted so that multiple operation performances are executed simultaneously, before the fused operation performance is executed.

<Regarding the third modified example of the second control example>
Next, a third modified example of the second control example described above will be explained. In the second control example described above, a lever member 10340 movable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operation position) is provided as a variable operation means, and the presentation mode of the variable operation presentation is varied according to the positional state of the lever member 10340 when the variable operation presentation is executed, so that the presentation content of the variable operation presentation and the operation content that can actually be executed on the lever member 10340 do not differ. And, regardless of the operation of the player, a configuration is used in which the lever member 10340 is moved using a drive motor as a return control for returning the lever member 10340 that is not located at the first position (origin position) to the first position (origin position). Also, a lock configuration is used to prevent the lever member 10340 located at the first position (origin position) from being operated by the player (operation to move toward the second position) except during the period when the variable operation presentation is executed, so that an operation to unnecessarily move the lever member 10340 located at the first position (origin position) is not performed.

However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 located in a position other than the first position (for example, the second position or an intermediate position between the first and second positions) is always operated by the player, so there remains a risk that the lever member 10340 may be moved unnecessarily.

In contrast, in the third modified example, a biasing means (e.g., a spring member) is provided that constantly applies a biasing force to the lever member 10340 in the direction of the first position, and the lever member 10340 in a position other than the first position is constantly moved in the direction of the first position. Furthermore, when the lever member 10340 is in the second position, a second locking mechanism is provided to maintain that position.

In this third modified example, which is configured in this manner, the lever member 10340 can be maintained in either the first position or the second position, and the lever member 10340 that is positioned in an intermediate position between the first and second positions is moved to the first position by the biasing means, so that the lever member 10340 will not be positioned in an intermediate position when it is not being held by the player.

Even in this third modified example configured in this manner, if it is determined that the player is gripping the lever member 10340 and is in the intermediate position (i.e., if it is determined that the origin detection flag 223ae and the actuation position detection flag 223af are both set to off), an effect (touch effect) is executed to prompt the player to release the lever member 10340. Then, when the player releases his/her hand from the lever member 10340 based on the touch effect, the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position (origin position) by the action of the biasing means.

As explained above, in this third modified example, when the player grasps the lever member 10340 and moves the lever member 10340 from the intermediate position to the first position, it is only necessary to execute an effect (e.g., a touch effect) to facilitate the player's hand leaving the lever member 10340. As there is no need to execute return operation control in conjunction with the touch effect as in the second control example described above, the configuration for moving the lever member 10340 to the first position can be simplified.

In addition, in this third modified example, as means for moving the lever member 10340 toward the first position, there are a first moving means using a drive means (drive motor) and a second moving means using a biasing means, and the first moving means and the second moving means have different moving speeds for moving the lever member 10340. Specifically, the first moving means is configured to have a faster moving speed than the second moving means.

As a result, for example, if the timing for executing the variable operation performance using the lever member 10340 has already been set and the lever member 10340 must be positioned to the first position within a specified period of time, the lever member 10340 can be configured to be moved to the first position using the first moving means when the touch performance is executed, and if the timing for executing the variable operation performance using the lever member 10340 has not been set, that is, if there is no limit on the period until the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position, the lever member 10340 can be configured to be moved to the first position using the second moving means. In this way, by varying the speed at which the lever member 10340 is moved depending on the situation, it is possible to prevent more load than necessary from being applied to the lever member 10340.

In addition, as in the second control example and the third modified example described above, in a pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute a first variable operation presentation in which the variable operation means is moved from the first position to the second position using a variable operation means configured to be movable between the first position and the second position based on the player's operation, and a second variable operation presentation in which the variable operation means is moved from the second position to the first position, and further configured to be able to execute a movement control in which the variable operation means is moved to the first position or the second position without being based on the player's operation, the second variable operation presentation may be executed, and while the player is executing an operation to move the variable operation means toward the first position, the first movement means, the second movement means, etc. may be used to move the variable operation means toward the first position, and there may be cases in which the first movement means, the second movement means, etc. are not used.

By configuring it in this way, when the player operates the variable operation means, it is possible to vary the force (pressing force) applied by the player to the variable operation means. Therefore, by varying the operation feel of the player when the variable operation means is moved in the same direction as a variable operation presentation, the presentation effect can be enhanced. In this case, it is preferable to configure the force (pressing force) applied by the player to the variable operation means to be variable depending on the presentation result of the variable operation presentation. Also, when executing the first variable operation presentation described above, it is also possible to configure the force (pressing force) applied by the player to the variable operation means to be variable depending on the presentation result of the variable operation presentation using the first moving means, second moving means, etc.

As explained above, in this second control example, in a state in which a high probability state for normal symbols is set (high probability state, time-saving state), the high probability state for normal symbols is transitioned to a low probability state based on winning a small jackpot in the special symbol lottery. In other words, as a condition (time-saving end condition) for transitioning the high probability state for normal symbols to a low probability state, in addition to the first time-saving end condition (reaching 100 special symbol fluctuations) also set in the first control example described above, a second time-saving end condition (winning a small jackpot) is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing for transitioning the high probability state for normal symbols to a low probability state.

In this control example, there are multiple small win types (small win A, small win B) that are set when a small win is won, and the above-mentioned second time-saving end condition is met when the set small win type is a specific small win type (small win A). By configuring it in this way, the high probability state of the normal pattern transitions to a low probability state only when a specific small win type is won, making it possible to set cases where the high probability state of the normal pattern ends and cases where it does not end based on a small win. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the normal pattern transitions to a low probability state.

Furthermore, like the first control example described above, this control example is configured to transition the high probability state of the normal pattern to a low probability state at the start of the special pattern variation, and even when the high probability state of the normal pattern is transitioned to a low probability state based on a small jackpot win, the high probability state of the normal pattern is transitioned to a low probability state at the start of the special pattern variation. In this way, by making the timing of ending the high probability state of the normal pattern the same regardless of what the trigger is for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what the trigger is for ending the high probability state of the normal pattern.

Furthermore, in this control example, the second time-saving end condition described above is established when a specific small win type (small win A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice). By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing for transitioning from a high probability state of normal patterns to a low probability state.

In this control example, when the first time-saving end condition or the second time-saving end condition described above is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal pattern is transitioned to a low probability state. However, without being limited to this, for example, when both the first time-saving end condition and the second time-saving end condition are satisfied, the high probability state of the normal pattern may be transitioned to a low probability state. In addition, the order in which the first time-saving end condition and the second time-saving end condition are satisfied may be specified. For example, when the second time-saving end condition is satisfied after the first time-saving end condition is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal pattern may be transitioned to a low probability state.

In addition, in this control example, when the second time-saving end condition is met based on winning a small prize in the special prize lottery, the high probability state of the normal pattern is transitioned to a low probability state. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to transition the high probability state of the special pattern to a low probability state based on winning a small prize in the special prize lottery. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the timing when the high probability state of the special pattern transitions to a low probability state.

In the second control example described above, the second time-saving end condition is established when a specific small win (small win A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice), but it may be configured to be possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that a specific small win (small win A) that can establish the second time-saving end condition has been won when a high probability state for normal patterns is set, and it is preferable to configure the presentation mode of the suggested effect to be variable when the number of times that a specific small win (small win A) that can establish the second time-saving end condition has been won reaches a quasi-establishment number that is less than the number of wins that establish the second time-saving end condition.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to predict the period until the second time-saving end condition is established when the high probability state of the normal pattern is set. In addition, the above-mentioned suggestive performance may be executed during the variable display of the special pattern to indicate that a specific small win (small win A) has been won, or may be executed at the timing when the special pattern is displayed stationary (determined display) in a display mode indicating that a specific small win (small win A) has been won, or may be executed during the small win game corresponding to the specific small win (small win A), or may be executed during the variable special pattern after the small win game corresponding to the specific small win (small win A) has ended.

In addition, a variation time that cannot be set by other lottery results may be set as the variation time of the special pattern that can be set when a specific small prize (small prize A) is won, and a configuration may be made in which a variation time that cannot be set by other lottery results is ... next to a specific small prize (small prize A), and a configuration may be made in which a variation time that cannot be set by other lottery results is set as the variation time of the special pattern that can be set as the variation time of the special pattern that can be set as the variation time of the special pattern that can be set as the variation time of the special pattern that can be set as the variation time of the special pattern.

In the second control example described above, a variable operation means (lever member 10340) is provided that can move between a first position (origin position) and a second position (operation position), and a variable operation presentation can be executed using the variable operation means. Then, after executing control (presentation preparation control) to move the variable operation means from the first position to the second position using an electrical drive means (drive motor, etc.), a variable operation presentation can be executed to move the variable operation means toward the first position for the player.

By using a variable operation presentation in this way, it is possible to execute a presentation in which the operating means is displaced significantly relative to the player, providing the player with a powerful presentation. In addition, because the variable operating means can be moved toward the first position by the player's operation, it is possible to easily omit the process of returning the variable operating means to the first position (origin position) after the execution of the variable operation presentation.

A position discrimination means is provided to discriminate the position of the variable operation means at the timing when the execution period of the variable operation presentation has elapsed, and if the discrimination result of the position discrimination means determines that the variable operation means is not located in the first position, the system is configured to facilitate execution of the variable operation presentation.

This makes it easier for the player to return the variable operation means to the first position by operating the variable operation means. If it is determined that the variable operation means is not in the first position even though the variable operation presentation has been performed a predetermined number of times during the period in which the state that makes it easier to execute the above-mentioned variable operation presentation is set, a return process is executed using an electric drive source (drive motor) to return the variable operation means to the first position.

This makes it possible to prevent excessive variable operation effects from being executed for players who do not want to operate the variable operation means, which would reduce their motivation to play. Furthermore, in this second control example, in order to make it easier for the player to execute the above-mentioned return process when they have released their hands from the variable operation means, the system is configured to execute a touch effect for operating an operation means (touch sensor) other than the variable operation means.

This allows the return process to be executed while the player is operating the touch sensor, making it difficult for the player to realize that the return process has been executed. It also prevents the return process from being executed while the player is holding the variable operation means, which would place excessive strain on the variable operation means and cause it to break down.

In the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 that can move between the first position and the second position is used as the variable operation means, but the configuration of the variable operation means is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be movable between the first position, the second position, and a third position that is different, or it may be configured to be able to move to the third position only after moving from the first position to the second position. Also, it may be configured to combine a pressing operation and a moving operation, and for example, it may be configured to be able to move between the first position and the second position by pressing a specific pressing portion.

In addition, as drive control of the electric drive source (drive motor) for the variable operation means, a return-to-origin process that moves the variable operation means to the origin position may be executed in the start-up process (start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113) executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, or when a specific performance is being executed, a lock control may be executed using the electric drive source (drive motor) to prevent the variable operation means from moving. In addition, as a lock control that restricts the movement of the variable operation means, a stopper (for example, a pin that is protruded by a solenoid drive) may be provided in the movement path of the variable operation means.

In each of the above control examples, the main control unit 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the voice lamp control unit 113 each time the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (i.e., when it increases or decreases, respectively), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the reserved number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 only when the value (N) of the special pattern 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control unit 110. In addition, the voice lamp control unit 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special pattern 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when it receives a variable pattern command transmitted from the main control unit 110. This reduces the number of times the main control unit 110 transmits reserved number commands to the voice lamp control unit 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control unit 113 receives reserved number commands, respectively, thereby reducing the control burden on the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113.

In each of the above control examples, the entry into the first ball entrance 64 and the passage through the through gate 67 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). In addition, the number of reserved balls displayed in the variable display based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 may be displayed in a part of the third pattern display device 81 as numbers, or in four divided areas with different modes (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) depending on the number of reserved balls, and a light-emitting element such as a lamp may be provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls may be notified by the light-emitting element.

As shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertical scrolling of the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but may be a display in which the pattern moves vertically or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. The dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern, but also includes, for example, a performance display in which one or more characters are displayed in a variety of movements or changes together with the pattern or separately from the pattern. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third pattern.

In each of the above control examples, the third pattern display for showing the player the lottery results for each pattern is performed by one display means (third pattern display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, different display means may be provided for displaying the main pattern that is highlighted and displayed to the player among the third patterns, and for displaying the secondary patterns. In addition, the display means may be configured to be configured other than a liquid crystal display.

In each of the above control examples, a right-hand hit game is executed to target the right area of the game board 13 in a game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and a left-hand hit game is executed to target the left area of the game board 13 in a normal game state. However, it is sufficient to change the area of the game board 13 targeted depending on the game state, and a left-hand hit game may be executed during a time-saving state and a right-hand hit game may be executed during a normal state. In addition, a game may be configured to be executable in different game states while targeting the same area.

In each of the above control examples, the frame button 22 is used as the operation means that the player can operate, which is determined by the player pressing it, but other configurations may be used, such as a lever-shaped operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player tilting it left and right or forward and backward, a touch sensor type operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by the player contacting or approaching it, or a wireless operation means that can determine whether it has been operated by emitting a predetermined radio wave. In addition, some or all of the operation controls of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c may be configured to be executed by the voice lamp control device 113 side instead of the main control device 110.

In each of the above control examples, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the process for setting the display mode in the performance executed using the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is executed by the main control device 110, which is different from the voice lamp control device 113. However, without being limited to this, the process for executing the game (lottery) and the process for displaying the result of the game (lottery) as a performance may be executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute multiple different processes with one control device.

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine that is different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly referred to as a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value by making the ball enter a predetermined area as a necessary condition after the jackpot pattern is displayed. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered as a necessary condition by making the ball enter the special area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a combination of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) related to the jackpot lottery in multiple stages, and is configured so that the settings can be changed by the gaming parlor. In addition to pachinko machines, it may also be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that combine a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

A representative example of a pachinko machine with multiple settings is one that allows the combination of jackpot probabilities (a combination of the jackpot probability in a low probability state and the jackpot probability in a high probability state) to be set to one of multiple levels (e.g., six levels), but is not limited to this. Instead of or in addition to the combination of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine may be implemented that allows the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) that is determined in the event of a jackpot to be changed according to the setting. That is, the ratio of a jackpot type that is advantageous to the player to be determined according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot type that is disadvantageous to the player to be determined may be changed. More specifically, for example, the ratio of a jackpot with a large number of rounds (e.g., 16 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, or the ratio of a jackpot with a small number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds) to be determined may be changed according to the setting, thereby varying the degree of advantage for each setting. Also, for example, the rate at which a jackpot that gives a large number of time-saving times (e.g., 100 times) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that gives a small number of time-saving times (e.g., 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to a favorable game state (e.g., a probability change state) after the jackpot is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which a jackpot that transitions (or is likely to transition) to an unfavorable game state (e.g., a normal state) may be determined may be varied according to the setting. Also, a configuration may be provided in which a jackpot type that is determined at a significantly higher rate only in a specific setting (almost never determined in other settings) is provided. Specifically, for example, the setting may be configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most favorable setting may be set to setting 6. Then, in setting 6, a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2% when a jackpot occurs, while a jackpot with 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01% in other settings. By configuring in this way, the possibility of the most advantageous setting 6 being the most likely to occur when the jackpot ends after six rounds is extremely high, so that the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 time-saving times are given after the jackpot ends may be higher than in other settings. By configuring in this way, the player can play the game while paying attention to the number of times the time-saving state ends. Also, instead of or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot entry port (or the role inside the jackpot entry port) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during the execution of the jackpot game may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be more likely to be determined in a specific setting (the ratio of being determined is higher). Also, when the combination of jackpot probabilities is changed according to the settings, in a low probability state, the more advantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability, while in a probability variable state, the more disadvantageous the setting is to the player, the higher the jackpot probability may be. This configuration is particularly effective in gaming machines of a type in which the more times the special symbols are drawn in the probability variable state, the easier it is to increase the number of balls held (the more prize balls are paid out than the number of game balls fired). More specifically, for example, the probability variable state continues until the next jackpot is won, and by applying this to a gaming machine of a type in which the probability variable state has a high probability of resulting in a small jackpot, the advantage of a high setting can be further enhanced. In other words, if the probability of a jackpot is low in the probability variable state, the number of draws until the next jackpot tends to be large, and there are also more opportunities to win small jackpots and win prize balls. Therefore, when the probability variable state is reached, it becomes easier to win more prize balls until the next jackpot, which is advantageous for the player.

Furthermore, in each of the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, a first special symbol and a second special symbol, are used as the multiple special symbol types, but the types of special symbols are not limited to this, and three or more special symbol types may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Also, in each of the above embodiments, a game feature in which multiple special symbols are drawn (varied) according to predetermined rules and a game feature in which the symbols are drawn (varied) independently of one another are described, but the game features described in each embodiment may be interchanged or combined.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, the operation lever is operated to change the symbols, and the stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information and then displays the finalized identification information, in which the variable display of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the variable display of the identification information is stopped and finalized due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

The above-mentioned embodiments and control examples may be configured in whole or in part in combination.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<Points on how to make the player push in from the back to the front>
A gaming machine A1, characterized in that the operating device has an operating means which is operated by a player by pushing it, the operating device is capable of being configured into a first state under normal circumstances and a second state in which the operating means is positioned in a position which protrudes further from the player than in the first state, the operating means is provided with a biasing means which biases the operating means from the first state towards the second state, and the direction in which the operating means is pushed in the second state is from the back to the front as viewed by the player.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, in order to perform a performance in a manner that heightens the player's sense of expectation of a big win at the advanced position, the player is likely to operate the operating means at the advanced position with high acceleration, so it is necessary to design the operating means to be strong. In this case, there is a problem that the operating means becomes heavy as a whole, and the driving means for driving the operating means becomes large.

In contrast, according to gaming machine A1, when a push operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operating means is from the back to the front as viewed by the player, so the portion of the operation that cannot be completed with a simple straight up and down movement is made to slip between the player's hand and the operating means, and the momentum of the push can be released.

In addition, when a player is playing in a position where he or she is pushing and operating the operating means mainly with the shoulders and elbows,
Since it becomes difficult to apply force in the forward direction, the player can naturally apply less force to the operating means.

In the gaming machine A1, the operating device is rotatable around an axis located at the back side relative to the player, and is equipped with a tilting means that is configured to be tiltable up and down around the axis and has the operating means, and the tilting means is configured to position the operating means facing away from the player in the second state.

According to gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and by positioning the operating means facing away from the player in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from slamming the operating means when in the second state.

Furthermore, by placing a hand near the shaft and tilting the hand using that position as a fulcrum, the operating means can be easily pushed in, providing a new method of pushing that is less likely to accelerate, and preventing damage to the operating device due to the player's pushing operation.

Examples of the new pressing operation methods include a method in which the outer side of the left little finger is placed near the axis rod, the hand is positioned near the operating means with the palm raised vertically, and the thumb side is tilted toward the operating means; and a method in which the tip of the middle finger is placed near the axis rod, the palm is positioned facing the operating means, and the palm is dropped toward the operating means.

The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is the up and down direction.

According to gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 or A2, the direction of the pushing operation of the operating means in the first state is vertical, so that it is possible to prevent damage due to the pushing operation in the second state while ensuring operability in the first state.

Gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the operating device in gaming machine A3 is configured so that the operating means can operate automatically and is equipped with a driving means that generates a driving force for the automatic operation, and the driving force of the driving device acts in the direction in which the player pushes in and does not act in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that it is possible to prevent the driving force from acting in a direction opposite to the operation direction of the player, and therefore it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by configuring the button so that it can only be pressed in, it is possible to prevent the drive means from being subjected to a high load caused by the player pulling the button in the opposite direction when retracting the button.

In the gaming machine A4, a maintaining state for maintaining the operating device in a first state or a second state can be formed, and maintaining means operated by the drive means is provided, the drive means has a rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means via an eccentric portion, the rotating means is capable of changing phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is in the maintaining state, and between the first phase and the second phase, a range within which the operating means can move when the maintaining state is released is changed, and in both the first phase and the second phase,
The gaming machine A5 is configured so that the maintained state can be released by the same rotation.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the drive means can be changed while the maintaining means is in the maintaining state, and in the changed phase, the rotation means is caused to perform a movement to release the maintaining state, thereby changing the movement width of the operation device by the biasing means. Therefore, it is possible to configure a plurality of operation modes by the biasing means.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the biasing direction of the biasing means in the maintaining state, the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating means, and the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.A gaming machine A6 is configured in such a manner that the maintaining means is movable in the biasing direction of the biasing means in the maintaining state, the moving speed of the maintaining means increases or decreases corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating means, and the operating means moves in accordance with the movement of the maintaining means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the gaming machine A6 adds a movement mode of the operating means that moves in the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means, which is caused only by the biasing force, and thus the movement mode of the operating means is limited to one, so that the operating means can be moved in a different manner following the maintaining means, thereby increasing the variety of the movement modes of the operating means. This can increase the attention of the operating device.

A gaming machine A7 is any one of gaming machines A1 to A6, which is provided with a light-emitting means disposed inside the operating device and which emits light toward a player, and which is characterized in that, compared to the first state, in the second state, the area of the operating means is reduced from the player's viewpoint and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light-emitting means is expanded.

According to gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines A1 to A6, it is equipped with a light-emitting means, and compared to the first state, in the second state, from the player's viewpoint, the range of light emitted by the light-emitting means is expanded and the area of the operating means is reduced, so that the player can focus his/her attention on the light and the presentation effect is improved, and by making it difficult to press the operating means unless aimed, the force required by the player to operate it can be reduced.

Gaming machine A8 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and the area of the exposed portion of the light-emitting means changes as the operating means moves toward or away from the display means between the operating means and the display means.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transparent material, and as the operating means moves towards or away from the display means between the operating means and the display means, the area of the exposed portion of the light-emitting means changes, thereby preventing the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making the image on the display means difficult to see.

<Key points for making it possible to respond to repeated hits while keeping the repulsive force small under normal circumstances>
In an operating device having an operating means that allows a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, the device has a first state and a second state in which the range of operation up to the terminal position is wider than that of the first state.
a first driving means for generating a driving force to move the operating means from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means for generating a biasing force to move the operating means from the first state to the second state, the gaming machine being characterized in that it further comprises a second driving means for generating a driving force to move the operating means from the first state to the second state in response to the operation of a player.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the force for returning the operating means to its initial position is generated by a spring, and the automatic operation of the operating means is performed by a drive motor. In this case, however, the return of the operating means becomes slower, and when the player operates the operating means quickly, the operating means does not keep up with the player's operation, making it difficult for the player to perform repeated tapping operations.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the biasing force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the first driving means is used to move the operating means, while the second driving means can be used when it is desired to return the operating means quickly.
The operating means can be pushed back by the driving means to make the return faster, allowing the player to enjoy repeated tapping operations.

In the gaming machine B1, a rapid-fire determination means is provided for determining whether or not a rapid-fire operation is being performed based on the sensor detection value of the stroke of the operating means within a specified time, and the detection value of the rapid-fire determination means is used to determine whether or not to drive the second driving means.

According to gaming machine B2, whether or not to drive the second drive means is determined based on the detection value of the rapid-fire determination means, so that the second drive means operates even when the player is not performing a rapid-fire operation (for example, performing a single push operation or a long push operation), thereby preventing the player from feeling the strain of having his hand pushed back.

A gaming machine B3 is provided with an end detection means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether the operating means has been placed at the end position, a position difference detection means for detecting whether the operating means has been placed at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position, and a movement direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operating means from the time relationship between the detection values of the end detection means and the detection values of the position difference detection means, and is characterized in that the second drive means is driven when the movement direction determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction of returning from the push-in end to the first state.

According to gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction returning from the end of the push-in to the first state, that is, at the timing when the player's hand moves in the direction away from the button, a load pushing back against the operating means can be generated in synchronization with the player's movement.

Therefore, the second drive device operates in a direction opposite to the direction of movement of the player's hand, thereby preventing a high load from being placed on the player's hand.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is composed of a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to effectively utilize the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor to generate a driving force for moving the operating means.

Gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B3, and is provided with a support frame supporting the operating means, the second drive means comprising a drive motor which rotates an eccentric weight, and support means which elastically supports the drive motor on the support frame, the support means being configured such that the drive force which moves the operating means from the first state position to the second state position becomes greater as the operating means approaches the terminal position, and the eccentric weight abuts against the support frame when the operating means is positioned at the terminal position, generating a drive force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force of the second driving means is generated separately as a driving force generated by the support means and a driving force generated by the abutment of the eccentric weight with the support frame, so that the driving force applied to the operating means can be adjusted while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor. At this time, it is not necessary to control the start or stop of the rotation of the drive motor, and it can be adjusted while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

In gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves toward the support frame in the movement direction of the operating means and abuts against the support frame based on the operating means being placed at the terminal position.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight approaches the support frame in the moving direction of the operating means and abuts against the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the abutment can be used to move the drive motor in the moving direction of the operating means away from the support frame. As a result, the support means supporting the drive motor moves in the direction away from the support frame (direction approaching the operating means), so that the drive force pushing back the operating means can be further increased.

<Key points for using VCM as a braking device and vibration production device>
A gaming machine C1 is provided with a detection sensor that detects a position near the end position of an operating means, the detection sensor being composed of a plurality of sensors, and is provided with a measurement means that measures the speed of the operating means from the detection interval of the detection sensor, a threshold determination means that determines whether the measurement value measured by the measurement means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and a repulsion means that generates a driving force in the opposite direction to the pushing direction of the operating means, wherein the driving force generated by the repulsion means is greater when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold, compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if emphasis is placed on light operation by the player, the operating resistance is low, and there is a risk that the operating means may be damaged by the player's operation, whereas if the operating means is supported more firmly, the movement of the operating means itself can be slowed down, and the possibility of the operating means being damaged can be reduced, but the force required for the player to operate the operating means increases, and there is a problem that operating the operating means is a burden for players with little strength.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operating means is equal to or greater than a threshold, and if it is equal to or greater than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased, so that the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold is reduced, and the operating means is decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsion means can improve operability and prevent damage.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, and when a threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, a control is executed to push the voice coil motor to an extended position, and before the operating means is placed in a position where it can come into contact with the voice coil motor,
A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled to decelerate the operating means, and by driving the voice coil motor before the operating means is positioned so that it can come into contact with the voice coil motor, the impact that occurs between the operating means and the voice coil motor can be suppressed.

A gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operating means and the voice coil motor come into contact with each other, a control is performed to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor.

According to gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines C1 or C2, by controlling the current flowing through the voice coil motor to be increased after the operating means and voice coil motor come into contact with each other, it is possible to gradually increase the degree to which the operating means is braked while preventing a large load from occurring at the moment the operating means and voice coil motor come into contact with each other, thereby reducing the discomfort felt by the player when operating the operating means.

In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be able to come into contact with the operating means, and generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation caused by the movement of the operating means by using spring elasticity.

According to gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity, so that a driving force can be generated without time delay even when the movement speed of the operating means is high.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means opposite the side that comes into contact with the operating means is narrowed when the value measured by the threshold determination means is above a predetermined threshold, compared to when the value measured by the threshold determination means is below the predetermined threshold.

According to gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repulsion means opposite the end that abuts the operating means is narrowed, so that the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased when the operating speed of the operating means is faster.

<The clutch cuts off the transmission of driving force, preventing damage to the driving means>
A gaming machine D1 having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force to operate the operating means; a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means; and a release means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the release means releasing the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmission means reaches or exceeds a predetermined amount.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which an operating means that can be operated by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (for example, JP 2014-14421 A).
(See Publication No. 8.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the operating means is automatically operated for a performance, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, there is a risk of a large load being generated in the drive system.

In contrast, according to gaming machine D1, the release means is configured to release the transmission of the drive force when the load generated between the drive means and the operating means via the transmission means reaches or exceeds a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if a player operates the operating means when the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is released (disconnected), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed.

Gaming machine D2 is characterized in that in gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and in a second direction which is opposite to the first direction, and the release means functions to release the drive regardless of whether the drive is in the first direction or the second direction.

Here, in the case where whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be released depends on the operating direction of the driving means,
If the player operates the operating means to drive the driving means in a direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released, a large load may be placed on the driving means, which reduces the freedom of presentation when operating the operating means.

When the button is driven between the first and second positions, the locking member that locks the button is moved in the release direction or in the direction opposite to the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates forward or backward. In this case, the button can be operated in two ways (a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but the drive force must be cut off in both cases.

In contrast, gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine D1, can release (disconnect) the transmission of driving force in both driving directions, regardless of the driving direction of the driving means, thereby improving the freedom of operation in the presentation in which the operating means is automatically operated.

In addition, as a method of releasing the transmission, for example, the clutch may move in a direction intersecting with the operating direction of the drive means. The intersecting direction is intended to exclude, for example, the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the direction of the rotation axis or in the radial direction.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, it is provided with a biasing means for biasing the drive means and the transmission means into a state in which a drive force can be transmitted, and the release means is a convex portion formed at the abutment portion between the drive means and the transmission means, and is provided with engaging teeth that transmit the drive force when they are in an engaged state, and the engaging teeth are configured with a shape that is inclined relative to the abutment surface so that both sides facing the operating direction of the drive means become tapered as they move away from the abutment surface.

According to gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the drive means and the transmission means together, and at the contact surface against which they are pressed, the release means transmits the drive force in an engaged state, while both sides facing the operating direction of the drive means are provided with engaging teeth that are inclined in a tapered manner as they move away from the contact surface, so that the engagement of the engaging teeth allows the transmission means to be separated from the drive means, thereby releasing the transmission of the drive force.

In addition, a biasing force is constantly applied between the drive means and the transmission means by the biasing means, and a load is applied by the biasing force in the operating direction of the drive means via the engagement teeth when the transmission means separates from the drive means, so that a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between a state in which the drive force is transmitted and a state in which the transmission is released can be suppressed.

The size of the engaging portion of the engaging teeth becomes smaller in the circumferential direction of the transmission means as the transmission means becomes farther away from the drive means, so that it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large.

Additionally, in the released state, resistance periodically returns, rather than being completely removed upon release, allowing the player to begin operating the button within a short period of time after releasing it.

That is, as a "performance," when the button is activated and the player is holding the button,
If the player releases the button midway through the action, the button will stop moving for a long period of time, and the action will start from the end of that phase.
This reduces the sense that "things are starting to move now that players are no longer burdened."

In contrast, with the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his/her hand and the load is released, which creates the feeling that the player has started moving because the load on the player has been released.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is:
A gaming machine D4 characterized in that it is formed from interlocking sawtooth shapes.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, it is possible to facilitate early return of the release means to the engagement position with the transmission means when the load from the player is released.
That is, if there is a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate at the tip of the engagement surface, it is possible to prevent the transmission means and the release means from butting against each other at that plane, thereby preventing the release means from stopping its movement along the direction in which it approaches and separates from the transmission means. Therefore, it is possible to start operating the operating means early after the load from the player is released.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines D1 to D4, the operating mode of the operating means is different when the drive means is operated continuously in the forward direction and when the drive means is operated continuously in the reverse direction.

According to gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D4, while multiple operating modes of the operating means are provided, the transmission of driving force can be released without being limited to any one of the operating modes.

In gaming machine D5, the operating mode of the operating means is such that when the drive means operates in the forward or reverse direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the drive means is similar, but the operation after the predetermined period has elapsed is different.

According to gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, when the operating mode of the operating means is such that the operating mode of the driving means has a different operating direction, the operating mode for a predetermined period from the start of operation of the driving means is similar, but the operation after the predetermined period has elapsed is different, thereby improving the player's attention to the operating means.

Here, by linking the difference in the operation mode of the operating means with information that benefits the player, such as the probability of winning a big win, the player can be made to watch the operation of the operating means for a predetermined period of time until the operation mode of the operating means changes.

Furthermore, since the difference in the operating mode is caused by the difference in the operating direction of the drive means, if the operating direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the likelihood of winning a jackpot, etc., without watching the operation of the operating means. However, since the drive means is usually hidden from the player, and the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sounds, etc., it is not possible to confirm the operating direction of the drive means in advance, and the player can watch the operation of the operating means.

<The position of the cam protrusion changes based on the rotation of the cam>
A gaming machine having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means; a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means; a first means for suppressing a change in position of the operating means from the first position, configured to operate the operating means between a first position and a second position different from the first position; a biasing means for biasing the operating means in a direction from the first position to the second position; and a terminal means for forming a changeable end of movement of the operating means moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means. The first means suppresses the change in position of the operating means by engaging with the operating means, and comprises a release load means for applying a load to the first means for releasing the engagement of the first means with the operating means, and the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change in the end of movement of the operating means at the terminal means are performed by a single driving means.
1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a movable operating means operated by a cam is fixed at a first position, and the fixed state is released by a release load means, so that the operating means is extended by the biasing force of the biasing means, and the displacement amount of the extended operation can be changed by a terminal means (for example, see JP 2014-144218 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the displacement amount of the extended operation of the operating means is changed depending on the phase of the cam at the time of release of the fixation, so that the phase of the cam at the time of release of the fixation is changed in various ways, and therefore the cam that moves the operating means and the release load means that releases the fixation are operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there was a problem that multiple driving means were required, and the arrangement space for the driving means was large.

In contrast, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixed operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. This allows the drive means for changing the terminal position of the operation means by the terminal means and the drive means for moving the release load means to be used together, thereby making it possible to reduce the number of drive means.

A gaming machine E2, in which the change in position of the release load means is effected based on the operation of the transmission means in the gaming machine E1.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the change in the position of the releasing load means can be caused based on the operation of the transmission means, so that the state of the releasing load means can be determined by detecting the amount of operation of the transmission means. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detection means such as position sensors that detect the state of the releasing load means, and therefore the number of parts.

As a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a protrusion that rotates coaxially with the cam, there is a method of shifting the rotational periods of the cam and the protrusion, or a method of desynchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion when the cam is placed at a predetermined phase and synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the protrusion at other phases.
Illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means, by the load applied from the first means,
A gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is arranged operatively relative to the transmission means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously or not.

According to gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, a release load means is arranged so as to be operable relative to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the operation of the release load means switches whether the release load means and the transmission means operate synchronously or not, so that the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding any components.

In gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a rotating first rotating member, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means includes a rotating second rotating member, and the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

According to gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but have different rotation periods, so that multiple types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by the second rotating means abutting against the first means at a predetermined phase.

According to this configuration, when the operation means is maintained in the first position, the action of the first means is released and the operation means moves toward the second position, and multiple types of end positions can be prepared.
For example, a similar configuration can be used to realize a performance in which the terminal position is gradually moved away from the first position, or a performance in which the terminal position is gradually moved closer to the first position.

<Vibration device supported by a soft case>
A gaming machine F1 is provided with an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating means being configured so that the operating means can move between a first position and a second position reached by the player operating the operating means from the first position, a vibration means having a vibrating vibration unit, and a receiving means arranged so that it can come into contact with the vibration unit, wherein when the operating means is arranged at the first position, the vibration unit is in a separated state so that it cannot come into contact with the receiving means, and when the operating means is arranged at the second position, the vibration unit is in an abutting state so that it can come into contact with the receiving means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player and a vibration means that transmits vibrations to the player via the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine (for example,
(See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the vibration means vibrates, regardless of whether the operating means is being operated or not, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine, and is then transmitted to the player who touches the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Therefore, when performing an effect in which vibration is transmitted immediately after the operating means is operated,
The vibration means must be operated after the operation of the operating means is detected. Therefore, after the player operates the operating means, the vibration means must be operated before the player releases his/her hand from the operating means. Depending on the manner of operation of the player (for example, the manner of operation in which the operating means is pressed in and then released), the start of vibration may not occur in time before the player releases his/her hand, which causes a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine F1, whether the vibration unit abuts against the receiving means changes depending on whether the operating means is placed in the first position or is operated by the player to place it in the second position, so even if the vibration unit is vibrated continuously, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operating means. Also, since the vibration of the vibration unit occurs before the player presses it, the vibration unit can be vibrated before the player releases his/her hand regardless of the manner of the player's operation, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player.

In the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is arranged in the separated state to extend into the occupied area that the operating means occupies when the operating means is arranged in the second position, and when the operating means moves to the second position, the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area, thereby changing to the abutting state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, and thus the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. Therefore, the contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibration unit can be changed depending on the degree of movement of the operating means.
The strength of the vibration transmitted can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the vibration transmitted in response to the strength of the player's operation can be achieved by vibrating the vibration means in the same manner, without any particular change in the drive mode.

Gaming machine F3 is the gaming machine F1 or F2, characterized in that the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via a supporting means having spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines F1 and F2, the support means can be used to position the receiving means while suppressing the transmission of vibrations from the vibration means to the receiving means. This allows the receiving means and the vibration means to be spaced apart, preventing the transmission of vibrations and suppressing the displacement of the vibration means caused by vibrations.

Gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in the abutting state of gaming machine F3, the support means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibration section.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the support means can be utilized to increase the load generated when the vibration part and the receiving means come into contact with each other. That is, the expansion and contraction of the support means can provide momentum to the vibration part when it moves in the direction approaching the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means has a deformation resistance along the movement direction of the operating means,
The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction of the operating means is lower than that in a direction perpendicular to the operating direction.

According to gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine F3, the direction in which the support means deforms can be finely set when the operating means is operated and interferes with the support means, due to differences in the deformation resistance of the support means.

As a result, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the support means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibration part and the receiving means can be made different.

Examples of methods for varying the deformation resistance include, when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, extending rubber feet along the direction of movement of the operating means; when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding to vary the deformation resistance for each direction; and, when the support means is composed of a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, forming the support means from a rail that guides the operating means to move in a direction along the direction of movement and a coil spring that biases the vibration means along the direction of movement of the operating means.

Gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the portion with which the vibration portion abuts in gaming machine F3 is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means separate from the operating means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but via a receiving means which is a means separate from the operating means, so that the vibration of the vibration means is prevented from being transmitted to the drive means via the operating means and the transmission means, and therefore the drive means is prevented from being placed under a load, thereby improving the durability of the drive means.

In addition, since vibrations can be prevented from being transmitted to the hands of the player operating the operating means, it is possible to prevent the player from being startled by the vibrations and stopping the operation.

Examples of receiving means include parts of the frame of the gaming machine near the upper tray where the gaming balls are supplied, the edge of the glass frame, and other parts that a player may touch unconsciously while playing, as well as storage parts that partially surround the operating means.

<One-touch attachment of cam and shaft. Shape can be deformed (elastically deformed) at the attachment part>
A gaming machine G1 has an operating means operated by a player, the operating means being configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, the operating device comprising: a driving means for generating a driving force to drive the operating means; and a transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, the transmission means comprising a deformation section that elastically deforms when overloaded.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include an operating means that can be operated by a player, a driving means that generates a driving force to drive the operating means, and a transmission means that transmits the driving force from the driving means to the operating means (see, for example, JP 2014-144218 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, when the player holds the operating means in a fixed position, the driving force generated by the driving means to drive the operating means may cause damage to the connecting portion between the transmission means and the operating means,
There has been a problem in that a load accumulates at the connection between the transmission means and the drive means, and this connection may be damaged.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine G1, when an overload is applied to the operating device, the deformation part of the transmission means elastically deforms, thereby reducing the load applied to the connection part between the operating means and the transmission means and the connection part between the drive means and the transmission means.

A gaming machine G2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine G1, the transmission means comprises a rotatably supported cam member, the deformation portion forms a connecting portion with the rotation shaft of the cam member, and a fixing force to the rotation shaft is generated by the elasticity of the deformation portion.

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation portion serves as a portion that is responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member relative to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and serves as a portion that generates a support force for the cam member relative to the rotation shaft.
Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the same function. For example, a separate fixing member such as an e-ring can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member has a convex portion that is convexly arranged parallel to the rotation axis, the convex portion is connected to the operating means, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotation axis tilts relative to the cam member.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can be achieved, for example, by displacing the protruding portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. In this case, however, it becomes difficult to configure the cam member and the protruding portion as one member, and there is a risk of the number of parts increasing.

In contrast, according to gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotation axis tilts relative to the cam member, so that the cam member can be easily constructed from a single component, and the components can be simplified, compared to when the convex portion is slidably moved relative to the cam member.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance to elastic deformation of the deformation portion is greater in a second rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line perpendicular to both the straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion and the extension direction of the rotation shaft, compared to a first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated around an axis that is a straight line connecting the rotation shaft and the convex portion.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3, by making the deformation resistance of the deformation part different for each direction, the state after the deformation part is elastically deformed can displace the protruding tip of the protruding part in a direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member compared to the state before the elastic deformation when viewed in the rotation axis direction. As a result, the protruding part of the cam member can be displaced along the direction in which the protruding part is about to move, and the load generated between the protruding part and the operating means can be alleviated by the elastic deformation of the deformation part.

A gaming machine G5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machines G3 or G4, it is provided with a friction member that is arranged a predetermined distance apart along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and when the deformation portion elastically deforms, the posture of the cam member changes and the cam member and the friction member abut.

According to gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operating means, the deformation portion elastically deforms, causing the cam member to change posture and bring the cam member into contact with the friction member, thereby increasing the operating resistance of the cam member itself and thereby reducing the load applied to the connection portion between the cam member and the operating means.

A gaming machine G6 is any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, characterized in that it is provided with a detection means for detecting an inclination displacement of at least a portion of the cam member relative to the axis.

Here, in a situation where an overload is applied to the operating device and the operating means is not operating while the driving means is operating, for example, when detecting the occurrence of an overload based on the deviation between the displacement predicted by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period of time before detecting the occurrence of an overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means that detects the deviation in displacement is smaller, but the smaller the arrangement interval of the detection means, the more complex and expensive the configuration of the detection means becomes. Therefore, there was a problem in that it was difficult to configure the detection means to detect the occurrence of an overload at low cost and at an early stage.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detection means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member has been inclined relative to the axis, so that it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred as soon as the detection means detects at least a part of the cam member without the need to drive the drive means for a predetermined period while suppressing the number of additional detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

＜Structure to prevent balls from rattling. Gaming machine H＞
This game machine H1 is provided with a foul ball passage through which foul balls that flow back down toward the launching device among game balls launched into a game area can pass, and is characterized in that the foul ball passage is provided with a one-way obstruction means that allows the game balls flowing down to pass through and obstructs the progress of objects flowing backward.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a thread cutter is provided inside the guide path that guides the gaming ball from the upper tray to the launching device, and is equipped with a function to prevent fraudulent acts (cutting the thread) performed by shooting the gaming ball connected to the thread into the playing area (for example, JP 2015-02
(See Patent Publication No. 4179.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the string is pressed against the thread cutting teeth when the ball is released, and the string is cut by the tension generated at that time. If the strength of the game ball released is weak, the game ball may be returned to the player as a foul ball without the string being completely cut.
Therefore, for example, a cheating tool can be prepared with game balls connected to both ends of a string, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the string can be fired with a weak firing strength to send it into the foul ball passage, and while holding the one game ball that has been returned to the player, the other game ball connected to the other end of the string can be shot into the play area.This can remove the string from the guide path and create a state in which the one game ball and the other game ball are connected by the string through the foul ball passage, which can cause the problem that an external load can be applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, allowing the other game ball placed in the play area to be manipulated and an illegal advantage to be obtained.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine H1, even if a fraudulent act is committed by using a thread guided into the gaming area through the foul ball passage to put a load on the other gaming ball, the one-way obstruction means obstructs the movement of the thread in the reverse direction of the gaming ball, making it difficult to generate an illegal advantage.

In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage is provided with a bending portion that bends the flow path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the thread guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed against the bent portion, so that the thread can be cut early.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending part is provided with a load means on the inner corner side of the bend that does not apply a load to the game ball flowing down and applies a load to the object flowing backward.
.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to the object (for example, a thread-like member) flowing backward by the load means.

Gaming machine H4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H3, the load means is disposed in a recessed portion recessed with a width less than the diameter of a gaming ball.

According to gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine H3, by preventing the gaming ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, it is possible to avoid a collision between the load means and the gaming ball, and prevent damage to the load means.

Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H3 or H4, it is provided with a restricting means for restricting movement of said load means outwardly of said foul ball passage.

According to gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines H3 or H4, the regulating means regulates the movement of the load means outwardly of the foul ball passage, so that when a load is generated between the thread-like member and the load means, the load means deforms outwardly of the foul ball passage, thereby preventing the load applied to the member on the thread from weakening.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines H1 to H5, it is provided with a receiving tray which is the tray where the foul ball first arrives at the front side of the front door, and the payout ball discharge section which discharges the gaming balls paid out from the payout device into the receiving tray is located above the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage.

According to gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the payout device passes just before the discharge side exit of the foul ball passage, so that in the event of a fraudulent act of applying load to another gaming ball by using a thread guided into the playing area through the foul ball passage, the paid out gaming ball can be intentionally hit to apply load and reduce the durability of the thread.

Gaming machine H7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge section, which discharges gaming balls paid out from the payout device into a receiving tray, which is the tray that the foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is lower than the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the foul ball passage.

According to gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines H1 to H6, when a fraudulent act is committed in which a thread guided into the gaming area through a foul ball passage is used to put a load on another gaming ball, the gaming ball that is paid out can more easily damage the thread.

<Structure of the board holder. Gaming machine I>
A gaming machine I1 comprising: a gaming means used during play; and a receiving means that is open on one side facing the gaming means and can receive the gaming means from that side, the receiving means comprising a state change means that can change the gaming means from an unusable state in which the gaming means cannot be used to a usable state in which the gaming means can be used, the state change means comprising an approach means that approaches the gaming means from the one side when the gaming means is put into the usable state.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fixing means that is rotatable in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game board and changes state between a fixed state in which the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame (see, for example, JP 2005-230420 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the fixing means is configured to change state only after the game board is pushed into the position for use, so if the game board is only half-pushed in, it becomes necessary to repeat the work of pushing it in again, which may reduce work efficiency.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine I1, the state changing means is provided with an approaching means that approaches the gaming means from the receiving side (one side) when the gaming means is put into a usable state. Therefore, even if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, the approaching means abuts against the gaming board and applies a pushing force,
This has the effect of enabling the game board to be pushed into a position for use.

In the gaming machine I1, the state change means displaces the gaming means to one side when the state change means changes to an unusable state in which the gaming means is unusable.

According to gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine I1, when the gaming means is changed to an unusable state, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side), thereby improving the work efficiency of the operation of removing the gaming means.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state change means causes the approach means to retreat to the outside of the gaming means when the state change means renders the gaming means unusable.

According to gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines I1 or I2, the approaching means is retracted outside the gaming means, thereby improving the work efficiency of the work of removing the gaming means, and since this is done in conjunction with making the gaming means unusable, the work efficiency can be further improved.

Gaming machine I4, in any one of gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the state change means is provided with abutment means that receives a load from the playing means when the state is changed to the usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, the state-changing means changes to a usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means, so that the state of the state-changing means can be changed to a usable state in a series of steps by pressing the gaming means against the state-changing means.

Gaming machine I5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on one side of the receiving means by an axis and is configured to be received by the receiving means by bringing the other side close to it, and the state change means is arranged on the other side of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means is utilized to
A load can be efficiently applied to the contact means via the play means.

Gaming machine I6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines I1 to I5, it is provided with a blocking means for blocking the opening on one side of the receiving means, and the blocking means is provided with a blocking regulation section that makes the opening on one side of the gaming means unblockable when the state change means maintains an unusable state in which the gaming means is unusable.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can determine whether the gaming means is in a usable state or not depending on whether the blocking means can block one opening of the gaming means. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the blocking means blocks one opening of the gaming means even though the gaming means maintains an unusable state.

<The reverse cup and harness band prevent the piano wire from being knocked around. Gaming Machine J>
A gaming machine J1 comprising: a gaming means used during play; and a receiving means that is open on one side facing the gaming means and can receive the gaming means from that side, the receiving means comprising a positioning means that is disposed in a path that connects the gaming means to the outside, the positioning means being configured to be able to prevent the entry of objects from the outside at multiple locations.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a fraud prevention unit to prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a piano wire into the rotating shaft side of the front frame (for example, JP 2016-
(See, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 26573.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the fraud prevention unit is located in only one place, and this causes a problem that the fraud prevention effect is insufficient.

In contrast, in gaming machine J1, a placement means is provided in a path into which the piano wire may be inserted, and the placement means is configured to be able to prevent the piano wire from entering at multiple locations, thereby improving the effectiveness of fraud prevention.

In the gaming machine J1, the placement means includes a first means for suppressing entry of an external member at a first location, and a second means for suppressing entry of an external member at a second location.
A gaming machine J2 characterized by suppressing the intrusion of external components in different ways.

According to gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J1, the method of preventing the intrusion of external components differs between the first location and the second location of the placement means, so that the intrusion of external components can be further prevented compared to the case where the number of placement means is simply increased.

The method of preventing intrusion from the outside is not limited in any way. For example, a method of preventing intrusion by blocking a path or a method of preventing fraudulent acts by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

A gaming machine J3, in which the placement means in the gaming machine J1 or J2 is provided with an intrusion prevention portion formed from a cup shape that opens outward from the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines J1 and J2, the intrusion prevention portion is formed in a cup shape, so that the intruding member can be prevented from intruding further.

In gaming machine J3, the placement means is provided with a support means for supporting electrical wiring, and the support means is positioned downstream of the entry restriction section on the path from the outside to the gaming means.

According to gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine J3, when fraud occurs in which high heat penetrates the entry restriction section, changes that occur in the wiring due to the high heat (such as a break in the wiring due to heat) can be detected, making it easier to achieve the effect of suppressing the entry of external components.

In any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the placement means is configured to place a member inserted from the outside into the game machine.
A gaming machine J5 characterized by having a resolution means that guides a ball to a resolution area far from the gaming means.

According to gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines J1 to J4, the positioning means guides a member that has entered from the outside to a resolution area far from the gaming means, so that even if the degree of entry of the member that has entered from the outside increases, the member that has entered from the outside can be prevented from reaching the gaming means.

<The structure of the five-piece decorative plate. It also prevents fraud. Gaming machine K>
Gaming machine K1 comprises a first means and a second means arranged opposite each other along a first direction and having at least one side connected, and a third means disposed between the first means and the second means along the first direction, characterized in that the gaming machine K1 further comprises a connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means, and the connecting direction of the connecting portion is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with first and second means that are arranged opposite each other and connected by at least one side, and third means that is disposed between the first and second means along a first direction (see, for example, JP 2016-26573 A).
However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the various components are connected using existing methods such as gluing or screwing, and when the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied to the third means, which may cause damage to the third means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine K1, the connecting direction of the connecting part connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, so that the load applied to the third means from the first direction can be reduced, thereby preventing the third means from being damaged.

A gaming machine (K2) characterized in that, in the gaming machine (K1), the connecting portion is disposed at a distance from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

Gaming machine K3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K1 or K2, it is provided with a connecting means which is connected and fixed to other sides of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected by displacing the second means relative to the first means in a third direction close to the connecting means and fitting them together.

According to gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines K1 or K2, it is provided with a connecting means that is connected to other sides of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means is connected and fixed by engagement caused by displacing the second means relative to the first means in a third direction approaching the connecting means, thereby improving resistance to disassembly of the first means and the second means in a direction intersecting the third direction.

Gaming machine K4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K3, the one sides of the first means and the second means are arranged so as to be exposed outward.

According to gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and one side of the second means are exposed to the outside, so that the state of the mating portion can be easily confirmed.
This makes it possible to quickly detect fraudulent acts even if the mating portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled.

Gaming machine K5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same as the third direction.

According to gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of gaming machines K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction, so that the fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength due to the fastening.

Gaming machine K6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a light irradiating means that irradiates light toward the first means or second means and is fixed to the connected means, and a light guiding means that is fixed to one of the members of the first means or second means and is configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the interior, in any one of gaming machines K3 to K5.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent misalignment between the first means and the second means and the light guiding means.

A gaming machine K7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine K6, a contact means is provided that comes into face-to-face contact with the other member of the first means or the second means in an area facing the light guiding means.

According to gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine K6, a gap of the dimension of the abutment means can be maintained in the opposing area between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means.
This makes it possible to prevent the gap between the other member of the first means or second means and the light-guiding means from changing when the first means or second means is subjected to a load in the opposing direction and displaced.

This makes it possible to prevent the positional relationship between the first means, the second means and the light-guiding means from changing even if the first means or the second means is subjected to a load in the opposing direction when an attempt is made to illegally disassemble the first means or the second means.

<Point L that utilizes curved light guiding means. Point not yet achieved>
Gaming machine L1 comprises a light-guiding means that is formed in a curved wave shape when viewed in the direction of irradiation of light passing through the inside, and a projection means that is arranged opposite the light-guiding means and onto which the light that has passed through the light-guiding means is projected, wherein the projection means comprises a concave surface opposing portion that is arranged opposite the concave surface portion of the light-guiding means, and a convex surface opposing portion that is arranged opposite the convex surface portion of the light-guiding means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines equipped with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light incident from an end face (see, for example, JP 2016-26573 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, there is a problem in that in order to partially change the intensity of the light emitted from the surface, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine L1, the projection means includes a concave surface facing portion and a convex surface facing portion. Therefore, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guiding means is constant, the concave surface facing portion and the convex surface facing portion have the following characteristics:
The emission intensity of the projection target device can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projection means is characterized in that the concave surface facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex surface facing portion is made of a material that is less light-transmitting than the concave surface facing portion.

According to gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of light passing through the convex opposing portion, it is possible to improve the effect of the light presentation at the concave opposing portion where the light emitted from the light-guiding means is concentrated.

Gaming machine L3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine L2, it is provided with a counter projection means which is arranged on the opposite side of the projected means across the light guiding means and on which light which has passed through the light guiding means is projected, and that the counter projection means has a portion which is arranged opposite the concave portion of the light guiding means and a portion which is arranged opposite the convex portion of the light guiding means which are formed from a material having approximately the same light transmittance.

According to gaming machine L3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine L2, the portion of the counter projection means that is arranged opposite the concave portion of the light guiding means and the portion that is arranged opposite the convex portion of the light guiding means are formed from materials having approximately the same light transmittance, so that by making the same light incident on the light guiding means, the presentation of the light viewed through the projected means and the presentation of the light viewed through the counter projection means can be made different.

<Bass reflex speaker layout. M gaming machine>
A gaming machine M1 comprising first and second means arranged opposite each other and fixed to each other to form an internal space in a fixed state, an acoustic means disposed with at least a portion thereof inserted into the internal space, and a bending means for forming a bending path in the internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged on both the left and right ends of the front frame, and effects are produced by sounds output from the speakers (for example, JP 2016-1
In such a gaming machine, the vibration waves traveling toward the rear side of the speaker body are caused to travel to the center position of the gaming machine, and then sent out to the outside of the gaming machine.
While it is easy to create effects that produce low-pitched sounds, there was a problem in that the path length of the vibration waves was determined by the left-right width of the gaming machine.

In contrast, according to gaming machine M1, a bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means, so that by forming a path longer than the length of one side, the restrictions on the left and right width of the gaming machine can be lifted and the vibration wave can travel any distance.

In a gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in a manner in which a load is applied in opposing directions, and the bending means has a protruding portion that protrudes in a rib-like manner from at least one of the first means or the second means toward the other, and the protruding tip of the protruding portion abuts against the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion comes into contact with the other of the first means or the second means in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, thereby preventing the occurrence of a gap between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means when fastening and fixing, and therefore preventing a fluid such as a vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bent path.

Gaming machine M3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine M1 or M2, it has an opening that connects the internal space with the outside, and the opening is blocked by a passing member that connects the internal space with the outside through the opening and is connected to the acoustic means.

According to gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines M1 or M2, the opening is blocked by a passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that the wall constituting the internal space can be properly blocked by passing the passing member from the internal space to the outside, without the need to prepare an additional blocking member.

Gaming machine M4 is characterized in that in gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed on a side closer to the acoustic means than the protruding portion.

According to gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the acoustic means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, it is possible to prevent the wiring of the acoustic means from being pinched by the protruding portion and becoming disconnected.

Gaming machine M5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines M1 to M4, it is equipped with a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a performance means that is arranged below the support fastening means and performs performance associated with the game, and that the performance means supports the support fastening means from below.

According to gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines M1 to M4, the support and fastening means is supported from below by the presentation means, so that a heavy object can be used for the support and fastening means without compressing the space used for the presentation.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop midway. Gaming machine N>
a base member, a first displacement means supported displaceably on the base member, a driving means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, and a second displacement means switchable between a following state in which the first displacement means displaces in a displacement direction and a non-following state in which the first displacement means displaces in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means.
Gaming machine N1 is characterized in that it has a third displacement means which is displaced in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the second displacement means by the driving force of the driving means, at least when the second displacement means is in a following state.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the second displacement means displaces in the direction of the first displacement means' extension and contraction movement as the first displacement means extends and contracts, while the second displacement means displaces in a direction different from the direction of the first displacement means' extension and contraction movement when the first displacement means operates near the extension end (see, for example, JP 2011-229580 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the first displacement means and the second displacement means have the same displacement direction when the first displacement means extends and contracts, resulting in a slow presentation and a problem in that the presentation effect is insufficient.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means,
Since the displacement means is displaced in the opposite direction to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as a speed based on the third displacement means, so that the speed of the second displacement means that the player feels can be made higher than the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

A gaming machine N2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine N1, a resistance means is provided for generating resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be able to change the switching point between the following state and the non-following state.

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the action of the resistance means makes it possible to change the switching point between the following state in which the second displacement means operates to follow the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the following state, thereby increasing the types of the displacement modes of the second displacement means relative to the first displacement means, thereby improving the presentation effect.

Gaming machine N3 is characterized in that in gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be able to change the state of the second displacement means by utilizing the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state.

According to gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means that drives the first displacement means, so that the driving means can be used for both purposes.

Gaming machine N4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is arranged so as to be visible from the front.

According to gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines N2 or N3, by configuring the resistance means to be visible, the resistance means can serve both as a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and as a presentation device that is visible to the player.

Gaming machine N5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine N4, it is provided with a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means so that they can rotate coaxially.

According to gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine N4, the axis means which functions as the rotation axis of the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means is fixed to the base member, so that as the attitude of any one of the first displacement means, the second displacement means or the resistance means changes, the attitude of the other members or means also changes accordingly, thereby preventing an excessive increase in displacement resistance.

<Use of shell buttons and punch holes. Points not yet achieved>
A gaming machine O1 is provided with a first means and a storage means configured to store the first means, the storage means comprising a first opening which is an opening for receiving the first means when storing the first means, and a second opening which is opened with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening and the first means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player and an upper tray that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down relative to the upper tray (see, for example, JP 2012-048970 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, if a foreign object is inserted into the gap between the upper tray and the operating means, the foreign object may remain inside and cause a malfunction.

In contrast, the gaming machine O1 has a second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the storage means and the first means, so that foreign objects can be easily removed to the outside of the storage means through the second opening, thereby preventing the foreign objects from remaining inside.

A gaming machine O2, characterized in that in the gaming machine O1, the storage means has a support portion that supports the first means, and the second opening is located on the opposite side of the support portion across the first means.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O1, it is possible to form the second opening while maintaining the support strength of the support portion.

A gaming machine O3, in which the storage means in the gaming machine O1 or O2 has a low water resistance portion, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistance portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines O1 and O2, water can be discharged to the outside along the second opening before the water reaches the less water-resistant portion. In other words, the second opening can be used both to allow a predetermined solid object to pass through and to discharge liquids such as water.

A gaming machine O4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are configured to have shapes based on shapes projected in different directions of the solid object.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening is configured with a shape based on the shape of the misaligned solid object, it can be made easier to remove the solid object through the second opening.

A gaming machine O5, in any one of the gaming machines O1 to O4, characterized in that the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the gaming machine O5 allows the player to see the shadow of the solid object when the solid object is blocking a part of the second opening. This allows the player to notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the containing means, thereby reducing the possibility that the solid object will remain.

<Key points regarding the design of the bottom shape of the glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine P1 comprising a first means and a first support means for supporting the first means, wherein the first support means comprises a protruding portion protruding from an underside.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which a glass frame (front frame) in which an operating handle is arranged is configured to be removable from an outer frame in which a game board is arranged (see, for example, JP 2015-159837 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the bottom surface of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, so there is a risk of slipping when holding the bottom surface with fingers, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of ease of handling.

In contrast, with the gaming machine P1, the protruding portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functions as a part for hooking the fingers, thereby preventing the first support means from slipping out of the hand, thereby making it possible to improve ease of use.

The arrangement of the protruding portion is not limited in any way as long as it protrudes outward from the first support means. For example, it may protrude in the vertical direction or toward the front side.

A gaming machine P2 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine P1, a second support means is provided which detachably supports the first support means, and the protruding portion is positioned away from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the protruding portion protrudes downward from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first supporting means is centrally applied as the support position, making it easier to hold the first supporting means. This makes it easier to attach and detach the first supporting means to and from the second supporting means.

The position away from the support position is not limited to any particular position. For example,
It may be a position closer to the front when the support means is supported in front of the second support means, or it may be a position closer to the other end when the first support means is axially supported at one end by the second support means, or it may be a position opposite the axial support position based on the tray that stores the game balls.

Gaming machine P3 is characterized in that, in gaming machines P1 or P2, the first support means has a recessed shape portion recessed from the inside to the outside, and the first means is positioned opposite the recessed shape portion with a gap between them.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines P1 and P2, a part of the support position between the first means and the first support means is made a gap by a recessed shape portion, so that the powder (abrasive powder, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub against each other due to the positional deviation of the first means is reduced.
In other words, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of powder and clogging of movable parts, which causes malfunction, and the accumulation of powder at the detection points of the detection device, which causes erroneous detection.

In this way, the recessed shape is effective not only when the device is not in operation (for example, when the glass frame is open to clear an error, during maintenance, or when the glass frame is replaced), but also when the device is in operation (for example, during play or when waiting to play (demo screen is displayed)).

Gaming machine P4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine P3, the recessed portion is disposed inside the range in which the protruding portion protrudes.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, the gaming machine P4 can prevent the portion where the recessed portion is formed from being extremely thin compared to other portions, resulting in insufficient strength. Also, since the recessed portion is formed on the back side of the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be deformed inwardly and outwardly, so that cracking of the protruding portion can be suppressed even if a large load is applied to the protruding portion.

The load applied to the protruding portion may be, for example, the weight of the first support means that may be applied during transportation or temporary placement, a load applied when the first support means is moved, or the load applied when the first support means is moved.
An example of such a load is that applied by a collision of an object (such as a treasure chest) moved by a player or store clerk near the support means.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means comprises a contact means which is part of the first support means outside the recessed portion and is supported in a manner of abutting against an overlapping portion which overlaps with the protruding portion in the inward and outward directions, and an operating portion which is positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by a player.

According to gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine P4, the effect of the recessed shaped portion is maintained while the support thickness at the overlapping position that supports the abutment means can be sufficiently secured, so that deformation of the first support means can be suppressed when the operating part is operated.

In the gaming machine P5, the abutment means is formed continuously between the operating part and the abutment means, and is equipped with an impact damping means configured to dampen impact, and the impact damping means is formed with a width shorter than the width of the recessed shape portion.

According to gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine P5, the impact transmitted from the operating portion to the abutment means can be attenuated by the impact attenuation means, and by leaving a distance between the impact attenuation means and the overlapping portion, the impact can also be attenuated by deformation (deflection) of the abutment means.

The impact damping means may take various forms, for example, a mass member made of a flexible material, a resilient member such as a coil spring, a device such as a damper, or a damping device.

Gaming machine P7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines P3 to P6, the recessed shape portion has a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion, and the first portion is formed to have a greater degree of recession than the second portion.

According to gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines P3 to P6, sufficient space is provided in the first portion where a large load is expected to be applied, and the space in the second portion where a smaller load is expected to be applied compared to the first portion is made smaller, thereby improving the design freedom of the recessed shape while maintaining high durability.

The degree of recession may be, for example, a recess depth (the greater the degree of recession, the deeper) or a recess width (the greater the degree of recession, the wider).

In addition, if the structure of the first means is complex and the portion opposite the first means is subjected to a smaller load than the other portions, the recessed shape portion corresponding to the other portions may be formed to have a larger recessed degree.

Furthermore, the recessed shape may be designed based on, for example, the frequency of load occurrence, without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the frequency of load occurrence may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of load occurrence during the entire business hours of the gaming establishment, or may be based on the magnitude of the frequency of load occurrence in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a predetermined performance state, a specific gaming state, or the like).

Gaming machine P8 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines P1 to P7, the protruding portion is formed along the front-to-rear direction below the bottom surface of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider the further forward it is.

According to gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines P1 to P7, it is possible to improve the load-bearing capacity of the front part where the load is concentrated when the first support means is stood up by itself, so that the first support means can be stored for long periods of time without falling over even when the first support means is stored by placing it on the floor by itself.

In addition, the considerations when designing the protruding portion are not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the protruding portion may be designed by considering the magnitude of the load generated during the operation of the first support means and the frequency of the load generation.

A gaming machine P9, in any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, is characterized in that the lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward in a direction away from the second support means.

According to gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be made to stand on its own more easily, and furthermore, the part that comes into contact with the floor can be limited to the protruding portion, thereby preventing parts other than the protruding portion from getting dirty.

<Key points regarding deformation modes based on the support structure and shape of the collar>
Gaming machine Q1 is equipped with an operating means that can be operated by a player, a first support means that supports the operating means, and a second support means that supports at least one of the first support means or the operating means, characterized in that the first support means is configured to be deformable in a direction that narrows the gap between the operating means and the second support means.

Here, there are gaming machines such as pachinko machines in which operation means such as performance buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, JP 2016-106830 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is a problem that measures against positional deviation occurring in the area surrounding the operation means due to the load when operating the operation means are insufficient, and there is room for improvement in terms of measures against positional deviation occurring in the area surrounding the operation means.

For example, when the weight of a player is applied to the operating means and the operating means descends, the second support means also descends at the same time. At this time, the distance by which the front side of the second support means descends tends to be longer than the distance by which the operating means descends. At this time, due to the difference in the distance of descent,
A gap may occur between the operating means and the second supporting means.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means descends excessively, the first support means deforms, so that it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the operating means and the second support means.
The manner in which the operating means is supported can be simplified.

The operation direction is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a downward direction, an upward direction, a direction of pushing in along the front and rear, a rotational (pivotal) direction, or a combination of these.

In addition, as a mode of contact from the operation direction, in addition to the case where the normal line extending from the contact surface coincides with the operation direction, various modes are exemplified. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (V-shaped cross section) with respect to the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be brought closer to the bottom center of the mortar (V-shaped) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force increases as the operation direction approaches the bottom center, so that the operating means can be effectively supported.

Also, a common support means may be provided that commonly supports the first support means and the second support means. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be connected (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material and is characterized in that it comprises a support part that supports the operating means, and a gaming ball holding part that is configured to hold a gaming ball and is connected to the operating means via the first support means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to prevent a gap from occurring between the operating means and the gaming ball holding portion.

Furthermore, when the first support means is made of a flexible material or is connected to the operating means or the game ball holding part by a floating structure, it is possible to prevent the vibrations generated when the operating means is operated from being transmitted directly to the game ball holding part, thereby preventing the game ball held in the game ball holding part from shifting position and generating abnormal noise each time the operating means is operated.

In addition, various embodiments of the vibration transmission prevention (suppression) structure are exemplified. For example,
It may be configured such that the transmission of vibration is prevented in the first direction, while the transmission of vibration is maintained in the second direction. In this case, by generating vibration in the second direction, it is possible to purposely generate an abnormal sound, and to perform a sound-based performance.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operation means includes an operation unit configured to be operable by a player,
The first support means is such that the further the connection position with the game ball holding portion is from the operation portion, the
Gaming machine Q3 is characterized by being placed on the front side.

In gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operating unit, which is a position that is likely to shift due to operation, the connection position is moved toward the rear side, thereby reducing the absolute amount of shifting and suppressing the occurrence of gaps between the game ball holding unit and the first support means, while in the vicinity of the operating unit, which is a position that is unlikely to shift due to operation, the connection position is positioned on the front side (closer to the player), thereby improving the design.

Gaming machine Q4 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the operating means comprises an operating section configured to be operated by a player, a main body section supported by the first support means, and a connecting section connecting the operating section and the main body section, the operating section being formed wider than the connecting section, and the first support means being formed from a plurality of divided bodies and being configured in a manner that surrounds the connecting section, even being attachable and detachable in the direction of sandwiching the connecting section.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the size of the operating portion can be sufficiently ensured and the first support means can be easily assembled.

The first support means formed of the divided body may be fixed in place in various manners.
For example, each of the multiple divided bodies may be connected to the operating means, or one of the multiple divided bodies may be connected to the operating means and another divided body may be connected to the divided body.

The divisional bodies may be fixed at various positions and in various manners, for example, by fitting or fastening.

Furthermore, when fastening is performed, by fixing the divided body at multiple positions along the operating direction of the operating part, the impact generated when the operating part is operated can be distributed and borne at multiple fixed positions, thereby improving the durability of the divided body fixation and suppressing the occurrence of positional deviation of the first support means.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction to a direction that intersects (e.g., perpendicular to) the operation direction of the operating unit, the direction of the load due to operation of the operating unit can be made different from the direction of tightening of the fastening screw, thereby preventing the fastening screw from loosening due to impact during operation.

Gaming machine Q5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine Q4, the fastening direction of the fastening means that fastens the divided bodies intersects with the operating direction of the operating part.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4, it is possible to suppress the load applied in the fastening direction when the operating part is operated, so that the fastening by the fastening means is loosened during operation,
This makes it possible to prevent the divisional body from being released from its fixed position.

In addition, various aspects are exemplified as the direction intersecting with the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction intersecting with the operation direction is, for example, a direction intersecting with a plane perpendicular to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a direction along the predetermined rotation axis).

Also, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a specified straight line (in the case of a pushing operation or a pulling operation), a direction intersecting the operation direction is, for example, a direction along a plane intersecting the specified straight line.

In this case, if multiple specified straight lines (straight lines along an operation direction that has a high proportion (frequency) of operations) are expected during play, the fastening direction may be set in a direction along at least one of multiple planes that intersect with each straight line, or the fastening direction may be set in the intersection of the multiple planes, i.e., in a direction that intersects with any of the multiple specified straight lines.

Gaming machine Q6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening points of the divided body are configured at multiple points, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including the other fastening point are configured as different planes.

According to gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects of gaming machines Q4 or Q5, even if a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), it is possible to prevent a large load from being applied to other fastening points at the same time, thereby preventing the divided bodies from shifting position at both fastening points at the same time or the fastening from loosening.

The fastening points of the divided bodies may be located at locations where loads are concentrated when the operating part is operated. Even in this case, another fastening point is located on a different plane from the plane where the loads are concentrated, so that it is possible to prevent the divided bodies from shifting in position or the fastening from becoming loose due to the loads applied during operation.

Gaming machine Q7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operating means is equipped with a detection means configured to be able to detect a specified operation of the operating section, and the detection means is arranged at a position away from the division position of the divided body.

According to gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding force tends to be insufficient at the split position, and when the operating part moves in response to the operation of the operating part at the split position, the operating part rubs against the split body, which may cause powder (dust, etc.), but since the detection means is disposed away from the split position, it is possible to prevent the detection means from detecting powder (dust, etc.), thereby preventing the occurrence of false detection.

Gaming machine Q8 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operating means is equipped with an interference means that, when playable, interferes with the divided body as viewed in the division direction on the side that moves away in the division direction (approaching/moving direction) of the divided body.

According to gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress positional deviation of the operating means in the division direction relative to the divided body.

The interference means may be formed so as to interfere with the operating means in the assembled state, but not to interfere with the operating means before the assembled state, for example, during the assembly work. For example, if the divided body is formed from a flexible material, the divided body can be bent during the assembly work, making it easier to avoid interference with the interference means and maintaining ease of assembly.

Furthermore, for example, even if the divided bodies are made of a hard material, they may be configured so as not to interfere with the interference means during the assembly process. That is, they may be formed from a shape that does not interfere when viewed in the assembly direction before fastening (for example, when viewed in the direction in which the divided bodies are brought close to each other for assembly). In this case, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the divided bodies when play is possible while ensuring ease of assembly.

Gaming machine Q9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the second support means has a receiving recess that is recessed so as to be able to receive the first support means.

According to gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines Q1 to Q8, the first support means is received in a receiving recess, so that even if the first support means is displaced due to the influence of the operating means being misaligned, the operating means and the first support means can be quickly returned to their original positions by the repulsive force from the receiving recess.

Gaming machine Q10, in any of gaming machines Q1 to Q9, is characterized in that the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle whose center of curvature radius is located on the operating portion side of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, a large area can be secured for arranging the operation unit, and in addition, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped when holding the operation unit. This makes it possible to improve the design of the operation unit and the operability of the operation unit.

Gaming machine Q11 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means is provided with a muscle-like portion that is processed into a muscle-like shape for reinforcement, and the extension direction of the muscle-like portion is formed in a different direction for each area.

According to gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the extension direction of the rib-like portions is different for each region, so that a first support means having anisotropic rigidity can be constructed.

The design criteria for the extension direction of the streak-like portion are not limited in any way. For example, the extension direction may be designed to have a good yield rate in consideration of the shape of the first support means, or the extension direction of the streak-like portion may be designed to be the best direction to deal with the load generated during the operation of the operating means when the load acts in different ways on each area.

<Key points regarding the support structure between the speaker and the circuit board>
a vibration means, and a light emitting means arranged at a position where the vibration is transmitted and configured to be capable of emitting light;
In the gaming machine R1, the light emitting means has a displaceable width relative to the vibration means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers and light-emitting elements are arranged side by side (see, for example, JP 2016-16088 A). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of light-emitting performance.

More specifically, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, in order to prevent the circuit board from receiving vibrations from the speaker, light-emitting elements (LEDs, fluorescent lamps, discharge tubes, etc.) are placed behind the speaker, and the area where the speaker is placed becomes dark because light cannot be emitted.
The area in front of the machine where it is easy to see is narrowed down to where it can be presented in a dazzling way.
It is recognized that securing an area for lighting effects is an important issue.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine R1, the light emitting means has a displaceable width relative to the vibration means, so the light emitting means can deflect the vibration of the vibration device, and the light emitting means can be positioned closer to the vibration generating point of the vibration means. This allows the front area to be brightly visible regardless of the vibration generating point of the vibration means, which can be improved from the viewpoint of light emitting performance.

The vibration means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an audio means configured to be capable of outputting sound, or an operating means having a built-in vibration device. In addition, it is not limited to a means capable of actively vibrating, and may be a means capable of vibrating in response to a load of an external force (passively vibrating).

The acoustic means may take various forms. For example, a vibrating membrane provided in a speaker,
For example, examples include an exhaust port through which the back pressure of the vibrations of a speaker, as seen in a bass reflex speaker, is exhausted, and a path connecting the vibrating part to the exhaust port.

The vibration device may be a vibration device driven by rotation (e.g., a vibrator),
A vibration device that generates vibration by linear driving (for example, a voice coil motor) may also be used.

The manner of adjacent arrangement is not limited in any way, and may be any manner in which the light from the light emitting means can be visually recognized by the player. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibration means.
In this case, the stacking direction may be the front-to-back direction, a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-to-back direction, or a direction inclined inwardly to the left or right from the left or right end.

Gaming machine R2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine R1, it comprises a plurality of vibration means and a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting means is arranged, and the light-emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibration means.

According to gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect achieved by gaming machine R1, the light-emitting substrate tends to be displaced (vibration, displacement, etc.) due to the influence of vibrations generated when the vibration means outputs sound, and this makes it possible to change the presentation mode of the light-emitting means. By changing the vibration means that outputs sound, the displacement mode of the light-emitting substrate can be changed, thereby increasing the types (variations) of changes in the presentation mode of the light-emitting means.

The light emitting substrate may be one or more. When there are more than one, at least one light emitting substrate needs to be stacked on the vibration means. In this case, a combination of a light emitting substrate that is displaced by the vibration generated by the vibration means and a light emitting substrate that is not displaced can be provided, so that the types of changes in the performance mode of the light emitting means can be further increased.

A gaming machine R3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine R2, a holding means for holding the vibration means is provided, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means is configured to generate a load in a direction that suppresses displacement of the light-emitting substrate along the stacking direction.

According to gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine R2, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the holding means in conjunction with the displacement of the light emitting substrate.

The non-fixed state is not limited to the case where the light emission substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emission substrate and the holding means are connected with a screw, they can be said to be non-fixed if no fastening force is applied (for example, they are simply prevented from coming loose).

In addition, the expression "not fixed" does not mean that large displacement is allowed. For example, by fixing two plate members that define the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate to the holding means, the front-rear position of the light-emitting substrate is defined (the front-rear position is stable, and small vibrations are allowed), and by surrounding the substrate in a direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction with a frame member that is slightly larger than the shape of the light-emitting substrate, it is possible to suppress displacement in a direction other than the front-rear direction (up, down, left, right).

This reduces the effect on the light-emitting substrate of vibrations generated by the vibration means compared to when the light-emitting substrate is fixed to the holding means in the same manner as the vibration means, thereby improving the positional stability of the light-emitting substrate.

Gaming machine R4 is characterized in that it comprises, in gaming machines R2 or R3, a first member and a second member arranged on both sides of the light-emitting substrate in the stacking direction, a fixing means for fixing the first member and the second member to the holding means, and a regulating means for regulating the movement direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, and the fixing means progresses toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction.

According to gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not coincide with the direction in which the fixing means advances, and the movement of the first member and the second member in the direction in which the fixing means advances is restricted, so that even if the fixation by the fixing means loosens (even if some of the fixing means loosen), the displacement of the first member and the second member can be made smaller than the displacement of the fixing means.

This makes it easier to maintain the positional relationship between the first member and the second member, in other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from moving closer or farther apart than expected.

The advancement may be performed in various ways, for example, a rod-shaped member may be inserted into the through hole, or a fastening screw may be fastened into the screw hole.

Gaming machine R5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines R2 to R4, the light-emitting substrate has a first displacement region that is configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement region in which displacement is suppressed compared to the first displacement region.

According to gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emission pattern when the light-emitting substrate is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means can be changed for each area of the light-emitting substrate.

As a result, by designing the manner of light emission in the first displacement region and the manner of light emission in the second displacement region in different ways, it is possible to achieve excellent performance effects. For example, a surface light emission means for performing a uniform light emission performance by surface emission is arranged as a first refraction means for receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the first displacement region, while an edge light emission means for totally reflecting the light incident from one end (edge) and emitting it from the other end (edge) to show a high-luminance light to the player is arranged as a second refraction means for receiving and refracting the light irradiated from the second displacement region, thereby making it possible to perform novel light emission performances with different light emission modes (e.g., luminance) for each region.

The manner in which the displacement is suppressed is not limited in any way. For example, the manner in which the displacement is suppressed may be determined based on the positional relationship between the light emission substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or may be determined based on the manner in which the light emission substrate is held.

For example, in terms of the positional relationship between multiple vibration means and the light-emitting substrate, in an area that is equidistant from each vibration means, the influence from one vibration means may be offset by the influence from the other vibration means, thereby suppressing displacement.

Gaming machine R6 is any one of gaming machines R1 to R5, and is provided with a fastening screw for fastening and a facing portion arranged opposite the head of the fastening screw, and is characterized in that when the fastening screw becomes loose, the head of the fastening screw and the facing portion are arranged so that they can come into contact with each other.

According to gaming machine R6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines R1 to R5, by regulating the progress of the fastening screw by the opposing portion, it is possible to prevent the fastening relationship from deteriorating further if the fastening screw becomes loose.

Various embodiments are exemplified for the response after the fastening screw becomes loose. For example, when the fastening screw becomes loose, the loosening may be electrically detected, the opposing portion may be formed on the surface of the vibration device so that when the fastening screw becomes loose, an abnormal noise is generated when the device is vibrated, so that the loosening can be noticed, or the loosened portion may be repaired during regular maintenance without providing a special notification.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R6, a first member and a second member are arranged on both sides of the light emitting substrate, and a connecting means is fastened to the first member and the second member,
The gaming machine R7 is characterized in that the connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in a direction intersecting the connecting direction occurs more easily than deformation in the connecting direction connecting the first member and the second member.

Here, if the connecting means is configured in a manner that allows easy deformation in the connecting direction, the distance between the connecting positions will change in both directions, expanding and contracting, resulting in advantageous and disadvantageous effects occurring periodically, which is not desirable.

In contrast, according to gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means can be deformed in a direction intersecting the connecting direction, so that the distance between the connecting positions can be changed only in the direction of narrowing, and a load can be preferentially generated in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member against each other.

This allows the load in the direction pressing the first and second members against each other to be increased only in situations in which the connecting means is deformed (for example, situations in which a load is generated on the connecting means). Therefore, while the load in the opposing direction of the first and second members is normally set low, the load in the direction pressing the first and second members against each other can be increased only when the light-emitting substrate is likely to shake due to vibrations produced by the vibration means, thereby suppressing shaking of the light-emitting substrate.

The manner in which deformation easily occurs in a predetermined direction is not limited in any way. For example, the shape of the connecting means may be formed in a manner in which the thickness varies depending on the direction, or the magnitude of the load acting on the connecting means may be configured to vary depending on the direction.

Furthermore, the manner of switching the load in the pressing direction is not limited in any way. For example, a drive device that displaces either the first member or the second member may be provided. In this way, the load in the pressing direction between the first member and the second member can be changed at any timing by controlling the drive device.

Gaming machine R8 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines R1 to R7, the vibration means is configured to be able to change the direction of vibration between a first direction along the displaceable width and a second direction intersecting the first direction.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effect provided by any one of the gaming machines R1 to R7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of effects of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means.

<Technical concept behind the side lighting method. Edge light travels to the sides and back of the component>
A gaming machine S1 comprising a light emitting means configured to be able to emit light, and a light guiding means capable of guiding light, the light guiding means comprising a first light guiding means that guides the light irradiated from the light emitting means in a first manner, and a second light guiding means that guides the light irradiated from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, there are gaming machines such as pachinko machines that are configured so that LED light is incident from the end of a plate-like member and emitted from the surface of the plate-like member (for example, JP 2015-
(See, for example, Japanese Patent Publication No. 159875.) However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of the presentation effect of the light emission presentation.

In more detail, when light-emitting effects are produced using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machines described above, the price of the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce costs, but it is difficult to achieve a three-dimensional light-emitting effect in this form as well.

In other words, the effect of the presentation tends to be reduced due to differences in the light emission patterns (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between positions close to the LED and those far from it, and in order to solve this, it is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the areas where the light emission patterns tend to be weak (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the presentation increases relative to the area of the LED board, resulting in an impediment to cost reduction. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving the presentation effect and reducing costs.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine S1, the light guide means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so that even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different, the performance effect can be prevented from decreasing (changing). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emitting performance while reducing costs.

The light guide means may be of various types, for example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light from a surface in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, a white member formed by hardening a milky white resin or the like, a member that transmits light through gaps similar to a screen door or a paper screen, a member that projects a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or other types of members.

A gaming machine S2, in which the light guiding means is configured so that the way of illumination changes stepwise in response to differences in distance from the light emitting means, in the gaming machine S1.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, even if the substrate on which the light guiding means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, when the light guiding means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface,
It is possible to create an effect in which the curved surface is illuminated uniformly.

A gaming machine S3, comprising a storage means for storing the light-emitting means and a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting means is arranged, in the gaming machine S1 or S2, the storage means supporting the light-emitting substrate, the storage means comprising a support means for fixing the light-guiding means at least at a first position, and a shielding means configured to be able to shield the space between the light-guiding means and a player, the first position being located outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines S1 and S2, the fixing in the first position can be loosened while the shielding means is still assembled, so that the position of the light guiding means relative to the support means can be easily adjusted. Therefore, it is easy to repair the positional deviation between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and maintenance can be improved.

It should be noted that the manner of shielding by the shielding means is not limited in any way. For example, the shielding means may be configured to shield the light guiding means so that the player cannot touch it but can still see it, or the light guiding means may be configured so that the player can neither touch nor see it.

In addition, when the first positions are formed in multiple locations, all of the first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means, or at least one of the multiple first positions may be arranged outside the outer shape of the shielding means.

A gaming machine S4 is characterized in that, in a gaming machine S3, the light-emitting substrate is not fixed to the support means and the light-guiding means, the light-guiding means is in the shape of a long plate, and the first position is located at the end of the light-guiding means in the long direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3, the light guide means is in the shape of a long plate,
Since the first position is disposed at an end in the longitudinal direction, the positional deviation of the light guiding means can be easily corrected by loosening the fixation of the first position and applying a load in the lateral direction of the light guiding means.

In detail, the positional deviation of the light guide means is compensated for by deforming the light guide means in the short direction.
By compensating for the slippage caused by applying a heavy load, misalignment of the light-guiding means can be easily repaired even when the fixation is loosened at only one end in the longitudinal direction while the fixation is maintained at the other end.

Furthermore, in the case of a supporting mode in which the light emission substrate is pressed against the supporting means by the light guiding means, the degree to which the light emission substrate is supported by the supporting means can be weakened in accordance with the bending deformation of the light guiding means.
Therefore, even without removing the light-guiding means from the support means, the degree of support for the light-emitting substrate can be weakened by loosening the fixation at the first position and causing the light-guiding means to flex and deform, and by applying a load to the light-emitting substrate in this state, the positional deviation of the light-emitting substrate can be corrected.

The adjustment range of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, the adjustment range may be such that the portion to be irradiated by the light guiding means is mechanically restricted from being displaced so far as to be completely different from the outer shape of the light emitting means disposed on the light emitting substrate when viewed in the irradiation direction (small adjustment range), or the position of the light guiding means may be adjusted to a position where the portion to be irradiated by the light guiding means is completely different from the outer shape of the light emitting means when viewed in the irradiation direction (large adjustment range) based on a design that ensures a large adjustment range in advance.

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means have the same structure, and the appearance of the light emitting effect that is visually recognized during the same effect can be changed. In this case, for example, when preparing gaming machines with the same configuration so that they can be played with different playability (for example, when configuring gaming machines with different specifications),
Since the light-emitting performance can be changed by adjusting the position of the light-guiding means without making significant changes to the mechanical configuration of each part, the burden (e.g., cost) associated with manufacturing the gaming machine can be reduced.

The non-fixed state is not limited in any way. For example, any state other than the state of being fixed by a fastening tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixed. Also, the end portion is an expression intended to avoid being limited to the end. In other words, it is sufficient that the first position is disposed at a position including the periphery of the end in the longitudinal direction.

Gaming machine S5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the support means, the light guiding means and the shielding means are provided with a positional deviation prevention unit configured to reduce the deviation in their relative positions as the distance between them is shortened, and the positional deviation prevention unit has a fixed part with respect to the support means.

Here, it is necessary to connect electrically conducting wiring to the light-emitting substrate. Since misalignment or chipping of the wiring directly affects malfunction of the light-emitting means, it is preferable to configure the light-emitting substrate and the support means so that misalignment does not easily occur in order to prevent this.

Considering the presentation effect, it is preferable that the light guiding means is easy to align when it does become misaligned with the light emitting substrate, and it is also considered good to have it held on the supporting means side. On the other hand, if misalignment occurs between the light guiding means and the shielding means, there is a risk that the light guiding means and the shielding means will collide, which will spoil the appearance, and it is also considered good to have it held on the shielding means side.

Since the shielding means is a part that can be touched by the player, it is preferable to fix it to the supporting means that serves as the base, taking into consideration the strength. As described above, there are various types of support that are expected for each means.

According to gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects of gaming machines S3 or S4, the anti-misalignment section not only makes it easy to align the light-guiding means and the shading means with each other when assembling them without directly fixing them, but also makes it easier to maintain the positional relationship between the light-guiding means and the shading means during play.

The form of the misalignment prevention portion is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a recess and protrusion of the same shape that can be fitted together, or the fitting recess and protrusion may have a shape that does not change along the assembly direction, or may be composed of a convex shape that tapers toward the mating member and a concave shape that expands toward the mating member.

Gaming machine S6, in any of gaming machines S1 to S5, is characterized in that the light-guiding means comprises a main body portion, a separated extension portion extending from the main body portion toward a side away from the light-emitting means, and an opposing extension portion extending toward the light-emitting means with a cross-sectional shape corresponding to the outer shape of the extension portion, and the light-emitting means comprises a total reflection light-emitting portion arranged in a manner such that light incident on the opposing extension portion is totally reflected.

According to the gaming machine S6, it is possible to prevent the light irradiated from the total reflection light emitting portion from entering any part other than the opposing extension portion, so that the boundaries between the detached extension portion and the opposing extension portion and the other parts can be clearly defined, and it is possible to execute an effect in which the state of the light is changed (the light is separated) at a short width boundary.

The manner in which total reflection occurs is not limited in any way. For example, the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the irradiated light, the width of the irradiated light, the material and shape of the light guiding means,
and combinations thereof.

In the gaming machine S6, the light-guiding means comprises a covering portion that covers the light-emitting substrate, and a frame portion that forms the outer shape of the covering portion and is formed from a frame shape similar to the outer shape of the light-emitting substrate, and the opposing extension portion extends from the covering portion and is connected to the frame portion.

According to gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine S6, light can be made to enter the frame from the joint point, thereby improving the effect of the light-emitting effects of the frame, and the opposing extension parts function as reinforcing ribs, thereby improving the strength of the light-guiding means.

According to this, if the frame portion is extended to the rear of the light-emitting means along the direction of light emitted from the light-emitting means, it is possible to produce an effect in which the side opposite the emission direction is illuminated.

In the gaming machine S7, the opposing extension portion is formed in an elongated shape along the covering portion, connected to the frame portion at one end in the longitudinal direction, and separated from the frame portion at the other end.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the opposing extension portion,
Since it is possible to configure an end portion in the longitudinal direction that allows light to enter the frame portion and an end portion where the incidence is restricted, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the light-emitting effects using the frame portion.

Gaming machine S9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines S6 to S8, the light-emitting means is arranged at the projection position of the opposing extension portion and the separated extension portion, and the smaller the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separated extension portion with respect to the light irradiation direction, the closer the light-emitting means is arranged to the edge of the cross-sectional shape of the opposing extension portion and the separated extension portion.

According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines S6 to S8, even if the tip shape of the separated extension part is inclined with respect to the plane of the light-emitting substrate, the light-emitting performance can be performed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player while keeping the light-emitting intensity of the light-emitting means constant. In other words, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separated extension part can be made to emit light to the same degree.

＜Technical concept of the top light emitting means. The key point to change the way it lights up depending on the distance from the light emitting means＞
A gaming machine T1 comprising a light emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light and a light receiving means capable of receiving light, the light receiving means comprising a first light receiving means that receives light irradiated from the light emitting means in a first manner, and a second light receiving means that receives light irradiated from the light emitting means in a manner different from the first manner.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is incident from the edge of a planar member,
There are gaming machines that are configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (see, for example, JP 2015 A
(See Japanese Patent Publication No. 2001-159875.) However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of the presentation effect of the light emission presentation.

In more detail, when light-emitting effects are produced using an LED board formed from a flat plate, as in the conventional gaming machines described above, the price of the board can be made cheaper, which helps to reduce costs, but it is difficult to achieve a three-dimensional light-emitting effect in this form as well.

In other words, the effect of the presentation tends to be reduced due to differences in the light emission patterns (brightness, intensity, brightness, etc.) between positions close to the LED and those far from it, and in order to solve this, it is possible to increase the number of LEDs in the areas where the light emission patterns tend to be weak (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for the presentation increases relative to the area of the LED board, resulting in an impediment to cost reduction. Therefore, it was inevitable to choose between improving the presentation effect and reducing costs.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive light from the light emitting means in different modes, so that even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different, the performance effect can be prevented from decreasing (changing). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the light emitting performance while reducing costs.

The light receiving means may be of various types, for example, a light-transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, a member that emits light from a surface in a nearly uniform manner like frosted glass, a white member formed by hardening a milky white resin or the like, a member that transmits light through gaps similar to a screen door or a paper screen, a member that projects a display on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or other types of members.

Gaming machine T2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine T1, the light receiving means is configured so that the way it is illuminated changes stepwise in response to differences in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1, even if the substrate on which the light receiving means is arranged is formed from a flat plate, when the light receiving means is configured in a plate shape forming a curved surface,
It is possible to create an effect in which the curved surface is illuminated uniformly.

A gaming machine T3, which is characterized in that it comprises a storage means for storing the light-emitting means and a light-emitting substrate on which the light-emitting means is arranged, in the gaming machine T1 or T2, the storage means comprises a partitioning means for partitioning an area positioned opposite one side of the light-emitting substrate, and the light-receiving means is configured so that the way it is illuminated changes for each area partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machines T1 and T2, the frame of the partition means is arranged at the boundary where the way the light receiving means is illuminated changes, so that the sense of incongruity felt by the player when the way the light receiving means is illuminated changes suddenly can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the light emission using the light emitting boards even when the number of light emitting boards is small.

Gaming machine T4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine T3, the partition means supports the light-emitting substrate from a direction opposing the biasing force applied to the light-emitting substrate, thereby aligning the light-emitting substrate.

According to gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine T3, it is possible to facilitate the alignment of the light-emitting substrate and the partitioning means, thereby facilitating assembly work, and it is also possible to prevent misalignment of the light-emitting substrate and the partitioning means during use.

Gaming machine T5 is characterized in that, in gaming machines T3 or T4, the partitioning means has a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of the light-emitting section arranged on the light-emitting substrate, and the light-receiving means has an insertion section that is inserted into the through hole.

According to gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines T3 or T4, the distance between the light-emitting unit and the light-receiving unit can be narrowed without being affected by the dimensions of the partitioning means, making it easier to totally reflect the light that enters the inside of the insertion portion, and preventing a decrease in the intensity of the light emitted from the light-emitting unit.

In the gaming machine T5, the partitioning means is provided with a non-insertion through hole that is drilled in accordance with the shape of the light-emitting portion disposed on the light-emitting board and does not receive the insertion portion, and the non-insertion through hole is
The gaming machine T6 is characterized in that the opening is formed in such a manner that it becomes larger as it moves away from the light-emitting substrate, and is abutted by a surface against the light-receiving means from the opposite side of the light-emitting substrate.

According to gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine T5, the through hole into which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting light emitted from the light-emitting portion at a wide angle, and in addition, by narrowing the gap between the light-receiving means, leakage of light can be suppressed.

Gaming machine T7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is formed so that the cross-sectional outer shape is larger on the side farther from the light emitting means than on the side closer to the light emitting means.

According to gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines T1 to T6, the area in which the player sees light through the light receiving means can be made larger than the area in which the light emitting means is formed.

In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving means has a light conducting section extending from the light emitting means side and a cut-out boundary surface section intersecting with the light conducting section, and the cut-out boundary surface is arranged at a position where the front-to-rear surface section in the extension direction of the light conducting section is shorter than the inclined surface section.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T7, even if the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross section becomes larger toward the front, or even if a cut-out boundary surface portion is formed, the thickness of the light conducting portion can be easily made uniform. This makes it easier to maintain total reflection along the extension direction of the light conducting portion.

A gaming machine T9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means has a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line shape including the base end of the insertion portion.

According to gaming machine T9, in addition to the effects of gaming machines T7 or T8, the light emitted from the LED of the light-emitting means can be easily visually recognized as a line-shaped light (light mixed with light from point light sources), so that the feeling of a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs arranged.

<Points that are configured with two inclined fastening directions>
Gaming machine U1 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine having a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means comprises a first fixing means that generates a fixing force in a first direction, and a second fixing means that generates a fixing force in a second direction that is inclined with respect to the first direction.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the front frame is constructed by combining multiple structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, JP 2016-41185 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the shape of the structure is regulated by the arrangement of the fixing means, which reduces the design freedom of the structure.

For example, when a fastening screw is inserted in the front-rear direction through the fixing means, it is not possible to place a light emitting component such as an LED in a position that interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in a cross section through which the fastening screw is inserted. In other words, the area in which the fixing means can be placed effectively coincides with the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting component, so the size of the structure is limited to the position in which the fixing means can be placed.

In other words, the shape of the support plate that supports the light-emitting substrate from the rear side needs to be larger than the light-emitting substrate to accommodate the fixing means, so the size of the light-emitting substrate is limited by the size of the area in which the support plate can be arranged.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine U1, the insertion direction of the fastening screws that fix the fixing means is composed of a first direction and a second direction that are inclined toward each other, so that a wider presentation area can be secured that is visible to the player compared to the case where all of the fixing means are inserted along the front-to-rear direction.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means has a first surface formed along the first direction and a second surface formed along the second direction on its outer surface.
.

According to gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine 1, the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, so that even if the outer surface is about to be deformed by an external force, sufficient resistance force can be generated and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

A gaming machine U3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine U1 or U2, a suppression means is provided for suppressing a decrease in the fixing force at at least one of the fixing points of the fixing means.

Here, if the first means and the second means are constructed from a resin molded product and the removal direction of the resin mold used for production is one direction, the first direction or the second direction, which are inclined relative to each other, will be inclined relative to the removal direction, and there is a risk that the fixing force of the first or second fixing means corresponding to the inclined side will be weakened.

In contrast, according to gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines U1 or U2, the decrease in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppression means, so that the fastening screws used to fasten the fixing means can be made into common parts.

The configuration of the suppression means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a loosening prevention means that prevents the occurrence of loosening in the fastening, or a loosening restriction means that restricts further loosening when loosening occurs in the fastening.

Gaming machine U4 is characterized in that in gaming machine U3, the suppression means is provided with an alarm means capable of alarming a fixing failure of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine U3, since the notification means notifies of improper fixing of the fixing means, loosening of the fastening screws can be detected early.

The configuration of the notification means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an electrical notification means such as a detection means such as a sensor, or a structural means that causes a change in appearance.
Examples of structural means include a transmission change means that changes the strength of the transmission of vibrations generated inside the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine, a light effect change means that blocks light emitted from inside and creates a shadow that is visible from the outside, and a vibration notification means that comes into contact with the vibrating part of the vibration device to generate an abnormal sound or intensify the vibration to alert the player.

Gaming machine U5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines U2 to U4, it is provided with a third means arranged between the first means and the second means, and the third means is arranged between the first surface and the second surface.

According to gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines U2 to U4, the first means and second means can generate resistance forces in multiple directions as component directions of the fixing force of the fixing means, making it easier to hold the third means safely.

The configuration of the third means is not limited in any way. For example, the third means may be configured so that the first means side is visible to the player, while the second means side is not visible to the player. In this case, by making the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface widen the first means side and the side where the distance narrows the second means side, it is possible to narrow the area occupied by the configuration on the side that is not visible while ensuring a wide area to be visible to the player.

The gaming machine U5 further comprises a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means across the first surface, and the first surface is formed at an angle with respect to the front-rear direction.
6.

According to gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine U5, it is possible to make it possible for the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means to interfere with each other when viewed from the front, thereby making it possible to secure a large area in which the third means and the fourth means can be arranged.

Gaming machine U7 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are respectively arranged in pairs with a predetermined interval therebetween.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs with a predetermined interval between them, so that deformation along the direction in which the fixing force is generated in one fixing means can be prevented from occurring in the other fixing means. In other words, deformation in a direction intersecting the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, so that loosening of the fixing means can be prevented.

<The rigidity of the game board compensates for the loss of rigidity caused by the cutout (through hole) on the side of the rear case>
The gaming machine ZA1 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine having a gaming board and an opposing means whose edge portions are arranged opposite the gaming board, the opposing means has adjacent portions arranged adjacent to the gaming board at the left and right edge portions, and the formation pattern of the adjacent portions is asymmetrical.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a gaming board that constitutes a gaming area and a rear case in which movable units and the like are arranged (see, for example, JP 2016-77627 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the internal space of the rear case is encroached upon by the space occupied by the connecting position between the gaming board and the rear case, making it difficult to secure sufficient space for arranging the movable units and the like.

In particular, in right-hand play machines in which the player hits the ball from the right during a special state (high probability state) or a jackpot game (special game state), the player's gaze is often focused on the right side of the game area, so it was necessary to secure internal space in the rear case on the rear side of the flow path through which the game ball hit from the right flows (the flow path to the right of the liquid crystal device).

In contrast, according to the gaming machine ZA1, the adjacent portion is formed asymmetrically,
Since the left and right edges of the opposing means with respect to the game board can be arranged asymmetrically, it is possible to sacrifice the internal area of one of the opposing means on the left or right, and instead make it easier to secure the internal area of the other opposing means on the left or right. This improves the degree of freedom in arranging the opposing means with respect to the game board, and ensures sufficient space for arranging the movable unit, etc., and improves the degree of freedom in the presentation that the player can see through the game board. For example, the vicinity of the end of the game board (for example, the right-hitting flow path) can be illuminated by the light-emitting means of the moving role, or by light emitted from a liquid crystal display device.

The manner in which the adjacent portion is formed is not limited in any way. For example, the adjacent portion may be in contact with the game board, may be spaced apart from the game board, or may be a combination of both.

The manner in which the adjacent portion is formed is not limited in any way. For example, a wide area may be secured in which no connecting portion (contact portion) used for connecting with the game board is formed, or
The connecting portions (contact portions) may be arranged while suppressing the area occupied by the connecting portions (contact portions).

The aspect of left-right asymmetry is not limited in any way. For example, the area in which the proximal portion is formed may be asymmetric, the direction in which the proximal portion is formed may be asymmetric, or the position, direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, left-right direction, or other direction) or number of functional portions (such as a fastening portion in which a female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened is formed) disposed in the proximal portion may be asymmetric.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the opposing means is provided with a positioning portion in which the proximity portion is formed at the end portion on the game board side and is arranged opposite each other in the left-right direction, and the proximity portion is configured so that its formation direction relative to the positioning portion is asymmetrical.

According to the gaming machine ZA2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZA1, the area between the arrangement parts can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the gaming board. The manner in which the formation direction is asymmetrical is not limited in any way. For example, the formation direction may be opposite to the symmetrical direction (same direction on both sides), or may be a direction intersecting the left and right (for example, perpendicular direction).

Examples of the formation direction include the extending direction (providing direction) of the plate-like portion, and the recessing direction (cutting direction) of the recessed portion recessed as a notch.

Gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the adjacent portion has an opposing surface which is a surface facing the gaming board and an opposing side which is a side facing the gaming board, and the proportion of the opposing side is greater than the opposing surface in the portion facing the right side of the gaming board compared to the portion facing the left side of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine ZA3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines ZA1 and ZA2, the width of the adjacent portion on the right side of the gaming board can be made narrower than that on the left side of the gaming board.

A gaming machine ZA4 is any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, characterized in that it is provided with a suppression means for suppressing displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposing direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the counter means can be reinforced by the suppression means. The arrangement of the suppression means is not limited in any way. For example, the suppression means may be disposed at a position away from the game board (including a position abutting the counter means), at a position away from the counter means (including a position abutting the game board), or at a position between the game board and the counter means (including a position abutting at least one of the game board or the counter means).

Gaming machine ZA5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZA4, the suppression means is disposed on the gaming board side.

According to the gaming machine ZA5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZA4, it is possible to maintain the strength (ensuring rigidity) of the entire gaming unit without providing a special member in the facing means.

The gaming machine ZA6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, the suppression means has an overlapping portion which overlaps with the outermost side surface of the opposing means in a front view.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines ZA4 and ZA5, it is possible to prevent sacrificing the design freedom inside the gaming board, so that it is possible to maintain the strength of the gaming unit as a whole (ensuring rigidity) while securing space for the right-hand hit flow path in the gaming area.

Gaming machine ZA7, in any one of gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, is characterized in that the opposing means has a non-abutting portion that does not abut against the gaming board, on the edge of the outermost surface on the gaming board side in the specified direction.

With gaming machine ZA7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the game board and the non-contact portion can be effectively utilized by providing a location for locating the drive device of the variable winning port, a path for wiring connected to the drive device, the winning sensor, and the light-emitting device, or a location for locating the light-emitting device.

In any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the gaming board is formed from a resin material,
The facing means is provided with a performance means disposed between the facing means and the game board, and the front end of the performance means is configured to be able to be positioned forward of the front end of the facing means.
.

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the arrangement space for the presentation means can be expanded forward.

<Various lighting patterns for movable parts>
A light emitting means that irradiates light onto a predetermined light emitting region; and a displacement means that is configured so that a first position that at least partially overlaps with the light emitting region when viewed in a predetermined direction is included in at least a portion of a displacement section;
In the gaming machine having the above, the light-emitting area has a possible area configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light-emitting modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured so that the light-emitting means and the displacement means overlap when viewed from the front (see, for example, JP 2016-159178 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the light-emitting means and the displacement means are only visible separately, and the performance effect utilizing the overlap is insufficient. In other words, the displacement means is arranged in front of the light-emitting means, so that the light-emitting means is hidden by the displacement means.
There was a problem in that the performance effect was insufficient.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine ZB1, the light emitting means is configured to be visible in different light emitting modes in relation to the mode of the displacement means, so that it is possible to diversify the presentation modes.

Examples of the form of the displacement means include the arrangement of the displacement means, the displacement form of the displacement means, the orientation (posture) of the displacement means, and the light emission form of the light emitting means disposed on the displacement means. Examples of the arrangement of the displacement means include a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, and a case where the entire displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means. Examples of the displacement form of the displacement means include:
Examples of such a case include a case where the displacement means is displaced toward the light-emitting means, a case where the displacement means is displaced away from the light-emitting means, etc. Examples of the orientation (posture) of the displacement means include a case where the front surface of the displacement means faces the light-emitting means, a case where the back surface of the displacement means faces the light-emitting means, a case where the surface therebetween faces the light-emitting means, etc.

Examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting means include a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the displacement means turns on, blinks, or goes out, and a mode in which the light emitting means that emits light toward the side away from the displacement means turns on, blinks, or goes out.

Gaming machine ZB2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZB1, the possible area can be configured to enable a case in which the light emission pattern viewed from the specified direction is different between a first state in which the displacement means is positioned at the first position and a second state in which the displacement means is positioned at a second position different from the first position.

According to gaming machine ZB2, in addition to the effect of gaming machine ZB1, the light emission pattern can be changed by changing the position of the displacement means, so that the impression given to the player can be suddenly changed while the light emission pattern of the displacement means alone remains the same.

Gaming machine ZB3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light-emitting means comprises a substrate on which a light-emitting unit is arranged, and a refraction means arranged to be able to refract light emitted from the light-emitting unit, the substrate is arranged outside the possible area when viewed in the specified direction, and the refraction means comprises a first refraction unit that overlaps with the possible area when viewed in the specified direction.

According to gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines ZB1 or ZB2, the state of light visible through the first refraction section can be expressed by a combination of light emitted from the light-emitting section and color and brightness based on the displacement means.

Furthermore, by narrowing the area in which the substrate is formed, it is possible to ensure an area for arranging other components, such as a drive device that generates a driving force for the displacement means, and a space for the displacement means to be displaced.

Gaming machine ZB4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZB3, the displacement means is such that the displacement at a position that overlaps with the possible area when viewed in the specified direction is larger than the displacement at other positions.

According to gaming machine ZB4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed in positions where the light-emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacement means can be increased in positions where the space occupied by the light-emitting means is small, thereby making it possible to ensure maximum freedom of displacement of the displacement means while suppressing the space occupied jointly by the light-emitting means and the displacement means.

The size of the displacement is not limited in any way. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, or a comparison may be made by setting positive and negative values in opposite directions, or a comparison may be made by the displacement of a predetermined direction (component) of the displacement means, or a comparison may be made including the number of members that are displaced and constitute the displacement means.

Gaming machine ZB5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means comprises a second light-emitting means that emits light in a manner visible from the specified direction, and a transmission means that transmits light emitted from the second light-emitting means, and the transmission means has a shape whose width changes in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the displacement means along that direction.

According to gaming machine ZB5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the width of the light of the second light-emitting means visible through the possible area can be changed depending on where in the displacement section the displacement means is located.

Gaming machine ZB6 is any one of gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, characterized in that the possible area is located at the center of a window portion that is opened to allow the liquid crystal display area to be viewed.

According to gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effect of any one of gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emission mode of the playable area can be used to guide the player's gaze toward the liquid crystal display area.

The arrangement of the possible regions is not limited in any way, and various arrangements are exemplified.
For example, the possible areas may be scattered around the window portion (including the case where the possible area is one location),
It may also be in the form of a circle (arc) surrounding the window portion.

Any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6 includes a board on which the light emitting means is disposed,
The gaming machine ZB7 is characterized in that the base plate does not have a fastening means for fastening arranged at the end on the possible area side.

According to gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure space for arranging the light-emitting means on the side of the possible area, and it is possible to prevent the shadow of the fastening means from appearing in the possible area.

Gaming machine ZB8 is characterized in that it is provided with a covering means for covering the space between the possible area and the board when viewed in the specified direction, in the gaming machine ZB7.

According to gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effects of gaming machine ZB7, the boundary position between the possible area and the board is hidden by a covering means, so that even if the visibility of light deteriorates near the edge of the board, it is possible to avoid this being seen by the player.

In the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, a board holding means for holding the board is provided, and the board holding means is provided with a gap forming portion for forming a gap to facilitate assembly of the board,
The gaming machine ZB9 is characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines ZB7 and ZB8, the gap forming portion can facilitate the assembly of the board, while preventing defects such as light leaking from the gap forming portion. Also, the gap forming portion may be used for engagement with another member, and may be utilized for aligning the other member.

Gaming machine ZB10 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, the board has a connector portion to which wiring is connected, and the connector portion is arranged at a position away from the end on the possible area side.

According to gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector portion, a moment can be generated originating from the end on the possible area side, so that the board can be easily removed even in a situation where it cannot be removed directly.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple components, switching between transmission and interruption>
Gaming machine ZC1 is characterized in that in a gaming machine comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, a drive means generating a drive force for displacing the displacement means, and a transmission means configured to be capable of transmitting the drive force generated by the drive means to the displacement means in a predetermined state, the transmission means comprises a transmission section that transmits the drive force to a predetermined transmitted section of the displacement means, and is configured to be able to suppress displacement of the displacement means when the transmission section is not in contact with the transmitted section when the drive means is in a driven state.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a cylindrical portion used for transmitting driving force is configured to be guided into a recess in a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-234152).
Since the posture of the displacement member is maintained by support from the cylindrical portion, there was a problem in that it became difficult to perform other effects that utilize the cylindrical portion while maintaining the posture of the displacement member.

In contrast, according to gaming machine ZC1, the transmission part is configured to be able to suppress the displacement of the displacement means even when it is not in contact, so that the transmission part can be used for other presentations while maintaining the posture of the displacement means.

The mode of the transmission means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a single or multiple gears disposed between the displacement means and the drive means, or may be a mode exemplified by a mechanism such as a slider crank or cam in which multiple members interact with each other.

The manner in which the displacement can be suppressed is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement can be suppressed by being biased by an elastic force based on gravity or a spring member, by being locked (engaged) by a claw-shaped member, or by being abutted against a member having a function as a stopper. Examples of the suppression include a manner in which the displacement of the displacement means is reduced, or a manner in which the displacement of the displacement means is prevented (regulated), etc.

Gaming machine ZC2 is characterized in that in gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means has a forming portion formed along the movement trajectory of the transmission portion, and the forming portion is configured to be able to abut against the displacement means when the transmission portion is not in contact with the displacement means in the movement direction of the displacement means.

According to gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed by abutting the formed portion with the displacement means, thereby improving the stability of the arrangement of the displacement means against external forces.

Gaming machine ZC3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZC2, the formation portion extends from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and is configured so that the distance between the formation portion and the displacement means is longer than the distance between the transmission portion and the displacement means.

According to gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine ZC2, it is possible to partially shift the location where a load is generated when a driving force is transmitted from the location where a load is generated when displacement is suppressed in the opposing direction between the displacement means and the transmission means.

In gaming machine ZC3, the displacement means comprises a one-side functional part formed on one side of the movement direction of the displacement means relative to the transmitted part, and an other-side functional part formed on the other side of the movement direction of the displacement means relative to the transmitted part, the one-side functional part being configured on the same plane as the movement trajectory of the forming part, and the other-side functional part being configured outside the movement trajectory of the forming part.

According to gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine ZC3, the direction of movement in which movement is suppressed by the formation portion can be set to one side.

Gaming machine ZC5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means is configured to be able to change the transmission mode to the first displacement means and the second displacement means for each operating section.

The method of switching the transmission mode is not limited in any way. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to either the first displacement means or the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be interrupted, or the ratio of the driving force transmitted to the first displacement means and the second displacement means may be changed.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the effect achieved by any one of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, a single transmission means can displace a plurality of displacement means in different displacement modes.

Gaming machine ZC6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZC5, the first displacement means is disposed on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is disposed on the other side of the transmission means.

According to gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

The combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, the combination may include a timing in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced synchronously, or the first displacement means and the second displacement means may be configured so that the transmission or interruption of the driving force is reversed, and the first displacement means and the second displacement means are not displaced synchronously.

In addition, in the case where the timing of synchronous displacement is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed between the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

Gaming machine ZC7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the displacement direction of the first displacement means and the displacement direction of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

According to gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be made visible to each other in a common area, so that effective presentation can be executed even if the presentation area in which the first displacement means and the second displacement means displace is narrow.

The first displacement means and the second displacement means are not limited in any way. For example,
The multiple displacement means stacked in front and behind may be configured to extend into a common area at different times, or the initial arrangement may be configured to be stacked in front and behind, but pass through a common range during movement of the multiple movable members.

<The load generating part catches up and makes contact to prevent deviation of the stopping position>
In a gaming machine including a first displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement means configured to be displaceable in a predetermined direction to displace the first displacement means, the second displacement means being:
A gaming machine ZD1 comprising a load generating unit that applies a load in a direction along the predetermined direction to displace the first displacement means, the first displacement means comprising a loaded portion that receives a load from the load generating unit, and the load generating unit is configured to be separated from the loaded portion during displacement along the predetermined direction and to be able to abut against a predetermined portion different from the loaded portion of the first displacement means.
.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a cylindrical portion used for transmitting driving force is configured to be guided into a recess in a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-234152).
If a malfunction in the drive transmission caused the cylindrical portion to move excessively, the position of the displacement member would shift from the end of movement, which could cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In contrast, according to gaming machine ZD1, the load generating part separates from the loaded part during displacement and abuts against a predetermined part different from the loaded part, so that even if excessive displacement occurs in the second displacement means, it is possible to avoid the first displacement means being positioned in an unintended position.

Gaming machine ZD2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZD1, the load generating unit is configured to be able to apply a load from the other side of the specified direction to one side to the specified unit when the first displacement means is positioned at one end of the displaceable section.

According to gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is positioned at one end in a predetermined direction, a load is applied from the load generating section to the first displacement means in a direction from the other side to one side of the predetermined direction, so that the first displacement means can be pressed against the end on one side of the predetermined direction by the load.

In the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, a driving means configured to be able to drive the second displacement means is provided, and the load generating section is disposed on the other side of the load receiving section in the predetermined direction, the first displacement means being disposed on the other side of the load receiving section.
The gaming machine ZD3 is characterized in that it abuts against a displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines ZD1 and ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating section and the first displacement means, so that the terminal positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily kept constant even if the accuracy of the timing of stopping the driving force is low. This makes it possible to abruptly set the stop of the first displacement means and the second displacement means while suppressing the first displacement means and the second displacement means from shifting from their terminal positions.

In addition, a portion for taking measures against the rare event that the second displacement means moves excessively is
By providing it at a location separate from the loaded part that receives the load each time the driving force is transmitted, the fail-safe function can be performed without any problems even if the loaded part is deformed.

Gaming machine ZD4 is any one of gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, characterized in that it is provided with a regulating means capable of regulating the first displacement means at one end in the specified direction.

According to gaming machine ZD4, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is restricted at one end in a predetermined direction by the regulating means, the second displacement means can be displaced independently of the first displacement means.

The form of the restricting means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a claw-shaped member that moves in and out in a direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement means and engages with it, it may be restricted by gravity or a biasing force of an elastic member, or it may be constituted by a part of the second displacement means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, a detection means configured to be able to detect that the first displacement means is disposed at one end in the predetermined direction is provided, and the first displacement means is
The gaming machine ZD5 is characterized in that it comprises a detection target part whose position is detected by the detection means, and the load generating part abuts against the detection target part.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the area that is damaged due to the load at the time of contact can be limited to the detected portion.

Furthermore, by linking the lifespan, which can be calculated from the number of displacements (number of times it is driven), of the second displacement means with the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine detection failure due to damage to the detection piece and thereby determine the time to replace (maintenance) the second displacement means.

Gaming machine ZD6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generating unit to the specified unit intersects with the direction of the load applied from the load generating unit to the loaded unit.

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5,
The displacement means can be operated in a plurality of directions.

In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at a predetermined distance in a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the predetermined direction.
The area required for arranging the loaded portion and the predetermined portion can be narrowed.

<Technical idea of maintaining the flexibility of the tracking means>
The gaming machine ZE1 is provided with a displacement means configured to be able to displace a specified area, and a following means that follows the displacement of the displacement means, and is characterized in that it is provided with a prevention means that prevents a specified part of the following means from entering the specified area.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines configured such that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, JP 2012-157474 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, while there is an advantage in that the length of the wiring is set relative to the displacement means, and thus the wiring is less likely to bend when the displacement means is displaced, in order to prevent the wiring from getting caught in the displacement means, it becomes necessary to form temporary fixing parts that temporarily fix the wiring so that it does not displace relative to each other at various points on the displacement means, and in addition, since the displacement means is assembled while being placed in a predetermined position while the wiring is laid over the temporary fixing parts, it usually takes a long time to assemble.
This may result in a decrease in design freedom and a decrease in assembly efficiency.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means prevents the follower means, such as wiring, from being displaced toward the predetermined area, so that the follower means can be prevented from rubbing against the displacement means and being damaged. This eliminates the need to form multiple temporary fixing parts on the displacement means, and improves the design freedom of the displacement means and improves assembly efficiency.

The gaming machine ZE2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the following means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in distance to the displacement means occurs as the displacement means displaces.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the following means in a manner that allows it to be displaced in a direction in which the distance between the prevention means and the displacement means changes as the displacement of the displacement means occurs, so that the load applied to the following means can be reduced compared to when the position of the following means is fixed with a fixing member such as a cable tie.

The form of the prevention means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a columnar portion around which the tracking means can be wound, or a claw-shaped portion around which the tracking means can be clamped. In addition, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar portion, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used when fastening and fixing members together, or as a positioning portion used for positioning when assembling members together.

The form of the follow-up means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an electric wiring that supplies electricity to the displacement means, a band-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacement means and has a figure or pattern drawn on its surface to assist the performance by allowing the player to see the figure or pattern, or an elastic means such as a coil spring that generates a biasing force to assist the displacement of the displacement means.

The gaming machine ZE3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, the following means is configured to be able to supply electricity to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines ZE1 and ZE2, electricity can be effectively supplied to the displacement means.

Gaming machine ZE4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the specified direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the following means is configured to surround the prevention means.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to prevent the following means from protruding too far to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be arranged on both sides of the prevention means, the area in which it is necessary to avoid interference between the following means and other members can be limited to the range around the prevention means.

In addition, it is not necessary to provide a clearance portion for allowing the follower means to enter outward from the displacement end of the displacement means in the displacement direction, which makes it possible to arrange the displacement means in a space-saving manner.

A gaming machine ZE5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, it is provided with a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at an inner position of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, the connecting portion between the following means and the displacement means can be prevented from being seen by the player by the shielding means. Note that the inward direction here means the inner direction when the edge portion in the front view is the outer shape.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable around a first axis, and the first axis is disposed on the outer edge of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZE5, it is possible to ensure a large amount of projection of the displacement means from the outer shape (outer edge) of the shielding means while preventing the following means from entering the player's field of vision.

The gaming machine ZE7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the prevention means is a straight line that equally divides the rotational angle of the displacement means centered on the first axis, and is arranged on a straight line passing through the first axis.

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines ZE5 and ZE6, the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means can be suppressed.

A gaming machine ZE8, in any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, characterized in that the displacement means is provided with a guide section that guides the following means in a direction away from the displacement locus.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, it is possible to prevent friction with the displacement means, thereby improving the durability of the following means.

A gaming machine ZE9 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZE8, the guide portion extends in a direction perpendicular to the outline of the specified area.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the following means near the displacement means can be narrowed, and the area of the gap through which the following means can pass can be narrowed, so that the rigidity of the external means holding the displacement means can be improved compared to when the gap is large.

Gaming machine ZE10 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the following means is formed in a string or band shape, one end is connected to the displacement means and the other end is connected to the gaming machine, and the following means is guided from one side of the specified area toward both ends.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, a load can be applied in a pulling direction from one side of a predetermined area to both ends of the following means, thereby making it possible to balance the load applied from the guide section across the entire following means.

Gaming machine ZE11, in any one of gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, is characterized in that the following means is configured to be wound around the prevention means in a loosening direction when the displacement means is displaced from a pre-displacement position to a post-displacement position.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacement means with the slackness (slack) of the follower means, it is possible to prevent an excessive load from being placed on the follower means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, a positioning unit is provided between the displacement means and the following means, and a positioning unit is provided for positioning the positioning means, and the positioning unit is provided outside the movement trajectory of the following means.
E12.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since it is possible to prevent the alignment portion from encroaching on the displacement space of the follower means, it is possible to minimize the load applied to the follower means as the follower means is displaced.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wrapped around the prevention means, and the following means has a first displacement section (weak displacement section) and a second displacement section (strong displacement section) set to a larger displacement than the first displacement section, and the first displacement section is positioned between the second displacement section and the positioning means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the locations where damage is likely to occur due to contact with the arrangement means of the following means. Therefore, it is possible to limit the locations that require reinforcement, and it is possible to improve durability at low cost.

The manner of comparing the magnitude of the displacement of the first displacement part and the second displacement part is not limited in any way. For example, the linear distance between the positions before and after the displacement may be compared, or, when the displacement occurs in multiple directions, the comparison may be limited to the displacement in a specific direction (or on a specific surface).

Gaming machine ZE14 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the prevention means has a protruding portion protruding from the placement means, and the following means is wound around the protruding portion.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machines ZE12 and ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled to the positioning means from above while the positioning means supports the following means which sags under its own weight, making it easy to assemble the following means, positioning means and fixing means.

<Technical concept that changes the displacement (transmission) mode with forward and reverse rotation>
In a gaming machine including a driving means, a displacement means configured to be displaceable by a driving force of the driving means, and a transmission means configured to be able to transmit the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacement means, the driving means has a first driving mode for generating a driving force in a first direction, and
the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in a first displacement mode driven by the first drive mode and in a second displacement mode driven by the second drive mode.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with first and second displacement means that are displaced by the driving force of a common drive device, and are configured so that the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the driving direction of the drive device (see, for example, JP 2013-146413 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the first game is determined by the length by which the drive unit is driven in the forward direction.
The only thing that changed was the change in the displacement mode between the displacement means and the second displacement means, and even if the drive direction of the drive device was switched between forward and reverse, both the first displacement means and the second displacement means were displaced. Therefore, there was a problem in that the improvement in the presentation effect achieved by adopting a device capable of driving in forward and reverse directions as the drive device was insufficient.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine ZF1, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated, so that the presentation effect can be sufficiently improved by utilizing a driving device that can set multiple directions in which the driving force is generated.

A gaming machine ZF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine ZF1, it is provided with a light-emitting means for emitting light toward the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in a manner that passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light-emitting means.

According to gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machine ZF1, the position where the light emitted from the light-emitting means intersects with the displacement means can be changed while the displacement means is being displaced, thereby producing a dazzling effect in which the illuminated position of the displacement means changes over time.

Gaming machine ZF3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, it is provided with a displacement suppression means for suppressing displacement of at least a portion of the transmission means, the transmission means has a suppression area in which the transmission of the driving force of the driving means is suppressed in at least one of the first driving mode or the second driving mode, and the displacement suppression means is configured to be able to suppress a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effects of gaming machines ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppression means can prevent the displacement means from being displaced in an unintended displacement manner due to the transmission means being unintentionally displaced when the transmission of the driving force is suppressed.

In addition, the visibility of the displacement means can be maintained high compared to when the displacement means is stopped by directly contacting another member, so that the displacement means in an appropriate displacement mode can be configured to be easily seen by the player.

The type of the displacement suppression means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an engagement device that generates viscous resistance, such as a damper device, or a resistance device that generates resistance by its own weight. In cases where the resistance by its own weight is likely to be insufficient (for example, when the displacement direction of the displacement means is along the horizontal direction), it is not possible to suppress the free-spinning operation by the force of gravity, so it may be a device such as a torque limiter that varies the resistance depending on the displacement mode.

Gaming machine ZF4 is characterized in that the gaming machine ZF3 is provided with a detection means configured to detect the displacement of the displacement suppression means, the displacement suppression means being configured to generate resistance when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression area is lower than a predetermined speed, and the resistance being suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression area is equal to or higher than the predetermined speed, and the detection means is positioned so as to be able to detect the detectable portion of the displacement suppression means at the position where the displacement suppression means generates resistance.

According to gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects of gaming machine ZF3, the detection means can be used both to detect the stopping position of the displacement suppression means and to detect whether the suppression of displacement in the suppression area of the transmission means in the displacement suppression means is functioning well.

Gaming machine ZF5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means includes a first displacement means that rotates and displaces around a first axis, and a second displacement means that rotates and displaces the outside of the first displacement means around the first axis, and is configured to be able to suppress the displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive mode or the second drive mode.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4,
In the drive mode or the second drive mode, the displacement of the second displacement means is configured to be suppressed, so that in this suppressed state, two different presentation modes can be configured: one where the second displacement means is positioned between the player and the first displacement means and blocks the view, and one where the second displacement means is positioned outside between the player and the first displacement means and does not block the view.In addition, displacement is also possible in a drive mode that does not suppress the displacement of the second displacement means, so that a total of three different displacement modes can be used to configure presentations using the displacement means.

A gaming machine ZF6, in any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, characterized in that the transmission means includes a light transmitting means formed of a light transmitting material on the side of the connection position with the displacement means.
.

According to gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the light transmitting means can facilitate the assembly of the displacement means, and the light emitting effect can be achieved by conducting light toward the displacement means.

Gaming machine ZF7 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means comprises a first displacement means that rotates and displaces around a first axis, and a second displacement means that rotates and displaces around the first axis and is connected to the transmission means outside the connection position of the first displacement means with the transmission means, and when viewed in the first axial direction, the second displacement means is configured to overlap with the first displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6,
The displacement means can be prevented from coming off by the first displacement means, which makes it unnecessary to provide a separate retaining member.

<Vibration device next to the device (P9 Policy 1)>
A first operation means configured to be operable by a player, a second operation means arranged at a position different from the first operation means and configured to be operable by a player, and the second operation means is arranged at a position different from the first operation means and configured to be operable by a player.
The gaming machine ZG1 is characterized by comprising a load generating means arranged on the operating means side and configured to generate a load toward the first operating means and the second operating means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that are equipped with multiple operating devices and a driving device for driving the operating devices to produce effects (for example, JP 2016-159
(See, for example, Publication No. 178.) However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, since a vibration device is provided for each operation device, the space required for arranging each operation device is large, which tends to limit the number of operation devices that can be arranged, and there are problems in that the cost increases due to the large number of drive devices.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, so that the load generating means can be used to drive both the first operating means and the second operating means (i.e., multiple operating means). This allows the space required for arranging the first operating means and the second operating means to be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of operating means that can be arranged to be raised. In addition, the number of load generating means can be reduced, so that the cost of constructing the gaming machine can be reduced.

The type of the load generating means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a means configured to be capable of vibration (high-speed repeated displacement), a means that generates a load at a predetermined cycle like a pump, or a means configured of an arm member whose posture changes due to the displacement of a cam. Furthermore, the type of load is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a load that is mechanically transmitted in a contact state, or a load (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) that is transmitted in a non-contact state.

A gaming machine ZG2, characterized in that in the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is disposed between the first operating means and the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZG1, a load can be transmitted to both the first operating means and the second operating means to the same extent.

Gaming machine ZG3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operating means is operated to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area, and the load generating means is disposed in a covering means that at least partially covers the first operating means from a predetermined direction.

According to gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effects achieved by gaming machines ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is disposed at a position where the fingers of the player operating the first operating means are sandwiched between the load generating means and the first operating means, making it possible to easily transmit the load generated by the load generating means to the player's fingers.

For example, during the process of the player's fingers moving, such as bringing their fingers close to the first operating means to operate it and then removing their fingers from the first operating means after the operation is completed, the covering means can be positioned in a position where the player's fingers can easily pass through (positioning the covering means so as to cover from a direction that is likely to interfere with the fingers), making it possible to configure the load of the load generating means to be easily transmitted to the player, especially during the movement of the fingers.

Furthermore, for example, by positioning the covering means in a position where there is a high probability that the player's fingers will come into contact with it when operating the first operating means, it is possible to create a state in which the load from the load generating means is easily transmitted to the player throughout the operation of the first operating means.

It should be noted that this concept is different from the concept of providing the load generating means in the first operating means.
That is, since the load generating means is disposed on the second operating means side with respect to the first operating means, the load generating means is disposed at a position different from that of the first operating means.

In the gaming machine ZG3, an intermediate means is provided between the load generating means and the first and second operating means, and is configured to be able to transmit a load to the first and second operating means, and the intermediate means is configured so that the intensity of vibration transmission to the first operating means is higher than the intensity of vibration transmission to the second operating means.
4.

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZG3, the load transmission can be concentrated on the first operating means side.

Gaming machine ZG5 is characterized in that in the gaming machine ZG4, the intervening means is configured to be able to change the strength of the load transmission by displacing the load generating means as the load generating means is driven.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG4, the intensity of the load transmitted through the intervening means can be improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven. Therefore, the degree to which the first operating means and the second operating means operate (vibrate) in conjunction with each other due to the load applied by the player to the pachinko machine can be suppressed, and when the load generating means is driven, the intensity of the load transmitted through the intervening means can be improved.
It is possible to execute an effect in which the operating means and the second operating means are strongly moved (vibrated).

Gaming machine ZG6 is any one of gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, characterized in that it is provided with a holding means for holding the load generating means in a displaceable manner, and the holding means is provided with a guide portion for guiding the displacement of the load generating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be ensured by regulating the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions such as the displaced member displaced by the vibration of the load generating means colliding unintentionally with the player.

Furthermore, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction by guiding it in the desired direction, thereby improving the degree of freedom of the load generating means adopted to realize the desired movement (vibration) performance.

In the gaming machine ZG6, the holding means is configured in a manner that allows the load generating means to be displaced in a direction intersecting the direction in which the load generating means is guided by the guide portion.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZG6, the load generating means can be configured to be displaced in a cross direction when switching between the non-driven state and the driven state, and the load generating means can be displaced in a different manner when switching and when in the driven state (stable state). This can improve the presentation effect by the load generating means.

Various embodiments are possible to allow the displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction of the second holding means may cross the guiding direction of the guide portion, or a flexible member may be interposed between the load generating means and the holding means, and the displacement may occur due to the deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means as a means of covering (P9 Policy 2)>
The present invention is provided with a frame means having a frame shape, a covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from a front side, and a vibration means arranged on the covering means and configured to be vibrated, the covering means comprising:
The gaming machine ZH1 is characterized in that it has an allowable portion that allows displacement, and is configured so that the vibration of the vibration means can be transmitted through the allowable portion.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include a front frame and a vibration means disposed in front of the front frame (see, for example, JP 2015-159837 A).
In the conventional gaming machines described above, it was necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to a level that would not transmit vibration of a predetermined intensity or more to the front frame side (internal mechanism side), and there was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of vibration presentation.

In contrast, in the gaming machine ZH1, the vibration means is arranged on the covering means and displacement of the covering means is permitted, so that vibrations can be transmitted to the player side via the covering means, while the vibrations are absorbed by the displacement of the covering means, thereby suppressing the transmission of vibrations to the frame means side.
This makes it possible to increase the permissible vibration strength of the vibration means.

The mode of the tolerant portion is not limited in any way. For example, the tolerant portion may be configured in a connection mode that assumes the displacement of a slide, link, gear, or the like, and the displacement may occur when the slide, link, gear, or the like operates, or the tolerant portion may be configured from a material or structure that is more flexible than other portions, and the displacement may occur when an overload is applied.

In the gaming machine ZH1, the covering means is configured so that the allowable amount of vertical displacement is smaller than the allowable amount of horizontal displacement.
.

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the tolerant part is maintained in the horizontal displacement, and when a load in the direction of gravity is applied to the covering means, such as when the player places his/her hand on the covering means, the covering means is excessively displaced, and it is possible to prevent the player's posture from being disturbed. In other words, by keeping the allowable amount of vertical displacement small, it is possible to stabilize the structure of the product.

Gaming machine ZH3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, the covering means is configured in a bag shape with the frame means side open.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines ZH1 and ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in a bag shape with an open side, the edge of the bag and the frame means are disposed opposite each other,
The contact area between the covering means and the frame means, which come into contact and transmit vibrations, can be reduced, which suppresses the transmission of vibrations to the frame means, thereby preventing the vibrations from being transmitted to the main boards, ball passages, and main electrical components arranged on the frame means side.

In any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibration means includes a mounting portion disposed on the frame means side, the frame means includes a support portion that supports the mounting portion, and the mounting portion includes:
The gaming machine ZH4 is characterized in that it is configured to have lower deformation resistance compared to the support part.

According to the gaming machine ZH4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibration means is limited while maintaining the suppression of vibration transmission to the frame means side, and further, compared to when the installation part is made hard, it is possible to generate bites by utilizing the fact that the deformation resistance is low, and it is possible to ensure a large absolute value of the displacement amount of the vibration means toward the frame means side. This makes it easier to greatly displace the covering means on which the vibration means is installed.

Gaming machine ZH5 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering portion and a second covering portion having lower deformation resistance compared to the first covering portion, and the vibration means includes an abutment portion connected to the first covering portion and the second covering portion and capable of locally abutting the first covering portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the first covering part, which has a high deformation resistance, is locally brought into contact with the contact part, so that the contact position can be used as a fixed point (reference point) of vibration. In other words, the absolute value of the displacement of the vibration means and the second covering part based on the contact position can be increased.

Gaming machine ZH6 is any one of gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, and is provided with a ball launching operating means that is operated to launch a gaming ball toward a gaming area, and the covering means is characterized in that at least a specified member is interposed between the covering means and the ball launching operating means.

According to the gaming machine ZH6, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, the transmission of vibrations to the ball launching operating means can be suppressed.

<A feature of this product is that the light itself is blocked by the displacement of the props>
The gaming machine ZI1 has a light-emitting means and an irradiated means onto which light from the light-emitting means is irradiated, and is characterized in that the appearance of the irradiated means is changed while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means when viewed in a specified direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines equipped with light-emitting means that are mounted on movable parts and are configured to be able to perform light-emitting effects (see, for example, JP 2015-208360 A).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, there is no component that displaces so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light-emitting means, and it is necessary to control the light-emitting means in order to change the form of the light-emitting performance. This control puts a strain on the data capacity and increases the size of the circuit board, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the method of realizing the light-emitting performance.

In contrast, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and the displacement of the displacement means is configured to interfere with the light irradiated from the light emitting means, so that the state of the light emitting performance can be switched by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, the state of the light emitting performance can be changed without controlling the light emitting means, and the board can be made smaller by eliminating the need for data for control and a circuit for control. This allows for improvements in the method of realizing the light emitting performance.

The manner of displacement is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, it may be rotation, linear sliding, or displacement along a predetermined curve. When the displacement of the displacement means is linear sliding, it is easier to maintain the outer shape of the displacement means when the direction of the sliding coincides with the predetermined direction, compared to when the direction of the sliding intersects with the predetermined direction.

The form of the irradiated means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be configured to rotate on a rotation axis intersecting the optical axis, and the projected area may change depending on the position, or it may be configured so that a member protrudes from the inside, and the relative projected area may change by expanding or contracting displacement even if the position does not change.

The form of the displacement means is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be configured to rotate around the irradiated means, or may slide on a plane to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

Furthermore, the manner in which the outer shape of the displacement means is left intact is not limited in any way.
For example, the displacement means may be visually perceived as being stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be made smaller than that of the irradiated means so that the displacement of the displacement means is not recognized by the player.

Furthermore, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means, and the light emitting means may be configured to face the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The form of the light emitting means is not limited in any way. For example, the position may be fixed, or the light emitting means may be configured to be displaceable. In a displaceable state, the light emitting means may be disposed on the displacement means, or the light emitting means and the displacement means may be displaced separately (independently). In addition, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The manner in which the light emitting means is displaced may be such that it slides toward or away from the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means, or it may rotate around the irradiated means with its optical axis directed toward the irradiated means.

The light emitting mode of the light emitting means is not limited in any way. For example, the light emitting means may be one that always maintains a lighted state, or one that can be switched between lighted and unlighted.

In the gaming machine ZI1, the difference in appearance of the irradiated means is caused by the irradiated means reflecting the light irradiated from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine ZI1, when the light emitting means emits light, the difference between the irradiated means can be immediately recognized, so that the attention to the timing of the light irradiation can be improved.
The means may be non-displaceable.

A gaming machine ZI3, in which in the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of difference in the appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines ZI1 and ZI2, it is possible to improve attention to the illuminated means.

The type of displacement that is the basis for the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement that continues at a constant speed, or it may be an irregular displacement. It may also be an instantaneous displacement, or a slow displacement (so slow that the player has difficulty grasping the displacement, for example, 1 mm/min).

A gaming machine ZI4 is any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, characterized in that the irradiated means can be configured to change the direction in which light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means, it is possible to vary the locations that are illuminated and highlighted by the light reflected through the irradiated means.

A gaming machine ZI5 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the direction in which the irradiated means reflects light is the same, but at least one of the amount of light or the color of the light can be configured to be different.

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effects achieved by any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to increase attention to the light emission mode of the irradiated means.

Gaming machine ZI6 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, it is equipped with a non-shielded light-emitting means configured to be able to irradiate light onto the irradiated means in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis does not interfere with the movement trajectory of a displacement means arranged around the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, by irradiating light from a non-shielded light-emitting means, it is possible to shine light on the irradiated means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means, thereby preventing the irradiated means from appearing darker than necessary.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiated means includes a first irradiated means,
The gaming machine ZI7 is provided with a second irradiated means that is configured to be positionable at a shielding position capable of shielding light irradiated from the light emitting means toward the first irradiated means, and the first irradiated means is configured so that the area of the light emitting means as viewed in the optical axis direction is smaller when the second irradiated means is positioned at the shielding position compared to when the second irradiated means is not positioned at the shielding position.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6,
It is possible to make it difficult for light to reach the irradiated means. That is, it is possible to improve the effect of blocking light. Note that the change in the area of the first irradiated means may occur only when light is irradiated from the light emitting means.

Gaming machine ZI8 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate light to the irradiated means along multiple optical axes, and the irradiated means is configured to be able to intersect with the multiple optical axes at a predetermined position.

According to gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effects of any one of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the amount of light received by the irradiated means can be increased by increasing the optical axis of the light-emitting means (for example, by increasing the number of LEDs).

A gaming machine ZI9, which is any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, is provided with a driving means configured to be capable of synchronously driving the irradiated means and a displacement means arranged around the irradiated means, the irradiated means is configured so that a predetermined first surface faces the same side during displacement, and the displacement means is configured to periodically displace between the first position and the second position.
.

According to gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, it is possible to suppress large changes in the visibility of the irradiated means, while changing the timing of switching the light emission state (e.g., light/dark) of the irradiated means caused by the arrangement of the displacement means by changing the speed of the displacement means.

The manner of displacement of the irradiated means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a sliding displacement or a rotational displacement. The rotational displacement may be, for example, a rotational displacement generated around a rotation axis along the display surface of the display device, or a rotational displacement generated around a rotation axis perpendicular to the display surface of the display area.

Gaming machine ZI10 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means arranged around the irradiated means or the irradiated means has a surface facing the light emitting means that is configured to change the direction of travel of light irradiated from the light emitting means toward the player when the displacement means is positioned at the second position.

According to gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effects achieved by any of gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, it is possible to increase the difference in the degree to which light irradiated from the light-emitting means travels toward the player when the displacement means is positioned at the first position and when it is positioned at the second position.

<Feature AA group> (Lever UP control)
A gaming machine AA1 having an operation means that can be operated by at least a player in a first direction from a predetermined first position, and an effect execution means that can execute an effect corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation means, characterized in that the gaming machine also has a notification means that can notify an operation suggestion mode that suggests operating the operation means in the first direction, and a specific effect setting means that can set a specific effect when the operation means is not located at a specific position when a release condition is established after the operation in the first direction.

In the past, when a game ball enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Some gaming machines can execute an operation effect to make the player operate the operation means as a suggestion effect to suggest the lottery result before the lottery result is announced, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is announced. In addition, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines have the player operate the operation means in a state where the operation means is moved from the initial position in order to enhance the presentation effect (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). In such gaming machines, if the player does not operate the operation means even though the operation means has been moved from the initial position, it is necessary to execute control to return the movable operation means to the initial position regardless of the player's operation, which reduces the presentation effect and reduces the interest of the game. The aim is to provide a gaming experience that enhances the enjoyment of the game using the gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine AA1, when the release condition is met and the operating means is not located at a specific position, a specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means, making it possible to provide the player with an effect that is unique to when the operating means is not located at a specific position. Therefore, even if the operating means is not operated after it is moved, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from decreasing, which has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AA2, which is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AA1, it has a biasing means for constantly biasing the operating means toward the specific position, and a movement control means capable of moving the operating means from the specific position to the first position different from the specific position, and the operating means is positioned at the specific position by operating in the first direction from the first position.

According to gaming machine AA2, the player can operate the operating means located at the first position to move the operating means to a specific position, allowing the player to simultaneously enjoy operating the operating means and move the operating means to a specific position. This has the effect of allowing the operation presentation to be carried out smoothly and enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AA2, there is a second operating means that can be operated by a player different from the operating means, and the specific presentation includes at least a suggestive aspect that suggests operating the second operating means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AA2, gaming machine AA3 executes a specific effect that includes a suggestive mode that suggests operating the second operating means, making it possible to make the second operating means easier to operate. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to release the operating means and for the operating means to be moved to a specific position by the biasing means, making it easier to position the operating means in a predetermined position and making it easier to execute the operating effect.

A gaming machine AA4 is any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA3, characterized in that it has a fixing means for fixing the operating means in the specific position so that it is difficult to operate.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the gaming machine AA4 has the advantage that when the operating means is located in a specific position, the movement of the operating means is restricted by the fixing means, making it possible to prevent the operating means from being operated regardless of the operation presentation. This has the effect of preventing the operating means from being operated unnecessarily, which could cause a malfunction.

A gaming machine AA5 is any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, which has a launching means capable of launching gaming balls based on the player's operation, and the specific presentation includes a feature for encouraging the player to launch the gaming ball.

According to gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AA1 to AA4, a specific effect is included to encourage the player to shoot the game ball, so that when the specific effect is executed, the player can be actively encouraged to shoot the game ball. This has the effect of executing an effect that makes it easier for the player to release the operating means, making it easier to move the operating means to a specific position, making it easier to position the operating means in a specified position, and making it easier to execute the operating effect.

<Features AB Group> (Combined control of reserved PUSH and PUSH notice)
a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the identification by the identification means; a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information; and an identification pattern display means for causing the display means to display an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means; and the gaming machine AB1 is characterized in that the gaming machine has an operation means operable by a player, an operation performance execution means for executing an operation performance in which the performance mode is changed by operating the operation means, an identification pattern performance execution means for executing an identification pattern performance in which the mode of the displayed identification pattern can be changed by operating the operation means, and a restriction means for restricting the operation performance and the identification pattern performance from being executed during an overlapping period.

In the past, when a game ball enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Some gaming machines are capable of executing an operation effect to make the player operate the operating means as a suggestive effect to suggest the lottery result before the lottery result is announced, allowing the player to enjoy the period until the lottery result is announced. (For example, JP 2013-090780 A). In addition, some gaming machines having the above-mentioned configuration have multiple conditions for executing the operation effect to further enhance the presentation effect. In this case, there is a problem that multiple operation effects are executed at the same time, resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is reduced. The object is to provide a game that improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine AB1, the control means can regulate the overlapping execution of the operation effects and the identification pattern effects, making it possible to prevent multiple operation effects from being executed at the same time. This has the effect of increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AB2 is characterized in that the regulating means in the gaming machine AB1 is configured to set a period during which the operation presentation mode is regulated during the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and to execute the identification symbol presentation within that period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AB1, gaming machine AB2 has the following advantages: during the period when identification information is dynamically displayed, a regulating means sets a period during which the execution of the operation presentation mode is regulated, and the identification pattern presentation is executed within that period, making it possible to execute multiple operation presentations smoothly. This has the effect of enabling multiple operation presentations to be executed in a way that is easy for the player to understand, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine AB3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, during the period in which the operation presentation is being executed, a variable appearance presentation is executed in which the appearance of the identification pattern is changed and displayed without the operation of the operation means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AB1 and AB2, gaming machine AB3 is configured to be able to execute a variable mode effect during the period in which an operational effect is being executed, making it difficult for the player to tell whether a variable mode effect or a distinguishable pattern effect is being executed, which has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

<Characteristic AC group> (Falling to end the electric support)
a ball-entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the ball-entry means; a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball-entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state; an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball-entry means; a determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; a display means for displaying identification information for showing a determination result made by the determination means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information for showing a specific determination result of the display means is displayed; a probability setting means for setting a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability as the probability of determining that the specific determination result is obtained; and a probability setting means for setting the second probability. a probability control means for setting the first probability based on a specific judgment result determined by the judgment means; a setting means for setting a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than in the normal game state; and an end condition determination means for determining whether an end condition for setting the normal game state is established when the special game state is set by the setting means, wherein the setting means is configured to be able to set the special game state when the second probability is set, and the end condition determination means determines whether the end condition is established based on the fact that the second probability is set to the first probability when a predetermined period has elapsed after the special game state is set.

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Some of these machines are capable of setting a high probability state in which it is easy to win a win and a low probability state in which it is difficult to win a win as a gaming state, and execute a lottery (a so-called drop lottery) to shift the gaming state to the low probability state when the high probability state is set. Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to be capable of setting a specific gaming state in which a lottery for winning or failure is easily executed, and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to execute. (For example, JP 2010-269007 A). However, in the above gaming machine, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from a high probability state to a low probability state and the timing of transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state, making it difficult for players to understand the transition status of each gaming state, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game. The objective is to provide a game that improves the interest of the game in the above gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine AC1, when the probability control means sets the first probability, the normal gaming state is set, so the setting status of the probability setting means and the setting status of the setting means can be correlated and varied. This has the effect of making the transition of the gaming state easier for the player to understand, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AC2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AC1, the determination means executes the determination when a determination condition for the discrimination means to execute the determination is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine AC2, when the discrimination condition is met, the discrimination means can be made to make a judgment, and therefore excessive discrimination by the discrimination means can be prevented when the second probability is set. This has the effect of providing the player with a fair game.

A gaming machine AC3 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AC2, the determination means executes a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means before the dynamic display of the identification information starts.

According to gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effect of gaming machine AC2, a judgment is made by the judgment means before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so that the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the result of the judgment made based on the establishment of the judgment condition can be made based on the judgment result of the judgment means. As a result, when the judgment means judges that a specific judgment result has been made, the judgment of the judgment means, which is made based on the establishment of the judgment condition that triggered the judgment, can be made with the first probability. This has the effect of providing the player with a proper game.

A gaming machine AC4, which is any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, is characterized in that the probability control means sets the first probability before the dynamic display of the identification information starts when the determination means determines that the specific determination result has been obtained.

According to gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines AC1 to AC3, if the judgment result of the judgment means is a specific judgment result, the probability control means sets a first probability before the start of dynamic display of the identification information. Therefore, after a specific judgment result is determined, it is possible to prevent dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability from being executed, and therefore it is possible to provide the player with an appropriate game.

A gaming machine AC5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal gaming state based on the fact that the specific determination result is determined when the special gaming state is set.

According to gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the normal game state is set by the setting means even when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. Therefore, when the normal game state is set by the setting means, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to tell whether the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result or whether the judgment result of the judgment means is a specific judgment result, and it is possible to provide the player with the fun of making predictions. This has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

<Feature AD group> (Burst interruption performance)
The gaming machine AD1 has an effect execution means capable of executing an effect, and an effect period determination means for determining the execution period of the effect executed by the effect execution means, characterized in that it also has a specific effect execution means capable of interrupting at least a part of the effect being executed by the effect execution means during the period in which the effect is being executed by the effect execution means to execute a specific effect, and a setting means for changing and setting the effect to be interrupted in accordance with the state of the effect being executed by the effect execution means when the specific effect is executed.

In the past, when a game ball enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Some machines allow a suggestive performance to suggest the result of the lottery before the lottery result is announced, allowing the player to enjoy the period until the lottery result is announced. In addition, there are gaming machines that enhance the effect of the suggestive performance by executing various performances at various times as suggestive performances (for example, JP 2014-209952 A). In such gaming machines, even when one suggestive performance is being executed, another suggestive performance can be executed, so that the type of performance executed can be increased and the performance effect can be enhanced. However, in the above-mentioned gaming machines, since the other suggestive performances are executed regardless of the performance status of the one suggestive performance being executed, there was a problem that the suggestive performance executed suddenly changes, confusing the player and reducing the player's motivation to play. Furthermore, if the suggestive performance being performed indicates a predetermined change in the process (for example, a story development), there is a problem that switching the suggestive performance will end the predetermined change in the process midway, further confusing the player. The objective of the present invention is to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by executing a variety of suggestive performances without confusing the player in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine AD1, the mode of the interrupted performance due to the execution of a specific performance can be changed by the setting means, so it is possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted midway through execution, confusing the player. Therefore, in a gaming machine that can execute multiple performances in an overlapping manner, it is possible to provide the player with a performance that is easy to understand.

A gaming machine AD2, characterized in that the effects executed by the effect execution means in the gaming machine AD1 include audio effects, and the setting means sets whether the audio effects are to be interrupted or not interrupted depending on the state of the effects.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AD1, the gaming machine AD2 is configured to be able to set whether to continue the sound only or to interrupt the sound as well when the performance is interrupted, making it possible to vary the interruption mode of the performance depending on the content of the interrupted performance. This has the effect of varying the player's level of interest in the interrupted performance, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In this case, it is possible to determine whether to interrupt the output of the sound based on the performance mode of the specific performance and the performance mode of the interrupted performance, and if the sound type set as the performance mode of the specific performance and the sound type set as the performance mode of the interrupted performance are the same sound type, it is preferable to configure the system so that the output of the sound is interrupted. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to prevent the sound of the interrupted performance from being output and being confused with the sound set as the performance mode of the specific performance, resulting in a performance that is difficult to understand.

It may also be configured to determine whether or not to suspend audio output depending on the timing of the pause of the performance. In this case, if the remaining time of the paused performance is less than a predetermined time (e.g., less than one second), audio alone can be output to the end even if the performance is paused. This makes it difficult for the player to realize that the performance has been paused.

A gaming machine AD3, which is characterized in that it has a display means for dynamically displaying multiple identification symbols as one of the effects executed by the effect execution means in the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus that is advantageous to the player when the identification symbols are displayed in a specific combination on the display means, and the setting means changes and sets the performance to be interrupted depending on whether or not a reach display mode has been displayed in which one of the multiple identification symbols is dynamically displayed and the other identification symbols are displayed in a combination that can form the specific combination has been displayed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD1 or AD2, gaming machine AD3 can change the presentation depending on whether the interrupted presentation occurs before or after the reach display. In other words, it is possible to change the mode of presentation set by the setting means based on the timing of interruption of the presentation executed by the presentation execution means. This has the effect of preventing players from being confused by the interruption of the presentation.

A gaming machine AD3, the setting means sets the performance so that if the performance executed by the performance item means is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, the audio performance is interrupted, and if the performance is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, the audio performance is not interrupted. A gaming machine AD4.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AD3, gaming machine AD4 can interrupt the sound if the performance is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, and can not interrupt the sound if the performance is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed. Therefore, even if the performance is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, it is possible to continue outputting the sound, which has the effect of preventing the player from being confused into thinking that the reach display mode has been abandoned midway.

<Feature AE Group> (Button tap sound control)
The gaming machine AE1 has an operation means operable by a player and a presentation execution means for varying the presentation based on the operation of the operation means, and is characterized in having a sound control means for alternately outputting a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound each time the operation means is operated.

In the past, when a game ball enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Some gaming machines can execute an operation effect to make the player operate the operation means as a suggestion effect to suggest the lottery result before the lottery result is announced, allowing the player to enjoy the period until the lottery result is announced (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). In addition, some of the above gaming machines output an operation sound when the player operates the operation means to notify the player that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such gaming machines, the player can easily determine whether or not the operation means has been operated by the output operation sound, but there is a problem that if the next operation is executed during the period until the output of one operation sound is completed, that is, if a continuous operation is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. Also, there is a problem that if only one operation sound is output, the game becomes monotonous. The objective of the game machine described above is to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by making the output operation sound easier for the player to hear and outputting a wide variety of operation sounds.

According to the gaming machine AE1, when a player operates the operating means multiple times, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are output alternately, which has the effect of making it possible to output a wider variety of operation sounds than when only one type of operation sound is output. In addition, because different operation sounds are output alternately, even when the operating means is operated at short intervals (shorter than the output period of one operation sound), it is possible for the player to easily determine from the operation sound that the operating means has been operated. This has the effect of making the game more interesting.

A gaming machine AE2 characterized in that in the gaming machine AE1, the audio control means outputs the first operation sound for a first period, and if an operation that outputs the first operation sound is performed again before the first period has elapsed, the audio control means stops the first operation sound being output and starts outputting the first operation sound anew.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AE1, gaming machine AE2 has the effect of clearly notifying the player that a new operation has been performed, because if the next first operation sound is output within the first period during which the first operation sound is output, the first operation sound being output is stopped and a new first operation sound is output.

Gaming machine E3, characterized in that in gaming machine AE1 or AE2, the audio control means outputs the second operation sound for a second period, and if an operation that outputs the second operation sound is performed again before the second period has elapsed, stops the second operation sound being output and starts outputting the second operation sound anew.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AE1 or AE2, gaming machine AE3 has the effect of clearly notifying the player that a new operation has been performed, because if the next second operation sound is output within the second period during which the second operation sound is output, the second operation sound being output is stopped and a new second operation sound is output.

A gaming machine AE4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the presentation execution means is configured to be capable of executing a continuous operation presentation in which the presentation style changes in response to multiple consecutive operations of the operating means.

According to gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines AE1 to AE3, a continuous operation presentation is executed in response to operating the operating means multiple times in succession, so that the player can be notified that the operating means has been operated based on the variable state of the presentation mode. This makes it possible to determine that an operation on the operating means has been accepted by the operation sound and the presentation. This has the effect of providing the player with a game that is easy to understand.

<Feature AF Group> (Pending Notice)
a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the identification by the identification means; a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information; and an identification pattern display means for causing the display means to display an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means; the gaming machine AF1 further comprises an operation means operable by a player, an operation performance execution means for executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by operating the operation means, and an identification pattern performance execution means for executing an identification pattern performance in which the performance mode of the identification pattern displayed by operating the operation means can be changed, and the identification pattern performance execution means is configured to execute the identification pattern performance for two or more of the identification patterns when a plurality of identification patterns are displayed on the display means.

Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display a variable pattern based on the entry of a game ball into a start winning hole, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variable display has ended. Furthermore, some machines are configured to be able to hold and store the lottery to be executed multiple times based on the entry of a game ball into a start winning hole, display the reserved pattern corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and are configured to be able to execute a reserved notice performance that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance using the displayed reserved pattern (for example, JP 2009-297071 A). In the above gaming machine, the color and shape of the reserved pattern are changed, and the variable display corresponding to the reserved pattern suggests the expectation of a jackpot, making it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation before the variable display begins. However, when the reserved notice performance occurs, it becomes difficult for the player to feel a sense of expectation for the reserved pattern that is not the subject of the reserved notice, which reduces the player's motivation to play. The purpose of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine AF1, since it is configured to execute a discrimination pattern effect for two or more discrimination patterns in one discrimination pattern effect, it is possible to expand the target range of discrimination pattern effects and reduce the number of discrimination patterns that are not included in the discrimination pattern effect. This has the effect of preventing a decrease in the player's motivation to play and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine AF2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF1, there is a pre-determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification pattern performance execution means changes the state of the identification pattern based on the determination result by the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AF1, the gaming machine AF2 can vary the appearance of the identification pattern based on the results of the pre-determination means, making it possible to make the player interested in the results of the identification pattern presentation. This has the effect of increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AF3, which is characterized in that in the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol effect execution means changes the appearance of the two or more identification symbols based on the establishment of a predetermined condition by operating the operating means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AF1 and AF2, gaming machine AF3 can change the appearance of two or more identification symbols based on the operation of the operating means, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to participate in the performance being executed.

A gaming machine AF4, which is any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, is characterized in that the identification pattern effect execution means executes the identification pattern effect across a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and has a restriction period setting means for setting a restriction period during which operation of the operation means is not valid during the period during which the identification pattern effect is being executed.

According to gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AF1 to AF3, an identification pattern presentation is executed across the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and further, a restricted period is set during which operations on the operating means are not determined to be valid during the execution period of the identification pattern presentation. This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy the timing of operating the operating means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine AF5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AF4, during the period during which the identification pattern effect is being executed, a specific effect is executed during the period other than the restricted period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AF4, gaming machine AF5 has the effect of being able to execute a specific effect, which allows the player to easily determine whether or not the player is currently in a restricted period during which operation of the operating means is not valid during the identification pattern effect, thereby executing an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

<Feature AG group> (Small win leads to probability change)
a ball-entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the ball-entry means; a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball-entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state; an acquisition means for acquiring information based on the game ball having entered the ball-entry means; a determination means for making a determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; a display means for displaying identification information showing a determination result made by the determination means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific determination result of the display means is displayed; and a probability setting means for setting a first probability and a second probability higher than the first probability as a determination probability of the specific determination result being determined. a setting means for setting, as game states, a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than in the normal game state, the probability setting means sets the first probability when a first transition condition is established when the second probability is set, and the setting means sets the normal game state when a second transition condition is established when the specific game state is set, the gaming machine AG1 being characterized in having a presentation mode setting means for setting different presentation modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, and a presentation execution means for executing a presentation based on the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means.

In the past, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery results in a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Some of these machines are capable of setting a high probability state in which it is easy to win a win and a low probability state in which it is difficult to win a win as a gaming state, and execute a lottery (a so-called drop lottery) to transition the gaming state to the low probability state when the high probability state is set. Furthermore, some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are configured to be capable of setting a specific gaming state in which a lottery for winning or failure is easily executed, and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to execute. (For example, JP 2010-269007 A). However, in the above gaming machine, there is no relationship between the timing of transition from a high probability state to a low probability state and the timing of transition from a specific gaming state to a normal gaming state, making it difficult for players to understand the transition status of each gaming state, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game. The objective is to provide a game that improves the interest of the game in the above gaming machine.

According to gaming machine AG1, different presentation modes are executed based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are met, making it possible to predict the current game situation based on the content of the presentation being executed, which has the effect of increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine AG2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AG1, the discrimination means is capable of discriminating the special discrimination result that is different from the specific discrimination result, and the second transition condition is established based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the special discrimination result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AG1, gaming machine AG2 has a second transition condition based on the result of the determination by the determination means, making it possible to provide cases where the determination by the determination means results in a result that is more favorable to the player and cases where the determination results in a result that is unfavorable to the player. This has the effect of making the player interested in the result of the determination by the determination means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine AG3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AG2, a counting means is provided that can count the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result when the specific gaming state is set, and the second transition condition is established when the result of the counting by the counting means becomes a predetermined counting result.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AG2, gaming machine AG3 has the effect that the second transition condition is met when the number of times the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number of times, and therefore by discerning that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes a special discrimination result, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting the period until the second transition condition is met, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

A gaming machine AG4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the presentation mode setting means sets the presentation mode based on the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means and the game state set by the setting means.

According to gaming machine AG4, in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the presentation mode is set based on the set discrimination probability and the game state, so that it is possible to provide the fun of predicting the current game situation based on the presentation that is executed, and this has the effect of increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine AG4, the presentation mode setting means is characterized in that it sets the same presentation mode in a first gaming state in which the first probability is set by the probability setting means and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means, and in a second gaming state in which the second probability is set by the probability setting means and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means. Gaming machine AG5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AG4, gaming machine AG5 sets the same presentation mode for a first gaming state in which a first probability is set and a normal gaming state is set, and a second gaming state in which a second probability is set and a normal gaming state is set, making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. This has the effect of providing the player with the fun of predicting the current gaming situation and increasing the interest of the game.

A gaming machine AC6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AG5, it has a judgment means capable of making a judgment when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, the judgment means makes the judgment when a judgment condition for the judgment means to make the judgment is established, and the first transition condition is established when the judgment result of the judgment means is a specific judgment result.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG5, the gaming machine AC6 can have the determination means execute a determination when the determination condition is met, which makes it possible to prevent the determination means from executing excessive determinations when the second probability is set. This has the effect of providing the player with a fair game.

A gaming machine AC7, in which the presentation mode setting means in the gaming machine AG5 or AG6 is configured to set a suggestive presentation mode for suggesting the discrimination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means.

According to gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects of gaming machine AG5 or AG6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after a bonus has been granted by the bonus granting means, a suggested presentation mode is set, so that when the first gaming state or the second gaming state is set, the player can be made to understand the current gaming state based on the contents of the suggested presentation mode. This has the effect of making it easier for the player to continue playing until the predetermined period has elapsed, thereby improving gaming operation.

<Feature AH Group> (Combined control development of reserved PUSH and PUSH notice)
a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the identification by the identification means; a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information; and an identification pattern display means for causing the display means to display an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means;

In the past, when a game ball enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Some gaming machines are capable of executing an operation effect to make the player operate the operating means as a suggestive effect to suggest the lottery result before the lottery result is announced, allowing the player to enjoy the period until the lottery result is announced. (For example, JP 2013-090780 A). In addition, some gaming machines having the above-mentioned configuration have multiple conditions for executing the operation effect to further enhance the presentation effect. In this case, there is a problem that multiple operation effects are executed at the same time, resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is reduced. The object is to provide a game that improves the interest of the game in the above-mentioned gaming machine.

According to gaming machine AH1, when the operation effect and the identification pattern effect are executed during a period in which they overlap, a specific effect is executed, so that it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand even when the operation effect and the identification pattern effect overlap. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of the effect and increasing the interest of the game.

A game machine AH1 has a setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification pattern effect that is to be changed when the operation means is operated during the overlapping period, and the specific effect includes a suggestion mode that indicates the operation effect or the identification pattern effect that is to be changed by operating the operation means. AH2.

According to gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player the effects that will be changed when the operating means is operated through the effect-specific effects provided by gaming machine AH, which has the effect of providing a gaming machine that can execute effects that are easy for the player to understand.

A gaming machine AH3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, during the overlapping period, the number of operations for varying the operation presentation or the identification pattern presentation is set to be different based on the operation of the operating means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AA1 and AA2, gaming machine AH3 makes it possible to vary the number of operations that are changed depending on whether an operation effect or a variable operation effect is performed alone or in combination. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of a specific effect.

A gaming machine AH4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation presentation and the identification pattern presentation are executed during an overlapping period, the gaming machine AH4 has a switching setting means for setting at least one of them to be variable by operating the operation means multiple times.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines AH1 to AH3, gaming machine AH4 can increase the number of operations corresponding to at least one of the operation effects when the operation effect and the identification pattern effect are executed during an overlapping period, making it easy to understand that a specific effect is being executed. This has the effect of preventing the specific effect from ending in a short period of time and resulting in an effect that is difficult for the player to understand being executed.

A gaming machine AH5 is characterized in that the specific effects in the gaming machine AH4 include effects in which the execution period of the operation effect mode after being changed is set to be longer than normal.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AH4, gaming machine AH5 has the effect of enhancing the presentation effect because the execution period of the operation presentation mode is set longer than normal during the specific presentation, making it possible to clearly notify the player that a specific presentation is being executed.

<Feature AI Group> (Pending Notice Development)
a display means for displaying identification information showing a result of the identification by the identification means; a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information; and an identification pattern display means for causing the display means to display an identification pattern corresponding to the information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine AI1 is characterized in having an operation means operable by a player, an operation performance execution means for executing an operation performance in which a performance mode is changed by the operation of the operation means, an identification pattern performance execution means for executing an identification pattern performance in which the performance mode of the identification pattern displayed by the operation of the operation means can be changed, and a performance mode changing means for changing the performance mode of the identification pattern performance being executed by the identification pattern performance execution means when a predetermined change condition is satisfied during a period in which the identification pattern performance is being executed.

Conventionally, some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, display a variable pattern based on the entry of a game ball into a start winning hole, and notify the player of the result of the lottery after the variable display has ended. Furthermore, some machines are configured to be able to hold and store the lottery to be executed multiple times based on the entry of a game ball into a start winning hole, display the reserved pattern corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and are configured to be able to execute a reserved notice performance that can notify information about the corresponding lottery in advance using the displayed reserved pattern (for example, JP 2009-297071 A). In the above gaming machine, the color and shape of the reserved pattern are changed, and the variable display corresponding to the reserved pattern suggests the expectation of a jackpot, making it possible to increase the player's sense of expectation before the variable display begins. However, since the content of the reserved notice performance cannot be adapted to the change in the game situation after the occurrence of the reserved notice performance, it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of expectation for the content of the reserved notice performance, which reduces the player's motivation to play. The purpose of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the gaming machine AI1, if a change condition is met while a discrimination pattern presentation is being executed, the presentation mode of the discrimination pattern presentation being executed can be changed, thereby enhancing the presentation effect of the discrimination pattern presentation. This has the effect of preventing a decline in motivation to play and increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine AI2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AI1, the change condition is established based on new information being stored in the storage means during the period in which the identification pattern presentation is being executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine AI2 can change the presentation mode of the identification pattern presentation based on the storage of new information in the storage means, so that even during the execution of the identification pattern presentation, the player can be motivated to play in order to store new information in the storage means, thereby improving game operation.

A gaming machine AI3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AI2, there is a pre-determination means capable of executing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification pattern performance execution means changes the appearance of the identification pattern based on the determination result by the pre-determination means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI2, the gaming machine AI3 changes the appearance of the identification pattern based on the results of the determination by the advance determination means, which has the effect of making the identification pattern presentation interesting and enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine AI4 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AI3, the presentation mode changing means changes the presentation mode based on the result of the determination made by the advance determination means with respect to the information that triggers the establishment of the change condition.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI3, the gaming machine AI4 makes it possible to vary the presentation mode of the identification pattern presentation based on the results of the advance judgment of the newly stored information, so that a wider range of identification patterns can be targeted for presentation than the range of identification patterns indicated by the identification pattern presentation at the time of execution. This has the effect of making it easier for players to have expectations for the identification pattern presentation, and increasing the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect execution means executes the identification symbol effect over a period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and the gaming machine AI5 is characterized in having a restriction period setting means for setting a restriction period during which operation of the operation means is not valid during the period during which the identification symbol effect is being executed.

According to gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines AI1 to AI4, an identification pattern presentation is executed across the period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed multiple times, and further, a restricted period is set during which operations on the operating means are not determined to be valid during the execution period of the identification pattern presentation. This has the effect of allowing the player to enjoy the timing of operating the operating means, thereby increasing the enjoyment of the game.

A gaming machine AI6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AI5, during the period during which the identification pattern presentation is being performed, a specific presentation is performed during the period other than the restricted period.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AI5, gaming machine AI6 has the effect of being able to execute a specific effect, which allows the player to easily determine whether or not the player is currently in a restricted period during which operation of the operating means is not valid during the identification pattern effect, thereby executing an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

<Feature AJ Group> (Button tap sound control)
A gaming machine AJ1 has an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an effect execution means that changes the effect based on the operation of the operation means, the gaming machine having: a sound control means that is capable of outputting at least a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound as operation sounds each time the operation means is operated; a sound setting means that is capable of setting the type of the operation sound output by the sound control means; and a sound discrimination means that is capable of discriminating the type of the operation sound output by the sound control means, wherein the sound setting means sets the type of the operation sound based on the discrimination result of the sound discrimination means.

In the past, when a game ball enters a starting hole on the game board, a lottery is held to see whether the game will be a success or failure, and if the lottery result is a success, a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Some gaming machines can execute an operation effect to make the player operate the operation means as a suggestion effect to suggest the lottery result before the lottery result is announced, allowing the player to enjoy the period until the lottery result is announced (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). In addition, some of the above gaming machines output an operation sound when the player operates the operation means to notify the player that the operation has been correctly accepted. In such gaming machines, the player can easily determine whether or not the operation means has been operated by the output operation sound, but there is a problem that if the next operation is executed during the period until the output of one operation sound is completed, that is, if a continuous operation is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. Also, there is a problem that if only one operation sound is output, the game becomes monotonous. The objective of the game machine described above is to provide a game that enhances the interest of the game by making the output operation sound easier for the player to hear and outputting a wide variety of operation sounds.

With gaming machine AJ1, it is possible to set a new type of operation sound based on the type of operation sound that is actually being output, which has the effect of outputting operation sounds that are easy for the player to understand, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine AJ2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine AJ1, the sound setting means sets the type of the operation sound different from the type of the operation sound determined by the sound determination means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ1, gaming machine AJ2 makes it possible to set a type of operation sound different from the type of operation sound that is actually output, so that by outputting a variety of operation sounds, it is possible to execute a wide variety of effects, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Gaming machine AJ3 is characterized in that in gaming machine AJ1 or AJ2, the sound setting means sets the first operation sound when the sound discrimination means determines that the operation sound is not being output.

According to gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effects provided by gaming machine AJ1 or AJ2, if no operation sound is being output, a first operation sound is set by the sound setting means. This has the effect of enabling the operation sound to be output with a predetermined regularity in response to the operation of the operation means, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

A gaming machine AJ4 is characterized in that it has an operation status determination means capable of determining the interval between the operations performed on the operation means in any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, and the sound setting means is capable of setting the first operation sound and a third operation sound different from the second operation sound when the determination result of the operation status determination means becomes a specific situation determination result.

In addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the gaming machine AJ4 can set a third operation sound based on the result of the determination by the operation status determination means, so that the player can be provided with the enjoyment of operating the operation means. This has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game.

A gaming machine AJ4, the operation status determination means is characterized in that it determines that the specific status determination result is obtained when the interval between the operations performed on the operation means is shorter than a predetermined period. A gaming machine AJ5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ4, gaming machine AJ5 has the effect of further increasing the player's motivation to participate in the game by outputting a third operation sound when the interval between operations performed on the operating means is shorter than a predetermined period.

A gaming machine AJ6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, the performance execution means executes the performance for a predetermined performance period, the gaming machine AJ6 has a pseudo-sound setting means capable of setting a pseudo-sound after the performance period has elapsed based on the discrimination result of the sound discrimination means at the time when the performance period has elapsed, and the sound control means is capable of outputting the pseudo-sound set by the pseudo-sound setting means.

According to gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, pseudo sound can be output based on the type of operation sound output when the presentation period has elapsed, so that no matter what type of operation sound is being output at the end of the presentation period, sound output control can be terminated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

A gaming machine AJ7 is characterized in that in the gaming machine AJ6, the pseudo sound setting means sets a pseudo sound corresponding to the second operation sound when the sound discrimination means discriminates a type of the operation sound different from the second operation sound.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine AJ6, gaming machine AJ7 outputs a sound corresponding to the second operation sound by a pseudo sound when the type of operation sound output when the presentation period has elapsed is other than the second operation sound, so that the ending sound output by the sound control means can be unified. This has the effect of providing a presentation that does not give the player a sense of incongruity.

A gaming machine AJ7, which has a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination when a discrimination condition is established, a display means for displaying identification information showing the discrimination result by the discrimination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means for a predetermined period of time, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus based on the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means being statically displayed in a specific display mode showing that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, the performance period is set during the dynamic display period during which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display, and the pseudo sound setting means makes it easier to set the pseudo sound when the identification information dynamically displayed while the performance is being executed is statically displayed in the specific display mode than when it is not statically displayed in the specific display mode.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine AJ7, gaming machine AJ8 has the effect of making it easier for pseudo sound to be output in the performance executed during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result, thereby making it possible to make the player interested in the ending content of the sound output by the sound control means.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes a control handle, which is operated to launch a ball into a predetermined gaming area, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display device is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area. Also, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the ball to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) according to the number of winning balls is awarded.

Among the gaming machines described above, gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, and equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the necessary condition being that the definitive identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the gaming medium include coins, medals, etc.

Among the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fusion gaming machine is "a gaming machine having a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the definitive identification information at the time of the stop being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, using balls as a gaming medium, requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."
＜Other＞
Conventionally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, when a gaming ball enters a starting hole provided on the gaming board, a lottery is drawn to see whether the game will be a win or not, and if the lottery result is a win, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Also, a game state in which a high probability state in which it is easy to win a win and a low probability state in which it is difficult to win a win can be set, and when the high probability state is set, a lottery (so-called falling lottery) is executed to shift the gaming state to the low probability state (for example, Patent Document 1: JP 2010-269007 A).
However, there was a problem in that it reduced the interest of the game.
This technical idea has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a game that improves the entertainment value of the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of technical idea 1 comprises: an entry means through which a gaming ball can enter; a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which the gaming ball can enter the entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult for the ball to enter than the first state; an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entry means; a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means; a display means for displaying identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means; a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means; a bonus granting means for granting a bonus advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result of the display means is displayed; a first probability as a discrimination probability of discriminating the specific discrimination result; the probability setting means is configured to set a second probability higher than the first probability, and a setting means is configured to set, as game states, a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than in the normal game state, the probability setting means sets the first probability when a first transition condition is established in a state in which the second probability is set, and the setting means sets the normal game state when a second transition condition is established in a state in which the specific game state is set, and the game state has a presentation mode setting means for setting different presentation modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, and a presentation execution means for executing a presentation based on the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means.
A gaming machine of technical idea 2 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 1, in which the discrimination means is capable of discriminating a special discrimination result that is different from the specific discrimination result, and the second transition condition is established based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means being the special discrimination result.
A gaming machine of technical idea 3 is a gaming machine described in technical idea 2, which has a counting means capable of counting the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result when the specific gaming state is set, and the second transition condition is established when the result of the counting by the counting means becomes a predetermined counting result.
＜Effects＞
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, there is provided a ball entry means through which a gaming ball can enter, a variable member capable of changing between a first state in which the gaming ball can enter the ball entry means and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the entry of a gaming ball into the ball entry means, a discrimination means capable of making a discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, a display means for displaying identification information showing a discrimination result by the discrimination means, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, a benefit granting means for granting a benefit advantageous to a player when the identification information showing a specific discrimination result of the display means is displayed, a first probability as a discrimination probability of discriminating the specific discrimination result, and a second probability higher than the first probability. the probability setting means is configured to set a first probability that the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than the normal game state, and a setting means is configured to set, as game states, a normal game state and a specific game state in which the variable member is more likely to be changed from the second state to the first state than the normal game state, the probability setting means sets the first probability when a first transition condition is established in a state in which the second probability is set, and the setting means sets the normal game state when a second transition condition is established in a state in which the specific game state is set, and the game state has a presentation mode setting means for setting different presentation modes based on the order in which the first transition condition and the second transition condition are established, and a presentation execution means for executing a presentation based on the presentation mode set by the presentation mode setting means.
This has the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.
The gaming machine described in Technical Concept 2 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 1. That is, the discrimination means is capable of discriminating a special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, and the second transition condition is established on the basis that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the special discrimination result.
Therefore, by the second transition condition being established as a result of the special determination result being determined, it is possible to make the player interested in the special determination result, thereby achieving the effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.
The gaming machine described in Technical Concept 3 achieves the following effect in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Concept 2. That is, the gaming machine has a counting means capable of counting the number of times that the discrimination result of the discrimination means becomes the special discrimination result when the specific game state is set, and the second transition condition is established when the counting result by the counting means becomes a predetermined counting result.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the number of times the special determination result is determined, and there is an effect of increasing the enjoyment of the game.

10 Pachinko machines (amusement machines)

Claims (1)

A launching means capable of launching a game ball into a game area;
A first ball entry means through which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter the ball;
An acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information when a predetermined condition that can be satisfied based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
a determination means for determining whether a game has been completed based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied,
a means for generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determining means being a specific determination result;
A second ball entry means, which is different from the first ball entry means, and which allows the game balls launched by the launching means to enter the ball entry means;
a displacement means capable of displacing between a first position where it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a second position where it is more difficult to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means than the first position;
a displacement control means capable of at least executing a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the second position to the first position, and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means located at the first position to the second position;
the displacement control means is configured to execute the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation in which the displacement means is located at the first position by the first displacement control;
The gaming machine includes:
When a gaming ball enters at least the first ball entry means, a predetermined value is awarded to a player,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be capable of generating at least a first mode based on the judgment being executed by the judgment means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means.

Images